EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual

Release 2019.2

Document Revision 8

© 2003-2019 Mentor Graphics Corporation

All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function (see MG595892).
Use HTML for full navigation.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.

The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.

MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: mentor.com/trademarks.

The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

End-User License Agreement: You can print a copy of the End-User License Agreement from:
mentor.com/eula.

Mentor Graphics Corporation

8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: mentor.com
Support Center: support.mentor.com

Send Feedback on Documentation: support.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

 Revision History ISO-26262

Revision Changes Status/Date

8 Modifications to improve the readability and comprehension of Released
the content. Approved by Jonathan Kirkham. April 2019
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the AMS
Release Notes for this product are reflected in this document.
Approved by Jean-Marc Talbot.
7 Modifications to improve the readability and comprehension of Released
the content. Approved by Jonathan Kirkham. February
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the AMS 2019
Release Notes for this product are reflected in this document.
Approved by Jean-Marc Talbot.
6 Modifications to improve the readability and comprehension of Released
the content. Approved by Jonathan Kirkham. December
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the AMS 2018
Release Notes for this product are reflected in this document.
Approved by Jean-Marc Talbot.
5 Modifications to improve the readability and comprehension of Released
the content. Approved by Jonathan Kirkham. September
All technical enhancements, changes, and fixes listed in the AMS 2018
Release Notes for this product are reflected in this document.
Approved by Jean-Marc Talbot.

Author: In-house procedures and working practices require multiple authors for documents. All
associated authors for each topic within this document are tracked within the Mentor Graphics
Technical Publication’s source. For specific topic authors, contact Mentor Graphics Technical
Publication department.

Revision History: Released documents maintain a revision history of up to four revisions. For
earlier revision history, refer to earlier releases of documentation which are available on http://
support.mentor.com.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
4 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Table of Contents

Revision History ISO-26262

Chapter 1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
EZwave Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
EZwave Process Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Joint Waveform Database (JWDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Invoking EZwave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Supported File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Visual Tour of EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 2
Setting Up EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing Default Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
EZwave Format Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring Waveform Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
EZwave Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing Waveform Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Chapter 3
EZwave GUI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
EZwave Viewer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cursor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Waveform List Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating a New Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Graph Window Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 5

 Table of Contents

Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Waveform Names Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Graph Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Workspace Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Application Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Graph Window Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Graph Window Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Row Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Waveform Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Axis Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Cursor Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vertical Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cursor Value Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Waveform List Panel Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Waveform List Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Database Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Folder Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Hierarchy Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Waveform Name Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Workspace Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keyboard and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mouse Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Waveform Calculator GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 4
Add Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Waveform Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Starting EZwave and Loading a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Single Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Plotting a Single Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Moving a Plotted Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Copying a Plotted Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Multiple Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Plotting Multiple Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Managing Database Groups for Tandem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Plotting the Difference Between Two Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Creating an XY Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Managing Waveform Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Grouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding a Waveform to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a Waveform from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating an Empty Waveform Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ungrouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Modifying Axis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Aligning Y-Axes with Different Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Creating Multiple Y-Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Y-Axis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Modifying Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Hiding Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Unhiding Hidden Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Modifying Waveform Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modifying the Appearance of Row Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specialized Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Plotting Complex-Valued Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Plotting wreal Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Plotting Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Displaying Bus Values as a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Plotting Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Plotting Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Plotting CDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displaying Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform Using an Index File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Digital Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Index File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Updating Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configuring Automatic Reloading of Waveform Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manually Updating Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Waveform Update Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Updating Waveforms with Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Chapter 5
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Working with Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Adding the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adding Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adding Relative Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adding a Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Copying Horizontal Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Moving Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Moving Cursor Value Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for a Single Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for All Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Showing Cursor Values for Selected Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting Default Cursor Value Visibility when Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sharing Cursor Value Visibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setting Cursor Value Visibility in the Cursor Values Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 7

 Table of Contents

Displaying Cursor Values in the Reserved Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Working with Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Adding Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Choosing How Delta-Y is Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using the Cursor Value Table with Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing the Visibility of Graph Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using Pick Points to take Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Taking Measurements with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Using Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Adding Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Global Display Options for Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using the Event Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing an Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing an Expression Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Working with Eye Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Creating an Eye Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Adding Additional Waveforms to Eye Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Editing an Eye Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
NRZ (PAM2) Cross Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
C-Phy Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Working with Smith Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Scattering Parameters (S-Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Creating a Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Impedance and Admittance Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Smith Chart and Polar Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cursors in the Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Circles in the Smith Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Changing the Visibility of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Comparing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Support for Different Types of Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Manually Comparing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Starting a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Selecting Waveforms for Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Running a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Stepping Through Differences With a Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Displaying the Tolerance Tube for Analog Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Waveform Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Generating a Waveform Comparison Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Digital to Digital Comparison Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Analog to Analog Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spectral Comparison Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Viewing and Saving Comparison Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Saving a Comparison Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Setting Comparison Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

8 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Setting General Comparison Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Setting Comparison Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting Tolerance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Setting Conversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
wreal Waveform Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Analyzing Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Analyzing Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Chapter 6
Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Working with a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Creating a Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing Bus Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transforming Analog Waveforms to Digital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transforming Digital Waveforms to Analog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Bus and Bit Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bus Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bit Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Taking a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DC Hysteresis Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Eye Diagram Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Frequency Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Bandpass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Gain Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Phase Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
General Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Average. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Y Level Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Local Max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Local Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Peak to Peak Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Slope Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
YVal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Statistical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Time Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Falltime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 9

 Table of Contents

Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Risetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Settle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Slew Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Undershoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Waveform Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Using Expressions in the Waveform Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Waveform Calculator Shell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Using Built-In Functions in the Waveform Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Methods For Entering Measurement Tool Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Available Measurement Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
The option and param Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Choosing the Occurrence of the Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Built-In Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Complex Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Jitter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Phase Noise Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
RF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Signal Processing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Statistical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Calculator Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Complex Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jitter Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Logical Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Phase Noise Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
RF Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Signal Processing Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Statistical Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Trigonometric Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Jitter Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Using the Jitter Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Jitter Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Absolute Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Period Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Half-Period Jitter (Time Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Frequency Jitter (Time Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Long-Term Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

10 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Time Interval Error (TIE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Jitter Confidence Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Absolute Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Period Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Long-Term Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using the Extract Outputs from Database Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Signal Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Spectrum Measurement Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Correlogram Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Periodogram Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Convolution Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Harmonic Distortion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Signal to Noise Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Window Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Windowing Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Chapter 7
Save and Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Saving and Restoring Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Saving Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Restoring Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Printing Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Exporting Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Exporting Graph Windows as a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Using a Different PDF Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Exporting Graph Windows as an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Saving a Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving a Single Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving Post-Processed Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Save File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Saving Multiple Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Recovering Database Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Recovering from Incomplete Simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Recovering Incomplete Savefiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Outputting a JWDB as an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Saving a JWDB as an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Chapter 8
Dialog Box and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Add Clock Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Annotation Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Axis Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 11

 Table of Contents

Comparison Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Comparison Methods Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tolerances Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Conversions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Create Bus Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Current Analysis Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Data Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Digital to Analog Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Event Search Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Eye Mask Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
EZwave Display Preference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Automatic Reload Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Cursor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Data Format Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Foreign Databases Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Grid Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Look and Feel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Mouse Pointer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Multiple Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Pick Points Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
RF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Row Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Save Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Save Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Text Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Transformation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Waveform Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Waveform Compare Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Waveform List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Workspace Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
CDF Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
CDF Measures Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
CDF Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Axis Title Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Axis Values Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Calculator Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Cursor/Marker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Eye Mask Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

12 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Header Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Histogram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Measurement Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Row Title Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Waveform Colors Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Waveform Name Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Waveform Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Window Background Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Zero-Level Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Histogram Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Histogram Measures Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Histogram Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Waveform Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Waveform Calculator General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Waveform Calculator View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Filter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Find Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Jitter Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Measurement Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Parameter Analyzer Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Filters Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Parameter Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Pick Points Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Power Analysis Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Save As Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Save Windows Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Select Hierarchy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Select Waveforms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Update Waveforms Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Waveform Names Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital Waveforms). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Waveform Calculator Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Auto Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Chirp Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Constellation Diagram Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Convolution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Cross Correlation Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Eye Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Histogram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 13

 Table of Contents

Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Phase Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
PSS Residue Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Top Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Windowing Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Appendix A
Eldo Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Run Eldo With EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Complete Eldo Simulation and View Simulation Data Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Manual Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Marching Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Joint Waveform Database Read API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
AMS Results Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Appendix B
Waveform Calculator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
abs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
absolutejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
absolutejitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
acos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
acosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
acot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
acoth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
add. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
allandeviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
asin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
asinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
atan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
atan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
atanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
atod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
autocor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
avg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
calcvartype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
cdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
ceil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
chirp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
complex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

14 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
conjugate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
constellationdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
cot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
coth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
cphase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
cphytrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
crosscorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
cycle2cyclejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
cycletocyclejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
cycletocyclejitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
datatodig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
datatowf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
dchysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
db . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
db10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
deg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
derive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
drv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
dtoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
dtoaonbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
dutycycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
enob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
evmber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
exp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
eyeamplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
eyecphy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
eyecrossingamplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
eyedelay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
eyediagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
eyefalltime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
eyeheight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
eyeheightatx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
eyejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
eyemeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
eyerisetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
eyesetmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
eyesnr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
eyewidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
eyewidthaty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
eyewithtrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
falltime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 15

 Table of Contents

fft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
firstdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
fmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
frequencyjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
frexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
gaussiandistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
gendecade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
genlinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
genoctave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
getelementat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
gmargin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
gptocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
halfperiodjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
harmonicdistortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
harmonicsmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
hdist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
hypot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
idb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
idb10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
ifft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
iipx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
imag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
integ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
ldexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
lesser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
localmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
localmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
longtermjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
maxdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
maxspectrumdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
modf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
mptocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
nand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
noisetosignaldbc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
noisetrantophasenoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

16 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

nor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
oipx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
periodjitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
periodjitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
phasenoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
phnoisebydlm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
phnoisebymixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
phmargin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
plotjitterconfidenceinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
pow10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
psd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
pssresidue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
pulsewidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
rad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
reglin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
removepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
risetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
ritocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
rms_ac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
rms_accurate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
rms_noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
rms_tran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
ror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
samplelog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
samplepsd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
setAngleUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
setNotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
setTemperatureUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
settlingtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
sfdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
shiftedmaxdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
sinad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
sla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
slewrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
slopeintersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 17

 Table of Contents

sndr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
snr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
sorty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
spectrummeasurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
sphibyjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
sphifilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
sqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
sra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
stddev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
thd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
tiejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
timeabsolutejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
timelongtermjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
timeperiodjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
timestep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
todchysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
topline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
topnoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
trunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
var . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
wf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
wftoascii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
wftodata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
windavg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
xcompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
xdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
xnor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
xofmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
xofmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
xup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
xval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
xwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
xytowf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
yval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Appendix C
Tcl Scripting Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Tcl Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Tcl Scripting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Tcl Command Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
If Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Set Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

18 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Command Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Variable Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Passing Tcl Parameters from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Tcl List Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Supported Tcl Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Conventions Used in the Tcl Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Tcl Command Short Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
add wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
add workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
batch_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
bloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
compare add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
compare clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
compare configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
compare end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
compare info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
compare list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
compare options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
compare run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
compare savelog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
compare saverules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
compare start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
dataset alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
dataset analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
dataset clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
dataset close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
dataset extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
dataset info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
dataset list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
dataset merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
dataset mergewaveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
dataset open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
dataset ovd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
dataset power analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
dataset rename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
dataset save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
dataset savescalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
dataset savewaveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
dataset scalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
dataset supported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
dataset topnoise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
delete wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
dofile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
evalExpression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
examine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 19

 Table of Contents

exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
find analogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
find currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
find digitals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
find nets | signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
getactivecursortime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
printenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
radix define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
radix delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
radix list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
radix names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
radix signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
setenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
unsetenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
wave activecursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
wave activewindow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
wave activeworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
wave addannotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
wave addaxisdeltamarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
wave addcursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
wave adddeltamarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
wave addline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
wave addmarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
wave addproperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
wave addwindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
wave addworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
wave cdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
wave clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
wave closewindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
wave colortheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
wave createbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
wave cursortime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
wave deletecursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
wave difference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
wave displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
wave exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
wave ezwave_title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
wave gettype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
wave histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
wave jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
wave launchfolder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
wave listworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
wave loadbindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
wave lockcursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
wave names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

20 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

wave plotcompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

wave plotpacipn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
wave refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
wave rowfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
wave runindexlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
wave runparameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
wave runparametervalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
wave show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
wave showgridlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
wave showzerolevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
wave tandem mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
wave tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
wave windowlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
wave xaxis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
wave yaxis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
wave zoomfull. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
wave zoomin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
wave zoomlast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
wave zoomout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
wave zoomrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
wfc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
write jpeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
write png . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
write wave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
External Tcl Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Tcl Scripting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Additional User-Defined Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Opening a Database File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Setting Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Taking Waveform Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
ASCII File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Compare All Waveforms With Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Compare All Terminal Waveforms From Transient Analysis With Default Options . . . 1144
Compare All Waveforms Using a Clocked Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Specific Waveforms With Modified Tolerances, Write a Report . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Waveforms Using All Available Comparison Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Reference Waveforms During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Some Result Waveforms (Not All) During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Compare Waveforms Using the -label Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Compare Waveforms Using the -start and -end Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Export a Report of Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Using find Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
adc_sndr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
adc_sndr_parallel4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
clock_jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 21

 Table of Contents

pll_jitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
pll_jitter_parallel4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
pll_phasenoise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
pll_phasenoise_parallel4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
PlotCompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
PlotPacIPn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

Appendix D
Supported Net Representation Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Representing the Signal as a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
Extended Options for Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
discipline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
physic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Examples of wave show and -show usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

Appendix E
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Known Problems and Workarounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Linux Printing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Resolving Linux Printing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using LPRNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using CUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Troubleshooting Memory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Configuring Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Resolving Incorrect Estimate the Disk Space Needed to Save A Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Resolving Why the Simulator Fails to Start EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Increasing the Memory Stack Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Troubleshooting EZwave Launch Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Failure to Load EZwave Dynamic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Failure to Launch EZwave in Questa ADMS GUI Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Displaying Results Between Different AMS Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Troubleshooting Display Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Troubleshooting Logfiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Logfile Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
System Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Contacting the Customer Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
Training Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196

22 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Table of Contents

Glossary
Index
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 23

 Table of Contents

24 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

 List of Figures

Figure 1-1. EZwave Viewer Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Figure 1-2. Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 3-1. EZwave Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 3-2. Waveform List Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 3-3. Database Sort Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 3-4. Waveform List Panel Showing Measures Sorted by Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 3-5. Waveform List Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 3-6. EZwave Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 3-7. Workspace Tabs and Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 3-8. Workspace Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 3-9. Popup Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 3-10. X and Y-Axis Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 3-11. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 3-12. Folder Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 3-13. Hierarchy Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 3-14. Waveform Name Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 3-15. Selected Waveforms Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 3-16. Waveform Calculator with Button and Function Help Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 4-1. Expanded Waveform Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 4-2. Overlaid Waveforms With Different Y-Axes Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 4-3. Realigned Y-Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 4-4. Step Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 4-5. Railroad Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 4-6. Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 4-7. Bus Display with Value Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 4-8. Graph Window With a VHDL-AMS Assertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 4-9. Graph Window With an SOA Assertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 4-10. Example CDF Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 4-11. Expanded Compound Waveform Names With Run Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 4-12. Compound Waveforms as Single Elements With Run Parameters . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 4-13. Multiple Overlaid Waveforms Following a Waveform Update . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 5-1. The Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 5-2. Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 5-3. Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 5-4. Show/Hide Crossing Points in the Data Values Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 5-5. EZwave Display Preferences - Horizontal Cursor in Y-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 5-6. Cursor Values Displayed in the Reserved Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 5-7. Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 5-8. Waveform-Based Delta Ys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 5-9. Cursor-Based Delta Ys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 25

 List of Figures

Figure 5-10. Cursor Value Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Figure 5-11. Adding Deltas From the Pick Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 5-12. Add Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 5-13. Text Annotation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 5-14. Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 5-15. Rising Edge Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 5-16. C-Phy Eye Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 5-17. NRZ Eye Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 5-18. PAM4 Eye Diagram Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 5-19. Measurement Results Dialog Box - PAM4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 5-20. Left and Right Crossing Points and Vertical Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 5-21. PAM4 Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 5-22. PAM4 Eye Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 5-23. PAM4 Eye Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 5-24. PAM4 Height and Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 5-25. PAM 4 Eye Linearity and RLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 5-26. Differential Lines and Zero Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 5-27. Differential Lines, Zero Level, and Trigger (Rising Edges). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 5-28. Differential Lines, UI jitter and Transition Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 5-29. C-Phy Eye Diagram with Eye Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 5-30. C-Phy Eye Diagram and Triggered Eyes with Other Alignments . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 5-31. Smith Chart Impedance Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 5-32. Smith Chart Admittance Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 5-33. Smith Chart Impedance and Admittance Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 5-34. Smith Chart with Negative Real Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 5-35. Polar Chart Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 5-36. Cursor in a Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 5-37. Setting Data Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 5-38. Multiple-Circle Plot and Circle Visibility Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 5-39. Circle Visibility Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 5-40. Highlighted Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 5-41. The Waveform Compare Wizard Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 5-42. Waveform Comparison Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 5-43. Waveform Comparison Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 5-44. Stepping Through Waveform Differences With a Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 5-45. Display Tolerance Tube Menu Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 5-46. Graph Window Showing Tolerance Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 5-47. Waveform Compare Showing Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 5-48. Calculations on the Reference Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 5-49. Tolerance “Tube” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 5-50. Data Points Outside of the Tolerance Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 5-51. Display of the Tolerance Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 6-1. Bus Transformation Setup Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 6-2. Bit Transformation Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 6-3. DC Hysteresis Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

26 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

List of Figures

Figure 6-4. Hysteresis Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Figure 6-5. Left Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 6-6. Right Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 6-7. Example of Min and Max width (multiple runs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 6-8. Hysteresis Width versus run parameter RVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 6-9. Calculation of the Average Value of a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 6-10. Mean Value of a Waveform Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 6-11. The RMS AC Calculation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 6-12. The RMS Noise Calculation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 6-13. The RMS Tran Calculation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 6-14. Waveform Calculator Functions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 6-15. Create Script Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 6-16. Update UDF Help Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 6-17. Example of the Period Jitter Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 6-18. Example of the Period Jitter Waveform with Applied Statistical Measurements362
Figure 6-19. Example of the Period Jitter Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 6-20. Example of the Long-Term Jitter Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 6-21. Correlogram Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 6-22. Periodogram Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 6-23. Symmetric Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 6-24. Periodic Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 6-25. Available Windowing Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Figure 7-1. Editing the Command: Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 8-1. Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 8-2. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Font and Color Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Figure 8-3. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Appearance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 8-4. Axis Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Figure 8-5. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Figure 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Comparison Methods Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Figure 8-7. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Tolerances Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Figure 8-8. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Conversions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Figure 8-9. Create Bus Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Figure 8-10. Current Analysis Dialog Box - Detailed View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figure 8-11. Data Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Figure 8-12. Digital to Analog Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Figure 8-13. Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Figure 8-14. Event Search Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Figure 8-15. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for C-Phy Eye Type. . . . . . . . . 442
Figure 8-16. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for NRZ Eye Type. . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Types
444
Figure 8-18. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for NRZ . . . . . . . 448
Figure 8-19. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for PAM3 . . . . . . 449
Figure 8-20. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for PAM4 . . . . . . 450
Figure 8-21. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for C-Phy . . . . . . 451

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 27

 List of Figures

Figure 8-22. Eye Mask Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Figure 8-23. Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Figure 8-24. EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Figure 8-25. Filter Dialog Box With List Option Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Figure 8-26. Filter Dialog Box With Condition Option Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 8-27. Find Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 8-28. Jitter Tool Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 8-29. Jitter Tool Dialog Box - Phase Noise Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Figure 8-30. Measurement Tool Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Figure 8-31. Parameter Analyzer Dialog Box - Plot Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Figure 8-32. Parameter Analyzer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Figure 8-33. Filters Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Figure 8-34. Parameter Table Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Figure 8-35. Pick Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Figure 8-36. Power Analysis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Figure 8-37. Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Figure 8-38. Select Hierarchy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Figure 8-39. Select Waveforms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Figure 8-40. Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Figure 8-41. Update Waveforms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Figure 8-42. Waveform Names Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Figure 8-43. Waveform Properties Dialog - Appearance Tab for Analog Waveforms. . . . . 576
Figure 8-44. Waveform Properties Dialog - Appearance Tab for Digital Waveforms . . . . . 580
Figure 8-45. Auto Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Figure 8-46. Chirp Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Figure 8-47. Constellation Diagram Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Figure 8-48. Convolution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Figure 8-49. Cross Correlation Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Figure 8-50. Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Figure 8-51. Eye Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Figure 8-52. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Figure 8-53. Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Figure 8-54. Harmonics Meter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Figure 8-55. Harmonics Meter Waveform Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Figure 8-56. Harmonics Meter Frequency Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Figure 8-57. Harmonics Meter Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Figure 8-58. Histogram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Figure 8-59. Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Figure 8-60. Phase Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Figure 8-61. Power Spectral Density Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Figure 8-62. PSS Residue Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Figure 8-63. Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Figure 8-64. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box- Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Figure 8-65. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab . . . . . . 628
Figure 8-66. Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

28 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

List of Figures

Figure 8-67. Top Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Figure 8-68. Windowing Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Figure B-1. Example of add() and join() Waveform Calculator Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Figure B-2. Example of add() and join() Waveform Calculator Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Figure B-3. Calculation of SamplePSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Figure B-4. Example Output Noise Spectrum Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Figure C-1. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Figure C-2. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Figure C-3. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Figure C-4. Example CDF with Upper and Lower Confidence Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Figure C-5. Example Plot for Left Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Figure C-6. Example CDF Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Figure C-7. Example Plot showing wave histogram Probabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 29

 List of Figures

30 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

 List of Tables

Table 1-1. Supported File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Table 2-1. Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 2-2. EZwave Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 2-3. Fonts and Colors Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 3-1. File Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 3-2. Edit Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 3-3. View Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 3-4. Format Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 3-5. Tools Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 3-6. Cursor Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 3-7. Window Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 3-8. Help Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 3-9. Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 3-10. Waveform List Element Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 3-11. Graph Window Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Table 3-12. Graph Window Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 3-13. Row Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 3-14. Waveform Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 3-15. Axis Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Table 3-16. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 3-17. Horizontal Cursor Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 3-18. Cursor Value Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Table 3-19. Cursor Value Popup Menu Items for Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Table 3-20. Right-Click Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 3-21. Waveform List Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 3-22. Database Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 3-23. Folder Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 3-24. Hierarchy Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 3-25. Waveform Name Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 3-26. Selected Waveforms Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 3-27. Workspace Popup Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 3-28. Frequently Used Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 3-29. Calculator Shell Key Binds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 3-30. Calculator Shell Mouse Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Table 4-1. Graphic Elements for Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 5-1. NRZ Eye Diagram Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Table 5-2. PAM4 Eye Diagram Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 5-3. C-Phy Eye Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Table 6-1. DC Hysteresis Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 6-2. General Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 31

 List of Tables

Table 6-3. Statistical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Table 6-4. Arguments for Setting Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Table 6-5. Built-In Complex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Table 6-6. Built-In Jitter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 6-7. Built-In Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 6-8. Built-In Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 6-9. Built-In Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 6-10. Built-In Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 6-11. Built-In Phase Noise Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Table 6-12. Built-In RF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 6-13. Built-In Signal Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 6-14. Built-In Statistical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Table 6-15. Built-In Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 6-16. Built-In Statistical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Table 6-17. Complex Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 6-18. Jitter Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Table 6-19. Logical Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 6-20. Phase Noise Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Table 6-21. RF Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Table 6-22. Signal Processing Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table 6-23. Statistical Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Table 6-24. Trigonometric Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Table 6-25. Zero Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 6-26. Multiply FFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 6-27. Inverse FFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 8-1. Add Clock Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Table 8-2. Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Table 8-3. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Font and Color Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table 8-4. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Appearance Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Table 8-5. Axis Properties Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Table 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . 417
Table 8-7. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Comparison Methods Tab Contents . . . . . . 420
Table 8-8. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Tolerances Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Table 8-9. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Conversions Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Table 8-10. Create Bus Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Table 8-11. Current Analysis Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Table 8-12. Data Values Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Table 8-13. Digital to Analog Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Table 8-14. Bit Transformation Digital and Analog Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Table 8-15. Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Table 8-16. Event Search Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Table 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Table 8-18. Eye Mask Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Table 8-19. Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Table 8-20. EZwave Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

32 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

List of Tables

Table 8-21. CDF Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Table 8-22. Fonts and Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Table 8-23. Histogram Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Table 8-24. Waveform Calculator Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Table 8-25. EZwave Display Preferences - Automatic Reload Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Table 8-26. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor Optionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 8-27. EZwave Display Preferences - Data Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 8-28. EZwave Display Preferences - General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 8-29. EZwave Display Preferences - Grid Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 8-30. EZwave Display Preferences - Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 8-31. EZwave Display Preferences - Look and Feel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Table 8-32. EZwave Display Preferences - Mouse Pointer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Table 8-33. EZwave Display Preferences - Multiple Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Table 8-34. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Table 8-35. EZwave Display Preferences - RF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Table 8-36. EZwave Display Preferences - Row Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Table 8-37. EZwave Display Preferences - Save Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Table 8-38. EZwave Display Preferences - Save Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Table 8-39. EZwave Display Preferences - Text Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Table 8-40. EZwave Display Preferences - Transformations - Transformations Tab . . . . . 488
Table 8-41. EZwave Display Preferences - Transformations - Conversion Tab . . . . . . . . . 489
Table 8-42. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Table 8-43. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Compare Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Table 8-44. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Table 8-45. EZwave Display Preferences - Workspace Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Table 8-46. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Plot Options Dialog Box Contents . . . . . 495
Table 8-47. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Measures Options Dialog Box Contents . 497
Table 8-48. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Legend Options Dialog Box Contents . . 499
Table 8-49. EZwave Display Preferences - Axis Title Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Table 8-50. Fonts and Colors - Axis Values Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Table 8-51. EZwave Display Preferences - Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options . . . . . . . . . 503
Table 8-52. EZwave Display Preferences - Calculator Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Table 8-53. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor/Marker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Table 8-54. EZwave Display Preferences - Eye Mask Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Table 8-55. EZwave Display Preferences - Grid Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Table 8-56. EZwave Display Preferences - Header Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Table 8-57. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Table 8-58. EZwave Display Preferences - Measurement Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . 511
Table 8-59. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . 512
Table 8-60. Fonts and Colors - Row Title Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Table 8-61. EZwave Display Preferences - Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors) . 514
Table 8-62. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Colors Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Table 8-63. Fonts and Colors - Waveform Display Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Table 8-64. Fonts and Colors - Waveform Name Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Table 8-65. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 33

 List of Tables

Table 8-66. Fonts and Colors - Window Background Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Table 8-67. Fonts and Colors - Zero-Level Line Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Table 8-68. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Plot Options Dialog Box Contents . 522
Table 8-69. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Measures Options Dialog Box Contents
524
Table 8-70. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Legend Options Dialog Box Contents
526
Table 8-71. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Table 8-72. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculator General Options . . . . . . 529
Table 8-73. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculator View Options . . . . . . . . 531
Table 8-74. Filter Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Table 8-75. Find Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Table 8-76. Jitter Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Table 8-77. Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Table 8-78. Parameter Table Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Table 8-79. Pick Points Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Table 8-80. Expression Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Table 8-81. Power Analysis Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Table 8-82. Save As Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Table 8-83. Save Windows Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Table 8-84. Select Hierarchy Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Table 8-85. Select Waveforms Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Table 8-86. Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Table 8-87. Update Waveforms Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Table 8-88. Waveform Names Display Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Table 8-89. Appearance Tab for Analog Waveforms Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Table 8-90. Appearance Tab for Digital Waveform Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Table 8-91. Auto Correlation Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Table 8-92. Chirp Transform Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Table 8-93. Constellation Diagram Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Table 8-94. Convolution Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Table 8-95. Cross Correlation Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Table 8-96. Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . 597
Table 8-97. Eye Diagram Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Table 8-98. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Table 8-99. Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Table 8-100. Harmonics Meter Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Table 8-101. Histogram Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Table 8-102. Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Table 8-103. Phase Noise Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Table 8-104. Power Spectral Density Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Table 8-105. PSS Residue Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Table 8-106. Signal to Noise Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Table 8-107. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Table 8-108. Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

34 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

List of Tables

Table 8-109. Top Noise Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Table 8-110. Windowing Transform Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Table B-1. Complex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Table B-2. Jitter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Table B-3. Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Table B-4. Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Table B-5. Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table B-6. Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table B-7. Phase Noise Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table B-8. RF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table B-9. Signal Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table B-10. Statistical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Table B-11. Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Table B-12. Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Table B-13. NAND Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Table B-14. NOR Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Table B-15. XNOR Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Table C-1. Tcl Syntax Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Table C-2. Tcl Backslash Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Table C-3. Tcl List Processing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Table C-4. Tcl Command Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Table C-6. Commands that Access Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Table C-7. Tcl Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Table C-8. wave difference Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Table C-9. wave runindexlist Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Table C-10. wave runparameters Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
Table C-11. wave runparametervalue Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Table C-13. Questa ADMS Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
Table D-1. Commands that Access Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
Table D-2. Supported analysis Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Table D-3. Supported discipline Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Table D-4. Supported primary_physic Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Table E-1. JVM Memory Heap Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Table E-2. Characters to Avoid in Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Table E-3. System Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 35

 List of Tables

36 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

 Chapter 1
Introduction

This section presents an overview of the functionality and capability of the EZwave™ viewer, as
well as detailing basic concepts relating to the tool and this manual.
EZwave Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
EZwave Process Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Joint Waveform Database (JWDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Invoking EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Supported File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Visual Tour of EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 37

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
EZwave Overview

EZwave Overview
The EZwave viewer is an advanced graphical user interface (GUI) that supports viewing of
multiple databases of analog, digital and mixed-signal waveforms. It provides a dynamic
graphical display of data produced by a variety of Mentor Graphics applications.
The EZwave viewer can be run from the command line or from within host applications, such as
the Eldo® and Questa® ADMS™ simulators, Analog FastSPICE™ (AFS) and the Analog
Characterization Environment (ACE), a schematic capture tool such as Pyxis®, or other design
environment tools.

Once you have loaded your simulation results into the EZwave viewer, you can view, analyze,
and post-process them using a range of utilities, such as the Waveform Measurement Tool and
the Waveform Calculator. These utilities enable you to perform sophisticated calculations with
a combination of built-in or user-defined arithmetic (such as log, sin, cos) and logical (such as
AND, OR, XOR) functions. The calculation results can be waveforms, vectors, or scalar values.

A separate manual, Getting Started with EZwave, is available, which also links to video
tutorials. In addition, there is a short EZwave Quick Reference, which provides a summary of
the key functions of EZwave, including a tour of the main window features and tools, actions
available in the Wave windows, and keyboard shortcuts.

Tip
You can also view and analyze simulation results and associated files in tabular form using
the AMS Results Browser. Refer to the AMS Results Browser User’s Manual.

EZwave Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Joint Waveform Database (JWDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

EZwave Process Flow

The EZwave viewer usage is organized into five distinct stages, described here.
1. Set Up and Load Data — Set up the EZwave viewer and open a database containing
waveform data.
See “Setting Up EZwave” on page 53.
2. Add Waveforms — Add or select specific waveforms for viewing and analysis. These
waveforms can be stacked, overlaid, zoomed, and annotated through the use of keyboard
shortcuts, drag and drop, mouse clicks and strokes, and menu items.
See “Add Waveforms” on page 119.
3. Analysis — Measure, analyze, and annotate datapoints or logic units that are
represented in the waveforms. You can save data from multiple simulations for

38 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Joint Waveform Database (JWDB)

additional analysis and reuse. Add cursors to show data points and interpolated values
between data points.
See “Analysis” on page 161.
4. Post-Processing — After analyzing the simulator output data, the EZwave viewer
provides a number of powerful utilities for processing the data and transforming the raw
data to specific characteristic information. Using the Measurement Tool and the
Waveform Calculator, you can perform sophisticated calculations with a combination of
built-in or user-defined arithmetic (such as log, sin, cos) and logical (such as AND, OR,
XOR) functions. The calculation results can be waveforms, vectors, or scalar values.
See “Post-Processing” on page 267.
5. Save and Output Data — Save and/or output results to a disk file.
See “Save and Output Data” on page 389.
Related Topics
Setting Up EZwave
Add Waveforms
Analysis
Post-Processing
Save and Output Data

Joint Waveform Database (JWDB)

The EZwave viewer obtains waveform data by loading a database. By default, the EZwave
viewer uses the Joint Waveform DataBase (.wdb file) as its input format. Waveform data that is
generated by an analog/mixed-signal (AMS) simulation is stored in the JWDB. From here it can
be loaded into the EZwave viewer to view a single database or multiple databases in a single
session.
JWDB is a true mixed-signal waveform database. It can hold many different waveform types,
including:

• analog (float, double, or complex)

• histogram
• spectral
• scatter
• Verilog
• standard logic

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 39

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Joint Waveform Database (JWDB)

• VHDL char
• buses and records
• bit
• boolean
• string
• integer (16, 32, or 64 bits)
• user-defined enumerated types
X values can either be 64-bit integers or double-precision floating-point numbers. It can contain
signals from the time and frequency domains, or any other required domain.

The JWDB is a multi-run database. Waveforms and buses are stored, managed, and analyzed as
Compound Waveforms. In addition to compound waveforms, the JWDB has hierarchies which
allow waveforms to be placed in folders for further data management.

Tip
Refer to the Joint Waveform Database Read API Reference Manual.

Related Topics
Visual Tour of EZwave
EZwave Process Flow

40 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Invoking EZwave

Invoking EZwave
To invoke the EZwave viewer, type ezwave at the command line.
Describes the ezwave command, used to invoke EZwave. Lists all supported files types that can
be opened in EZwave.
Tip
The EZwave viewer can also be invoked from host applications such as the Questa ADMS
simulator, the Pyxis® schematic capture tool, or other design environment tools. For more
information, refer to the documentation provided with the host application.

Syntax
ezwave [arguments] [file1 ...]
ezwave [-nos | -nosplash]
[-v | -version]
[-hei <#> | -height <#>]
[-w <#> | -width <#>]
[-loc <x# y#> | -location <x# y#>]
[-title <"title">]
[--laf <light | gray | dark>]
[-c]
[-hel | -help | -u | -usage]
[-do <filename>]
[-args <args>]
[-assign <variable=value>]
[-i <path>]
[-o <path>]
[-s]
[-tcl | -tclprompt]
[-bigmem]
[-nobigmem]
[-maxwnd | -maximizefirstinnerwindow]
[-now | -nowindow]
[-notree | -forcewfchoosernotvisible]
[-singlewk | -forceworkspacenotallowmultiple]
[-skipexprerror]
[-log <path> | -logfile <path>]
[-nologging]
[-nor | -norestore]
[<file1> ...]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 41

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Invoking EZwave

Arguments
• -nos | -nosplash
Prevents the splash screen from opening when EZwave launches. If specified, this must be
the first argument.
• -v | -version
Displays the EZwave version number.
• -hei <#> | -height <#>
Sets the default height of the application windows.
• -w <#> | -width <#>
Sets the default width of the application windows.
• -loc <x# y#> | -location <x# y#>
Sets the location of the initial window.
• -title <"title">
Adds a title to the top of the EZwave main display. If the option -title “My Custom Title” is
set, the displayed name will be “My Custom Title (EZwave #Version# )”.
• --laf <light | gray | dark>
Note
Early-access feature. This feature has had limited production-level testing.

Changes the look and feel of EZwave, using light, gray, or dark themes for the GUI.
• -c
Runs EZwave in batch mode. There is no graphical user interface or display. Refer to
“Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode” on page 45.
• -hel | -help | -u | -usage
Displays this help text.
• -do <filename>
Indicates Tcl filename and location to be executed by the EZwave viewer.
• -args <args>
Arguments that follow -ARGS are defined for the Tcl script (and are ignored by EZwave).
• -assign <variable=value>
Assigns a Tcl variable to a value.
• -i <path>
Specifies the input simulation results file or directory name (optional).

42 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Invoking EZwave

• -o <path>
Specifies the output file name for the measurement results generated by the Tcl script.
• -s
A comma-separated list of variable names for which to print out measurements.
• -tcl | -tclprompt
Opens a prompt in the terminal, enabling single line Tcl commands to be entered directly.
• -bigmem
Enables the possibility to use up to 75% of machine memory. Enabled by default.
• -nobigmem
Limits the memory size to 4 GB. Equivalent to setting the environment variable
AMS_JAVA_NO_BIG_MEMORY=1.
Refer to “Environment Variables” on page 54 for further details.
• -maxwnd | -maximizefirstinnerwindow
Maximizes the first inner window at startup.
• -now | -nowindow
Prevents opening the initial empty window.
• -notree | -forcewfchoosernotvisible
Hides the waveform list at startup.
• -singlewk | -forceworkspacenotallowmultiple
Disables multi-workspace management.
• -skipexprerror
Skips errors when executing Tcl commands or scripts.
• -log <path> | -logfile <path>
Specifies the location for the session log file.
• -nologging
Prevents session activity from being logged to a file.
• -nor | -norestore
Prevents settings from a previous session from being restored.
• <file1>
The name of the file to open. Refer to “Supported File Types” on page 45 for a list of the file
types that can be opened in EZwave.
Related Topics
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 43

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Invoking EZwave

Visual Tour of EZwave

EZwave Display Preferences
Add Waveforms

44 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode

Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode

To invoke EZwave in Batch Mode, type ezwave -c at the command line.
Describes the ezwave -c command, used to invoke EZwave in batch mode.
Syntax
ezwave -c …
Arguments
• -c
Runs EZwave in batch mode. There is no graphical user interface or display.
Description
When running EZwave in batch-mode, the environment variable $DISPLAY is ignored. There
is no graphical user interface or display.

When all connections are closed and script evaluations complete, EZwave batch exits.

Note
Running .swd file in batch mode is not supported. Tcl graphical commands are ignored in
batch mode). There is no log, -log <path> is ignored.

Tip
You can check whether EZwave is in batch mode using the Tcl command “batch_mode” on
page 974. This can be useful inside scripts if you want them to work differently in batch
mode, for example to make graphical operations conditional on mode.

Related Topics
Invoking EZwave
Passing Tcl Parameters from the Command Line
batch_mode

Supported File Types

List the file types that can be opened in EZwave.
Table 1-1 lists of the file types that are supported in EZwave.
Table 1-1. Supported File Types
Icon File Type Extension Notes
MGC Database Files *.wdb Joint Waveform Database (JWDB)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 45

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Supported File Types

Table 1-1. Supported File Types (cont.)

Icon File Type Extension Notes
ICX Charter waveforms *.cht
Nutmeg Files *.out Analog FastSPICE™ Nutmeg format files
(includes nutmeg, nutbin, and nutbinf).
CSV (Comma delimited) *.csv

HSPICE Graph Data Files *.tr% The EZwave viewer can only read files
*.ac% with extension .tr% that have been
generated by HSPICE. Files with this
*.ft% extension that were generated by other
*.mt% tools may appear in the list of available
files but will fail to load. Refer to
*.sw% “Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on
page 1186.
OVD Files *.ovd Open Verification Database format file.
See also “Foreign Databases Options” on
page 467 and “dataset ovd” on page 1013.
Cou Files *.cou
Wlf Files *.wlf Questa SIM Wave Log Format file. The
EZwave viewer can only read WLF files
that have been fully saved to disk where
the simulation has completed and the
simulator exited. The list of waveforms in
the database is loaded first, then the
default hierarchical name used within the
waveform. Waveforms are created in the
TRAN folder. Unsupported WLF types
are ignored and a dialog will point to the
log file.1
VCD (Value Change Dump) *.vcd Real signals can be defined as a 64-bit bus
with the value provided as a floating-point
number.
Real 64-bit elements can still be defined
using standard 64-bit binary descriptions.
The state “U” is accepted as a correct
value.
PSF Files runObjFile PSF files do not have a predefined
logFile * extension. EZwave will open files with
the name runObjFile or logFile or
unrecognized files that contain the string
“PSFversion” in the first 100 bytes.

46 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Supported File Types

Table 1-1. Supported File Types (cont.)

Icon File Type Extension Notes
QWAVEDB Files *.dB A qwavedb comes with a separate
design.bin file, but this second file is
ignored by EZwave. EZwave reads a
qwavedb file after the simulation
completes. In other words, marching
waveform is not enabled.2
Buses having 1000 bits or more are not
loaded. You can change this behavior
through the settings.properties file, for
example:
qwavedbOption=-busSizeThreshold
25000
HSPICE/HyperLynx Output \ *.lis
\file
ADiT Outputs *.SD% The ADiT output reader is not available
*.TR% on the Windows platform.
*.TB% The “TR0” format generated by ADiT is
different from the “tr0” format generated
*.AC% by HSPICE. The file extension is case
*.DC% sensitive to differentiate between formats.
There are no marching waveforms with
the ADiT formats
Fsdb Files *.fsdb Fast Signal Database File. Refer to Utility
*.fsdb% to Convert a Waveform Database in the
Eldo User’s Manual for conversion
details. The FSDB reader is not available
on the Windows platform. Refer to
“Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on
page 1186.
FSDB file, compatible version is v5.7.
Spice pwl *.sti
Raw Ascii Files *.tab
Saved Windows *.swd
DO-File *.dofile
*.dof
*.do
TCL Files *.rul
*.tcl

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 47

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Visual Tour of EZwave

Table 1-1. Supported File Types (cont.)

Icon File Type Extension Notes
Compressed Files *.z Compressed files require the gunzip tool
*.Z and the compressed file should follow the
convention, <original_file_name>.gz (or
*.gz .z or .Z). The EZwave viewer will not
modify the compressed file; it is
uncompressed in the MGC_TMPDIR
temporary directory and is removed from
disk after you exit the EZwave viewer.
Parameter Files *.wdbparam
1. Supported WLF types are: wlfTypeArray, wlfTypeReg, wlfTypeNet, wlfTypeEnum, wlfTypeScalar,
wlfTypeReal, wlfTypeBit, wlfTypeVlogEnum, wlfTypeTime, wlfTypeEvent, wlfTypeVlogReal,
wlfTypeVlogWReal.
Unsupported WLF types are: wlfTypeRecord, wlfTypeAccess, wlfTypeFile, wlfTypeMemElem,
wlfTypeMemBits, wlfTypeClassRef, wlfTypeString, wlfTypePhysical, wlfTypeInteger.
2. Supported QWAVEDB file types are: Verilog wire, Verilog reg, Verilog bit, Verilog real, System
Verilog unpacked structure of type reg, System Verilog packed structure. From a VPI standpoint: vpiNet,
vpiRealVar, vpiReg.
Unsupported QWAVEDB file types are: wreal, Verilog logic (256 states), Enumerations, EZwave ignores
unsupported waveforms and does not load them.

Visual Tour of EZwave

Provides a tour of the EZwave viewer’s main graphical user interface.
The Waveform List Panel displays all of the currently open databases as folders with folders or
the individual waveforms listed underneath. Each waveform list element is associated with an
icon indicating how the waveform will be displayed within the graph window.

Use the tabs on the Waveform List Panel to switch between a flat display (List tab) or a
hierarchical format (Tree tab).

The Workspace is the area where the graph windows are displayed. You can move, resize,
minimize, and restore each graph window that is displayed on each Workspace. From the
Window pull-down menu, you can manage the windows by tiling or cascading them within the
Workspace. You can create multiple Workspaces by right-clicking an open workspace and
choosing New from the Workspace Popup Menu. All Workspaces can be accessed using the
tabs at the bottom of the pane.

The Graph Window is used to plot and view waveforms. They are created when you drag
waveform icons from the left Waveform List panel into the EZwave Workspace. You can have
a single waveform in a graph window, multiple waveforms overlaid in a graph window, or
multiple rows of waveforms in a single graph window.

48 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Visual Tour of EZwave

Figure 1-1. EZwave Viewer Graphical User Interface

Digital waveforms displayed on a graph window are called trace rows. Digital waveforms
display only logic states (on/off, hi/low, and so on). Analog waveforms are displayed in graph
rows. Each point on an analog waveform represents a specifically graphed data point (for
instance, showing voltage versus time).

Waveforms can be dragged up and down within the graph window or overlaid for comparison
display. Drag your mouse pointer on an axis to zoom in on a waveform. To reverse the action,
click the Undo Zoom icon on the main toolbar. You can arrange graph windows within a
workspace into a cascade or a variety of tilings for easier viewing and printing.

The status bar at the bottom of the graph window displays the current X and Y coordinates of
your mouse pointer (analog waveforms can be displayed with dual Y axes). If you click on a
waveform, the status bar displays the distance and the slope between two successive click
locations (shown as deltaX, deltaY, and slope).

You can add cursors to plotted waveforms, to measure points or lengths of a waveform. A
cursor is an on-screen indicator, drawn in the graph window waveform display area to identify
locations on the X or Y axes, in order to create a point for measurement. Cursors are displayed
as vertical or horizontal lines, each having a label and an X or Y value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 49

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Visual Tour of EZwave

To add a cursor, right-click on a waveform and select Add Cursor or Add Horizontal Cursor.

The first cursor created is known as the base (reference) cursor. You can add multiple cursors to
show data points, as well as interpolated values between data points, and the delta between the
base cursor. You can set a base cursor, then add additional cursors to measure values in between
using the Measurement Tool (see “Measurement Tool” on page 274). The current cursor is
highlighted, while others are set as dotted lines.

For more details, refer to “Working with Cursors” on page 163.

Figure 1-2. Cursors

Choose Tools > Search to invoke the Event Search Tool. This tool enables you to locate
occurrences of simulation events interactively. An event is a definition of specific states (or
values) for a single waveform or a collection of waveforms. To define an event, you need to
select a set of waveforms and specify the states (or values) you want them to have. You can
place markers (indicated by a red triangle) on cursors, allowing you to anchor locations to
“jump” between. For details on how to use the Event Search Tool, refer to “Using the Event
Search Tool” on page 192.

Choose Tools > Measurement Tool... to invoke the Measurement Tool. This tool enables you
to perform a range of analog and mixed-signal measurement operations on waveforms
displayed in the graph window. You can annotate the measurement results in the graph window
along with the measured waveforms. Measurement operations are divided into categories, such
as general, time-domain, frequency-domain, and statistical.

In a graph window, insert two cursors on a waveform, then choose Tools > Measurement Tool
from the EZwave menu. In the Measurement Tool, select the waveforms, then choose what type
of measurement you need, and select the waveform area in which to apply the measurement.
The results appear highlighted in the graph window. The results of some measurements produce

50 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Introduction
Visual Tour of EZwave

other waveforms. The EZwave Measurement Tool enables you the option of creating and
plotting the result waveform in the active graph window. For more details on how to use the
Measurement Tool, refer to “Measurement Tool” on page 274.

Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator to invoke the Waveform Calculator. This tool is an
integral part of post-processing and viewing the analog, digital, and mixed-signal simulation
results. It can optimize the time it takes to analyze large amounts of simulation data, and
supports a range of charting and analysis features. Refer to “Waveform Calculator” on page 304
and “Waveform Calculator GUI” on page 113 for more details.

Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Comparison Wizard to invoke the Waveform
Comparison Wizard. This tool enables you to compare waveforms from a reference simulation
to a new result simulation when analyzing the analog, digital, and mixed-signal simulation
results. The set of differences can be reported either graphically, or in report files. Refer to
“Comparing Waveforms” on page 227 for more information.

Related Topics
EZwave GUI Overview

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 51

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Introduction
Visual Tour of EZwave

52 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 2
Setting Up EZwave

This section describes how to set up EZwave. Installation is platform-dependent.

For information on AMS installation, see the AMS Installation Guide.

Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing Default Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
EZwave Format Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring Waveform Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
EZwave Display Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing Waveform Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 53

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Environment Variables

Environment Variables
Describes the key environment variables that are set to default path locations during the
installation process. You should verify that these locations are correct.
• MGLS_LICENSE_FILE or LM_LICENSE_FILE
Points to your Mentor Graphics license file or license server.
• MGC_AMS_HOME
Points to the root installation tree.
On UNIX, you can use the following command:

echo $environment_variable_name

On Windows, see Control Panel > System > Advanced tab > Environment Variables.

See also “Changing Default Environment Variables” on page 56.

The environment variables listed in Table 2-1 are set during runtime.
Table 2-1. Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
AMS_VIEWER_SETUP_HOME Specifies the location of the .ezwave directory where
the EZwave viewer keeps its setup files. The default
location is $HOME/.ezwave.
AMS_VIEWER_WFC_NOTATION Forces the Waveform Calculator to use the specified
notation. Takes priority over notation settings specified
in “Waveform Calculator General Options” on
page 529. Specify value “spice” | “ieee”.
AMS_EZDO_ROOT Specifies a root directory for relative paths when
saving window content in TCL or SWD (.swd) format.
The path entered in the File Name field on the Save
Windows Dialog Box will be relative to
AMS_EZDO_ROOT if the Use Relative Paths option
is set to Relative to AMS_EZDO_ROOT in the Save
Window Options.

54 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
Environment Variables

Table 2-1. Environment Variables (cont.)

Environment Variable Description
AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY Specify low | medium | high | versatile. Limits the
available memory for EZwave. Low limit is 4GB
(suitable for Virtual Machines), medium limit is 32GB,
and high limit is 75% of available memory if the
machine’s memory is greater that 48GB (otherwise
high is equivalent to medium). Versatile is similar to
high but also configures the Java Virtual Machine
minimum heap size -Xms to 1GB and the maximum
heap size -Xmx to 75% of the available memory.
Overrides the default memory settings. For more
information, refer to “Configuring Memory Capacity”
on page 1181.
AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP Specifies the minimum and maximum heap memory
allocation for the Java™ Virtual Machine (JVM). The
maximum amount of memory you can allocate
depends on the system. You only need to modify this if
you encounter out-of-memory errors. Refer to
“Troubleshooting Memory Issues” on page 1181 and
“Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems” on page 1182.
AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_STACK Removes the 10240kB maximum stack memory
allocation for the JVM. Generally used for
troubleshooting. Refer to “Troubleshooting Memory
Issues” on page 1181.
AMS_JAVA_NO_BIG_MEMORY Limits the memory size to 4 GB. Equivalent to using
the argument -nobigmem (see “Invoking EZwave” on
page 41). Refer to “Troubleshooting Memory Issues”
on page 1181.
MGC_TMPDIR Specifies a directory to store temporary data files. If
not set, the default directory for temporary files is /tmp.
AMS_LSF_NOCHECK When LSF is used, EZwave performs an automatic
reload of a waveform database at the end of a
simulation run, in order to release LSF licenses. This
variable disables the automatic reload, in cases where
unexpected waveform display issues are encountered.
AMS_EDITOR Specifies an external third-party text editor. This may
be used instead of the built-in editor. See “Using and
Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform
Calculator” on page 310.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 55

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Changing Default Environment Variables

Table 2-1. Environment Variables (cont.)

Environment Variable Description
AMS_UDF_LOAD Specifies that user-defined .tcl functions are loaded at
startup, and the path to the user extension files
directory. It also accepts multiple paths separated by
“:”
You can also use the Load User Extension Files At
Startup option on the dialog box “Waveform
Calculator General Options” on page 529. See also
“Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the
Waveform Calculator” on page 310.
If both AMS_UDF_LOAD and Load User Extension
Files At Startup are used then functions from both
locations are loaded.
Changing Default Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Changing Default Environment Variables

The environment variables are set during runtime, but you can change them from their default
values, if required, as described here.
The environment variables are listed in Table 2-1

Procedure
1. Enter the following command once:
setenv AMS_USE_ENV 1

2. Enter the setenv command that sets the environment variable:

setenv <environment_variable_name> <value>

For example, if you want to change the location of the .ezwave directory, enter the
following:
setenv AMS_USE_ENV 1
setenv AMS_VIEWER_SETUP_HOME $HOME/my_directory

This creates the directory, $HOME/my_directory/.ezwave.

Note
Do not use the echo $environment_variable_name command for these
environment variables.

56 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
Changing Default Environment Variables

Related Topics
EZwave Display Preferences
Invoking EZwave

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 57

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
EZwave Format Preferences

EZwave Format Preferences

You can customize global settings for the EZwave viewer environment to your preference using
the many options.
Configuring Waveform Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the Color Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Configuring Waveform Names

You can define the global settings for how waveform names are displayed in graph windows.
Procedure
1. Choose the Format > Waveform Names Display menu item to open the Waveform
Names Display Dialog Box.
2. Select the required Waveform Hierarchy option, to control how the waveform name
hierarchy is displayed:
• Full Hierarchy — To display the full waveform name hierarchy. Default. For
example:
:test:u1:x1:clk

• No Hierarchy (Leaf Name Only) — To display only the leaf name. Use this option
when waveforms can be identified without ambiguity by only the leaf name. For
example:
clk

• Display <N> Levels — To display a specified number of hierarchy levels. Use this
option when waveforms can be identified without ambiguity by limiting the number
of hierarchy levels displayed. For example, if N=2, two levels of hierarchy are
displayed:
u1:x1:clk

The Justify Value section controls justification of the waveform name display. Select an
option from Left (Default) or Right.

Tip
Use Right justification when information for identifying waveforms is at leaf level.

The Database Name section controls whether the database name is displayed as part of
the waveform name. For example:
<adc12test_mixed_eldo_ms/TRAN>clk

58 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
Configuring the Color Scheme

Related Topics
Changing Waveform Colors
Configuring the Color Scheme
Configuring Display Preferences
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles
Waveform List Panel

Configuring the Color Scheme

You can define a global setting to specify the color scheme used when drawing the graph
windows.
Note
The required Color Scheme must be selected on the Page Setup dialog box to affect printed
or exported graph windows. See Printing Graph Windows and Exporting Graph Windows.

Procedure
1. Choose Format > Color Scheme.
2. Select on of the following options:
• Black Background
Specifies a black background, with colors for the graph window objects.
• White Background
Specifies a white background, with colors for the graph window objects. This is the
default color scheme.
• Monochrome
Specifies a white background, with black for the graph window objects. Instead of
waveforms being displayed in different colors, different line styles are used.
• Documentation
Specifies settings for items such as waveform line width, fonts, cursors and axes,
that have been optimized for printing or exporting an image of the graph window(s).

Caution
The Documentation color scheme is primarily intended for printing or exporting,
and may significantly reduce the waveform display performance. For best
performance, use a waveform line width of 1 pixel and a plain line style, for
example, color schemes Black Background or White Background.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 59

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Configuring the Color Scheme

Tip
When using the Documentation color scheme for exported pages, ensure this
option is selected prior to organizing and annotating your window. This will
ensure that the page layout appears as expected in the export.

Related Topics
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles
Configuring Display Preferences
Workspace
Waveform Colors Options
Changing Waveform Colors

60 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
EZwave Display Preferences

EZwave Display Preferences

Describes the many options for EZwave features and display that can be customized to your
preference.
Configuring Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Changing Waveform Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Configuring Display Preferences

You can customize graphical elements of the waveform display to your preference.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options to open the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box.
2. The list on the left is expanded by default, and contains the EZwave display preference
categories as described in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2. EZwave Display Preferences

General Display Preference Page Description
Automatic Reload Options Specifies whether previous results are kept when a new
simulation is run.
Cursor Options Specifies cursor options.
Data Format Options Specifies the scaling and format of the axis tick labels.
Foreign Databases Options Specifies load and display options when using foreign
databases.
General Options Specifies settings that affect the overall use of the
application.
Grid Options Specifies the appearance and behavior of the grid in
graph windows.
Layout Options Specifies the layout of the graph windows.
Look and Feel Options Specifies the look and feel of EZwave and its dialog
boxes.
Mouse Pointer Options Specifies mouse pointer and mouse strokes properties.
Multiple Run Options Specifies how compound waveforms from multiple
runs are displayed.
Pick Points Options Specifies settings related to pick points.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 61

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles

Table 2-2. EZwave Display Preferences (cont.)

General Display Preference Page Description
RF Options Specifies options for RF calculations in the Waveform
Calculator.
Row Options Specifies default row heights.
Save Data Options Specifies global settings related to saving waveform
data.
Save Window Options Specifies global settings related to saving windows.
Text Annotation Options Specifies the annotation display options.
Transformation Options Specifies which data transformations are used with
complex waveforms.
Waveform Options Specifies how waveforms are displayed.
Waveform Compare Options Specifies options for waveform comparison.
Waveform List Options Specifies how the waveform list is displayed.
Workspace Options Specifies workspace related operations.

Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles

You can modify the fonts and colors of many of the elements in the EZwave viewer to your
preference.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options to open the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box.
2. Expand the Fonts and Colors folder in the preferences list on the left. Table 2-3 lists the
preferences available for modifying fonts and colors for graphical items.

Table 2-3. Fonts and Colors Preferences

Axis Title Options Axis Values Options
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options Calculator Entry Options
Cursor/Marker Options Eye Mask Options
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors) Header Text Options
Histogram Options Measurement Annotation Options
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Row Title Options
Colors)
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Waveform Colors Options
Colors)

62 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
Changing Waveform Colors

Table 2-3. Fonts and Colors Preferences (cont.)

Waveform Display Options Waveform Name Options
Waveform Selection Options Window Background Options
Zero-Level Line Options
You can set different preferences for each of the options on the Color Scheme
dropdown menu. For Black and White Background color schemes only, you can set
individual color settings. All other settings (fonts, line styles etc.) are common for
Black/White/Monochrome schemes. However, for the Documentation scheme, all
settings are individual (except as described in the note below).

Note
The Waveform Name options for Waveform Hierarchy, Justify Value and Database
Name options are common to all four color schemes.

Related Topics
EZwave Viewer Interface
Configuring the Color Scheme

Changing Waveform Colors

You can change the size of the color palette and the colors within it.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options to open the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box.
2. Expand the Fonts and Colors folder in the list on the left side, and choose Waveform
Colors.
For analog waveforms, the default is to use the same color palette for both white and
black backgrounds. To define a different palette for the white background, disable the
“White Background Color Scheme shares the Black Background Waveform Colors
Palette” option. For digital waves, color palette settings are always set separately for
white and black backgrounds.

Note
Even if the color palettes are different, the color palette size is shared between White
and Black color schemes.

When the Monochrome color scheme is active, the color palette cannot be set.
The Documentation color scheme uses its own color palette settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 63

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

Related Topics
Configuring Waveform Names
Configuring Colors, Fonts, and Styles
Configuring Display Preferences
Workspace
Waveform Colors Options
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)
Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital Waveforms)

Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

You can modify the default EZwave keyboard shortcuts, assigning key strokes to actions. You
can also select alternative key schemes, and import or export key schemes using the *.ezkey file
format.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Shortcuts Manager to open the Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box.
2. You can load an existing keyboard shortcuts scheme or save a new one. Do one of the
following:
a. To select an existing keyboard shortcuts scheme, choose one from the Scheme
dropdown menu. Choose Default to use the standard EZwave keyboard shortcuts.
b. To import a *.ezkey keyboard schema file, click Load, navigate to the required file
and click Open on the Import Keyboard Shortcuts From File dialog box.
c. To apply changes and export a *.ezkey keyboard schema file, click Apply and Save,
specify the required File Name and folder to save the file in, and click Save on the
Export Keyboard Shortcuts To File dialog box.
3. You can view the available actions and associated keyboard shortcuts in the Shortcuts
Manager. As there are a large number of available actions, you can filter the actions you
are looking for in one of the following ways:
a. You can type the name of an action into the Filter Actions text box. The table
updates as you type, showing the matching actions. Click to clear the filter.

b. You can filter the available actions by the main menu category under which they
appear. Choose the required menu from the By Category dropdown menu, for
example Tools.

64 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Setting Up EZwave
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

c. You can filter the available actions by the context in which they are used. Choose the
required context from the By Context dropdown menu, for example Waveform
Calculator.
d. You can view any actions that do not have an associated keystroke. Select the Show
Empty Key Strokes checkbox.
4. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to actions and modify existing assignments using the
Shortcuts Manager. This process is called binding, where you bind an action to a
keyboard shortcut. To modify bindings, click on the required row in the Actions table
and then do any of the following:
a. If you want to remove the associated key stroke from the selected action, click
Unbind Selection.
b. If you want to restore the last saved key stroke to the selected action, click Restore
Selected To Last Saved.
c. To modify the keyboard binding for the selected action, specify the required shortcut
in the Key Stroke field and ensure the Description field is correct in the Edit pane.
For example, to use Ctrl+S for an action, click in the Key Stroke field, hold down the
Ctrl key and press S. Then click the Update button.
5. If you encounter any issues, for example conflicts with the same shortcuts used for
actions in the same context, a message will appear in the Status Messages field. You
should then review the items in the Issues table. Click in a row in the Issues table and
specify different keystrokes for the affected actions in the Edit pane. Then click the
Update button and review the Status Messages area to check that the issue has been
resolved.
6. Finally, click OK or Apply to update your changes. Click Close if you do not want to
save any changes.
Examples
You can also manually edit a *.ezkey keyboard schema file or create a new file to define your
own keyboard shortcut preferences for EZwave.

The format of the *.ezkey file is as follows:

v1.0
<action> <context> <category> ["]<binding>["] ["]<description>["]
...
<action_N> <context_N> <category_N> ["]<binding_N>["]
["]<description_N>["]

You can also load a keyboard schema file using the Tcl command “wave loadbindings” on
page 1097:

wave loadbindings <file.ezkey>

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 65

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Setting Up EZwave
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

Related Topics
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

66 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 3
EZwave GUI Overview

This section provides an overview of the EZwave graphical user interface (GUI).
For a more in-depth description of the dialog boxes, see “Dialog Box and Field Reference” on
page 405.

EZwave Viewer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Waveform List Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Workspace Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Application Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Graph Window Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Graph Window Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Row Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Waveform Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Axis Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Cursor Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cursor Value Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Waveform List Panel Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Waveform List Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Database Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Folder Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Hierarchy Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Waveform Name Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Workspace Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keyboard and Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mouse Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Waveform Calculator GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 67

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
EZwave Viewer Interface

EZwave Viewer Interface

The EZwave Main Window provides access to all of the viewer features.
Figure 3-1 shows the EZwave Main Window.

Figure 3-1. EZwave Main Window

The components of the Main Window include:

Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Format Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cursor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Waveform List Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

68 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
EZwave Viewer Interface

Graph Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating a New Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Graph Window Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Waveform Names Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Graph Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Workspace Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Application Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 69

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Menu Bar
You can use the menu bar to access all of the EZwave menus.

This section describes the options available under each of the following menus in EZwave:

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cursor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

File Menu
You can use the File menu to access to Load, Save and Print operations.
It contains the following items:
Table 3-1. File Menu Items
Icon Mouse Key Item Description
Stroke Shortcut
Ctrl+N New Creates a new graph window.

Ctrl+O Open Opens any supported file type. For details refer
to “Supported File Types” on page 45.
Ctrl+W Close Closes the active graph window.

Ctrl+R Reload Updates a waveform with new simulator

information.
Ctrl+S Save Saves the active graph window as a Saved
Graph Window (.swd) file. Refer to “Save
Windows Dialog Box” on page 565.

70 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-1. File Menu Items (cont.)

Export Saves the active graph window in JPEG (.jpg)
or PNG (.png) format. Refer to “Exporting
Graph Windows as an Image” on page 394 for
options available when exporting a window to
a graphics file.
Page Setup Specifies the text displayed at the top of the
graph window when printing and the color
scheme.
Ctrl+P Print Prints the visible data in the active graph
window. If you are having difficulty using /
usr/sbin/lpc to print from a Linux system,
refer to “Linux Printing Issues” on page 1178.
Database List Opens a recently used waveform database.
Provides a listing of all recently used
waveform databases. Select a waveform
database from the list to open it.
Exit Closes all graph windows, databases, and the
application. You are prompted to confirm the
exit, and save databases with unsaved changes
before the application closes.
You may control the display of the exit
confirmation box through General Options.

Edit Menu
EZwave has an Edit menu for access to Edit, Group, Find, Shortcuts Manager and EZwave
Options features.
The Edit menu contains the following items:
Table 3-2. Edit Menu Items
Icon Mouse Key Item Description
Stroke Shortcut
Undo/Redo Undoes the previous graphical operation, such
as plotting a waveform or splitting a row.
Removes the effect of the previous undo
operation, performing the operation again.
Ctrl+X Cut Removes the currently selected objects from
the active graph window and stores them on the
clipboard.
Ctrl+C Copy Makes a duplicate of the currently selected
objects and stores them to the clipboard.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 71

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-2. Edit Menu Items (cont.)

Copy Copies the visible data as a bitmap image from
Window to the active window to the Windows clipboard.
Clipboard Only available on the Windows platform.
Ctrl+V Paste Inserts the contents from the clipboard into the
active graph window.
Groups Ctrl+G Groups Creates a waveform group, such that multiple
waveforms can be manipulated together. Only
available when 2 or more waveforms are
selected.
Delete Removes the currently selected objects from
the active graph window.
Ctrl+A Select All Selects all objects in the active graph window
for further action. Click a blank area of the
active graph window to clear the selection
Unselect All Unselects all currently selected objects in the
active graph window.
Find Opens the Find Tool Dialog Box that displays a
filtered list of waveforms to be plotted in the
active window.
Copy Copies the visible data in the active graph
Window to window to the Clipboard (Windows) as a
Clipboard bitmap image. (Available only on Windows).
Shortcuts Opens the Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box that
Manager enables you to modify the default EZwave
keyboard shortcuts, assigning key strokes to
actions. Refer to “Configuring Keyboard
Shortcuts” on page 64.
Options Opens the EZwave Options dialog box. Refer
to “Configuring Display Preferences” on
page 61.

Undo and Redo

You can use the Edit > Undo menu item to undo previous graphical operations within EZwave.

The Undo command is able to undo operations such as adding, moving, and deleting waveforms
and cursors, which occur graphically within EZwave. It is not able to operate on simulation-
related actions, such as creating waveforms in the database or plotting waveforms interactively
from the simulator graphical interface.

72 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

The undo buffer can hold multiple commands, so that you can undo the last several actions.
However, some actions—particularly those that would cause undo to become unsafe—clear the
undo buffer. These commands include the following:

• Opening a .swd, .do, or .tcl file

• Commands sent by a simulator or client that could corrupt the undo buffer
• Updating compound structure (usually sent by a simulator)
• Calculator operations that create or manipulate hidden objects
• Deleting an object from a database
• Working with a Bus
• Converting a digital wave to analog or an analog wave to digital
• Working with Eye Diagrams
• Adding a measurement
• Performing a measurement in the calculator with a command that plots a result
waveform
• Deleting a workspace
• Renaming a database or a waveform within a database
• Issuing an Update Waveforms command from the Database Popup Menu
Additionally, the following commands cannot currently be undone, but do not clear the undo
buffer:

• Adding or renaming a workspace

• Showing or hiding all annotations
• Moving an annotation or annotation text
• Turning on or off cursor locking
• Turning on or off snapping to data points
• Executing Hide Value or Y-Level Line from the Cursor Value Popup Menu
• Changing the visibility of the cursor values
• Resizing or scrolling a graphical window
The Edit > Redo command repeats the commands that were undone with the Edit > Undo
command, starting with the most recent one. This functionality can be disabled through an
option in the General Options.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 73

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

View Menu
EZwave has a View menu for access to Zoom, Gridlines, Waveform and Toolbar features.
The View menu contains the following items:
Table 3-3. View Menu Items
Icon Mouse Key Item Description
Stroke Shortcut
U Zoom Undo Undoes the previous zoom operation in the
active graph window
R Zoom Redo Redoes the last action undone by Zoom Undo

I Zoom In Zooms in to view more detail in the X

direction of the active graph window.

O Zoom Out Zooms the display out to view less detail in the
x-axis of the active graph window.

A View All Reset magnification to view all of the data in

all of the rows within the active graph
window. This operation does not change the
height of any of the rows. This behavior may
be modified using the View All Activates
Auto-Range checkbox on the EZwave Display
Preferences General Options dialog box.
Min Row Activates Minimum Row Height Plot Mode.
Height Plot When on, all Waveforms are plotted using the
Mode Minimum Size specified on the EZwave
Display Preferences Row Options dialog box.
Useful when displaying many waveforms.
Ctrl+H Fit Row Changes the row heights in the active graph
Heights window in order to see as many rows as
possible.
Grid Lines Toggles the display of grid lines within the
active graph window and sets the mode for all
future rows. Only rows showing analog
waveforms support grid lines.
Grid lines on an individual axis can be
controlled by using the Axis Popup Menu.
The color of grid lines can be change by using
Measurement Tool Dialog Box.

74 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-3. View Menu Items (cont.)

Ctrl+T Tandem Activates Tandem Mode. This allows you to
Mode plot waveforms with the same name from
different databases. Refer to Plotting
Waveforms with the Same Name using
Tandem Mode.
Zero-Level Toggles the visibility of lines showing X=0
Lines and Y=0 in the graph window. Only rows
showing analog waveforms support zero-level
lines. Zero-level lines can be controlled using
the Axis Popup Menu. If the zero-level line for
an x-axis is selected, it turns on the zero-level
lines for all rows. For a y-axis it activates on a
per-row basis.
Waveform Toggles the display of the waveform list panel.
List
Toolbar Toggles the display of the toolbar.
Status Bar Toggles the display of the status bar within the
application window.
Ctrl+L Refresh Refreshes the display of the active graph
window.

Format Menu
EZwave has a Format menu for access to Waveform Names and Color Scheme features.
The Format menu contains the following items:
Table 3-4. Format Menu Items
Item Description
Waveform Names Display Provides format options for waveform names within the
graph windows. This is a global setting.
Show Full Hierarchy - Controls whether the waveform
name contains the full design path name, or just the
waveform leaf name.
Show Database Names - Controls whether the
displayed waveform name contains the database name.
For example, if there is a waveform named “clock” in a
database named “results” then checking this option
would include the text “results” when the “clock”
waveform name was displayed in the graph windows.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 75

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-4. Format Menu Items (cont.)

Item Description
Color Scheme Provides control over the color scheme used within the
graph windows. This is a global setting.
Black Background - Uses a black background, with
colors for the graph window objects.
White Background - Uses a white background, with
colors for the graph window objects.
Monochrome - Uses a white background, and uses
black for the graph window objects. Instead of using
multiple colors for displaying waveforms, this uses
different line styles.
Documentation - Uses a white background and other
settings for items such as waveform line width, fonts,
cursors and axes, that have been optimized for printing
or exporting an image of the graph window(s).

Tools Menu
EZwave has a Tools menu for access to all of the main analysis tools.
The Tools menu contains the following items:
Table 3-5. Tools Menu Items
Icon Item Description
Waveform Compare Contains submenus to set up and perform
waveform comparison. Refer to
“Comparing Waveforms” on page 227.
Create Bus Creates user-defined buses. Refer to
“Working with a Bus” on page 269.
Eye Diagram Creates an eye diagram based on a period
of a waveform. Refer to “Working with
Eye Diagrams” on page 195.
Extract Extracts outputs from a database. Refer to
“Using the Extract Outputs from Database
Tool” on page 371.
FFT Opens the Fast Fourier Transform Tool
Dialog Box. Refer to “Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) Function” on page 373.

76 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-5. Tools Menu Items (cont.)

Jitter Analyzes clock jitter between any digital
and analog target signal with respect to a
reference period or frequency, or calculates
phase noise jitter. Refer to “Jitter Tool” on
page 357.
Parameter Analyzer Generates “pivot” waveforms. Changes the
running variable of one or more compound
waveform(s) to one of the waveform’s
parameter values, or to the y values of a
different compound waveform, and then
plots the pivot waveform. Refer to
“Analyzing Waveform Parameters to
Generate Pivot Waveforms” on page 256.
Current Analysis Analyzes power consumption of a circuit
and its components over time. Refer to
“Analyzing Current Consumption” on
page 258.
Power Analysis Analyzes power consumption of a circuit
and its components over time. Refer to
“Analyzing Power Consumption” on
page 264.
Search Defines and searches for events. Refer to
“Using the Event Search Tool” on
page 192.
Spectrum Measurement Opens the Spectrum Measurement Tool
Dialog Box. Refer to “Spectrum
Measurement Function” on page 377.
Waveform Calculator Post-processes mixed-signal simulation
results. Refer to “Waveform Calculator” on
page 304.
Measurement Tool Measures and verifies analog and mixed-
signal simulation results. Refer to
“Measurement Tool” on page 274.
Pick Points Pick points are temporary markers that
enable you to perform quick measurements
on selected waveforms. Refer to “Using
Pick Points to take Measurements” on
page 182.

Cursor Menu
EZwave has a Cursor menu for access to the various cursor operations.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 77

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

The Cursor menu contains the following items:

Table 3-6. Cursor Menu Items
Icon Keyboard Item Description
Shortcut
F5 Add Creates a new data cursor in the
center of the active graph window.
Add Horizontal Cursor Creates a horizontal cursor on the
selected y-axis. By default, the first
crossing point with the waveform
and its measurement is shown
Add with Y-Level Creates a new data cursor with a Y-
Level line in the center of the active
graph window.
Add Cursor Relatively To > Opens a dialog box where one or
<cursor> more X values can be specified for
creating new cursors relative to the
selected cursor.
Tab Next Data Point Moves the cursor to the next data
point in the active graph window.
First select the waveform whose
data should be used.
Shift +Tab Previous Data Point Moves the cursor to the previous
data point. First select the waveform
whose data should be used.
Next Error Moves the cursor to the next error in
the waveform, based on time. When
applied to a waveform comparison
result, the cursor is moved to the
next difference between the
compared waveforms.
Previous Error Moves the cursor to the previous
error in the active graph window.
When applied to a waveform
comparison result, the cursor is
moved to the next difference
between the compared waveforms.
Lock Together When Connects all cursors so that when
Dragging one is moved, all other cursors are
moved the same amount. When
cursors are locked, a checkmark
displays next to the item.

78 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-6. Cursor Menu Items (cont.)

Icon Keyboard Item Description
Shortcut
Share Config of Active Configure several cursors to share
Cursor the same visibility settings for
cursor values.
Zoom Between Cursors Zooms between the two cursors that
are furthest apart.
Delete Active Deletes the currently active cursor
from the active graph window. The
cursor closest to the one being
deleted becomes active.
Delete All Deletes all annotations.
Cursor List Provides a listing of all cursors
currently in the active graph
window. Select the cursor from the
list to move from cursor to cursor.

Window Menu
EZwave has a Window menu for access to the various window features.
The Window menu contains the following items:
Table 3-7. Window Menu Items
Icon Item Description
New Creates a new graph window.

Title Specify a title for the active graph window.

Cascade Arranges the graph windows in an
overlapped (cascade) fashion.
Tile Horizontally Arranges the graph windows in a tiled (left/
right) fashion.
Tile Vertically Arranges the graph windows in a tiled (top/
bottom) fashion.
Tile in a Grid Arranges the graph windows in a tiled (left/
right and top/bottom) fashion.
Restore All Restore all currently minimized graph
windows.
Minimize All Minimizes all graph windows on the active
workspace.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 79

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Menu Bar

Table 3-7. Window Menu Items (cont.)

Close All Closes all graph windows in the active
workspace.
Window List At the bottom of the menu is a list of all
graph windows on all workspaces.
Selecting one of these will switch to the
workspace containing the window, and
restore the window if it was minimized.
More Windows Provides a secondary list for selection.

Help Menu
EZwave has a Help menu for access to the on-line help system and tutorials.
The Help menu contains the following items:
Table 3-8. Help Menu Items
Item Description
Quick Start Launches the Setting Up EZwave chapter of
this manual.
Tutorial Launches the Getting Started with EZwave
tutorial manual. The Tutorial Data menu
item on the sub-menu provides a small
database for use.
Contents and Index Launches the online help system.
Quick Reference Provides a short overview of EZwave’s key
functionality and lists of mouse and
keyboard operations and shortcuts.
Release Notes Launches the AMS Release Notes.
AMS Documentation- InfoHub Launches the InfoHub, which contains all of
the AMS documentation.
Videos Opens a dialog box that enables you to
select and view instructional videos for
EZwave, Eldo, ACE and related tools. You
can run the videos or copy the video path.
About EZwave Provides information about the application
for Contacting the Customer Support
Center.

80 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Toolbar

Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons (displayed with icons) for accessing frequently used operations.
To access: Choose View > Toolbar.

Place the mouse pointer over the toolbar icon to display the tooltip for that item.
Table 3-9. Toolbar Icons
Item Description
Creates a new graph window.

Opens any supported file.

Saves the active graph window.

Prints the active graph window.

Cuts the selection from the active graph window and store it in the viewer
clipboard.
Copies the selection from the active graph window to the viewer clipboard.

Pastes the contents of the clipboard in a graph window.

Deletes the selection from the active graph window.

Undoes/Redoes the previous graphical operation.

Adds a new data cursor

Deletes the active data cursor.

Moves the data cursor to the previous data point or transition.

Moves the data cursor to the next data point or transition.

Moves the data cursor to the previous error or difference point.

Moves the data cursor to the next error or difference point.

Toggles Minimum Row Height Plot Mode on or off. When on, all
Waveforms are plotted using the Minimum Size specified on the EZwave
Display Preferences Row Options dialog box. Useful when displaying
many waveforms.
Fits row heights in the active graph window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 81

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel

Table 3-9. Toolbar Icons (cont.)

Toggles the active graph window grid lines on or off.

Toggles the waveform list panel on or off.

Views all of the active graph window so that all the data is visible.

Zooms in to increase magnification in the X direction.

Zooms out to decrease magnification in the X direction.

Undoes the previous zoom operation. (Multiple operations supported)

Redoes last undone zoom.

Invokes the Waveform Calculator.

Invokes the Measurement Tool.

Invokes the Pick Points Tool.

Invokes Tandem Mode, enabling automatic plotting of all waveforms with

the same name from different databases.
Adds a delta marker to a waveform or between two waveforms.

Updates the graph window with new data from a running simulation. This
icon is only available when the application is started from the Questa
ADMS tool, or when the EZwave viewer is connected to an Eldo
simulation.
Arranges multiple graph windows in an overlapped (cascade) fashion.

Arranges multiple graph windows in a stacked (horizontal) fashion.

Arranges multiple graph windows in a side by side (vertical) fashion.

Arranges multiple graph windows in a tiled (horizontal and vertical)

fashion.
Toggles boundary elements visibility on or off. Only used with .wtcl
databases.

Waveform List Panel

The Waveform List panel shows all of the waveform databases that are currently open in
EZwave.

82 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel

Overview
The top panel lists the databases in folders, and the bottom panel lists the individual waveforms
contained within them. Use the tabs to switch between a flat display (List tab) or a hierarchical
format (Tree tab).

Figure 3-2. Waveform List Panel

The Tree tab (by default) splits the panel into a Structure view (top) and a waveform list
(bottom). To change this, go to the Waveform List Options and clear the Separate Tree View
Into Structure and Waveform List Views option

Waveform List Popup Menus

Right-click on an item in the waveform list panel to access various functions via the Waveform
List Panel Popup Menus.

Each item in the waveform list is associated with an icon indicating how the waveform will be
displayed when plotted in the graph window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 83

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel

Table 3-10. Waveform List Element Icons

Icon Waveform Description
Database Content
Saved Waveform Indicates a waveform database that exists on disk, and
Database does not contain any unsaved changes. The full path to the
database displays to the right of the name.
Unsaved database Indicates a waveform database that contains unsaved
changes. An attempt to close the database will result in a
confirmation box being shown to prevent accidental loss of
the changes.
Folder Indicates a folder within a waveform database.
Design Hierarchy Indicates a folder within a waveform database that
Folder contains waveforms in a design hierarchy.
Analog or complex Indicates a waveform containing analog data.
waveform
Digital waveform Indicates a waveform containing digital state data.
Step waveform Indicates a waveform whose Y data values are displayed as
discrete levels.
Enumerated Indicates a waveform containing Y data values from an
waveform enumerated list.
Compound Indicates a compound waveform containing the results of
waveform several simulations for the same node.
Bus Indicates that the waveform is a bus, which means it
contains one or more bus bit waveforms.
Measure Indicates a measure. The Name and Value of the scalar are
displayed by default.
Variable Indicates a variable. The Name and Value of the variable
are displayed by default.

Sorting Databases in the Waveform List

By default, EZwave displays waveform databases in the order in which they were added.You
can sort the databases by name or date, using the following buttons:

Figure 3-3. Database Sort Buttons

The buttons are as follows:

• Sort by Name

84 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel

Select to sort databases by name.

• Sort by Date
Select to sort databases by date modified.
• Toggle Sort Direction
Toggle to change the sort order.

Searching for Databases and Waveforms in the Waveform List

You can perform a quick search across the open waveform databases, by entering a search term
into the search text boxes above each panel in the Waveform List panel.

All matching waveform names associated with that panel are highlighted. The search includes
an implied * wildcard character at the start and end of the term entered.

The search term can include * and ? wildcard characters. If the search string does not contain
either, the search returns waveform names that match the search term at any position in the
waveform name. If you include a * or ? wildcard character, the search returns waveform names
that match the search term from the first character of the waveform name.

The search highlights waveforms that match the string (or partial string) as you type it into the
search field. If automatic searching is disabled, you must press Enter to perform the search.
Automatic searching can be disabled using the Waveform List Options.

After you press Enter to perform a search, the search is added to the search history list. Click on
the icon to access the search history. The history maintains up to ten entries. Select the Clear
History option to reset the history.

Note
If more than 100 search results are found, EZwave displays the number of results and asks if
you want to display the search results.

Tip
For more search options, use the Find Tool Dialog Box by clicking .

Waveform List Columns

The Waveform List displays the Waveform Name. You can add or remove the Kind, Mode, X,
Y, and Value columns; right-click on the column title bar and select the appropriate option.
Right-clicking the column title bar also displays mode-filtering options. To sort the list, left-
click on the column title bar that you want to sort by, as shown in Figure 3-4.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 85

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel

Figure 3-4. Waveform List Panel Showing Measures Sorted by Value

The X icon in the upper right corner of the waveform list temporarily hides the panel from the
application window to increase your workspace area. To show the panel again, choose
View > Waveform List.

Note
For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are displayed in the list panel.
Loaded waveforms are waveforms that have been displayed once, or waveforms from a
hierarchy selected once in the Tree View of the panel. Refer to “Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on
page 1186.

Filtering Waveforms in the Waveform List

You can filter the waveforms that are displayed in the Waveform List by their type, using the
Waveform List check boxes shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5. Waveform List Filters

The options are as follows:

• Analog Voltage
• Analog Current
• Digital Signals
• Real and WReal Signals

86 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Graph Window

Graph Window
The Graph Window is used to plot and view waveforms. They are created when you drag
waveform icons from the left Waveform List panel into the EZwave Workspace. You can have
a single waveform in a graph window, multiple waveforms overlaid in a graph window, or
multiple rows of waveforms in a single graph window.
Waveforms can be dragged up and down within the graph window or overlaid for comparison
display.

Creating a New Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Graph Window Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Waveform Names Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Graph Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Creating a New Graph Window

Describes how you can create new graph windows.
Procedure
1. Choose File > New. A new graph window is created.
2. You may also select waveforms from the Waveform List panel and use the Plot
(Overlaid) or Plot (Stacked) menu item from the Database Popup Menu.
You can create a large number of graph windows, but only one graph window may be
active at any time. The active graph window is always on the top of the workspace area.
Results
As each new graph window is created, a graph window button is added to the workspace taskbar
at the bottom of the application window. You can use these buttons to bring the graph window
to the top of your workspace.
The grid displayed in the graph window is user-configurable; see the Grid Options topic.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 87

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Graph Window

Figure 3-6. EZwave Graph Window

Graph Window Title Bar

Each graph window has a unique name of the form Wave:#.
You can add a custom title string that will appear in the title bar by using the Window > Title
menu item or the Graph Window Popup Menu.

Rows
A graph window can have multiple graph rows. You can quickly resize the height of an analog
graph row by dragging the x-axis within the row.
Additional viewing options are available from the Row Popup Menu. Right-click within the row
to display this menu.

Waveform Names Display

Waveform Names are shown next to the plot of the waveform. The location of the names,
relative to the plotted waveforms, and information displayed can be changed.
Procedure
1. Use the Edit > Options menu item to access the Layout Options.
2. Use the Format > Waveform Names Display menu item to control how much
information is shown for each waveform name.

88 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Workspace

3. Right-click the waveform name or the plotted waveform to activate the Waveform
Name Popup Menu.
You can select multiple waveforms by selecting each one individually with Ctrl+click,
or selecting a range with Shift+click.

Graph Window Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the graph window displays the current X and Y coordinates of
the mouse pointer.

When there are multiple y-axes within a single row, there will be one Y data value for each of
the axes. If you click on a waveform, it also shows the distance between the point where you
clicked and the point where you had previously clicked before that as deltaX and deltaY.

Workspace
The workspace is the area where the graph windows are displayed. It is located directly below
the toolbar on the application window.
If the Waveform List Panel is displayed, the workspace displays to the right of the waveform
list.

Figure 3-7. Workspace Tabs and Popup Menu

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 89

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Workspace Taskbar

The application supports multiple workspaces for flexibility in organizing graph windows.
Multiple workspaces are accessed through workspace tabs. Click the Workspace tab to bring
that workspace to the top of your application window.

Workspace Taskbar
Above the status bar, a taskbar is available to easily select graph windows. As each new graph
window is added to the workspace, a graph window button is added to this taskbar.
Figure 3-8. Workspace Taskbar

When graph windows are minimized, they appear as icons on the workspace. Click the graph
window button on the workspace taskbar to make that window the active graph window. When
you click the taskbar, if the window is minimized, it is automatically restored and brought to the
front of the workspace.

The taskbar can be turned off through the Workspace Options.

Application Window Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the EZwave Viewer Interface.

The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you navigate through menus.
This area also shows messages that describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you place the
mouse pointer over the buttons.

90 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Application Window Status Bar

The current time on your computer clock is displayed in the field to the right of the status bar.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 91

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Graph Window Popup Menus

Graph Window Popup Menus

The Graph Window provides a variety of popup menus. Right-click any waveform to display
relevant Workspace Popup Menu specific for that waveform.
Figure 3-9. Popup Menus

To activate the popup menus in the graph window, right-click window objects as follows:
Table 3-11. Graph Window Popup Menus
Right-Click Object Popup Menu
Graph Window Graph Window Popup Menu
Row Row Popup Menu
Waveform or Waveform Name Waveform Popup Menu
X Axis or Y Axis Axis Popup Menu
Cursor Value Cursor Value Popup Menu

92 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Graph Window Popup Menu

Table 3-11. Graph Window Popup Menus (cont.)

Right-Click Object Popup Menu
Cursor Cursor Popup Menus

Graph Window Popup Menu

The Graph Window popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on the graph window.

Table 3-12. Graph Window Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Title Specify a title for the active graph window. Same
as Window > Title menu item.
Fit Row Heights Changes the row heights in the active graph
window in order to see as many rows as possible.
Item also available from the View Menu.
Copy Window to Copies the graph window to the Clipboard
Clipboard (Windows) as a bitmap for paste as a bitmap image
file. Item also available from the Edit Menu.
(Available only on Windows platform.)
Paste Inserts the contents from the clipboard into the
active graph window at the location of the mouse
pointer when the menu was activated. Same as
Edit > Paste menu item.
Close Closes the active graph window. Same as
File > Close menu item.

Row Popup Menu

The Row popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a row in the graph window.

Table 3-13. Row Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Smith Chart Available only if the row contains a Smith Chart.
Offers display options for changing the
coordinates:
• Impedance — Along the Z-parameter axis.
• Admittance — Along the Y-parameter axis.
• Both — Overlays the impedance and
admittance grids.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 93

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Row Popup Menu

Table 3-13. Row Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Zoom In Zooms in to view more detail in the X direction.
Same as the View > Zoom In menu item.
Zoom Out Zooms out to view less detail in the X direction.
Same as the View > Zoom Out menu item.
View All Adjusts the display to view all of the X and Y
waveform data for all waveforms contained in the
row. Item also available from the View Menu. See
also the View All Activates Auto-Range checkbox
on the EZwave Display Preferences General
Options dialog box.
To New Window Opens a new window displaying the selected row.
Overlay Window Plots all waveforms overlaid in a single row. See
Waveforms also the Overlay by ordinate data type checkbox on
the EZwave Display Preferences General Options
dialog box. Opposite of Split menu item.
Split Available only if the row contains multiple
waveforms. Splits the waveforms into one
individual row per waveform.
Grid Lines Available only if the row contains analog
waveforms. Toggles the display of horizontal and
vertical grid lines for all axes within the row. Same
as the View > Grid Lines menu item.
Add Cursor Creates a new data cursor at the location of the
mouse pointer. Same as the Cursor > Add menu
item.
Add Horizontal Creates a new horizontal cursor at the location of
Cursor the mouse pointer. Same as the Cursor > Add
Horizontal Cursor menu item.
Annotations Accesses the Add Text Annotations option,
allowing you to attach a text annotation to the row.
Row Title... Enables you to enter a title that is displayed above
the row. The title has a maximum length of 32
characters.

94 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Popup Menu

Table 3-13. Row Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Row Height Available only if the row contains analog
waveforms. Offers options for changing the height
of the row:
• Minimum — Smallest allowed height for rows
containing analog waveforms.
• Maximum — Adjusts height so the row fills
available vertical space in the window.
• Default — Adjusts height back to the default.
Paste Inserts the contents from the clipboard into the
row. Same as the Edit > Paste menu item.

Note
To set options related to row displays, use the Row Options.

Waveform Popup Menu

The Waveform popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a waveform or waveform name in
the graph window. This popup displays different menu items based on the type of waveform
selected, or if multiple waveforms are selected.

Table 3-14. Waveform Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Transformation Available only if the waveform contains complex data (for
example, from a frequency domain analysis). Opens the
Transformation Options to enable changes the transformation
that is applied to the underlying complex data.
Radix Available only if the waveform supports radix display, which
would be digital buses or waveforms containing integer data.
Changes the radix that is used when displaying the waveform.
If multiple buses are selected at once, this change applies to
all selected buses.
Data Point Symbols Available only for analog waveforms. Toggles the visibility
of graphic symbols, shown at each data point.
Hide Waveform Toggles the visibility of the waveform. The waveform name
remains visible.
Analog to Digital / Used to convert the waveform between the analog and digital
Digital to Analog domains. Opens a dialog box to specify conversion options.
Overlay Selected Overlays the selected waveforms in a single row. Only
Waveforms available when 2 or more waveforms are selected.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 95

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Axis Popup Menu

Table 3-14. Waveform Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Groups Creates a waveform group, such that multiple waveforms can
be manipulated together. Only available when 2 or more
waveforms are selected.
Annotations Options to create, show, or hide text annotations.
Set as X Axis Sets currently selected waveform as a new x-axis.
Move to New Y Axis Available only for analog waveforms. The item is disabled if
the waveform is the only one on the y-axis containing it. The
result of this operation is the creation of a new y-axis within
the row, with the waveform moved to the new axis.
Circle Visibility... Available only for Smith Chart circle plots. Opens the Circle
Visibility dialog box for selection of which circles are
visible.
Drawing Mode Displays the waveform in one of five modes: Continuous,
Sampled, Scattered, Spectral, or Railroad.
Add Cursor Adds a new data cursor at the mouse pointer location on the
x-axis.
Add Horizontal Creates a new horizontal cursor at the mouse pointer location
Cursor on the y-axis.
Cut Removes the waveform from the graph window and places it
on the clipboard.
Copy Places a duplicate of the waveform on the clipboard.

Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the active graph
window within the current row.
Delete Removes the waveform from the active graph window.

Y-Axes Properties Opens the Axis Properties Dialog Box.

Properties Opens the Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog
Waveforms).

Axis Popup Menu

The Axis popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on an x or y-axis in the graph window.

96 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Axis Popup Menu

Figure 3-10. X and Y-Axis Popup Menus

Table 3-15. Axis Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Zoom Range X/Y Opens the X / Y Axis - Min/Max Settings dialog box. Use
to zoom between two locations on the axis.
Zoom In X/Y Zooms in to view more detail for the waveforms on the
axis.
Zoom Out X/Y Zooms out to view less detail for the waveforms on the
axis.
View All X/Y Adjusts the display to view all of the waveform data for all
waveforms on the axis.
Add Horizontal Cursor Creates a horizontal cursor at that point on the y-axis. By
(y-axis only) default, the first crossing point with the waveform is shown
with its measurement.
Scroll to X Moves the view to a new X location, using the Scroll X
(x-axis only) dialog box.

Log Scale Toggles between linear and log base 10 scaling.

dB Scale (y-axis only) Changes the y-axis to decibels (20log10 for
amplitude ratios).
dB10 Scale (y-axis only) Changes the y-axis to decibels (10log10 for
power ratios).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 97

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Axis Popup Menu

Table 3-15. Axis Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Overlay Window Plots all waveforms overlaid in a single row. See also the
Waveforms Overlay by ordinate data type checkbox on the EZwave
(y-axis only) Display Preferences General Options dialog box.

Grid Lines Available only if the row contains analog waveforms.

Toggles the display of either the horizontal (X) or vertical
(Y) grid lines for the axis. Same as the View > Grid Lines
menu item.
Add Cursor Creates a new vertical data cursor at that point on the x-
(x-axis only) axis in the active graph window.

Zero-Level Line (y-axis only) Toggles the visibility of a reference line

which is shown at the zero-level location.
Hide Axis Toggles the visibility of the axis. When an axis is hidden, it
is temporarily removed from the graph window, and all
waveforms contained on the axis are also temporarily
removed. This item is only enabled for rows containing
multiple y-axes.
Paste Inserts the clipboard contents onto the axis. The result of
the paste differs based on the type of axis:
For Y axes: the paste will use this y-axis if the data type
matches the waveforms being pasted; otherwise new y-
axes will be created within the same row.
For X axes: the paste is only permitted if the data type of
the waveforms being pasted matches the X data type for
the graph window.
Properties Opens the Axis Properties Dialog Box.

98 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Cursor Popup Menus

Cursor Popup Menus

The Cursor popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a cursor in the graph window.
Different options are available for vertical and horizontal cursors.
Vertical Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Vertical Cursors
The Vertical cursor popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a vertical cursor in the graph
window.
Figure 3-11. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu

Table 3-16. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Snap to Data Points Specifies that the cursor is snapped to data points.
Data Values Specifies which waveform data values are visible.
Data Values > Cursor Specifies which waveform data values are visible.
Values Table
Data Values > Show All Specifies all waveform data values are visible.
Data Values > Hide All Specifies no waveform data values are visible.
Data Values > Show Specifies only selected waveform data values are
Selected Only visible.
Data Values > Stop Specifies that the set of visible waveform data
Sharing Configuration values is no longer shared with another cursor.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 99

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Cursor Popup Menus

Table 3-16. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Icon Item Description
Data Values > Ignore Specifies that the values which are visible does
Selection not depend on which waveforms are selected.
Data Values > Show When Edit > Options > Cursors > “Show/Hide
Selected Mode Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
Waveform Selection” is set, specifies that only
selected waveforms are visible.
Data Values > Hide When Edit > Options > Cursors > “Show/Hide
Selected Mode Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
Waveform Selection” is set, specifies that
selected waveforms are not visible.
Data Values > Append When Edit > Options > Cursors > “Append/
Selected Mode Remove Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
Waveform Selection” is set, specifies that when
a waveform is selected it should be added to the
list of visible values.
Data Values > Remove When Edit > Options > Cursors > “Append/
Selected Mode Remove Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
Waveform Selection” is set, specifies that when
a waveform is selected it should be removed from
the list of visible values.
Data Values > Show On Specifies that data values are shown on the left by
Left default.
Comment Text Opens a dialog box to specify comment text.
Y-Level Line Specifies that a Y-level line is displayed.
“Base” Cursor Specifies that the active cursor is the base cursor.
Available only when the active cursor is not the
base cursor.
Move To Opens a dialog box to specify a new X location to
move the cursor to.
Add Relatively to Opens a dialog box where one or more X values
<cursor> can be specified for creating new cursors relative
to the selected cursor.
Jump to Next Marker Enables you to jump to the next marker.
Available only if markers have been set Using the
Event Search Tool.
Jump to Previous Marker Enables you to jump to the previous marker.
Available only if markers have been set Using the
Event Search Tool.

100 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Cursor Value Popup Menu

Table 3-16. Vertical Cursor Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Icon Item Description
Copy X to Clipboard Copies the X value of the cursor to the clipboard.
Delete Active Deletes the active cursor.

Delete All Deletes all annotations.

Horizontal Cursor
The Horizontal cursor popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a horizontal cursor in the
graph window.

Table 3-17. Horizontal Cursor Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Comment Text Allows a note of up to 64 characters to be attached to the
cursor.
“Base” Cursor Specifies this cursor as the base cursor. Available only when
the active cursor is not already the base cursor.
Show in All Duplicates the cursor in other graphs that contain the same
Compatible Y-Axes waveform.
Data Values Displays the Data Values Dialog Box, for the selected
waveform. This dialog box contains information about the x-
axis value at each crossing point, and enables you to save the
results to text format, or copy them to the clipboard.
Move To Allows a new Y location for the cursor to be entered.
Add Relatively to Opens a dialog box where one or more Y values can be
<cursor> specified for creating new cursors relative to the selected
cursor.
Copy Y to Clipboard Copies the Y value of the cursor to the clipboard.
Delete Active Deletes the active cursor.

Delete All Deletes all annotations.

Cursor Value Popup Menu

The Cursor Value popup menu is accessed by right-clicking on a cursor value in the graph
window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 101

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Cursor Value Popup Menu

Table 3-18. Cursor Value Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Hide Value Temporarily hides the cursor data value. To show the
cursor data value, right-click the cursor and select Data
Values > Show All.
Y-Level Line Displays a line across the graph window showing the Y
value.
“Base” Y-Level Line Selects the current Y-level line as the “base.” Delta-y
values for waveforms that intersect this cursor are based
on this line.
Copy Value to Clipboard Copies the full precision value to the clipboard.

The Cursor Value popup menu for compound waveforms contains the following additional
items:
Table 3-19. Cursor Value Popup Menu Items for Compound Waveforms
Item Description
Hide Other Values Hides values for other elements of the waveform.
Show Other Values Displays values for other elements of the waveform.
Show/Hide... Opens the Cursor Value dialog box.

102 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform List Panel Popup Menus

Waveform List Panel Popup Menus

The Waveform List Panel has several popup menus that provide quick access to a variety of
database and waveform operations.
To activate the popup menus in the graph window, right-click window objects in the Waveform
List Panel as follows:
Table 3-20. Right-Click Popup Menus
Right-Click Object Popup Menu
Waveform List Waveform List Popup Menu
Database Name Database Popup Menu
Folder Folder Popup Menu
Hierarchy Hierarchy Popup Menu
Waveform Name Waveform Name Popup Menu
Multiple Waveform Names Selected Waveforms Popup Menu

Waveform List Popup Menu

To access the Waveform List popup menu, right-click the Currently Open Databases text (or
anywhere within the panel except over a waveform database name or waveform name).
Note
The Database list only displays waveform database files. To open the other supported file
types, use the File > Open menu item.

Table 3-21. Waveform List Popup Menu Items

Icon Item Description
Manage Database Only visible when at least one database is loaded.
Groups Opens the Manage Database Groups dialog box,
used to assign databases to groups for use with
Tandem Mode. . Refer to “Managing Database
Groups for Tandem Mode” on page 127.
Exclude All Only visible when at least one database is loaded
Databases from and at least one database group exists. Removes all
Group databases from their groups and deletes the groups.
Refer to “Managing Database Groups for Tandem
Mode” on page 127.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 103

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Database Popup Menu

Table 3-21. Waveform List Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Include All Only visible if no database groups have been
Databases in Tandem created. Includes all databases in the Tandem
Mode. Refer to “Plotting Waveforms with the Same
Name using Tandem Mode” on page 124.
Exclude All Only visible when Tandem Mode is selected and no
Databases from database groups have been created. Excludes all
Tandem databases in the Tandem Mode. Refer to “Plotting
Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem
Mode” on page 124.
Open Same as the File > Open menu item to open any
supported file type.
Expand All Expands all currently open databases.
Collapse All Collapses all currently expanded waveform
databases.
Close All Databases Closes all currently loaded databases.
Save All Databases Opens the Save As Dialog Box to allow saving all
databases that contain unsaved changes.
Most Recently Used Same as the File > Database List menu item for
(1,2,3,4,0) Database opening previously opened waveform databases.
List Click 0 More Databases to open an additional
window with older databases for selection.
Hide Waveform List Temporarily hides the Waveform List panel. To
show the panel again, choose View > Waveform
List.
Find Opens the Find Tool Dialog Box to allow searching
in the structure list.

Tip
You can control the visibility of the Database list items by choosing General Options.

Database Popup Menu

To access the Database popup menu, right-click on any database name in the waveform list
panel.

104 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Database Popup Menu

Table 3-22. Database Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Update Waveforms Opens the Update Waveforms Dialog Box in order to update
the currently plotted waveforms in this database. Only
waveforms that match the names within the database are
updated. The update can either replace the existing
waveforms, or they can be shown overlaid with the matching
waveforms from the database. All waveforms, those in the
active graph window, or a specific set of waveforms can be
selected to update.
Run Filter Only visible when the database contains multiple runs. Opens
the Parameter Table Dialog Box that allows you to choose
which runs are to be shown, highlighted or grouped before
you plot them. The icon for the database changes to
indicating that a filter is currently applied.
Plot (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms at this level within a single row at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window is
created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot (Stacked) Plots all waveforms at this level in separate rows at the bottom
of the active graph window. A new graph window is created if
one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms in the database within a single row at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window is
created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Stacked) Plots all waveforms in the database in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window is
created if one doesn't already exist.
Include in Tandem Choose Include from Tandem to include the selected database
from Tandem Mode.
Exclude in Tandem Only visible when Tandem Mode is selected. Choose Exclude
from Tandem to exclude the selected database from Tandem
Mode. The icon adjacent to the database name changes to
indicate the database is excluded.
Manage Database Groups Only visible if at least one database group exists. Opens the
Manage Database Groups dialog box, used to assign databases
to groups for use with Tandem Mode. Refer to “Managing
Database Groups for Tandem Mode” on page 127.
Exclude from Group Removes the selected database from its group.
Rename Opens a dialog box to rename the database.
Descriptive Label... Opens a dialog box to add a descriptive text label. This label
displays next to the database name.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 105

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Folder Popup Menu

Table 3-22. Database Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Item Description
Save As... Opens a Save As Dialog Box for saving the selected databases
to disk.
Close Closes the selected databases. If a database contains unsaved
changes or has waveforms currently plotted in one or more
graph windows, a confirmation box is displayed.
Reload Reloads the selected databases from the disk file if the
simulation has finished, or updates the plotted waveforms for
ongoing simulations using JWDB format.
Show Boundary Elements Turns on boundary elements visibility for the selected
database. Only accessible for .wtcl databases.
Expand Selected Expands the selected database.
Collapse Selected Collapses the selected database.
Properties Displays an information box containing properties associated
with the waveform database.

Folder Popup Menu

To access the Folder popup menu, right-click a folder in a database.
Figure 3-12. Folder Popup Menu

106 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Hierarchy Popup Menu

Table 3-23. Folder Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Update Waveforms Updates the active graph window using the waveforms
from this database. Only waveforms in the graph window
that match the names within the database are updated. The
update can either replace the existing waveforms, or they
can be shown overlaid with the matching waveforms from
the database.
Run Filter Only visible when the analysis folder contains multiple
runs. Opens the Parameter Table Dialog Box that allows
you to choose which runs are to be shown, highlighted or
grouped before you plot them. The icon for the folder
changes to indicating that a filter is currently applied.
Plot (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms at this level within a single row at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot (Stacked) Plots all waveforms at this level in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms in the database within a single row at
the bottom of the active graph window. A new graph
window is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Stacked) Plots all waveforms in the database in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Expand Selected Expands the selected database.
Collapse Selected Collapses the selected database.

Hierarchy Popup Menu

To access the Folder popup menu, right-click a folder in a database.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 107

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Name Popup Menu

Figure 3-13. Hierarchy Popup Menu

Table 3-24. Hierarchy Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Plot (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms at this level within a single row at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot (Stacked) Plots all waveforms at this level in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Overlaid) Plots all waveforms in the database within a single row at
the bottom of the active graph window. A new graph
window is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot All (Stacked) Plots all waveforms in the database in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Expand Selected Expands the selected database.
Collapse Selected Collapses the selected database.

Waveform Name Popup Menu

To access the Waveform Name popup menu, right-click on any waveform name in the
waveform list panel.

108 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu

Figure 3-14. Waveform Name Popup Menu

Table 3-25. Waveform Name Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Plot Plots the waveform in a new row at the bottom of the active
graph window. A new graph window is created if one
doesn't already exist.
Add to Workspace Adds the selected waveforms to the Waveform Calculator
Workspace.
Plot as Digital Plots analog waveforms as digital waveforms, using default
conversion parameters. See also “Transforming Analog
Waveforms to Digital” on page 270.
Plot Histogram Plots a histogram of the waveform data.
Plot CDF Plots a cumulative distribution function of the waveform
data.
Rename Opens a dialog box to rename the waveform.
Save As Opens the Save As Dialog Box to save a copy of the
waveform (with options to overwrite the current
waveform).
Copy Waveform Name(s) Copies the selected waveform's name to the clipboard.

Selected Waveforms Popup Menu

To access the Selected Waveforms popup menu, select multiple waveforms in the waveform list
panel and right-click.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 109

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Workspace Popup Menu

Figure 3-15. Selected Waveforms Popup Menu

Table 3-26. Selected Waveforms Popup Menu Items

Item Description
Plot (Overlaid) Plots the selected waveforms within a single row at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Plot (Stacked) Plots the selected waveforms in separate rows at the
bottom of the active graph window. A new graph window
is created if one doesn't already exist.
Save As Opens the Save As Dialog Box to save a copy of the
waveform (with options to overwrite the current
waveform).
Copy Waveform Name(s) Copies the selected waveform's name to the clipboard.
Plot Difference Plots the difference between the two selected waveforms.
Only available when two waveforms are selected. The
second waveform selected is subtracted from the first
waveform selected.

Workspace Popup Menu

To access the Workspace popup menu, right-click in the workspace area (the area behind the
Wave window(s) which is blue by default).

Table 3-27. Workspace Popup Menu Items

Item Description
New Creates a new workspace.
Rename Opens a dialog box to give the active workspace a user
defined name.

110 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Workspace Popup Menu

Table 3-27. Workspace Popup Menu Items (cont.)

Item Description
Delete Removes the currently active workspace. This item is
unavailable if there is only one workspace.
Shift Left Moves the currently active Workspace tab one position to
the left. This item is unavailable if the currently active
workspace's tab is the leftmost tab.
Shift Right Moves the Workspace tab one position to the right.
This item is unavailable if the Reorder
currently active workspace's
tab is the rightmost tab.
Opens the Reorder Paste
Workspaces dialog box,
from which you can
interactively set the order of
all workspaces.
Creates a new graph window This item is unavailable if the clipboard is empty.
in the workspace and pastes
the contents of the clipboard
in the graph window.
Options... Displays the Workspace Options. Use this to define how
the workspaces are displayed in the application window.
You may also set the application to support a single or
multiple workspaces from this dialog box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 111

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Keyboard and Mouse

Keyboard and Mouse

EZwave has a number of keyboard and mouse shortcut and access features.
Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mouse Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Keyboard Commands
Frequently used EZwave keyboard commands are described here.

Table 3-28. Frequently Used Keyboard Commands

Press To
F2 Unselect All
F5 Add Cursor at Mouse Pointer Location
Ctrl + A Select All
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + N Open New Graph Window
Ctrl + V Paste
Ctrl + W Close Window
Ctrl + X Cut
ESC Dismiss a popup menu, abort an in-progress mouse drag
operation or close a dialog box without applying
selections.

Mouse Strokes
Mouse Strokes provide a convenient way to perform common tasks by simply drawing shapes
using the mouse. For example, drawing the letter “D” deletes the current set of selected objects.
By default, mouse strokes are executed with the middle mouse button. If you do not have a
middle mouse button, use the Edit > Options menu item and then select a keyboard modifier
from the dialog box. Use these keyboard modifiers together with the left mouse button to draw
strokes.

Mouse strokes available with this application are as follows:

File > Open

112 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

Edit > Delete

Edit > Unselect All

View > Zoom Out

View > Zoom In

View > View All

View Area - zooms in to view the area covered by the stroke.

Scroll X Location to Center of Graph Window

File > Close if done within an active graph window or

File > Exit if done on the workspace
Displays all available mouse strokes

Waveform Calculator GUI

The Waveform Calculator enables you to post-process waveforms for advanced analyses or
debugging.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 113

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

Overview
Figure 3-16. Waveform Calculator with Button and Function Help Panels

The user interface of the Waveform Calculator includes a number of components, described in
the following sections.

1 - Chooser Panel
To show or hide the Chooser panel, click the button. The Chooser panel appears on the left-
hand side of the Waveform Calculator and has three tabbed panes:

• The Functions tab contains Built-In Functions and constants, and also any User-
Defined Functions that you have registered with the calculator. Double-clicking a
function name in the Functions tab adds it to the Shell panel. Double-clicking the
function will display a new Function panel (temporarily replacing the Button panel),
enabling you to enter the parameters for the function. Click OK to add the expression to
the Shell panel.

Tip
Some functions have dedicated dialog boxes that allow you to specify additional
options. If available, click the Advanced button in the Function panel to display the
dedicated dialog box.

114 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

• The Workspace tab contains the results generated after you press Enter (or click the
Eval button) to evaluate an expression. Results can be scalars, vectors, and waveforms.
If you right-click on an item, a popup menu enables you to copy or plot the item, or clear
all items.
• The History tab displays a list expressions that you have evaluated in the calculator
(when you are in INFIX mode). If you right-click on an item, a popup menu enables you
to copy or evaluate the item, or clear all items.

2 - Function Help
Display Waveform Calculator function help with the View > Function Help menu item or
toolbar button. The Waveform Calculator displays the description, syntax, and parameters for
the selected function.

3 - Shell Panel
When you select buttons on the calculator, edit function parameters, or drag and drop waveform
names, the Shell panel is updated. You can also edit the text directly. Once you have the desired
entries, press Enter (or click the Eval button). The results display in the Workspace tab of the
Choose panel and in the Shell panel.

Expressions may be entered using IEEE notation (for example, 5T, 3.2u), SPICE notation (for
example, 7.1MEG, 0.2N), or engineering notation (for example, 1.1e+3, 6e-2).
Table 3-29. Calculator Shell Key Binds
ENTER Evaluate expression
SHIFT + ENTER Evaluate expression and then display prompt with same
expression
SHIFT + CTRL +V Paste and keep line jump
MIDDLE MOUSE Paste and keep line jump
BUTTON
UP Browse up command history
DOWN Browse down command history
CTRL + L Clear terminal
CTRL + C Copy
CTRL + V Paste
CTRL + X Cut
CTRL + A Select all
HOME Go to the beginning of the expression
END Go to the end of the expression

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 115

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

Table 3-29. Calculator Shell Key Binds (cont.)

BACKSPACE Delete characters or selection to the left
CTRL + BACKSPACE Delete word or selection to the left
DEL Delete characters or selection to the right
CTRL + DEL Delete word or selection to the right

Table 3-30. Calculator Shell Mouse Operations

Double left-click Select word or function
Triple left-click Select line
CTRL + left-click Trigger generic auto-form mode
Right-click Contextual menu

Tip
See also “Waveform Calculator Shell Commands” on page 306.

4 - Button Panel
To show or hide the Button panel, click the button. There are functions located on the
buttons of the Waveform Calculator and also in the functions on the Functions tab one the
Chooser panel of the calculator. The Button panel does not include a dedicated button for every
function or operator. The Button panel changes based on the level you choose from the
dropdown list:

• Complex Buttons
• Jitter Buttons
• Logical Buttons
• Phase Noise Buttons
• RF Buttons
• Signal Processing Buttons
• Statistical Buttons
• Trigonometric Buttons

5 - Evaluation Mode Bar

On the bottom-right corner of the Waveform Calculator, the Evaluation Mode Bar shows the
input and evaluation mode (e.g., INFIX for Infix mode) and the trigonometric angle mode (e.g.,
DEG for Degrees).

116 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

6 - Waveform Calculator Status Bar

The Status Bar of the Waveform Calculator shows whether the calculator is in busy or ready
state. It also shows error messages if the input expression has a syntax error.

Use the Edit > Options menu item of the Waveform Calculator application window to control
the calculator settings.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator Dialog Boxes
bloc

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 117

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
EZwave GUI Overview
Waveform Calculator GUI

118 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 4
Add Waveforms

This section describes how to plot and manage different types of waveforms.
Waveform Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Starting EZwave and Loading a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Single Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Multiple Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Managing Waveform Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Modifying Axis Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Aligning Y-Axes with Different Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Creating Multiple Y-Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Y-Axis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Modifying Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Hiding Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Unhiding Hidden Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Modifying Waveform Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modifying the Appearance of Row Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specialized Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Plotting Complex-Valued Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Plotting wreal Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Plotting Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Displaying Bus Values as a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Plotting Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Plotting Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Plotting CDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displaying Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform Using an Index File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Digital Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Index File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Updating Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configuring Automatic Reloading of Waveform Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manually Updating Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 119

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Waveform Basics

Waveform Basics
You can plot and manage single or multiple waveforms.
Starting EZwave and Loading a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Single Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Plotting a Single Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Moving a Plotted Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Copying a Plotted Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Multiple Waveform Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Plotting Multiple Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Managing Database Groups for Tandem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Plotting the Difference Between Two Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Creating an XY Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Managing Waveform Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Grouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding a Waveform to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a Waveform from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating an Empty Waveform Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ungrouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Starting EZwave and Loading a Database

Describes how you launch EZwave and load a database containing waveform data.
Procedure
1. Launch the EZwave Viewer by entering the following command at the command line:
ezwave

2. Choose File > Open or click the Open toolbar icon, and select a database to load
into EZwave. It must be one of the supported file types, as listed in the topic “Supported
File Types” on page 45.

120 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Single Waveform Plots

Single Waveform Plots

You can plot a single waveform, and move and copy a plotted waveform.
Plotting a Single Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Moving a Plotted Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Copying a Plotted Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Plotting a Single Waveform

You can plot a single waveform in a graph window.
Procedure
Find the name of the waveform you want to plot in the lower section of the Waveform List
Panel and use one of the following methods to plot it:

• Double-click the waveform name.

If an active graph window is open, the waveform is plotted in that window.
Otherwise, the waveform is plotted in a new graph window.
• Right-click the waveform name and choose Plot from the Waveform Name Popup
Menu.
If an active graph window is open, the waveform is plotted in that window.
Otherwise, a new graph window opens and the waveform is plotted in it.
• Do one of the following drag and drop operations:
If you want to... Do the following...
Plot the waveform in a new graph window Drag the waveform onto the workspace.
in the current workspace.
Plot the waveform in a new row at the top Drag the waveform to the top of the graph
of an existing graph window. window.
Overlay the waveform onto an existing Drag the waveform onto the existing
waveform in the same row in a graph waveform or waveform label in the graph
window. window.
Plot the waveforms in a new row above an Drag the waveform above the existing
existing waveform in a graph window. waveform in the graph window.
Plot the waveforms in a new row between Drag the waveform between the existing rows
existing rows in a graph window. in the graph window.
Plot the waveforms in a new row at the Drag the waveform to the bottom of the graph
bottom of a graph window. window.
Overlay the waveform onto the y-axis. Drag the waveform onto the y-axis.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 121

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Single Waveform Plots

If you want to... Do the following...

Plot the waveform on a new graph window Drag the waveform onto the Workspace tab.
in an existing workspace.
Plot the waveforms in graph window in a Drag the waveform onto an empty part of the
new workspace. workspace tabbed area.

Related Topics
Waveform List Panel
Waveform Name Popup Menu
Plotting Multiple Waveforms

Moving a Plotted Waveform

You can move a plotted waveform from one row to another row within a graph window or from
one graph window to another graph window.
Procedure
1. Select the waveform label in the graph window. This may be to the right, left, above or
below the plotted waveform, depending on layout option.
2. Drag the waveform to a different row in the same graph window or a row in a different
graph window.

Copying a Plotted Waveform

You can copy a plotted waveform from one row to another row within a graph window or from
one graph window to another graph window.
Procedure
1. Select the waveform label in the graph window. This may be to the right, left, above or
below the plotted waveform, depending on layout option.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press and hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the waveform to a different row in
the same graph window, or a row in a different graph window.
• Right-click on the waveform, choose Copy, then place the cursor in a different row
in the same graph window, or a row in a different graph window, and choose Paste.

122 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

Multiple Waveform Plots

You can plot a multiple waveforms, plot the difference between two waveforms and create XY
plots.
Plotting Multiple Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Managing Database Groups for Tandem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Plotting the Difference Between Two Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Creating an XY Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Plotting Multiple Waveforms

You can plot multiple waveforms in one procedure.
Restrictions and Limitations
• Waveforms with incompatible x-axis domains cannot appear together in the same graph
window. X-axis domains are compatible if they share the same units, even if they have
different unit titles; for example Frequency(Hz) and DIFF(Hz).
• For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are displayed in the
Waveform List Panel. Loaded waveforms are waveforms that have been plotted once or
waveforms from a hierarchy selected once in the tree view of the Waveform List Panel.
Refer to “Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on page 1186.
Procedure
1. To select the waveforms to be plotted in the Waveform List Panel, press the Ctrl key
and click the name of each waveform; or press the Shift key and click the first and last
waveforms in a sequence.
2. Use one of the following methods to plot them:
• Drag the waveforms onto the workspace or a graph window.
Digital waveforms are plotted stacked in separate rows. Analog waveforms are
plotted overlaid in a single row regardless of the order of selection.
• Right-click and choose one of the following from the Selected Waveforms Popup
Menu:
If you want to... Do the following...
Plot all the waveforms together in the same row. Choose Plot (Overlaid)
Plot all the waveforms separately in different rows. Choose Plot (Stacked)
Plot the waveforms as a bus. Choose Plot as Bus

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 123

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

Note
When creating a bus using Plot as Bus and a conversion from analog to digital is
needed (at least one of the bits is analog), a default threshold is calculated as
(min_y + max_y)/2 from the first analog waveform that is not flat (min_y == max_y
== 0) by iterating from MSB to LSB. Alternatively, a single threshold, or two
thresholds, may be specified. Refer to the Conversion tab in “Transformation
Options” on page 488.

If an active graph window is open, the newly added waveforms are added in new rows at
the bottom of the window. Otherwise, the waveforms are added to a new graph window.
Related Topics
Waveform List Panel
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu
Transformation Options
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode

Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem

Mode
You can automatically plot waveforms with the same name from different databases, by
activating tandem mode. This is useful, for example, when you want to visually compare
waveforms from multiple simulation runs. When tandem mode is activated and source
waveforms are plotted using the EZwave GUI, a search is made for waveforms with the same
names in different databases and plotted with the source waveforms.
Tip
You can create database groups, and then only databases in the same group as the source
waveform’s database are searched for waveforms with the same name. If no database
groups have been created, all opened databases are searched. Refer to “Managing Database
Groups for Tandem Mode” on page 127.

Restrictions and Limitations

• Some graphical plots are not considered for tandem mode: Plot CDF, Plot Histogram,
Plot as Bus, Plot Difference.
• Measures and expressions are not considered, regardless of the dialog they are computed
from: Waveform Calculator, Measurement Tool, or any other dialog from the Tools
menu.

124 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

Procedure
1. Choose View > Tandem Mode or click the Tandem Mode icon from the toolbar
to activate tandem mode.
2. Use one of the following methods to plot them:
• Double-click a waveform in the Waveform List.
• Drag a waveform onto the workspace or a graph window.
• Right-click on a folder, hierarchy or waveform, and choose one of the following
from the Popup Menu:
If you want to... Do the following:
Plot (when a single waveform is selected) Choose Plot
Plot all the waveforms together in the same Choose Plot (Overlaid)
row.
Plot all the waveforms separately in Choose Plot (Stacked)
different rows.
Plot all the waveforms in the database or Choose Plot All (Overlaid)
folder in the same row.
Plot the waveforms in the database or folder Choose Plot All (Stacked)
separately in different rows.

3. Optionally:

If you want to... Do the following:

Always display the Database Name for each Choose Format > Waveform Names
waveform, when using tandem mode. Display to open the Waveform Names
Display Dialog Box and select Show
Database Name in Tandem Mode.
Alternatively, choose Edit > Options from
the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the
Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Waveform Name. Select the option
Show Database Name in Tandem Mode on
the Waveform Name Options dialog box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 125

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

If you want to... Do the following:

Plot waveforms in the same database with Choose Edit > Options from the main menu
the same color, when using tandem mode. to open the EZwave Display Preferences
Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and
Colors folder on the left side, and choose
Waveform Colors. Select the option Use
Same Waveform Color Per Database in
Tandem Mode on the Waveform Colors
Options dialog box. Enabled by default.
Apply tandem mode on a subset of loaded Right-click on a database in the Waveform
databases. List and choose Exclude from Tandem
from the Popup Menu. The icon adjacent to
the database name changes to indicate the
database is excluded. Choose Include in
Tandem to include the database again.
Apply tandem mode to a group of databases. Choose Edit > Groups > Group Databases
and use the dialog box to create groups and
assign databases to groups. For more
information, refer to “Managing Database
Groups for Tandem Mode” on page 127.
Only databases in the same group as the
source waveform are considered in tandem
mode.
4. Click the Tandem Mode icon from the toolbar again when you are ready to deactivate
tandem mode.
Results
Waveforms with the same name from different databases are plotted in a graph window.
Note
Tandem mode may only be used from within the GUI, and is not supported when using TCL
or internal commands.

Related Topics
Waveform List Panel
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu
Manually Updating Waveforms
Plotting Multiple Waveforms
Managing Database Groups for Tandem Mode

126 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

Managing Database Groups for Tandem Mode

You can create and manage groups containing multiple databases for use with tandem mode.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Groups > Group Databases from the main menu. The Manage
Database Groups dialog box opens, listing the currently open databases.

2. To add a database to a new group, select the database from the table and click the Group
button. A new group is created and the database is assigned to that group.
3. To add a database to an existing group, select the database from the table, choose the
required group from the Select Group dropdown menu and click the Add to button. The
database is assigned to the selected group.
4. To remove a database from a group, select the database from the table and click the
Ungroup button.

Tip
You can use the Database Search field to find databases. This is useful when many
databases are open.

5. Click OK to finalize the group-database associations and close the dialog box.
When Tandem Mode is activated, the database group number is displayed adjacent to
the each database in the Currently Open Databases list. Only databases in the same
group as the source waveform’s database are considered in tandem mode.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 127

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Multiple Waveform Plots

For more information, refer to “Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem
Mode” on page 124.
Related Topics
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode

Plotting the Difference Between Two Waveforms

You can subtract two waveforms and plot the difference between them.
Procedure
1. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two waveforms from the Waveform List Panel. The
order you select the waveforms is important—the second waveform selected is
subtracted from the first.
2. Right-click and choose Plot Difference from the Selected Waveforms Popup Menu.
Results
The resulting waveform is plotted in a graph window.
Related Topics
Waveform List Panel
Selected Waveforms Popup Menu

Creating an XY Plot
You can plot a waveform as a function of another waveform.
Procedure
1. Plot the desired waveforms in the same graph row.
2. Right-click the waveform that is to be the x-axis and choose Set as X Axis from the
Waveform Popup Menu.
Results
The resulting XY plot waveform displays in a new graph window.
Related Topics
Waveform Popup Menu

128 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Managing Waveform Groups

Managing Waveform Groups

You can organize waveforms by creating and using waveform groups, so that they can be
manipulated together.
Grouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding a Waveform to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a Waveform from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating an Empty Waveform Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ungrouping Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Grouping Waveforms
You can organize waveforms by grouping them together within a graph window so they can be
manipulated together.
A group is shown as an expandable label in the graph window, with the waveforms it contains
collapsed, in other words hidden from view, beneath it. Modifying properties such as color or
line style of a group applies to all waveforms in the group of the appropriate type (analog,
digital or bus).

All waveforms with a compatible domain axis can be grouped, except complex waveforms.
Transformed complex waveforms can be grouped, however.

Groups can themselves be included in a group. Subgroups can be expanded and collapsed in the
graph window. Bus and record waveforms can also be expanded and collapsed within a group.

When compound waveforms are grouped, each element is treated as an independent waveform
within the group.

Restrictions and Limitations

• Expression and measurements cannot be performed directly on a group. They can only
be performed on individual waveforms within the group.
• Saving grouped waveforms or a calc database containing such groups is not supported in
conjunction with any kind of X Range Setup or Data Sampling dialog fields of the Save
As dialog.
Procedure
1. Select the required waveforms in the graph window. Right-click and choose Groups, or
use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-G, or choose Edit > Groups > Group Waveforms.
2. Enter a name for the group and click OK.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 129

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Managing Waveform Groups

By default, the group name is Group0. Subsequent groups are named Group1, Group2,
and so on. If you enter a name for the group, for example My_Group, then subsequent
groups are named My_Group0, My_Group1 and so on.
Once a group is created, the waveform labels appear as a hierarchical tree.

Note
When specifying a name for a new group, any existing group of the same name is
overwritten without warning.

3. Expand and collapse the tree to show and hide the waveforms within the group, by
clicking the + and - icons. Figure 4-1 shows an expanded waveform group.
Figure 4-1. Expanded Waveform Group

Adding a Waveform to a Group

You can add a waveform to an existing waveform group.

130 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Managing Waveform Groups

Procedure
Drag the waveform name from the waveform list, any window, or from within a group onto the
destination group’s label.

Note
When moving a plotted waveform in or out of a group, or from one group to another,
any measurements attached to it are kept in the group. However, multiple waveform
measurements such as Intersect or Add Delta are not kept when the related source
waveforms are moved into a group.

Results
The waveform is added to the destination from the group.

Removing a Waveform from a Group

You can delete a waveform from a group.
Procedure
Do one of the following:

• Select the waveform’s label and press the Delete key.

• Right-click on the label and choose Delete.
Results
The waveform is removed from the group, and from the graph window.

Creating an Empty Waveform Group

You can create an empty waveform group.
Procedure
1. Clear any current waveform selection.
2. Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Groups > Group Waveforms from the main menu.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-G.
3. (Optional) Modify the suggested group name on the Create Waveform Group dialog
box.
4. Click OK.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 131

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms

Results
An empty waveform group is created.
Related Topics
add wave

Ungrouping Waveforms
Waveforms can be removed from a waveform group, and the group deleted.
Restrictions and Limitations
• After performing an ungroup action on grouped waveforms, although the group is
removed from the graph window, it is not removed from the database.
• There is no Tcl command to ungroup waveforms.
Procedure
Right-click the group and choose Ungroup Waveforms.

Note
It is possible to select multiple waveform groups and ungroup them in a single
action, as long as no non-grouped waveforms are selected at the time.

Related Topics
add wave

Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms

When analog and digital waveforms are plotted, the order in which the waveforms are selected
will dictate whether the plotted waveforms appear together in a single row (overlaid) or in new
rows (stacked).
• Digital waveforms cannot be plotted overlaid over other digital waveforms.
• Digital waveforms can be plotted over analog waveforms (overlaid).
• Analog waveforms can be plotted over analog and digital waveforms (overlaid).
• When plotting multiple (analog and digital) waveforms, an analog waveform must be
selected first from the Waveform List Panel if both analog and digital waveforms are to
be plotted in the same row.
• Digital waveforms are plotted in separate rows until an analog waveform is selected.
Subsequent waveforms are plotted overlaid on that waveform.

132 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Rules when Plotting Analog and Digital Waveforms

• When using drag and drop to plot or move multiple waveforms, digital waveforms are
plotted stacked in separate rows and analog waveforms are plotted overlaid in a single
row regardless of the order of selection. To avoid this default behavior, use the Selected
Waveforms Popup Menu to specify plotting overlaid or stacked.
Related Topics
Plotting Multiple Waveforms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 133

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Modifying Axis Settings

Modifying Axis Settings

You can adjust the x and y-axes’ scale and alignment settings.
Aligning Y-Axes with Different Scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Creating Multiple Y-Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Y-Axis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Aligning Y-Axes with Different Scales

Overlaid waveforms may have different y-axes with different scales. You can specify the axes’
marker spacing and how the axes are aligned.
For example, Figure 4-2 shows two waveforms overlaid with different y-axes. The y-axes are
lined up at y=20, but have different scales and so do not line up elsewhere.

Figure 4-2. Overlaid Waveforms With Different Y-Axes Scales

Procedure
1. In a graph window showing two or more y-axes, right-click the y-axis that is to be set as
the reference axis and choose Set As Reference Axis to open the Set Reference Y Axis
dialog box.
2. In the Reference Y Axis section, in the field labeled with the y-axis that is to be the
reference y-axis specify the value that the other axis will align to.

134 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Creating Multiple Y-Axes

3. In the Reference Y Axis section, in the Spacing field specify the value for the spacing of
the reference axis.
4. In the Y Axis section, specify the alignment value and spacing for the non-reference
axis (or axes).
5. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Results
Figure 4-3 shows the same waveforms after realigning. In this example, the y-axes are realigned
to 0 and the spacing of axis Y2 is changed to 40.
Figure 4-3. Realigned Y-Axes

To reset the axes to their original scaling and alignment, right-click the reference axis, choose
Unset Reference Axis, and click the View All icon from the toolbar.

Related Topics
wave yaxis

Creating Multiple Y-Axes

Plotting complex waveforms and using overlaid transformations will automatically create
multiple y-axes, as different types of results use different units (for example, db or phase). For
regular waveforms, you can create additional y-axes by specifying the -newyaxis argument on
the add wave Tcl command.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 135

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Changing Y-Axis Settings

Procedure
Use the following command to create a single row with two axes named Y1 and Y2:

add wave -overlay -terminals tvin -newyaxis tvbg

The first axis is created by default, and is named Y1. A second axis is created and is
named Y2, according to the default naming convention for new axes, Y(n+1).
Related Topics
add wave

Changing Y-Axis Settings

You can change the y-axis settings using the Tcl command wave yaxis.
Procedure
1. When a row contains a single y-axis, you can use the wave yaxis command to set the
scale of the axis in the first row in the active graph window. For example, to set the scale
of the axis to log2, use:
wave yaxis -row 1 -scale log2

2. When a row contains multiple y-axes, any changes to the axis settings affect the first
axis in the row, Y1. To make changes to a different axis in the row, use the -axis
argument to specify it. For example, to set the scale of the axis Y2, located in the second
row, to log10, use:
wave yaxis -row 2 -axis Y2 -scale log10

Note
Plotting complex waveforms and using overlaid transformations will automatically
create multiple y-axes, as different types of results will use different units (for
example, db or phase).

The first axis, created by default, is named Y1. Subsequent axes are named according to
the default naming convention, Y(n+1).
Related Topics
add wave
wave yaxis

136 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Modifying Waveforms

Modifying Waveforms
You can modify existing waveforms in various ways once they are plotted in the graph window.
Hiding Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Unhiding Hidden Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Modifying Waveform Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modifying the Appearance of Row Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Hiding Waveforms
When several waveforms are displayed in a graph window, you can temporarily hide some of
them from view to make the graph window easier to interpret.
Procedure
Select the waveform in the active graph window, right-click and choose Hide Waveform from
the popup menu.

Results
The waveform label is displayed in the active graph window but the waveform is hidden. The
label is dimmed indicating the hide condition. The Hide Waveform action differs from Edit >
Delete as the waveform is still within the window and available for later viewing.
Related Topics
Modifying Waveform Properties
Waveform Popup Menu

Unhiding Hidden Waveforms

You can unhide a hidden waveform.
Procedure
Right-click the label for the hidden waveform and uncheck Hide Waveform from the popup
menu.

Results
The waveform is re-displayed in the graph window. The label is undimmed.
Related Topics
Modifying Waveform Properties
Waveform Popup Menu

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 137

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Modifying Waveform Properties

Modifying Waveform Properties

You can modify the appearance, display parameters, and transformations applied to waveforms.
The properties available to modify depend on whether you want to modify the properties of one
waveform or multiple waveforms, and whether it is analog, digital, or a bus.
Procedure
1. In the graph window, right-click the waveform or the label of the waveform whose
properties you want to modify, and choose Properties. For multiple waveforms, Ctrl-
click or Shift-click the waveforms whose properties you want to modify, then right-
click the label of one of the highlighted waveforms, or right-click one of the highlighted
waveforms. This opens the Waveform Properties dialog box (For Analog Waveforms).
2. Do one of the following operations:

If you want to... Do the following...

For a single selected waveform, modify its Modify the appropriate property in
name or a visual effect such as color, line style, the Appearance tab. The options
line width, or the symbol used for data points. vary depending on the type of
waveform.
For a single selected waveform, apply Choose the appropriate
transformations to it. transformations in the
Transformations tab. You can
choose different kinds of
transformations to apply if the
waveform is analog.
For multiple analog waveforms, modify their Modify the appropriate properties
visual effects. in the Analog Waveform
Properties tab.
For multiple digital waveforms, modify their Modify the appropriate properties
visual effects. in the Digital Waveform
Properties tab.
For multiple waveforms, select the radix used In the Radix Waveform
for displaying waveform state values. Properties tab, select the radix
used for displaying waveform state
values. This tab is only available
for digital buses or analog
waveforms containing integer data.

3. Click OK to close the Waveform Properties dialog box.

Related Topics
Waveform Popup Menu
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)

138 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Modifying the Appearance of Row Titles

Modifying the Appearance of Row Titles

When you add a title to a newly plotted waveform it is formatted according to the global
defaults. You can override the appearance of each row title individually.
The global defaults are set in the Row Title Options.

Note
Once custom properties are applied to a row title, it will not be affected by any changes to
global row title settings.

Procedure
1. Add a row title to a waveform by right-clicking the waveform header, choosing Row
Title and specifying a label in the Row Title dialog box.
2. Right-click the row title to modify and choose Properties.
3. Edit the font or color, or choose to hide the title outline as required in the Row Title
Properties dialog box, then click OK to apply the change.

Note
Clicking the Default button resets the row title to the global default.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 139

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Specialized Plotting

Specialized Plotting
There are particular rules and procedures for plotting specialized kinds of waveforms and
specialized kinds of plots.
Plotting Complex-Valued Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Plotting wreal Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Plotting Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Displaying Bus Values as a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Plotting Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Plotting Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Plotting CDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Plotting Complex-Valued Waveforms

Complex-valued waveforms are represented in two dimensions, and so require a transformation
to be applied to their data before they can be displayed in a graph window.
These transformations can:

• Separate the waveform into:

o Real and imaginary parts
o Gain (dB) and phase parts
o Magnitude and phase parts
o Any combination or single element of these.
• Plot value pairs of complex-values against each other in charts such as:
o Complex plane plots
o Polar charts
o Smith charts.
This enables the waveform to be displayed in a variety of ways, showing the information
required about the individual points.

You can control how complex-valued waveforms are displayed using the Transformation
Options.

Related Topics
Plotting a Single Waveform
Plotting Multiple Waveforms

140 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Plotting wreal Waveforms

Transformation Options

Plotting wreal Waveforms

You can display wreal waveforms as step waveforms or railroad waveforms.
• Step Waveforms
Here wreal waveforms are displayed similar to real waveforms. With step waveforms
the “X” and “Z” states are displayed as colored rectangles. By default, EZwave displays
wreal waveforms as step waveforms.
Figure 4-4. Step Waveform

• Railroad Waveforms
Here wreal waveforms are displayed as a railroad waveform where the “X” and “Z”
states as displayed as colored circles along a timeline.
Figure 4-5. Railroad Waveform

You can control how wreal waveforms are displayed using the Waveform Options.

Related Topics
Specialized Plotting

Plotting Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus

You can create a bus from multiple digital waveforms (also known as bits).
Procedure
1. In the Waveform List Panel, select the waveforms to plot as a bus.
2. Right-mouse click and choose Plot as Bus from the Selected Waveforms Popup Menu
menu.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 141

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Displaying Bus Values as a String

3. Click the plus sign (+) next to the bus name, to show the individual digital waveforms.
Red squares indicate when there is an 'event' on a waveform but it does not change state.

Note
MSB to LSB order is determined through the order of selection before choosing Plot
as Bus. The first selected waveform is MSB and the last is LSB.

Figure 4-6. Multiple Bit Waveforms as a Bus

Note
When creating a bus using Plot as Bus and a conversion from analog to digital is
needed (at least one of the bits is analog), a default threshold is calculated as (min_y
+ max_y)/2 from the first analog waveform that is not flat (min_y == max_y) by
iterating from MSB to LSB. Alternatively, a single threshold, or two thresholds, may be
specified. Refer to the Conversion tab in “Transformation Options” on page 488.

Related Topics
Transformation Options

Displaying Bus Values as a String

You can display bus values as strings, by setting up a file with mappings between the values and
strings.
Figure 4-7. Bus Display with Value Strings

Prerequisites
There must be a file with a .tcl extension containing a Tcl command radix define specifying the
strings that are displayed in the place of specific numerical values in the bus. For example, a
radix named States might be defined as follows:

radix define States {

142 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Plotting Assertions

12'b000000000000, IDLE

12'b111000000110, CTRL

12'b000100100110, WORK1

12'b110000110110, WORK2

Procedure
1. Open the radix definition .tcl file by choosing File > Open.
2. Select the required waveforms, right-click and choose Plot as Bus.
3. Right-click on the plotted bus and choose Radix from the Waveform Popup Menu.
4. Select the name of the radix defined in the Tcl file from the options available.
Related Topics
Working with a Bus
Tcl Scripting Support

Plotting Assertions
Describes the assertions you can display.
• VHDL-AMS assertions
• SPICE Safe Operating Area (SOA) assertions
• Condition Coverage for VHDL-AMS if-use and case-use.
These are displayed as a waveform group.

Note
Assertions and SOA are supported for display purposes only. They are not supported in
post-processing or waveform comparison.

Table 4-1 summarizes the graphic elements used in the graph window for assertions:
Table 4-1. Graphic Elements for Assertions
Graphic Element Meaning
Blue line Assertion is inactive
Green line Assertion is active

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 143

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Plotting Assertions

Table 4-1. Graphic Elements for Assertions (cont.)

Graphic Element Meaning
Red line1 Assertion failed
Blue square Assertion starts
Green triangle Assertion passed
Red triangle Assertion failed
Red triangle with horizontal red line below1 Assertion failed, crossed the upper boundary
Inverted red triangle with horizontal red line Assertion failed, crossed the lower boundary
above1
Yellow triangle Antecedent match occurred in assertion
1. Applies only to SPICE SOA assertions.

Figure 4-8. Graph Window With a VHDL-AMS Assertion

For SPICE SOA assertions, a blue line means that the SOA check is off, or inactive. Green and
red lines indicate that the SOA checks are being made. Green means that the check is passing.
Red means it is failing.

The triangles, pointing either up or down, indicate if the target waveform is passing up into a
fail-or-pass region or down into a fail-or-pass region. Green indicates when the assertion is
becoming true, and red indicates when it is becoming false.

144 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Plotting Histograms

Figure 4-9. Graph Window With an SOA Assertion

Tip
See also: Integration with Questa SIM Verification Methodology in the Questa ADMS
User’s Manual, .CHECKSOA command in the Eldo Reference Manual, Plotting Safe
Operating Area Limits in the Eldo User’s Manual.

Plotting Histograms
You can plot waveform data as a histogram, including a number of statistical measures such as
mean, the Gaussian curve matching the mean and standard deviation, and the lower and upper
bounds. The measures to display are user-defined, as is the number of bins. When plotting a
histogram, you can either accept the default histogram preferences and generate the histogram
in a single step, or you can configure each histogram as it is plotted.
There are two kinds of histogram:

• General Purpose Histogram

This histogram is derived from a waveform with additional, user-defined measures.
• Histogram from a Monte Carlo Analysis
This histogram is based on measures provided by Eldo, which allows an expanded set of
measures to be displayed over those available in the general purpose histogram. The
default histogram plot settings are ignored, as the measures to display are dictated by the
.wdb file generated by Eldo.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 145

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Plotting CDFs

Tip
You can configure the default appearance of histograms using the Histogram
Options.

Procedure
1. Right-click a waveform in the Waveform List Panel, and choose Plot. The waveform is
added to the graph window.
2. Right-click the waveform or waveform name and choose Plot Histogram. The
histogram is plotted, with measures displayed based on the histogram preferences set, or
the contents of the .wdb file, as applicable.
3. Once you have plotted a waveform, you can edit the options used to configure its
display—overriding the default preferences—by right-clicking a histogram and
selecting Histogram. The dialog box that opens offers the same options available in the
Histogram Plot Options, but any changes are only applied to the current histogram; the
global preferences are unchanged.

Tip
See also the Waveform Calculator Function histogram and Tcl command wave
histogram and also .HISTOGRAM in the Eldo Reference Manual.

Related Topics
histogram
wave histogram
Histogram Plot Options
Histogram Measures Options
Histogram Legend Options
Histogram Options

Plotting CDFs
You can plot waveform data as a CDF (Cumulative Density Function), including a number of
statistical measures such as mean, the Gaussian curve matching the mean and standard
deviation, and the lower and upper bounds. When plotting a CDF, you can either accept the
default CDF preferences and generate the CDF in a single step, or you can configure each CDF
as it is plotted.
There are two kinds of CDF:

• General Purpose CDF

This CDF is derived from a waveform with additional, user-defined measures.

146 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Plotting CDFs

• CDF from a Monte Carlo Analysis

This CDF is based on measures provided by Eldo, which allows an expanded set of
measures to be displayed over those available in the general purpose CDF. The default
CDF plot settings are ignored, as the measures to display are dictated by the .wdb file
generated by Eldo.
Procedure
1. Right-click a waveform in the Waveform List Panel, and choose Plot. The waveform is
added to the graph window.
2. Right-click the waveform or waveform name and choose Plot CDF. The CDF is plotted,
with measures displayed based on the CDF preferences set, or the contents of the .wdb
file, as applicable.
Figure 4-10. Example CDF Plot

3. Once you have plotted a waveform, you can edit the options used to configure its
display—overriding the default preferences—by right-clicking a CDF and selecting
CDF. The dialog box that opens offers the same options available in the CDF Plot
Options, but any changes are only applied to the current CDF; the global preferences are
unchanged.

Tip
See also the Waveform Calculator Function cdf and Tcl command wave cdf, and
also .CDF in the Eldo Reference Manual.

Related Topics
cdf
wave cdf

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 147

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Plotting CDFs

CDF Plot Options

CDF Measures Options
CDF Legend Options

148 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Compound Waveforms

Compound Waveforms
A compound waveform is a group of waveforms containing results of several simulations for
the same node. They can be generated from multiple-run sweep analyses specified for example
by .STEP or .ALTER simulation commands. This section describes the tasks related to
compound waveforms.
Displaying Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform Using an Index File . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Digital Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Index File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Displaying Compound Waveforms

By default compound waveforms are displayed using the same color for all runs. You can
expand the display to show the individual element names and run parameters, and show the
elements waveforms displayed in different colors.
Note
When multiple runs are displayed as a compound waveform, any measurements made are
performed on the entire set of runs. To make measurements on individual runs, you first
need to plot the individual elements. See Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single
Elements.

Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display Preferences
Dialog Box.
2. Choose Multiple Run from the list on the left-hand side of the EZwave Display
Preferences dialog box. This displays Multiple Run Options.
3. Choose Display as Compound.
4. To display the names of each element, choose Expand Single Element Names.
5. To display the run parameters associated with each component waveform in the graph
windows and also in the Waveform List panel (Tree view), choose Show Single
Element Names With Run Parameters.
6. To display a single color for all waveforms from the same simulation run, check Color-
Code Each Single Element.
7. Click OK to accept the changes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 149

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements

Results
When you plot a compound waveform, the Multiple Run preferences you have set are used. An
example is shown in Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11. Expanded Compound Waveform Names With Run Parameters

Tip
You can click on the [+] or [-] symbol that appears to the left of the displayed compound
waveform name to individually expand or hide the element names.

Related Topics
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box
Multiple Run Options
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements

Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single

Elements
You can separate the individual elements of a compound waveform. Each element is displayed
in a different color.
Note
When multiple runs are displayed as a single elements, you can make measurements on
individual runs. To make measurements on the entire compound waveform, you need to plot
the runs as a compound waveform. See Displaying Compound Waveforms.

Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display Preferences
Dialog Box.

150 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Displaying Compound Waveforms as Single Elements

2. Choose Multiple Run from the list on the left-hand side of the EZwave Display
Preferences dialog box. This displays the Multiple Run Options.
3. Choose Display as Single Elements.
4. To display the run parameters associated with each component waveform in the graph
windows and also in the Waveform List panel (Tree view), choose Show Single
Element Names with Run Parameters.
5. To display a single color for all waveforms from the same simulation run, check Color-
Code Each Single Element.
6. Click OK to accept the changes.
Results
The elements that make up the compound waveform are displayed with different colors for each
element. If you chose to display the run parameters, they are displayed next to the waveform
names.
Figure 4-12. Compound Waveforms as Single Elements With Run Parameters

Note
When a multiple run is displayed as single elements, if a measurement is taken on a run, this
measurement will not be taken automatically for subsequent simulated runs. Moreover, if a
user display is set for a run, it is not applied to subsequent simulated runs.

Related Topics
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 151

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform Using an Index File

Multiple Run Options

Displaying Compound Waveforms

Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform

Using an Index File
When running multiple corner simulations, the output may be saved as individual waveform
databases, each one referencing a specific corner. You can use an index file to define both the
path to each waveform database file and the parameters used to define the corner. You can then
use this file in EZwave to load all of the waveforms as a compound waveform, and to
interrogate the parameters in a single interface.
Note
The creation of a compound waveform using Tcl/SWD scripts is supported via the dataset
merge command. See the Tcl Scripting Support appendix for more information.

Prerequisites
• You must have completed all simulation runs, and have access to the waveform database
files.
• You must have created an index file; see the Index File Format for full details.
• In order to inspect the parameters for each corner, the option Compound Waveform
Display must be set to Display as Compound in the Multiple Run Options.
Procedure
1. Choose File > Open, browse to the index file and click Open.
The waveform data from each file is merged into a compound waveform. The new
database is named “merge_” and suffixed with an incrementing number. The new
database is shown in the Waveform List panel.

Note
The new waveform database is created in an unsaved state.

2. Click the compound waveform database to view the waveforms, and then plot any/all as
required.
3. Right-click a waveform name and choose Parameter Table. The Parameter Table
Dialog Box opens, enabling you to view the parameters used to generate each corner.
Related Topics
dataset merge
Tcl Scripting Support

152 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Digital Compound Waveforms

Index File Format

Digital Compound Waveforms

The runs of a digital compound waveform may be displayed individually as single elements, or
all together in the form of a bus.
Note
When all runs of a digital compound waveform are displayed all together (in the form of a
bus), there is the limitation that you cannot right-click on the bus to open the Parameter
Table to view the parameters. The workaround is to right-click on the database or analysis
folder and choose Run Filter from the popup menu to open the Parameter Table Dialog Box.
Set up the filter before plotting the waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 153

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Index File Format

Index File Format

Input for: EZwave Compound Waveform feature. Generated by: user.
An Index file is a user-generated file which references multiple waveform databases, each
containing the waveform data from a single run of a multiple-run simulation. When loaded into
EZwave, it enables all referenced waveforms to be automatically combined into a compound
waveform, along with all parameter data.
Index files have the extension .wdbparam.

Format
An Index file must conform to the following formatting and syntax rules:

• Each RUN statement must include spaces between the RUN keyword, run index,
database path, and parameter definitions.
• RUN statements are separated by carriage returns.
• To use a quotation mark (") or equals sign (=) in the database path or parameter name/
value, prefix it with the backslash character (\), as these two characters are used as
separators in the index file. If any special character, including a quotation mark or equals
sign with a backslash prefix, is used in the database path or parameter name/value, the
entire database path or parameter name/value pair should be enclosed between quotation
marks.
RUN <run_index> ["]<database_path>["] ["]<param_definition>["]
{["]<param_definition>["]}

Parameters
• run_index
Specifies the run order and is used as the waveform label to identify it within the compound
waveform data. Numeric.
• database_path
Specifies the path and filename to the waveform database containing the waveform data for
this run. This can be a Windows or Linux path. Database names cannot contain the
following characters: /\*?":<>|
• param_definition
Specifies a parameter name (string) and value (string or numeric) pair separated by the
equals (=) character and optionally followed by a unit definition in the following form:
UNIT=<unit_name>.

154 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Index File Format

Note
FSDB files are not supported in index file (.wdbparam) format. You must convert
the files to WDB format (.wdb) before writing to .wdbparam format.
ffcv <file.fsdb> -jwdb <file.wdb>

Examples
v1.0
RUN 1 "extract_of_extract.wdb" VTH=10u UNIT=V
RUN 2 extract_of_extract_1.wdb VTH=0.05e3
RUN 3 extract_of_extract_2.wdb VTH=2
RUN 4 extract_of_extract_3.wdb VTH=0
RUN 5 extract_of_extract_4.wdb VTH=3
…

Related Topics
Merging Waveforms into a Compound Waveform Using an Index File
Utility to Convert a Waveform Database [Eldo Platform User's Manual]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 155

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Updating Waveform Data

Updating Waveform Data

You can update waveform data automatically or manually.
Configuring Automatic Reloading of Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manually Updating Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Waveform Update Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Updating Waveforms with Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Configuring Automatic Reloading of Waveform

Data
When running a series of iterative simulations, EZwave automates the display of waveforms, so
that new data is displayed automatically when a simulation is re-run, overwriting the previous
database. You can configure certain aspects of this process.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options and then choose Automatic Reload to open the Automatic
Reload options panel.
2. Set any of the following options:

If you want to... Do the following...

Have EZwave overwrite the previous Choose Replace Previous Result. When
results when a new simulation is run. this option is selected, you can specify
whether a warning is reported before
overwriting takes place.
Have EZwave preserve the previous Choose Keep Previous Result, and enter
results when a new simulation is run. the number of previous databases
you want to keep. EZwave will
automatically save the previous simulation
results, and rename
each database as <filename>_sim1.wdb,
<filename>_sim2.wdb, ...
<filename>_sim<n>.wdb.

156 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Configuring Automatic Reloading of Waveform Data

If you want to... Do the following...

Have EZwave ask whether to Keep, Choose Ask Me.
Close or Delete previous databases
when a new simulation is run.
• Keep means that the database file
<filename> is renamed to
<filename_sim#> and remains
open.
• Close means that the database file
<filename> is renamed to
<filename_sim#> and closed. All
waveforms from this database are
removed from the display, but the
database is saved.
• Delete means that the database file
<filename> is renamed to
<filename_sim#>, and is closed.
All waveforms from this database
are removed from the display and
the file is deleted.
Have EZwave display new simulation Choose Display New Results
results on top of the previous Automatically. This is set by default.
simulation results.
Have EZwave preserve previous results Choose Only Close Old Result (do not
databases when a new simulation is run delete file).
by just closing them, rather than
deleting them once the specified
number of previous databases is
reached.
Have EZwave preserve the display of Choose Keep All Waveforms. This can be
all previously loaded waveforms. useful for waveforms that are not
immediately created when simulation
starts, for example, extraction waveforms.

Related Topics
Manually Updating Waveforms
Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 157

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Manually Updating Waveforms

Manually Updating Waveforms

When viewing plotted waveforms from a database in EZwave, you can update the waveform
display with the results of another database. Matching waveform data is updated automatically
based on names. This is useful when running a series of iterative simulations with differing
parameters between runs, where results are stored in separate .wdb files.
When updating a database manually, you can control which waveforms to update, and whether
to replace the previous waveforms, or to plot the new waveforms separately.

Waveform Update Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Updating Waveforms with Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Waveform Update Shortcuts

You can quickly access to the latest waveform data from subsequent runs of the same
simulation.
Procedure
Right-click on an open database and select one of the following options:

• Update Waveforms > Replace Existing with New

This finds matches for the waveform names in the database in all open graph
windows and replaces those waveforms with the new data. You can also select the
new database and use the keyboard shortcut Alt-R.
• Update Waveforms > Show Existing and New Together
This finds matches for the waveform names in the database in all open graph
windows and plots the updated waveforms alongside the existing matching
waveforms (see Figure 4-13). You can also select the new database and use the
keyboard shortcut Alt-S.

Tip
You can enable tandem mode to automatically plot waveforms with the same
name from different databases. See “Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name
using Tandem Mode” on page 124.

Updating Waveforms with Options

You can update waveform data from a new database to take full control of the process.
This is done using the Update Waveforms Dialog Box.

158 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Add Waveforms
Manually Updating Waveforms

Procedure
1. Open a database and plot one or more waveforms.
2. Open another database containing different results for the same simulation. Right-click
on this database in the Waveform List and choose Update Waveforms > More Options
(alternatively, press Alt-O).

Tip
You can update multiple databases in one step by holding down the Shift or Ctrl
keys when making selections from the Waveform List. Once all the required
databases are highlighted, right-click on the multiple selection and choose Update
Waveforms > More Options.

3. The Update Waveforms dialog box is displayed. Choose to either Replace the currently
plotted waveforms with the matching waveforms from the new database, or to Show
Existing & New Together, which will plot the new waveforms overlaid.
4. Choose the Update Target to define which waveforms to update:
• All Windows—Waveforms plotted in all open windows are updated.
• Active Window Only—Only the waveforms plotted in the currently active window
are updated.
• Plotted Waveforms—Only the waveforms added to the Plotted Waveforms List are
updated. To define specific waveforms in this list, do the following:
o Click Add Waveforms to select which of the currently plotted waveforms to add
to the Plotted Waveforms List.
o To remove a waveform from the list, select it and click Remove Selected.
o Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to re-order the Plotted Waveforms
List. This is for organizational purposes only — the order of waveforms in the
list has no impact on the update.
5. Click OK to apply the update and close the dialog box. Waveforms from the newer
database are matched with those currently plotted in the target windows.
Figure 4-13 shows the results from multiple databases plotted overlaid, using the Show
Existing & New Together menu option.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 159

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Add Waveforms
Manually Updating Waveforms

Figure 4-13. Multiple Overlaid Waveforms Following a Waveform Update

Related Topics
Automatic Reload Options
Update Waveforms Dialog Box

160 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 5
Analysis

This section describes how to measure, analyze, and annotate data points or logic units that are
represented in the waveforms.
Working with Cursors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Adding the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adding Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adding Relative Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adding a Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Copying Horizontal Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Moving Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Working with Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Using the Cursor Value Table with Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing the Visibility of Graph Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using Pick Points to take Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Taking Measurements with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Using Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Adding Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Global Display Options for Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using the Event Search Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing an Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing an Expression Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Working with Eye Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Creating an Eye Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Adding Additional Waveforms to Eye Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Editing an Eye Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Working with Smith Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Scattering Parameters (S-Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Creating a Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Impedance and Admittance Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Smith Chart and Polar Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cursors in the Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Circles in the Smith Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Changing the Visibility of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Comparing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 161

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis

Support for Different Types of Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Using the Waveform Compare Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Manually Comparing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Waveform Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Viewing and Saving Comparison Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Saving a Comparison Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Setting Comparison Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
wreal Waveform Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Analyzing Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Analyzing Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

162 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Working with Cursors

Working with Cursors

This section explains how to use cursors, for example, adding and moving cursors.
Adding the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing the Base Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adding Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adding Relative Reference Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adding a Horizontal Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Copying Horizontal Cursors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Moving Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Moving Cursor Value Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for a Single Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for All Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Showing Cursor Values for Selected Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting Default Cursor Value Visibility when Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sharing Cursor Value Visibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setting Cursor Value Visibility in the Cursor Values Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Displaying Cursor Values in the Reserved Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Working with Y-Level Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Adding Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Choosing How Delta-Y is Calculated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using the Cursor Value Table with Compound Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing the Visibility of Graph Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Adding the Base Cursor

The first cursor you set on a waveform is known as the base cursor. The base cursor is used as a
reference for measurements. Only one base cursor is permitted in any graph window.
Procedure
1. Use one of the following methods to add a vertical cursor:
• Choose Cursor > Add
• Use the keyboard shortcut F5.
• Right-click in a row and choose Add Cursor from the Waveform Popup Menu.
• Use the wave addcursor Tcl command:
wave addcursor [-window window_name] [-time time | X_value]
[-name cursor_name]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 163

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Changing the Base Cursor

2. You can move the cursor to the required position by dragging it, or by using the Move
cursor buttons on the toolbar.

3. If you need more precision, use the snap feature to move the cursor into place. Right-
click the cursor and choose Snap to Data Points from the Vertical Cursors popup menu.
If necessary, zoom in tightly and drag the cursor to see the cursor snap to the closest
point.

Tip
Use the View All icon on the toolbar to see the entire waveform.

4. A label showing the current X value for the base cursor is displayed beneath the cursor,
flush with the x-axis. When you move the cursor, by dragging, the X value updates.
Figure 5-1. The Base Cursor

Changing the Base Cursor

When subsequent cursors are added, by default, the first cursor placed is the base cursor. You
can change the base cursor.
Procedure
To define another cursor as the base cursor, right-click on the desired cursor and choose “Base”
Cursor.

Results
Once this section is made, all delta-X measurements are updated to reflect the new base cursor,
and the previous base cursor becomes a regular cursor.

164 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Adding Reference Cursors

Related Topics
Adding Reference Cursors
Adding Y-Level Lines
Choosing How Delta-Y is Calculated

Adding Reference Cursors

After you have adding an initial base cursor to the waveform, all subsequent cursors are
reference cursors. Value boxes for reference cursors are displayed beneath the unit labeling for
the x-axis and contain the current X value, and a delta-X value, which is the difference between
the current X value and the X value of the base cursor.
Procedure
1. Add two vertical cursors to the graph window using one of the following methods:
• Choose Cursor > Add
• Use the keyboard shortcut F5.
• Right-click in a row and select Add Cursor from the Waveform Popup Menu.
• Use the wave addcursor Tcl command:
wave addcursor [-window window_name] [-time time | X_value]
[-name cursor_name]

The first is the base cursor C1, and the second a reference cursor, C2.

2. With the new cursor in position, use the View All icon to see the entire waveform
with the two cursors.
3. Right-click on the reference cursor C2 and select Data Values > Show on Left from the
Vertical Cursors popup menu. This will flip the values to the other side, so the axis area
can be seen clearly.
4. Now add further cursors to the waveform. This cursor will appear as C3, C4, C5... and
so on.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 165

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Adding Relative Reference Cursors

Figure 5-2. Reference Cursors

5. When a new cursor is added, it can be accessed from the Cursor menu. This can be
useful to quickly view a cursor that is not currently in the visible region of the active
graph window.

Adding Relative Reference Cursors

You can place a cursor relative to the current cursor. This is particularly useful for quickly
verifying the duty cycle occurrence on some waveforms.
Use the following procedure to add one or more reference cursors relative to an existing cursor.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the waveform, select Add Cursor Relative to > and choose the required
cursor. Alternatively, select Cursor > Add Cursor Relative to > from the main menu.
2. Enter one or more X values separated by spaces in the Enter Relative X/Y Location(s)
field. These values define the location of new cursors, relative to the chosen cursor.
3. Select Lock Together When Dragging to specify that all cursors are locked together so
that when you move one cursor the others are dragged the same distance. This option is
equivalent to choosing Cursor > Lock Together When Dragging from the main menu.
4. Click Apply. The new cursors appear on the waveform.
Related Topics
Adding the Base Cursor
Adding Reference Cursors
Moving Cursors

166 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Adding a Horizontal Cursor

Adding a Horizontal Cursor

Adding a Horizontal Cursor

You can add an x-axis cursor, that behaves in the same way as the y-axis cursor, but has a
horizontal display.
Note
The horizontal cursor is available only for analog or step waveforms, excluding wreal,
digital, digital bus and digital bits. You cannot add a horizontal cursor to Smith charts, Polar
charts or eye diagrams.

Procedure
1. Horizontal cursors may be added to graph windows using any of the following methods:
• Choose Cursor > Add Horizontal Cursor
• Use the keyboard shortcut F6.
• Right-click on a row, or the y-axis, and select Add Horizontal Cursor.
In this case, the horizontal cursor is created at the Y value point where the right-click
occurred.
• Use the wave addcursor Tcl command:
wave addcursor [-window window_name] -horizontal [-row row_index]
[-axis axis_name] [-name cursor_name]

2. When a horizontal cursor is added, the first crossing point with the waveform is shown,
with its measurement. When the cursor is dragged up and down, the Y value and the
value at the crossing point will update.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 167

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Adding a Horizontal Cursor

Figure 5-3. Horizontal Cursor

3. To change the number of crossing points that are displayed, right-click on the cursor,
select Data Values and select the waveform name. In the Data Values Dialog Box, use
Shift + click to add or remove ticks in the Show column to show or hide the crossing
points, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4. Show/Hide Crossing Points in the Data Values Dialog

4. You can move crossing points to a different location by selecting them with the left
mouse button and dragging them to a different place on the waveform.

168 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Copying Horizontal Cursors

Note
If you change the unit of a degree/radian/gradient y-axis to be different from the
Trigonometric Angle defined in Edit > Options > Waveform Calculator >
General, the horizontal cursor crossing values and position are incorrect. If you need
another Y unit type, be sure to align the trigonometric angle value accordingly.

Copying Horizontal Cursors

You can duplicate an existing horizontal cursor across all unit-compatible waveform rows in the
display.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the horizontal cursor and select “Show in All Compatible Y-Axes”. The
horizontal cursor is copied to all waveform rows that use the same y-axis units. When
the horizontal cursor is moved, all duplicated cursors also move to the new position.
Crossing point markers and measurements will update accordingly.
2. The “Horizontal Cursor in Y-Axis” setting under Edit > Options > Cursors enables
you to control whether new horizontal cursors are added to the currently selected
waveform row only, or to every row in the current display.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 169

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Moving Cursors

Figure 5-5. EZwave Display Preferences - Horizontal Cursor in Y-Axis

Related Topics
Adding the Base Cursor
Adding Reference Cursors
Moving Cursors

Moving Cursors
You can move cursors by specifying a value, or by dragging and dropping a cursor to a new
location. The corresponding value will update accordingly.
Use the following procedure to move a cursor to a specific point on the waveform:

Procedure
1. Right-click on the cursor and select Move To. The Move Cursor dialog box displays.

170 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Moving Cursors

2. Enter a new X or Y location (or locations, separated by spaces) in the Enter New X/Y
Location(s) field.
3. Select the unit of measurement from the pulldown menu. Choose from hertz or femto-,
pico-, nano-, micro-, milli-, kilo-, mega-, giga-, or terahertz.
4. If more than one cursor is added, the first entered becomes the active cursor.
5. Click OK and the cursor moves to the specified location.

Tip
Cursors can be locked together so that when you move one cursor, the other is
moved the same distance, relative to it. To lock cursors together, choose Cursor >
Lock Together When Dragging from the main menu.

Related Topics
Adding the Base Cursor
Adding Reference Cursors
Adding a Horizontal Cursor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 171

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

When more than one cursor is displayed in a graph window it is often useful to temporarily
move or hide some of the cursor values from view to make the graph window easier to read.
Moving Cursor Value Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for a Single Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hiding a Cursor Value for All Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Showing Cursor Values for Selected Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting Default Cursor Value Visibility when Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sharing Cursor Value Visibility Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setting Cursor Value Visibility in the Cursor Values Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Displaying Cursor Values in the Reserved Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Moving Cursor Value Flags

You can move the positions of vertical cursor value flags freely. The relative position of the
value flag is maintained if a cursor is moved.
Note
If the locations of cursor value flags are modified and the window is saved to TCL/SWD,
the positions of the flags are not saved. Flags will return to their default (automatic)
positions after a reload.

Procedure
1. Drag the value flag (the box on the cursor that displays the waveform value at that point)
to the required location. If you move the cursor, the relative position of the value flag is
maintained (as much as possible within the confines of the plot window).

Tip
If a cursor has multiple flags (for example with overlaid plots), you can select and
move all of its flags at the same time. Hold down the <Ctrl> key and use the left
mouse button to select the required flags. Then drag one of the flags and the other
selected flags will also move.

2. To return the value flag to its default position, right-click on the cursor and choose Data
Values > Reset Location.

Hiding a Cursor Value for a Single Waveform

You can hide the cursor values for a single waveform.

172 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

Procedure
1. Right-click the specific Value Flag (the box on the cursor that displays the waveform
value at that point) on the cursor you wish to hide.
2. Select Hide Value from the Cursor Value Popup Menu.

Note
Other Value Flags on different waveforms using the same cursor do not disappear.

Hiding a Cursor Value for All Waveforms

You can hide cursor values for more than one waveform in a graph window.
Procedure
1. Select the cursor whose values are to be hidden.
2. Right mouse-click the cursor and select Data Values > Hide All.
The Value Flags disappear from the selected cursor for all waveforms displayed.
3. Repeat these steps to make the cursors visible again, selecting Data Values > Show All.

Showing Cursor Values for Selected Waveforms

You can control the visibility of cursor values for selected or unselected waveforms in the graph
window.
Procedure
1. Select one or more waveforms in the graph window.
2. Right-click on a cursor and choose Data Values > Show Selected Only Set from
Waveform Selection.
Results
Only the cursor values for the selected waveforms will be shown on the cursor.

Setting Default Cursor Value Visibility when Selecting

Waveforms
You can change the default visibility settings for cursor values when selecting waveforms.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display Preferences
Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 173

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

2. Choose Cursors from the EZwave Preferences list on the left.

3. Locate the Cursor Data Values section and choose one of the following actions:

If you want to... Do the following

Configure a cursor to show 1. Check the “Show/Hide Dynamically
cursor values only for Cursor Values Based on Waveform
waveforms that are selected. Selection” box.
2. Click OK.
3. Select the cursor in the graph window.
4. Right-click and choose Data Values.
5. Check Show Selected Mode.
6. In the graph window select one or more
waveforms. The cursor value for those
waveform are shown.
Configure a cursor to show 1. Check the “Show/Hide Dynamically
cursor values only for the Cursor Values Based on Waveform
waveforms that are not Selection” box.
selected. 2. Click OK.
3. Select the cursor in the graph window.
4. Right-click and choose Data Values.
5. Check Hide Selected Mode.
6. In the graph window select one or more
waveforms. The cursor value for those
waveform are hidden.
Configure a cursor so that 1. Check the “Append/Remove
when a waveform is selected Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
it is automatically added to Waveform Selection” box.
the set of values shown at 2. Click OK.
that cursor. 3. Select the cursor in the graph window.
4. Right-click and choose Data Values.
5. Check Append Selected Mode.
6. In the graph window select a waveform.
A cursor value for that waveform is
added to the set of values at that cursor.

174 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

If you want to... Do the following

Configure a cursor so that 1. Check the “Append/Remove
when a waveform is selected Dynamically Cursor Values Based on
it is automatically removed Waveform Selection” box.
from the set of values shown 2. Click OK.
at that cursor. 3. Select the cursor in the graph window.
4. Right-click and choose Data Values.
5. Check Remove Selected Mode.
6. In the graph window select a waveform.
The cursor value for that waveform is
removed from the set of values at that
cursor.
Configure cursor creation so 1. Check the Show Only Cursor Values Of
that when a new cursor is Selected Waveforms While Creating
created, only the values of Cursor box.
selected waveforms are 2. Click OK.
shown, or all the values if no 3. Select one or more waveforms on the
waveforms are selected. Graph Window.
4. Choose Cursor > Add from the main
menu or press F5. A new cursor is
created in the graph window. Only the
cursor values of selected waveforms are
shown on the cursor.
If no waveform is selected, all
waveforms are considered to be
selected. You cannot add a cursor
without displaying a waveform value.

Sharing Cursor Value Visibility Settings

You can configure several cursors to share the same visibility settings for cursor values.
Procedure
1. From the main menu, check the Cursor > Share Config of Active Cursor box.
2. Choose Cursor > Add from the main menu or press F5. A new cursor is created in the
Graph Window.
Results
The new cursor and the previously active cursor now share the same cursor value visibility
settings. If the settings for one cursor are changed, the settings for the other cursor change too.
To stop sharing, right-click on the curser and choose Data Values > Stop Sharing
Configuration.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 175

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

Setting Cursor Value Visibility in the Cursor Values Table

You can set the visibility of cursor values for particular waveforms on a selected cursor using
the Cursor Values table.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the selected cursor and choose Data Values > Cursor Values Table.
The Cursor Values Table opens showing a list of all the waveforms.
2. In the Show column, check the waveforms you want to show, or uncheck the waveforms
you want to hide.
Or click Show All to show all waveforms.
Or click Hide All to hide all waveforms.
Results
The cursor values for the selected waveforms are shown on the cursor in the Graph Window.

Displaying Cursor Values in the Reserved Area

You can display cursor values in a reserved area near the Waveform Names Area rather than in
cursor data flags.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options from the main menu.
2. Select Cursors from the list on the left of the EZwave Display Preferences dialog box.
The Cursor Options opens.
3. Check the Use Cursor Area option.
The cursor values are displayed in the reserved area.

176 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting the Visibility of Cursor Values

Figure 5-6. Cursor Values Displayed in the Reserved Area

Related Topics
Adding the Base Cursor
Adding Reference Cursors
Adding a Horizontal Cursor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 177

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Working with Y-Level Lines

Working with Y-Level Lines

You can add a Y-level line and measure the difference between Y-level lines.
Adding Y-Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Choosing How Delta-Y is Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Adding Y-Level Lines

You can add a Y-level line. This is a dotted horizontal line that marks the intersection of a
cursor and a waveform.
Procedure
1. Right-click on a cursor and select Y-Level Line from the popup menu to show the Y-
level line.
2. Alternatively, use the menu item Cursor > Add with Y-Level to add a new vertical
cursor with Y-level lines activated. A dotted line is now shown on the y-axis at the point
where the cursor crosses the waveform.
Figure 5-7. Y-Level Lines

3. To hide Y-level lines, right-click on the cursor and deselect Y-Level Lines.

178 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Working with Y-Level Lines

Choosing How Delta-Y is Calculated

The delta-Y relative to the base Y-level line is displayed on every non-base Y-level line. You
can control how the delta-Y values are measured.
This is determined by the Cursor Delta Y setting in the Cursor Options.

The EZwave viewer can measure the delta-Y in the following ways:

• Waveform based (default)

Measures the difference between Y-level lines on one waveform. The Y-level line of the
reference cursor displays the delta between it and the base Y-level line.
Figure 5-8. Waveform-Based Delta Ys

• Cursor based
Measures the differences between Y-level lines on the same cursor. The delta-Y value of
the reference Y-level line is the difference between it and the base Y-level line on the
same cursor.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 179

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Using the Cursor Value Table with Compound Waveforms

Figure 5-9. Cursor-Based Delta Ys

Related Topics
Adding the Base Cursor
Adding Reference Cursors
Adding a Horizontal Cursor

Using the Cursor Value Table with Compound

Waveforms
You can view the Cursor Value Table to see information about one or more elements of a
compound wave.
Procedure
1. To access the Cursor Value Table, first select an element of a compound waveform
displayed in a graph window.
2. Right-click on the element cursor value.
3. From the Cursor Value Popup Menu, select the Show/Hide menu item.

180 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Changing the Visibility of Graph Window Elements

Figure 5-10. Cursor Value Table

4. The Cursor Value Table displays the following information about individual elements of
a compound waveform.
• Index - A sequential number assigned to each element of the compound waveform.
The first element is assigned the number one. By default, the numbers are listed in
ascending order. To reverse this order, click the small triangle.
• Parameter - The parameter column shows the value of a parameter specified at
simulation time. To invert the order of this column, click the small triangle.
Related Topics
Cursor Value Popup Menu

Changing the Visibility of Graph Window Elements

You can choose which elements of a compound waveform are visible in the graph window.
Procedure
1. Click the box or boxes in the Show column corresponding to the element number or
numbers.
2. If multiple elements, you can group them together at either the top or bottom of the table
by clicking the small arrow at the top of the column.
Related Topics
Compound Waveforms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 181

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Using Pick Points to take Measurements

Using Pick Points to take Measurements

Pick points are temporary markers that enable you to perform quick measurements on selected
waveforms. They can be used as an alternative to placing cursors.
Use the Pick Points dialog to place and manage pick points on single or multiple waveforms.
When this dialog is active, clicking on a waveform or in the waveform row, will add a pick
point marker to the waveform(s). Pick points are not persistent, meaning that they do not remain
on the waveform once the dialog is closed. To mark the point permanently, you can use this
dialog to add a cursor, slope or delta marker, or a waveform-based annotation.

Each graph window or workspace can have its own dedicated pick points. If you switch
between different graph windows or workspaces without closing the Pick Points dialog, the pick
point data for each updates accordingly.

Pick Point colors can be configured on the EZwave Display Preferences dialog box—Pick
Points Options (Fonts and Colors).

Taking Measurements with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Taking Measurements with Pick Points

You can use the Pick Points dialog to place and manage pick points on single or multiple
waveforms and perform quick measurements.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Pick Points or use the icon in the main toolbar to activate Pick
Points mode. The Pick Points Dialog opens.
The mouse pointer is replaced by a pick pointer, displayed as vertical and/or horizontal
crossed bars. As you move the pick pointer in the waveform row area, the current X and
Y data coordinates values are shown at the top of the Pick Points dialog.
2. Click anywhere in the waveform row (either on waveform or on the “blank” area) to add
the first pick point. The position at which the pick point marker is added on the
waveform(s) depends on the current pick mode: Interpolate, Snap to Data Points or Free.
To change the mode, click Show Options on the Pick Points dialog box to expose the
Pick Point Mode controls.
You can only add pick point markers to the waveform value. You cannot add pick point
markers outside the waveform area, between waveform rows, or on top of an existing
marker or cursor.
3. Click to add a second pick point.

182 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Taking Measurements with Pick Points

The Picked Points Values table contains information about the previous and current
picked values including the difference between them for each displayed axis.

Note
The difference between the “picked point” and “picked value” is, that the picked
point is attached to the waveform in the graph window, and is displayed as the
marker, but the picked value is the X/Y data coordinates of the original mouse-click
(which may not be necessarily on the waveform, but could be elsewhere in the
waveform area). Picked values are only visible in the Pick Points dialog and are not
displayed in the active wave window.

The Picked Points Waveforms table lists information about the most recently added pick
point on each waveform in the graph window.
By default, the maximum number of simultaneously visible pick points per plotted
waveform is 2. If you add a third pick point, the first pick point you created is removed
and the new one is added. You can change the maximum number of pick points on the
EZwave Display Preferences dialog—Pick Points Options.
4. Click the Expression column header in the Picked Points Waveforms list to assign an
expression to all waveforms in the list. See Table 8-80 on page 557 for details on the
expression calculations available. Choose “Expression” from the list to disable
expressions on all waveforms.

5. Click the or buttons to add vertical or horizontal cursors at the location of all
pick points in the active graph window. Alternatively, to add cursors to one or more
specific waveforms (with pick points) select them in the Picked Points Waveforms list,
right-click and choose Add Cursor(s) or Add Horizontal Cursor(s).

Tip
Mouse over a pick point in the graph window and use the Add Cursor keyboard
shortcuts F5 and F6 to add cursors at the position of the pick point. The cursors will
snap to the pick point.

6. Click the button to add a waveform-based text annotation at the position of each
pick point in the active graph window. The annotation text contains the x and y
coordinates of the pick point, and the slope, parameter and expression value (if present).
Alternatively, to add a text annotation to the most recently added pick point on a
waveform, right-click on the required waveform in the Picked Points Waveforms list,
and choose Add Text Annotation(s).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 183

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Taking Measurements with Pick Points

To edit the annotation text, right-click on the annotation and choose Edit. The
Waveform Annotation dialog that opens is pre-filled with:
X = %x
Y = %y
SlopeParam = %s
Param = %p
<expression_name> = %e

Where %x, %y, %s, %p and %e are placeholders for the corresponding values from the
Picked Points Waveforms list on the Pick Points dialog box.

7. Use the and buttons to add slopes and delta measurements between pick points.
See Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points.

Tip
You can also right-click on a pick point in the graph window, or on a waveform in
the Picked Points Waveforms list to access these functions.

8. Use the Delete button to remove all annotations, slope markers, cursors and delta
markers currently attached to existing pick points in the graph window. Pick point
markers themselves are not removed. This button cannot be used to remove annotations,
markers or cursors once their associated pick point has been removed, or if their
annotation, slope marker, cursor and delta marker were moved outside the picked point
marker area.
9. You can filter the Picked Points Waveforms list by entering a regular expression into the
Filter Names field. Only waveforms that match the specified term will be listed.
10. Right-click on a current or previous value in the Picked Values table and select Copy
Value(s) to Clipboard to copy the value for pasting elsewhere. If multiple cells are
selected, copied values will be pasted as a comma-separated list. Use the Send Value(s)
to Calc menu item to send it to the Waveform Calculator.
You can also right-click on an item in the Picked Points Waveforms list to access
functions to copy the waveform name and send it to the Waveform Calculator.

Note
All popup menu actions in the Picked Points Waveforms list are applied to the last
pick point of the selected waveform(s).

11. Click Save As to save the current Picked Points Waveforms list to .csv or .txt format.
12. Information can be cleared from the Picked Values table and the Picked Points
Waveforms list using the Clear Values and Clear Waveforms buttons, respectively. Use
the Clear All button to clear all listed values from both tables, and remove all pick
points from waveforms in the graph window.

184 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points

13. To deactivate pick points mode, close the Pick Points dialog either by clicking Close, or
by pressing the Esc key. All pick points in all graph windows will be removed.

Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points

You can add a delta marker between the pick points of each waveform in the current active
graph window.
Procedure
The button on the Pick Points Dialog adds a delta marker between the pick points of each
waveform in the current active graph window (where the addition is possible). Delta markers
are added in a “chain” meaning that they are added between all pick points of the waveform
starting from the first one (by creation order).

Examples
The waveform in Figure 5-11 has four pick points. The Add Delta button will add delta
markers between the 1st and 2nd, 2nd and 3rd, and the 3rd and 4th pick points.

Figure 5-11. Adding Deltas From the Pick Points Dialog Box

Related Topics
Pick Points Dialog
Pick Points Options

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 185

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Adding Delta Markers with Pick Points

Using Text Annotations

Working with Cursors

186 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Using Text Annotations

Using Text Annotations

A text annotation is a text box that you can use to add labels, or other textual information, to
waveforms or to the graph window.
A text annotation that is attached to a waveform is bound to that waveform's row. Once placed,
the text annotation's anchor can only be moved within its current row but its text box may be
moved outside the row.

A text annotation that is added to the graph window (not attached to a waveform) can be moved
freely within the window, and is not associated with any row.

Adding Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Global Display Options for Text Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Adding Text Annotations

You can use text annotations to add labels, or other textual information, to waveforms or to the
graph window.
Procedure
1. To add a text annotation to a waveform, select a waveform and right-click to display the
Waveform Popup Menu.
To add a text annotation to the graph window, right-click anywhere in the graph window
to display the Row Popup Menu.
2. Choose Annotation > Add Text Annotation from the Row popup menu. The Add
Annotation dialog box opens.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 187

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Adding Text Annotations

Figure 5-12. Add Annotation Dialog Box

3. Enter the desired text for the annotation in the Fill Text field. You can also select here
whether to attach the text annotation to the waveform or the graph window.
When text annotations are attached to waveforms, an anchor symbol is shown at the
point where the anchor line from the text annotation box touches the waveform.If you
attach the annotation to a waveform, you can also choose Snap to waveform data to snap
to the nearest data point after a mouse drag and drop of the anchor. Click OK.

188 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Adding Text Annotations

Figure 5-13. Text Annotation Examples

By default, text annotations that are attached to waveforms use the same color setting as
the waveform.
4. Optionally, you can attribute custom font and color settings specific to a text annotation.
To do this whilst adding a new annotation: use the Font and Color and Appearance
tabs on the Add Annotation dialog box.
To do this for an existing annotation: right-click on the text annotation and select
Properties. The Annotation Properties Dialog Box opens, enabling you to make
changes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 189

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Global Display Options for Text Annotations

Figure 5-14. Annotation Properties

Note
Once custom properties are applied to a text annotation, it will not be affected by any
changes to global text annotation settings (those specified on the Text Annotation
Options (Fonts and Colors) and Text Annotation Options pages of the EZwave Display
Preferences dialog box).

Tip
You can right-click on an annotation to show the Annotation popup menu. From
here you can Edit the text, Delete the annotation, Delete All Annotations, Copy
Value to Clipboard, and edit the annotation Properties.

Global Display Options for Text Annotations

You can define the default font and color settings used when adding text annotations to
waveforms.
Procedure
1. Choose Edit > Options to open the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box.
2. Select Text Annotations from the EZwave Preferences list on the left.

190 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Global Display Options for Text Annotations

3. Use the Text Annotation Options to control visibility of text annotation elements, such
as the anchor point symbol or the anchor line.
4. Expand the Fonts and Colors list, and choose Text Annotation Options (Fonts and
Colors).
5. Select the required font, style and size from the dropdown boxes.
6. In the Waveform Annotation Color section, select Use Custom Color, and choose a
color.
The preview pane shows a sample of what the annotation will look like in the current
color scheme.
7. Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
8. All new text annotations will inherit these new settings. Existing text annotations will
not be affected. You can still apply custom settings for individual annotations, by right-
clicking on the annotation and selecting Properties.
Related Topics
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors)
wave addannotation

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 191

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Using the Event Search Tool

Using the Event Search Tool

You can use the Event Search Tool to locate occurrences of simulation events interactively. An
event is a specific state (or value) for a single or collection of waveforms.
Performing an Event Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing an Expression Event Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Performing an Event Search

You can use the Event Search Tool to perform a basic event search.
Procedure
1. Invoke the Event Search tool with the Tools > Search menu item. The Event Search
Tool Dialog Box opens.
2. Name the event in the text window of the Event field. Click Save if to save the event
definition for later use, if required.
3. Specify the waveform to search by selecting a waveform in the active graph window,
then clicking on to add it to the Source Waveform field.

4. Choose an event type from the following four options:

• Any Event — Any type of event.
• Rising Edge — Only rising edge occurrences.
Opens the Search Event Settings dialog box.
Figure 5-15. Rising Edge Dialog

i. Check the Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline box to
automatically select the Top and Base line.
ii. Select the lower and upper percentages through the pulldown menu.

192 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Performing an Expression Event Search

iii. To manually set the Top and Base lines, deselect the Levels are Relative to the
Topline and Baseline box and enter appropriate lower and upper values.

iv. Close the Search Event Settings dialog box and click on to show the lines
in the graph window.
• Falling Edge: Only falling edge occurrences. Opens the Search Event Settings
dialog box. Specify values as for Rising Edge.
• Waveform Value: Only waveform values. A tolerance needs to be specified when
searching for data points generated by an analog simulator.
5. Move the cursor along the specified waveform to search for the specified events by
clicking to go in the decreasing time value direction or to go in an
increasing time value direction.
6. To mark an event, in the Markers section of the Event Search Tool select the Add a
Marker icon . Right-click on the marker to rename it, move it, copy it to the
clipboard, or delete it, as desired.
7. Jump to a marker by selecting the marker name from the drop-down list or by using the
previous marker icon and next marker icon .

Related Topics
Event Search Tool Dialog Box
Performing an Expression Event Search

Performing an Expression Event Search

In addition to using the Event Search Tool to locate occurrences of simulation events
interactively, you can perform an expression event search.
Procedure
1. Invoke the Event Search tool with the Tools > Search menu item. The Event Search
Tool Dialog Box opens.
2. Name the event in the text window of the Event field. Click Save if to save the event
definition for later use, if required.
3. Select the Logic Expression option.
4. Select the expression by:
• Invoking the Waveform Calculator to create or select an existing expression. Click
the Eval button in the calculator to import the expression from the calculator to the
Event Search expression area.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 193

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Performing an Expression Event Search

• Using the Add selected waveform icon and enter the logical function names or
operators in the expression area.
5. Move the cursor along the specified waveform to search for the specified events by
clicking to go in the decreasing time value direction or to go in an
increasing time value direction.
6. To mark an event, in the Markers section of the Event Search Tool select the Add a
Marker icon . Right-click on the marker to rename it, move it, copy it to the
clipboard, or delete it, as desired.
7. Jump to a marker by selecting the marker name from the drop-down list or by using the
previous marker icon and next marker icon .

Related Topics
Event Search Tool Dialog Box
Waveform Calculator
Using the Event Search Tool
Performing an Event Search

194 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Working with Eye Diagrams

Working with Eye Diagrams

This section describes the procedures for creating eye diagrams and editing industry standard
eye masks, and details the measurements available within an eye diagram.
Tip
See also the eye diagram functions listed in the Statistical Functions table in Waveform
Calculator “Function Descriptions” on page 651.

Creating an Eye Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Adding Additional Waveforms to Eye Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Editing an Eye Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
NRZ (PAM2) Cross Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
C-Phy Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Creating an Eye Diagram

You can plot eye diagrams based on a period of waveform data.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Eye Diagram. The Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box opens.
2. From the Eye Type dropdown menu on the Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab, specify
either:
• C-Phy (3 source waveforms)
• NRZ (2 amplitude levels)
• PAM3 (3 amplitude levels)
• PAM4 (4 amplitude levels)
The Eye Diagram Tool GUI fields change depending on the eye type selected.
3. Plot and select the required Source Waveform and click the “Add Selected Waveforms”
icon. For C-Phy eye type only, exactly three waveforms must be selected (in order).

The Parameters Setup values reflect the selected source waveform:

• Eye Period — The eye diagram is generated by overlaying a semi-periodical
waveform signal on an interval in X (usually a time interval). The interval is defined
as the eye period. A default eye period is calculated based on period divided by 2.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 195

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Creating an Eye Diagram

• Period Tolerance — (C-Phy only.) Specifies the period tolerance to detect a

transition.
• Offset — (NRZ, PAM3, PAM4 only.) The open part of the eye is not always at the
center of the axes. Specify a different offset value to generate an eye diagram with
the open part at the desired location. You can press the keyboard Enter key each
time you change the offset value, as an alternative to clicking Apply.

Tip
It is sometimes not easy to setup the offset parameter. After you have set up the
eye diagram parameter and plotted the waveform, you can right-click on the
waveform at the desired location and choose Set Offset > Align Here or Set Offset
> Center Here from the popup menu. Align Here sets the X offset at this position,
that is, the eye becomes left and right aligned to this location. Center Here sets the
offset so that this location becomes the center of the eye, that is, the offset is set to
the Period/2.

• Minimum X value and Maximum X value — Defines the range of waveform data
used for generating the eye diagram.

Note
If the selected waveform is a compound waveform, all Measurements Setup and
Mask Setup options will be deselected. These may be reselected. Refer to the Eye
Parameters Calculation options accessed via Edit > Options > Multiple Run. This
provides options for calculating parameters and plotting.

Tip
You can enter expressions into any numeric fields. For example, to calculate the Eye
Period value of a waveform with frequency 1 MHz, enter the expression 1/(2*1meg)
into the Eye Period field. You can also incorporate a variable that you have calculated
using the Waveform Calculator. For example, use the Waveform Calculator to calculate
the variable freq_mean=mean(frequency(wf(…))). Then enter the expression
1/(2*freq_mean) into the Eye Period field.

4. The Display Measurements section reflects how the measurements are displayed and
updated on the selected source waveform:
• For C-Phy signal only, you can specify the X value and Y value where the
measurements are to be made.
• For NRZ signals only, select Apply Measurements to have the measurements
automatically updated and displayed as the values are modified in this dialog box.
This updates the values in the eye diagram as well as all the values in the Eye
Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab. Select Apply Inner/Outer to have the
inner or outer height or width displayed at the specified X or Y.

196 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Creating an Eye Diagram

• For PAM3 and PAM4 signals only, specify the X value where the measurements are
to be made. Measurements for each of the three eyes are performed. Once
calculated, you can independently drag the measurements to different positions
along the X axis. You can also specify the Reference Amplitude Ratio. When set to
“Automatic”, toplines and baselines begin at 10% and increase in steps of 5% until
all points are either below the baseline and above the topline (the Measured Edge
Percentage reaches 100%).
5. For C-Phy and NRZ signals only, the Display Mask section relates to the mask
displayed with the eye diagram. The setup values include:
• Specification — Choose an industry standard mask from the dropdown list.

Select the Eye Mask icon to the right of the dropdown list to open a new Eye
Mask Dialog Box displaying the shape and values for the corresponding mask.
• Margin — Allows scaling of the eye mask. The X margin is the horizontal margin
and the Y margin is the vertical margin, the values entered representing a percentage
of the total displayed range.
Select the Automatic Fit checkbox for X and/or Y to make the mask fit to the
horizontal and/or vertical inner contours of the eye diagram respectively.
• Offset — Allows shifting of the eye mask. The X offset is the horizontal offset and
the Y offset is the vertical offset.
Select the Automatic Fit checkbox for X to automatically determine the horizontal
offset.
6. Click on the Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab. This is where to view the
results of the eye diagram measurements, once calculated.
7. When you have the desired setup, click Apply. You can also press the keyboard Enter
key each time you change the a value, without closing the dialog box, as an alternative to
clicking Apply. The eye diagram is displayed in a new graph window. Click OK to
close the Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 197

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Creating an Eye Diagram

Figure 5-16. C-Phy Eye Diagram Example

198 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Creating an Eye Diagram

Figure 5-17. NRZ Eye Diagram Example

When a NRZ eye diagram is displayed, right-click anywhere on the eye diagram and
choose Add Cursor to place a cursor enabling the exact values to be seen.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 199

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Creating an Eye Diagram

Figure 5-18. PAM4 Eye Diagram Example

You can drag and drop the measurement arrows to see measurements at different
locations.
Right-click on a PAM 3 or PAM4 measure, and select Measurement Results to display
the inner height and inner width measures on the Measurement Results Dialog box.
Figure 5-19. Measurement Results Dialog Box - PAM4 Example

200 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Adding Additional Waveforms to Eye Diagrams

Adding Additional Waveforms to Eye Diagrams

You can drag and drop new waveforms from the Waveform List, onto an existing eye diagram,
plotted in the graph window.
When you drag and drop new waveforms onto an existing eye diagram, the behavior depends on
whether the waveform is a simple waveform or a compound waveform, as described below.

Simple Waveforms
The new waveform is plotted using the same offset, period and X range parameters, and the
same graphical measurements and masks are applied.

If a graph window contains several eye diagrams, new waveforms can be placed inside a
specific row, above or below all existing rows, or between rows.

When dropping a new waveform inside an existing row, the new eye diagram is plotted using
the same parameters as the occupying waveform.

When dropping a new waveform above, below or between existing rows, a new row is created
to contain the new eye diagram, which uses the same parameters as the first eye diagram in the
graph window.

You can drag and drop multiple waveforms simultaneously into the graph window. In this case,
the dragged waveforms are plotted in the same row.

Compound Waveforms
For compound waveforms, the options for calculating parameters and plotting are controlled by
the Eye Parameters Calculation options. These are accessed via Edit > Options > Multiple
Run.

Related Topics
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations
Editing an Eye Mask

Editing an Eye Mask

You can edit an eye mask using the Eye Diagram Tool.
Procedure
1. Select a mask from the dropdown list in the Eye Mask frame of the Eye Diagram Tool
Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 201

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Editing an Eye Mask

2. Click the Eye Mask icon . The Eye Mask Dialog Box opens, displaying the shape
and values for the corresponding mask.
3. To specify an alternative source eye mask, select a built in eye mask from the drop down
list or use the Open Folder icon to load a user defined eye mask from disk.

4. Click on the Edit New Mask icon to edit the mask.

5. Enter a name for the new mask in the Create a New Eye Mask dialog box. Editing is
enabled and the grayed out Save and Delete buttons and Edit frame become available.
6. Edit the eye mask:

• Click on to make the handles available so that the mask can be dragged to form a
new shape.

• Click on to add new handles or delete existing ones. Click on an existing handle
to remove it. Click on an area without a handle to add one.
o Point Handles allow the mask to be dragged in any direction.
o Vertical Handles allow the mask to be dragged horizontally.
o Horizontal Handles allow the mask to be dragged vertically.
o Barycenter handles allow the mask to be moved as a whole. They do not alter the
high and low levels, which can be adjusted manually.
o The Coordinate Flags display the X and Y values that relate to the handles. The
X coordinate flags show a percentage of the eye diagram X range. The Y
coordinate flags show absolute values.
• Check X (Y) Symmetric to also modify the symmetric handles in the mask when a
handle is dragged, ensuring the mask remains symmetric. This is only possible in
masks with X (Y) symmetry. When unchecked, only the dragged handle is modified.
7. Click Save to save the new eye mask.
Related Topics
Creating an Eye Diagram
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

202 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

This section describes how each of the eye diagram measurements is calculated
NRZ (PAM2) Cross Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
C-Phy Eye Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

NRZ (PAM2) Cross Eye Calculation

The NRZ (also know as PAM2) Cross Eye measurement is calculated as the middle of the High
Level and the Low Level. The points of the eye diagram cross this horizontal level (“eye
crossings”) on the left and right of the diagram. The distance between the left- and right-
crossing is called the Cross Eye.
Figure 5-20. Left and Right Crossing Points and Vertical Band

The Vertical Band is calculated as follows. Considering the Left Part (Xmin) and Right Part
(Xmax) of the eye crossing points, the midpoint of the vertical band is calculated as (Xmax-
Xmin)/2. The Vertical Band left width is then set to 10% less than the midpoint, and its right
width is set to 10% more than the midpoint.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 203

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Table 5-1 describes each eye diagram measurement.

Table 5-1. NRZ Eye Diagram Measurements
Measurement Description Notes
Eye Height Calculated as the difference between the High Level
-3stdev and the Low Level +3stdev calculations.
Eye Amplitude Calculated by subtracting the Low Level value from the
High Level value.
Eye Width Calculated as the difference between the Cross Eye -
3stdev and the Cross Eye + 3stdev calculations.
Eye Crossing The amplitude level at which the eye crossings occur,
Amplitude based on the middle of the High Level and Low Level.
High Level The mean of the point distribution in the upper part of a
“Vertical Band” (described above) around the midpoint of
the Cross Eye. The High Level standard deviation
(high_level_stdev) is computed within this band.
High Level - 3stdev This is calculated by subtracting (3 * high_level_stdev)
from the High Level value.
Low Level The mean of the point distribution in the lower part of a
“Vertical Band” (described above) around the midpoint of
the Cross Eye. The Low Level standard deviation
(low_level_stdev) is computed within this band.
Low Level + 3stdev Calculated by adding (3 * low_level_stdev) to the Low
Level value.
Risetime The mean time between the low and high threshold values, Results tab
calculated from 10% to 90% of the eye amplitude. only
Falltime The mean time between the high and low threshold values, Results tab
calculated from 10% to 90% of the eye amplitude. only
Cross Eye + 3stdev Calculated by adding (3 * cross_eye_stdev) to the left
value of the Cross Eye.
Cross Eye - 3stdev Calculated by subtracting (3 * cross_eye_stdev) to the
right value of the Cross Eye.
Eye Delay The distance from the midpoint of the eye to the time Results tab
origin, measured in seconds. only
Eye Jitter The width of the eye crossing points. Results tab
only
Eye SNR Calculated by the following formula: Results tab
only

204 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Table 5-1. NRZ Eye Diagram Measurements (cont.)

Measurement Description Notes
Inner Height The inner eye height.
Outer Height The outer eye height.
Inner Height at X The inner Eye Height at a specified X.
Setup Drag the results line within the eye diagram to move to a
new X location.
Right-click on the results within the eye diagram to access
the Eye Height at X dialog box with options including the
ability to switch between inner and outer, and to move to
another X.
Inner Width The inner eye width.
Outer Width The outer eye width.
Inner Width at Y The inner Eye Width at a specified Y.
Setup Drag the results line within the eye diagram to move to a
new Y location.
Right-click on the results within the eye diagram to access
the Eye Width at Y dialog box with options including the
ability to switch between inner and outer, and to move to
another Y.

Tip
See also “Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab” on page 448 and the eye diagram
functions listed in the Statistical Functions table in Waveform Calculator “Function
Descriptions” on page 651.

Related Topics
Editing an Eye Mask

PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations

A PAM3 waveform is a Pulse Amplitude Modulation waveform with three levels, and contains
2 eyes. A PAM4 waveform has four levels and contains 3 eyes. In this section, we will use the
PAM4 waveform as the example.
A PAM4 waveform has four levels that are identified by their number in range 0..3, starting
from bottom: "Level .0" to "Level 3".

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 205

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-21. PAM4 Waveform

A PAM4 eye contains 3 eyes. They are identified by the levels they are in between: “Eye 0/1”
(bottom or lower eye), “Eye 1/2” (middle eye) and “Eye 2/3” (top or upper eye).

Figure 5-22. PAM4 Eye Diagram

To compute measures on a PAM4 eye diagram, you have to provide an input X value (in the
eye-diagram X-range) specifying where to compute the sampling

The levels are computed as follows:

• approximated level value are computed for each level, using a histogram made of values
of the eye at the given input X value
• the eye diagram is split horizontally in 4 parts, half-way between each approximated
level values
• the Level Value for each eye-split is then the mean of the eye Y value at the given input
X value

206 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-23. PAM4 Eye Levels

The Eye Inner Height is the distance at the given input X value between the upper point of the
level below and the lowest point of the level above.

The Eye Inner Width is the distance, measured half way of an inner height, of the right most
point on the left to the left most point on the right.

Figure 5-24. PAM4 Height and Width

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 207

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

The rise time and fall time are computed as follows:

• when the waveform rises from a low level to an upper one, the rise time is the time
between (lower level + delta) to (upper level - delta)
• when the waveform falls from a low level to a lower one, the fall time is the time
between (upper level - delta) to (lower level +delta)
• The delta is 10% of the level amplitude, i.e. (Level_2 - Level_0) * 0.1. The delta is NOT
fixed, for example, at 10% of the max level difference.
• Level 0 to Level 1, mean for transition 0-2, 0-3, 1-2, 1-3, 2-3 => 6 rise times).
The eye distortion (Ratio of Level Mismatch) and eye linearity are computed as follows:

• RLM = min((3*ES1), (3*ES2), (2 - 3*ES1), (2 - 3*ES2))

where:
o Vmid = (V0 + V3)/2

o ES1 = (V1 - Vmid) / (V0 - Vmid)

o ES2 = (V2 - Vmid) / (V3 - Vmid)

Note
There is no RLM for PAM3 eyes.

• Eye Linearity = min(AVupp, AVmid, AVlow) / max(AVupp, AVmid, AVlow)

where:
o AVupp = V3 - V2

o AVmid = V2 - V1

o AVlow = V1 - V0

Note
There is no AVmid for PAM3 eyes.

208 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-25. PAM 4 Eye Linearity and RLM

Table 5-2 describes each eye diagram measurement.

Table 5-2. PAM4 Eye Diagram Measurements
Measurement Description
at “X” The first row (at “X”) result is the measurement setup
value, entered by user in Measurements Setup section of
the Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab.
Eye Inner Heights The upper, middle and lower inner eye heights at X.
Eye Inner Widths The upper, middle and lower inner eye widths.
Levels The four eye levels.
RLM Measure of eye distortion (Ratio of Level Mismatch).
Eye Linearity Measure of eye linearity.
Reference Indicates the percentage of amplitudes (difference
Amplitude between top-level and low-level) used to compute
Percentage baselines and toplines. Risetimes are the times from
baselines to toplines. Falltimes are times from toplines to
baselines.
Measured Edge The number measured risetimes + falltimes, divided by the
Percentage total number of (rising + falling) edges, and multiplied by
100.
Risetimes The risetimes between each of the different levels.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 209

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Table 5-2. PAM4 Eye Diagram Measurements (cont.)

Measurement Description
Falltimes The falltimes between each of the different levels.

Tip
See also “Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab” on page 448and the eye diagram
functions listed in the Statistical Functions table in Waveform Calculator “Function
Descriptions” on page 651.

C-Phy Eye Calculation

A MIPI C-Phy eye-diagram is made of the 3 differential lines. It is triggered by the first 0
crossing at each transition, and is right aligned.

Waveform Calculator Functions

The following Waveform Calculator Statistical functions support the MIPI C-Phy V1.2 eye
diagram measurement method:

• cphytrigger
Creates first zero-crossing trigger waveform. Also used to compute UI jitter and
transition jitter.
• eyecphy
Constructs a self-triggered C-Phy eye diagram from three input waveforms.
• eyesetmask
Adds a mask to an eye diagram.
• eyewithtrigger
Constructs a triggered eye diagram from a waveform.

Trigger
The Waveform Calculator functions may be used to analyze and display C-Phy Eye Diagram
waveforms. Figure 5-26 shows an example where at least one differential line crosses zero at
each symbol transition. At most the three differential lines cross 0. The trigger for the eye
diagram is the first zero crossing at each symbol transition.

210 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-26. Differential Lines and Zero Level

For each differential line:

• The minimum of the risetime and falltime is computed.

• All zero crossings are computed.
The maximum of the minimum risetimes and falltimes is a validity-threshold:

• All zero crossings with time-delta less than the validity-threshold are discarded.
• In Figure 5-26, before 0.5ns: waveforms are around 0V, but zero crossings in this region
are not used to build the eye.
For each differential line individually:

• UImin, the minimum delta-time between two crossings, is computed.

• The minimum of these three minimum delta-times (one per differential lines), minus a
tolerance (default is 20%), is a transition-threshold.
All valid zero-crossings from the three lines are merged and sorted. The resulting triggers are:

• Zero crossings, from time min to time max, whose distance with previous zero crossing
is more than the transition-threshold. See Figure 5-27.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 211

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-27. Differential Lines, Zero Level, and Trigger (Rising Edges)

Because the eye-diagram is right aligned, the time range of the crossing is:

• From one UIaverage before the first trigger; to display data before the first crossing.

• To the last trigger; there is no trigger after to anchor the remaining of the waveforms.

Jitter
Figure 5-28 shows the differential lines, UI jitter and transition jitter for a C-Phy waveform.

Figure 5-28. Differential Lines, UI jitter and Transition Jitter

UI Jitter
The UI jitter is the jitter of the period of the trigger. For each time t(i) of the trigger rising edge:

UI_jitter(i) = (t(i+1) - t(i)) - UIaverage

212 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Transition Jitter
Transition jitter is the delay, for a symbol transition, from the first zero-crossing to the last zero-
crossing. The transition jitter of a single zero crossing is always 0. The transition jitter is always
positive.

Eye Diagram
The C-Phy eye-diagram is made of the three differential lines, based on the trigger, right
aligned, and superposed. It is triggered by the first 0 crossing at each transition, as shown in
Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29. C-Phy Eye Diagram with Eye Mask

The domain range (X-axis) is right-aligned with the trigger: all data are negative for a right-
aligned eye.

General triggered eye diagrams can be left aligned or center aligned. C-Phy eye diagrams are
always right-aligned. Figure 5-30. shows an example of C-Phy eye diagram (right aligned) with
left-aligned eye diagrams made from the same differential lines and C-Phy trigger.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 213

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

Figure 5-30. C-Phy Eye Diagram and Triggered Eyes with Other Alignments

Eye Mask
A mask on a C-Phy eye diagram is always right-aligned. Example masks are show in Table 5-3:
Table 5-3. C-Phy Eye Mask
Diamond Shape Hexagon Shape
{MASK_FILE} {MASK_FILE}
{VERSION = 2.0} {VERSION = 2.0}

{MASK = CPhy-Diamond {MASK = CPhy-Hexagon

(PTOPMAX = .270) (PTOPMAX = .270)
(PBASEMIN = -.270) (PBASEMIN = -.270)
(50;0) (25;0)
(75;.1) (50;.1)
(99.99;0) (75;.1)
(75;-.1) (99.99;0)
} (75;-.1)
(50;-.1)
}

The above masks have Y values min and max at -1 and 1. These example masks require the
automatic Y fit option.

214 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations

You can also build your own eye-masks based on industry standards.

Note
A CPhy.mask file may be loaded using menu Tools > Eye Diagram with Eye Type set to
“NRZ”, select Apply Mask, click on the Eye Mask icon to open the Eye Mask Dialog
Box. Then use the Open Folder icon to load a CPhy.mask file from disk.

Alternatively, add the following in $HOME/settings.properties the following line:

userEyeMaskFiles=<path to the directory>/CPhy.mask

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 215

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Working with Smith Charts

Working with Smith Charts

A Smith Chart displays a sequence of impedance (Z-parameters), admittance (Y-parameters),
scatter parameter (S-parameters) or reflection coefficient data, plotted as curves on a grid. The
Smith Chart enables all possible impedances to be found on the domain of existence of the
reflection coefficient.
Mathematically, the Smith Chart represents the following relationship for all values of Z
(impedance) in the reflection coefficient plane, also called the G plane:

Γ = (Z - ZO) / (Z + ZO)

ZO represents the “characteristic impedance” of a transmission line. If you define normalized

impedance as z, then the relationship is as follows:

z = Z / ZO = (R + jX) / ZO = r + jx

which translates to the form:

Γ = (z - 1) / (z + 1)

With a Smith Chart, you can plot impedance values using curves and then read reflection-
coefficient values from the grid.

Scattering Parameters (S-Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Creating a Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Impedance and Admittance Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Smith Chart and Polar Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cursors in the Smith Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Circles in the Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Changing the Visibility of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Scattering Parameters (S-Parameters)

When the amplitude and phase of an incoming wave on a transmission line moves through a
circuit, its energy “scatters” and is partitioned between all outgoing waves on all other
transmission lines connected to the circuit. Scattering parameters (also known as S-parameters)
are the fixed properties of the circuit which describe how the energy couples between each pair
of ports or transmission lines connected to the circuit. S-parameters are plotted as curves on a
Smith Chart grid.

216 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Creating a Smith Chart

Creating a Smith Chart

You can create a Smith Chart for both frequency-domain waveforms and complex-valued
frequency-domain waveforms.
Procedure
1. For frequency-domain waveforms, right-click the waveform name in the Waveform List
panel and choose Plot as > smith_chart.
2. For complex-valued frequency-domain waveforms, select
Transformations > smith_chart from the Waveform Popup Menu. If a waveform is
not an S11 or S22 parameter waveform, it is displayed as a complex-plane plot over a
Smith Chart grid. By default, S11 and S22 parameters (scattering parameters) are
displayed in a Smith Chart when they are brought up for viewing.
Related Topics
Working with Smith Charts

Impedance and Admittance Displays

You can change the coordinates, switching between displaying by Impedance (along the Z-
parameter axis) or Admittance (along the Y-parameter axis). You can also display both
impedance and admittance overlaid on a single chart (ImpedAdmit).
Use the following procedure to change between impedance and admittance displays:

Procedure
1. Right-click on the row containing the Smith Chart to open the Row Popup Menu.
2. Choose Smith Chart > Impedance or Smith Chart > Admittance or Smith Chart >
Both.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 217

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Impedance and Admittance Displays

Figure 5-31. Smith Chart Impedance Display

Figure 5-32. Smith Chart Admittance Display

218 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Impedance and Admittance Displays

Figure 5-33. Smith Chart Impedance and Admittance Display

3. Ordinarily, the Smith Chart displays only positive real values. If, however, values of
S11- or S22-parameter waveforms extend beyond the reaches of this display, the Smith
Chart is automatically extended to display values outside this range. The maximum
negative real values are:
• -0.8 for the left part of the chart
• -1.2 for the right part of the chart
4. The maximum imaginary values are:
• 0.2 for the top part of the chart
• -0.2 for the bottom part of the chart

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 219

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Smith Chart and Polar Displays

Figure 5-34. Smith Chart with Negative Real Values

Related Topics
Working with Smith Charts
Smith Chart and Polar Displays

Smith Chart and Polar Displays

You can switch between a Smith Chart display and a polar display.
Procedure
1. Right-click an element on the chart.
2. To switch to a polar display select Transformations > polar_chart from the Waveform
Popup Menu.
3. To switch back select or Transformation > smith_chart.

220 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Cursors in the Smith Chart

Figure 5-35. Polar Chart Display

Related Topics
Working with Smith Charts
Impedance and Admittance Displays

Cursors in the Smith Chart

You can add a cursor to a Smith Chart, change the data value, and select which values to
display.
Procedure
1. To add a cursor to a Smith Chart select Cursor > Add from the main menu or click the
Add Cursor icon in the toolbar. The Smith Chart does not use bar cursors. Instead,
cursors are represented by marks on the plotted waves, and the circles that correspond to
that point on the graph.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 221

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Cursors in the Smith Chart

Figure 5-36. Cursor in a Smith Chart

2. Drag the cursor along the path of any curve to determine the impedance at that point.
Change the data value to take into account the characteristic impedance. The F
(frequency) and Z values are displayed. The S parameters can be displayed by selecting
the appropriate option from the Data Values dialog box.

Note
You can automatically snap the cursor to the nearest data point. Choose Edit >
Options and select RF from the EZwave Preferences list and then check Snap to
Data.

3. Use the following procedure to change the data value and select which values to display:
4. Add a cursor to a Smith Chart.
5. Right-click on the value flag.
6. Choose Data Values > Set from the Cursor Value Popup Menu.
Figure 5-37. Setting Data Values

• Select Normalized Impedance, Normalized Admittance or Normalized

Admittance/Impedance for the displayed value to be normalized. This option

222 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Circles in the Smith Chart

varies depending on whether impedance, admittance, or both are displayed in the

value flag.
If the value is not normalized, the display in the value flag reflects this. If this option
is not selected, enter a ZCHAR value, in ohms.

• Select Display Admittance and Impedance to display both admittance and

impedance values in the value flag.

• Select Display S Parameter to display the S parameter in the value flag.

Note
If more than one waveform is displayed on a Smith Chart, dragging the cursor along
one wave causes the cursor to move along the others, as well.

Related Topics
Working with Smith Charts
Scattering Parameters (S-Parameters)
Impedance and Admittance Displays

Circles in the Smith Chart

You can plot Constant circles and Stability circles on a Smith Chart. Usually, a circle plot
consists of a family of circles.
Use the following procedure to invoke the Circle Visibility dialog box which enables you to set
which circles are visible in a circle plot:

Procedure
1. Right click on a Smith Chart circle plot or circle plot name in a graph window.
2. From the Waveform Popup Menu, select the Circle Visibility menu item.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 223

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Circles in the Smith Chart

Figure 5-38. Multiple-Circle Plot and Circle Visibility Option

Results
Figure 5-39. Circle Visibility Table

224 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Changing the Visibility of Elements

The Circle Visibility Table displays the following information about individual elements of a
circle plot.
• Index - A sequential number assigned to each element of the circle plot. The first
element is assigned the number one. By default, the numbers are listed in ascending
order. To reverse this order, click the small triangle.
• Frequency - The frequency column shows the frequency value of the element. To invert
the order of this column, click the small triangle.

Changing the Visibility of Elements

You can select which Smith Chart elements are visible in the graph window.
Procedure
1. Click the box or boxes in the Show column corresponding to the element number or
numbers.
2. If multiple elements, you can group them together at either the top or bottom of the table
by clicking the small arrow at the top of the column.
Results
The following figure shows the results after selecting a single circle to highlight.
Figure 5-40. Highlighted Circle

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 225

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Changing the Visibility of Elements

Related Topics
Working with Smith Charts

226 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Comparing Waveforms

Comparing Waveforms
The EZwave Waveform Compare Tool enables waveforms from a reference and a new
simulation to be compared. It can report the set of differences graphically or in report files.
This tool can be accessed through the graphical user interface or through a set of Tcl commands
(see “Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples” on page 1144).

To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use the Waveform Compare Tool, using an example
that compares the results of periodic steady state analysis with time-domain analysis results, see
the video:

This section describes the following tasks relating to waveform comparison and the waveform
comparison algorithm:

Support for Different Types of Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Using the Waveform Compare Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Manually Comparing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Starting a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Selecting Waveforms for Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Running a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Stepping Through Differences With a Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Displaying the Tolerance Tube for Analog Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Waveform Comparison Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Generating a Waveform Comparison Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Digital to Digital Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Analog to Analog Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spectral Comparison Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Viewing and Saving Comparison Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Saving a Comparison Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Setting Comparison Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting General Comparison Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting Comparison Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting Tolerance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 227

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Support for Different Types of Waveform

Setting Conversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
wreal Waveform Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Support for Different Types of Waveform

You can apply the Waveform Compare Tool to digital, analog and mixed-signal simulation
results.
Supported waveforms are:

• Verilog and VHDL digital waveforms.

• Analog continuous, wreal and real waveforms.
• Enum, char and string waveforms.
For buses, records and compound waveforms:

• Digital buses are compared directly providing they have the same number of bits. If this
is not the case, EZwave’s behavior cannot be guaranteed.
• Analog buses and records are exploded and bits compared individually. Bits are
matched by index rather than by name. If the number of bits differs between the test and
the reference object, bits are compared until the smaller number is reached. An error
message is then displayed.
• Compound waveforms are exploded and elements compared individually. Elements are
matched by index rather than by name. If the number of elements differs between the
test and the reference waveform, elements are compared until the smaller number is
reached. An error message is then displayed.

Note
Assertions, SOA and complex waveforms are not supported in the Waveform
Comparison Tool.

Related Topics
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard
Manually Comparing Waveforms

Using the Waveform Compare Wizard

You can use the Waveform Compare Wizard to help step you through each stage of the
waveform comparison process.

228 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard

Note
The waveform compare tool automatically applies a set of default settings to the
comparison. To change these defaults refer to “Setting Comparison Options” on page 244.

To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use the Waveform Compare Tool, using an example
that compares the results of periodic steady state analysis with time-domain analysis results, see
the video:

Note
For details on error messages that may be encountered during a waveform comparison, see
“Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison” on page 1191.

The process flow is shown in Figure 5-41.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 229

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard

Figure 5-41. The Waveform Compare Wizard Process Flow

Procedure
Tip
The Waveform Compare Wizard dialog box can only open .wdb files. For other
database file formats such as .wlf, first open the required databases by selecting File
> Open from the EZwave main menu. You can then choose an opened database from
the dropdown list using the Waveform Compare Wizard dialog box, as described below.

1. From the EZwave main menu, select Tools > Waveform Campare > Comparison
Wizard. This opens the first page of the Waveform Compare Wizard.
2. Specify the reference dataset in the Choose Reference Dataset From List or Disk field.
Use the dropdown list to choose from recently opened databases, or click the folder icon
to use a file browser to select the reference database.
3. Specify the test dataset in the Choose Test Dataset From List or Disk field.

230 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard

By default, the current open database is used as the test dataset (indicated by the Use
Current Database (database_name) option). Specify a different database if required.
Click Next to move on to the Comparison Method page of the Waveform Compare
Wizard.
4. Select from the following three comparison methods:
• Compare All Waveforms
All available waveforms in the test dataset are compared against the same
waveforms in the reference dataset. Select this option and click Next to begin the
comparison.
The results of the waveform comparison are displayed in the graph window.
Waveforms that contain differences from the reference waveform are marked by a
red X by their name and those difference portions of the waveform are highlighted.
Figure 5-42. Waveform Comparison Results

• Specify Comparison By Waveform

Select this option to specify the waveforms to compare on the Select Waveforms
Dialog Box:
i. Click Add on the Add Waveforms From Reference Database side of the window.
This opens the Add Waveforms dialog box.
ii. Select one or more waveforms and click OK. The selected waveforms are added
to the Reference side of the Waveform Compare Wizard.

Note
For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are displayed
in the Waveform Compare By Waveform > Add Waveform dialog box.
Loaded waveforms are waveforms that have been displayed once or waveforms
located at a hierarchy level that has been selected once in the Waveform List
Panel. Refer to “Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on page 1186.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 231

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Using the Waveform Compare Wizard

iii. By default, the Take Corresponding Waveforms in Test Database option is

selected, indicating that the tool will search the test dataset for waveforms with
names matching those in the reference dataset.
iv. To compare waveforms with different names, uncheck Take Corresponding
Waveforms in Test Database, and click Add to add test waveforms.
When comparing waveforms with different names, the first waveform in the list
of reference waveforms is compared with the first waveform in the list of test
waveforms, and so on, regardless of their names.
• Specify Comparison By Hierarchy Level
Select this to specify a hierarchy level for comparison using the Select Hierarchy
Dialog Box:
i. Select the reference waveform hierarchy from the Waveform List panel and click
the Add Selected Hierarchy icon. This populates the field with the selected
waveform hierarchy.
ii. By default, the comparison searches the same hierarchy level name in the test
database. To specify a different hierarchy level, select Specify a different name
for test Hierarchy Level and choose the test hierarchy level.
iii. In the Compare Waveforms of Type area, select the types of waveforms to
include in the comparison and whether to search the hierarchies recursively.
5. After defining the waveform or hierarchy for comparison, you can select more
waveforms by specifying Yes on the Would you like to add more waveforms to the
comparison page of the Waveform Import Wizard.
6. Click Next and Finish to begin computation of the waveform differences.
Related Topics
Waveform Comparison Reports
Selecting Waveforms for Comparison

232 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Manually Comparing Waveforms

Manually Comparing Waveforms

You can manually compare waveforms without the use of the Waveform Compare Wizard.
Note
The waveform compare tool automatically applies a set of default settings to the
comparison. By default, the waveform compare tool looks for waveforms with the same
name in the reference and test simulation result databases. To change these defaults refer to
“Setting Comparison Options” on page 244.

Note
For details on error messages that may be encountered during a waveform comparison, see
“Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison” on page 1191.

Use the following steps, as described in this section:

Starting a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Selecting Waveforms for Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compare All Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compare by Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compare by Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Running a Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Starting a Comparison
You can manually compare waveforms using the Waveform Compare Tool.
Use the following procedure to begin a manual waveform comparison:

Procedure
Tip
The Select Datasets dialog box can only open .wdb files. For other database file
formats such as .wlf, first open the required databases by selecting File > Open from
the EZwave main menu. You can then choose an opened database from the dropdown
list using the Select Datasets dialog box, as described below.

1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Start Comparison. This opens the Select
Datasets dialog box.
2. Select the reference dataset in the Choose Reference Dataset From List or Disk field.
Use the dropdown list to choose from recently opened databases, or click the folder icon
to use a file browser to select the reference database.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 233

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Manually Comparing Waveforms

3. Select the test dataset in the Choose Test Dataset From List or Disk field. By default,
the currently open database is used as the test dataset (indicated by the Use Current
Database (database_name) option). To specify a different database than the current
one, use the dropdown list or the file browser to choose the test database.
4. Click OK to close the Select Datasets dialog box.
Related Topics
Selecting Waveforms for Comparison
Setting Comparison Options
Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison

234 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Manually Comparing Waveforms

Selecting Waveforms for Comparison

Once you have started a waveform comparison, you can begin to add waveforms.
You can choose the waveforms for comparison with the following three methods described in
this section:

Compare All Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Compare by Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compare by Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Compare All Waveforms

You can specify the comparison of all available waveforms in the test dataset against the same
waveforms in the reference dataset.
Procedure
Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Add > Compare All Waveforms.

Compare by Waveforms
You can specify which waveforms are used for the comparison.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Add > Compare by
Waveforms. This opens the Select Waveforms Dialog Box.
2. Click Add on the Add Waveforms From Reference Database side of the window. This
opens the Add Waveforms dialog box.
3. In the Add Waveforms dialog box, select one or more waveforms.
4. Click OK. The selected waveforms are added to the Reference side of the Waveform
Compare Tool.
5. By default, the “Take Corresponding Waveforms in Test Database” option is selected,
indicating that the Waveform Compare Tool will search for waveforms in the test
dataset whose names match the specified reference waveforms.
To compare waveforms with different names, uncheck “Take Corresponding
Waveforms in Test Database”, and add test waveforms in the same way reference
waveforms were added.
When comparing waveforms with different names, the first waveform defined in the list
of reference waveforms is compared with the first waveform defined in the list of test
waveforms, and so on, regardless of their names.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 235

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Manually Comparing Waveforms

6. Click OK to close the Select Waveforms Dialog Box.

Compare by Hierarchy
You can specify which waveforms are used for the comparison by hierarchy.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Add > Compare by Hierarchy. This opens
the Select Hierarchy Dialog Box.
2. Select the reference waveform hierarchy from the EZwave waveform list.
3. In the Reference Hierarchy Level field, click the Add Selected Hierarchy icon.
This populates the field with the selected waveform hierarchy.
4. By default, the same hierarchy level name is searched in the test database for the
comparison. If you want to specify a different hierarchy level for comparison, select
“Specify a different name for test Hierarchy Level”. You can then choose the test
hierarchy level for comparison.
5. In the “Compare Waveforms of Type” area, select the types of waveforms to include in
the comparison and whether to search the hierarchies recursively.
6. Click OK to close the Select Hierarchy Dialog Box.

Running a Comparison
Once you have specified the waveforms you want for comparison, you can run the comparison.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Waveform Compare > Run Comparison.
2. You can continue to add waveforms and run comparisons until you select
Tools > Waveform Compare > End Comparison.
Related Topics
Select Hierarchy Dialog Box
Select Waveforms Dialog Box

236 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results

Viewing Waveform Comparison Results

After waveform comparison, the results are displayed in a graph window. Waveforms that
contain differences with respect to the reference waveform are marked by a red ‘x’ by its name.
Those difference portions of the waveform are highlighted in the graph window (Figure 5-43).

Figure 5-43. Waveform Comparison Results

You can also generate a comparison report. See Waveform Comparison Reports.

Stepping Through Differences With a Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Displaying the Tolerance Tube for Analog Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Stepping Through Differences With a Cursor

You can add a cursor to the waveform comparison results and easily step through each
difference between the reference and result waveforms.
Procedure
1. Add a cursor by pressing F5. A cursor is added to the waveform comparison result graph
window.
2. In the toolbar, click the Move Cursor to Next Error icon. The icon advances the
cursor to the “next” difference between the reference and result waveforms.
3. To step the cursor to the “previous” difference between the reference and result
waveforms, click the Move Cursor to Previous Error icon.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 237

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results

Figure 5-44. Stepping Through Waveform Differences With a Cursor

Related Topics
Displaying the Tolerance Tube for Analog Comparisons

Displaying the Tolerance Tube for Analog Comparisons

The tolerance “tube” is the virtual area along the reference waveform that defines the limits
where the result waveform can deviate from the reference waveform before being considered
“different.”
For more information on analog waveform tolerances, see “Analog Waveform Comparison
Algorithm” on page 253.

In the waveform comparison results, you can display the tolerance tube by right-clicking on one
of the waveform names in the graph window that contains the comparison results and selecting
Display Tolerance Tube (Figure 5-45).

In Figure 5-46, the green waveform is the reference waveform. The two blue “waveforms”
represent the tolerance tube. When the yellow result waveform goes “outside” of this tube is
where it is “different” from the reference waveform, given the tolerances.

238 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results

Figure 5-45. Display Tolerance Tube Menu Item

Figure 5-46. Graph Window Showing Tolerance Tube

Related Topics
Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 239

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Waveform Comparison Reports

Waveform Comparison Reports

After you run a manual waveform comparison, you can generate a report of the differences in a
text file.
Generating a Waveform Comparison Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Digital to Digital Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Analog to Analog Comparison Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spectral Comparison Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Generating a Waveform Comparison Report

Describes how you generate a waveform comparison report using the Waveform Compare
Tool.
Procedure
1. To generate a waveform comparison report, choose Tools > Waveform Compare >
Differences > Write Report. This opens a file browser where you can choose the name
and location of the report.
2. In the Save Comparison Report file browser, choose a location and a name for the report
and click Save.

Digital to Digital Comparison Reports

For digital-digital reporting, the syntax is the same as the Questa SIM report files. The
difference is that Questa SIM reports differences organized around time, but the EZwave
reports are based on each waveform.

Example
The following is an example of a digital to digital comparison report:

Total differences = 100

Diff number 1, From time 2.000000e-8 s to time 4.000000e-8 s.
<vsimref>clk = '1'
<vsimres>clk = '0'
Diff number 2, From time 6.000000e-8 s to time 8.000000e-8 s.
<vsimref>clk = '1'
<vsimres>clk = '0'
Diff number 3, From time 1.200000e-7 s to time 1.400000e-7 s.
<vsimref>clk = '0'
<vsimres>clk = '1'
Diff number 4, From time 1.600000e-7 s to time 1.800000e-7 s.
<vsimref>clk = '0'
<vsimres>clk = '1'
...

240 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Waveform Comparison Reports

Related Topics
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results
Waveform Comparison Reports

Analog to Analog Comparison Reports

For analog to analog comparisons, the report indicates the number of differences found, and for
each difference, it indicates the beginning and end times where the waveforms differ. The report
also indicates the time at which the maximum Y difference is encountered, and the Y values of
reference and test waveforms.

Example
The following is an example of an analog to analog comparison report:

Total differences = 1
Diff number 1, From time 9.329983e-5 s to time 1.198995e-4 s.
Maximum difference at time 9.329983e-5 s : deltaY = 1.172866e-4 A
<REF>I(vv1) = -1.498311e-4
<RES>I(vv1) = -3.254448e-5

Related Topics
Viewing Waveform Comparison Results
Waveform Comparison Reports

Spectral Comparison Report

For spectral comparisons, the report indicates the three types of possible differences.

Description
The comparison differences that are possible are:

• a reference without a result with a matching frequency

• a result without a reference with a matching frequency
• a reference matching a result’s frequency but not close enough in amplitude. In this case,
the comparison tracks the result closest to the reference and reports the distance outside
the tolerance.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 241

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Viewing and Saving Comparison Rules

Example
The following is an example of a spectral comparison report:

Total differences between <refDB> and <resDB> = 3

Diff number 1
<refDB> frequency 14.321MHz, magnitude 3.23 dB
<resDB> frequency 14.320MHz, magnitude 4.51 dB (1.362 dB outside
amplitude tolerance)
Diff number 2
<refDB> no matching frequency within tolerance
<resDB> frequency 19.438MHz, magnitude 2.03 dB
Diff number 3
<refDB> frequency 23.127MHz, magnitude 4.03 dB
<resDB> no matching frequency within tolerance

Viewing and Saving Comparison Rules

When you set up a waveform comparison, the settings (or “rules”) you choose for the
comparison can be viewed and saved in a Tcl file for later use.
Saving comparison rules only saves comparison options, clock definitions, and region and
signal selections.

Procedure
1. To view and save the comparison rules for a session, start a waveform comparison
session, either manually (see “Manually Comparing Waveforms” on page 233) or with
the Waveform Compare Wizard (see “Using the Waveform Compare Wizard” on
page 228).
2. Make your waveform comparison rules.
3. Before you end the comparison, select Tools > Waveform Compare > Rules > Show.
The file that contains the current rules for the waveform comparison is displayed.
4. To save the comparison rules to a Tcl file, select Tools > Waveform Compare > Rules
> Save to open the Save Comparison Rules dialog box.
5. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the rules Tcl file, give the file a name,
and click Save.

Saving a Comparison Session

You can save a copy of the comparison session in a Tcl file for direct replay later.
Procedure
1. To save the session, start a waveform comparison session, either manually (see
“Manually Comparing Waveforms” on page 233) or with the Waveform Compare
Wizard (see “Using the Waveform Compare Wizard” on page 228).

242 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Saving a Comparison Session

2. Make your waveform comparison rules.

3. To save the comparison session to a Tcl file, select Tools > Waveform Compare >
Save Session to open the Save Comparison Session dialog box.
4. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the rules Tcl file, give the file a name,
and click Save. The file is called session.tcl by default.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 243

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Setting Comparison Options

You can set various comparison options for the Waveform Compare Tool.
Select Tools > Waveform Compare > Options to open the four-tabbed Comparison Options
Dialog Box.

Use the four tabs to do the following:

Setting General Comparison Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Setting Comparison Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Continuous Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Sampled Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Clocked Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Setting Tolerance Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Analog Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Digital Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Mixed Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Spectral Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Setting Conversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Digital Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Analog to Digital Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Setting General Comparison Options

You can set global general options for Waveform Compare Tool.
Procedure
1. Select Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the General Options Tab:
2. In the Comparison Limit Count fields, specify the maximum number of differences
(Total Limit) and differences per signal (Per Signal Limit) allowed before the
comparison terminates.
3. If you want to begin the comparison from a point other than the start time (or start
frequency) of the selected waves, select Use Start in the Domain Selection and enter a
new value.
If you want to end the comparison at a point other than the stop time (or stop frequency)
of the selected waves, select Use Stop and enter a new value.
4. If you want to specify a delay to shift all added waveforms from the reference dataset,
select Use Reference Delay in the Delay Definition section and enter the delay time.
If you want to specify a delay to shift all added waveforms from the test dataset, select
Use Test Delay and enter the delay time.

244 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

5. When making comparisons you can choose how the results are treated. Select from the
following Plot Options:
• Automatically Add Comparison to Wave Window — This option adds the
comparison results to the current wave window, including both correct (waveforms
with no differences) and erroneous (waveforms with differences) waveforms.
• Automatically Add Comparisons With Errors to Wave Window — This option
adds only comparison results that contain errors (waveforms with differences) to the
current wave window.
• Do Not Plot Results of Comparison — This option does not add the comparison
results to the current wave window.
6. You can sort the comparison results. Click the Sort By checkbox and choose from the
following options:
• First Difference — This option finds the first time when any signal in one run
begins to differ from the corresponding signal in another run, and plots the signals in
sorted order.
• Maximum Difference — This option finds the first time when any signal in one run
differs most from the corresponding signal in another run, and plots the signals in
sorted order.
• Maximum Spectrum Difference — This option finds the frequency when any
signal in one run differs the most from the corresponding signal in another run, after
phase shift, and plots the signals in sorted order.
• Plot Top Results — This option specifies the number of top results to be plotted.
Default is 8.
• Annotate Result Waveforms With Sorting Parameter — If checked, the sorting
parameter value will be plotted as annotation (or other marker, for example delta)
over the plotted comparison results (waveforms).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 245

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Setting Comparison Method Options

You can set options to define how the Waveform Compare Tool compares digital waveforms.
Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Comparison Methods tab.

The three methods for comparing digital waveforms are described in this section:

Continuous Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Sampled Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Clocked Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Continuous Comparison
The Waveform Compare Tool uses the Continuous Comparison method by Default. In this
method, test signals are compared to reference signals at each transition (for digital-digital
comparisons) or at each simulated data point (for analog-analog and mixed signal comparisons)
of the reference waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Comparison Methods
tab.
2. Select Continuous Comparison.
3. Optionally:

If you want to... Do the following:

Perform a “digital” edge comparison where Select Convert Analog To Digital in the
the source and reference signals (one, or Edge Comparison section. An Analog to
both) are analog. Digital conversion is applied automatically
Tip: This is useful, for example, where during the comparison. Refer to additional
the waveforms represent a clock but settings for “Analog to Digital Conversion”
have different amplitudes. You can compare on page 253 and “Digital Comparison” on
the delay between the waveforms. page 250.

4. Click OK to save the settings.

Sampled Comparison
Sampled comparison allows you to define either a Frequency or a Period to use for the
comparison session. A comparison between a reference and a test waveform is made for each
point sampled.

246 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Comparison Methods
tab.
2. Select Sampled Comparison.
3. Enter either a Frequency or a Period to use for the comparison session.
4. Optionally:

If you want to... Do the following:

Perform a “digital” edge comparison where the Select Convert Analog To Digital in the Edge
source and reference signals (one, or both) are Comparison section. An Analog to Digital
analog. conversion is applied automatically during the
Tip: This is useful, for example, where the comparison. Refer to additional settings for
waveforms represent a clock but have “Analog to Digital Conversion” on page 253
different amplitudes. You can compare the and “Digital Comparison” on page 250.
delay between the waveforms.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Clocked Comparison
In the Clocked Comparison method, you define a clock to use as a trigger waveform for the
comparison. Signals are compared only at, or just after, an edge on some signal.
In this mode, you define one or more clocks. The test signal is compared to a reference signal
and both are sampled relative to the defined clock. The clock can be defined as the rising or
falling edge (or either edge) of a particular signal plus a user-specified delay. The design need
not have any events occurring at the specified clock time.

The clocked comparison settings here will also apply to analog-analog and analog-digital
(mixed) comparisons.

When you define the clock, it can also apply to an analog waveform. The edges, rising or
falling, are automatically calculated using functions available in the EZwave Measurement
Tool.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Comparison Methods
tab.
2. Select Clocked Comparison.
3. Select a waveform from the dropdown list or use the Use the Add Selected Waveform
icon to add the currently selected waveform to the list.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 247

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

4. Click Clocks to open the Clocks dialog box. This dialog box lists all the clocks you’ve
defined.
5. Click Add to open the Add Clock Dialog Box. If you want to modify a clock you’ve
previously added, select it from the list of clocks and click Modify.
6. Specify a name for this clock definition in the Clock Name field.
7. If you want to set the Delay Signal Offset, enter a value in the field. By default, this is 0.
8. In the Based on Waveform field, select the waveform whose edges are to be used as the
strobe trigger.
9. In the Compare Strobe Edge field, select which edge to use in the clocked comparison.
By default, only the rising edge is used.
10. Click OK to close the Add Clocks dialog box.
11. Click OK to close the Clocks dialog box.
12. Optionally:

If you want to... Do the following:

Perform a “digital” edge comparison where the Select Convert Analog To Digital in the Edge
source and reference signals (one, or both) are Comparison section. An Analog to Digital
analog. conversion is applied automatically during the
Tip: This is useful, for example, where the comparison. Refer to additional settings for
waveforms represent a clock but have “Analog to Digital Conversion” on page 253
different amplitudes. You can compare the and “Digital Comparison” on page 250.
delay between the waveforms.

13. Click OK to save the settings.

248 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Setting Tolerance Options

You can set tolerance options for analog-analog, digital-digital, mixed-signal and spectral
comparisons.
These options are an extension of the Continuous Comparison of digital-digital compare
options. They are set using the Tolerances Tab. Choose Tools > Waveform
Compare > Options and select the Tolerances tab.

The tolerance options are described in the following topics:

Analog Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Digital Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Mixed Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Spectral Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Analog Comparison
The analog comparison options enable you to specify the X and Y tolerances, or use the default
tolerances.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Tolerances tab.
2. Enter percentage or numerical values for X Tolerance and Y Tolerance. Alternatively,
select Use Automatic X Tolerance or Use Automatic Y Tolerance, the Waveform
Compare Tool uses the following formulas to calculate the tolerances:
• X Tolerance
The minimum of ((x_max - x_min)/number_of_points) or (0.01 . (x_max - x_min))
• Y Tolerance
0.01 . (y_max - y_min)
3. Optionally, you can also filter differences by specifying a minimum delta X value. This
is usually time - differences are ignored if they have a shorter duration than the specified
value. Enter a value in the By Minimum Delta X field.
Results
The analog-analog comparison is based on waveform data points provided by the simulator, for
both the reference and the test waveform.
When you choose to specify the tolerances, you can use percentage or numerical values. If you
specify a percentage value (for example, 0.1%), it defines a tolerance value relative to the
minimum and maximum of the waveform (in this example, 0.1% of (x_max – x_min) or 0.1%

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 249

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

of (y_max – y_min)). If you instead specify a numerical tolerance value (for example, 0.1), it
defines an absolute tolerance to be used around the X or Y values.
In Figure 5-47, the blue waveform represents the reference waveform, and the green waveform
represents the test waveform. The magenta “waveforms” are the virtual tubes that represent the
tolerances.
For details on how the waveform compare algorithm uses tolerances, see “Analog Waveform
Comparison Algorithm” on page 253.
Figure 5-47. Waveform Compare Showing Tolerance

Digital Comparison
The digital-digital waveform comparison options enable you to specify the leading and trailing
edge tolerances.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Tolerances tab.
2. The Digital Comparison option contains the following settings:
• Leading Tolerance
Here you can specify a leading edge tolerance. This specifies the maximum time a
test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison
of digital signals. Defaults is 0.
• Trailing Tolerance

250 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Here you can specify a trailing edge tolerance. This specifies the maximum time a
test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison
of digital signals. Defaults is 0.

Mixed Comparison
You can specify leading and trailing edge tolerances for mixed signal comparison.
When comparing mixed-signal waveforms, the Waveform Compare Tool must first convert the
analog waveform into a digital waveform (refer to Analog to Digital Conversion for conversion
options). Then it applies a digital-digital comparison (the comparison function is based on the
least accurate waveform). Refer to Analog to Digital Conversion.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Tolerances tab.
2. The Mixed Comparison option contains the following settings:
• Leading Tolerance
Here you can specify a leading edge tolerance. This specifies the maximum time a
test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison
of digital signals. Defaults is 0.
• Trailing Tolerance
Here you can specify a trailing edge tolerance. This specifies the maximum time a
test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison
of digital signals. Defaults is 0.

Spectral Comparison
You can specify Frequency Tolerance, Amplitude Tolerance and Noise Floor for spectral
comparison.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Tolerances tab.

Note
The Comparison Methods tab options do not affect spectral comparison.

2. The Spectral Comparison option contains the following settings:

• Frequency Tolerance
Here you can specify a frequency tolerance. Defaults is 0.
• Amplitude Tolerance

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 251

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Setting Comparison Options

Here you can specify an amplitude tolerance. Defaults is 0.

• Noise Floor
Here you can specify a noise floor level. If the Use Noise Floor option is enabled,
errors that occur below the specified noise floor amplitude are ignored in the
comparison.

252 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm

Setting Conversion Options

You can use these options for Digital Conversion and Analog to Digital Conversion.
Digital Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Analog to Digital Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Digital Conversion
You can specify the VHDL and Verilog signal value matching rules.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Conversions tab on the
Comparison Options dialog box. Refer to the “Conversions Tab” on page 424.
2. Specify VHDL and Verilog signal value matching rules in VHDL Matching and Verilog
Matching areas. The D in these matching options represent the ‘-’ “don’t care” std_logic
value.

Tip
For more information on the VHDL and Verilog matching options, refer to the
Mapping Data Types section of the Questa SIM User’s Manual (if the host
application installs this manual).

Analog to Digital Conversion

You can specify thresholds for the analog to digital conversion.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Conversions Tab on the
Comparison Options dialog box.
2. Specify whether you want to apply a Single Threshold (default) or Two Thresholds for
the analog to digital conversion. By default, the “Use Automatic Thresholds” option is
checked, specifying that the thresholds are deduced from the input waveforms. Uncheck
this to specify fixed values for each of the thresholds.

Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm

The EZwave waveform comparison algorithm is based only on waveform data points of both
the reference and result waveforms. At each X value on either the reference or result waveform,
the calculations are executed on the reference waveform.
This is illustrated in Figure 5-48. The blue line is the reference waveform and the green line is
the result waveform. “Xtol” and “Ytol” are the tolerances for X and Y, respectively.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 253

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analog Waveform Comparison Algorithm

Figure 5-48. Calculations on the Reference Waveform

Using the default or defined X tolerances (see “Analog Comparison” on page 249), the
algorithm calculates (X – Xtol) and (X + Xtol). These values are used with the X value to
deduce (x, y) corresponding data points to the reference waveform.

At each (x, y) data point, the algorithm calculates (Y – Ytol) and (Y + Ytol). These values are
used to deduce the maximum and minimum Y values.

These calculations form the tolerance area (the red rectangle in Figure 5-48). During
comparison, the result waveform is checked to see if it lies in the tolerance area at the original X
data point.

The tolerances define a virtual “tube” around the reference waveform. The Waveform Compare
Tool checks to see if the test waveform is “inside” the tube, and reports a difference if the test
waveform is outside the tube. In Figure 5-49, the blue reference waveform is “surrounded” by
two magenta waveforms that represent the tolerance tube. The green result waveform is only
highlighted (red vertical highlight) at the area where it is “outside” the tube.

254 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
wreal Waveform Comparison

Figure 5-49. Tolerance “Tube”

The “difference” highlight is calculated from the first data point found outside of the tube to the
last data point found outside of the tube (Figure 5-50).

Figure 5-50. Data Points Outside of the Tolerance Tube

wreal Waveform Comparison

The comparison of “wreal” waveforms follows the same method and tolerance values as
comparison of “real” waveforms.
When ‘X’ or ‘Z’ is encountered, only the ‘X’ tolerance is considered. Within the ‘X’ tolerance,
‘X’ or ‘Z’ may match any other values, including numerical ones.

Outside of the ‘X’ tolerance, a strict ‘Y value’ comparison is applied, meaning that ‘X’ must
match ‘X’ and the ‘Y value’ must match the ‘Y value’.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 255

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms

The display of the tolerance tube is similar to that used for the “real” waveform, except when
the ‘X’ or ‘Z’ state is reached. The tolerance tube is increased to infinity here to enable ‘X’ and
‘Z’ values to match any others.

Figure 5-51 shows the tolerance tube increased to infinity when a ‘Z’ state is encountered in the
reference waveform.

However, when an ‘X’ state is encountered in the result waveform in Figure 5-51, the tolerance
tube does not increase to infinity. Values are matched within the ‘X’ tolerance range.

Note
In the comparison report, the location of the ‘X’ and ‘Z’ state is indicated instead of the
location of the ‘Y value’ maximum difference.

Figure 5-51. Display of the Tolerance Tube

Note
This comparison will produce different results to Questa SIM. In Questa SIM, the digital
comparison algorithm (digital comparison with default tolerance of 0) applies to wreal
waveforms. In Questa ADMS the tolerance is considered around the X domain for ‘X’ and ‘Z’
states, and elsewhere the ‘real’ waveforms comparison algorithm (analog comparison with dX
and dY tolerance) applies.

Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate

Pivot Waveforms
Describes how to use the Parameter Analyzer Tool to generate “pivot” waveforms. You can
change the running variable (x-axis) of one or more compound waveform(s) to one of the

256 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms

waveform’s parameter values, or to the y values of a different compound waveform, and then
plot. You can also filter (exclude) individual parameter values and group parameters by color.
Restrictions and Limitations
• Only compound waveforms may be selected to use as the y-axis of new pivot
waveforms.
Procedure
1. Open the required waveform database and expand the set of waveforms in the
Waveform List Panel.
a. Choose Tools > Parameter Analyzer from the main menu to open the Parameter
Analyzer Tool Dialog Box.
b. Drag and drop the required waveform(s) into the Waveform List area. Alternatively
use Add Selected Waveform icon to add the currently selected waveform(s).

Tip
You can also right-click on a compound waveform in the Waveform List Panel
and choose Plot versus > Parameter Analyzer to open the Parameter Analyzer
Tool dialog box populated with the selected source waveform.

c. Select the y-axis checkbox adjacent to one or more waveforms in the Waveform List
from which you want to create new pivot waveforms.
d. Choose the parameter or waveform (y values) that you want to use as the new x-axis
from the X-Axis dropdown menu.
e. In the Display Options area, choose whether you want to plot the resultant pivot
waveforms Stacked or Overlaid, and whether you want the plot results in a New
Window.
f. Click Apply or OK to create the pivot waveform.
2. (Optional) To set up filters to exclude parameter values from the pivot waveforms:
a. Click on the Advanced tab of the Parameter Analyzer Tool and then click New to
open the Filters Setup Dialog Box dialog box.
b. Choose a Parameter from the menu. Select one or more values from the Values to
Hide list. When you have finished selecting values, click OK. The parameter name
and excluded values are added to the Add Filter list.
c. Repeat the steps above if you want to add another parameter name and values to the
Add Filters list.
d. If you want to change any of the filter values, select a row in the Run Filters table
and click Edit or click Delete to remove the selected row from the Run Filters table.
e. Click Apply or OK to create the pivot waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 257

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

3. (Optional) Waveforms may be colored depending on the selected parameters. All

waveforms that share the same parameter value are displayed with the same color. To
set up color groupings:
a. Click on the Advanced tab of the Parameter Analyzer Tool and choose one or more
parameters from the Group Parameters dropdown menu.
b. Click Apply or OK to create the pivot waveform.
4. (Optional) You can quickly create a simple pivot waveform without the need to open the
Parameter Analyzer Tool dialog box:
a. Open the required waveform database and expand the set of waveforms in the
Waveform List Panel.
b. Right-click on the required compound waveform in the Waveform List Panel and
choose Plot versus > Select X-Axis Param and select an x-axis parameter from the
list. A pivot waveform is then created using the selected parameter as the x-axis.
Results
A pivot waveform is plotted for each of the compound source waveforms selected. The x-axis
of the source waveforms has been changed to use the specified x-axis parameter or waveform
instead.
Related Topics
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box
Filters Setup Dialog Box

Analyzing Current Consumption

When your simulation results include a current analysis, you can use the Current Analysis
dialog box to analyze current consumption of a circuit and its components over time. You can
define time ranges and thresholds to filter results to locate a problem within a subcircuit or
device.
The current analysis is fully hierarchical, which means that you can display all the circuit
components, showing the hierarchy, and filter accordingly down through the hierarchy.

The main purpose of the current analysis is to help you understand where and when the current
consumption is inside a large circuit, or which part of a circuit is consuming more than a
specified threshold, or which subcircuits are consuming what current. You can analyze the
current without having to resimulate, everything is manipulated in the Current Analysis dialog
box and you perform your debugging tasks accordingly there.This analysis provides an
effective way to report current consumption. For designs operating on battery supplies, leakage
issues are important. Advanced process nodes tend to make these problems worse. The power
supply voltages tend to decrease, and the leakage currents tend to increase exponentially at each

258 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

new node. This means the monitoring of current variables (that relate directly to power) is as
important, if not more, than the monitoring of voltages.

When a simulation has been run with current analysis requested, current waveforms are saved in
the waveform database in folders named CURRENT_<analysis_type> depending upon the
types of analyses requested during simulation. You can plot waveforms from these folders as
normal.

Note
See also .CURRENT_ANALYSIS in the Eldo Reference Manual.

A Tutorial—Using Current Analysis is in the Eldo User’s Manual. A video is available that
shows the tasks described in this tutorial.

Prerequisites
You must have requested a current analysis during simulation with Eldo, by including the
.CURRENT_ANALYSIS SPICE command in your netlist or command file. Refer to
“.CURRENT_ANALYSIS” in the Eldo Reference Manual.

Procedure
1. Open a waveform database containing results from a current analysis.
2. Expand the required set of current analysis results in the Waveform List Panel, right-
click on the folder at the required level of hierarchy and choose Current Analysis to
open the Current Analysis Dialog Box.
3. Optionally, you can specify values for X Start and X Stop for the analysis, or specify one
or two cursors, to only list results that occur within a specified time range or at a point.

Tip
You can specify the EZwave analysis range using the Eldo command
.CURRENT_ANALYSIS, parameters TSTART and TSTOP. The X Start and X
Stop values are then automatically set as the analysis range on the dialog box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 259

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

4. Click Analyze. The Current Analysis table is populated with the current results from the
design. You can click to expand all of the results.

5. Click the button to choose which results to display in the table. You can click on a
column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending order. You can expand the
Hierarchy by clicking on the + symbol adjacent to a Subckt, Port or Net item.

Tip
You can specify a list of columns that are displayed in the table, using the Eldo
command .CURRENT_ANALYSIS parameter MEAS_TYPE.

260 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

6. To filter the table Hierarchy column, you can do any of the following:
• Select Thresholds on, choose a column from the adjacent dropdown menu, specify
Lower, Upper, or Lower and Upper, current thresholds and click .

• Enter text in the Filter field and click .

7. To highlight all connected ports for a device, right-click on an item in the Hierarchy
column in the Current Analysis table and choose Connected To from the popup menu.
The item is then highlighted in red and its connected ports are highlighted in yellow. Use
the left and right arrow buttons to move between highlighted items.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 261

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

Tip
To identify the source of any unexpectedly high current consumption, review the
average current results in the list, select the item of interest in the hierarchy and
choose Connected To from the popup menu. Repeat until you have drilled down the
hierarchy sufficiently to identify the offending item(s).

You can also right-click on an item in the Hierarchy column in the Current Analysis list
and choose Step In to open the corresponding instance and select the port and expand it,
or Step Out to highlight the parent subcircuit (or the top level).
8. If you want to see the results for a single subcircuit, right-click on a subcircuit in the
table and select See in Subckt View. Alternatively, to see a simplified view showing
results for all subcircuits, click on the Subckt View tab. In the subcircuit view, the

262 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analyzing Current Consumption

available columns show the hierarchy, abs(sum(avg_node)), and sum(abs(avg_node)),

where “avg_node” is the average current value for the ports of the subcircuit.
9. If you want to export the current results for a single subcircuit as a .csv file, right-click
on a subcircuit in the table and select Export currents. The Export Currents dialog box
opens. Specify the file Path and the required subcircuit hierarchy Depth and click OK.
Example output:
.HEADER
..NAMES
Hierarchy Level 1,Current Value,Current Value Sum
.DATA
X1,0.0,8.967999240248334E-7
X2,0.0,4.2440985658298493E-4
X3,0.0,0.0029948591015101465

10. To plot a current waveform, double-click on a Port in the Hierarchy column.

Alternatively, right-click on a Port in the Hierarchy column and choose Plot from the
popup menu.
The Port and its average current is automatically added to the History Stack.
11. To copy a waveform name to the clipboard or send the name to the Waveform
Calculator, right-click on an item in the Hierarchy column in the Current Analysis list
and choose either Copy Waveform Name or Send to Calc.
12. Select a row in the History Stack; the tree automatically expands to show the element in
the Current Analysis list.
13. To save the History Stack to a file, right-click in the History Stack and choose Save As
from the popup menu. You can also copy the History Stack to the clipboard, right-click
in the History Stack and choose Save As from the popup menu.
14. To edit the History Stack, right-click in a row and choose Remove from the popup
menu. Alternatively, choose Remove From Here to remove the currently selected row
and all rows below it, or choose Clear to remove all rows from the History Stack.
15. The Current Analysis dialog box is an independent window and may be minimized,
maximized and iconified. You can also show or hide the Analysis Range and History
Stack sections using the checkboxes, to free more space to display the Current Analysis
table.

Tip
To make investigating current leakage issues easier, you can open as many Current
Analysis dialog boxes as you need, either on the same, or different, databases. This
allows you, for example, to compare results before and after making design changes.

Related Topics
Current Analysis Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 263

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Power Consumption

Analyzing Power Consumption

When your simulation results include a power analysis, you can use the Power Analysis dialog
box to analyze power consumption of a circuit and its components over time. You can define
time ranges and thresholds to filter results to locate a problem within a subcircuit or device.
The Tutorial—Using Power Analysis is in the Eldo User’s Manual. A video is available that
shows the tasks described in this tutorial.

When a simulation has been run with power analysis requested, power waveforms are saved in
the waveform database in folders named POWER_<analysis_type> depending upon the types
of analyses requested during simulation. You can plot waveforms from these folders as normal.

Prerequisites
You must have requested a power analysis during simulation with Eldo or Questa ADMS, by
including the .POWER_ANALYSIS Spice command in your netlist or command file.

Procedure
1. Open a waveform database containing results from a power analysis.
2. Expand the required set of power analysis results in the Waveform List Panel, right-
click on the folder at the required level of hierarchy and choose Power Analysis to open
the Power Analysis Dialog Box.
3. Click Analyze. The tree list is populated with the power waveform results from the
design. Each result shows the power consumption in the Power column.
4. If the results are numerous and difficult to view, you can filter them such that you see
only the results of interest.
• Use the depth control to limit the analysis to the specified number of levels from the
top down. Results coming from parts of the circuit located at a deeper level of
hierarchy will not be listed.
• Define a minimum and/or maximum power consumption threshold for the listed
results. Results with power consumption values below or above these thresholds will
not be listed.

264 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Analysis
Analyzing Power Consumption

• Define lower and upper time bounds of the analysis, to only list results that occur
within the specified time range.
5. The Power Analysis dialog box is an independent window and may be minimized,
maximized and iconified. You can also show or hide the Analysis section using the
checkbox, to free more space to display the Power Analysis table.

Note
The Eldo simulator, working in conjunction with EZwave, provides a (inst=)
parameter to specify subcircuits in the .POWER_ANALYSIS spice command.
Power analysis is then only applied to the specified subcircuits. If this parameter is used,
some of the hierarchies in the resulting POWER_<analysis_type> folder may be empty
(when they are located on a path to a specified instance). The Power Analysis dialog box
will show a “-” symbol instead of a value for the power, to indicate when a subcircuit
has not been analyzed by Eldo.

Tip
See also .POWER_ANALYSIS in the Eldo Reference Manual and Tutorial—Using
Power Analysis for Static Leakage Analysis of a PLL Circuit in the Eldo User’s
Manual.

Related Topics
Power Analysis Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 265

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Analysis
Analyzing Power Consumption

266 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 6
Post-Processing

This section describes how to use EZwave to process and transform data after simulation.
Working with a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Creating a Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing Bus Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transforming Analog Waveforms to Digital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transforming Digital Waveforms to Analog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Bus and Bit Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bus Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bit Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Taking a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DC Hysteresis Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Eye Diagram Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Frequency Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
General Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Statistical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Time Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Using Expressions in the Waveform Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Waveform Calculator Shell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Using Built-In Functions in the Waveform Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Built-In Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Calculator Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jitter Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Using the Jitter Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Jitter Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Using the Extract Outputs from Database Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Signal Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Spectrum Measurement Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 267

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing

Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Convolution Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Harmonic Distortion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Signal to Noise Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Window Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Windowing Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

268 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Working with a Bus

Working with a Bus

You can create a bus from selected digital waveforms (bits) or modify a bus after it is created.
Creating a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing Bus Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Creating a Bus
You can create your own bus from selected digital waveforms (bits).
Procedure
1. Select the bits that you want to add to the bus, either from the active graph window or
from the Waveform List Panel. Use Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple
waveforms.

Note
For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are displayed in the
Waveform List panel. Waveforms are loaded when they are displayed for the first
time or when they are located at hierarchy level. The Waveform List panel will only
display waveforms that have already been loaded. Refer to “Loading .fsdb and .tr0
Files” on page 1186.

2. Choose Tools > Create Bus to open the Create Bus Dialog Box, which enables you to
edit the contents of the bus.
3. EZwave will identify the longest prefix common to all bits of the bus, and propose it as
the default bus name, shown in the Name field. You can rename the bus by clicking in
the text window and entering the desired bus name.
If no common prefix can be found, the default bus name is Bus1. Subsequent buses with
no common prefix, are named Bus2, Bus 3,... Bus<n>.
4. Click on the dropdown list next to Radix and select the required radix: One’s
Complement, Two's Complement, Signed Magnitude, Binary, Hexadecimal, Octal,
Unsigned Decimal, Ascii, Fixed Point, Great Code to Decimal, or To Gray Code.
5. The Bits in Bus window lists all of the selected waveform names. The waveform
selected first is used as the Most Significant Bit (MSB) of the bus, and the waveform
selected last is used as the Least Significant Bit (LSB).
EZwave will attempt to identify the Most Significant Bit (MSB) and the Least
Significant Bit (LSB) indexes of each bit, and add a range (MSB:LSB) between bus
index delimiters at the end of the common bus name prefix. Bus index delimiters can be
specified on the Data Format Options page of the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog
Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 269

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Editing Bus Contents

6. If the bus is an analog or hybrid bus, the analog signals are automatically transformed to
digital.
If Auto-Update Threshold is selected the threshold calculation is automatically
updated when the bit order is modified. This option is enabled by default.
Use Single Threshold or Two Thresholds to digitize the input waveform(s).
Click in the text windows of the Transformation Setup field and change the default to
desired threshold values.
7. Click OK to apply or click Cancel to abort bus creation.

Editing Bus Contents

The content of a bus can be modified after it is created. You can add and remove bits, change
MSB and LSB definitions and invert the bits of the bus.
Procedure
1. To add bits to the bus, select the bus, right-click and choose Create Bus to reopen the
Create Bus Dialog Box.
2. Click Add. A dialog box opens, which lists all of the digital waveforms in the database
not already included in the bus.
3. Select one or multiple waveforms and click OK to add these to the bus.

Note
For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are displayed in the
Create Bus > Add Bits to Bus dialog box. Waveforms are loaded when they are
displayed for the first time or when they are located at hierarchy level. Refer to
“Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files” on page 1186.

• Click Invert to invert the bits of the bus.

• Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to re-order the bits in the list.

Transforming Analog Waveforms to Digital

You can convert an analog waveform to a digital waveform.
Tip
You can quickly plot analog waveforms as digital waveforms, using default conversion
parameters. Select waveform(s) in the Waveform List chooser panel, right-click and choose
Plot as Digital from the Waveform Name Popup Menu. For more options for the analog to
digital conversion process, use the procedure described below.

270 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Transforming Digital Waveforms to Analog

Procedure
1. Select the waveform in the active graph window and right-click and select Analog to
Digital from the Waveform Popup Menu. The Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box
displays.
2. Enter a name for the new waveform in the Digitized Waveform(s) field and changing the
default name.
3. Choose whether to plot the digitized waveform Stacked in a new row or Overlaid with
the original waveform, or clear the Plot Result Waveform(s) if you do not want to plot
the digitized waveform in the active graph window.
4. Set the required threshold(s) in the Transformation Setup fields, to define how the
waveform is digitized.
5. Click OK to perform the transformation.

Transforming Digital Waveforms to Analog

You can create an analog waveform from a digital signal or bus by transforming the digital
waveforms to analog.
All analog waveforms created in this manner are created in the “calc” database.

Procedure
1. Select the digital signal or bus in the active graph window and right-click to display the
Waveform Popup Menu.
2. Select Digital to Analog from the popup menu. The Digital to Analog Dialog Box
displays. Depending on whether you have selected an individual signal or signals, a bus,
or both, the dialog box may include a section for Bus Transformation Setup, Bit
Transformation Setup, or both.
3. In the Name text window, change the default name to a desired waveform name. If
multiple waveforms are selected, the Name text window is dimmed out and the default
names are used.
4. Select whether to plot the resulting waveform Stacked in a new Graph Row or Overlaid
with the original waveform, or if you do not want to plot the resulting waveform to the
active graph window, clear the Plot Result Waveform(s) box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 271

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Bus and Bit Transformations

Bus and Bit Transformations

You can specify the transformation setup for a bus or digital signal.
Bus Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bit Transformation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Bus Transformation Setup

You can specify the transformation setup for a bus.
The options are displayed in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1. Bus Transformation Setup Options

Procedure
1. Specify the Radix by using the dropdown menu and selecting one of the following
values: Two's Complement (signed), Binary, Hexadecimal, Octal, Unsigned
Decimal, (all unsigned), or Ascii.
2. Specify the Value by entering an addition value and then a multiplication value. If the
bus value is one of the standard logic states, then the analog value is the same as the
previous analog value, or 0.0 in the case of the initial value.
3. Select either Do Not Interpolate or Interpolate.
If you select Do Not Interpolate, specify if you want to Use Commutation Time and
enter the desired time. This is the time necessary to switch from the previous bus value
to the new bus value.
4. Click OK to perform the transformation, or click Cancel to abort and close the dialog
box.

272 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Bit Transformation Setup

Bit Transformation Setup

You can specify the bit transformation for a digital signal:
The options are displayed in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. Bit Transformation Setup Options

Procedure
1. Each digital value has a default real (analog) assigned. To use a different value, enter the
corresponding analog value as a numeric figure or engineering value. The possible
digital values are Forcing Zero, Forcing One, Weak Zero, Weak One, Forcing
Unknown, Weak Unknown, High Impedance, Uninitialized, and Do not care. Values
that have been used previously in a session are automatically remembered for future
transformations.
2. Under Commutation Time Values, enter the Rise Time (the necessary time to go from
'0' to '1') and Fall Time (the necessary time to go from '1' to '0').
3. Click OK to perform the transformation, or click Cancel to abort and close the dialog
box.
For bit transformations, this process is only implemented for “standard logic”
waveforms and other digital types that can be internally converted to standard logic
waveforms (bit, Boolean, and Verilog logic).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 273

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Measurement Tool

Measurement Tool
The Measurement Tool can be used to take a wide variety of measurements of the elements of a
compound waveform.
The Measurement Tool can be used for the following:

Taking a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

DC Hysteresis Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Eye Diagram Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Frequency Domain Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
General Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Statistical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Time Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Taking a Measurement
You can make various measurements using the Measurement Tool.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select a measurement category and type from the Measurement dropdown lists.
3. Select one or more waveform elements or waveform labels in the active graph window.

Click on the Add Selected Waveforms icon to add the selected waveforms or
elements to the Waveform List. Use Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple
waveforms, or use the Delete key to remove them.

Tip
If you do not want the Measurement Tool Source Waveform(s) list to be
automatically populated with currently selected waveforms, choose Edit > Options
to open the EZwave Display Preferences dialog box, choose General from the EZwave
Preferences list on the left, and uncheck “Use Automatic Waveform Selection for
Measurement Tool”.

Note
The measurements Delay, Intersect and Slope Intersect can only be applied to a
single waveform at any one time.

4. Depending on the type of measurement selected, specify additional information such as

topline/baseline, edge trigger, and measurement results settings in the Measurement

274 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
DC Hysteresis Measurements

Setup section. Refer below to the specific section on the selected measurement for
details on these settings.
Where the value Automatic is specified for an option in the Measurement Setup section,
a parameter is applied individually to each waveform. If a value is entered instead, this
value is applied to all waveforms.
5. Some measurement types allow you to specify how the results should be displayed in the
Measurement Results section (This section is not available for all measurements.):
a. Where available, specify either to Annotate Waveform(s) with Measurement Results
or Plot New Waveform of “<measurement type>” vs <parameter>.
If there is more than one parameter to choose from, a dropdown list is available for
specifying the required parameter. When more than one waveform has been selected
for the measurement, only parameters common to all waveforms are available in the
list.
6. To apply the measurement to the Entire Waveform, Visible X Region, or Between Two
Cursors, click the Apply Measurement to: dropdown list and make a selection.

Note
You cannot use horizontal cursors to define parts of a waveform for use with the
Measurement Tool.

7. To remove all previous measurements, check Remove All Previous Results.

8. Click Apply to perform the measurement, or click Cancel to exit the Measurement
Tool.

DC Hysteresis Measurements
You can perform measurements of DC hysteresis width, and lower and upper threshold, using
the Measurement Tool.
These are:
Table 6-1. DC Hysteresis Measurements
DC Hyst. Left Thres. The left crossing value.
DC Hyst. Right Thres. The right crossing value.
DC Hysteresis Width The difference between the left and right thresholds.

To access: Select DC Hysteresis from the left dropdown list, and select DC Hyst. Left Thres.,
DC Hyst. Right Thres. or DC Hysteresis Width from the right dropdown list in the
Measurement Tool.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 275

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
DC Hysteresis Measurements

Prerequisites
• A .wdb file containing the result of a DC Hysteresis computed by Eldo, using “.DC ...
HYST” keywords.

Tip
See “.DC” in the Eldo Reference Manual.

• The Y level of interest, where the thresholds and width are computed.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box.
2. Select DC Hysteresis from the left dropdown list.
3. Select either DC Hyst. Left Thres., DC Hyst. Right Thres. or DC Hysteresis Width
from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y-axis to use if multiple different Y-axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Y Level or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated with (baseline+topline)/2. Click on the preview button to display the
Topline level on the specified waveform.
Results
The waveforms are annotated with the hysteresis values.
Right-click on the measurement annotation and select Measurement Results. The Measurement
Results dialog box is displayed.

276 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
DC Hysteresis Measurements

Figure 6-3. DC Hysteresis Measurement Results

Click on a column name to sort the column. Click on a row to show or hide the corresponding
annotation. Ctrl-click to select several rows. The Y-level is the value set in the Measurement
Tool when not set to <Automatic>, or the individual computed value.
Examples
Example waveform annotations are shown below:

Figure 6-4. Hysteresis Width

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 277

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
DC Hysteresis Measurements

Figure 6-5. Left Threshold

Figure 6-6. Right Threshold

For a compound waveform, EZwave displays two waveforms results: the min and max of the
desired measurement (width, left or right threshold).

Figure 6-7. Example of Min and Max width (multiple runs)

In the above example, the min and max are plotted above the whole compound waveform, to
highlight these waveforms.

For a compound waveform, you can plot a new waveform, selecting a simulation parameter as
the X-axis.

278 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Eye Diagram Measurements

Figure 6-8. Hysteresis Width versus run parameter RVAL

Eye Diagram Measurements

This measurement finds and displays the eye width and height of the eye diagram.
The Eye Height is calculated as the difference between the High Level - 3 stdev and the Low
Level + 3 stdev.

The Eye Width is calculated as the difference between the Cross Eye + 3 stdev and the Cross
Eye - 3 stdev.

Refer to “Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations” on page 203 for details on all measurements
relating to the eye diagram.

Tip
A dedicated Eye Diagram Tool is available in EZwave that offers additional functionality.
Refer to “Working with Eye Diagrams” on page 195.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Eye Diagram from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Eye Height, Eye Height at X, Eye Width or Eye Width at Y from the right
dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
4. The measurements require specific information in the Measurement Setup section of the
Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
Select one or more of the available measurements:
• Eye Height
• Eye Width

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 279

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Eye Diagram Measurements

• X - specify eye width at X (for PAM4 signals, check the Source is PAM box)
• Y - specify eye width at Y
5. Click Apply. The measurement is plotted. You can drag the measurement to display the
results at other positions.

280 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Frequency Domain Measurements

Frequency Domain Measurements

You can perform a number of frequency domain measurements using the Measurement Tool.
The measurements are described in the following topics:

Bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Gain Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Phase Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Bandpass
This measurement finds and displays the bandwidth, the lower band edge, upper band edge,
center frequency and quality factor, and the level at which the measurement is made for a
bandpass-shaped waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Frequency Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Bandpass from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
4. This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated. Click the Preview button to display the Topline level on the
specified waveform.
• Specify an Offset value to be applied relative to the Topline value. The Offset is
always in dB, and you must also include a sign, minus(-) or plus(+), along with the
specified level.
Results
The measurement level, either “Topline - Offset” or “Topline + Offset”, is used to determine the
following bandpass measurement:
• Lower band cutoff frequency (F-low): the frequency that the frequency response falls
crossing the measurement level before the maximum point.
• Higher band cutoff frequency (F-high): the frequency that the frequency response falls
crossing the measurement level after the maximum point.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 281

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Frequency Domain Measurements

• Center frequency (F-center): calculated as sqrt(F-high * F-low)

• Bandwidth: calculated as (F-high - F-low)
• Quality factor (Q): calculated as (F-center / Bandwidth).

Gain Margin
This measurement finds and displays the gain margin in decibels (dB) and the associated
crossover frequencies of a complex waveform. The gain margin is defined as the difference
between the gain of the measured waveform and 0 dB (unity gain) at the frequency where the
phase shift is -180 degrees (Phase Crossover Frequency). The frequency that gives a gain of 0
dB is the Gain Crossover Frequency.
The gain margin is found by first finding the X value (X will most likely be frequency but it
does not have to be) at which the phase is -180 degrees. The difference between 1.0 (or 0 dB)
and the gain at that frequency is the gain margin. Interpolation between data points is used to
find the exact crossing points with the margin values.

The gain margin is the amount of gain increase required to make the loop gain unity at the
frequency where the phase angle is -180 degrees. In other words, the gain margin is 1/g if g is
the gain at the -180 degrees phase frequency. The frequency at which the phase is -180 degrees
is called the Phase Crossover Frequency.

It is generally found that gain margins of 3 dB or more combined with phase margins between
30 and 60 degrees result in a reasonable trade-off between bandwidth and stability.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Frequency Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Gain Margin from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires no specific information in the Measurement Setup section of
the Measurement Tool Dialog Box.

Phase Margin
This measurement finds and displays the phase margin of a complex waveform in degrees or
radians. The phase margin is defined as the difference in phase between the measured waveform
and -180 degrees at the point corresponding to the frequency that gives us a gain of 0 dB (the
Gain Crossover Frequency). The frequency where the phase shift is -180 degrees is the Phase
Crossover Frequency.

282 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Frequency Domain Measurements

The phase margin is found by first finding the X value (X will most likely be frequency but it
does not have to be) at which the magnitude is 1.0 (or 0 dB). The difference between the phase
of the response and -180 degrees when the loop gain is 1.0 is phase margin. Interpolation
between data points is used to find the exact crossing points with the margin values.

The frequency at which the magnitude is 1.0 is called the Unity-Gain Frequency or Crossover
Frequency.

It is generally found that gain margins of 3 dB or more combined with phase margins between
30 and 60 degrees result in a reasonable trade-off between bandwidth and stability.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Frequency Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Phase Margin from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires no specific information in the Measurement Setup section
of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 283

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
General Measurements

General Measurements
You can perform a number of general measurements using the Measurement Tool.
These are:
Table 6-2. General Measurements
Average Phase Margin Y Level Crossing Intersect
Local Max Local Min Maximum Minimum
Peak to Peak Values Slope Slope Intersect YVal

Average
This measurement finds and displays the average value of the specified waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Average from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• You can select Average, Peak to Peak, Minimum, Maximum, or any combination as
desired measurement types in the Measurement Setup area.
Results
The average value of a waveform is calculated as follows:
Figure 6-9. Calculation of the Average Value of a Waveform

where W represents the waveform, and Xmin and Xmax are the beginning and the end points for
the waveform.

Y Level Crossing
This measurement finds and displays the intersection points between a waveform and a
reference Y level. The level is determined as Y = <value>.

284 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
General Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Crossing from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Y Level or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated with (baseline+topline)/2. Click on the preview button to display the
Topline level on the specified waveform.
• Specify a Slope Trigger. Select from Positive and Negative, Positive Only, or
Negative Only.

Intersect
This measurement finds and displays the intersection points between two waveforms.
Interpolation between data points is used to find the exact intersection points between the two
waveforms. The result could be either X data or (X, Y) data.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Intersect from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires two waveforms to be selected, and the following specific
information in the Measurement Setup and Measurement Results sections of the
Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• For Waveform (#1), click to specify the Slope Type - Either Positive or Negative
Slope, Positive Slope, or Negative Slope.
• For Reference Waveform (#2), specify the Slope Relationship. Click on the
dropdown list next to Slope Relationship and select between Non-Inverting and
Inverting.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Intersect” vs “Time”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 285

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
General Measurements

To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Local Max
This measurement finds and displays the local maxima of the waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Local Max from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Results section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Select Annotate Waveform(s) with Measurement Results to display the local
maximum for the specified region.
Or:
• Select Plot New Waveform of “Local Max” vs “Time” to create a new waveform
in the active graph window that shows how the local maximum changes with time.

Local Min
This measurement finds and displays the local minima of the waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Local Min from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Results section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Select Annotate Waveform(s) with Measurement Results to display the local
maximum for the specified region.

286 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
General Measurements

Or:
• Select Plot New Waveform of “Local Min” vs “Time” to create a new waveform in
the active graph window that shows how the local maximum changes with time.

Maximum
This measurement finds and displays the maximum value of the waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Maximum from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• In addition to the Maximum measurement, you can select additional measurement
types in the Measurement Setup area.

Minimum
This measurement finds and displays the minimum value of the waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Minimum from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
4. This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• In addition to the Minimum measurement, you can select additional measurement
types in the Measurement Setup area.

Peak to Peak Values

This measurement finds and displays the peak-to-peak value of the waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 287

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
General Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Peak to Peak from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• In addition to the Maximum measurement, you can select additional measurement
types in the Measurement Setup area.

Slope
This measurement finds and displays the slope value of the waveform at a specified X value.
For frequency domain waveforms, this measurement can be displayed as a value per decade or a
value per octave.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Slope from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Provide an absolute value as the X value and the measurement returns the Slope
value at that coordinate.
You may utilize the cursor to input the X value: move the mouse pointer close to the
active cursor, right-click to display the Cursor Popup Menus, and select Copy X to
Clipboard from the popup menu. Click in the text window of X in the Measurement
Setup field, right-click to display the popup menu and select Paste to enter the X
value.
• Click to specify the Slope Option. This field is visible only in the Frequency
Domain category. You may choose to display the Slope measurement result
normally (None), display the Slope per decade (Decade), or display the Slope per
octave (Octave).

288 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
General Measurements

Slope Intersect
This measurement finds and displays the slope intersect of two waveforms at specified X
values.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Slope Intersect from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires two waveforms to be selected and the following specific
information in the Measurement Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• For each waveform, provide an absolute value as the X value and the measurement
returns the slope value at that coordinate and the slope intersect value between the
two slopes.
You may utilize the cursor to input the X value: move the mouse pointer close to the
active cursor, right-click to display the Cursor Popup Menus, and select Copy X to
Clipboard from the popup menu. Click in the text window of X in the Measurement
Setup field, right-click to display the popup menu and select Paste to enter the X
value.
• Once applied, markers on each of the specified waveforms show the slopes at the
selected points, and a marker for the slope intersect shows where the two tangent
lines to the selected points intersect.
• To view the slopes and slope intersects at other points along the curves, click on a
slope marker and drag it along the waveform. The displayed slope measurement,
tangent lines, and slope intersect measurement change according to the new position
along the waveform.
Related Topics
slopeintersect

YVal
This measurement finds the Y value(s) at a given X coordinate of a waveform.
For single waveforms, this measurement places a marker at the specified X coordinate that
indicates its Y value.

For compound waveforms, you can also plot the results of the Y-value measurements against a
swept parameter or index.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 289

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Statistical Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select General from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Yval from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Provide an absolute value as the X value, and the measurement returns the Y
value(s) at that coordinate.
Utilize the cursor to input the X value: move the mouse pointer close to the active
cursor, right-click to display the Cursor Popup Menus, and select Copy X to
Clipboard from the popup menu. Click in the text window of X in the Measurement
Setup field, right-click to display the popup menu and select Paste to enter the X
value.
• The following options are available when applying the measurement to a compound
waveform:
a. To add a marker that displays the Y value of the waveform at the specified X
coordinate, select Annotate Waveform(s) with Measurement Results.
b. To plot the Y values against a swept parameter, select the name of the parameter
from the dropdown list next to Plot New Waveform of “Y” vs. When you click
Apply, this will display the results in a new graph window with the parameter values
along the x-axis and the Y values along the Y-Axis.
c. To plot the Y values against the index of the swept parameters, select Index from the
dropdown list next to Plot New Waveform of “Y” vs. When you click Apply, this
will display the results in a new graph window with the parameter index along the x-
axis and the Y values along the Y-Axis.

Statistical Measurements
You can perform a number of statistical measurements using the Measurement Tool.
These are:
Table 6-3. Statistical Measurements
Maximum Mean Mean + 3 Std Dev Mean - 3 Std Dev
Minimum RMS RMS AC RMS Accurate
RMS Noise RMS Tran Standard Deviation

290 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Statistical Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Measurement from the left dropdown list.
3. Select either Maximum, Mean, Mean +3 Std Dev, Mean -3 Std Dev, Minimum, Rms,
Rms AC, RMS Accurate, Rms Noise, Rms Tran, or Standard Dev from the right
dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Select one or more desired measurement types in the Measurement Setup area.
Results
The mean value of a waveform is calculated as follows:
Figure 6-10. Mean Value of a Waveform Calculation

where N is the number of data points, and Wj represents the individual data points of the
waveform.
The RMS value of a waveform v is calculated as follows:
Figure 6-11. The RMS AC Calculation:

Figure 6-12. The RMS Noise Calculation:

Figure 6-13. The RMS Tran Calculation:

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 291

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Time Domain Measurements

You can perform a number of time domain measurements using the Measurement Tool.
The time domain measurements available are:

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Falltime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Risetime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Settle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Slew Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Undershoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Delay
This measurement finds and displays the delay between the edges on one or two waveforms
relative to default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline and baseline levels for
both the measured waveform and the reference waveform.
The delay is calculated as the difference in time between two edges on one or two waveforms.
These two waveforms used for the measurement do not have to be the same waveform type. For
analog waveforms, the delay can be measured at any percentage level relative to the Topline
level and Baseline level of either waveform. For example, to measure the delay from the 50%
level of one waveform to the 90% level of the other waveform. The analog waveforms can be
assumed to be voltage waveforms only.

It is assumed that the rising or falling edge on the reference waveform (#2) causes the
corresponding (rising or falling) edge on the measured waveform (#1) so that the reference edge
occurs prior to the measured edge.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Delay from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.

292 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

This measurement requires two waveforms to be selected and the following specific
information in the Measurement Setup and Measurement Results sections of the
Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• For Waveform (#1):
a. Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
b. Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the preview button to display the topline or baseline level on the
waveform.

c. Click on the dropdown list next to Delay Level to make your selection of percentage
relative to the Topline and Baseline value.
d. Click to specify the Edge Trigger that the measurement starts from: Either Rising or
Falling Edge (depending on which comes first in the specified measurement
window), Rising Edge, or Falling Edge.
• For Reference Waveform (#2):
a. Specify a reference Topline value or use the default value. The default value is
automatically calculated.
b. Specify a reference Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is
automatically calculated.
c. Click on the dropdown list next to Delay Level to make your selection of percentage
relative to the Topline and Baseline value of reference waveform.
d. The measurement may starts on the reference waveform at the previous edge with
the same polarity (Non-Inverting) as the measured waveform (#1) or the opposite
polarity (Inverting). Click on the dropdown list next to Edge Relationship and make
your selection accordingly.
e. Select Find the Closest Reference Edge to display the reference edge nearest to the
measured edge.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Delay” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 293

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Duty Cycle
This measurement finds and displays the duty cycle of a periodic waveform relative to default
(automatic calculated) or user-specified topline and baseline levels. The duty cycle of the
periodic waveform is the ratio of the “high” portion of the waveform to the length of the period.
The high portion of a cycle is the duration of the positive pulse measured at the middle level.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Duty Cycle from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the preview button to display the topline or baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click to specify the Edge Trigger that the measurement starts from: Either Rising or
Falling Edge (depending on which comes first in the specified measurement
window), Rising Edge, or Falling Edge.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform with
Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Duty Cycle” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Falltime
This measurement finds and displays the falltime between specified upper and lower levels of a
waveform. The falltime is calculated as the difference in time when the waveform falls from the
upper level to the lower level.

294 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Falltime from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click on the dropdown lists next to Lower / Upper to make your selection of
percentage relative to the Topline and Baseline value of the specified waveform. The
left dropdown list specifies the Lower level and the right dropdown list specifies the
Upper level, while the following Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline
remains checked.
• Clear Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline if you want to specify
absolute values as the Lower and Upper levels.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Falltime” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Frequency
This measurement finds and displays the frequency of a periodic waveform relative to default or
specified topline and baseline levels.
The frequency is calculated as the reciprocal of the period (refer to “Period” on page 297).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 295

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Frequency from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
waveform.

• Click to specify the Edge Trigger that the measurement starts from: Either Rising or
Falling Edge (depending on which comes first in the specified measurement
window), Rising Edge, or Falling Edge.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Frequency” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Overshoot
This measurement finds and displays the overshoot value of a waveform. The overshoot value is
calculated as the difference between the maximum point and the topline level of the waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Overshoot from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.

296 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement

Setup and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)

with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Overshoot” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Note
Overshoot uses the topline or baseline so that there is just one single measure per
upper or lower state. This is to avoid many measures in situations where, for
example, the waveform is ringing before reaching its steady state.

Period
This measurement finds and displays the period of a periodic waveform relative to default or
specified topline and baseline levels.
The period is calculated as the difference in time between two consecutive edges of the
waveform of the same polarity (rising edge to rising edge or falling edge to falling edge).

For analog waveforms, the period is always measured from the middle level of one edge to the
middle level of the next edge of the same polarity. The waveform shape is not necessarily
square.

For digital waveforms, the period is measured from the beginning X value of one edge to the
beginning X value of the next edge of the same polarity.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 297

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Period from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click to specify the Edge Trigger that the measurement starts from: Either Rising or
Falling Edge (depending on which comes first in the specified measurement
window), Rising Edge, or Falling Edge.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Period” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Pulse Width
This measurement finds and displays the pulse width of a waveform relative to default or
specified topline and baseline levels.
The pulse width, for a “positive” pulse, is the difference in time between the middle level of a
rising edge and the middle level of the next falling edge on the waveform. For a “negative”
pulse, the pulse is the time difference between the middle level of a falling edge and the middle
level of the next rising edge.

298 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Pulse Width from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement
Setup and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click to specify the Pulse Type from Either Positive or Negative Pulse, Positive
Pulse, or Negative Pulse.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Pulse Width” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Risetime
This measurement finds and displays the risetime between selected upper/lower levels of a
waveform.
The risetime is the difference in time when the waveform rises from the lower level to the upper
level.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 299

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

3. Select Risetime from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click on the dropdown lists next to Lower / Upper to make your selection of
percentage relative to the Topline and Baseline value of the specified waveform. The
left dropdown list specifies the Lower level and the right dropdown list specifies the
Upper level, while the following Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline
remains checked.
• Clear Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline if you want to specify absolute
values as the Lower and Upper levels.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Risetime” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Results
Window.

Settle Time
This measurement finds and displays the settle time of a waveform with respect to default or
specified steady state level and a specified tolerance.
The size of settle band is specified as the tolerance level on either side of steady state level. The
settle time is the last time point that the waveform crosses the settle band, either the positive
level or the negative level of tolerance, from out of bound to inner bound.

Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.

300 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.

3. Select Settle Time from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires two waveforms to be selected and the following specific
information in the Measurement Setup section of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Steady State Level value or use the default value. The default value is
automatically calculated. Click on the Preview button to display the Steady
State level on the specified waveform.
• Click on the dropdown lists next to Tolerance to make your selection of percentage
relative to the amplitude of the specified waveform, while the following Tolerance is
Percentage of Waveform Amplitude remains checked.
• Clear Tolerance is Percentage of Waveform Amplitude if you want to specify an
absolute value as the Tolerance.

Slew Rate
This measurement finds and displays the slew rate of the waveform. The slew rate is the
difference between the upper and lower levels of the waveform divided by the risetime of the
rising edge (or the falltime of the falling edge).
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Slew Rate from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.
• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 301

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

Tip
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• Click on the dropdown lists next to Lower / Upper to make your selection of
percentage relative to the Topline and Baseline value of the specified waveform. The
left dropdown list specifies the Lower level and the right dropdown list specifies the
Upper level, while the following Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline
remains checked.
• Clear Levels are Relative to the Topline and Baseline if you want to specify the
Lower and Upper levels as absolute values.
• Click to specify the Edge Trigger that the measurement starts from: Either Rising or
Falling Edge (depending on which comes first in the specified measurement
window), Rising Edge, or Falling Edge.
• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)
with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Slew Rate” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Undershoot
This measurement finds and displays the undershoot value of a waveform. The undershoot
value is calculated as the difference between the minimum point and the baseline level of the
waveform.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Measurement Tool to open the Measurement Tool Dialog Box, or
right-click on an element or the waveform name in the active graph window.
2. Select Time Domain from the left dropdown list.
3. Select Undershoot from the right dropdown list in the Measurement Tool.
This measurement requires the following specific information in the Measurement Setup
and Measurement Results sections of the Measurement Tool Dialog Box:
• Specify the Y Axis to use if multiple different Y axes are present in the graph
window.
• Specify a Topline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

302 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Time Domain Measurements

• Specify a Baseline value or use the default value. The default value is automatically
calculated.

Note
Click the Preview button to display the Topline or Baseline level on the
specified waveform.

• To present the multiple measurement results, check either Annotate Waveform(s)

with Result Marker(s) or Plot New Waveform of “Undershoot” vs “Time”.
To view the other measurement results after the measurement is performed, select
the displayed result marker, right-click the mouse to display the popup menu, and
select Measurement Results from the menu to display the Measurement Result
Window.

Note
Undershoot uses the baseline or topline so that there is just one single measure
per lower or upper state. This is to avoid many measures in situations where, for
example, the waveform is ringing before reaching its steady state.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 303

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Waveform Calculator

Waveform Calculator
The Waveform Calculator enables you to post-process waveforms for advanced analyses or
debugging. The Calculator has a comprehensive graphical interface.
To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use the Waveform Calculator Tcl scripts to calculate
phase noise for a PLL, see the video:

Restriction
wreal waveforms, assertions, and Safe Operating Area assertions are not supported in the
Waveform Calculator.

Note
The Waveform Calculator supports either IEEE notation (the default) or SPICE notation.
You can choose which notation to use. Refer to “Waveform Calculator General Options” on
page 529.

Using Expressions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Waveform Calculator Shell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Using Built-In Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Built-In Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Calculator Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Using Expressions in the Waveform Calculator

Describes how you can use expressions in the waveform calculator to post-process waveforms
for advanced analyses or debugging.

304 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using Expressions in the Waveform Calculator

Prerequisites
• Refer to “Waveform Calculator GUI” on page 113.
Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Calculator application window with the calculator button from
the toolbar or select Tools > Waveform Calculator.
2. Add entries to the Shell panel of the calculator using one of the following methods:

• waveform names using the Add Selected Waveforms icon

• operations using the buttons (refer to “Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator”
on page 307)
• functions using the built-in functions (refer to “Using Built-In Functions in the
Waveform Calculator” on page 309)
• functions using user-defined functions (refer to “Using and Editing User-Defined
Functions in the Waveform Calculator” on page 310)
• functions from the Measurement Tool (refer to “Using the Measurement Tool
Functions in the Waveform Calculator” on page 317).

Tip
To view function help, click . You can also use the following command in the
shell window:
help [syntax|description|desc|parameters|params] <functionname>

3. Once you have the desired entries, press Enter (or click the Eval button). The results are
displayed in the Workspace tab of the Chooser panel (along with an automatically
generated Alias) and also in the Shell panel.
You can use a previous result in a new calculation; right-click on a result in the
Workspace tab and select Copy Alias or Copy Value and then Paste this into a new
expression.

4. If the results include a waveform, click the plot icon to plot the resulting waveform
in the waveform viewer display. You need to save any resulting waveforms. (Refer to
“Saving Post-Processed Waveforms” for more information).
5. (Optional) If you want to store an expression as a Tcl file for later use, click the Store
button. This opens the Create Script dialog box. Refer to Creating a Tcl Script from the
Waveform Calculator History for more information on how to use this dialog box. You
can open expressions previously stored in a Tcl file using the Recall button. Restored
expressions are listed in the History tab of the Chooser panel.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 305

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Waveform Calculator Shell Commands

6. (Optional) You can copy or evaluate any expression listed in the History tab of the
Chooser panel. Right-click on an expression in the History tab and select Copy or
Evaluate.

Waveform Calculator Shell Commands

Describes the commands that you can use in the Waveform Calculator shell panel.

help
help [syntax|description|desc|parameters|params|return] <functionname>

Displays the help of a function in the shell. Use the options to limit the displayed information
for the function to either Syntax, Description, Parameters or Return. For example:

help syntax fft

help description fft

help parameters fft

doc
doc <functionname>

Displays the help of a function in the help panel.

search
search [all|syntax|name|title|description|desc|parameters|params|return]
<string>

Searches the function help documentation. Use the options to limit the search to any
combination of function fields. For example:

search title fft

search description value

search syntax|title|desc multple word search

search title|description "multiple word search"

Note
The all option does not return the parameters (to reduce the size of the results). To return
everything including the parameters, use all|params.

306 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator

Tip
To display the function help for one of the search results, hold down the Ctrl key, mouse
over the function name to highlight it and click the left mouse button.

history
history

Displays all entered expressions, and a number associated with each expression.

history N

Displays the last “N” entered expressions.

Tip
To recall an expression from the history, enter !N where N is the number of the expression.

clear
Clears the calculator shell panel.

clear history
Clears the user history.

clear workspace
Clears the user workspace.

clear all
Clears the calculator shell, history and workspace.

Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator

You can use the buttons in the Waveform Calculator to enter expressions into the Waveform
Calculator.
Prerequisites
• Refer to “Waveform Calculator GUI” on page 113.
Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Calculator application window with the calculator button from
the toolbar or select Tools > Waveform Calculator.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 307

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using Buttons in the Waveform Calculator

2. If the Button panel is not shown, click the button. Select the function category from
the dropdown list. The Button panel changes based on the level you choose from the
dropdown list:
• Complex Buttons
• Jitter Buttons
• Logic Buttons
• Phase Noise Buttons
• RF Buttons
• Signal Processing Buttons
• Statistical Buttons
• Trigonometric Buttons

Tip
The Button panel does not include a button for every function or operator. If a button
is not available for a particular function, double-click the function from the
Functions list of the Chooser panel. Refer to “Using Built-In Functions in the
Waveform Calculator” on page 309.

3. Click on a button in the Button panel. One of the following actions occurs, depending on
the particular button:
• A dialog box is displayed, specifically designed for the function, with an associated
Help button. Complete the required fields and click OK to evaluate the function.
• The function appears in the Shell panel. Place the cursor in between the parentheses
of the function and enter the required parameter(s). To specify a waveform, do one
of the following:
Right-Click Method
o Select the waveform or waveform label in the active graph window.
o Right-click to display the Waveform Popup Menu. From the Waveform popup
menu, select Copy.
o Place the cursor in between the parentheses of the function in the Shell panel,
right-click to display the popup menu, and select Paste to add the waveform
name in between the parentheses of the function.
Drag and Drop Method
o Select the waveform label in the active graph window.

308 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using Built-In Functions in the Waveform Calculator

o Hold the left mouse button down, drag the label between the parentheses of the
function in the Shell panel, and release the mouse button.

Tip
If you hold down Ctrl, move the cursor over a function name in the Shell panel
until it is highlighted and click the left mouse button, a panel appears showing
the parameters for the selected function for easy data entry.

Press Enter (or click the Eval button) to evaluate the function.

Using Built-In Functions in the Waveform

Calculator
You can use a large number of built-in functions in the Waveform Calculator. These are
available from the Chooser panel Functions tab in the Waveform Calculator.
Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Calculator application window with the calculator button from
the toolbar or select Tools > Waveform Calculator.
2. Choose a function from the Functions list in the Chooser panel. You can manually
locate a function by clicking on the + next to each of the types of functions to expand the
list.
Alternatively, you can type the first few letters of the function you are looking for into
the Search text field. The function lists automatically expand to display any functions
that match your typing.

Tip
If you press Enter to perform a search, the search is added to the search history list.
Click on the icon to access the search history. The history maintains up to ten
entries. Select the Clear History option to reset the history.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 309

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator

Figure 6-14. Waveform Calculator Functions List

3. Double-click on a function from the Functions list of the Chooser panel. The Button
panel (if visible) is replaced by a panel showing the parameters for the selected function
for easy data entry.

Tip
The default values for each of the parameter are shown in the fields as gray text.
Where a parameter has several pre-defined values, a dropdown menu listing the
available options is displayed to the right of the field.

Note
Some functions have a dedicated dialog box that provides additional options tailored
specifically to the function. In this case a button, Advanced, is visible. Click
Advanced, complete the required fields, and then click OK.

4. Complete the required fields and click OK to add the command into the Shell panel.
You can also edit the function parameters directly in the Shell panel. Press Enter (or
click the Eval button) to evaluate the function.

Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the

Waveform Calculator
The waveform calculator enables you to open, display and edit functions you have written in
Tcl scripts.

310 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator

The waveform calculator lists these functions under User-Defined Functions in the Functions
list of the Chooser panel.

Tip
It is possible to load user-defined functions automatically. See the Load User Extension
Files at Startup option in “Waveform Calculator General Options”.

Note
Some example Tcl scripts that provide equivalent functions to legacy AFS WaveCrave
CalcPAD scripts are available in the EZwave examples directory. Refer to “Waveform
Calculator Example Tcl Scripts” on page 1154.

To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use the Waveform Calculator Tcl scripts to calculate
phase noise for a PLL, see the video:

Procedure
1. Open the Waveform Calculator dialog box with the Calculator button from the
toolbar or select Tools > Waveform Calculator.
2. On the Waveform Calculator dialog box choose File > Open Custom File Function. A
browser window displays.
3. Select the desired Tcl file. The waveform calculator lists the function under User-
Defined Functions in the Functions list.
4. Use the user-defined function in the same manner as a built-in function. Refer to “Using
Built-In Functions in the Waveform Calculator” on page 309.
5. To search for a specific function, type the first few letters of the function you are looking
for into the Search text field. The function lists automatically expand to display any
functions that match your typing.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 311

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History

Tip
If you press Enter to perform a search, the search is added to the search history list.
Click on the icon to access the search history. The history maintains up to ten
entries. Select the Clear History option to reset the history.

6. You can view or edit a user-defined function. Right-click on the function and select Edit
to access the TCL File Viewer. Refer to the “Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box” on page 632.
7. You can right-click on a user-defined function and select Edit In System Editor if you
want to use a third-party editor tool (Linux only), specified using the AMS_EDITOR
system variable.
8. You can right-click on a user-defined function and select Update UDF Help to open the
Update UDF Help dialog box to add help documentation to the function. Refer to
“Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation” on page 314.

Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator

History
Describes how you can create a Tcl scripts from expressions listed in the Waveform Calculator
History tab.
Prerequisites
• You must have evaluated at least one expression using the waveform calculator so that it
appears in the chooser panel History tab.
Procedure
1. On the Waveform Calculator dialog box, select File > Save Evaluated Expressions.
Alternatively, click the Store button.
The Create Script dialog box opens, with all of the evaluated expressions listed in the
Expression column of the table and the script displayed in the Export Preview panel.

Tip
To load a subset of the available expressions, select the required expressions in the
History tab, right click and select Create Script.

312 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History

Figure 6-15. Create Script Dialog Box

2. (Optional) You can choose the expressions to use in the script by selecting them in the
Save column of the table. Use the Select all expressions checkbox to select or deselect
all of the listed expressions.
3. (Optional) Click the Add explicit return checkbox and select the required return value
from the dropdown menu. A line to return the specified value is added to the script, and
shown in the Export Preview panel.
4. (Optional) To make the database name generic, select Set generic database name from
the Use template dropdown menu. The database name associated with each waveform

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 313

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation

is replaced by “sim” and the script may then be used with any database that contains the
same waveform names.
5. (Optional) To make the script generic, select Set waveforms as parameters from the
Use template dropdown menu.
6. (Optional) To be able to run the script on a series of databases, select Generate
database loop from the Use template dropdown menu. The script is modified and a
loop is inserted into the code to run the script on a list of databases. The default list
contains the names of all databases used in the selected expressions.
7. (Optional) Click the Documentation checkbox and specify the Proc help text (a short
description) and a (longer) Description for the Tcl Script. You can also document the
return value; choose the type from the Return dropdown menu (for example waveform,
double) and enter a description for the return value. If you have selected Set waveforms
as parameters from the Use template dropdown menu, the parameters appear in the
Parameter column of the table, where you can also edit their names. The Default value
column of the table initially lists the default waveforms assigned to each parameter, but
may be edited. You can also add a description for each parameter in the Help column.
The details are added to the script in the Export Preview panel.

Tip
When you subsequently reload this script, using File > Open Custom Function File
or the Recall button, it appears in the User-Defined Functions section of the
Functions list and the documentation you have entered is visible when you view the
Function Help .

8. In the Proc name field, enter the name for the procedure.

Tip
If you do not want the procedure to appear in the Waveform Calculator tree, prefix
the procedure name with two underscores “__”.

9. In the File path field, specify a path and filename for the new script. Alternatively, click
to open the Save Script dialog box. Browse to the required path and enter a File
Name, and then click Save to create the new file. If you update the script, click the Save
Script button on the Create Script dialog box.

Updating User-Defined Function Help

Documentation
Describes how you can add help documentation to user-defined functions listed in the
Waveform Calculator Function list.

314 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation

Procedure
1. On the Waveform Calculator dialog box, right-click on the required user-defined
function in the Functions list, and select Update UDF Help.
The Update UDF Help dialog box opens, with the script displayed in the Export Preview
panel.
Figure 6-16. Update UDF Help Dialog Box

2. Specify the Proc help text (a short description) and a (longer) Description for the user-
defined function. You can also document the return value; choose the type from the
Return dropdown menu (for example waveform, double) and enter a Description for the
return value. The details are added to the script in the Export Preview panel.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 315

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Updating User-Defined Function Help Documentation

3. (Optional) Specify a Name, Type (using the dropdown menu), Default value,
Description and Possible values for each of the parameters listed in the Parameters
dropdown menu. The details are added to the script in the Export Preview panel.
4. Click Save Updated UDF to save the help documentation.

316 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the

Waveform Calculator
The functions from the Measurement Tool can be used to evaluate waveforms in the Waveform
Calculator or in a Tcl script file.
Refer to “Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator” on page 310.

Note
wreal waveforms and assertions are not supported in the waveform calculator.

Using the risetime measurement as an example:

risetime(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",

low = "10%", mid = "50%", up = "90%", x_start = "Begin",
x_end = "End", option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

Note
All of the parameters have a corresponding field text entry, pulldown list, check box, or
radio button in the Measurement Tool Dialog Box.

Methods For Entering Measurement Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Available Measurement Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
The option and param Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Choosing the Occurrence of the Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Methods For Entering Measurement Tool Functions

You can use several methods for entering Measurement Tool functions in the Waveform
Calculator or in a Tcl script file.

Examples
The following are examples:

risetime(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle"))

If only the waveform name is specified in the function, the application uses all the default
parameters.

risetime(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle"), baseline=0,
topline=5.0)

All the default parameters are used except those that are specified. The parameters can be in any
order, and the reference levels can be either percentages or values.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 317

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

risetime(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle"), "Automatic", 0,
10%, 50%, 90%, "Begin", "End", "WF", "parameter_name")

A complete list of parameter values are specified. Without the parameter identifier specified, all
the parameters have to be in the right sequence.

Available Measurement Tool Functions

You can use a number of Measurement Tool functions to evaluate waveforms in the Waveform
Calculator or in a Tcl script file.

Description
The Measurement Tool functions are:

• average
average(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "Value")

• bandpass
bandpass(wf, topline = "Automatic", offset = -3,
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• crossing
crossing(wf, ylevel = "Automatic",
slopetrigger = "Either",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "WF",
param = "parameter_name")

• dchysteresis
dchysteresis(wf, ylevel = "Automatic",
measure = "Width | Left | Right",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF | VALUE | ANNOTATION",
param = "parameter_name")

• delay
delay(wf1, wf2, topline1 = "Automatic", baseline1 = "Automatic",
dlev1 = "50%", topline2 = "Automatic", baseline2 = "Automatic",
dlev2 = "50%", edgetrigger="Either", inverting = 0, closestedge = 0,
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "WF",
param = "parameter_name")

• duty cycle
dutycycle(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
edgetrigger="Either", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

318 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

• eye height
eyeheight(wf)

• eye height at X
eyeheightatx(wf, x_value, {"inner"|"outer"})

• eye width
eyewidth(wf)

• eye width at Y
eyewidthaty(wf, y_value, {"inner"|"outer"})

• fall time
falltime(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
low = "10%", mid = "50%", up = "90%", x_start = "Begin",
x_end = "End", option = "WF", param = "parameter_name",
fall = "all")

• frequency
frequency(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
edgetrigger="Either", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• gain margin
gainmargin(wf, option = "Value")

• intersection
intersection(wf1, wf2, slopetrigger = "Either", inverting = 0,
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• local max
localmax(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• local min
localmin(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• maximum
max(wf, x_value="no", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "Value")

• mean
mean(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 319

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

• mean +3 standard deviation

meanplus3std(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• mean -3 standard deviation

meanminus3std(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "Value")

• minimum
min(wf, x_value="no", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "Value")

• overshoot
overshoot(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "WF",
param = "parameter_name", overshoot = "all")

• peak to peak
peaktopeak(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end ="End", x_value = "no",
option = "Value")

• period
period(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
edgetrigger="Either", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• phase margin
phasemargin(wf, option = "Value")

• pulse width
pulsewidth(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
pulsetype="Either", x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End",
option = "WF", param = "parameter_name")

• rise time
risetime(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
low = "10%", mid = "50%", up = "90%", x_start = "Begin",
x_end = "End", option = "WF", param = "parameter_name",
rise = "all")

• rms
rms(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• rms ac
rms_ac(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

320 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

• rms noise
rms_noise(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• rms tran
rms_tran(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• settle time
settletime(wf, steadystate = "Automatic", tolerance = "5%",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• slew rate
slewrate(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
low = "10%", mid = "50%", up = "90%", edgetrigger="Either",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "WF",
param = "parameter_name", slewrate = "all")

• slope
slope(wf, x, slopetype = "None", option = "Value")

• slope intersect
slopeintersect(wf1, wf2, x1, x2, option = "Value")

• standard deviation
stddev(wf, x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "Value")

• undershoot
undershoot(wf, topline = "Automatic", baseline = "Automatic",
x_start = "Begin", x_end = "End", option = "WF",
param = "parameter_name", undershoot = "all")

• y value
yval(wf, x1, option = "Value")

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 321

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

The option and param Arguments

You can set option and param arguments.
Usage
Some Measurement Tool functions have option and param arguments that can be set.
Arguments
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. Legal values are:
o “VALUE” — Output is a numerical value or array of numerical values.
o “WF” — Output is a waveform.
o “ANNOTATION” — Adds annotation to the input waveform.

Note
If the occurrence of the result is anything other than “all” (refer to “Choosing the
Occurrence of the Result” on page 323), option=“VALUE” is forced.

• param
(Optional) Used with option=“WF”. Specifies the simulation parameter to be used to
generate the result waveform.
For compound waveforms the parameters can be seen in the Parameter Table.

322 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using the Measurement Tool Functions in the Waveform Calculator

Choosing the Occurrence of the Result

You can use optional arguments with some measurement tool functions for specifying the
occurrence of the result.
Usage
Some Measurement Tool functions have optional arguments available for specifying the
occurrence of the result.
Arguments
• The argument differs with each function, as shown in the table below.

Table 6-4. Arguments for Setting Occurrence

Function Argument
risetime rise
falltime fall
slewrate slewrate
overshoot overshoot
undershoot undershoot

The arguments can all take the following values:

• occurrence argument
(Optional) Specifies the occurrence of the result that the measurement will return.
For compound waveforms it applies to each element individually.
Legal values are:
o “first” — Specifies the first occurrence of the result.
o “all” — Specifies all occurrences of the result. Default.
o “last” — Specifies the last occurrence of the result.
o n or “n” — Specifies the nth occurrence of the result.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 323

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Built-In Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in functions.
The built-in functions are briefly summarized in the following sections. See the Appendix
Waveform Calculator Functions for more details on the functions.

In the Waveform Calculator, select the Functions tab of the Chooser panel to view the available
built-in functions.

Tip
To view detailed information directly in the Waveform Calculator about each function,
including the syntax and parameters, choose View > Function Help.

The following categories are available from the dropdown list in the Waveform Calculator:

Complex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Jitter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Phase Noise Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
RF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Signal Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Statistical Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Trigonometric Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Complex Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in complex functions.

Table 6-5. Built-In Complex Functions

Item Description
complex Constructs a complex waveform from two input waveforms
conjugate Constructs the conjugate of the source complex waveform.
cphase Returns the phase of the input complex waveform in
radians.

324 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-5. Built-In Complex Functions (cont.)

Item Description
db Converts the magnitude data of a waveform to decibels:
20*log10(x)
db10 Converts the magnitude data of a waveform to decibels:
10*log10(x)
gptocomplex Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of gain
in decibels (the first) and a waveform of phase in radians
(the second).
idb Computes the inverse decibel function for the input
waveform: 10(v/20).
idb10 Computes the inverse decibel function for the input
waveform: 10(v/10).
imag Returns the imaginary part of a complex waveform.
mag Returns the absolute magnitude of a complex waveform.
mptocomplex Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of
magnitude (the first) and a waveform of phase in radians
(the second).
phase Returns the phase of a complex waveform.
real Returns the real part of a complex waveform.
ritocomplex Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of real
part (the first) and a waveform of imaginary part (the
second).

Jitter Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in jitter functions.

Table 6-6. Built-In Jitter Functions

Item Description
cycle2cyclejitter Calculates the variation in time of the difference between
the duration of two adjacent cycles over part of, or the
whole waveform.
frequencyjitter Calculates the variation in time of the frequency of the
source waveform relative to its average frequency or to the
reference waveform (or ideal clock) frequency over part
of, or the whole waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 325

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-6. Built-In Jitter Functions (cont.)

Item Description
halfperiodjitter Calculates the variation in time of the half-period of a
source waveform relative to its average half-period, or to a
reference waveform (or ideal clock) half-period, over part
of, or the whole waveform.
plotjitterconfidenceinterval Plots approximate confidence interval for rms jitter vs.
number of Gaussian samples (N).
tiejitter Calculates the variation in time of the source waveform
edges relative to the reference (or ideal clock) waveform
edges over part of, or the whole waveform.
timeabsolutejitter Calculates absolute jitter (time domain).
timelongtermjitter Calculates the variation in time of the cumulative period of
adjacent N-cycle samples. This type of jitter is sometimes
called “accumulated” jitter.
timeperiodjitter Calculates the variation in time of the period of a source
waveform relative to its average period or to a reference
waveform (or ideal clock) period, over part of, or the
whole waveform.

Logic Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in logic functions.

Table 6-7. Built-In Logic Functions

Item Description
nand Can be applied to any two digital waveforms whose data
types are either bit or boolean.
nor Can be applied to any two digital waveforms whose data
types are either bit or boolean.
rol Returns a value that is L rotated left by R index positions.
That is, if the value of its leftmost argument is referred to
as 'L' and the value of its rightmost argument is referred to
as 'R', rol() replaces L with a value that is the result of a
concatenation whose left argument is the rightmost
(L'Length-1) elements of L and whose right argument is
L(L'Left).

326 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-7. Built-In Logic Functions (cont.)

Item Description
ror Returns a value that is L rotated right by R index positions.
That is, if the value of its leftmost argument is referred to
as 'L' and the value of its rightmost argument is referred to
as 'R', ror() replaces L with a value that is the result of a
concatenation whose right argument is the leftmost
(L'Length-1) elements of L and whose left argument is
L(L'Right).
sla Returns a value that is L arithmetically shifted left by R
index positions. That is, if the value of its leftmost
argument is referred to as 'L' and the value of its rightmost
argument is referred to as 'R', sla() replaces L with a value
that is the result of a concatenation whose left argument is
the rightmost (L'Length-1) elements of L and whose right
argument is L(L'Right).
sra Returns a value that is L arithmetically shifted right by R
index positions. That is, if the value of its leftmost
argument is referred to as 'L' and the value of its rightmost
argument is referred to as 'R', sra() replaces L with a value
that is the result of a concatenation whose right argument
is the leftmost (L'Length-1) elements of L and whose left
argument is L(L'Left).
xnor Can be applied to any two digital waveforms whose data
types are either bit or boolean.

Mathematical Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in mathematical functions.

Table 6-8. Built-In Mathematical Functions

Item Description
abs Returns the absolute value of its input argument.
ceil Computes the smallest integral value not less than each data
point of the waveform.
derive Computes the derivative of the input waveform at the given
point.
drv Computes the derivative of the input waveform.
exp Computes the value of e raised to the power of the input
value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 327

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-8. Built-In Mathematical Functions (cont.)

Item Description
floor Computes the largest integral value not greater than each
data point of the waveform.
fmod Returns the floating-point remainder of the division of x by
y.
frexp Breaks a floating-point number into a normalized fraction
and an integral power of 2.
hypot Computes the length of the hypotenuse of a right-angled
triangle: sqrt(x*x+y*y).
integ Returns the definite integral of a waveform.
integral Computes the indefinite integral of the input waveform.
ldexp Computes the quantity x * 2y.
ln Computes the natural logarithm of the input argument.
log Computes the base-10 logarithm of the input argument.
modf Breaks the argument x into integral and fractional parts,
each of which has the same sign as the argument.
pow10 Computes the value of 10 raised to the input argument.
relation Generates a wave from two input waveforms and a point-
by-point relational expression.
round Computes the closest integer value to each data point of the
waveform.
sqr Computes the square of the input argument.
sqrt Computes the square root of the input argument.
trunc Computes the floor for positive data points and ceiling for
negative data points of the waveform.
xofmax Returns all the x value(s) at maximum of a waveform.
xofmin Returns all the x value(s) at minimum of a waveform.
xwave Creates a new waveform with y values identical to the x
values.

Measurement Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in measurement functions.

328 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-9. Built-In Measurement Functions

Item Description
baseline Returns the baseline of the input waveform based on the
calculation of histograms.
crossing Measures the crossing of a waveform relative to default
(automatically calculated) or user-specified Y level.
dutycycle Measures the duty cycle of a periodic waveform relative to
default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline
and baseline levels.
delay Measures the delay between edges of the source waveform
and a reference waveform.
falltime Measures the difference in time when the waveform falls
from the upper level to the lower level.
frequency Measures the frequency of a periodic waveform relative to
default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline
and baseline levels.
localmax Finds the local maxima of a waveform.
localmin Finds the local minima of a waveform.
period Measures the period of a periodic waveform relative to
default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline
and baseline levels.
pulsewidth Measures the pulse width of a periodic waveform relative to
default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline
and baseline levels.
risetime Measures the difference in time when the waveform rises
from the lower level to the upper level.
slewrate Measures the slew rate of a periodic waveform relative to
default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline
and baseline levels.
slope Returns the slope value of a waveform at a specified x
value.
slopeintersect Finds the slope intersection of two waveforms at specified x
values.
stddev Calculates the standard deviation of the specified
waveform.
topline Returns the topline of the input waveform based on the
calculation of histograms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 329

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Miscellaneous Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in miscellaneous functions.

Table 6-10. Built-In Miscellaneous Functions

Item Description
add Adds two overlapping waveforms, retaining non-
overlapping parts.
atod Transforms an analog waveform to a digital waveform.
calcvartype Returns the type of a Waveform Calculator variable.
concat Computes the concatenation of two input waveforms.
continuous Converts any analog waveform to a continuous analog
waveform.
datatodig Creates a digital waveform based on one or two arrays of
data events.
datatowf Creates an analog waveform based on one or two arrays of
data points.
dchysteresis Measures the thresholds and width of a DC Hysteresis
waveform relative to a default, or specified, Y level.
dtoa Constructs an analog waveform from a digital bus.
dtoaonbit Constructs an analog waveform from a bit.
gendecade Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from a start
value to a stop value with a specified number of points per
decade.
genlinear Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from a start
value to a stop value with a specified step.
genoctave Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from a start
value to a stop value with a specified number of points per
octave.
getelementat Returns the element at a given index in a bus or compound
waveform.
gmargin Computes the gain margin of a complex waveform or a
magnitude waveform and a phase waveform.
intersect Returns an array with all the intersection points of the two
input waveforms.
join Joins two non-overlapping waveforms together into a single
waveform.

330 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-10. Built-In Miscellaneous Functions (cont.)

Item Description
length Returns the number of elements of a given bus or
compound waveform.
phmargin Computes the phase margin of a complex waveform or a
magnitude waveform and a phase waveform.
pivot Generates a pivot waveform using the input compound
waveform as the y-axis and a second waveform, or sweep
parameter, as the x-axis.
reglin Performs the linear regression between a par_value and a
char_value.
removepts Removes points from a waveform where the states of a
second (digital) waveform are “0”.
settlingtime Computes time required for the input wave to settle within a
certain limit around the target value.
shift Creates a shifted waveform.
timestep Returns a waveform of timesteps vs. time of a waveform
variable.
todchysteresis Creates a DC Hysteresis waveform from a two step DC
simulation.
var Allows database variable values to be used in Waveform
Calculator expressions.
wftoascii Dumps the input waveform to a text (ASCII) file.
wftodata Returns an array with the data points of the input waveform
window Creates a new waveform between specified lower and upper
bounds out of the input waveform, and interpolates the
points at the interval bounds.
xdown Returns all the x value(s) where the waveform crosses a
given y value with negative slope.
xup Returns all the x value(s) where the waveform crosses a
given y value with positive slope.
xval Returns all x values for a given y value.
xytowf Creates a new waveform using the Y values from wfX as
the X-axis and the Y values from wfY as Y-axis.
yval Returns the y values for a given x value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 331

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Phase Noise Functions

The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in Phase Noise functions.

Table 6-11. Built-In Phase Noise Functions

Item Description
absolutejitter Computes the value representing the absolute jitter of the
waveform, applied to SST Noise Analysis results.
absolutejitterbyintegration Calculates the rms absolute jitter by Sphi integration.
allandeviation Returns the Allan Deviation vs. Time waveform from SST
Noise Analysis results.
cycletocyclejitter Returns the cycle-to- cycle jitter, applied to SST Noise
Analysis results.
cycletocyclejitterbyintegration Calculates rms cycle-to-cycle or adjacent k-period jitter by
Sphi integration.
longtermjitter Computes the waveform representing the long term jitter.
periodjitter Computes the value representing the period jitter of the
waveform.
periodjitterbyintegration Calculates the rms k-period jitter by Sphi integration.
phnoisebydlm Computes the phase noise in dBc/Hz by delay line
measurement, where the oscillation waveform is delayed
and mixed with itself.
phnoisebymixer Computes the phase noise in dBc/Hz by mixer
measurement, where the oscillation waveform is mixed
with a pure tone.
sphibyjitter Computes two-sided Sphi density in dB rad2/Hz by jitter
measurement. The positive side of Sphi is returned.
sphifilter Applies a high pass filter to frequency-domain Sphi density.

RF Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in RF functions.

332 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-12. Built-In RF Functions

Item Description
compress Extracts the y-axis value of the wave at the point where the
difference between the actual value of the wave and the
linear extrapolation of the wave based on the computed
slope value becomes greater than the supplied value.
constellationdiagram Computes the constellation diagram of the input waveform.
evmber Computes the Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate of
the two input constellation diagrams.
harmonicsmeter Computes the maximum Fourier frequency value for a
periodic waveform.
iipx Computes the input inferred intercept point of order x from
the values of the circuit input and output.
noisetosignaldbc Calculates the ratio of noise to signal amplitude, in dBc/Hz.
noisetrantophasenoise Computes the Phase Noise Spectrum (Power Spectral
Density) of a (noisy) periodic transient waveform.
oipx Computes the output inferred intercept point of order x
from the value of the circuit output wave.
phasenoise Computes the phase noise of a transient analysis.
pssresidue Computes the difference of every signal at tstop and tstop-
tperiod. Returns the maximum pss residue.
topnoise Computes noise spectrum of spot noise at fstart or
integrated noise from fstart to fstop.
xcompress Extracts the x-axis value of the wave at the point where the
actual value of the wave and the extrapolated linear value of
the wave exceeds a certain value.

Signal Processing Functions

The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in signal processing functions.

Table 6-13. Built-In Signal Processing Functions

Item Description
autocor Computes the Auto Correlation of the input waveform.
chirp Computes the Chirp Transformation of the input waveform.
convolution Computes the Convolution of the two input waveforms.
crosscorrelation Computes the Cross Correlation of the two input waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 333

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-13. Built-In Signal Processing Functions (cont.)

Item Description
deg Converts the waveform into degrees.
enob Computes the effective number of bits (ENOB) for the input
waveform (by a conversion of the sinad result).
fft Computes the Discrete Fourier Transform of the input
waveform using the Fast Fourier Transform method.
harmonicdistortion Computes the Harmonic Distortion of the input waveform.
harmonics Computes the Harmonic Distortion of the input waveform.
hdist Computes the total harmonic distortion of the input
waveform.
ifft Computes the inverse Fast Fourier Transform of the input
waveform.
psd Computes the Power Spectral Density of the input
waveform.
rad Converts the waveform into radians.
sample Creates a sampled waveform with equidistant points with
respect to the x-axis variable.
samplelog Creates a sampled waveform with data points
logarithmically spaced.
samplepsd Samples a continuous waveform, and returns its power
spectral density
sfdr Computes the spurious free dynamic range of the input
waveform.
sinad Computes the signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of
the input waveform.
sndr Computes the signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of
the input waveform.
snr Computes the Signal to Noise Ratio of the input waveform.
spectrummeasurement Computes spectrum measurements on the input waveform;
“snr”, “sndr”, “sfdr”, “enob”, or “thd”.
thd Computes the total harmonic distortion of the input
waveform.
windowing Calculates the Windowing of the input waveform.

334 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Statistical Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in statistical functions.

Table 6-14. Built-In Statistical Functions

Item Description
avg Returns the average of the waveform.
cphytrigger Creates first zero-crossing C-Phi trigger waveform. Also
used to compute UI jitter and transition jitter.
eye Constructs an eye diagram from the input waveform.
eyeamplitude Returns the amplitude of an eye diagram.
eyecphy Constructs a self-triggered C-Phy eye diagram from three
input waveforms.
eyecrossingamplitude Returns the amplitude level at which the eye crossings
occur on an eye diagram.
eyedelay Returns the distance from the midpoint of the eye to the
time origin.
eyediagram Constructs an eye diagram of a waveform.
eyefalltime Returns the falltime of an eye diagram.
eyeheight Returns the height of an eye diagram.
eyeheightatx Returns the eye height at X.
eyejitter Returns the jitter of an eye diagram.
eyemeasures Returns a list of pairs of named measures with their values.
eyerisetime Returns the risetime of an eye diagram.
eyesetmask Adds a mask to an eye diagram.
eyesnr Returns the SNR of an eye diagram.
eyewidth Returns the width of an eye diagram.
eyewidthaty Returns the eye width at Y.
eyewithtrigger Constructs a triggered eye diagram from a waveform.
histogram Creates a histogram of the input waveform showing the
magnitude probability density distribution of the waveform.
larger Creates a new waveform based on the larger of two data
points at any given time of the input waveforms.
lesser Creates a new waveform based on the lesser of two data
points at any given time of the input waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 335

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-14. Built-In Statistical Functions (cont.)

Item Description
max Returns the maximum value of a waveform.
min Returns the minimum value of a waveform.
rms Returns the root mean square value of a waveform,
depending on its x-axis scale. If the x-axis scale is in Hz, it
uses the rms_ac function, otherwise it uses rms_tran, to
calculate the root mean square.
rms_ac Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for
frequency analysis using: sqrt(integ(v*v))
rms_accurate Returns the integrated root mean square value of a
continuous waveform that is accurate even if the waveform
is noisy.
rms_noise Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for
frequency noise analysis: sqrt(sum(v*v))
rms_tran Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for time
analysis: sqrt(integ(v*v)/time_interval)
size Returns the number of points (or transitions) in the
waveform.
sum Returns a sum of all of the Y-values of the input waveform.
windavg Returns an average value for each X-value of the input
waveform.

Trigonometric Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of built-in trigonometric functions.

Table 6-15. Built-In Trigonometric Functions

Item Description
acos Computes the principal value of the arc cosine of the
argument.
acosh Computes the inverse hyperbolic cosine of the argument.
acot Computes the arc cotangent of the input waveform.
acoth Computes the hyperbolic arc cotangent of the input
waveform.
asin Computes the principal value of the arc sine of the
argument.
asinh Computes the inverse hyperbolic sine of the argument.

336 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Built-In Functions

Table 6-15. Built-In Trigonometric Functions (cont.)

Item Description
atan Computes the principal value of the arc tangent of the
argument.
atan2 Computes the principal value of the arc tangent of y/x,
using the signs of both arguments to determine the
quadrant of the return value.
atanh Computes the inverse hyperbolic tangent of the argument.
cos Computes the cosine of the argument, in degrees.
cosh Computes the hyperbolic cosine of the argument.
cot Computes and returns the cotangent of the argument, in
degrees.
coth Computes and returns the hyperbolic cotangent of the
waveform.
sin Computes the sine of the argument, in degrees.
sinh Computes the hyperbolic sine of the argument.
tan Computes the tangent of the argument, in degrees.
tanh Computes the hyperbolic tangent of the argument.

Special Functions
The Waveform Calculator contains a number of special functions.
Note
Waveform Calculator Special functions do not appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list but may be used for scripting.

Table 6-16. Built-In Statistical Functions

Item Description
setAngleUnits Specifies the trigonometrical angle unit.
setNotation Specifies the expression evaluation logic (IEEE or SPICE).
setTemperatureUnits Specifies the temperature unit.
wf References a waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 337

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Calculator Buttons
You can use the dropdown list in the Waveform Calculator toolbar to select different types of
calculator buttons to display.
Listed in the following tables are the categories available and their associated buttons. These
categories are available from the dropdown list in the Waveform Calculator:

Complex Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Jitter Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Logical Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Phase Noise Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
RF Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Signal Processing Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Statistical Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Trigonometric Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Complex Buttons
The Complex dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for complex number operations/calculations.

Table 6-17. Complex Function Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns 10 to the xth power.

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument.
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
complex(,) Constructs a complex waveform from a pair of input
waveforms. The pairs include: real part and imaginary
part waveforms, magnitude and phase waveforms, or
gain and phase waveforms.
cphase() Extracts the continuous phase from a complex
waveform. The returned waveform is the continuous
phase from the input complex waveform.

338 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-17. Complex Function Buttons (cont.)

db() Converts the waveform in dB. A transformation setting
for complex waveforms that shows the magnitude of
each point of the complex waveform calculated in
decibels (20 * log (|waveform|))
db10() Converts the waveform in dB. A transformation setting
for complex waveforms that shows the magnitude of
each point of the complex waveform calculated in
decibels (10 * log (|waveform|)
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where e

is the constant 2.71828…
Imaginary unit

imag() Returns the imaginary values of a complex waveform.

ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

mag() Returns the magnitude of a waveform. The

transformation applied to a complex waveform that
shows the square root of (real2 + imag2) for each point
in the complex waveform.
x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a
waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
phase() Returns the phase values of a waveform. The phase of
each point in the complex waveform in Polar form. All
phase angles are restricted between -180 and +180
degrees (-pi radians and +pi radians).
real() Returns the real values of a waveform.

Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions

saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a Tcl
file that can be recalled later.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 339

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-17. Complex Function Buttons (cont.)

sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x.
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can be
either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

Jitter Buttons
The Jitter dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for jitter calculations.

Table 6-18. Jitter Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
Cycle-to-Cycle Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
Jitter (Time- set to Cycle-to-cycle Jitter.
Domain)
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where e

is the constant 2.71828…
Frequency Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
(Time Domain) set to Frequency Jitter.
Half-Period Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
(Time Domain) set to Half-period Jitter.
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

340 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-18. Jitter Buttons (cont.)

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a

waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
Plot Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
Confidence set to Jitter Confidence Interval.
Interval
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions
saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a
Tcl file that can be recalled later.
Time Interval Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
Error (TIE) set to Time Interval Error.
Time Absolute Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
Jitter set to Absolute Jitter.
Long-Term Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with tthe Jitter option
(Time-Domain) set to Long-term Jitter.
Period Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Jitter option
(Time-Domain) set to Period Jitter.
sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can be
either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

Logical Buttons
The Logic dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for logic number operations/calculations.

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons

Icon Item Description

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 341

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons (cont.)

0x Hexadecimal based notation.
< Lesser than operator can be applied to any two digital
waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar value. If
the input is two digital waveforms whose data types are
either bit or boolean, then the result of the operator is
defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A<B
TTF
TFF
FTT
FFF
> Greater than operator can be applied to any two digital
waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar value. If
the input is two digital waveforms whose data types are
either bit or boolean, then the result of the operator is
defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A>B
TTF
TFT
FTF
FFF

342 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons (cont.)

<= Less than or equal to operator can be applied to any two
digital waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar
value. If the input is two digital waveforms whose data
types are either bit or boolean, then the result of the
operator is defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A<=B
TTT
TFF
FTT
FFT
>= Greater than or equal to operator can be applied to any
two digital waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar
value. If the input is two digital waveforms whose data
types are either bit or boolean, then the result of the
operator is defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A >= B
TTT
TFT
FTF
FFT
!= Not equal operator can be applied to any two digital
waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar value. If
the input is two digital waveforms whose data types are
either bit or boolean, then the result of the operator is
defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A!=B
TTF
TFT
FTT
FFF

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 343

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons (cont.)

= Equal operator can be applied to any two digital
waveforms, or one waveform and one scalar value. If
the input is two digital waveforms whose data types are
either bit or boolean, then the result of the operator is
defined in the following table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A==B
TTT
TFF
FTF
FFT
" Single bit notation.
"" VHDL bit string notation.

'&' And operator can be applied to any two digital

waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
The result of the operator is defined in the following
table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A&B
TTT
TFF
FTF
FFF
Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

H Specifies logic state H, weak 1.

L Specifies logic state L, weak 0.

344 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons (cont.)

~ Not operator can be applied to any digital waveform
whose data type is either bit or boolean.
The result of the operator is defined in the following
table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A ~A
TF
FT
| Or operator can be applied to any two digital waveforms
whose data types are either bit or boolean.
The result of the operator is defined in the following
table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A|B
TTT
TFT
FTT
FFF
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions
saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
<< Shift left logical returns a value that is L logically
shifted left by R index positions. If the value of its
leftmost argument is referred to as 'L' and the value of
its rightmost argument is referred to as 'R', sll() replaces
L with a value that is the result of a concatenation whose
left argument is the rightmost (L'Length-1) elements of
L and whose right argument is T'Left, where T is the
element type of L.
1.) If R is '0' or if L is a null array, the return value is L;
2.) If R is positive, sll() is repeated R times to form the
result.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 345

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-19. Logical Buttons (cont.)

>> Shift right logical returns a value that is L logically
shifted right by R index positions. If the value of its
leftmost argument is referred to as 'L' and the value of
its rightmost argument is referred to as 'R', srl() replaces
L with a value that is the result of a concatenation whose
right argument is the leftmost (L'Length-1) elements of
L and whose left argument is T'Left, where T is the
element type of L.
1.) If R is '0' or if L is a null array, the return value is L;
2.) If R is positive, srl() is repeated R times to form the
result.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a Tcl
file that can be recalled later.
U Specifies logic state U, uninitialized.
W Specifies logic state W, weak unknown.
X Specifies logic state X, forcing unknown.
^ The xor operator can be applied to any two digital
waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
The result of the operator is defined in the following
table:
The symbol 'T' represents TRUE for type boolean and '1'
for type bit; the symbol 'F' represents FALSE for type
boolean and '0' for type bit.
A B A^B
TTF
TFT
FTT
FFF
Z Specifies logic state Z, high impedance.

Phase Noise Buttons

The Phase Noise dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for phase noise operations/calculations.

346 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-20. Phase Noise Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
Absolute Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Phase Noise
Jitter option set to Absolute Jitter.
Cycle-to-cycle Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Phase Noise
Jitter Jitter option set to Cycle-to-cycle Jitter.
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where e

is the constant 2.71828…
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

Long-term Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Phase Noise
Jitter option set to Long-term Jitter.
x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a
waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
Period Jitter Opens the Jitter Tool Dialog Box with the Phase Noise
Jitter option set to Period Jitter.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions
saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a
Tcl file that can be recalled later.
sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 347

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-20. Phase Noise Buttons (cont.)

Icon Item Description
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can be
either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

RF Buttons
The RF dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for RF operations/calculations.

Table 6-21. RF Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
constellationdiagram() Creates a Constellation Diagram of a waveform.
Opens the Constellation Diagram Dialog Box to
prompt for the waveform, the delay, and the symbol
period.
compress() Extracts the y-axis value of the wave at the point where
the difference between the actual value of the wave
and the linear extrapolation of the wave based on the
computed slope value becomes greater than the
supplied value.
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

evmber() Opens the Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate
Dialog Box. Calculates error vector magnitude and bit
error ratio from a set of constellation diagrams.

348 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-21. RF Buttons (cont.)

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where
e is the constant 2.71828…
harmonicsmeter() Opens the Harmonics Meter Dialog Box. Plots signals
in sorted order of the maximum Fourier frequency.
Returns the maximum Fourier frequency value.
iipx() Returns the input referred intercept point of order X
from the value of the circuit input and output.
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a

waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
oipx() Returns the output referred intercept point of order X
from the value of the circuit output wave.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
phasenoise() Opens the Phase Noise Dialog Box. Calculates the
phase noise of a transient analysis.
pssresidue() Opens the PSS Residue Dialog Box. Calculates the
difference of every signal at tstop and tstop-tperiod
and plots ntop signals in sorted order of the maximum
difference. Returns the maximum pss residue.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of
expressions saved to a Tcl file with the Store
command.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a
Tcl file that can be recalled later.
topnoise() Opens the Top Noise Dialog Box. Plots ntop noise
spectrum in sorted order of spot noise at fstart or
integrated noise from fstart to fstop.
xcompress() Extracts the x-axis value of the wave at the point where
the difference between the actual value of the wave
and the linear extrapolation of the wave based on the
computed slope value becomes greater than the
supplied value.
sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 349

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-21. RF Buttons (cont.)

x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can
be either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

Signal Processing Buttons

The Signal Processing dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to
functions and operators for transform operations/calculations.

Table 6-22. Signal Processing Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar
or a waveform.
pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.
abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar
without its sign. The absolute values of
a waveform is calculated as the absolute
value of an argument:
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
autocor() Calculates the Autocorrelation Function
of a signal waveform. Opens the Auto
Correlation Dialog Box.
chirp() Calculates the chirp Z-transform. Opens
the Chirp Transform Dialog Box.
convolution() Calculates the linear convolutions of
two finite data sequences.Opens the
Convolution Dialog Box.
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in

the textbox.
exp() Exponential function is defined by
exp(x) = ex, where e is the constant
2.71828…

350 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-22. Signal Processing Buttons (cont.)

fft Determines the frequency content of
analog signals encountered in circuit
simulation, which deals with sequences
of time values. Opens the Fast Fourier
Transform Tool Dialog Box. See
Statistical Buttons for details.
harmonicdistortion() Calculates the harmonic distortion of a
signal. Opens the Harmonic Distortion
Dialog Box.
ifft Calculates the inverse fast Fourier
transform of the input waveform. Opens
the Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
Dialog Box. See Inverse Fast Fourier
Transform (IFFT) Function for details.
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a
waveform.
log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a
waveform.
x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform.
The mod of a waveform is calculated as
“x % y” is the remainder of the division
x/y for integers x and y.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the
active graph window. The button is
active only if the expression result is a
waveform.
psd() Calculates the Power Spectral Density
of a signal waveform. Opens the Power
Spectral Density Dialog Box.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a
set of expressions saved to a Tcl file
with the Store command.
snr() Opens the Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog
sndr() Box. Enables you to specify parameters
for the four functions listed.
enob()
sfdr

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 351

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-22. Signal Processing Buttons (cont.)

spectrummeasurement() Computes a specific measurement on
the fft of a waveform. Opens the
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog
Box. See Spectrum Measurement
Function for details.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected
expressions in a Tcl file that can be
recalled later.
windowing() Tapers data near ends of records to
avoid abrupt truncation effects. Opens
the Windowing Transform Dialog Box.
sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform.
The square of the waveform is
calculated as x2 = x * x
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy,
where x and y can be either a waveform
or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a
waveform.
crosscorrelation() Calculates the cross correlation between
two data sets. Opens the Cross
Correlation Dialog Box.
integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a
waveform.

Statistical Buttons
The Statistical dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions and
operators for statistical number operations/calculations.

Table 6-23. Statistical Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.

352 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-23. Statistical Buttons (cont.)

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
avg() Returns the average of the waveform.
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where e

is the constant 2.71828…
eyediagram() Constructs an eye diagram of the waveform.

histogram() Creates a histogram of the input waveform showing the

magnitude probability density distribution of the
waveform. Opens the Histogram Dialog Box to help
you specify the parameters.
larger(,) Creates a new waveform based on the larger of two data
points at any given time of the two input waveforms.
lesser(,) Creates a new waveform based on the lesser of two data
points at any given time of the two input waveforms.
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

max() Returns the maximum value of a waveform.

min() Returns the minimum value of a waveform.
x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a
waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions
saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
rms() Returns the root mean square value of a waveform,
depending on the x-axis scale. If the x-axis scale is in
Hz then it uses the rms_ac function, otherwise it uses
the rms_tran function to calculate the root mean square.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 353

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-23. Statistical Buttons (cont.)

size() Returns the number of data points in an analog
waveform or the number of transitions in a digital
waveform.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a
Tcl file that can be recalled later.
windavg() Returns an average value for each x value of the input
waveform within a particular “window” based on the
current x value.
sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can be
either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

Trigonometric Buttons
The Trigonometric dropdown list item changes the Waveform Calculator buttons to functions
and operators for trigonometric operations/calculations.

Table 6-24. Trigonometric Buttons

Icon Item Description
1/x Returns the reciprocal value of a scalar or a waveform.

pow(10,x) Returns “10 to the xth power”.

abs() Absolute value of a scalar is the scalar without its sign.
The absolute values of a waveform is calculated as the
absolute value of an argument
abs(x) = x
abs(-x) = x
acos() Trigonometric wave function returns the arc cosine of
the waveform.
acosh() Trigonometric wave function returns the hyperbolic arc
cosine of the waveform.
asin() Trigonometric wave function returns the arc sine of the
waveform.

354 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-24. Trigonometric Buttons (cont.)

asinh() Trigonometric wave function returns the hyperbolic arc
sine of the waveform.
atan() Trigonometric wave function returns the arc tangent of
the waveform.
atanh() Trigonometric wave function returns the hyperbolic arc
tangent of the waveform.
Clear Clears the content in the expression textbox.

cos() Trigonometric wave function finds the cosine of the

waveform.
cosh() Trigonometric wave function finds the hyperbolic
cosine of the waveform.
drv() Returns the derivative of a waveform.

Evaluate Evaluates the expression specified in the textbox.

exp() Exponential function is defined by exp(x) = ex, where e

is the constant 2.71828…
ln() Returns the natural logarithm of a waveform.

log() Returns the base 10 logarithm of a waveform.

x%y Returns the modulus of a waveform. The mod of a

waveform is calculated as “x % y” is the remainder of
the division x/y for integers x and y.
Plot Plots the last result waveform to the active graph
window. The button is active only if the expression
result is a waveform.
Recall Enables you to restore the results of a set of expressions
saved to a Tcl file with the Store command.
sin() Trigonometric function returns the sine of the
waveform.
sinh() Trigonometric wave function returns the hyperbolic
sine of the waveform.
Store Enables you to save a set of selected expressions in a
Tcl file that can be recalled later.
tan() Trigonometric wave function returns the tangent of the
waveform.
tanh() Trigonometric wave function returns the hyperbolic arc
tangent of the waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 355

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Calculator Buttons

Table 6-24. Trigonometric Buttons (cont.)

sqr() Returns the squared scalar or waveform. The square of
the waveform is calculated as x2 = x * x
x ** y Returns “x to the yth power” or xy, where x and y can be
either a waveform or a scalar.
sqrt() Returns the square root of a scalar or a waveform.

integral() Returns the anti-derivative of a waveform.

356 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Tool

Jitter Tool
The Jitter Tool enables you to analyze clock jitter between any digital and analog target signal
with respect to a reference period or frequency, or to calculate phase noise jitter.
The jitter calculation is represented either as a waveform, which shows the jitter evaluation in
time, or as a single value. In addition, you can optionally plot a jitter histogram and the
following jitter statistics: max, min, mean, standard deviation, and peak-to-peak.

The tool supports the analysis of periodic signals having the sufficient number of cycles
necessary for high jitter calculation precision. In this context, “cycle” refers to one complete
oscillation of a repeating waveform, and “period” refers to the time taken for one complete
cycle of a repeating waveform.

Jitter can be measured against the rising, falling, or both edges of a reference signal. Time
domain waveforms are the targeted waveforms.

Using the Jitter Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Jitter Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Using the Jitter Tool

You can use the Jitter Tool to analyze clock jitter between any digital and analog target signal
with respect to a reference period or frequency, or to calculate phase noise jitter.
Procedure
1. Open a waveform database containing the signal to analyze.
2. Choose Tools > Jitter. The Jitter Tool Dialog Box opens.
3. Select the required tab, either Time-Domain or Phase Noise. Select the required Jitter
measurement type to use. The options offered in the dialog box change based on these
selections.
4. If required, enter a unique name for the resulting jitter waveform in the Waveform
Output Name field. You can also specify whether to plot the jitter waveform in a new
graph window.

Tip
If a jitter result waveform with the given name is already plotted in the active graph
window and you leave the output waveform name unchanged, the jitter result
waveform will be updated accordingly to the jitter setup options when you click Apply
or OK.

5. Select the Source Waveform(s) to analyze. You drag waveforms from the active graph
window into the Waveform List area, or you can select them and click the Add Selected

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 357

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using the Jitter Tool

Waveforms ( ) icon. Use Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple waveforms, or use

the Delete key to remove them.
6. Optionally, you can specify a reference value upon which to base the jitter calculation.
This can be the Reference Period or Frequency (Time-Domain tab) or the Fundamental
Frequency (Phase Noise tab).
7. Configure the scope of the analysis using the Jitter Setup options.
8. If you intend to generate a graph based on the Time-Domain analysis results, choose
which calculated values to display on the waveforms using the Display Jitter Statistics
options.
9. Click Apply. The analysis is performed and the results plotted in the graph window.

358 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

Jitter Measurement Types

The Jitter Tool enables you to calculate jitter based on a number of different measurement
types.
You can select these when configuring the analysis in the Jitter Tool Dialog Box.

The following Time-Domain and Phase Noise measurement types are available:

Absolute Jitter (Time-Domain). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Period Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Half-Period Jitter (Time Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Frequency Jitter (Time Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Time-Domain). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Long-Term Jitter (Time-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Time Interval Error (TIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Jitter Confidence Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Absolute Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Period Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Long-Term Jitter (Phase-Noise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Absolute Jitter (Time-Domain)

Absolute Jitter (Time-Domain) is the accumulated difference between the actual cycle period
and the reference or average source waveform period values. This type of jitter is useful when
evaluating long-term signal stability.

Period Jitter (Time-Domain)

Period Jitter (Time-Domain) is the variation in time of the period of a source waveform relative
to its average period or to a reference period, over part of, or the whole waveform. This type of
jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.
The tool provides two methods of measuring Period Jitter:

• Case 1. Reference period is not set—calculation of the difference between the actual and
average periods of the source waveform:

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 359

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• Case 2. Reference period is set—calculation of the difference between the actual source
and reference periods:

where:

• is the Period Jitter of the Nth cycle

• is the average period of the source waveform

• is the Nth cycle period of the source waveform

• is the reference period

• N is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

The Period Jitter RMS value is displayed over the resulting waveform.
• Case 1:

• Case 2:

where:

• Period Jitter RMS is the Period Jitter RMS value

• is the average period of the source waveform

• is the ith cycle period of the source waveform

• is the reference period

• N is the total number of cycles in the waveform

• i is the index of the current cycle

360 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

Note
The standard deviation measurement is different from the jitter RMS value
measurement (although these values can be very close) as the standard deviation
measurement is applied to the jitter result waveform, which already represents the delta
values between periods. The period jitter RMS value is calculated using the period
values (and not the deltas between periods) of the source waveform, and the reference
period, if present.

where:

• Std. dev. is the standard deviation value

• is the ith difference (delta) between the periods, which is equal to the (see
formulas above)

• is the average difference (delta) between periods

• N is the number of calculated differences between deltas

• is the Period Jitter of the Kth cycle (see above for formula)

• K is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

• i is the index of the Period Jitter value for the current cycle.
Figure 6-17. Example of the Period Jitter Waveform

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 361

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

Figure 6-18. Example of the Period Jitter Waveform with Applied Statistical
Measurements

Figure 6-19. Example of the Period Jitter Histogram

Half-Period Jitter (Time Domain)

Half-period Jitter is the variation in time of the half-period of a source waveform relative to its
average half-period, or to a reference half-period, over part of, or the whole waveform. This
type of jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.
A waveform’s half-period is the period multiplied by its duty cycle.

362 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

The tool provides two methods of measuring Half-period Jitter:

• Case 1. Reference period is not set—calculation of the difference between the actual and
average half-periods of the source waveform:

• Case 2. Reference period is set—calculation of the difference between the actual source
and reference waveform half-periods:

where:

• is the Half-period Jitter of the Nth cycle

• is the average half-period of the source waveform

• is the Nth cycle half-period of the source waveform

• is the reference half-period

• N is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

The Half-Period Jitter RMS value is displayed over the resulting waveform.

• Case 1:

• Case 2:

where:

• Half_period Jitter RMS is the Half-period Jitter RMS value

• is the average half-period of the source waveform

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 363

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• is the ith cycle half-period of the source waveform

• is the reference half-period

• N is the total number of cycles in the waveform

• i is the index of the current cycle

where:

• Std. dev. is the standard deviation value

• is the ith difference (delta) between the half-periods, which is equal to the
(see formulas above)

• is the average difference (delta) between half-periods

• N is the number of calculated differences between deltas

• is the Half-period Jitter of the Kth cycle (see above for formula)

• K is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

• i is the index of the Half-period Jitter value for the current cycle.

Frequency Jitter (Time Domain)

Frequency Jitter is the variation in time of the frequency of the source waveform relative to its
average frequency or to a reference frequency over part of, or the whole waveform. This type of
jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.
The tool provides two methods of measuring Frequency Jitter:

• Reference frequency is not set—calculation of the difference between the actual and
average frequencies of the source waveform:

364 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• Reference frequency is set—calculation of the difference between the actual source

waveform and reference frequencies:

where:

• is the Frequency Jitter for the Nth cycle

• is the average frequency of the source waveform

• is the frequency of the Nth cycle of the source waveform

• is the reference frequency

• N is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

The Frequency Jitter RMS value is displayed over the result waveform.

• Case 1:

• Case 2:

where:

• Frequency jitter RMS is the Frequency Jitter RMS value

• is the average frequency of the source waveform

• is the ith cycle frequency of the source waveform

• is the reference frequency

• N is the total number of cycles in the waveform

• i is the index of the current cycle

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 365

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

where:

• Std. dev. is the standard deviation value

• DFi is the ith difference (delta) between frequencies, which is equal to (see
formulas above)

• is the average difference (delta) between frequencies

• N is the number of the calculated differences between deltas

• is the Frequency Jitter value for the Kth cycle (see above for the formula)
• K is the current waveform cycle index, which participates in the calculation:

• i is the index of the Frequency Jitter value for the current cycle.

Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Time-Domain)

Cycle-to-cycle (C2C) Jitter is the variation in time of the difference between the duration of two
adjacent cycles over part of, or the whole waveform. This type of jitter is calculated only on the
source waveform. C2C helps to evaluate the instantaneous and very short-term signal stability.
Cycle-to-cycle jitter is calculated using the following equation:

where:

• is the N-cycle Jitter for the Kth adjacent N-cycle samples pair

• is the period of the ith cycle in the sample

• N is the number of cycles in the sample

• i is the index of the current cycle in the sample

366 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• K is the current N-cycle sample pair index, which participates in the calculation:

The cycle-to-cycle jitter RMS value is displayed over the result waveform.

where:

• N_Cycle jitter RMS is the cycle-to-cycle jitter RMS value

• is the period of ith cycle in the sample

• K is the number of cycles in the sample

• N is the number of the calculated differences between adjacent N-cycle samples
• i is the index of the current cycle in the sample

where:

• Std. dev. is the standard deviation value

• ΔNCi is the ith difference (delta) between the duration of the adjacent N-cycle samples,
which is equal to the (see formulas above)

• is the average difference (delta) between adjacent N-cycle samples

• N is the number of calculated differences between deltas

• is the N-cycle Jitter of the Kth adjacent N-cycle samples pair (see above for
formula)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 367

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• K is the current N-cycle sample pair index, which participates in the calculation:

• i is the index of the N-cycle Jitter value for the current N-cycle samples pair.

Long-Term Jitter (Time-Domain)

Long-term Jitter is the variation in time of the cumulative period of adjacent N-cycle samples.
This type of jitter is sometimes called “accumulated” jitter. It can help to evaluate the signal’s
accuracy and stability.
In other words, Long-term Jitter is the ensemble of N-period Jitter RMS values, for N starting
from 1 to selected maximum number of cycles in the N-cycle sample. It means that the first
value on the Long-term Jitter waveform will correspond to the Period Jitter RMS value (N=1).

where:

• is the Long-term Jitter value for N number of cycles in the sample

• N_period jitter RMSN is the N-period Jitter RMS value for the N number of cycles in the
sample
• N is the current number of cycles in the N-cycle sample

368 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

Figure 6-20. Example of the Long-Term Jitter Waveform

Time Interval Error (TIE)

Time Interval Error (TIE) is the variation in time of the source waveform edges relative to the
reference (or ideal clock) waveform edges over part of, or the whole waveform. TIE helps to
evaluate the signal accuracy and the short- and long-term signal stability.
The TIE value is calculated using the equation:

where:

• is the time interval error at the Nth edge

• is the Nth source waveform edge

• is the Nth reference waveform edge

The TIE Jitter RMS value is displayed over the result waveform.

where:

• TIE jitter RMS is the Time Interval Error Jitter RMS value

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 369

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Jitter Measurement Types

• is the ith source waveform edge

• is the ith reference waveform edge

• N is the total number of calculated edges in the waveform

• i is the index of the current edge

where:

• Std. dev. is the standard deviation value

• DTIEi is the ith difference between edges, which is equal to (see formulas
above)

• is the average difference between edges (the average TIE jitter value)

• N is the total number of the calculated differences between edges (the total number of
TIE jitter values)

• is the TIE jitter for the Kth edge (see above for the formula)

• K is the index of the edge, which participates in the TIE jitter calculation:

• i is the index of the current TIE jitter value.

Jitter Confidence Interval

Jitter Confidence Interval plots the approximate confidence interval for rms jitter vs. number of
Gaussian samples.

Absolute Jitter (Phase-Noise)

Absolute Jitter (Phase-Noise) is applied to SST Noise Analysis results. Absolute jitter is
calculated as the result of the integration of the sphi double side band waveform.

370 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Using the Extract Outputs from Database Tool

Period Jitter (Phase-Noise)

Period Jitter (Phase Noise) is applied to SST Noise Analysis results. Period jitter is calculated as
the result of the integration of the sphi double side band waveform.

Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Phase-Noise)

Cycle-to cycle (CtoC) Jitter (Phase Noise) is applied to SST Noise Analysis results. Cycle-to
cycle (C2C) jitter is calculated as the result of the integration of the sphi double side band
waveform.
Cycle-to-cycle jitter (phase noise) is calculated using the following equation:

Long-Term Jitter (Phase-Noise)

Long-term Jitter (Phase Noise) is applied to SST Noise Analysis results. Long-term jitter is
calculated as the result of the integration of the sphi double side band waveform.

Using the Extract Outputs from Database Tool

This tool enables you to run a new simulation on a previously simulated database, returning—
and, optionally, plotting—the results of all .extract and .meas commands defined in a new
netlist. This enables you to modify and add measurements to a simulation without running the
entire simulation again, as well as to apply a single set of measurements to multiple simulations.
Note
It is possible to run the tool in batch mode; see the description of the dataset extract
command for details.

Prerequisites
• You must have a database file containing the results of the simulation upon which you
want to run the extract.
• You must have a netlist (.cir/.ckt) file containing the .extract or .meas statements to
apply to the simulation results.
Procedure
1. Choose Tools > Extract The Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box opens.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 371

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Using the Extract Outputs from Database Tool

2. Specify the database upon which to perform the extract. Either select an open database
by clicking the down-arrow to the right of the Select Source Database field, or click the
open icon ( ) and browse to the database file.

3. The Select Netlist field defaults to the netlist with the same name as the database file in
the same directory. If you want to run the extract with a different netlist, either edit the
path or browse to the file.
4. The AEX Output File defaults to <netlist_name>.aex. If you want to specify a
different file to which to write the values from the new extract run, either edit the path or
browse to the file.
5. By default, waveforms are not generated from the extracted values. To generate them,
select the Extract Waveforms option. The Output Wdb File field defaults to a new
.wdb file named according to the original simulation filename suffixed with _extract, but
this can be overridden.
6. If required, specify any arguments to pass to Eldo in the Eldo Extra Arguments field.
7. Click Run. The simulation runs, with the progress displayed in the transcript window.

372 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Signal Processing Functions

Signal Processing Functions

A number of signal processing functions are available in EZwave.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Spectrum Measurement Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Correlogram Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Periodogram Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Convolution Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Harmonic Distortion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Signal to Noise Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Window Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Windowing Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Function

It is sometimes preferable in signal analysis to compute time and frequency domain expressions
for data which is sampled at discrete intervals. This is generally referred to as a Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). The Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) is the fastest and most efficient available
algorithm for computing the DFT.
Prerequisites
If you want to replicate Eldo FFT results in the EZwave viewer, verify the following conditions
are true:

• The input waveforms must be the same. In the Eldo simulator, you can display the
waveform it uses for the FFT calculation by setting display_input = 1 in the .optfour
command.
• The same set of parameters and options must be used for both FFT calculations.
Procedure
1. Open the Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box by one of the following methods:
• Choose Tools > FFT
or
• Access the Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box through the Waveform
Calculator:

i. Click on the Waveform Calculator icon, or select it from the Tools menu.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 373

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Function

ii. Choose Signal Processing from the dropdown list.

iii. Click the fft button on the calculator keypad.
2. Select the source wave from the dropdown list or use the Add Selected Waveforms icon
to add a waveform from an open graph window. Use the Clear Waveform List icon to
remove all waveforms in the list.

Tip
You can perform an FFT on a complex waveforms. This is useful when the negative
and positive frequency responses are not symmetrical and hence they need be taken
into account individually. This can happen when designing data converters for example.

3. In the Parameter Setup area, choose one of the FFT input parameters that you want to be
calculated automatically using the Input Method dropdown list. Then specify the
remaining input parameters. These parameters give information about the sampling of
the input data and the range of the input signal which is used for the computation. Click
the Default button to restore the default values.
The range of the input signal can be modified using the following input parameters:
• Start/Stop Time — specify the start and stop times for the computation
• Points /Frequency — specify the number of sampling points and the sampling
frequency for the computation.

Note
The parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((Points-1)/ Frequency) = Stop Time - Start Time

The number of points for the FFT results is: Points/2

If the number of points is set to a factor of 2n (n = 2, 3, ...), the FFT computation is more
efficient.

Tip
You can enter expressions into any numeric fields. For example, to convert a 1µs
period to a frequency, enter the expression 1/1u into the Sampling Frequency field.

• Select one of the following options for FFT setup. The default global value can be
set via the Window Shape option in the Waveform Calculation Options:
o Symmetric - Standard FFT setup.
For Symmetric windows, the input parameters satisfy the following equation:
((points-1)/frequency) = stop_time - start_time
o Periodic - FFT setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic signals.

374 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function

For Periodic windows, the input parameters satisfy the following equation:
((points)/frequency) = stop_time - start_time

Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the
Periodic option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT
waveform. In this case, Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input
signal.

4. For additional settings, refer to the Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box section for
a full description of the settings. The following are some of the settings:
• Improve FFT Results — Select Normalize Results to divide all real and imaginary
parts of the result by (Number of Points)/2, except for the first point, which is
divided by Number of Points.
• Windowing — Select the windowing type to specify the method for computing the
sampled data. Select the windowing method from the dropdown list. The default
option is Rectangular. Certain windowing methods require additional input, enter
the appropriate value in the box. Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for
details on the options available.
• Sampling — Use Data Points should be selected as default if the input data has
equidistant Time Steps; otherwise Uniform Sampling should be selected.
• Data Padding — Select Pad with Zeros to enable padding with zeros.
5. (Optional) Select File > Save Configuration at the top of the Fast Fourier Transform
Tool dialog box if you want to save the FFT configuration. All parameter of the FFT
Tool GUI are saved, except the source waveform and the output waveform names. You
can subsequently load a saved FFT configuration by selecting File > Open
Configuration.
6. Click Apply. If problems in the computation occur, a relevant error or warning message
is displayed. The transformation is calculated based on the specified parameters and a
new graph window is opened and the results are graphed.

Tip
If you opened the Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box by using the Waveform
Calculator fft button and no results are displayed, click the Eval button and then the
Plot button.

Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function

For any two signals in the frequency domain, it is possible to perform an Inverse Fast Fourier
Transform (IFFT).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 375

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) Function

Procedure
1. To perform an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform:
2. Invoke the Waveform Calculator by doing the following:
a. Click on the Waveform Calculator icon, or select it from the Tools menu.
b. Select Signal Processing from the dropdown list.
c. Click the IFFT button on the calculator keypad to open the Inverse Fast Fourier
Transform Dialog Box. This has similar input parameters options as used on the Fast
Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box.
3. Specify a source wave in the Source Waveform field. Select a wave from an open graph
window and use the Add Selected Waveforms icon to add it to the drop down list.
Use the Clear Waveform List icon to remove all waveforms from the list.

The Parameter Setup controls are populated with a default set of parameters. These
parameters reflect the sampling of the input data and the range of the input signal which
is used for the computation.
4. In the Parameter Setup area, choose one of the IFFT input parameters that you want to
be calculated automatically using the Input Method dropdown list. Then specify the
remaining input parameters. These parameters give information about the sampling of
the input data and the range of the input signal which is used for the computation. Click
the Default button to restore the default values.
The range of the input signal can be modified using the following input parameters:
• Start/Stop Freq. — specify the start and stop frequencies for the computation
• Points /Time — specify the number of sampling points and the sampling time for the
computation.

Note
An IFFT analysis always creates results with an even number of points. Be aware
that when calculating results in conjunction with an FFT analysis, an even number of
points with the FFT must also be used if the following condition is to be fulfilled: IFFT
(FFT(signal)) = signal

5. Click the Improve IFFT Results checkbox to display optional controls to set the
sampling method:
• Use Data Points should be used if the input data has equidistant Time Steps;
otherwise, use Uniform Sampling. Select Cubic Spline to compute interpolated
points using the Cubic Spline method rather than using linear interpolation.
• Data Padding — Select Pad with Zeros to pad the input data with zeros, before or
after the input data set

376 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Spectrum Measurement Function

6. Click Apply. If problems in the computation occur, a relevant error or warning message
is displayed.
7. Return to the Waveform Calculator to evaluate and plot the results of the transformation.
a. Click the Eval button. The transformation will now be calculated based on the
specified parameters.
8. Click the Plot button to plot the results. A new graph window is opened and the results
are graphed.

Spectrum Measurement Function

You can compute spectrum measurements on waveforms using the Spectrum Measurement
Tool. Calculates Signal-to-Noise-and-Distortion Ratio (SNDR), Spurious Free Dynamic Range
(SFDR), Effective Number Of Bits (ENOB), Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and Signal-to-
Noise Ratio (SNR) (without distortion) by using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) of a real,
complex, or transient input signal. The Spectrum Measurement Tool is typically used for
characterizing A-to-D converters and is supported for transient simulation data.
Procedure
1. Open the Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box by one of the following methods:
• Choose Tools > Spectrum Measurement
or
• Access through the Waveform Calculator:

i. Click on the Waveform Calculator icon, or select it from the Tools menu.

ii. Choose Signal Processing from the dropdown list.

iii. Click the spec. meas. button on the calculator keypad.
2. On the Settings tab, use the Add Selected Waveform icon to add the currently
selected waveform(s). Use the Clear Waveform List icon to remove all waveforms
in the list. Use the Delete icon to remove the specified waveform from the list.

3. In the FFT Setup area, choose one of the FFT input parameters that you want to be
calculated automatically using the Input Method dropdown list. Then specify the
remaining input parameters. These parameters give information about the sampling of
the input data and the range of the input signal which is used for the computation. Click
the Default button to restore the default values.
The range of the input signal can be modified using the following input parameters:
• Start/Stop Time — specify the start and stop times for the computation

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 377

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Spectrum Measurement Function

• Points /Frequency — specify the number of sampling points and the sampling
frequency for the computation.

Note
The parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((Points-1)/ Frequency) = Stop Time - Start Time

• Symmetric/Periodic — specify either “Symmetric” for standard FFT setup or

“Periodic” for enhanced FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
4. Enter the parameters in the Measurement Setup area:
• Frequency Min/Max — specify the lowest and highest frequencies to used in the
spectrum measurement noise integration calculation. Click the button refresh the
default minimum and maximum frequencies for the selected waveform(s).
• Harmonics — specify the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered.
Default value is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics).
• Windowing — select the windowing type to specify the method for computing the
sampled data. Select the windowing method from the dropdown list. The default
option is Rectangular. Certain windowing methods require additional input, enter the
appropriate value in the box that appears. Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on
page 385 for details on the options available.
• Bin Size— specifies the number of points to take into account around the
fundamental signal. For example, with Bin Size = 0, only the fundamental is taken
into account. With Bin Size = 1, the frequencies taken into account correspond to the
first point to the left and right for the found fundamental and each of its associated
harmonics. The default value depends on the Windowing transform selected.
5. (Optional) Check Display FFT if you want to plot the FFT of the waveform(s). You can
also specify the Unit, Spectral or Continuous plot, and Linear or Log scale.
6. (Optional) Select File > Save Configuration at the top of the Spectrum Measurement
Tool dialog box if you want to save the Spectrum Measurement configuration. All
parameter of the Spectrum Measurement Tool GUI are saved, except the source
waveform and the output waveform names. You can subsequently load a saved
Spectrum Measurement (or FFT) configuration by selecting File > Open
Configuration.
7. Click Measure. If problems occur in the computation, a relevant error or warning
message is displayed.
The spectrum measurements are calculated based on the specified parameters and are
displayed in both the Measurement Results tab and the Waveform Calculator.

378 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Spectrum Measurement Function

Tip
If the input is a compound waveform, a new entry is created in the Measurement
Results tab for each waveform contained in the compound.

8. (Optional) Right-click on a measurement displayed in the Measurement Results tab

and choose:
• Send expr to calc - to send the expression to the Waveform Calculator, where it is
evaluated.
• Copy result - to copy the value to the clipboard.
If you right-click on the top level waveform name, you can choose:
• Send all exprs to calc - to send all of the expressions as a single command to the
Waveform Calculator, where they are evaluated.
• Remove result - to remove all of the results for the waveform.
Related Topics
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box
spectrummeasurement

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 379

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density

Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral

Density
Two methods are available for calculating the autocorrelation function (AF) and the power
spectral density (PSD) of a signal waveform. The AF is an average measure of its time domain
properties; as such, it can be especially relevant when the signal is random.
The Correlogram Method means that the FFT is used directly to compute estimates of the AF
Rxx(n) for Nauto lags, where 2 x Nauto is the size of the transform used. The Periodogram
Method means that a sliding FFT is used to compute estimates of the PSD directly rather than
estimating an AF.

Correlogram Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Periodogram Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Correlogram Method
This method uses the FFT directly to compute estimates of the autocorrelation function Rxx(n)
Nauto lags, where 2 x Nauto is the size of the transform used.
For this, the program divides the sampled input data set into K = (Nbpts + Nauto) / (Nauto + 1)
sections and the FFT routine (2 x (Nauto -1) points) is performed once on each section with the
appropriate input data. The autocorrelation result is then computed by performing an Inverse
FFT (2 x (Nauto -1) points) after accumulating the partial results.

At this point, a spectral estimate with any desired degree of frequency resolution can be
obtained by augmenting the just computed R(n) or the first Ncorr ≤ Nauto values with zeros and
performing a single FFT (2 x (Npsd - 1) points).

Figure 6-21. Correlogram Method

In order to avoid the undesired effects of truncating data records in the PSD result, it is possible
to apply different kinds of smoothing windows on the autocorrelation result.

380 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Convolution Function

Periodogram Method
This method uses a sliding FFT to compute estimates of the PSD directly rather than estimating
an autocorrelation function as in the Correlation method.
The given sequence X(m), m=0, ..., Nbpts – 1 is first decomposed into subsequences Xr(m) of
length Nsect with overlapping D = Nsect/2. Each of them is shifted by the arithmetic mean of all
the data.1

where k = (Nbpts - D)/D is the number of sequences.

On each section, a window is then applied and the PSD is computed (FFT with 2 x (Nauto – 1)
points) as a weighted sum of their periodograms (= | XW r(k)|2 energy_of_window).

The inverse FFT (2 x (Nauto – 1) points) is now used to estimate the autocorrelation function
from the PSD result.

Figure 6-22. Periodogram Method

If the user wishes to have more values for the PSD result than computed by default, an
additional FFT (2 x (Npsd – 1) points) is executed on a sequence, generated by the first Ncorr
autocorrelation values and a suitable number of zeros.

Convolution Function
The convolution function calculates the discrete linear convolution between two data sets.

1. The subtraction of xmean is implemented in order that the autocorrelation result is centered around y = 0.
This useful when using non-rectangular waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 381

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Convolution Function

For two finite data sequences, x(n), n = 0, … , N – 1 and h(n), n = 0, … , M – 1, the discrete
linear convolution x (n) · h (n) is defined as follows:

For signals x(n), h(n) which are periodic with period N, the discrete FFT of their periodic
convolution is equal to the multiplication of the separate FFT results. This relation is called the
Discrete Convolution Theorem. Using zero padding of x(n) and h(n) to make circular
convolution yields the same result as linear convolution. The following method can then be
applied for computing the linear convolutions of two finite data sequences:

x(n), n = 0, … , N – 1 and

h(n), n = 0, … , M – 1.

• Step 1 — Zero Padding

Table 6-25. Zero Padding

x’(n) = x(n) n = 0, … , N – 1
x’(n) = 0 n = N, … , N + M – 1
h’(n) = h(n) n = 0, … , M – 1
h’(n) = 0 n = M, … , N + M – 1

• Step 2 — Multiply FFTs

Table 6-26. Multiply FFT

of x’(n) and h’(n)
x’(n) → X’(k) FFT
h’(n) → H’(k) FFT
Multiplication:
X’(k) · H’(k) = Y’(k)

• Step 3 — Inverse FFT

Table 6-27. Inverse FFT

Y’(k) → y(n) = x(n)*h(n) IFFT

382 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Harmonic Distortion Function

Harmonic Distortion Function

Describes how this function computes the harmonics and the total harmonic distortion (THD) of
the input waveform signal.
Note
Only a frequency-domain gain from a uniformly sampled FFT result is accepted as a valid
source waveform.

The THD of a signal is the ratio of the sum of the powers of all harmonic frequencies above the
fundamental frequency to the power of the fundamental frequency. This value is expressed in
dB.

The harmonics inside the interval [Fmin, Fmax] are computed as follows:

where:

• A(i) = amplitudes of the multiples of the fundamental frequency.

• Ao = amplitude of the fundamental frequency.
The Total Harmonic Distortion is given by the following:

where the sum is computed over all multiples (equal or greater than 2) of the fundamental
frequency in the specified band. If these values are not identical to the sampled data values, then
they are computed by interpolation.

Note
Each harmonic frequency is a multiple of the fundamental frequency. Only those harmonic
frequencies above the fundamental frequency and inside the [fmin, fmax] interval are used
for the THD computation.

Signal to Noise Function

Computes the signal to noise ratio of the input waveform signal by using the Gain of the FFT
result.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 383

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Window Shapes

Note
Only a complex waveform or a waveform representing a Gain is accepted as a valid source
waveform.

Tip
See also snr and Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box.

In digital signal analysis, it is often of interest to compute, for a signal composed of the sum of
noisy sinusoids, the following relationship:

where:

= sum over all squares of amplitudes of the sinusoidal frequencies.

= sum over all squares of noise amplitudes of the signal.

This is called the Signal to Noise Ratio of the signal.

The calculation takes into account harmonics (default is 6, signal + 5 harmonics). You can also
control the sampling frequency of the source waveform to manage harmonic folding and
aliasing (default is none).

Window Shapes
Two window shapes, Symmetric and Periodic, are available,
• Symmetric
The default.
For symmetric windows, the input parameters satisfy the following equation:

384 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Windowing Transforms

Figure 6-23. Symmetric Window

• Periodic
Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
For periodic windows, the input parameters satisfy the following equation

Figure 6-24. Periodic Window

You can control the default window shape setting for FFT windows and functions using the
Waveform Calculation Options.

Windowing Transforms
In order to estimate the power density spectrum of a random signal, only a finite part of the
signal is used in practice even if the signal is of infinite duration. In order to reduce the
undesirable effects of truncating the data records (leakage), it is convenient to apply different
types of windows that gradually taper the data near the ends of the record, thereby avoiding the
abrupt truncation of a rectangular window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 385

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Windowing Transforms

11 different types of windowing transforms are available:

Figure 6-25. Available Windowing Transforms

For a record consisting of N points indexed from 0 to N - 1, EZwave works with the following
equations:

• Bartlett Window

• Blackman Window

386 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Post-Processing
Windowing Transforms

• Blackman-Harris Window

• Dolph-Chebyshev Window

where:

• Hamming Window

• Hanning Window

Note
The second half of the Hanning window, M ≤ i ≤ N where M = N/2 for even N and M =
(N+1)/2 for odd N, is obtained by flipping the first half around M.

Symmetric window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in FIR filter design.
Periodic window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in spectral analysis. This
is because the Discrete Fourier Transform assumes periodic extension of the input vector. A
periodic Hanning window is obtained by constructing a symmetric window and removing the
last sample.

• Kaiser Window

Where:

I0(x)=Modified zero-order Bessel function.

ß=Constant which specifies a frequency trade-off between the peak height of the side lobe
ripples and the width of energy in the main lobe.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 387

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Post-Processing
Windowing Transforms

• Klein Window

When:

and

Note
w(i) has a minimum amplitude moment and minimizes the truncation error in high
resolution computations.

• Parzen Window

• Rectangular Window

• Welch Window

388 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 7
Save and Output Data

This section describes how to save and export simulation results.

Saving and Restoring Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Saving Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Restoring Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Printing Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Exporting Graph Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Exporting Graph Windows as a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Using a Different PDF Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Exporting Graph Windows as an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Saving a Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving a Single Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving Post-Processed Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Save File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Saving Multiple Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Recovering Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Recovering from Incomplete Simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Recovering Incomplete Savefiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Outputting a JWDB as an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Saving a JWDB as an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 389

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Saving and Restoring Graph Windows

Saving and Restoring Graph Windows

EZwave can save graph windows in both SWD and TCL formats.
SWD (.swd) and TCL (.tcl) formats can store:

• Waveforms associated with the graph window

• Window size, position, axis and background settings
• Complex waveform transformation settings
• Waveform display and cursor settings.
• Optionally, for SWD only, you can save the related waveform database (as a .wdb file)

Note
New waveforms computed from the Measurement Tool or using measurement
functions from the Waveform Calculator are not currently stored in the TCL or SWD
formats.

Saving Graph Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Restoring Graph Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Saving Graph Windows

To save your session, you must save each of your graph windows.
Procedure
1. Select the window you wish to save.
2. Choose File > Save.
3. From the Save Windows Dialog Box, select whether you want to save the active
window or all windows and whether you want to save the related database.

Note
If you have configured your save options to not display this dialog box, the graph
window is saved according to the options you have configured.

4. In the text area, type the name you want for the saved window, using .swd as the
extension, or click on the open folder icon to browse for the file you want to save. If the
save file already exists, select Overwrite existing file.
5. Click Save to save the database and close the dialog box.
6. The system will save the file and also write a new Mentor Graphics database (.wdb) file
with the same name as the .swd file.

390 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Restoring Graph Windows

7. Do this for each window that you wish to save, issuing a new name for each window, or
save all open windows at once.

Restoring Graph Windows

To restore your session, you must open each of your graph windows.
Procedure
1. Choose File > Open.
2. From the Open dialog box, select the directory you need.
3. Select the Saved Window Databases (.swd) filter from the dropdown list.
4. Browse or enter the name of the saved window database (.swd) file.
5. Click OK to open the database and close the dialog box. The system will load the
window and the associated .wdb file for the window.
6. Do this for each window that you wish to open.

Printing Graph Windows

Before printing multiple graph windows, you can arrange them for better viewing purposes.
Procedure
1. To automatically arrange the graph windows in your workspace, choose one of the
following items from the Window menu:
• Cascade — Arranges the graph windows in an overlapping fashion proceeding
down and to the right in the workspace
• Tile Horizontally — Arranges the graph windows to fill the screen horizontally,
fitting several to the screen one above another. If this operation would make some
windows too small, they may be stacked on top of each other.
• Tile Vertically — Arranges the graph windows to fill the screen vertically, fitting
several to the screen side by side. If this operation would make some windows too
small, they may be stacked on top of each other.
• Tile in a Grid — Arranges the graph windows to fill the screen in a grid pattern,
fitting several to the screen side by side and one above another. If this operation
would make some windows too small, they may be stacked on top of each other.
These automatic arrangement options are also available from the toolbar.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 391

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Printing Graph Windows

You can print the contents of a single graph window, all visible graph windows, or all
open graph windows by performing the following:
2. If you want to print a single graph window, make that graph window the active one.
3. Choose File > Print. This brings up the Print dialog box.
4. Select the options for your print job.
5. Click Page Setup to set other options for the print job. On the Page Setup dialog box
you can choose to include the database title, and information such as Time and Date
(selecting Show Actual Values in Graph Window replaces the Time and Date with
actual values). You can also include your User Name and the Machine Name if required.
These will be displayed on all windows. You can select a color scheme for the print (the
Documentation option is optimized for color printing or exporting). Click OK to close
the Page Setup dialog box.
6. Click OK on the Print dialog box to print the graph windows.

Note
If you are having difficulty using /usr/sbin/lpc to print from a Linux system, refer to
“Linux Printing Issues” on page 1178.

Note
You can print to PDF by choosing PDF Writer in the Printer field. See “Exporting
Graph Windows” on page 393 for more instructions.

392 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Exporting Graph Windows

Exporting Graph Windows

You can export a graph windows as a PDF, as described in the following sections.
Exporting Graph Windows as a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Using a Different PDF Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Exporting Graph Windows as an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Exporting Graph Windows as a PDF

You can export the contents of the active graph window to a PDF file.
Procedure
1. Select the graph window you wish to export.
2. Choose File > Print.
3. In the Print dialog box, choose PDF Writer in the Printer field.
The Command field will automatically populate with the required print command for the
default PDF tool, and the Use Printing Command option is enabled.
4. In the File field, enter the required path and filename. You can use the file browser to
navigate to a particular directory and filename. If you don’t enter a path, the PDF file is
written to the current working directory. The checkbox next to this field should be
enabled.
5. If required, modify any paper size and orientation options.
6. Choose which waveforms are to be included; Visible Waveforms or All Waveforms
7. Select whether you want to export only the Active Window, All Windows in
Workspace, One per Page, or All Visible Windows, in One Page. If you choose to export
all visible windows, the windows must be tiled and visible.
8. By default, any text in the graph window is exported to PDF as a font. You can disable
this option by deselecting the Print Text as Font checkbox.
9. Click Page Setup to set other options for the PDF output. On the Page Setup dialog box
you can choose to include the database title, and information such as Time and Date
(selecting Show Actual Values in Graph Window replaces the Time and Date with
actual values). You can also include your User Name and the Machine Name if required.
These will be displayed on all windows. You can select a color scheme for the image
(the Documentation option is optimized for color printing or exporting). Click OK to
close the Page Setup dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Print dialog box to create the PDF.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 393

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Using a Different PDF Driver

Using a Different PDF Driver

You can chose a different postscript-to-PDF driver if required.
The ps2pdf tool is usually provided as part of a Linux installation. If preferred, any installed
postscript-to-PDF driver may be chosen.

Procedure
1. Choose File > Print.
2. From the Print dialog box, select PDF Writer from the Printer menu.
3. Edit the Command field.
Figure 7-1. Editing the Command: Field

• %PSfile
This parameter specifies the temporary .ps file.
• %PDFfile
This parameter specifies the destination .pdf file.

Exporting Graph Windows as an Image

You can export the contents of the active graph window or all visible graph windows to a JPEG
or PNG image file.
Procedure
1. Select the window you wish to export.
2. Choose File > Export.
3. In the Export Image dialog box, enter the path and filename where you want to save the
file. You can use the file browser to navigate to a particular directory and filename. Use
an appropriate extension for the filename (.jpeg, .jpg, or .png). If the chosen file already
exists, select the Overwrite existing file option to save over the existing file.
4. Select the output format you want from the Save As Type dropdown list. Supported
output formats are: JPEG and PNG.

394 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Exporting Graph Windows as an Image

5. In the options field, select the resolution for the output file. You can select Screen,
Printer Low, Printer High or Custom. For Custom, you can specify the required width
and, if Lock aspect ratio is unchecked, the height of the image. Additionally, for JPEG
images, you can select the image quality by using the slider bar or by entering the
percentage into the text field.
6. Select whether you want to export only the Active Window or All Visible Windows. If
you are choosing to export all visible windows, the windows must be tiled and visible.
7. Click Page Setup to set other options for the image output. On the Page Setup dialog
box you can choose to include the database title, and information such as Time and Date
(selecting Show Actual Values in Graph Window replaces the Time and Date with
actual values). You can also include your User Name and the Machine Name if required.
These will be displayed on all windows. You can select a color scheme for the image
(the Documentation option is optimized for color printing or exporting). Click OK to
close the Page Setup dialog box.
8. Click Export to export to an image file and close the Export Image dialog box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 395

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Saving a Waveform Database

Saving a Waveform Database

You need to save the waveform database if you have made changes to a waveform. Waveforms
created using the Waveform Calculator also need to be saved.
Saving a Single Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving Post-Processed Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Save File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Saving a Single Waveform Database

After you have made changes to a waveform, you need to save the waveform database. You can
also save folders containing scalars, for example noise contributors, to a text file.
Procedure
1. Right-click the database folder and select Save As. The Save As Dialog Box opens.
2. Enter a name for the file. If the file already exists, you must confirm that you want to
overwrite the database.
3. Specify the Save File Types as MGC Database (*.wdb), SPICE PWL (*.sti), text file
(*.txt) or comma separated values (*.csv), and GZipped compression (.gz) if required.
4. Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box.
Results
• When saving a database as a SPICE PWL file (.sti), only waveforms that contain voltage
or current sources are saved by default. If a database contains waveforms with neither
voltage or current sources, those waveforms can still be saved - refer to “Spice Pwl
Options” in “Save Data Options” on page 484.
• For databases loaded from .fsdb files, only loaded waveforms are saved. Loaded
waveforms are waveforms that have been displayed once or waveforms from a hierarchy
selected once in the Tree View of the Waveform List Panel. Refer to “Loading .fsdb and
.tr0 Files” on page 1186.
• When saving a database in GZipped MGC Database format the original database is not
removed. This can be removed manually to reduce the amount of disk space required.

Saving Post-Processed Waveforms

Waveforms created using the Waveform Calculator will need to be saved.
When using the Waveform Calculator, a calc folder is created in the Waveform List panel. This
folder contains the created waveforms. A message next to the folder lets you know if the folder
contains unsaved changes.

396 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Save File Types

To save the waveforms:

Procedure
1. Right-click on the waveform you want to save and select Rename.
2. Enter the desired name of the waveform.
3. Right-click on the calc folder and select Save As.
4. Navigate to the desired location and enter the file name.
5. Specify the file type as either MGC Database (*.wdb), SPICE PWL (*.sti), text file
(*.txt) or comma separated values (*.csv), and GZipped compression (.gz) if required.

Note
When compressing a saved file in GZipped format the original file is not removed.
This can be removed manually to reduce the amount of disk space required.

Save File Types

In addition to native MGC database files (.wdb), the EZwave viewer can output files in several
additional formats.
These include:

• Text (.txt)
A text-format database save file includes X and Y values for each point in the waveform
separated by tabs, spaces, commas, or a user-chosen delimiter selected from the Save
Data Options. You can also select the precision of the saved values from this dialog box.
• Comma-Separated Values (.csv)
A comma-delimited database save file contains value pairs separated by commas. It can
be useful for viewing your results in a program such as a spreadsheet. The .csv file
contains the X and Y values for each point in the waveform, as well as the simulation
data (date, title, and so on) and, in the case of multiple-run simulations, the run
parameters.
• SPICE PWL (.sti)
A SPICE PWL database save file contains value pairs separated by spaces and enclosed
in parentheses. A leading plus sign (+) in a line indicates a continuation of the previous
line. This file type can be used in Eldo simulation as a stimulus. For more information
about the PWL format, refer to the Eldo User’s Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 397

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Saving Multiple Databases

Note
When saving a database as a SPICE PWL file (.sti), only waveforms that contain
voltage or current sources are saved. If a database contains waveforms with neither
voltage or current sources, those waveforms are ignored.

Saving Multiple Databases

If you have unsaved data, you have the capability to save the data without having to perform
separate save operations.
To save multiple databases, perform the following steps:

Procedure
1. Right-click the Waveform List panel to activate the Waveform List Popup Menu.
2. Select the Save All Databases menu item. The item opens the Save Databases dialog
box.

The Save Databases dialog box lists all currently unsaved databases or modified
databases in the Waveform List panel.
3. Click the checkboxes to select the databases you wish to save. The Wdb Name column
shows the current name of the database. The status column displays the status of
Unsaved, Saving or Saved.
4. Use the Save As text box to enter the new name for the database. If the file already
exists, you must confirm the desire to overwrite the database. If you do not wish to be
warned about existing databases of the same name, check the Overwrite if File Exists
checkbox in the lower left corner of the dialog box.
5. Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box, or click Cancel to close the
dialog box without saving any databases.

398 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Recovering Database Files

Recovering Database Files

The application provides two different methods of recovering database files. The first method
described here enables you to recover incomplete database files, produced when a simulator that
the EZwave viewer was connected to does not exit cleanly. The second method recovers
databases that are saved incompletely, such as might be the case during a disk write error or a
network shutdown.
Recovering from Incomplete Simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Recovering Incomplete Savefiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 399

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Recovering from Incomplete Simulations

Recovering from Incomplete Simulations

You can use the recoverjwdb utility to recover simulation data and save it to a jwdb file in the
event of an unclean simulator exit.
Usage
During simulation, the simulator may create an information file called jwdbPortHostname
containing information about the simulation process. If the EZwave viewer is still running,
this utility can retrieve simulation data from memory or from this spill file.
To invoke recoverjwdb, use the following syntax:
recoverjwdb info_file save_path

Arguments
• info_file
The simulator information file.
• save_path
The path to the required save location for the file.

400 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Recovering Incomplete Savefiles

Recovering Incomplete Savefiles

You can use the temporary recovery file created by EZwave to recover the databases if required.
While the EZwave viewer is running, a temporary file named <file>.wdb_recoveryKeyFile, is
created. This temporary file contains the information needed to recover the databases, and is
removed when the EZwave viewer exits normally. If an abnormal exit condition occurs, this
recovery key file will remain and can be used to recover any unsaved data from the simulation.
Usage
The following command enables you to use this temporary file to recover incomplete savefiles
in this event:
ezwave -recovery file.wdb file.wdb_recoveryKeyFile output_file

where file is the original file you were working with.

Note
If disk space runs out during a simulation, the EZwave viewer will display a notice that this
has occurred and will prompt you for an alternate location to save the remainder of the
database file. The first part of the savefile is saved in the original disk location as
file_recovery_part1, and the remainder are saved in whatever location you specify as
file_recovery_part2. The file is saved in two parts even if you remove files in the original disk
partition and elect to save the remainder of the database there.

To recover the incomplete savefile in this case, use the following command format:
ezwave -recovery file_recovery_part1 file_recovery_part2 output_file

where file is the database savefile you were using.

Arguments
• -norecovery
If the recovery key file does not produce satisfactory results, the recovery mechanism can be
disabled by using the -norecovery command line option.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 401

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Outputting a JWDB as an ASCII File

Outputting a JWDB as an ASCII File

This section describes how you can output a JWDB to an ASCII file, either from the GUI or
using the jwdbtoasc batch utility.
Saving a JWDB as an ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Saving a JWDB as an ASCII File

You can save a JWDB as an ASCII file.
Procedure
1. In the Waveform List panel, right-click on the database name and select Save As. The
Save As Dialog Box displays
2. Enter the name for the database. If the file already exists, you must confirm the desire to
overwrite the database.
3. Select an ASCII file type from the Files of Type dropdown list (refer to “Save File
Types” on page 397). EZwave creates an ASCII file that contains all the signals.

402 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Save and Output Data
Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode)

Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode)

You can convert a JWDB savefile to ASCII in batch mode (that is, without having to open the
file using the EZwave viewer and save it as ASCII) by using the jwdbtoasc utility. All signals,
both analog and digital, can be converted using this tool. You can also specify a Tcl script to run
for post-processing before the converted waveforms are saved to the ASCII file.
Usage
The syntax for this tool is as follows:
jwdbtoasc {-i filename.wdb} [-o filename.txt [-do filename.tcl]]
[-precision value]

Arguments
• -i
Specifies the input JWDB file name.
• -o
Specifies the output ASCII file name. If the output file is not specified, the new file name is
the same as the input file name but with the .wdb extension changed to .txt.
• -do
Specifies the post-processing Tcl script name.
• -precision
Specifies the level of precision. value should be between 1 and 16, inclusively. This
argument also accepts full as the value, setting it to the full 16 digits.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 403

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Save and Output Data
Converting a JWDB to an ASCII File (Batch Mode)

404 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Chapter 8
Dialog Box and Field Reference

This section provides detailed descriptions of the EZwave windows and dialog boxes.
Add Clock Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Annotation Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Axis Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Comparison Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Comparison Methods Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tolerances Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Conversions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Create Bus Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Current Analysis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Data Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Digital to Analog Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Event Search Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Eye Mask Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
EZwave Display Preference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Automatic Reload Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Cursor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Data Format Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Foreign Databases Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Grid Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Look and Feel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Mouse Pointer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Multiple Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Pick Points Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
RF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 405

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference

Row Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Save Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Save Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Text Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Transformation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Waveform Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Waveform Compare Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Waveform List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Workspace Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
CDF Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
CDF Measures Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
CDF Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Axis Title Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Axis Values Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Calculator Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Cursor/Marker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Eye Mask Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Header Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Histogram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Measurement Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Row Title Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Waveform Colors Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Waveform Name Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Waveform Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Window Background Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Zero-Level Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Histogram Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Histogram Measures Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Histogram Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Waveform Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Waveform Calculator General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Waveform Calculator View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Filter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Find Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Jitter Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Measurement Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Parameter Analyzer Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Filters Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

406 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference

Parameter Table Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Pick Points Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Power Analysis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Save Windows Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Select Hierarchy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Select Waveforms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Update Waveforms Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Waveform Names Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital Waveforms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Waveform Calculator Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Auto Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Chirp Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Constellation Diagram Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Convolution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Cross Correlation Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Eye Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Histogram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Phase Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
PSS Residue Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Top Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Windowing Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 407

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Add Clock Dialog Box

Add Clock Dialog Box

To access: ChooseTools > Waveform Compare > Options and select the Comparison
Methods tab (see “Comparison Methods Tab” on page 420), then select Clocked
Comparison and click the Clocks button. Then click Add or Modify.
Use this dialog box to define a clock that can then be used for clocked-mode comparisons. The
clock can be based on an existing waveform, or on an ideal signal.
Objects
Table 8-1. Add Clock Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Clock Name Specifies an identifying name for the clock.
Delay Signal Offset Specifies a delay in the source signal for comparison. The default is 0
(no delay).
Based on
Ideal Clock Specifies an ideal signal based on either a frequency or a period/duty
cycle definition.
• Frequency—specify the frequency of the clock signal.
• Period—specify the period of the clock signal. Duty Cycle
specifies the percentage of time per period that the signal is active.
Waveform Specifies the waveform upon which to base the clock signal. The Add
Selected Waveform icon adds the currently selected waveform in
the active graph window or waveform list. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Compare Strobe Edge
Rising Specifies that the rising edge of the specified signal or waveform
should be used. Default.
Falling Specifies that the falling edge of the specified signal or waveform
should be used.
Both Specifies that both the rising and falling edges of the specified signal
or waveform should be used.

408 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box

Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on an analog waveform and select Analog to Digital Conversion.
Use this dialog box to convert analog waveforms to digital ones and specify options for the
conversion.
Figure 8-1. Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-2. Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Digitized Waveform(s)
Name The name of the input analog waveform
Plot Option Controls how to display the digital waveform:
• Stacked
Plots the resulting digital waveform in a new row, at the end of
the graph window.
• Overlaid
Plots the resulting digital waveform in the same graph as the
input waveform (in the same row).
Plot Result Waveform(s) Plots the resulting digital waveform using the plot option specified.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 409

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box

Table 8-2. Analog to Digital Conversion Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Transformation Setup
Single Threshold Specifies a threshold for defining the digitization of the input
waveform. Values that fall below this threshold are converted to 0,
while values above it are converted to 1. The default value is the
middle of the waveform:
(min(wave) + max(wave))/2
Two Thresholds Converts the input waveform to a 3 state waveform (0, X and 1),
defined using the High Threshold and Low Threshold fields.
Values that fall between these thresholds are converted to “X”.
High Threshold Values above high threshold are converted to 1. The default value is
80% of the input waveform amplitude:
min(wave) + 0.8*(max(wave) - min(wave))
Low Threshold Values below this threshold are converted to 0. The default value is
20% of the input waveform amplitude:
min(wave) + 0.2*(max(wave) - min(wave)).

Usage Notes
The default values for threshold in each case (80%, 50% and 20%) are not customizable.

410 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Annotation Properties Dialog Box

Annotation Properties Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a text annotation and select Properties.
Used to define custom display properties for individual text annotations. The controls on this
dialog box are organized on two tabs, Font and Color and Appearance.
Figure 8-2. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Font and Color Tab

Objects
Table 8-3. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Font and Color Tab Contents
Field Description
Font Specifies the font to use for the current text annotation.
Font Size Specifies the point size of the font to use for the current text
annotation.
Font Style Specifies the style of the font to use for the current text annotation,
from Plain, Bold, Italic and Bold/Italic.
Color Opens a Color Selection dialog box to choose the color to use for the
current text annotation. Click OK to accept the color and return to
the dialog box. This control is not available when the Monochrome
theme is active.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 411

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Annotation Properties Dialog Box

Table 8-3. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Font and Color Tab Contents
Field Description
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the current
selections.
Waveform Annotation Controls the default color of text annotations:
Color • Use Waveform Color
Uses the same color as the waveform. Available only for
annotations that are attached to waveforms.
• Use Custom Color
Text annotations will use the custom color defined on this dialog
box.
Default Restores the font and color of the current text annotation to the
default settings.
• The Annotation Properties - Appearance dialog box is shown below:
Figure 8-3. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Appearance Tab

412 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Annotation Properties Dialog Box

Table 8-4. Annotation Properties Dialog Box - Appearance Tab Contents

Field Description
Hide Anchor Symbol Hides the symbol at the anchor point between the annotation and
the waveform (if the annotation is attached to a waveform).
Anchor Symbol Selects the kind of symbol used at the anchor point of the text
annotation (if the annotation is attached to a waveform). Can be
either Crosshair or Dot.
Hide Anchor Line Hides the line attaching the annotation to the waveform (if the
annotation is attached to a waveform).
Hide Text Outline Hides the text box on the current annotation.
Show Vertical Line at Specifies that a vertical line is displayed across the waveform at
Anchor Position the selected position. Available only for annotations that are
attached to waveforms.
Default Restores the appearance of the current text annotation to the
default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 413

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Axis Properties Dialog Box

Axis Properties Dialog Box

To access: Right-click either the x or y-axis to display the Axis Popup Menu and select the
Properties menu item. Alternatively, you can select multiple plotted waveforms and right-
click to display the Waveform Popup Menu popup menu and select Y-Axis Properties to
display the Axis Properties dialog box. This is populated with the y-axis properties of the
first waveform in the selection. OK applies the y-axis properties to all selected waveforms.
Use this dialog box to specify the properties of the current axis.
Figure 8-4. Axis Properties Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-5. Axis Properties Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Axis Range
Auto Range Specifies that the axis show all of the data.
Min/Max Specifies the exact minimum and maximum values to be viewed on
the axis. Available when Auto Range is not checked.
Axis Title

414 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Axis Properties Dialog Box

Table 8-5. Axis Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Display Title Specifies that the title is shown on the axis.
Display Units Specifies that the units are displayed.
Text A custom text string that specifies the axis title.
Axis Units
Unit Type Specifies the available units for the axis. An example of use is a
waveform with data that repeats at a regular interval. For example, if
a waveform has data that repeats every 11 nanoseconds (11ns, 22ns,
33ns...), then setting the scaling value to “11.0” would result in axis
labels of 1, 2, 3.
Scaling Specifies the scale factor applied to the axis labels.
Default Sets both the Unit Type and Scaling values to the current settings
controlled through the Data Format Options.
Apply to All “Voltage” Specifies that these unit settings are applied to a voltage axes in the
Axes in Current current window.
Window
Axis Scale
Specifies how the axis is scaled from:
• Linear
• Log Base 10
• Log Base 2
Axis dB Scale
Specifies how the y-axis is scaled from:
• None
• dB - changes the y-axis to decibels (20log10 for amplitude
ratios).
• dB10 - changes the y-axis to decibels (10log10 for power ratios).
Display Grid Lines Specifies that grid lines are displayed.
Display Zero Level Specifies that the zero level line is displayed.
Line
Hide Axis Specifies that the axis is hidden. Available if the row has multiple y-
axes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 415

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Comparison Options Dialog Box

Comparison Options Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to specify options for the Waveform Compare Tool.
It contains the following tabs:

General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Comparison Methods Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tolerances Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Conversions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

416 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options Tab

General Options Tab

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options from the main menu. The General
Options tab is selected by default.
Use this tab to set global options for Waveform Comparison, including settings for the
maximum number of differences allowed before the comparison terminates, and settings that
determine which comparison results to display.
Figure 8-5. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab

Objects
Table 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Comparison Limit Count

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 417

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options Tab

Table 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Total Limit Specifies the maximum number of differences allowed before the
comparison terminates.
Per Signal Limit Specifies the maximum number of differences per signal allowed
before the comparison terminates.
Domain Selection
Use Start If you want to begin the comparison from a point other than the start
(time or frequency) of the selected waves, select this option and enter
a new value at which to begin, in the data unit specified in the Data
Format Options.
Use Stop If you want to end the comparison from a point other than the end
(time or frequency) of the selected waves, select this option and enter
a new value at which to finish, in the data unit specified in the Data
Format Options.
Delay Definition
Use Reference Delay If you want to specify a delay to shift all added waveforms from the
reference dataset, select this option and enter the delay time in the
field.
Use Test Delay If you want to specify a delay to shift all added waveforms from the
test dataset, select this option and enter the delay time into the field.
Plot Options
Automatically Add Adds the comparison results to the current wave window, including
Comparison to Wave both correct (waveforms with no differences) and erroneous
Window (waveforms with differences) waveforms.
Automatically Add Adds only comparison results that contain errors (waveforms with
Comparison With Errors differences) to the current wave window.
to Wave Window
Do Not Plot Results of This option does not add the comparison results to the current wave
Comparison window.
Sort Results
Sort By Click to enable the sort options described below.
First Difference This option finds the first time when any signal in one run begins to
differ from the corresponding signal in another run, and plots the
signals in sorted order starting from the highest difference.
Maximum Difference This option finds the first time when any signal in one run differs
most from the corresponding signal in another run, and plots the
signals in sorted order starting from the highest difference.
Plot Top Results This option specifies the number of top results to be plotted.

418 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options Tab

Table 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - General Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Annotate Result If checked, the sorting parameter value will be plotted as annotation
Waveforms With (or other marker, for example delta) over the plotted comparison
Sorting Parameter results (waveforms).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 419

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Comparison Methods Tab

Comparison Methods Tab

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options from the main menu to display the
Comparison Options dialog box, and click the Comparison Methods tab.
Used to specify how the Waveform Compare Tool compares digital waveforms.
Figure 8-6. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Comparison Methods Tab

Objects
Table 8-7. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Comparison Methods Tab
Contents
Field Description
Comparison Options
Continuous Comparison Specifies that test signals are compared to reference signals at each
transition of the reference. The default option.

420 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Comparison Methods Tab

Table 8-7. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Comparison Methods Tab

Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Sampled Comparison Offers the possibility to define either a frequency or a period to use
for the comparison session. A comparison between a reference and a
test waveform is made for each point sampled.
Clocked Comparison Specifies that a clock signal is defined to use as a trigger waveform
for the comparison. Either:
• Select waveform to use as the clock signal from the active graph
window and click the Add Selected Waveforms icon .
• Click the Clocks icon to access the Clocks dialog box, and from
there click Add to open the Add Clock Dialog Box and configure
a new clock signal.
Convert Analog To Forces a “digital” edge comparison where both, or one, source and
Digital reference signals are analog. An Analog to Digital conversion is
applied automatically during the comparison.
Tip: This is useful, for example, where the waveforms represent a
clock but have different amplitudes. You can compare the delay
between the waveforms.
Refer to additional settings for “Analog to Digital Conversion” on
page 253 and “Digital Comparison” on page 250.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 421

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Tolerances Tab

Tolerances Tab
To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options from the main menu to display the
Comparison Options dialog box, and click the Tolerances tab.
Used to specify tolerances for analog, digital, mixed-signal and spectral waveform comparison.
Figure 8-7. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Tolerances Tab

Objects
Table 8-8. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Tolerances Tab Contents
Field Description
Analog Comparison

422 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Tolerances Tab

Table 8-8. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Tolerances Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Use Automatic X Specifies that an automatic tolerance is used for the X tolerance.
Tolerance
Use Automatic Y Specifies that an automatic tolerances is used for the Y tolerance.
Tolerance
X Tolerance Specifies the X tolerance. Available if Use Automatic X Tolerance is
not selected.
Y Tolerance Specifies the Y tolerance. Available if Use Automatic Y Tolerance is
not selected.
Filter Differences Specifies the minimum delta X tolerance (usually time). Ignores
differences that are less than the specified value. Default = 0.
Digital Comparison
Leading Tolerance Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison of digital signals.
Default = 0.
Trailing Tolerance Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison of digital signals.
Default = 0.
Mixed Comparison
Leading Tolerance Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison of both digital and
analog signals. Default = 0.
Trailing Tolerance Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison of digital and analog
signals. Default = 0.
Spectral Comparison
Frequency Tolerance Specifies the frequency tolerance. Default = 0.
Amplitude Tolerance Specifies the amplitude tolerance. Default = 0.
Use Noise Floor Specifies that the noise floor level is considered in the comparison.
Noise Floor Specifies the noise floor level. If the Use Noise Floor option is
enabled, errors that occur below the specified noise floor amplitude
are ignored in the comparison.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 423

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Conversions Tab

Conversions Tab
To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Options from the main menu to display the
Comparison Options dialog box, and click the Conversions tab.
Used to specify options for analog and mixed-signal comparisons, including settings for signal
value matching rules.
Figure 8-8. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Conversions Tab

Objects
Table 8-9. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Conversions Tab Contents
Field Description
Digital Conversion

424 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Conversions Tab

Table 8-9. Comparison Options Dialog Box - Conversions Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
VHDL Matching Specifies the VHDL signal value matching rules. For more
information on these options, refer to the Mapping Data Types
section of the Questa SIM User’s Manual.
Verilog Matching Specifies the Verilog signal value matching rules. For more
information on these options, refer to the Mapping Data Types
section of the Questa SIM User’s Manual.
Note: The Ignore Strength checkbox is not currently
implemented, and has no effect.
Analog to Digital Conversion Options
Use Automatic Specifies that automatic thresholds are used. Available options are:
Thresholds • Single Threshold — Specifies a single threshold. The text
window specifies the desired threshold value if Use Automatic
Thresholds is not selected.
• Two Thresholds — Specifies a low and high threshold. The text
windows specify the desired threshold values if Use Automatic
Thresholds is not selected.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 425

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Create Bus Dialog Box

Create Bus Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Create Bus from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to create your own bus from selected digital waveforms (bits).
Figure 8-9. Create Bus Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-10. Create Bus Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Bus Options
Name The name of the bus. This field is populated with a proposed name,
deduced from the longest prefix common to all bits of the bus.

426 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Create Bus Dialog Box

Table 8-10. Create Bus Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Radix Specifies the radix as one of the following:
• One’s Complement
• Two's Complement
• Signed Magnitude
• Binary
• Hexadecimal
• Octal
• Unsigned Decimal
• Ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
Bits in Bus Lists all of the selected waveform names. The waveform selected first
is used as the most significant bit (MSB) of the bus, and the
waveform selected last is used as the least significant bit (LSB).
Transformation Setup
Auto-Update Threshold Specifies that the threshold calculation is automatically updated when
the bit order is modified. Selected by default.
Threshold If the bus is an analog or hybrid bus, the analog signals are
automatically transformed to digital. This option specifies the
thresholds to digitize the input waveform(s) as one of the following:
• Single Threshold
• Two Thresholds
Specifies the desired threshold values with each.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 427

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Current Analysis Dialog Box

Current Analysis Dialog Box

To access: Expand a set of current analysis results (named CURRENT_<analysis_type>) in the
Waveform List Panel, right-click on the folder at the required level of hierarchy and choose
Current Analysis. Alternatively, choose Tools > Current Analysis.
Used to analyze current consumption of a circuit and its components over time.
Tip
Refer to “Analyzing Current Consumption” on page 258.

Figure 8-10. Current Analysis Dialog Box - Detailed View Tab

428 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Current Analysis Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-11. Current Analysis Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Top Level Design Limits the results to those listed below the selected Top
Level Design.
Run Id For compound waveforms, specify the run.
Analysis Range
Entire X Axis Specifies the entire input waveform range to be analyzed.
X Start Specifies the start of the range for the input waveform to be
analyzed. Results outside of this range will not be listed.
X End Specifies the end of the range for the input waveform to be
analyzed. Results outside of this range will not be listed.
Between Cursors Specifies the range between two cursors to analyze the input
waveform. You can drag either cursor to dynamically
analyze results for different ranges.
At Cursor Specifies a single point to analyze the input waveform. You
can drag the cursor to dynamically analyze results at
different points.
History Stack
Name Displays the full hierarchical path to the port.
Avg Displays the default measure performed on the port on the
current time window.
Current Analysis
Thresholds on If checked, filters the Hierarchy column using current
Avg | RMS | Max | Min | Integ | thresholds on the value of the waveform in the range given
Sum | Peak to Peak by the Lower and/or Upper values.
Lower Specifies a minimum current value. Results below the
specified threshold will not be listed.
Upper Specifies a maximum current value. Results above the
specified threshold will not be listed.
Filter Specifies the text used to filter the Hierarchy column.
Click to clear the filter.
Click to apply the filter.
Analysing Choose the results to analyze (Detailed View tab only).
Saves the results as a .csv file.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 429

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Current Analysis Dialog Box

Table 8-11. Current Analysis Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Copies the results to the clipboard.

Collapses the hierarchy.

Expands the hierarchy.
Steps through previous or next connections.
Menu specifies which results to display:
Avg | RMS | Max | Min | Integ | Sum | Peak to Peak
Hierarchy Displays the Subckt, Port and Net hierarchy.
Avg Displays the average current for the port.
Min Displays the minimum current for the port.
Max Displays the maximum current for the port.
Integ Displays the integrated current for the port (continuous
integral calculation).
Sum Displays the total current for the port (discrete integral
calculation, summing only Y values of simulation
datapoints).
Rms Displays the RMS current for the port.
Peak to peak Displays the peak-to-peak current for the port.
abs (Σ current) (Subckt View tab only) Displays the absolute value of the
sum of the average values of the currents of the ports of the
subcircuit.
Σ abs (current) (Subckt View tab only) Displays the sum of the absolute
value of the currents of the ports of the subcircuit.
Table Legend
Subckt, Port, Net Indicates the symbol for the item and the connection color
legend.
Table Tabs
Detailed View Shows details of all results in the current analysis table.
Subckt View Shows results for subcircuits only in the current analysis
table.
Buttons
Analyze/Pause/Resume Starts, pauses, or resumes the analysis depending on the
current state of the dialog box.

430 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Current Analysis Dialog Box

Table 8-11. Current Analysis Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Clear Clears the results of the previous analysis.

Usage Notes
Provides an interactive display of results from current analyses, requested by the SPICE
command .CURRENT_ANALYSIS in Eldo. Refer to “.CURRENT_ANALYSIS” in the Eldo
Reference Manual.

A Tutorial—Using Current Analysis is in the Eldo User’s Manual. A video is available that
shows the tasks described in this tutorial.

Related Topics
Analyzing Current Consumption

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 431

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Data Values Dialog Box

Data Values Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a horizontal cursor, select Data Values then select the required
waveform.
Use this dialog box to view the crossing points, where the horizontal cursor intersects with the
waveform.
Figure 8-11. Data Values Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-12. Data Values Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Waveform The name of the currently selected waveform.
Measurement The index ID of the currently selected crossing point.
Measurement Levels Specifies whether to show or hide the Y value of the currently
selected crossing point.

432 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Data Values Dialog Box

Table 8-12. Data Values Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Measurement Results Lists all of the waveforms crossing points with the horizontal
cursor, with their index ID and X value. Specifies whether to
show or hide each crossing point.
Copy to Clipboard Puts the contents of the Measurement Results table on the
clipboard.
Save As Saves the contents of the Measurement Results table to a
specified text file (.csv or .txt).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 433

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Digital to Analog Dialog Box

Digital to Analog Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a digital waveform and select Digital to Analog.
Use this dialog box to convert digital waveforms to analog ones and specify options for the
conversion.
Figure 8-12. Digital to Analog Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-13. Digital to Analog Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Resulting Analog Waveform(s)
Name The name of the input digital waveform

434 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Digital to Analog Dialog Box

Table 8-13. Digital to Analog Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Plot Option Controls how to display the analog waveform:
• Stacked
Plots the resulting analog waveform in a new row, at the end
of the graph window.
• Overlaid
Plots the resulting analog waveform in the same graph as the
input waveform (in the same row).
Plot Result Waveform(s) Plots the resulting analog waveform using the plot option
specified.
Bit Transformation Setup
Digital Values Lists the editable digital values
Analog Values Specifies an analog value for each of the listed Digital Values.
Commutation Time Labels Rise Time: The time taken to reach value 1 from 0
Fall Time: The time taken to reach value 0 from 1
Commutation Time Values Specifies a value for Rise Time and Fall Time.
Default Resets the dialog box, changing all values back to the default
setting.

Usage Notes
In some cases, expressions are used to define the default value in the Analog Values field. For
example:

• If the default value is the expression <value_of_0>, then the analog value is the same
value as that specified for Forcing Zero: '0'.
• If the default value is the expression <'U' or previous value> then the analog value is
the value of U (Uninitialized) if it is the first event (the first point of the waveform; the
waveform starts with a 'Z' or a '-') otherwise it keeps the previous value.
You can only alter the value in the Analog Values field, if the value you enter is a double value
(with or without suffix) for example, 1, or 1M. If you try to use an expression value, for
example <value_of_0>, when that expression is not already the default setting for that field,
then it will not be accepted, and the default value for that field is used. Table 8-14 lists the
digital values and their default analog values.
Table 8-14. Bit Transformation Digital and Analog Default Values
Digital Value Text Value Default Analog Value
Forcing Zero 0 0.0
Forcing One 1 5.0

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 435

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Digital to Analog Dialog Box

Table 8-14. Bit Transformation Digital and Analog Default Values (cont.)
Digital Value Text Value Default Analog Value
Weak Zero L <value of ‘0’>
Weak One H <value of ‘1’>
Forcing Unknown X <(‘0’ + ‘1’)/2>
Weak Unknown W <(‘L’ + ‘H’)/2>
High Impedance Z <‘U’ or previous value>
Uninitialized U 0.0
Do not care - <‘U’ or previous value>

Note
The value for Forcing Zero: '0' must be less than the value for Forcing One: '1'.

436 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box

Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to display the EZwave Display
Preferences dialog box. Select Transformations from the list on the left to display the
Transformation Options. Click the New or Edit icon.
Use this dialog box to define a new transformation for an enumerated type, or edit an existing
one.
Figure 8-13. Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-15. Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Transformation Definition
Transformation Name Specifies a name for the transformation.
Source Type Specifies the type of the source. The options available in the
dropdown list depend on the enumerated types that exist in the
loaded database.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 437

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box

Table 8-15. Edit Digital Transformation Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Destination Type Specifies the type of the destination as one of the following:
• analogic
• bit
• Boolean
• standard logic
• Verilog logic
• VHDL characters
Bit Transformation Setup
Source Values All possible source values are specified in the Source Values
column.
Destination Values The corresponding cell for each of the Source Values specifies the
value of the destination as one of the options in the dropdown list.
select a destination value for each source value

Usage Notes
A Destination Value must be selected for each Source Value in the Bit Transformation
Setup table.

438 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Event Search Tool Dialog Box

Event Search Tool Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Search from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to locate occurrences of simulation events interactively.
Figure 8-14. Event Search Tool Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 439

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Event Search Tool Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-16. Event Search Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Event Specifies a name for the event
Basic Event Setup
Select a Waveform Specifies the source waveform. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform
List icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Specifies the type of event from:
• Any Event — Moves from one event to the previous or next.
• Rising Edge — Moves from one rising edge to the previous or
next rising edge. Click the Rising Edge icon to open the Search
Event Settings dialog box.
• Falling Edge — Moves from one falling edge to the previous or
next rising edge. Click the Rising Edge icon to open the Search
Event Settings dialog box.
• Waveform Value— Moves from one event to the previous or
next.
Y= +/- Specify a tolerance when searching for data points generated by an
analog simulator Only available when Waveform Value is selected.
Expression Setup
Logic Expression Specifies an Expression Event search. The expression can be entered
by using either the Waveform Calculator button or the Add selected
Waveform icon . Refer to “Performing an Expression Event
Search” on page 193.
Σεαρχη
Move the cursor along the specified waveform by clicking the arrow
buttons.
The Previous Marker and Next Marker buttons jump to
previous and next markers respectively.
Markers
Jump to a marker Specifies a marker to jump to.
The Add a Marker icon specifies an event to mark.

440 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box

Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to create an eye diagram based on a period of waveform data using the Eye
Diagram Tool.
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Eye Mask Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 441

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

To access: Choose Tools > Eye Diagram from the main menu and click the Settings tab.
Use the Settings tab to create an eye diagram based on a period of waveform data using the Eye
Diagram Tool.
Figure 8-15. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for C-Phy Eye Type

442 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Figure 8-16. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for NRZ Eye Type

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 443

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Figure 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab for PAM3 and PAM4
Eye Types

Objects
Table 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab Contents
Field Description
Eye Source
Eye Type Specifies the eye type, either C-Phy, NRZ, PAM3 or PAM4. The
fields on the dialog box change depending on the setting.
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveform for NRZ, PAM3 and PAM4. For
C-Phy you must specify exactly 3 source waveforms in order (first
waveform is C(A,B).
The Add Selected Waveform icon adds the currently selected
waveform. The Clear Waveform List icon removes all
waveforms in the list.

444 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Table 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Parameters Setup
Eye Period Specifies the eye period. The eye diagram is generated by overlaying
a semi-periodical waveform signal on an interval in X (usually a time
interval). The interval is defined as the eye period. A default Eye
Period is calculated based on the source waveform period divided by
2.
Offset Specifies the offset value. Allows shifting of the eye as the open part
of the eye is not always at the center of the axes.
Period Tolerance For C-Phy eye type only. Specifies the tolerance on the period used to
detect transition.
Minimum X and Specifies the range of waveform data used for generating the eye
Maximum X diagram.
Calculate Calculates the Offset, Minimum X, and Maximum X using the Eye
Period value and automatically populates the fields.
Display Measurements
Apply Measurements Specifies that the measurements are automatically updated as you
modify the values in this dialog box. This updates the appropriate
values in the eye diagram as well as all the values in the Eye Diagram
Tool - Measurement Results Tab. Checked by default, the
measurements are computed when the eye diagram is created.
Apply and Height at X Specifies an inner or outer height to display at a specific X. Use the
drop down box to determine inner or outer and specify the desired X.
Unchecked by default.
Apply and Width at Y Specifies an inner or outer width to display at a specific Y. Use the
drop down box to determine inner or outer and specify the desired Y.
Unchecked by default.
Apply Measurement at For PAM3, PAM4 and C-Phy signals only. Specify the X value
X where the measurements are to be made.
Apply Measurement at For C-Phy signals only. Specify the Y value where the measurements
Y are to be made.
Reference Amplitude For PAM3 and PAM4 signals only. When set to “Automatic”,
Ratio toplines and baselines begin at 10% and increase in steps of 5% until
all points are either below the baseline and above the topline (the
Measured Edge Percentage reaches 100%). Valid values are
“Automatic”, a double value between 0.0 and 1.0, or a number
followed by % (e.g. “20%”). Default value is “Automatic” (at least
10%, increasing by 5%).
Display Mask

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 445

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Table 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Specifications Specifies an industry standard mask is to be applied.
When Display Mask is checked, specifies a mask from:
• USB2.0-High_Speed_TX
• USB2.0-High_Speed_RX
• PCIE_TX_transition
• PCIE_TX_de-emphasis
• PCIE_RX
• SAS_3Gb_RX
• SAS_1.5Gb_RX
• FC-100DF/SE_RX_beta
• FC-100DF/SE_RX_delta
• FC-100DF/SE_RX_gamma
• FC-100DF/SE_TX_beta
• FC-100DF/SE_TX_delta
• FC-100DF/SE_TX_gamma
• FC-200DF/SE_RX_delta
• FC-200DF/SE_RX_gamma
• FC-200DF/SE_TX_delta
• FC-200DF/SE_TX_gamma
• SATA1_RX
• SATA1_TX
• XAUI-Xilinx-rcvr
• Diamond Shape
• Key Shape
• T Shape
• Trapezoid Shape
• DDR2
• QDRII
The Eye Mask icon opens the Eye Mask Dialog Box.
Margin Specifies scaling of the eye mask. The X margin is the horizontal
margin and the Y margin is the vertical margin. The values entered
representing a percentage of the total displayed range.
The Automatic Fit options specify that the mask is to be fitted to the
horizontal (X) and/or vertical (Y) inner contours of the eye diagram.
When selected, a homothecy is applied in the X and/or Y direction
until one side of the inner contour is reached.

446 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab

Table 8-17. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Settings Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Offset Specifies the offset value. Allows shifting of the eye mask. The X
offset is the horizontal offset.

Usage Notes
Refer to “Working with Eye Diagrams” on page 195.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 447

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

To access: Choose Tools > Eye Diagram from the main menu and click the Measurement
Results tab.
The Measurement Results tab displays the Eye Diagram values calculated from the current
setup in the Settings tab.
Objects
• For details of each measurement see:
“Eye Diagram Measurement Calculations” on page 203.
Figure 8-18. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for NRZ

448 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

Refer to “NRZ (PAM2) Cross Eye Calculation” on page 203.

Figure 8-19. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for PAM3

Refer to “PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations” on page 205.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 449

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

Figure 8-20. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for PAM4

Refer to “PAM3 and PAM4 Eye Calculations” on page 205.

450 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

Figure 8-21. Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results Tab for C-
Phy

Refer to “C-Phy Eye Calculation” on page 210.

Usage Notes
Refer to “Working with Eye Diagrams” on page 195.

For the PAM3 and PAM4 results, the first row (at “X”) result is the measurement setup value,
entered by user in Measurements Setup section of the Eye Diagram Tool - Settings Tab.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 451

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Tool - Measurement Results Tab

For the levels, risetimes and falltimes:

• The Result column is the mean of all individual results

• The Min column is the lower bound
• The Max column is the upper bound
• The Count column is the number of individual results
• The Std. Dev. column is the standard deviation.
The height of eye 2/3 equals Min("level 3") – Max("level 2").

452 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Mask Dialog Box

Eye Mask Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Eye Mask from the main menu, then click the Eye Mask icon
in the Eye Diagram Tool Dialog Box.
Use this dialog box to view and edit built-in and user defined eye masks.
Figure 8-22. Eye Mask Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-18. Eye Mask Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Mask Library Specifies the source eye mask. Select a built in eye mask from the drop
down list or alternatively use the Open Folder icon to load a user
defined eye mask from disk.
The Edit New Mask icon enables editing of the mask. Once editing
is enabled, the grayed out Save and Delete buttons will become
available.
Edit
When activated indicates that the mask is in “edit” mode and the
handles are available for dragging the mask to form a new shape.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 453

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Mask Dialog Box

Table 8-18. Eye Mask Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
When activated, handles can be added or removed from the mask, and
the mask shape is modified accordingly.
X Symmetric Specifies that the X symmetric handle should be moved accordingly
when a handle is dragged within the mask. This option is only possible
in masks with X symmetry.
Y Symmetric Specifies that the Y symmetric handle should be moved accordingly
when a handle is dragged within the mask. This option is only available
in masks with Y symmetry.

454 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box

Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Extract from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to perform an extract on a previously simulated database.
Figure 8-23. Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-19. Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Source Database Specify the database upon which to run the .extract command. Either
type the path into the field or click the folder icon to browse to the
database file. The down-arrow button offers a list of recent and open
database files. Upon selecting a database, if a netlist or .aex file are
found in that directory with the same name as the database file, they
are selected in the following fields.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 455

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box

Table 8-19. Extract Outputs From Database Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Select Netlist By default, this displays the path to a netlist with the same name as
the database file selected above, but you can specify a different netlist
to use. Either type the path into the field, or click the folder icon to
browse to the netlist.
AEX Output File By default, this is set to an .aex file with the same name as the
database file selected above, but you can specify a different .aex file
if required.
Note: Extracted scalar values are only written to the file if the
AEX option is specified for the .extract command.
Extract Waveforms With this option enabled, waveforms are generated for the extracted
values, and stored in the database file you specify in the Output Wdb
File field.
Eldo Extra Arguments Enter any arguments you want to pass to Eldo.
Transcript This pane displays the output transcript from the simulation. The
Undock option enables you to separate the transcript pane from the
dialog box. Select Undock option to split the panes; clear the option
on the Transcript dialog box to re-dock.
Run Click to start the simulation.

456 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
EZwave Display Preference Options

EZwave Display Preference Options

Describes the EZwave Display Preferences dialog box and the different options.
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Automatic Reload Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Cursor Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Data Format Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Foreign Databases Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Grid Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Layout Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Look and Feel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Mouse Pointer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Multiple Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Pick Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
RF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Row Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Save Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Save Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Text Annotation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Transformation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Waveform Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Waveform Compare Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Waveform List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Workspace Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
CDF Plot Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
CDF Measures Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
CDF Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Axis Title Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Axis Values Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Calculator Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Cursor/Marker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Eye Mask Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 457

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
EZwave Display Preference Options

Header Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Histogram Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Measurement Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Row Title Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Waveform Colors Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Waveform Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Waveform Name Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Waveform Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Window Background Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Zero-Level Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Histogram Plot Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Histogram Measures Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Histogram Legend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Waveform Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Waveform Calculator General Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Waveform Calculator View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

458 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box

EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box

To access, choose Edit > Options from the main menu.
You can use this dialog box to set preferences for EZwave display behavior.
Objects
• EZwave Preferences are grouped into the following categories: EZwave Preferences, CDF
Preferences, Fonts and Colors, Histogram Preferences and Waveform Calculator
Preferences. Access the required options by selecting from the list on the left of the dialog
box.
Figure 8-24. EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box

Table 8-20. EZwave Preferences

Automatic Reload Options Cursor Options
Data Format Options Foreign Databases Options
General Options Grid Options
Layout Options Look and Feel Options

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 459

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box

Table 8-20. EZwave Preferences (cont.)

Mouse Pointer Options Multiple Run Options
Pick Points Options RF Options
Row Options Save Data Options
Save Window Options Text Annotation Options
Transformation Options Waveform Options
Waveform Compare Options Waveform List Options
Workspace Options
Table 8-21. CDF Preferences
CDF Plot Options CDF Measures Options
CDF Legend Options
Table 8-22. Fonts and Colors
Axis Title Options Axis Values Options
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options Calculator Entry Options
Cursor/Marker Options Eye Mask Options
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors) Header Text Options
Histogram Options Measurement Annotation Options
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors) Row Title Options
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors) Waveform Colors Options
Waveform Display Options Waveform Name Options
Waveform Selection Options Window Background Options
Zero-Level Line Options
Table 8-23. Histogram Preferences
Histogram Plot Options Histogram Measures Options
Histogram Legend Options
Table 8-24. Waveform Calculator Preferences
Waveform Calculation Options Waveform Calculator General Options
Waveform Calculator View Options

460 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Automatic Reload Options

Automatic Reload Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Automatic Reload from the EZwave Preferences list
on the left.
Used to specify whether previous results are kept when a new simulation is run.
Objects
Table 8-25. EZwave Display Preferences - Automatic Reload Options
Field Description
Replace Previous Specifies that previous results are overwritten when a new
Results simulation is run.
Warn User Before Specifies that a warning is displayed before each reload.
Reloading
Only Reload Modified Specifies that only databases that have changed are reloaded. Applies
Database only to JWDB format databases.
Keep Parameter Table Specifies that the Show and Highlight filter settings for compound
Show/Highlight waveforms on the Parameter Table Dialog Box are maintained after a
Filters File > Reload action (from the same database).
Keep Previous Result The number of previous results specified in the Keep field are kept.
The oldest results are automatically deleted when the N limit is
reached.
Ask Me EZwave will ask whether you want to keep or delete the previous
results when the N limit is reached.
Display New Result Specifies that the new result is displayed automatically, overlaid with
Automatically the previous one. Leave unchecked to automatically load the new
results without displaying them.
Only Close Old Result Prevents automatic deletion of oldest results when the N limit is
(do not delete file) reached. If this is not checked, when the limit is reached the oldest
results are removed from disk and the related data removed from the
EZwave display.
Keep All Waveforms Preserves the display of all previously displayed waveforms. This
option is useful if some previously displayed waveforms are not
created immediately at the start of a simulation (when several
analyses are run successively) or temporarily disappear from the
database (due to a netlist modification). With the Keep All
Waveforms option checked, their names will remain displayed, and
the plotted waveforms will temporarily disappear until they appear
again in the database.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 461

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Automatic Reload Options

Usage Notes
The database will be renamed from file.wdb to file_sim1.wdb, file_sim2.wdb, and so on, with the
current simulation always retaining its name. With each simulation the _sim# is increased by
one.

Caution
This functionality only occurs if EZwave is displaying a simulation result when a simulation
is rerun. If this is not the case, previous results are automatically overwritten.

462 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cursor Options

Cursor Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Cursors from the EZwave Preferences list on the left.
Used to specify cursor display properties.
Objects
Table 8-26. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor Optionss
Field Description
Cursor Tab:
Cursor Precision
Number of Digits of Specifies the degree of precision in value flags attached to cursors.
Precision Select from 1 to 9 digits of precision.
Auto-Adjust Values for Specifies whether cursor values are automatically adjusted to show
Cursors the most significant numbers, regardless of axis scale. For example,
0.000005183 is displayed as 5.183e-6.
Cursor Y Units
Show Y Units of Cursor Specifies whether units are displayed with the values listed in the
Value cursor flag.
Show Parameters Specifies whether parameters and their values are listed in the cursor
flag.
Cursor Data Values
Show/Hide Dynamically Specifies whether, when a waveform is selected, to show and hide
Cursor Values Based on cursor values for that waveform. Whether it is shown or hidden is
Waveform Selection specified by right-clicking on the cursor and choosing Data Values
> Show Selected Mode, or Data Values > Hide Selected Mode.
Append/Remove Specifies whether, when a waveform is selected, to add and remove
Dynamically Cursor that waveform from the set of cursor values shown at a particular
Values Based on cursor. Whether it is added or removed is specified by right-clicking
Waveform Selection on the cursor and choosing Data Values > Append Selected Mode,
or Data Values > Remove Selected Mode.
Show Only Cursor Specifies whether to show only the values of selected waveforms
Values Of Selected when a new cursor is added. The values for other waveforms are
Waveforms While hidden.
Creating Cursor
Cursor X/Y Level Lines
X/Y Level Lines Specifies whether X and Y level lines are displayed.
Displayed by Default
Cursor Area

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 463

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cursor Options

Table 8-26. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor Optionss (cont.)

Field Description
Use Cursor Area Specifies whether cursor data is displayed near the waveform names
area rather than in cursor data flags.
Cursor Delta X/Y
Cursor Based Specifies that the Y deltas are calculated from the Y-level lines of a
single cursor. Each Y-level’s delta Y value is calculated from the
base Y-level line.
Waveform Based Specifies that the Y deltas are calculated based on the same
waveform between the Y-level lines of two or more cursors. Each
cursor’s delta Y value is calculated from the base cursor.
Cursor Legend
Draw on Top of X Axis Displays the X value base cursor below the x-axis, instead of on top
of it.
Horizontal Cursor in Y Axis
Show in Only One Y Specifies that horizontal cursors are added only to the currently
Axis (Where Cursor Had selected waveform row.
Been Defined)
Show in All Compatible Specifies that horizontal cursors are added to every row using the
Y-Axes (Y-Axes Have same unit, in the current display.
Same Unit)
Data Value Tab:
Behavior of Data Values With Custom Location As The Cursor Moves
Lock Data Value X When cursor is moved, the X location of the flag remains constant.
Location This option is not selected by default.
Lock Data Value Y When cursor is moved, the Y location of the flag remains constant.
Location This option is selected by default.

464 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Data Format Options

Data Format Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Data Format from the EZwave Preferences list on the
left.
Used to specify global scaling, notation and formatting for the waveform display.
Objects
Table 8-27. EZwave Display Preferences - Data Format Options
Field Description
Axis Data Units
Data Type List of all known waveform data types.
Scaling Specifies how many units should be used for the axis labels. For
example, if the waveform data has a periodic interval of 33, then the x-
axis tick labels might be 33, 66, 99. To have the labels display the
number of periods, you would specify the scaling value to be 33. Then
the tick labels would be 1, 2, 3.
Units Specifies the units to be used for each data type.
Y Axis Options
Specifies how y-axis units are plotted when waveforms with different y-
axis units are plotted in the same Graph row. Available options are:
• Overlay All Y Axis Units — Specifies that certain sets of units are
displayed on the same y-axis. Select if you want all graph rows to
have a single y-axis, regardless of the units.
• Overlay Only the Following Y Axis Units — Specifies groupings
of compatible units.
Define Compatible The New button enables you to create a new grouping of compatible
Units units. The box in the Apply It column specifies whether a compatible
unit grouping is on or off. The Edit and Delete buttons enable you to
modify existing groupings of compatible units.
Notation
IEEE Suffix Specifies that suffixes defined by IEEE are used to format numerical
values in the graph window.
SPICE Suffix Specifies that suffixes defined by the SPICE simulation syntax are used
to format numerical values in the graph window.
Engineering Specifies that values in the graph window are displayed in exponential
Notation format; uses an exponent which is a multiple of three.
None Specifies that no special formatting will be used for numerical values in
the graph window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 465

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Data Format Options

Table 8-27. EZwave Display Preferences - Data Format Options (cont.)

Field Description
Bus Format
Default Bus Radix Specifies the default radix for displaying bus values:
• One’s Complement
• Two's Complement
• Signed Magnitude
• Binary
• Hexadecimal
• Octal
• Unsigned Decimal
• Ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
Bus Index Delimiters Specifies the characters that EZwave will interpret as delimiters of a bit
index when a bus is created using Tools > Create Bus, or Plot As Bus.
By default, this field will contain (, [, <, {, _, and -.
Use Separator Specifies the character to separate values in the bus. The default value is
Character ‘,’ (comma). When disabled, values are displayed separately, similar to
the way they are displayed in the Questa SIM Viewer.
Double Format
Double Format Specifies the level of precision displayed. You can select from 1 to 9
Precision digits of precision, or full precision.

466 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Foreign Databases Options

Foreign Databases Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Foreign Databases from the EZwave Display
Preferences list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify loading and display options for foreign databases.
Objects

Field Description
Foreign Databases
Load Scalars Specifies that Scalars (parameters or measurements) are
loaded.
Display Measures in Specifies that Measures are displayed in the Waveform List.
Waveform List
PSF Info Files
Load Info Files Specifies that PSF .info files are loaded from output
directories.
Note: Loading .info files may require considerable time
and memory.
Note: The designParamVal.info file is always loaded in
EZwave.
Identify Info Files: When Load Info Files is checked:
-By File Extension - all PSF files ending in .info are loaded in EZwave
-By analysisType Field in File or
- all PSF files with analysisType field set to info are loaded in
EZwave.
Detect DC Hysteresis Enables or disables the DC Hysteresis detection. When
Waveforms disabled, data points are sorted.
Nutmeg Files
Standardize X-Axis Specifies how the x-axis is handled.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 467

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options

General Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose General from the EZwave Display Preferences list on
the left.
Used to set options related to opening files, updating waveforms, and exiting the EZwave
viewer.
Objects
Table 8-28. EZwave Display Preferences - General Options
Field Description
General Options
Overlay by ordinate data With this option selected, waveforms are overlaid using a
type separate row for each different y-axis data type. With this option
unchecked, all waveforms are plotted overlaid in a single row
with multiple y-axes as required. Refer to Overlay Window
Waveforms in the Row Popup Menu and Axis Popup Menu.
Show Grid Lines in Newly Specifies whether graph windows display grid lines by default
Opened Windows when opened.
Show Zero-Level Lines in Specifies whether zero-level lines are turned on by default when
Newly Opened Windows new graph windows are opened.
Show List of Recent The Clear List button clears the MRU information from
Databases in File Menu memory. When turned off, the MRU information is kept in
memory, but not displayed.
Activate Undo/Redo Specifies whether the Undo and Redo functions from the Edit
menu are available.
Use AMS Results Browser to With this option selected, scalar results of extracts are displayed
open AEX Files in the AMS Results Browser (see the AMS Results Browser
User’s Manual for information). With this option not selected, or
for users on Windows, the scalar results are shown in EZwave.
Use Automatic Waveform With this option unchecked, selected waveforms are not
Selection for Measurement automatically added to the Source Waveform(s) list on the
Tool Measurement Tool dialog box.
Use Source Waveform With this option selected, the source waveform color, point style,
Properties for Measurement line width, and style are used to plot the result waveforms.
Tool New Waveforms
Allow Filename Editing in With this option unchecked, filenames cannot be edited in the
File Browser File Browser.

468 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options

Table 8-28. EZwave Display Preferences - General Options (cont.)

Field Description
View All Activates Auto- When using View All (accessed via View > View All or the
Range Row popup menu), the ranges of the axes are automatically set
with this option selected. With this option unchecked, View All
uses the specified Axis Range settings where Auto Range has
been unchecked on the Y-Axis Properties or X-Axis Properties
dialog boxes.
Require Confirmation Before
Exiting Specifies whether a confirmation dialog box is shown when
exiting EZwave. Turning off this option will not prevent loss of
data, because if there are unsaved waveform databases a separate
confirmation dialog box displays.
Closing in-use Database Specifies whether a confirmation dialog box is shown when
attempting to close a database that is currently in use.
Closing Modified Database Specifies whether a confirmation dialog box is shown when
attempting to close a database that has been modified.
Closing Eye Mask Dialog Specifies whether a confirmation dialog box is shown when
attempting to close the Eye Mask Dialog Box.
Deleting All Cursors/ Specifies whether a confirmation dialog box is shown when
Markers selecting Delete All Annotations from the Annotations popup
menu.
Marching Waveforms
Automatically Update Specifies whether waveforms are automatically updated from a
Displayed Waveforms Every running simulation at the time interval specified. The frequency
N Interval of the interval will impact the simulators performance. The
minimum recommendation is one minute.
Automatically Update Specifies whether waveforms are automatically updated from a
displayed Windows Every N running simulation at the percent completed of the simulation.
% of Simulation
Open Window
Break on Error Specifies that the behavior in case an error is found when
loading an swd file. The swd file is displayed if an error is found,
and the line containing the error is highlighted. You can then
choose to:
• Skip All Errors
• Skip Error
• Abort

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 469

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
General Options

Table 8-28. EZwave Display Preferences - General Options (cont.)

Field Description
Ignore All Errors Specifies that the behavior in case an error is found when
loading an swd file. The file loads completely, regardless of
errors. This can cause unexpected behavior in the waveforms.
Graphical Memory Management
Graphical Memory Specifies the maximum amount of memory (in megabytes) that
Threshold is set aside for the graphics engine. If this limit is reached, a
warning dialog box will ask whether you want to allocate more
memory.

470 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Grid Options

Grid Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Grid from the EZwave Display Preferences list on the
left.
Used to set the appearance and behavior of the grid in graph windows, overriding the automatic
settings. The Default button returns the Grid Spacing option to Automatic, and returns all
manually entered values to their default values.
Note
These options only apply for linear axis scales; they have no effect on logarithmic axes.

Objects
Table 8-29. EZwave Display Preferences - Grid Options
Field Description
Grid Spacing
Automatic Graph windows use the default system grid behaviors.
User Defined Graph windows use he settings entered on this dialog box.
Grid Units
Pixels Enabled by default. The grid is drawn based on the following two
values, measured in pixels from the graph origin:
• Grid Offset—defines the distance from the origin to the first grid
line. Must be a positive value.
• Grid Period—defines the distance between adjacent grid lines.
Must be a positive value.
Pixels Predefined Axis The grid is drawn based on values specified for the unit type the axis
Data Units represents. The grid offers each data type configured in the Axis
Data Units grid of the Data Format Options, and for each type, you
can specify the following values:
• Grid Offset—defines the distance from the origin to the first grid
line. Must be a positive value.
• Grid Period—defines the distance between adjacent grid lines.
Must be a positive value.
Axes Minimum Grid Spacing
X Axis Specifies the minimum distance between adjacent grid lines for the
x-axis. Default is 25. Must be a positive value.
Y Axis Specifies the minimum distance between adjacent grid lines for the
y-axis. Default is 25. Must be a positive value.
Grid Anchor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 471

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Grid Options

Table 8-29. EZwave Display Preferences - Grid Options (cont.)

Field Description
Minimum Absolute When enabled, the grid and all of its parameters (such as Grid
Axis Value Offset) are calculated and plotted starting from the minimum
possible (absolute) x and/or y-axis values. For example, the absolute
range for the x-axis is from 0.0M to 100.0M; when the wave window
is zoomed, the current (visible) range of the axis changes, but the
grid is still calculated using the absolute range (its minimum value,
which is 0.0M).
Minimum Visible Axis When enabled, the grid and all of its parameters (such as Grid
Value Offset) are calculated and plotted starting from the currently visible
minimum x and/or y-axis values.

472 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Layout Options

Layout Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Layout from the EZwave Display Preferences list on
the left.
Use this dialog box to specify layout options for the graph window.
Objects
Table 8-30. EZwave Display Preferences - Layout Options
Field Description
X-Axis
Above Waveforms Specifies that the x-axis is displayed above the waveforms.
Below Waveforms Specifies that the x-axis is displayed below the waveforms. Default.
Waveform Names
Left of Waveforms Specifies that waveform name labels are displayed on the left of the
waveform.
Right of Waveforms Specifies that waveform name labels are displayed on the right of the
waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 473

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Look and Feel Options

Look and Feel Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Look & Feel from the EZwave Display Preferences
list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify the look and feel of the EZwave main display and its dialog
boxes.
Objects
Table 8-31. EZwave Display Preferences - Look and Feel Options
Field Description
Light Specifies the “light” theme.
Gray Specifies the “gray” theme (default).
Dark Specifies the “dark” theme.
Classic Specifies the “classic” theme (as used in images in this manual).

Usage Notes
After changing the look and feel, you need to restart EZwave to apply the new theme.

474 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Mouse Pointer Options

Mouse Pointer Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Mouse Pointer from the EZwave Display Preferences
list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify options for your mouse pointer and mouse strokes.
Objects
Table 8-32. EZwave Display Preferences - Mouse Pointer Options
Field Description
Mouse Pointer Options
Show Tooltips Specifies whether popup tooltip windows are used.
Change Color of Objects Specifies whether graph window objects, such as axes or
When Under Pointer waveform names, change color when the mouse pointer is over
them.
Mouse Strokes
About Mouse Strokes Gives a quick overview on mouse strokes without having to refer
to the Help system.
Color to Use When Specifies the color that will appear when drawing mouse strokes.
Drawing Mouse Strokes The Select button enables a different color to be chosen.
Choose the Key Modifier For systems that do not have a middle mouse button, specifies one
to Use with the Left or more keyboard modifiers to use with the left button instead.
Mouse Button ... Available options are:
• Alt
• Control
• Shift
Require Confirmation Specifies that a confirmation dialog box is shown when the close
Before Executing a Close stroke is executed.
Stroke
Mouse Drag Options
Highlight Drop Target Highlights the target drop area for a waveform as you drag it
Areas around.
Highlight Color Specifies the color of the highlight area rectangle that appears
when dragging a waveform. The Select button enables a different
color to be chosen.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 475

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Run Options

Multiple Run Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Multiple Run from the EZwave Display Preferences
list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify display, name and color options relating to compound
waveforms.
Objects
Table 8-33. EZwave Display Preferences - Multiple Run Options
Field Description
Compound Waveform Display
Display as Compound Specifies that waveforms are plotted as compound waveforms.
Expand Single Element Only available when Display as Compound is selected. Specifies
Names that the name for each individual element (run) may be displayed in
the name area.
Display as Single Specifies that compound waveforms are “unwrapped” into their
Elements individual elements (sub-waveforms, each made by a single run)
and then plotted showing each individual element overlaid with its
own color. The individual element names are also shown in the
name area.
Show Single Element Specifies that run parameter names and values are displayed in the
Names With Run graph windows and also in the Waveform List panel (Tree view).
Parameters
Color-Code Each Single Specifies that a single color is used for all waveforms from the
Element same simulation run. When not selected:
• For Display as Compound, the same color is used for all single
element runs of a compound waveform
• For Display as Single Elements, an individual color (not related
to the simulation run) is used for each element.
Eye Diagram
Plot • Overlaid - (Default) Specifies that eye diagrams for each
element in the compound waveform are overlaid on the same
graph.
• Stacked - Specifies that separate eye diagram graphs for each
element in the compound waveform are displayed stacked.

476 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Run Options

Table 8-33. EZwave Display Preferences - Multiple Run Options (cont.)

Field Description
Eye Parameters • Calculate From First Single Element - (Default) Specifies that
settings are calculated for the first element in the compound
waveform and applied for all eye diagrams for other elements.
• Calculate For Each Single Element - Specifies that individual
default settings are calculated and applied for each element in
the compound waveform.

Usage Notes
When a multiple run is displayed as a compound waveform, any measurements made, for
example using the Waveform Calculator, are done using the entire set of runs that make up the
compound waveform.

When a multiple run is displayed as single elements, be aware of the following:

• If a measurement is taken on a run, this measurement will not be taken automatically for
subsequent simulated runs.
• If a user display is set for a run, it is not applied to subsequent simulated runs.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 477

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Options

Pick Points Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Pick Points from the EZwave Display Preferences list
on the left.
Use this dialog to control settings related to pick points.
Objects
Table 8-34. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options
Field Description
Maximum Number of The maximum number of simultaneously visible pick points
Visible Pick Points per plotted waveform in the graph window. Default is 2.
Pick Point Symbol Specifies the graphic symbol to use when adding pick point
markers to waveforms. Can be:

• Cross (default)

• Rounded Cross

• Dot
Follow Waveform(s) When enabled, the mouse pointer is attached to the waveform
nearest to it, and can only be moved around in the graph
window in the selected mode: Snap to Data Points or
Interpolate.
When not enabled, the mouse pointer can be moved freely
within the row. Pick points will be placed at the closest point
(real or interpolated) on the waveform(s) in the row, starting
with the waveform nearest to the position of the mouse-click.
Snap to Data Points The pick pointer is attached to the current closest waveform in
the waveform row. It can be moved only to the position on the
waveform, where a data point is present. Pick points are placed
on the waveform(s) at the data point closest to the mouse-click
position. This is the default setting.
If multiple waveforms are present in the same row, one pick
point will be placed on each waveform in the row at the closest
to the mouse-click position data point, starting from the nearest
waveform to the mouse-click position.

478 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Options

Table 8-34. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options (cont.)

Field Description
Interpolate The pick pointer is attached to the current closest waveform in
the waveform row. It can be moved anywhere on the waveform.
Pick points are placed on the waveform(s) at the interpolated
point closest to the mouse-click position (minimal distance on x
and y axes).
If multiple waveforms are present in the same row, one pick
point will be placed on each waveform in the row at the closest
interpolated point to the mouse-click position, starting from the
nearest to the mouse-click position on the waveform. This
setting is not used when waveforms use scattered or spectral
drawing modes. In this case, Snap to Data Points mode is used.
Use Mouse Pointer Axis Specifies how the mouse pointer is displayed in Pick Points
mode and how pick points are added in the graph window:
• X&Y (default)
Both x and y bars and corresponding coordinates of the
mouse position are used to calculate the closest data point
and to add the pick point(s). Pick points will be added only
on the waveforms plotted in the row which is currently
under the mouse pointer position.
• X
Only the vertical bar (X coordinate) of the mouse pointer is
used to calculate the closest data point and to add the pick
point(s). If this mode is selected, one pick point will be
added at the same X coordinate of each waveform in the
active graph window (not just the row under the mouse
pointer).
If X&Y axes are selected for digital waveforms, the horizontal
bar of the mouse pointer will be displayed and moved
according to the digital waveform events (high, middle, low)
but only the W coordinate will participate in the closest data
point calculation.
If Displayed as Compound Controls how pick point markers are added to compound
waveforms:
• Add Pick Point to The Closest Element
Adds one pick point to the nearest data point on the
compound element closest to the mouse-click position.
• Add Pick Point to All Elements
Adds one pick point to the nearest data point of each
compound element starting from the one closest to the
mouse-click position.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 479

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Options

Table 8-34. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options (cont.)

Field Description
Pick Points Dialog Data Specifies the global data precision to use in the Pick Points
Precision dialog box:
• Use Cursor Number of Digits of Precision (the default)
Uses the precision value set in the Number of Digits of
Precision field, under Cursor Options.
• Use Double Format Precision
Uses the precision value set in the Double Format Precision
field, under Data Format Options.
Default Returns pick point settings to their defaults.

480 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
RF Options

RF Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose RF from the EZwave Display Preferences list on the
left.
Use this dialog box to specify RF settings for the waveform display.
Objects
Table 8-35. EZwave Display Preferences - RF Options
Field Description
Smith Chart
Plot Sxx-Parameters in a Specifies that S11 and S22 (scattering) parameters will
Smith Chart automatically be displayed in a Smith Chart. Enabled by default.
Always consider Specifies that waveforms in the Smith Chart are displayed as the
waveforms as Sxx- normalized impedance of a Sxx parameter. Otherwise, waveforms
parameters are not considered as Sxx parameters and input waveforms are
simply displayed in the Smith Chart plane. Enabled by default.
Smith Chart Type Specifies the default Smith Chart type as Impedance, Admittance,
or Impedance and Admittance (both grids overlaid on a single
chart).
Smith Chart Cursors
Snap to Data Specifies that the cursor automatically snaps to the nearest data
point on a Smith Chart.
Impedance / Admittance Specifies the display as normalized (default) or to use the
Display characteristic impedance.
Stability / Noise Circles
Hide Stability / Noise Specifies that circles are hidden by default.
Circles
Polar Chart
Plot Sxy-Parameters in a Specifies that S12 and S21 (scattering) parameters are displayed in
Polar Chart a polar display of a Smith Chart. Enabled by default.
Polar Chart The complex-valued waveform is plotted.
Polar Chart Display Specifies the polar chart to be displayed in degrees (default) or
radians.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 481

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Row Options

Row Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Row from the EZwave Display Preferences list on the
left.
Use this dialog box to specify row height and position settings for the waveform display.
Objects
Table 8-36. EZwave Display Preferences - Row Options
Field Description
Row Height
Analog Row Height Specifies the height for the analog rows as one of the following:
• Automatic — Specifies that the row height is determined
based on the content of the row. Specify the Minimum Size for
a row in pixels.
• Fixed — Specifies that the rows are set at a fixed height.
Specify the fixed Size in pixels.
Digital Row Height Specifies the height of digital rows in pixels.
Space Between Rows
Minimize Space Between Specifies that the distance between rows is reduced. This causes
Rows the rows to be more closely spaced to increase the number of rows
visible at one time. By default, this is turned off.
Y Axis Range
Ignore Questa ADMS Specifies that uninitialized Questa ADMS values are ignored
Uninitialized Values when calculating the y-axis range for plots.
Row Title Appearance
Hide Row Title Outline Controls the visibility of the text box around the row title.

Usage Notes
Tip
You can force EZwave to use the Minimum Size analog row height set on the Row Options
dialog box for all plotted waveforms. Choose View > Min Row Height Plot Mode before
plotting. This option is also available on the Toolbar, and is useful if you need to fit a large
number of waveforms in the display.

In VHDL-AMS, un-initialized values default to the following values:

• 1.0e308 for “real” signals

• 2147483648 for “integer” signals

482 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Row Options

• 922337203685477580 for “time” signals (femto seconds)

When plots are generated, these uninitialized values at t = 0 may cause the plot to have a y-axis
range that is too large in relation to the waveform. By selecting Ignore Questa ADMS
Uninitialized Values, these values are ignored when calculating the y-axis range for plots.

Note
These uninitialized values are only ignored when calculating the y-axis range of plots. They
will still exist in the waveform data (adding a cursor at the location will display the value) as
it may be useful to know that there are uninitialized values in the waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 483

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save Data Options

Save Data Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Save Data from the EZwave Preferences list on the
left.
Use this dialog box to specify global settings related to saving waveform data.
Objects
Table 8-37. EZwave Display Preferences - Save Data Options
Field Description
Save to Ascii Options
Field Separator Specifies the character to use as a field separator when saving a
waveform to an ASCII file. Available options are:
• Predefined — A dropdown menu list of available predefined
field delimiters (Tab, Space, or a comma [,]).
• User defined — A text box to define your own by entering any
series of characters.
Number of Digits of Specifies the size of the output file. Select the level of precision in
Precision the save file with the dropdown list. You can select from 1 to 9
digits of precision, or full precision.
Save Bus as Separated Specifies that buses are saved as separated bits.
Bits
Bus Radix Specifies that the bus value is saved instead of the values of the
individual bits composing the bus. This option is only available
when the Save Bus as Separated Bits option is unchecked.
The radix can be one of the following:
• Two's Complement
• Binary
• Hexadecimal
• Octal
• Unsigned Decimal
• Ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
Use “Re:” and “lm:” for Enables the old behavior for X and y-axis labelling when data is
X/Y Plot saved to an ASCII format. The labels Re: (Real) and Im:
(Imaginary) are used instead of the X and y-axis units.

484 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save Data Options

Table 8-37. EZwave Display Preferences - Save Data Options (cont.)

Field Description
Spice Pwl Options Sets the default conversion for untyped waveforms when saving a
database as a SPICE PWL file (.sti). Can be None, Voltage or
Current. EZwave only saves current and voltage waveforms in .sti
files. Choose None to save waveforms only of type voltage or
current. For other waveforms, select either Voltage or Current to
perform a unit conversion before saving the waveform.
Show Option Dialog The Save As Dialog Box is displayed by default when a database is
Before Saving saved, to allow changes to the save options (for example, X range
setup or data sampling) to be specified.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 485

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save Window Options

Save Window Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Save Window from the EZwave Preferences list on the
left.
Use this dialog box to specify global settings related to saving windows.
Objects
Table 8-38. EZwave Display Preferences - Save Window Options
Field Description
Save Window Management
Save Active Window Specifies that only the active window is saved during File > Save.
Save All Windows Specifies all windows are saved during File > Save.
Save Related Database Specifies that when you save the active graph window to a .swd
(Only for .swd File) file, EZwave creates and saves a new .wdb database file with the
waveforms that are plotted in the saved graph window.
Show Option Dialog The Save Windows Dialog Box is displayed by default when a
Before Saving window is saved, to allow changes to the save options to be
specified.
Save in TCL Specifies that windows are saved in TCL format
Save in SWD Specifies that windows are saved in SWD format.
Save As Paths
Use Absolute Paths An absolute path is used to point to dataset (.wdb) files within the
TCL or SWD scripts that are generated when a window is saved.
Use Relative Paths A relative path is used to point to dataset (.wdb) files within the
TCL or SWD scripts that are generated when a window is saved.
Paths can be:
• Relative to AMS_EZDO_ROOT
The AMS_EZDO_ROOT environment variable. This variable
must be defined when the TCL or SWD script is executed.
• Relative to Script Location

486 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Text Annotation Options

Text Annotation Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Text Annotation from the EZwave Preferences list on
the left.
Use this dialog box to control the default display options for text annotations.
Objects
Table 8-39. EZwave Display Preferences - Text Annotation Options
Field Description
Annotation Display Options
Hide Anchor Symbol Hides text annotation anchor symbols when the annotation is
attached to a waveform.
Anchor Symbol Selects the symbol used at the anchor point of the text annotation
when the annotation is attached to a waveform. Can be either
Crosshair or Dot.
Hide Anchor Line Hides the line between the anchor point and the text annotation
box when the annotation is attached to a waveform.
Hide Text Outline Hides the outline of the text annotation box.
Show Vertical Line at Specifies that a vertical line is displayed across the waveform at
Anchor Position the selected position.
Auto-Adjust Annotation Changes the location of the waveform text annotation for better
Text Location When visibility, so that it is not truncated if outside the waveform area.
Outside Waveform Area
Add Annotations Options
Expand Digital Row Specifies that the default digital row height is expanded when
Height annotations are added to a digital waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 487

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Transformation Options

Transformation Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Transformations from the EZwave Display
Preferences list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify the transformations that are applied when waveforms are
plotted.The options on this dialog box are organized on two tabs, Transformations and
Conversion.
Objects
Table 8-40. EZwave Display Preferences - Transformations - Transformations
Tab
Field Description
Supported Complex Waveform Transformations
dB The magnitude of each point of the complex-valued waveform
calculated in decibels (20 * log (waveform))
Magnitude The square root of (re2 + im2) for each point of the complex-valued
waveform.
Real The real component of each point in the complex-valued waveform.
Imaginary The imaginary component of each point in the complex-valued
waveform.
Phase The phase of each point in the complex-valued waveform. All phase
angles are between -180 degrees and 180 degrees (-PI radians and PI
radians).
Continuous Phase The phase of each point in the complex-valued waveform, including
(Cphase) an accumulated phase angle from the previous points. As this
transformation does not include a phase discontinuity at the 180
degree boundaries, unlike the Phase transformation, this
transformation is useful when analyzing waveforms with more than +/
- 180 degrees of phase shift.
Complex Plane The complex-valued waveform of a collection of complex numbers
(z=a+ib, where i is the imaginary number) plotted as a curve (not
necessarily monotonic) of the unique points (a,b) in the complex
plane.
Smith Chart The complex-valued waveform is plotted on a Smith Chart.
Polar Chart The complex-valued waveform is plotted in a polar display of a Smith
Chart. See “Smith Chart and Polar Displays” on page 220.

488 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Transformation Options

Table 8-40. EZwave Display Preferences - Transformations - Transformations

Tab (cont.)
Field Description
Selected If more than one transformation is selected, specifies that all of the
Transformation transformed waveforms are plotted in the same row (overlaid). This
Should be Plotted option does not apply to complex-plane plots, polar charts and Smith
Overlaid Charts.

Apply This option controls how expressions VX(a,b) and IX(a,b) are
Transformation computed in AC analysis. X stands for DB (magnitude, in decibels),
Before “Plot M (magnitude), P (phase) or GD (group delay).
Difference” • Selected (Default)—VX(a,b) or IX(a,b) are computed from the
complex value v(a)-v(b) or from i(a)-i(b). For example, VDB(1,2)
is computed as DB(V(1)-V(2)).
• Unselected (Default in -compat mode)—VX(a,b) or IX(a,b) are
computed from the complex value VX(a,0)-VX(b,0) or from
IX(a,0)-IX(b,0). For example, VDB(1,2) is computed as VDB(1)-
VDB(2).
Supported Digital Waveform Transformations
New Click to add a new digital waveform transformation. This invokes the
Edit Digital Transformation dialog box. Enter the transformation
name, source type, and destination type in this dialog box.
Edit Select a transformation and click to change the transformation details.
This invokes the Edit Digital Transformation dialog box.
Delete Select a transformation and click to remove that transformation.

Table 8-41. EZwave Display Preferences - Transformations - Conversion Tab

Field Description
Auto-Compute When selected, the default threshold calculation is used for Plot as
Threshold Bus. When unchecked, thresholds can be entered manually as
described below.
Threshold If the bus is an analog or hybrid bus, the analog signals are
automatically transformed to digital. This option specifies the
thresholds to digitize the input waveform(s) as one of the following:
• Single Threshold
• Two Thresholds
Specify the desired threshold values used for Plot as Bus.

Usage Notes
The Apply By Default checkboxes specify one or more transformations that are automatically
applied when a complex-valued waveform is plotted.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 489

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Transformation Options

You can also apply the transformation directly by right-clicking a waveform and choosing a
transformation from the Transformations menu item.

490 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Options

Waveform Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Waveform from the EZwave Display Preferences list
on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify how analog and wreal waveforms are displayed in EZwave graph
windows.
Objects
Table 8-42. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Options
Field Description
Analog Waveforms
Extend last analog Specifies that the last data point is extended to infinity. Extending
waveform data point would cause the last data point in the result waveform to extend
to infinity horizontally to infinity (as well as the reference waveform).
Limit the Number of Reduces the number of data points drawn on the screen, in order to
drawn Data Point speed up drawing time when there are a large number of points.
symbols Although not all of the points are drawn, those that are visible are all
real data points.
Wreal Waveforms
Display as Step Displays wreal waveforms as “step” waveforms, similar to real
Waveforms waveforms. With “step” waveforms the ‘X’ and ‘Z’ states are
displayed as colored rectangles. The default.
Display as Railroad Displays wreal waveforms as “railroad” waveforms.
Waveforms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 491

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Compare Options

Waveform Compare Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Waveform Compare from the EZwave Display
Preferences list on the left.
Use this dialog box to specify options for waveform comparison.
Objects
Table 8-43. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Compare Options
Field Description
Show Existing & New Updated waveforms are shown overlaid over the previous result.
Together
Replace The existing plotted waveforms are replaced with the new result.
Update Target Selects which waveforms to apply the update to:
• All Windows
The waveforms in all open graph windows are updated
• Active Window Only
The waveforms in the currently active graph window are updated
• Plotted Waveforms
Only the waveforms specified in the Plotted Waveforms List are
updated.
Allow Partial Match Specifies that when comparing waveforms, waveforms that partially
match the names within the database are updated.

492 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform List Options

Waveform List Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Waveform List from the EZwave Display Preferences
list on the left. See Waveform List Panel.
Use this dialog box to specify options for the Waveform List Panel.
Objects
Table 8-44. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform List Options
Field Description
Waveform List Panel
Use Following View Specifies the default view for the Waveform List Panel, as either Tree
by Default View (default) or List View.
Separate Tree View Specifies that the Tree View is divided into two panels. The top panel is
Into Structure and called the Structure List and displays the hierarchical structures of the
Waveform List waveform database. The bottom panel is called the Waveform List and
Views displays the list of waveforms that belong to the selected structures. This
option is enabled by default.
Plot Hierarchical Specifies that when you drag and drop a hierarchical node from the
Nodes Stacked When Structure List to the workspace or a graph window, the waveforms are
Dragging and stacked. If this option is cleared, plotted nodes are overlaid. By default,
Dropping waveforms are stacked.
Show Only Specifies that only the databases that are related to the currently active
Databases Related to workspace are listed. By default, all databases are shown.
Active Workspace
Sort the Waveform Specifies that case is disregarded when sorting the Waveform List. By
List in a Case- default, the alphabetically-sorted Waveform List considers case.
Insensitive Way
Show Hidden Specifies that hidden waveforms are shown in the Waveform List panel.
Waveforms By default, waveforms that are hidden in the databases are not shown in
the Waveform List panel. Showing hidden waveforms in the Waveform
List panel does not make them visible in the graph windows.
Disable Automatic Specifies whether to search the waveform lists while you type in the
Search While Typing search text fields. This text field displays in the Waveform List panel
Text and by default, automatic searching is enabled. While automatic
searching is enabled, it will show only waveforms that match the string
(or partial string) that you type while you type. If automatic searching is
disabled, you must press Enter to perform the search.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 493

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Workspace Options

Workspace Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then choose Workspace from the EZwave Display Preferences list
on the left. Or, right-click in your workspace to display the Workspace Popup Menu and
choose Options.
Use this dialog box to specify options relating to your workspace.
Objects
Table 8-45. EZwave Display Preferences - Workspace Options
Field Description
Workspace Options
Allow Multiple Specifies whether multiple workspaces can be created. When turned
Workspaces off, the Workspace Popup Menu will not show the New menu item
and the Workspace tab area is removed.
Hide Icons for Specifies whether minimized graph windows appear as icons on the
Minimized Windows workspace. When turned off, minimized windows don't appear
anywhere on the workspace and you will not be able to double-click
the icon to restore the window. Click the window name in the
Window menu or the Graph Window button on the workspace
taskbar in order to restore it.
Hide Taskbars Specifies whether the workspace taskbar is visible. If the taskbar is
not visible, you can activate windows either by clicking directly on
them, or by clicking the window name in the Window menu.
Show Close Workspace Specifies whether the workspace tabs have a close (X) button. You
Tab Button can also delete a tab by right-clicking on the tab and selecting Delete.
Location for Tabs Specifies the location of the workspace selection tabs. Select the
desired location from the dropdown list.
Workspace Background
Solid Color The workspace area will be a solid color.
Tiled Image The workspace area will be a tiled image.
Select Used to specify the color or image to use for the workspace area.

494 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Plot Options

CDF Plot Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the CDF folder on the left side, and choose Plot.
Used to specify default options when plotting a CDF (Cumulative Density Function).
Objects
Table 8-46. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Plot Options Dialog Box
Contents
Field Description
CDF Properties
Plot Predefined cdf Specifies that the cdf stored in the simulation file (for example, a
(when available in file) cdf() waveform generated by Eldo on an extract) should be plotted
instead of a new cdf being calculated. With this option selected, all
CDF Customization options are ignored.
CDF Customization
Minimum X Value Specifies the X value at the lower bound of a window interval.
Maximum X Value Specifies the X value at the upper bound of a window interval.
Sample Data When selected, the input waveform is sampled (the number of
points remains the same, but are equally distributed; see the
histogram function for details). When not selected, the raw Y values
of the input waveform are used.
Shift Data so that Mean When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased
Equals 0 by the mean() of these values, so the displayed mean equals 0.
Multiply Data so that When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased
Standard-Deviation by the mean() of these values, and then divided by the standard-
Equals 1 deviation. So the displayed mean equals 0, and the displayed
standard-deviation equals 1.0. This option is available only if “Shift
Data so that Mean Equals 0” is selected, above.
Companion Waveforms
Plot Gaussian When selected, the integral of the Gaussian distribution is plotted
Distribution based on the mean and standard-deviation of the input waveform.
The range for this distribution is between mean +/- N*stddev, with
the following constraints:
• N is the smallest integer so that the Y min() and max() of the
input waveform are in the range
• N is greater than or equal to 4
• N is less than or equal to 20

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 495

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Plot Options

Table 8-46. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Plot Options Dialog Box
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Plot PDF (when Plots the integral of the PDF (potential density function) associated
available in file) to the input waveform. This functionality is available in .wdb files
generated by an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
CDF is a Step When selected, the CDF is plotted as a step waveform.
Waveform
Plot Confidence Bounds When selected, the plots upper and lower confidence bounds, if
(when available in file) these have been computed by Eldo.

496 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Measures Options

CDF Measures Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the CDF folder on the left side, and choose Measures.
Use this dialog to specify the measures to display when plotting a CDF.
Objects
Table 8-47. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Measures Options Dialog Box
Contents
Field Description
Single Measures
Draw Average Select to draw a vertical line at the average location.
Draw Mean Select to draw a vertical line at the mean location.
Draw Median Select to draw a vertical line at the median location.
Draw Nominal Value When selected, and when the nominal value is stored in the
(when available in file) waveform database file, this option draws a vertical line at the
nominal location. It is available in .wdb files generated by an Eldo
Monte Carlo simulation.
Twin Measures
Draw Probability There are three options:
• N-Sigma: Empirical. When selected, the plot is based on the
CDF. Specify a comma-separated list of integer N values,
between 1 and 7. For probability P of N-Sigma, the range is:
min point = X of first CDF point where Y ³ P/2
max point = X of last CDF point where Y £ 1 - P/2
• N-Sigma: Theoretical. When selected, the plot is based on the
mean and standard deviation of the theoretical Gaussian
distribution. Specify a comma-separated list of integer N values,
between 1 and 7. A range is drawn for each value, from:
mean-N´stddev to mean+N´stddev.
• Probability. This is the same computation as N-Sigma: Empirical
(above) except that you specify a comma-separated list
containing the required probability values, between 0 and 1, or
percentage values between 0% and 100%. (For example
0.6827,0.9545,0.98,99%.)
The range legend is:
Prob <percentage_of_data_in_range>% [<lower_value> ;
<upper_value>]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 497

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Measures Options

Table 8-47. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Measures Options Dialog Box
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Lower-Bound/Upper- When either option is selected, a vertical line is drawn, which can be
Bound repositioned in the same way as cursors.
Depending on the two settings, the bound location is:
• As defined in the .wdb file, when Predefined Position (when
available in file) is selected. It is available in .wdb files generated
by an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
• At a user-defined location, if User Defined Position is selected,
and the previous option Predefined Position (…) is not selected,
above, or the bound value is not stored in the file.
The user defined position is relative to mean + <value> * stddev
(as N-sigma, but <value> is a real number, not an integer).

Usage Notes
You can edit a plotted CDF, in which case the User Defined Position value is an absolute value,
not a relative one.

When both Lower and Upper Bound are displayed, only the Upper Bound legend displays the
yield value.

498 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Legend Options

CDF Legend Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the CDF folder on the left side, and choose Legend.
Use this dialog to configure and display a legend to the statistical measures displayed on a CDF.
Objects
Table 8-48. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Legend Options Dialog Box
Contents
Field Description
Draw Stat Legend Enables the display of the legend on a CDF.
Edit Stat Legend Used to define the values to display in the legend. Enter legend items
in the following format:
<Label>= @(<measure>)

For example:
Mean= @(mean)

All available measures can be added using the Shortcut Buttons. The
variable @(name) adds the waveform name to the legend. The large
field at the bottom of the dialog box displays a preview of how the
legend will be laid out, using placeholder values.
Shortcut Buttons
Average Adds the average to the Stat Legend text.
Cp Adds the process capability to the Stat Legend text, which is equal
to:
(upper_bound – lower_bound) / (^6* stddev)

This measure requires that the lower and upper bound are plotted,
otherwise it is <undefined>.
CpK Adds the process capability, assuming that it is not centered. It is
equal to:
Min(upper_bound – mean) / (3*stddev),(mean – lower_bound) / (3*
stddev)
This measure requires that the lower or upper bound is plotted,
otherwise it is <undefined>.
Kurtosis Adds the skewness value to the Stat Legend text. This option is
available only when the value is available in the wdb file.
Name Adds the name of the input waveform to the Stat Legend text,
without database or hierarchy names.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 499

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
CDF Legend Options

Table 8-48. EZwave Display Preferences - CDF Legend Options Dialog Box
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Max Adds the maximum value to the Stat Legend text.
Mean Adds the mean value to the Stat Legend text.
Median Adds the median value to the Stat Legend text.
Min Adds the minimum value to the Stat Legend text.
Nominal Adds the nominal value to the Stat Legend text, when available in the
waveform database file, otherwise it is <undefined>.
Relative Std. Dev. Adds the relative standard deviation to the Stat Legend text, which is
equal to:
• stddev if mean is zero
• stddev/mean if stddev is not zero
Size Adds the number of points of the input waveform to the Stat Legend
text.
Skewness Adds the skewness value to the Stat Legend text. This option is
available only when the value is available in the wdb file.
Std. Dev. Adds the standard deviation to the Stat Legend text.
@ Adds the @ symbol to the Stat Legend text.

500 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Axis Title Options

Axis Title Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder in the list on the left side,
and choose Axis Title.
Used to modify the fonts and colors of axis titles.
Objects
Table 8-49. EZwave Display Preferences - Axis Title Options
Field Description
Font Specifies the font used for axis titles.
Font Size Specifies the font point size used for axis titles.
Font Style Specifies the font style used for axis titles.
Color Specifies the color used for axis titles.
Preview Displays a sample of what axis titles will look like with the current
selections.
Default Restores the font and color of axis titles to the default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 501

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Axis Values Options

Axis Values Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Axis Values.
Use this dialog to modify the fonts and colors of axis values.
Objects
Table 8-50. Fonts and Colors - Axis Values Options
Field Description
Font Used to change the font of axis values.
Font Size Used to change the font point size of axis values
Font Style Used to change the font style of axis values.
Color Used to choose the color of axis values using the Color Selection
dialog box.
Preview Displays a sample of what axis values will look like with the
current selections.
Default Restores the font and color of the axis values to the default
settings.

502 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options

Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Axis Values (Smith Chart).
Use this dialog to modify the fonts and colors of Smith Chart axes.
Objects
Table 8-51. EZwave Display Preferences - Axis Values (Smith Chart) Options
Field Description
Font
Font Name To change the font of axis values for Smith Charts, select an
available font from this dropdown list.
Font Size To change the size of axis values for Smith Charts, select a
point size from this dropdown list.
Font Style To change the style of axis values for Smith Charts, select a
font style from this dropdown list.
Colors
Impedance Grids Controls the color of the impedance grid when displaying a
Smith Chart. Click the colored box to open the Color Selection
dialog box and make a new color selection.
Admittance Grids This controls the color of the admittance grid when displaying
a Smith chart. Click the colored box to open the Color
Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.
Preview
Preview Displays a sample of what the Smith Chart grids will look like
with the current selections.
Default Restores the font and color of the axis values for Smith Charts
to the default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 503

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Calculator Entry Options

Calculator Entry Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Calculator Entry.
Use this dialog to modify the fonts and colors of the Waveform Calculator.
Objects
Table 8-52. EZwave Display Preferences - Calculator Entry Options
Field Description
Font Size To change the size of the font of text, select a point size
from this dropdown list.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the
current selections.
Default Restores the font size of the calculator entries to the
default setting.

504 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cursor/Marker Options

Cursor/Marker Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Cursor/Marker.
Use this dialog to modify the fonts and colors of cursors and markers.
Objects
Table 8-53. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor/Marker Options
Field Description
Font Controls the font of the values in cursors and markers.
Font Size Controls the size of the font of values in cursor and markers.
Font Style Controls the style of cursors and markers.
Y Values Controls the display color of the Y values associated with cursors and
markers. Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box
and make a new color selection.
X Values Controls the display color of the X values associated with cursors and
markers. Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box
and make a new color selection.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the current
selections.
Active Cursor
Cursor Style Choose a line style from the dropdown list for the active cursor.
Cursor Width Choose a line width from the dropdown list for the active cursor.
Horizontal Cursor Controls the color of horizontal cursor lines. Click the colored box to
open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.
Vertical Cursor Controls the color of vertical cursor lines. Click the colored box to open
the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.
Cursor
Cursor Style Choose a cursor line style from the dropdown list.
Cursor Width Choose a cursor line width from the dropdown list.
Horizontal Cursor Controls the color of horizontal cursor lines. Click the colored box to
open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.
Vertical Cursor Controls the color of vertical cursor lines. Click the colored box to open
the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.
Marker Line Controls the color of marker lines. Click the colored box to open the
Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 505

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cursor/Marker Options

Table 8-53. EZwave Display Preferences - Cursor/Marker Options (cont.)

Field Description
Default Restores the font, style, and color of cursors and markers to their default
settings.

506 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Mask Options

Eye Mask Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Eye Mask.
Use this dialog to modify the color and line width of eye masks.
Objects
Table 8-54. EZwave Display Preferences - Eye Mask Options
Field Description
Pass Color Controls the color of a pass status of the eye mask specification. Click the
colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color
selection. The default is blue.
Fail Color Controls the color of a “fail” status of the eye mask specification. Click the
colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color
selection. The default is red.
Line Width Controls the line width of eye masks. Select a width from this dropdown
list. By default the width is the same as the Eye Diagram waveform width.
Default Restores the font and color of eye masks to the default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 507

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Grid Options (Fonts and Colors)

Grid Options (Fonts and Colors)

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Grid.
Use this dialog to modify the color, width, and style of both major and minor grid lines. Minor
grid lines are displayed when waveforms are plotted using logarithmic scales.
Objects
Table 8-55. EZwave Display Preferences - Grid Options
Field Description
Major Grid Lines
Color selected according to When enabled, the color of the major grid lines will match the
the Y Axis color of the y-axis. Enabled by default.
User Color Used to select a different color for the major grid lines. Click
the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and
make a new color selection.
Line Width Controls the width of the major grid lines. Select a width from
1 to 5, from the dropdown list. By default the width is 1.
Line Style Controls the line style for the major grid from solid, dotted or
dashed. Select a style from the dropdown list. By default the
line style is solid.
Minor Grid Lines
Color selected according to When enabled, the color of the minor grid lines will match the
the Y Axis color of the y-axis. Enabled by default.
User Color Used to select a different color for the minor grid lines. Click
the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and
make a new color selection.
Line Width Controls the width of the minor grid lines. Select a width from
1 to 5, from the dropdown list. By default the width is 1.
Line Style Controls the line style for the minor grid from solid, dotted or
dashed. Select a style from the dropdown list. By default the
line style is dotted.
Grid
Default Restores the color, line width, and line style of both major and
minor grid lines to the default settings.

508 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Header Text Options

Header Text Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Header Text.
Use this dialog to modify the fonts and colors of the header text. By default, header text is
hidden. Choose File > Page Setup to select the information to display in the header.
Objects
Table 8-56. EZwave Display Preferences - Header Text Options
Field Description
Font Controls the font of header text.
Font Size Controls the size of the header text font.
Font Style Controls the style of font for the header text.
Color Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make
a new color selection.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the current
selections.
Default Restores the font and color of header text to the default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 509

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Options

Histogram Options
To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Histogram.
Use this dialog to modify the fill properties of histograms.
Objects
Table 8-57. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Options
Field Description
Pattern fill Specifies that histogram bars use a pattern fill. This is the default setting.
Transparent Specifies that the histogram bars be transparent, useful for large numbers
of histograms. Overlapping histograms are shaded to improve
visualization of the distribution.
No fill Specifies that the histogram bars are not filled with any pattern. This is
useful when running the EZwave viewer over a network.
Full Specifies that the histogram bars are filled with solid color.

510 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Measurement Annotation Options

Measurement Annotation Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Measurement Annotation.
Used to modify the fonts and colors of measurement annotations, added by the Measurement
tool.
Objects
Table 8-58. EZwave Display Preferences - Measurement Annotation Options
Field Description
Font Specifies a font for measurement annotation text.
Font Size Specifies the size of the font for measurement annotation text.
Font Style Specifies the style of font to use for measurement annotation text.
Color Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and
make a new color selection.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the current
selections.
Measurement Controls the default color of measurement annotations:
Annotation Color • Use Waveform Color
Uses the same color as the waveform. Available only for
annotations that are attached to a single waveform.
• Use Custom Color
Measurement annotations will use the custom color defined on
this dialog box.
Default Restores the font and color of measurement annotations to the default
settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 511

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors)

Pick Points Options (Fonts and Colors)

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Pick Points.
Used to modify colors and color mode for pick points.
Objects
Table 8-59. EZwave Display Preferences - Pick Points Options (Fonts and
Colors)
Field Description
Pick Point Color Specifies the color of pick points. The defaults are:
• Red for the white and black background color schemes
• Black for the monochrome color scheme.
Pick Point Color Mode Specifies whether to use a custom color for pick points (default)
or to have the pick points match the color of the waveform.
Pick Point Selection Color Specifies the color of a pick point when it is selected. The
defaults are:
• White for the black background color scheme
• Black for the white background and monochrome color
schemes.

512 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Row Title Options

Row Title Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Row Title.
Use this dialog to modify the default fonts and colors of row titles. The font properties of
individual row titles can be edited by right-clicking the title in the graph window and selecting
properties.
Objects
Table 8-60. Fonts and Colors - Row Title Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Font To change the font of row title text, select an available font
from this dropdown list. The default is Dialog.
Font Size To change the size of the font, select a point size from this
dropdown list. The default is 12.
Font Style To change the style of font, select a font style from this
dropdown list. The default is Plain.
Color Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box
and make a new color selection. The default is Blue.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the
current selections.
Default Restores the font and color of row titles to the default settings.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 513

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors)

Text Annotation Options (Fonts and Colors)

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Text Annotation.
Use this dialog to modify the default fonts and colors of text annotations.
Objects
Table 8-61. EZwave Display Preferences - Text Annotation Options (Fonts and
Colors)
Field Description
Font Specifies the font to use for text annotations.
Font Size Specifies the point size of the font to use for text annotations.
Font Style Specifies the style of the font to use for text annotations:
• Plain
• Bold
• Italic
• Bold/Italic
Color Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new
color selection. This control is not available when the Monochrome theme is
active.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the current selections.
Waveform Controls the default color of text annotations:
Annotation • Use Waveform Color
Color
Text annotations for all waveforms are the same color as the waveform.
This option is selected by default for annotations that are attached to
waveforms. It is unavailable for annotations that are not attached to a
waveform.
• Use Custom Color
Text annotations will use the custom color defined on this dialog box.
Default Restores the font and color of text annotations to the default settings.

514 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Colors Options

Waveform Colors Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Waveform Colors.
Use this dialog to define colors for analog and digital waveforms in the graph windows.
Objects
Table 8-62. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Colors Options
Field Description
Use Same Waveform Color When Tandem Mode is active, specifies waveforms from the
Per Database in Tandem same database are plotted with the same color. Enabled by
Mode default.
White Background Color Only available when the White Background Color Scheme is
Scheme shares the Black selected. Use this option to share the waveform color palette
Background Waveform between White and Black Background Color Schemes. Enabled
Colors Palette by default.
Analog
Color Palette Size Controls the size of the color palette used to display waveforms.
Color Palette Click a color block to select a new color from the Color
Selection dialog box.
Digital
Bus Color Controls the color of bus waveforms. Click the colored box to
open the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color
selection. The default color is green.
Bus Value Color Controls the color of bus values. Click the colored box to open
the Color Selection dialog box and make a new color selection.

Usage Notes
In EZwave, the color scheme may be monochrome, or a black or white background. By default
the color palette size setting for analog objects is shared between white and black backgrounds.
Colors are set when the black color scheme is active. When the white scheme is activated, an
option to disable this sharing is visible. Digital object colors can always be different between
each scheme.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 515

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Display Options

Waveform Display Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Waveform Display.
Used to modify the line style, width and data point display of waveforms.
Objects
Table 8-63. Fonts and Colors - Waveform Display Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Line Style Controls the default line style of waveforms.
Line Width Controls the default line width of waveforms.
Data Point Symbol Controls the default data point symbol of waveforms.

Usage Notes
Caution
The use of a waveform Line Width other than 1 pixel and/or a Line Style other than a plain
line may significantly reduce the waveform display performance.

516 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Name Options

Waveform Name Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Waveform Name.
Use this dialog to modify fonts, colors and display format of waveform names.
Objects
Table 8-64. Fonts and Colors - Waveform Name Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Waveform Font & Color
Font Controls the font used for waveform names.
Font Size Controls the size of the font used for waveform names.
Font Style Controls the style of font used for waveform names.
Color Click the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box
and make a new color selection.
Preview Displays a sample of what the text will look like with the
current selections.
Waveform Names Display
Waveform Hierarchy Defines global settings for how waveform names are
displayed in graph windows. These are common to all Color
Schemes.
Specifies the hierarchy display as one of the following:
• Full Hierarchy — Specifies that the full hierarchy is
displayed. Default.
• No Hierarchy (Leaf Name Only) — Specifies that only
the leaf name is displayed.
• Display N Levels — The specified number of levels is
displayed.
Justify Value Specifies how the waveform name is justified when
displayed: Left (Default) or Right.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 517

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Name Options

Table 8-64. Fonts and Colors - Waveform Name Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Database Name Specifies how the database name is displayed from one of
the following:
• Always Show Database Name.
• Show Name If Two or More Databases. Calculated
(<calc>) databases are not included in the count of
databases.
• Always Hide Database Name. Default.
• Show Database Name in Tandem Mode. Database
names are always displayed in Tandem mode,
irrespective of the three settings above. Default.
Default Restores the font and color of waveform names to the
default settings.

Usage Notes
Some of these settings can also be defined using the Waveform Names Display Dialog Box
which can be accessed through the menu item Format > Waveform Names Display.

518 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Selection Options

Waveform Selection Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Waveform Selection.
Use this dialog to modify the line styles and colors of selected and highlighted waveforms.
Objects
Table 8-65. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Selection Options
Field Description
Waveform Selection
Color Controls the color of the waveform when selected. Click the
colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make a
new color selection.
Line Width Controls the line width of a selected waveform.
Waveform Highlight
Color Controls whether a highlighted waveform changes color. Click
the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and
make a new color selection.
Line Width Controls the line width of a highlighted waveform.

Usage Notes
Use the Highlight column within the Parameter Table to highlight waveforms.

If the Color Option is left unchecked and the Line Width is set to Automatic for either
Waveform Selection or Waveform Highlight, the selection or highlight will not be
differentiable from other waveforms the graph.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 519

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Window Background Options

Window Background Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Window Background.
Use this dialog to modify the window background color.
Objects
Table 8-66. Fonts and Colors - Window Background Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Color Controls the color of the window background. Click the
colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and make
a new color selection. The default background color is black.
Default Restores the window background color to the default setting.

520 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Zero-Level Line Options

Zero-Level Line Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and Colors folder on the left side, and
choose Zero-Level Line.
Use this dialog to modify the colors of zero-level lines.
Objects
Table 8-67. Fonts and Colors - Zero-Level Line Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Color selected according to the The zero-level line color will match the colors of the
Y Axis appropriate y-axes. Enabled by default.
User Color Specifies a different color to use for zero-level lines. Click
the colored box to open the Color Selection dialog box and
make a new color selection.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 521

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Plot Options

Histogram Plot Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Histogram folder on the left side, and choose Plot.
Used to specify default options when plotting a histogram.
Objects
Table 8-68. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Plot Options Dialog Box
Contents
Field Description
Histogram Properties
Plot Predefined Specifies that the histogram stored in the simulation file (for
histogram (when example, a HIST() waveform generated by Eldo on an extract)
available in file) should be plotted instead of a new histogram being calculated. With
this option selected, all Histogram Customization options are
ignored.
Histogram Customization
Number of Bins Specifies the number of waveform divisions (resolution) to use.
Enter a numerical value or a rule (Scott, Sturge, or Sqrt (the square
root of the number of samples)). The default is 10.
Minimum X Value Specifies the X value at the lower bound of a window interval.
Maximum X Value Specifies the X value at the upper bound of a window interval.
Gather Values outside Restricts the histogram width to (mean +-SIGBIN* standard
Sigmas” deviation) and specifies the value of SIGBIN, which is equivalent to
the SPICE Eldo SIGBIN parameter.
Min and Max Bins When selected, the first (and respectively last) bin is centered on the
Centered on Min and sample min (resp. max) value. When not selected, the bin is aligned
Max Values to the right of the min (resp. aligned to the left of the max).
Sample Data When selected, the input waveform is sampled (the number of
points remains the same, but are equally distributed; see the
histogram function for details). When not selected, the raw Y values
of the input waveform are used.
Normalize Y When selected, the histogram height is normalized; the sum of the
bin height equals 1.0. When not selected, the height of the bins
equals the number of hits, and the sum of the bin height equals the
total number of points of the input waveform.
Shift Data so that Mean When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased
Equals 0 by the mean() of these values, so the displayed mean equals 0.

522 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Plot Options

Table 8-68. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Plot Options Dialog Box
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Multiply Data so that When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased
Standard-Deviation by the mean() of these values, and then divided by the standard-
Equals 1 deviation. So the displayed mean equals 0, and the displayed
standard-deviation equals 1.0. This option is available only if “Shift
Data so that Mean Equals 0” is selected, above.
Companion Waveforms
Plot Gaussian When selected, the Gaussian distribution is plotted based on the
Distribution mean and standard-deviation of the input waveform. The range for
this distribution is between mean +/- N*stddev, with the following
constraints:
• N is the smallest integer so that the Y min() and max() of the
input waveform are in the range
• N is greater than or equal to 4
• N is lesser than or equal to 20
Plot PDF (when Plots the PDF (potential density function) associated to the input
available in file) waveform. This functionality is available in .wdb files generated by
an Eldo Monte Carlo.
Plot CDF Plots the CDF (cumulative density function) of the input waveform.
CDF is a Step When selected, the CDF is plotted as a step waveform.
Waveform
Fit Histogram Area When selected, the histogram is displayed with only one y-axis. The
(PDF, Gaussian) and y-axis bounds are derived from the histogram Y-min (0) and Y-max.
Height (CDF) The PDF and Gaussian distribution are multiplied by the area of the
histogram (area fit). The CDF display is multiplied by the Y-max of
the histogram so that is has the same height as the histogram (height
fit). When unchecked, a second y-axis is displayed for Gaussian
distribution, PDF and CDF.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 523

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Measures Options

Histogram Measures Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Histogram folder on the left side, and choose
Measures.
Use this dialog to specify the measures to display when plotting a histogram.
Objects
Table 8-69. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Measures Options Dialog
Box Contents
Field Description
Single Measures
Draw Average Select to draw a vertical line at the average location.
Draw Mean Select to draw a vertical line at the mean location.
Draw Median Select to draw a vertical line at the median location.
Draw Nominal Value When selected, and when the nominal value is stored in the
(when available in file) waveform database file, this option draws a vertical line at the
nominal location. It is available in .wdb files generated by an Eldo
Monte Carlo simulation.
Twin Measures
Draw Probability There are three options:
• N-Sigma: Empirical. When selected, the plot is based on the
CDF. Specify a comma-separated list of integer N values,
between 1 and 7. For probability P of N-Sigma, the range is:
min point = X of first CDF point where Y ³ P/2
max point = X of last CDF point where Y £ 1 - P/2
• N-Sigma: Theoretical. When selected, the plot is based on the
mean and standard deviation of the theoretical Gaussian
distribution. Specify a comma-separated list of integer N values,
between 1 and 7. A range is drawn for each value, from:
mean-N´stddev to mean+N´stddev.
• Probability. This is the same computation as N-Sigma:
Empirical (above) except that you specify a comma-separated
list containing the required probability values, between 0 and 1,
or percentage values between 0% and 100%. (For example
0.6827,0.9545,0.98,99%.)
The range legend is:
Prob <percentage_of_data_in_range>% [<lower_value> ;
<upper_value>]

524 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Measures Options

Table 8-69. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Measures Options Dialog

Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Lower-Bound/Upper- When either option is selected, a vertical line is drawn, which can be
Bound repositioned in the same way as cursors.
Depending on the two settings, the bound location is:
• As defined in the .wdb file, when Predefined Position (when
available in file) is selected. It is available in .wdb files
generated by an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
• At a user-defined location, if User Defined Position is selected,
and the previous option Predefined Position (…) is not selected,
above, or the bound value is not stored in the file.
The user defined position is relative to mean + <value> * stddev
(as N-sigma, but <value> is a real number, not an integer).

Usage Notes
You can edit a plotted histogram, in which case the User Defined Position value is an absolute
value, not a relative one.

When both Lower and Upper Bound are displayed, only the Upper Bound legend displays the
yield value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 525

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Legend Options

Histogram Legend Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Histogram folder on the left side, and choose
Legend.
Use this dialog to configure and display a legend to the statistical measures displayed on a
histogram.
Objects
Table 8-70. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Legend Options Dialog
Box Contents
Field Description
Draw Stat Legend Enables the display of the legend on histograms.
Edit Stat Legend Used to define the values to display in the legend. Enter legend items in
the following format:
<Lable>= @(<measure>)

For example:
Mean= @(mean)

All available measures can be added using the Shortcut Buttons. The
variable @(name) adds the waveform name to the legend. The large field
at the bottom of the dialog box displays a preview of how the legend will
be laid out, using placeholder values.
Shortcut Buttons
Average Adds the average to the Stat Legend text.
Cp Adds the process capability to the Stat Legend text, which is equal to:
(upper_bound – lower_bound) / (^6* stddev)

This measure requires that the lower and upper bound are plotted,
otherwise it is <undefined>.
CpK Adds the process capability, assuming that it is not centered. It is equal to:
Min(upper_bound – mean) / (3*stddev),(mean – lower_bound) /
(3* stddev)

This measure requires that the lower or upper bound is plotted, otherwise
it is <undefined>.
Kurtosis Adds the skewness value to the Stat Legend text. This option is available
only when the value is available in the wdb file.

526 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Legend Options

Table 8-70. EZwave Display Preferences - Histogram Legend Options Dialog

Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name Adds the name of the input waveform to the Stat Legend text, without
database or hierarchy names.
Max Adds the maximum value to the Stat Legend text.
Mean Adds the mean value to the Stat Legend text.
Median Adds the median value to the Stat Legend text.
Min Adds the minimum value to the Stat Legend text.
Nominal Adds the nominal value to the Stat Legend text, when available in the
waveform database file, otherwise it is <undefined>.
Relative Std. Dev. Adds the relative standard deviation to the Stat Legend text, which is
equal to:
• stddev if mean is zero
• stddev/mean if stddev is not zero
Size Adds the number of points of the input waveform to the Stat Legend text.
Skewness Adds the skewness value to the Stat Legend text. This option is available
only when the value is available in the wdb file.
Std. Dev. Adds the standard deviation to the Stat Legend text.
@ Adds the @ symbol to the Stat Legend text.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 527

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Calculation Options

Waveform Calculation Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Waveform Calculator folder on the left side, and
choose Calculations. Or, select Edit > Options from within the Waveform Calculator, then
choose Calculations.
Use this dialog to specify calculation options for the Waveform Calculator.
Objects
Table 8-71. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculation Options
Field Description
FFT Precision
Sampling Epsilon Specifies the value used in the uniform sampling algorithm of signal
processing functions. EZwave uses this value to determine whether
it needs to perform interpolation between X values of the waveform
at each t+dt sampling point. The sampling epsilon value is relative to
the scale of the waveform being sampled.
Window Shape Specifies the window shape:
• Symmetric — Standard FFT setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
The Window Shape setting set here is used as the default within FFT
windows and functions. For more information see “Window Shapes”
on page 384.

528 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Calculator General Options

Waveform Calculator General Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Waveform Calculator folder on the left side, and
choose General. Or, select Edit > Options from within the Waveform Calculator.
Use this dialog to specify general Waveform Calculator options.
Objects
Table 8-72. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculator General
Options
Field Description
Notation Suffix Specifies the expression evaluation logic.
• IEEE — Specifies IEEE notation is used in the Waveform
Calculator (the default).
• Spice — Specifies SPICE notation is used in the Waveform
Calculator.
See also AMS_VIEWER_WFC_NOTATION in “Environment
Variables” on page 54 and command “setNotation” on page 857.
Trigonometric Angle Specifies the trigonometric angle as one of the following:
• Degrees — A unit of angular measure in which the angle of an entire
circle is 360 degrees (denoted DEG).
• Radians — A unit of angular measure in which the angle of an entire
circle is 2 pi radians (denoted RAD).
• Gradians — A unit of angular measure in which the angle of an
entire circle is 400 gradians (denoted GRAD).
Temperature Unit Specifies the measurement unit for temperature display as Celsius or
Kelvin.
Logic Panel Type Specifies the logic panel type as VHDL or Verilog, and uses the
appropriate notation.
Evaluation Result Display
Clear Last Result Clears the Expression Entry Area each time after the expression is
evaluated. This is equivalent to clicking Eval and Clear.
Always Plot Last When enabled, the resulting waveform is always plotted after the
Result expression is evaluated. This is equivalent to clicking Eval and Plot.
This option is enabled by default.
Reset all calculator Removes all existing variables in the calculator.
variables
User Extension Files

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 529

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Calculator General Options

Table 8-72. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculator General

Options (cont.)
Field Description
Load User Extension Specifies that user-defined functions are loaded at startup. Refer to
Files At Startup “Using and Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform
Calculator” on page 310. You can also use the environment variable
AMS_UDF_LOAD to specify a path to load extension files at startup -
refer to “Environment Variables” on page 54.
Directory path Specifies the default path for loading all of the user extension files.
These files must have a .tcl extension in order to load.
Load CalcPAD Specifies that waveform calculator scripts that provide equivalent
Scripts At Startup functionality to legacy AFS WaveCrave CalcPAD scripts are loaded at
startup. Refer to “Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts” on
page 1154.

530 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Calculator View Options

Waveform Calculator View Options

To access: Choose Edit > Options from the main menu to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Waveform Calculator folder on the left side, and
choose View. Or, select Edit > Options from within the Waveform Calculator, then choose
View.
Use this dialog box to specify Waveform Calculator display options.
Objects
Table 8-73. EZwave Display Preferences - Waveform Calculator View Options
Field Description
Enable Wizard Dialogs (fft, ifft, ...) Specifies that certain Waveform Calculator functions
with more than three arguments will display a specific
wizard dialog box to assist in setting up the arguments
(fft, ifft, …).
Enable Generic Wizard Forms Specifies that a generic form is displayed for every
Waveform Calculator function to assist with setting up
the arguments.
Waveform Calculator in Specifies that the Waveform Calculator will open in an
Independent Window independent window.
Enable Function Name Completion Specifies that the possible function names are displayed
in Entry Field as you type in the Waveform Calculator entry field.
Calculator Layout Selection Specifies the layout of the shell, button and
documentation help panes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 531

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Filter Dialog Box

Filter Dialog Box

To access: Click on the filter icon at the right of a parameter column heading on the
Parameter Table Dialog Box.
Use this dialog box to filter the compound waveform runs that are displayed. You can filter by
selecting parameters values from a list or by specifying conditions.
Figure 8-25. Filter Dialog Box With List Option Selected

532 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Filter Dialog Box

Figure 8-26. Filter Dialog Box With Condition Option Selected

Objects
Table 8-74. Filter Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Parameter Displays the parameter to filter on.
List Selects the List filter option.
Select Items in List Select the required parameter value(s) from this list and click OK to
filter the runs to be displayed on the Parameter Table Dialog Box.
Show All/Hide All You can show all runs or hide all runs for this parameter.
Condition Selects the Condition filter option.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 533

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Filter Dialog Box

Table 8-74. Filter Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Select Items on Choose the required condition from the menu and enter a parameter
Condition value. The available operators on the values are:
• equals
• less than
• less than or equal
• greater than
• greater than or equal
• contains
• begins with
• ends with
• in
• does not equal
• does not contain
• does not begin with
• does not end with
• not in.
Optionally, select And or Or and choose a condition from the
second menu and enter a second value.
Click OK to filter the runs to be displayed on the Parameter Table
Dialog Box.
Automatically Show Results that match the filter become visible in the graph area when
Filtered Results you click OK.

Usage Notes
When you click OK on the Filter Dialog Box:

• runs in the Parameter Table are filtered out if they do not match the filter:
o the corresponding table rows are hidden
o compound items are hidden in the graph area.
• runs in the Parameter Table are filtered in if they match the filter:
o the corresponding table rows are visible
o if the Automatically Show Filtered Results option is selected, compound items
become visible in the graph area.
Related Topics
Parameter Table Dialog Box

534 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Find Tool Dialog Box

Find Tool Dialog Box

To access: Choose Edit > Find from the main menu, or click in the Waveform Lists.
Use this dialog box to locate specific waveforms by name.
Figure 8-27. Find Tool Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-75. Find Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Find in Specifies where to search. Choose from:
• Plotted Waveforms
• Structure List
• Waveform List
• List View
If the Structure View is disabled, the Structure List and Waveform List
items are replaced by Tree View.
Find Used to specify the search string. Wildcards are allowed in the
expression: asterisk (*) to match any number of characters; and the
question mark (?), to match a single character.
Exclude Specifies named waveforms to exclude from the search. Wildcards are
allowed in the expression: asterisk (*) to match any number of
characters; and the question mark (?) to match a single character.
Direction Specifies the direction of search when searching any of the list views.
The default is down.
Exact Specifies that the search will only return waveforms that match the
search string exactly.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 535

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Find Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-75. Find Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Auto-wrap Specifies that searching continues from the beginning of the list when
the search reaches the end of the list. If the search is in the up direction,
searching continues at the bottom of the list when it reaches the top of
the list.
Find Next Click to highlight the next waveform name that matches the search
expression.
Find All Click to highlight all the waveform names that matches the search
expression.

536 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Jitter Tool Dialog Box

Jitter Tool Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Jitter from the main menu.
Use this dialog to analyze Time Domain clock jitter between any digital and analog target
signals with respect to a reference period or frequency, or to calculate Phase Noise jitter. The
Jitter Tool dialog box is shown in the figures below. The fields displayed on this dialog box
change according to the Jitter Selection.
Figure 8-28. Jitter Tool Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 537

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Jitter Tool Dialog Box

Figure 8-29. Jitter Tool Dialog Box - Phase Noise Tab

Objects
Table 8-76. Jitter Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Jitter Selection Specifies the type of jitter analysis to perform. The options available in
the dialog box change based on the jitter type selected.
Output Waveform Specifies a name for the resulting jitter waveform. The default name is
<jitter_type>_jitter. If a jitter result waveform with the given name is
already plotted in the active graph window and you leave the output
waveform name unchanged in this field, the jitter result waveform will
be updated according to the jitter setup options when you click Apply or
OK.

538 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Jitter Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-76. Jitter Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Plot Jitter in New Plots the resulting jitter waveform in a new graph window.
Window
Source Waveform(s) (Controls available in this section vary by jitter type or dialog box
tab)
Waveform List Select the source waveform(s) for which jitter is calculated. Either:
• Drag waveforms from the active graph window into the Waveform
List area, or
• Select waveforms in the active graph window click the Add Selected
Waveforms icon to add them to the Wavefrom List area.
Period Calculation Options (for Source or Reference Waveforms)
Reference Waveform Select a reference waveform for the calculation. Select waveforms in the
active graph window or Waveform List and click the Add Selected
Waveforms icon.
Only available for TIE jitter.
Topline/Baseline Topline specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of a signal.
Baseline specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of a signal.
Specify Automatic to have these values computed.
Single Threshold Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for a signal.
Specify Automatic to have this value computed.
Reference Period or Frequency
Reference Period or Specifies the Reference Period or Reference Frequency.
Frequency
Fundamental Specifies the Fundamental Frequency (Phase Noise tab).
Frequency
Jitter Setup (Controls available in this section vary by jitter type or dialog box tab)
Duty Cycle With this option set to Automatic the tool uses the dedicated Duty
Cycle measure from the Measurement Tool to calculate the amount of
time the signal is active per period, for use in the jitter calculation
(automatic Topline and Baseline parameters are used for Duty Cycle
calculation). If you want to specify this value manually, select the User
Defined option and enter the numeric value in the field to the right
(default = 0.5). This value can be specified as a percentage using the
percent character (for example, 50%).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 539

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Jitter Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-76. Jitter Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Number of Cycles in Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles in the N-cycle
Sample sample, which will participate in the jitter calculation. Available only for
Period Jitter, Frequency Jitter, Cycle-to-cycle Jitter, and Long-term
Jitter.
For Period Jitter, Frequency Jitter, and Cycle-to-cycle Jitter, a default
option is available, which sets the Number of Cycles to 100. For Long-
term Jitter, the option Automatic is available instead; with this selected,
the number of cycles is calculated automatically as:

This is done in order to obtain at least 50 samples for each Long-term

Jitter point calculation, which is considered sufficient for the required
level of precision.
Start Time The source waveform time from which jitter is applied. Optional.
Stop Time The source waveform time to which jitter is applied. Optional.
Edge Trigger Specifies the waveform edge(s) that is taken into account during the
jitter calculations:
• Rising Edge
• Falling Edge
• Either Rising or Falling Edge, depending on which comes first in the
specified time range. (Default)
Jitter Confidence Interval Setup
RMS Jitter Specifies the RMS jitter value.
Gaussian Samples Specifies the Gaussian samples number sequence Start, End, and Step
Number Sequence values.
Confidence Level Specifies the jitter confidence level.
Display Jitter Statistics
Max Displays the maximum value of the result (output) waveform.
Min Displays the minimum value of the result (output) waveform.
Std. dev Displays the Std. dev between the Max and Mean values of the result
(output) waveform.
Peak-to-peak Displays the peak-to-peak value of the result (output) waveform.
Mean Displays the mean value of the result (output) waveform.

540 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Jitter Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-76. Jitter Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Histogram Generates and displays a Monte Carlo histogram of the result (output)
waveform showing the magnitude probability density distribution of the
waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 541

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Measurement Tool Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Measurement Tool from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to specify options for a variety of analog and mixed-signal measurement
operations for waveforms displayed in the graph window.
Figure 8-30. Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-77. Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Measurement Specifies the measurement category and type.

542 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-77. Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Waveform List Specifies the waveforms to apply the measurement to. The Add
Selected Waveform icon adds the currently selected waveforms
to the Waveform List. The Clear Waveform List icon removes
all waveforms in the list. The Delete icon removes the specified
waveform from the list.
Measurement Setup Specifies additional information specific to the measurement
selected, such as topline/baseline, edge trigger, and measurement
results settings. Refer to the specific section in “Measurement Tool”
on page 274 for details on these settings for the selected
measurement.
Measurement Results Specifies how the results should be displayed from one of the
following:
• Annotate Waveform(s) with Measurement Results. Default.
• Plot New Waveform of “<measurement type>” vs. <parameter>.
If there is more than one parameter to choose from, a dropdown list is
available for specifying the required parameter.
When more than one waveform has been selected for the
measurement, only parameters common to all waveforms are
available to choose from. This section is not available for all
measurements. Refer to the specific section in “Measurement Tool”
on page 274 for details on availability for the selected measurement.
Apply Measurement To Specifies where the measurement is to be applied from one of the
following:
• Entire Waveform
• Visible X Region
• Between Two Cursors
(Vertical cursors only)
Remove All Previous Specified that all previous results of that measurement type are to be
Results removed.

Usage Notes
The measurements Delay, Intersect and Slope Intersect can only be applied to a single
waveform at any one time.

Where the value Automatic is specified for a field in the Measurement Setup section, a
parameter is applied individually to each waveform. If a value is entered instead, this value is
applied to all waveforms.

You cannot use horizontal cursors to define parts of a waveform for use with the Measurement
Tool.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 543

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Refer to “Measurement Tool” on page 274.

544 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Analyzer Dialog Boxes

Parameter Analyzer Dialog Boxes

Lists the Parameter Analyzer Tool dialog boxes.
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Filters Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 545

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box

Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Parameter Analyzer from the main menu.
You can use the Parameter Analyzer Tool to generate “pivot” waveforms. That is, you can
change the running variable of one or more compound waveform(s) to one of the waveform’s
parameter values or to the y values of a different compound waveform and then plot. You can
also filter (exclude) individual parameter values and group parameters by color.
Figure 8-31. Parameter Analyzer Dialog Box - Plot Setup Tab

546 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box

Figure 8-32. Parameter Analyzer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Objects

Object Description
Plot Setup Tab
Source Waveforms:
Waveform List The Add Selected Waveform icon adds
the currently selected waveforms to the
Waveform List. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list. The
Delete icon removes the adjacent
waveform from the list.
The checkboxes to the left of each waveform
specify whether it will be used as the y-axis
when a new pivot waveform is generated (in
the calc database). Only compound waveforms
can be selected for the y-axis.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 547

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box

Object Description
X-Axis Choose a waveform or parameters to be used
as the new x-axis for the selected source
waveform(s).
Display Options:
Stacked Plots all the waveforms separately in different
rows.
Overlaid Plots all the waveforms together in the same
row.
New Window Specifies that the waveforms are plotted in a
new window, rather than the current active
window.
Advanced Tab
Run Filters:
New Opens the Filters Setup Dialog Box, used to
add new filter parameter names and one or
more values to be excluded.
Edit Opens the Filters Setup Dialog Box, used to
edit the selected filter parameter and value(s).
Delete Deletes the selected filter parameter and
value(s).
Color Group:
Group Parameters Selects a parameter from the list of all the
parameters for the current waveform.
Waveforms are colored depending on the
selected parameter value. All waveforms that
share the same value are displayed with same
color. See also the -colorgroup parameter of
the add wave command.

Usage Notes
Refer to “Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms” on page 256.

Related Topics
Filters Setup Dialog Box

548 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Filters Setup Dialog Box

Filters Setup Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Parameter Analyzer from the main menu and click the New button
on the Advanced tab of the Parameter Analyzer Tool dialog box.
Use this dialog box to select a parameter and specify one or more values to be excluded by the
Parameter Analyzer Tool.
Figure 8-33. Filters Setup Dialog Box

Objects

Object Description
Parameter Choose the required sweep variable from
which to exclude sweep points. Alternatively,
choose Tag to exclude nested sweep points by
reference to the run ID or tag number.
Values to Hide Choose parameter values to hide.

Usage Notes
Refer to “Analyzing Waveform Parameters to Generate Pivot Waveforms” on page 256 and
“Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box” on page 546.

Related Topics
Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 549

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Table Dialog Box

Parameter Table Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a compound waveform name and select Parameter Table. You can
also right-click on a database or folder that contains multiple runs and choose Run Filter
from the popup menu.
Use this dialog box to filter the runs that are displayed. You can also view the parameter values
and runs of a compound waveform, and define a group of parameter names where waveform
elements (runs) with identical sets of parameter values will then be plotted using the same color.
Figure 8-34. Parameter Table Dialog Box

Tip
If you right-click on a database or folder that contains multiple runs and choose Run Filter
from the popup menu, you can use the Parameter Table Dialog Box to select which runs are
to be shown, highlighted or grouped before you plot them. The icon for the database or
folder changes to indicate that a filter is currently applied.

Objects
Table 8-78. Parameter Table Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Waveform Dropdown menu selects the compound waveform.

550 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Table Dialog Box

Table 8-78. Parameter Table Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Parameter Table You can sort the contents of the parameter table by clicking on each of
the column headings. The columns are:
• Index - shows the parameter run index
• Parameter(s) - one column is displayed for each parameter name
• Show - allows you display only the selected runs
• Highlight - allows you highlight the selected run
• Group - Displays the associated run color, based on the color group.
You can filter the runs that are displayed by clicking on the icon at the
right of a parameter column heading. Refer to the “Filter Dialog Box” on
page 532. If a filter is currently in use, the icon changes to .
Show All/Hide All You can show all runs or hide all runs in the compound waveform.
Unhighlight All If you have highlighted a run, you can unhighlight it.
Color Group
Group Parameters Selects a parameter from the list of all the parameters for the current
waveform. Waveforms are colored depending on the selected parameter
value. All waveforms that share the same value are displayed with same
color.See also the -colorgroup parameter of the add wave command.

Usage Notes
Show and Highlight
You can choose whether to retain the selected Show or Highlight settings options after a
compound waveform File > Reload (or Ctrl+R) operation. Choose
Edit > Options > Automatic Reload and set the Keep Parameter Table Show/Highlight Filters
option.

Color Group Example

A compound waveform, Wf, has the following runs and parameters:

1. Wf_1: TEMP = 20, PCX = 1

2. Wf_2: TEMP = 20, PCX = 2
3. Wf_3: TEMP = 20, PCX = 3
4. Wf_4: TEMP = 25, PCX = 1
5. Wf_5: TEMP = 25, PCX = 2
6. Wf_6: TEMP = 25, PCX = 3

If you add TEMP to the Color Group, then waveforms Wf_1, Wf_2 and Wf_3 will use color1
and waveforms Wf_4, Wf_5 and Wf_6 will use color2.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 551

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Parameter Table Dialog Box

If you add TEMP and PCX to the Color Group, then the waveforms will all have different
colors since there are no waveforms that have the same TEMP and PCX values. However, if
there is also the following waveform run:

7. Wf_7: TEMP = 20, PCX = 1

then this will be plotted with the same color as Wf_1.

Related Topics
Filter Dialog Box
Automatic Reload Options

552 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

Pick Points Dialog

To access: Choose Tools > Pick Points or use the icon in the main toolbar to activate Pick
Points mode. You can also use the keyboard shortcut “p”.
Use this dialog box to place and manage pick points on a waveform, enabling quick
measurements to be made.
Figure 8-35. Pick Points Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-79. Pick Points Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Picked Values
Mouse Position Shows the X and Y coordinates of the current mouse pointer
position in the waveform row.
Axis The axis label. This is dependent upon the waveform type:
• X or Y for standard waveforms
• Real, Imag for smith charts, polar charts or other complex
waveforms.
Previous The X or Y coordinate of the previous mouse-click.
Current The X or Y coordinate of the last mouse-click.
Difference The difference between the current and previous values for
each axis.
Clear Values Clears all listed values from the Picked Values table.
Picked Points Waveforms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 553

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

Table 8-79. Pick Points Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Filter Names Used to filter the list of results to those matching the specified
term.
Disable All Disables the waveform(s) from pick point mode. The row is
grayed out and no new pick points can be added to that
waveform. A global button in the column header disables all
waveforms in the list.
Waveform The name of the waveform containing pick points. Click on
the column header to sort the list by waveform name.
X/Y The X and Y coordinates of the most recently added pick
point on the waveform.
Real/Imag Values for smith chart or complex waveform types.
Slope The value of the slope measurement calculated for the most
recently added pick point coordinates for each waveform.
Parameter Value of the parameter, if present, (for X/Y plot or smith
chart) calculated for the most recently added pick point
coordinates on each waveform.
Expression Assigned expression value, calculated for the most recently
added pick point coordinates for each waveform. Click the
Expression column header in the Picked Points Waveforms
list to assign an expression to all waveforms in the list.
Choose “Expression” from the list to disable expressions on
all waveforms. Refer to Table 8-80 for a list of available
expressions and their calculation methods.

Add Text Annotation Adds a text annotation to the waveform at the position of each
pick point in the current active graph window. The annotation
text contains the x and y coordinates of the pick point, and the
slope, parameter and expression values (if present). See
“Using Text Annotations” on page 187.
Adds the slope marker to all pick point coordinates on all
Draw Slope
waveforms in the current active graph window. See “Slope”
on page 288.
Add Cursor(s) Adds a vertical cursor at the x coordinate of the pick points on
all waveforms in the current active graph window.
Adds a horizontal cursor at the y coordinate of the pick points
Add Horizontal Cursor(s)
on all waveforms in the current active graph window.
Adds a delta marker between all pick points on all
Add Delta
waveform(s) in the order they were created.

554 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

Table 8-79. Pick Points Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Delete all objects plotted Removes all annotations, slope markers cursors and delta
over pick point markers markers currently attached to pick points in the current active
graph window. Pick point markers are not removed.
Clear Waveforms Clears the Picked Points Waveforms table and removes all
pick points from waveforms in the current active graph
window. The Filter Names text field is also cleared.
Save As Saves the contents of the Picked Points Waveforms table to a
*.txt or *.csv file.
Show Options Expands the dialog to expose pick point mode and mouse
pointer options.
Clear All Clears all listed values from the Picked Values table, clears
the Picked Points Waveforms table and Filter Names field,
and removes all pick points from waveforms in the current
active graph window.
Close Closes the dialog and deactivates pick points mode. All pick
points are removed from waveforms. Pressing the Esc key
will also close the dialog.
Pick Point Mode (Click Show Options to View)
Follow Waveform(s) When enabled, the mouse pointer is attached to the waveform
nearest to it, and can only be moved around in the graph
window in the selected mode: Snap to Data Points or
Interpolate.
When not enabled, the mouse pointer can be moved freely
within the row. Pick points will be placed at the closest point
(real or interpolated) on the waveform(s) in the row, starting
with the waveform nearest to the position of the mouse-click.
Snap to Data Points The pick pointer is attached to the current closest waveform
in the waveform row. It can be moved only to the position on
the waveform, where a data point is present. Pick points are
placed on the waveform(s) at the data point closest to the
mouse-click position. This is the default setting.
If multiple waveforms are present in the same row, one pick
point will be placed on each waveform in the row at the
closest to the mouse-click position data point, starting from
the nearest waveform to the mouse-click position.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 555

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

Table 8-79. Pick Points Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Interpolate The pick pointer is attached to the current closest waveform
in the waveform row. It can be moved anywhere on the
waveform. Pick points are placed on the waveform(s) at the
interpolated point closest to the mouse-click position
(minimal distance on x and y axes).
If multiple waveforms are present in the same row, one pick
point will be placed on each waveform in the row at the
closest interpolated point to the mouse-click position, starting
from the nearest to the mouse-click position on the waveform.
This setting is not used when waveforms use scattered or
spectral drawing modes. In this case, Snap to Data Points
mode is used.
Pick Point Mouse Pointer Options (Click Show Options to View)
Use Mouse Pointer Axis Specifies how the mouse pointer is displayed in Pick Points
mode and how pick points are added in the graph window:
• X&Y (default)
Both x and y bars and corresponding coordinates of the
mouse position are used to calculate the closest data point
and to add the pick point(s). Pick points will be added
only on the waveforms plotted in the row which is
currently under the mouse pointer position.
• X
Only the vertical bar (X coordinate) of the mouse pointer
is used to calculate the closest data point and to add the
pick point(s). If this mode is selected, one pick point will
be added at the same X coordinate of each waveform in
the active graph window (not just the row under the
mouse pointer).
If X&Y axes are selected for digital waveforms, the
horizontal bar of the mouse pointer will be displayed and
moved according to the digital waveform events (high,
middle, low) but only the W coordinate will participate in the
closest data point calculation.

Usage Notes
Only the last picked point for each waveform in the waveform row(s) will be present in the
Picked Points Waveforms list.

The information in the Pick Points dialog will reflect only the picked points of the currently
active graph window.

556 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

When a waveform is hidden, it is disabled in the Pick Points dialog box. Any existing pick
points on this waveform are also disabled, and new pick points cannot be added.

If an automatic reload occurs, all existing picked points placed on waveforms which need to be
reloaded will be removed. If “Keep N” mode is selected in the EZwave Display Preferences -
Automatic Reload Options, any pick points placed on the “kept” waveforms will not be
removed. If you choose File > Reload, all existing pick points are removed in all cases.

You cannot save/reload pick points using TCL or SWD scripts.

Table 8-80 lists the available expressions and their methods of calculation. In the calculation
method, wf is the waveform from the Pick Points Waveforms list for which the expression value
needs to be calculated, and x and y are the x and y coordinates of the last pick point of given
waveform.
Table 8-80. Expression Calculations
Expression Calculation Method
sin sin(y)
cos cos (y)
tan tan(y)
sinh sinh(y)
cosh cosh(y)
tanh tanh(y)
asin asin(y)
acos acos(y)
atan atan(y)
asinh asinh(y)
acosh acosh(y)
atanh atanh(y)
abs abs(y)
drv yval(drv(wf), x)
exp exp(y)
frexp frexp(y)
ln ln(y)
log log(y)
modf modf(y)
pow10 yval(pow10(wf), x)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 557

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pick Points Dialog

Table 8-80. Expression Calculations (cont.)

Expression Calculation Method
sqr sqr(y)
sqrt sqrt(y)

558 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Analysis Dialog Box

Power Analysis Dialog Box

To access: Expand a set of power analysis results (named POWER_<analysis_type>) in the
Waveform List Panel, right-click on the folder at the required level of hierarchy and choose
Power Analysis. Alternatively, choose Tools > Power Analysis.
Used to analyze power consumption of a circuit and its components over time.
Tip
Refer to “Analyzing Power Consumption” on page 264.

Figure 8-36. Power Analysis Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 559

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Analysis Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-81. Power Analysis Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Top Level Design Limits the results to those listed below the selected Top
Level Design.
Run Id For compound waveforms, specify the run.
Analysis
Set Hierarchical Depth Limits the analysis to the specified number of levels from the
top down. Results coming from parts of the circuit located at
a deeper level of hierarchy will not be listed.
Reference Column Name Specifies the reference column name in the Power Table on
which you can specify power thresholds and color scaling.
Choose from Min, Max, Avg, Sum, and Integ.
Analysis Range
Entire X Axis Specifies the entire input waveform range to be analyzed.
X Start Specifies the start of the range for the input waveform to be
analyzed. Results outside of this range will not be listed.
X End Specifies the end of the range for the input waveform to be
analyzed. Results outside of this range will not be listed.
At Cursor Specifies a single point to analyze the input waveforms. You
can drag the cursor to dynamically analyze results at
different points.
Power Table
Use Thresholds on Min | Max | If checked, specifies using thresholds on the value of the
Avg | Sum | Integ waveform in the range given by Lower and Upper.
Lower Specifies a minimum power consumption value. Results
below the specified threshold will not be listed.
Upper Specifies a maximum power consumption value. Results
above the specified threshold will not be listed.
Filter Names Used to filter the list of results to those matching the
specified term.
Filter Used to filter the list of results to those matching the
specified term.
Save As Saves the result of the analysis to a text or CSV file.
Copy to Clipboard Copies the results to the clipboard.
Color Scaling

560 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Analysis Dialog Box

Table 8-81. Power Analysis Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Use Color Scaling for Min | Max If checked, enables a color scale to be associated with
| Avg | Sum | Integ column values in the Power Table. The column is selected
from the Reference Column Name dropdown menu.
Max. Avg value Sets the power value representing the highest value of the
color scale.
Min. Avg value Sets the minimum power value representing the lowest value
of the color scale.
Analyze/Pause/Resume Analyze/Pause/Resume depending on the current state of the
dialog.
Clear Clear the results of the previous analysis.

Usage Notes
• Provides an interactive display of results from power analyses, requested by the SPICE
command .POWER_ANALYSIS in Eldo or Questa ADMS.
• In the Power Table, you can filter table entries on particular Type or Mode values by
right-clicking on the Type or Mode column heading to open a popup menu, and
checking the values you want to show. If there are more than ten different values, a
More item becomes available. Clicking on this opens the Power Analysis Selection
dialog box showing the full set of selectable values for that field.

Tip
See also Tutorial—Using Power Analysis for Static Leakage Analysis of a PLL Circuit in
the Eldo User’s Manual and .POWER_ANALYSIS in the Eldo Reference Manual.

Related Topics
Analyzing Power Consumption

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 561

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save As Dialog Box

Save As Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a waveform, waveform name or database, then choose Save As from
the pop-up menu.
Use this dialog box to specify what portion of the waveform(s) is recorded to the save file, and
to set wave-specific options for the save.
Figure 8-37. Save As Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-82. Save As Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Location
File Name Specifies he name of the file to save. Type the name, including the
extension, or click to browse for a path name and filename.

562 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save As Dialog Box

Table 8-82. Save As Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Save as Type Specifies that the file is saved as one of the following:
• MGC Database Files (.wdb)
• SPICE PWL (.sti)
• TXT (Text File) (.txt)
• CSV (Comma delimited) (.csv)
Compress With Specifies that the save file is compressed in gzip format. For
example, a gzipped MGC Database File (.wdb.gz).
Overwrite existing file Specifies that new data is saved over the old file if the file already
exists.
Options
X Range Setup Specifies the portion of the waveform to save as one of the
following:
• Entire Waveforms
• Minimum / Maximum — The area between two specified X
values.
Enter the X values in the text boxes. If you enter a value that is
beyond the range of the plotted waveform, the value is set to
the minimum or maximum value, as appropriate.
• Visible X Region Only — Only available for plotted
waveforms.
• Between Two Cursors — The area between two vertical
cursors Only available for plotted waveforms.
Use the dropdown lists to select the two cursors to save
between. All cursors on the waveform selected are listed in the
dropdown lists, even cursors that are not currently visible in
the window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 563

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save As Dialog Box

Table 8-82. Save As Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Data Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Specifies that only existing waveform
data points are saved. No interpolation or filtering is
performed.
• Uniform Sampling — Specifies that data points are saved
based on a sampling of the waveform. When you select this
option, an additional field displays, allowing you to enter a
sampling value and select a sampling unit from a dropdown
list for each x-axis unit being saved.
• Cubic Spline Sampling — Specifies that interpolated points
are computed using the Cubic Spline method rather than linear
interpolation.
• At Cursor Locations — Specifies that the cursors on the
waveform(s) being saved are used as the data points. When
you select this option, an additional field displays, allowing
you to select the cursors to use.
Spice pwl
Absolute Derivative Limit Specifies the absolute tolerance and enable filtering of output
points by performing a slope based comparison. Only available if
the file type is Spice PWL (.sti).
Relative Derivative Limit Specifies the relative tolerance and enable filtering of output
points by performing a slope based comparison. Only available if
the file type is Spice PWL (.sti).
Delta Limit Specifies the threshold the lower limit threshold and enable
filtering of output points by performing an absolute variation
comparison. Only available if the file type is Spice PWL (.sti).

Usage Notes
• For details on customizing the Save As options, refer to“Save Data Options” on
page 484.
• When saving a database as a SPICE PWL file (.sti), only waveforms that contain voltage
or current sources are saved. If a database contains waveforms with neither voltage or
current sources, those waveforms are ignored.
• When compressing a saved file in gzipped format the original file is not removed. This
can be removed manually to reduce the amount of disk space required.

564 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Save Windows Dialog Box

Save Windows Dialog Box

To access: Choose File > Save from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to save the currently open window(s).
Objects
Table 8-83. Save Windows Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
File Name Specifies the path to the file in which to save the window(s)
Overwrite existing file Specifies that if a file with the same path and name exists, it is
overwritten.
Save in TCL Saves the window in TCL (.tcl) format
Save in SWD Saves the window in SWD (.swd) format.
Save Active Window Only the currently active window is saved.
Save All Windows All open windows are saved.
Save Related Database Specifies to also save a database file (.wdb) corresponding to the
waveforms in the window or windows being saved. This option is
only available when Save in SWD is selected.

Usage Notes
If the window is saved as a TCL script, or a SWD script without the related database, the path to
the database (.wdb file) within the script may be written as an absolute path, a path relative to
the environment variable AMS_EZDO_ROOT or a path relative to the saved script, depending
on the Save As Paths settings in Save Data Options.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 565

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Select Hierarchy Dialog Box

Select Hierarchy Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Add > Compare by Hierarchy from the
main menu.
This dialog box is part of the Waveform Compare Tool. Use it to specify the reference and test
hierarchies for waveform comparison.
Figure 8-38. Select Hierarchy Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-84. Select Hierarchy Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Reference Hierarchy Level
Select a Hierarchy Specifies the reference design hierarchy for waveform comparison.
Select the hierarchy from the reference database in the upper part of
the Waveform List, and click the Add Selected Hierarchies icon .
Test Hierarchy Level
Specify a different Specifies a test hierarchy with a different name to the reference
name for the test hierarchy. Unchecked by default.
hierarchy level
Select a Hierarchy Specifies the test design hierarchy for waveform comparison. Select
the hierarchy from the reference database in the upper part of the
Waveform List, and click the Add Selected Hierarchies icon .

566 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Select Hierarchy Dialog Box

Table 8-84. Select Hierarchy Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Compare Waveforms Specifies the types of waveforms to include in the comparison. Select
of Type one or more of:
• In
• Out
• InOut
• Internal
• Port
Recursive Search Specifies that the Waveform Compare Tool searches the hierarchies
recursively during the waveform comparison.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 567

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Select Waveforms Dialog Box

Select Waveforms Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Compare > Add > Compare by Waveform from the
main menu.
This dialog box is part of the Waveform Compare Tool. Use it to specify the reference and test
waveforms for comparison.
Figure 8-39. Select Waveforms Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-85. Select Waveforms Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Add Waveforms Specifies the waveforms from the reference database to compare. The
from Reference reference waveforms to compare are listed on the left. Use the Add,
Database Remove and Re-order buttons to modify this list. The order of the list
only matters if the Take Corresponding Waveforms in Test
Database options is unchecked.
Add Waveforms Specifies the waveforms from the test database to compare. The white
from Test Database area on the left contains the list of test waveforms to compare.
Available if Take Corresponding Waveforms in Test Database is
unchecked. Use the Add, Remove and Re-order buttons to modify this
list.
Take Corresponding Specifies that waveforms with the same name are compared from the
Waveforms in Test reference and test databases. Enabled by default.
Database

568 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

To access: Choose Edit > Shortcuts Manager from the main menu.
You can modify the default EZwave keyboard shortcuts, assigning key strokes to actions. You
can also select alternative key schemes, and import or export key schemes using the *.ezkey file
format.
Tip
Refer to “Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts” on page 64.

Figure 8-40. Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 569

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-86. Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Scheme
Scheme dropdown menu Selects an available keyboard scheme.
Load Imports a *.ezkey keyboard schema file.
Apply and Save Applies the changes and exports the keyboard schema to a
*.ezkey file.
Actions
Filter Actions Specifies the text used to filter the Action column in the
Actions table.
Click to clear the filter.
By Category dropdown menu Filters the Category column in the Actions table.
By Context dropdown menu Filters the Context column in the Actions table.
Actions table Displays the Action, its Category and Context, and the
associated Key Stroke together with a Description. Click on
a column name to sort the table by that column.
Unbind Selection Removes the associated key stroke from the action selected
on the Actions table.
Restore Selected To Last Saved Reverts the selected Action table row to the last saved value
Show Empty Key Strokes When checked, filters the Actions table to show only those
actions that do not have an associated key stroke.
Edit
Key Stroke Specifies the keyboard shortcut for the action. For example,
to use Ctrl+S for an action, click in the Key Stroke field, hold
down the Ctrl key and press S. Then click the Update
button.
Description Specifies the keyboard shortcut description for the action.
Click the Update button to set.
Issues
Issues table Displays the Action, its Context, and the associated Key
Stroke for any actions where there are issues that need to be
resolved. For example conflicts with the same shortcuts used
for actions in the same context. Click on a row in the table
and correct the issue in the Edit pane.

570 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Shortcuts Manager Dialog Box

Related Topics
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 571

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Update Waveforms Dialog Box

Update Waveforms Dialog Box

To access: Right-click on a waveform database in the Waveform List, and select Update
Waveforms.
Use this dialog to update plotted waveforms with new results from subsequent runs. Allows you
to compare results from multiple .wdb files. Any changes made to the settings on this dialog box
are preserved and saved on exit.
Figure 8-41. Update Waveforms Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-87. Update Waveforms Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Show Existing & New Updated waveforms are shown overlaid over the previous result.
Together
Replace The existing plotted waveforms are replaced with the new result.

572 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Update Waveforms Dialog Box

Table 8-87. Update Waveforms Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Update Target Selects which waveforms to apply the update to:
• All Windows
The waveforms in all open graph windows are updated
• Active Window Only
The waveforms in the currently active graph window are
updated
• Plotted Waveforms
Only the waveforms specified in the Plotted Waveforms List
are updated.
Plotted Waveforms List Waveforms added to this list are updated when Plotted
Waveforms is selected as the Update Target.
Add Waveforms Opens a dialog to add waveforms from the currently active
Wave windows to the Plotted Waveforms List.
Clear All Removes all waveforms from the Plotted Waveforms List.
Remove Selected Removes the currently selected waveforms from the Plotted
Waveforms List.
Move Up / Move Down Used to change the order of waveforms in the Plotted
Waveforms List.
Allow Partial Match Waveforms that partially match the names within the database
are updated.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 573

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Names Display Dialog Box

Waveform Names Display Dialog Box

To access: Choose Format > Waveform Names Display from the main menu.
Use this dialog box to specify how waveform names are displayed. This is a global setting.
Figure 8-42. Waveform Names Display Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-88. Waveform Names Display Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Waveform Names Display
Waveform Hierarchy Specifies the hierarchy display as one of the following:
• Full Hierarchy — Specifies that the full hierarchy is displayed.
Default.
• No Hierarchy (Leaf Name Only) — Specifies that only the leaf
name is displayed.
• Display N Levels — The specified number of levels is displayed.
Justify Value Specifies how the waveform name is justified when displayed: Left
(Default) or Right.

574 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Names Display Dialog Box

Table 8-88. Waveform Names Display Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Database Name Specifies how the database name is displayed from one of the
following:
• Always Show Database Name.
• Show Name If Two or More Databases. Calculated (<calc>)
databases are not included in the count of databases.
• Always Hide Database Name. Default.
• Show Database Name in Tandem Mode. Database names are
always displayed in Tandem mode, irrespective of the three
settings above. Default.

Usage Notes
These settings can also be defined as EZwave display preferences. Choose Edit > Options from
the main menu to open the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box, then expand the Fonts and
Colors folder on the left side, and choose Waveform Name.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 575

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)

Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog

Waveforms)
To access: Right-click on one or more selected waveforms and select Properties.
Use this dialog to specify the appearance, displays parameters, and transformations applied to
waveforms. The Waveform Properties dialog functions differently depending on whether
analog or digital waveform(s), or digital buses or analog waveforms containing integer data, are
selected.
Figure 8-43. Waveform Properties Dialog - Appearance Tab for Analog
Waveforms

Objects
Table 8-89. Appearance Tab for Analog Waveforms Contents
Field Description
Appearance Tab (Analog Waveform Properties when multiple waveforms are selected)
Waveform Name Specifies a unique name for the waveform. The user-defined name
will appear in the display and on the tooltip display. Use the Default
button to reset the waveform name to the full name derived from the
database.
Color Specifies the color of the waveform. Select a color from this
dropdown list. Default is Automatic. For compound waveforms,
select Match Run to use a single color for all waveforms from the
same simulation.

576 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)

Table 8-89. Appearance Tab for Analog Waveforms Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Line Style Specifies the line style of the waveform. Select a style from this
dropdown list. Default is Automatic. For compound waveforms,
select Match Run to use a single line style for all waveforms from the
same simulation.
Note: Selecting a Line Style other than plain line may
significantly reduce waveform display performance.
Line Width Specifies the default line width of waveforms. Select a width from
this dropdown list.
Note: Selecting a Line Width other than 1 pixel may significantly
reduce waveform display performance.
Data Point Symbol Specifies the data point symbol of the waveform. Select a symbol
from this dropdown list.
Hide Waveform Temporarily hides the display of the waveform data (the waveform
name is not hidden).
Parameters Tab (Not available when multiple waveforms are selected)
Creation Date The date that the waveform was created.
Creation Time The time that the waveform was created.
Transformations Tab (Not available when multiple waveforms are selected)
dB The magnitude of each point of the complex waveform calculated in
decibels (20 * log (waveform))
Magnitude The square root of (re2 + im2) for each point of the complex
waveform.
Real The real component of each point in the complex waveform.
Imaginary The imaginary component of each point in the complex waveform.
Phase The phase of each point in the complex waveform. All phase angles
will be between -180 degrees and 180 degrees (-PI radians and PI
radians).
Continuous Phase The phase of each point in the complex waveform that includes an
accumulated phase angle from the previous points. Unlike the Phase
transformation, this transformation does not include a phase
discontinuity at the 180 degree boundaries. This transformation is
useful when analyzing waveforms with more than +/- 180 degrees of
phase shift.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 577

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)

Table 8-89. Appearance Tab for Analog Waveforms Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Complex Plane The complex plane is spanned by the vectors “1” and “i”, where i is
the imaginary number. A complex number z=a+ib can be associated
to a unique point (a,b) in the complex plane, and a complex waveform
of a collection of complex numbers can be represented as a curve (not
necessarily monotonic) in the complex plane.
Smith Chart The complex-valued waveform is plotted on a Smith Chart.
Polar Chart The complex-valued waveform is plotted in a polar display of a Smith
Chart.
Radix Waveform Properties (Available when analog waveforms containing integer data
are selected)
Specifies the radix used for displaying waveform state values. Choose
from:
• One’s Complement
• Two’s Complement
• Signed Magnitude
• Binary
• Hexadecimal
• Octal
• Unsigned Decimal
• Ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
Hide Waveform Temporarily hides the display of the waveform data (the waveform
name is not hidden).

Usage Notes
Changing any of the visual effects (line color, width, style or datapoint symbol) in this tab
affects all of the selected waveforms. Select Automatic to preserve the settings for each
individual waveform. Only the modified properties will apply to all selected waveforms.

If you change the line color, it only applies to that individual display of the wave. Further
displays will revert to the default color.

Since color is used to differentiate some states having the same shape, this can result in the loss
of visual information in the waveform. This can be addressed by using a cursor to access the
value.

578 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog Waveforms)

When you use either the Black Background, White Background or Monochrome color scheme
(chose Format > Color Scheme), any changes you make to the visual effects using the
Waveform Properties dialog box will apply to all three color schemes. However, a separate set
of visual effects is applied when using the Documentation color scheme, allowing you to use
different settings for documentation purposes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 579

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital Waveforms)

Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital

Waveforms)
To access: Right-click on one or more selected waveforms and select Properties.
Use this tab to set global options for the appearance of digital waveforms. The Waveform
Properties dialog for digital waveforms contains two tabs: Appearance and Parameters. When
more than one waveform is selected, a third tab is available: Digital Waveform Properties.
Figure 8-44. Waveform Properties Dialog - Appearance Tab for Digital
Waveforms

Objects
Table 8-90. Appearance Tab for Digital Waveform Contents
Field Description
Appearance Tab (Digital Waveform Properties when multiple waveforms are selected)
Waveform Name Specifies a unique name for the waveform. The user-defined name
will appear in the display and on the tooltip display. Use the Default
button to reset the waveform name to the full name derived from the
database.
Automatic Color Specifies the color of the waveform will be set automatically.
Color Specifies the color of the waveform. Select a color from this
dropdown list.
Parameters Tab (Not available when multiple waveforms are selected)
Creation Date The date that the waveform was created.
Creation Time The time that the waveform was created.
Radix Waveform Properties (Available when multiple digital buses are selected)

580 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Properties Dialog (Digital Waveforms)

Table 8-90. Appearance Tab for Digital Waveform Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Digital Radix Specifies the radix used for displaying waveform state values. Choose
(Only available for from:
digital buses) • One’s Complement
• Two’s Complement
• Signed Magnitude
• Binary
• Hexadecimal
• Octal
• Unsigned Decimal
• Ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
Hide Waveform Temporarily hides the display of the waveform data (the waveform
name is not hidden).

Usage Notes
Changing any of the visual effects in this tab affects all of the selected waveforms. Select
Automatic to preserve the settings for each individual waveform. Only the modified properties
will apply to all selected waveforms.

If the line color is changed, it only applies to that individual display of the wave. Waveforms
added subsequently will use the default color.

Since color is used to differentiate some states having the same shape, this can result in the loss
of visual information in the waveform. This can be addressed by using a cursor to access the
value or by reverting to the Automatic Color setting.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 581

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Waveform Calculator Dialog Boxes

Waveform Calculator Dialog Boxes

Describes the dialog boxes accessed from within the Waveform Calculator.
Auto Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Chirp Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Constellation Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Convolution Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Cross Correlation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Eye Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Histogram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Phase Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
PSS Residue Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Top Noise Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Windowing Transform Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

582 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Auto Correlation Dialog Box

Auto Correlation Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the autocor button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the autocorrelation function used in the
Waveform Calculator.
Tip
See autocor.

Figure 8-45. Auto Correlation Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 583

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Auto Correlation Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-91. Auto Correlation Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Auto Correlation Name Specifies the name for the AF output waveform.
Computation Method Specifies the method for calculating the PSD:
• Correlogram Method
• Periodogram Method
Refer to “Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density” on
page 380 for more information about these options.
Parameter Setup
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling frequency.
The number of sampling points for the FFT results is (Number of
Points)/2.
FFT computations are performed only on those signals having
Number of Points set to a factor of 2n (n = 2, 3, ...). If this is not so,
then a slower DFT computation is executed.
Number of Points by Specifies the number of points for the output waveform.
Section
Number of Points for Specifies the number of points in the AF result (Nauto).
Auto Correlation Result
Number of Auto Specifies the number of autocorrelation points used for the PSD
Correlation Points computation.
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the window shape as one of the following:
• Symmetric — Standard setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
For more information see “Window Shapes” on page 384

584 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Auto Correlation Dialog Box

Table 8-91. Auto Correlation Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Click to set the default Auto Correlation setup parameters.
Improve FFT Results
Ref. Frequency Adjusts results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified
reference frequency is 0.0.
Frequency Min / Max (Optional) Specifies the start and end frequencies used to display the
FFT results. Defaults are “Begin” and “End”.
Normalize Results Specifies that all results are divided by (Number of Points)/2, except
for the first point, which is divided by Number of Points.
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the signal from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant Time
Steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — Interpolated points are computed using the Cubic
Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.
Pad with Zeros Select to enable data padding with zeros.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 585

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Chirp Transform Dialog Box

Chirp Transform Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the chirp button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the chirp function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See chirp.

Figure 8-46. Chirp Transform Dialog Box

586 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Chirp Transform Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-92. Chirp Transform Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name for the result waveform.
Parameter Setup
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling frequency.
The number of sampling points for the FFT results is (Number of
Points)/2.
FFT computations are performed only on those signals having
Number of Points set to a factor of 2n (n = 2, 3, ...). If this is not so,
then a slower DFT computation is executed.
Click to set the default Chirp Transform setup parameters.
Number of Points for Specifies the number of points for the output waveform.
Result
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the window shape as one of the following:
• Symmetric — Standard FFT setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
Refer to “Window Shapes” on page 384 for more details about these
options.
Improving Chirp Results
Ref. Frequency Adjusts results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified
reference frequency is 0.0.
Frequency Min / Max (Optional) Specifies the start and end frequencies used to display the
Chirp results. Defaults are “Begin” and “End”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 587

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Chirp Transform Dialog Box

Table 8-92. Chirp Transform Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the output waveform(s)
from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant Time
Steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — Interpolated points are computed using the Cubic
Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.
Pad with Zeros Specifies that padding with zeros is allowed.
Output Options
Unit Specifies that the following plot options are enabled:
• dB — Specifies result waveform displayed in dB.
• Phase — Specifies result waveform for the phase displayed in
degrees.
• Magnitude — Specifies result waveform for the absolute
magnitude of the input waveform displayed.
• Real — Displays the real part of the result waveform.
• Imaginary — Displays the imaginary part of the result waveform.
Plot dB as Specifies the drawing mode as one of the following:
• Spectral — Specifies the “spectral” drawing mode. The default.
• Continuous — Specifies the “continuous” drawing mode.

588 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Chirp Transform Dialog Box

Table 8-92. Chirp Transform Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Scale Specify the plot scale as either:
• Linear
• Log

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 589

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Constellation Diagram Dialog Box

Constellation Diagram Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the cd button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the constellation diagram function used in the
Waveform Calculator.
Tip
See constellationdiagram.

Figure 8-47. Constellation Diagram Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-93. Constellation Diagram Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Parameter Setup
Delay Specifies the initial time delay before the first sampling is taken. This
is used as an offset in order to sample each symbol at the center of
each digital data duration.
Symbol Period Specifies the sampling period for the calculation. This value must be
deduced from the circuit.

590 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Constellation Diagram Dialog Box

Usage Notes
The source waveform must be a complex-valued transient waveform. If you have only real-part
and imaginary-part (or gain and phase) waveforms, you can reconstruct the complex-valued
waveform using the complex function in the Waveform Calculator.

Each scattered dot on a constellation diagram represents a unique symbol, and each symbol
represents unique digital data bits. Digital data is parsed into data lengths that encode the
symbol waveform. The period between two consecutive symbols can be deduced from the
circuit or can be measured from the transient symbol waveform. The Symbol Period is used as a
sampling period for generating the constellation diagram.

An inappropriate Delay or Symbol Period selection will result in a bad constellation diagram.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 591

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Convolution Dialog Box

Convolution Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the conv button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the convolution function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
Refer to “Convolution Function” on page 381 for details on how the convolution function
calculates the discrete linear convolution between two data sets.

Figure 8-48. Convolution Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-94. Convolution Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform(s) Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name of the output waveform.
Parameter Setup
Sampling Frequency Specifies the sampling frequency of the input datasets.

592 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Convolution Dialog Box

Table 8-94. Convolution Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Number of Points of the Specifies the number of points used in the first input waveform.
First Input Waveform
Number of Points of the Specifies the number of points used in the second input waveform.
Second Input Waveform

Usage Notes
All of the data points in the source waveforms must be equidistant. To create a uniformly-
sampled waveform data set, use the windowing function in the Waveform Calculator and select
the Uniform Sampling option. Refer to “Windowing Transform Dialog Box” on page 636 for
details.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 593

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cross Correlation Dialog Box

Cross Correlation Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the xcorr button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the crosscorrelation function used in the
Waveform Calculator.
Tip
See crosscorrelation.

Figure 8-49. Cross Correlation Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-95. Cross Correlation Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform(s) Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name of the output waveform.
Parameter Setup
Sampling Frequency Specifies the sampling frequency of the input datasets.
Number of Points of the Specifies the number of points used in the first input waveform.
First Input Waveform

594 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cross Correlation Dialog Box

Table 8-95. Cross Correlation Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Number of Points of the Specifies the number of points used in the second input waveform.
Second Input Waveform

Usage Notes
All of the data points in the source waveforms must be equidistant. To create a uniformly-
sampled waveform data set, use the windowing function in the Waveform Calculator and select
the Uniform Sampling option. Refer to “Windowing Transform Dialog Box” on page 636 for
details.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 595

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box

Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog

Box
To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the evmber button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the evmber function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See evmber.

Figure 8-50. Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box

596 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-96. Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Ref / Mod Specifies the source waveforms. Ref must be the constellation
diagram of a reference signal. Mod must be the constellation diagram
of a modulated signal. The Add Selected Waveform icon adds
the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List icon
removes all waveforms in the list.
Output
Phase Error (in degrees) Specifies the phase error output variable.
Magnitude Error Name Specifies the magnitude error output variable.
Error Vector Magnitude Specifies the error vector magnitude output variable.
Name
Bit Error Rate MPSK Specifies the name of the BER MPSK (M-ary Quadrature Amplitude
Name Modulation)-modulated output signal. Only available if Use Bit Error
Rate MPSK Param is selected.
Bit Error Rate MQAM Specifies the name of the BER MQAM (M-ary Phase Shift Keying)-
Name modulated output signal. Only available if Use Bit Error Rate MQAM
Param is selected.
Parameter Setup
Use Bit Error Rate Specifies that the BER for an MPSK (M-ary Quadrature Amplitude
MPSK Param Modulation)-modulated signal is estimated. Enter the M Param.
Use Bit Error Rate Specifies that the BER for an MQAM (M-ary Phase Shift Keying)-
MQAM Param modulated signal is estimated. Enter the M Param.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 597

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Dialog Box

Eye Diagram Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Statistical
from the dropdown list and click the eye button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the eyediagram function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See eyediagram.

Figure 8-51. Eye Diagram Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-97. Eye Diagram Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveform. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform Specifies the source waveform.
Parameters Setup

598 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Eye Diagram Dialog Box

Table 8-97. Eye Diagram Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Eye Period Specifies the eye period. The eye diagram is generated by overlaying
a semi-periodical waveform signal on an interval in X (usually a time
interval). This interval is defined as the eye period. A default Eye
Period is calculated based on period divided by 2.
Eye Period Specifies the eye type, either NRZ or PAM 4.
Offset Allows shifting of the eye as the open part of the eye is not always at
the center of the axes.
Minimum X and Specifies the range of waveform data used for generating the eye
Maximum X diagram.
Calculate Calculates the Offset, Minimum X, and Maximum X using the Eye
Period value and automatically populates the fields.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 599

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

To access: Select Tools > FFT from the main menu to open the Fast Fourier Transform Tool
dialog box. Alternatively, choose Tools > Waveform Calculator to open the Waveform
Calculator, choose Signal Processing from the dropdown list and click the fft button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the function used in the Waveform Calculator
and FFT tools.
Tip
See “fft” on page 749.

600 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

Figure 8-52. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 601

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-98. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
File menu Select File > Open Configuration to load a FFT configuration.
Select File > Save Configuration to save a FFT configuration. All
parameter of the FFT Tool GUI are saved, except the source
waveform and the output waveform names, with file extension
*.ez_cfg.
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name of the output waveform.
Parameter Setup
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling frequency.
The number of sampling points for the FFT results is (Points)/2.
If Points is set to a factor of 2n (n = 2, 3, ...), the FFT computation is
more efficient.
Click to set the default FFT setup parameters.
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the window shape as one of the following:
• Symmetric — Standard FFT setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
Refer to “Window Shapes” on page 384 for more details about these
options.
Improve FFT Results
Ref. Frequency Adjusts results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified
reference frequency is 0.0.
Frequency Min / Max (Optional) Specifies the start and end frequencies used to display the
FFT results. Defaults are “Begin” and “End”.

602 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-98. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Normalize Results Specifies that all results are divided by (Number of Points)/2, except
for the first point, which is divided by Number of Points.
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the signal from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant Time
Steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — Interpolated points are computed using the Cubic
Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.
Pad with Zeros Select to enable data padding with zeros.
Noise and Distortion Measurements
Display SNR, SNDR, Specifies SNR, SNDR (alias for SINAD), SFDR, ENOB, and THD
SFDR, ENOB, THD are displayed in the FFT graph area. Applies to non-compound
waveforms only.
Signal Frequencies (Optional) Specifies a comma-separated list of frequencies to be
considered as signal for the noise and distortion calculations.
Frequencies can be selected outside of Minimum Frequency and
Maximum Frequency. Example:
75e6, 200Meg
Number of Harmonics (Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be
considered. Default value is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 603

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-98. Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Bin Size Specifies the number of points to take into account around the
fundamental signal. For example:
• with Bin Size = 0, only the fundamental is taken into account
• with Bin Size = 1, the frequencies taken into account correspond
to the first point to the left and right for the found fundamental
and each of its associated harmonics.
The default value depends on the Windowing transform selected.
Plot FFT
Unit Specifies that the following plot options are enabled:
• dB — Specifies result waveform displayed in dB.
• Phase — Specifies result waveform for the phase displayed in
degrees.
• Magnitude — Specifies result waveform for the absolute
magnitude of the input waveform displayed.
• Real — Displays the real part of the result waveform.
• Imaginary — Displays the imaginary part of the result waveform.
Plot as Specifies the drawing mode as one of the following:
• Spectral — Specifies the “spectral” drawing mode. The default.
• Continuous — Specifies the “continuous” drawing mode.
Scale Specify the plot scale as either:
• Linear
• Log

Usage Notes
In order to estimate the power density spectrum of a random signal, only a finite part of the
signal is used in practice even if the signal is of infinite duration. In order to reduce the
undesirable effects of truncating the data records (leakage), it is convenient to apply different
types of Windowing that gradually taper the data near the ends of the record, thereby avoiding
the abrupt truncation of a rectangular window.

For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic option, unless
EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case, Eldo has already
considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

604 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box

Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the hd button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the harmonic distortion function used in the
Waveform Calculator.
Tip
See harmonicdistortion.

Note
Refer to “Harmonic Distortion Function” on page 383 for details on how the harmonic
distortion function computes the harmonics and the total harmonic distortion (THD) of the
input waveform signal.

Figure 8-53. Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-99. Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 605

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box

Table 8-99. Harmonic Distortion Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Output Waveform
Total Harmonic Specifies the name of the output variable. This can be used in later
Distortion Name computations.
Display Total Harmonic Specifies whether THD is shown as a gain (total gain in dB) or as a
Distortion percentage of the gain of the fundamental signal.
Parameter Setup
Fundamental Frequency Specifies the fundamental frequency to be used for the harmonic
distortion calculation.
Pick Value Enables the fundamental frequency to be selected directly from the
active waveform. With this option selected, mouse over the active
waveform and use the crosshairs that appear along the waveform to
select the fundamental frequency. The crosshairs will snap to the
nearest data point on the waveform.
Minimum Frequency Specifies the minimum frequency (fmin) to be used in the
calculation.
Maximum Frequency Specifies the maximum frequency (fmax) to be used in the
calculation.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

606 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the harmonicsmeter button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the harmonicsmeter function used in the
Waveform Calculator. This calculates the maximum Fourier frequency for each input
waveform.
Tip
See harmonicsmeter.

Figure 8-54. Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-100. Harmonics Meter Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Hierarchy

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 607

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

Table 8-100. Harmonics Meter Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Select a Hierarchy You can specify a database, folder or waveform hierarchy as the
input. Use the Add Selected Hierarchies icon to add the
currently selected hierarchy or simply drag and drop the required
item from the Waveform List into the <Select a Hierarchy> field.
The Clear Hierarchy List icon removes the hierarchy from the
list.
Recursive Search Specifies that a recursive waveform search is performed, starting
from the selected hierarchy.
Search Depth Specifies the number of levels deep for the waveform search,
starting from the specified hierarchy. Default is unspecified, which
corresponds to a full recursive search.
Search Pattern Finds waveform names that match the specified pattern. Default is
“*”.
Harmonic Meter Setup
Fundamental Frequency Specifies the fundamental frequency. Default uses the entire interval
as the fundamental period.
Number of Harmonics Specifies the number of harmonics in the Fourier analysis. Default is
500.
Relative Tolerance Specifies the relative tolerance in finding the upper Fourier
frequency limit. Default is 1e-3.
Absolute Tolerance Specifies the absolute tolerance in finding the upper Fourier
frequency limit. Default is 1e-3.
Number of Results to Plot
Plot Top Results Specifies the number of signals to plot, sorted in order of the
maximum difference. Default is 8.
Show Grid Lines Displays grid lines in the results window.

Usage Notes
The maximum Fourier frequency is calculated for each input waveform. These values are then
sorted from highest to lowest and the waveforms plotted in this order. Figure 8-55 shows an
example plot of one of the waveforms and its annotations.

608 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

Figure 8-55. Harmonics Meter Waveform Plot

A second plot is generated at the same time, showing the Harmonics Meter frequency values
sorted from highest to lowest (index), as shown in Figure 8-56.

Figure 8-56. Harmonics Meter Frequency Plot

A Harmonics Meter report is also produced, as shown in Figure 8-57, which provides advice
and guidelines on settings in order to obtain or improve the results of the harmonics meter
analysis.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 609

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Harmonics Meter Dialog Box

Figure 8-57. Harmonics Meter Report

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

610 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Dialog Box

Histogram Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Statistical
from the dropdown list and click the histogram button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the histogram function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See histogram.

Figure 8-58. Histogram Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-101. Histogram Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Parameter Setup
Number of Bins Specifies the number of waveform divisions (resolution) to use. The
default is 10.
Minimum X Value Specifies the X value at the lower bound of a window interval.
Maximum X Value Specifies the X value at the upper bound of a window interval.
Gather Values outside Restricts the histogram width to (mean +-SIGBIN* standard
Sigmas” deviation) and specifies the value of SIGBIN, which is equivalent to
the SPICE Eldo SIGBIN parameter.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 611

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Histogram Dialog Box

Table 8-101. Histogram Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Min and Max Bins When selected, the first (and respectively last) bin is centered on the
Centered on Min and sample min (resp. max) value. When not selected, the bin is aligned to
Max Values the right of the min (resp. aligned to the left of the max).
Sample Data When selected, the input waveform is sampled (the number of points
remains the same, but are equally distributed; see the histogram
function for details). When not selected, the raw Y values of the input
waveform are used.
Normalize Y When selected, the histogram height is normalized; the sum of the bin
height equals 1.0. When not selected, the height of the bins equals the
number of hits, and the sum of the bin height equals the total number
of points of the input waveform.
Shift Data so the Mean When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased by
Equals 0 the mean() of these values, so the displayed mean equals 0.
Shift and Multiply Data When selected, the Y-values of the input waveform are decreased by
so that Mean Equals 0 the mean() of these values, and then divided by the standard-
and Standard-Deviation deviation. So the displayed mean equals 0, and the displayed
Equals 1 standard-deviation equals 1.0. This option is available only if Shift
Data so that Mean Equals 0 is selected, above.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

612 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box

Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the ifft button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the ifft function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See “ifft” on page 778.

Figure 8-59. Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-102. Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name of the output waveform.
Parameter Setup

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 613

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box

Table 8-102. Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Start Frequency
• Calculate Stop Frequency
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Time Sampling
Start /Stop Frequency Specifies the start and stop frequencies for the signal.
Points / Time Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling time.
Click to set the default IFFT setup parameters.
Normalized Input Specifies that all real and imaginary parts of the result are divided by
(Number of Points)/2 except for the first point, which is divided by
Number of Points.
Improve IFFT Results
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant time
steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — interpolated points are computed using the Cubic
Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.
Pad with Zeros Specifies that padding with zeros is allowed.

Usage Notes
An IFFT analysis always creates results with an even number of points. This means that when
calculating results in conjunction with an FFT analysis, an even number of points with the FFT
must also be used if the following condition is to be fulfilled:

IFFT(FFT(signal)) = signal

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

614 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Phase Noise Dialog Box

Phase Noise Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the pn button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the phase noise function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See phasenoise.

Figure 8-60. Phase Noise Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-103. Phase Noise Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveforms Specifies the Nominal and Rms source waveforms. The Add
Selected Waveform icon adds the currently selected waveform.
The Clear Waveform List icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output
Waveform Name Specifies the name of the output waveform. The result waveform has
a frequency domain waveform and a dBc range.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 615

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Phase Noise Dialog Box

Table 8-103. Phase Noise Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Oscillation Fundamental Specifies the name of the oscillation fundamental frequency output
Frequency Name variable.
Jitter Noise Variance Specifies the name of the jitter noise variance slope output variable.
Slope Name
Phase Noise Variance Specifies the name of the phase noise variance slope output variable.
Slope Name
Parameter Setup
Start Time Specifies the first X value of a transient signal.
Minimum Frequency Specifies the start of the frequency band in which the phase noise
spectrum are calculated. Default is 1.0.
Maximum Frequency Specifies the stop of the frequency band in which the phase noise
spectrum is calculated. Default is (frequency of the derivative signal)/
2.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

616 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the psd button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the power spectral density function used in the
Waveform Calculator.
Tip
See psd.

Figure 8-61. Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 617

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-104. Power Spectral Density Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform
icon adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear
Waveform List icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Power Spectral Density Specifies the name for the PSD output waveform.
Name
Computation Method Specifies the method for calculating the PSD:
• Correlogram Method
• Periodogram Method
Refer to “Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectral Density”
on page 380 for more information about these options.
Parameter Setup
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling
frequency.
The number of sampling points for the FFT results is (Number of
Points)/2.
FFT computations are performed only on those signals having
Number of Points set to a factor of 2n (n = 2, 3, ...). If this is not so,
then a slower DFT computation is executed.
Number of Points by Specifies the number of points for the output waveform.
Section
Number of Points for Auto Specifies the number of points in the AF result (Nauto).
Correlation Result
Number of Auto Specifies the number of autocorrelation points used for the PSD
Correlation Points computation.
Number of Points for PSD Specifies the number of points for the PSD result.
Result

618 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

Table 8-104. Power Spectral Density Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the window shape as one of the following:
• Symmetric — Standard setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
For more information see “Window Shapes” on page 384
Click to set the default Auto Correlation setup parameters.
Improve FFT Results
Ref. Frequency Adjusts results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified
reference frequency is 0.0.
Frequency Min / Max (Optional) Specifies the start and end frequencies used to display
the FFT results. Defaults are “Begin” and “End”.
Normalize Results Specifies that all results are divided by (Number of Points)/2,
except for the first point, which is divided by Number of Points.
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the signal from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant
Time Steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — Interpolated points are computed using the
Cubic Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.
Pad with Zeros Select to enable data padding with zeros.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 619

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Power Spectral Density Dialog Box

Usage Notes
This dialog box accesses two different but related functions: calculating the autocorrelation
function (AF) of a signal waveform, and calculating the power spectral density (PSD) of a
signal waveform. The AF is an average measure of its time domain properties; as such, it can be
especially relevant when the signal is random.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

620 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
PSS Residue Dialog Box

PSS Residue Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the pssresidue button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the pssresidue function used in the Waveform
Calculator. This function compares every signal at “Stop Time” and “Stop Time - Period” to
calculate the maximum PSS Residue and plots the top signals in sorted order of the maximum
difference.
Tip
See pssresidue.

Figure 8-62. PSS Residue Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-105. PSS Residue Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Hierarchy

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 621

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
PSS Residue Dialog Box

Table 8-105. PSS Residue Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Select a Hierarchy You can specify a database, folder or waveform hierarchy as the
input. Use the Add Selected Hierarchies icon to add the
currently selected hierarchy or simply drag and drop the required
item from the Waveform List into the <Select a Hierarchy> field.
The Clear Hierarchy List icon removes the hierarchy from the
list.
Recursive Search Specifies that a recursive waveform search is performed, starting
from the selected hierarchy.
Search Depth Specifies the number of levels deep for the waveform search,
starting from the specified hierarchy. Default is unspecified, which
corresponds to a full recursive search.
Search Pattern Finds waveform names that match the specified pattern. Default is
“*”.
PSS Residue Setup
Period Specifies the fundamental period in PSS analysis. To find slow
drifting signals, try specifying integer multiples of the fundamental
period.
Stop Time Specifies the stop time. Default is “End” (maximum X value).
Relative Tolerance Specifies the relative tolerance for the PSS residue value. Default is
1e-3.
Absolute Tolerance Specifies the absolute tolerance for the PSS residue value. Default is
1e-6.
Number of Results to Plot
Plot Top Results Specifies the number of signals to plot, sorted in order of the
maximum difference. Default is 8.
Show Grid Lines Displays grid lines in the results window.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

622 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the snr button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the snr, sndr, enob, and sfdr signal processing
functions used in the Waveform Calculator.
Note
Refer to “Signal to Noise Function” on page 383 for details on how this function computes
the signal to noise ratio of the input waveform signal by using the Gain of the FFT result.

Figure 8-63. Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 623

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-106. Signal to Noise Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Waveform
Select Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. The Clear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Parameter Setup
Functions: Select one or more of the functions to be processed.
snr sndr enob sfdr
Minimum Frequency Specifies the minimum frequency to be used in the calculation.
Maximum Frequency Specifies the minimum frequency to be used in the calculation.
Number of Harmonics Number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default is 6
Sampling Frequency Sampling frequency of the source waveform. Used to manage
harmonic folding and aliasing. Default is none.
Bin Size (Optional) Specifies the bin size for the signal to noise measurement,
that is, the number of points to take into account around the
fundamental signal. For example:
• with bin = 0, only the fundamental is taken into account
• with bin = 1, the frequencies taken into account correspond to the
first point to the left and right of the found fundamental and each
of its associated harmonics.
Frequency List
Pick Points Specifies that frequencies are added to the list by clicking on the
waveform.
Pick from Cursors Adds the frequencies at the cursors on the specified waveform to the
list.
Pick All Frequencies These dropdown lists specify a pair of cursors to use as boundaries
Between Cursors for picking frequencies.
Pick Populates the frequency list with the frequencies between the two
specified cursors.You can also enter the frequencies manually.

Usage Notes
Only a complex waveform or a waveform representing a Gain is accepted as a valid source
waveform.

If no minimum and maximum frequencies are specified, the computation is applied over the
entire waveform.

624 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

The minimum and maximum frequency boundaries do not limit your ability to pick frequencies
outside of those boundaries in the Frequency List.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI
snr
sndr
enob
sfdr

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 625

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

To access: Select Tools > Spectrum Measurement from the main menu to open the Spectrum
Measurement Tool dialog box. Alternatively, choose Tools > Waveform Calculator to
open the Waveform Calculator, choose Signal Processing from the dropdown list and click
the spec. meas. button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the spectrummeasurement function used in the
Waveform Calculator and Spectrum Measurement Tool. Computes spectrum measurements on
the input waveform, including “snr”, “sndr”, “sfdr”, “enob”, and “thd”.
Tip
See “spectrummeasurement” on page 880 and “Spectrum Measurement Function” on
page 377.

626 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Figure 8-64. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box- Settings Tab

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 627

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Figure 8-65. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box - Measurement Results

Tab

Objects
Table 8-107. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
File menu Select File > Open Configuration to load a Spectrum Measurement
(or FFT) configuration. Select File > Save Configuration to save a
Spectrum Measurement configuration. All parameter of the Spectrum
Measurement Tool GUI are saved, except the source waveform and
the output waveform names, with file extension *.ez_cfg.
Source Waveform(s)
Waveform List Specifies the source waveform(s). The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveforms. The Clear Waveform
List icon removes all waveforms in the list. The Delete icon
removes the specified waveform from the list.
FFT Setup

628 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-107. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling frequency.
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the shape of the window. Use “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhanced FFT setup for spectral analysis
of periodic signals.
Click to set the default FFT setup parameters.
Measurement Setup
Frequency Min / Max (Optional) Specifies the start and stop frequency used in the noise
integration calculation. Default values are “Begin” and “End”.
Click to update the minimum and maximum frequencies for the
selected waveform(s).
Harmonics (Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be
considered. Default value is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics).
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the signal from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 629

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-107. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Bin Size Specifies the number of points to take into account around the
fundamental signal. For example:
• with Bin Size = 0, only the fundamental is taken into account
• with Bin Size = 1, the frequencies taken into account correspond
to the first point to the left and right for the found fundamental
and each of its associated harmonics.
The default value depends on the Windowing transform selected.
Display FFT
Unit Specifies one of the following:
• dB — result waveform displayed in dB.
• Magnitude — result waveform for the absolute magnitude of the
input waveform displayed.
• Phase — result waveform for the phase displayed in degrees.
• Real — displays the real part of the result waveform.
• Imaginary — displays the imaginary part of the result waveform.
Plot as Specifies the drawing mode as one of the following:
• Spectral — Specifies the “spectral” drawing mode. The default.
• Continuous — Specifies the “continuous” drawing mode.
Scale Specifies either a Linear or Log scale.
Measurement Results
Result Lists the waveform name(s) and expands to show the measurements:
• fund (fundamental frequency)
• dc power (value of the DC amplitude)
• signal power (value of the fundamental amplitude)
• snr (signal to noise ratio)
• sndr (signal to noise and distortion ratio)
• sfdr (spurious free dynamic range)
• enob (effective number of bits
• thd (dB) (total harmonic distortion in dB)
• thd (%) (total harmonic distortion in %)
• # Bin Fund (number of bins used in fundamental value
calculation)
• # Bin Harm (number of bins used in harmonic calculation)
Tip: Right-click on waveform names or measurements to see
more options.

630 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

Table 8-107. Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Value Lists the value of each measurement.
Tip: You can change the number of significant figures displayed.
Choose Edit > Options and select Data Format on the EZwave
Display Preferences dialog box. Choose the required Double Format
Precision from the dropdown menu.

Related Topics
Spectrum Measurement Function
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 631

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box

Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu. Right-click the
required function in the Chooser panel User-Defined Functions list and select Edit.
You can view, edit, run, save and reload User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator
using the built-in Tcl File Viewer.
Figure 8-66. Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-108. Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Text window Displays the Tcl function. You can edit the text in this window.
Status Message Displays status messages.
Reload File Reloads the current user-defined function.
Skip Skips the last error.
Skip All Skips all errors.
Continue Continues running the user-defined function, from the last error.

632 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box

Table 8-108. Tcl File Viewer Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Save As Saves the edited function to a specified file (.tcl).
Note: If you change the name of the function, it is displayed in
the User-Defined Functions list for the current session. When a
new session is opened, you can reload the function, see “Using and
Editing User-Defined Functions in the Waveform Calculator” on
page 310.

Usage Notes
You can drag waveform names from the Waveform List into the TCL File Viewer the same way
as you can when using the Waveform Calculator. The waveform name and path appears in the
text, as shown in the example below:

wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load")

You can add documentation information that then appears automatically in the Waveform
Calculator Help pane, as shown highlighted in the code example:

proc procName { {Param0 "wf(\"<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle\")"}

} {
### TITLE = procName - ProcTitleHelp
### HELP = ProcHelpDesciprion
### RETURN.TYPE = object
### RETURN.HELP = ProcReturnDescription
### Param0.HELP = Param0Help
### Param0.TYPE = waveform
wfc "
s0 = 1+1
s1 = 2
s2 = 3
wf0 = $Param0
"
return [ wfc "wf0" ]
}

If the user-defined function has some predefined values for a particular parameter, these can be
specified and subsequently selected from a dropdown menu on the Waveform Calculator dialog
box. Add a line for each of the parameters listing the possible values, as follows:

$PARAMNAME.POSSIBLE_VALUES = Value1,Value2,...,ValueN

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 633

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Top Noise Dialog Box

Top Noise Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose RF from the
dropdown list and click the topnoise button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the topnoise function used in the Waveform
Calculator. Plots the noise spectrum in order of spot noise at “Fstart” or integrated noise from
“Fstart” to “Fstop”.
Tip
See also topnoise and dataset topnoise.

Figure 8-67. Top Noise Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-109. Top Noise Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Hierarchy

634 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Top Noise Dialog Box

Table 8-109. Top Noise Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Select a Hierarchy You can specify a database, folder or waveform hierarchy as the input.
Use the Add Selected Hierarchies icon to add the currently
selected hierarchy or simply drag and drop the required item from the
Waveform List into the <Select a Hierarchy> field. The Clear
Hierarchy List icon removes the hierarchy from the list.
Recursive Search Specifies that a recursive waveform search is performed, starting from
the selected hierarchy.
Search Depth Specifies the number of levels deep for the waveform search, starting
from the specified hierarchy. Default is unspecified, which corresponds
to a full recursive search.
Search Pattern Finds waveform names that match the specified pattern. Default is “*”.
Top Noise Setup
Fstart Specifies the lower frequency limit.
Fstop Specifies the upper frequency limit. Default is “Fstart.”
File Specifies a file in which to save a sorted report of all noise
contributions.
Save Click Save to browse folders and specify the location for the report file.
Instance Specifies that report data is generated not only at MOS instance level,
but recursively at subckt instance level.
Run Specifies which runs to analyze for compound waveforms. Choose All
(default) or specify a run number.
Number of Results to Plot
Plot Top Results When Plot is enabled, specifies the number of signals to plot, sorted in
order of the spot noise. Default is 8.
Show Grid Lines Displays grid lines in the results window. Unchecking this box may
increase plot performance.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI
topnoise
dataset topnoise

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 635

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Windowing Transform Dialog Box

Windowing Transform Dialog Box

To access: Choose Tools > Waveform Calculator from the main menu, choose Signal
Processing from the dropdown list and click the wnd button.
Use this dialog box to specify the parameters for the windowing function used in the Waveform
Calculator.
Tip
See windowing.

Figure 8-68. Windowing Transform Dialog Box

Objects
Table 8-110. Windowing Transform Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Select Waveform Specifies the source waveforms. The Add Selected Waveform icon
adds the currently selected waveform. TheClear Waveform List
icon removes all waveforms in the list.
Output Waveform
Name Specifies the name of the output waveform
Parameter Setup

636 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Dialog Box and Field Reference
Windowing Transform Dialog Box

Table 8-110. Windowing Transform Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Input Method Specifies one of the following:
• Calculate Time Start
• Calculate Time Stop
• Calculate Points
• Calculate Sampling Freq.
Start /Stop Time Specifies the start and stop times for the signal.
Points / Frequency Specifies the number of sampling points and the sampling frequency.
Click to set the default Windowing Transform setup parameters.
Symmetric / Periodic Specifies the window shape as one of the following:
• Symmetric — Standard FFT setup. The default.
• Periodic — Setup is enhanced for spectral analysis of periodic
signals.
Refer to “Window Shapes” on page 384 for more details about these
options.
Window Parameters
Windowing Specifies a windowing transform to apply to the signal from:
• Bartlett
• Blackman
• Blackman-Harris
• Dolph-Chebyshev
• Hamming
• Hanning
• Kaiser
• Klein
• Parzen
• Rectangular
• Welch
Refer to “Windowing Transforms” on page 385 for more details
about these options.
Sampling Specifies the sampling method as one of the following:
• Use Data Points — Select if the input data has equidistant Time
Steps. The default.
• Cubic Spline — Interpolated points are computed using the Cubic
Spline method rather than linear interpolation.
• Uniform Sampling — Select otherwise.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 637

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Box and Field Reference
Windowing Transform Dialog Box

Table 8-110. Windowing Transform Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Pad with Zeros Select to enable data padding with zeros.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator
Waveform Calculator GUI

638 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix A
Eldo Simulation

The Eldo simulator outputs waveform data that can be displayed by EZwave. This section
covers the different scenarios where EZwave works with the Eldo Simulator.
Run Eldo With EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Complete Eldo Simulation and View Simulation Data Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Manual Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Marching Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Joint Waveform Database Read API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
AMS Results Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Run Eldo With EZwave

In this scenario, the Eldo simulator runs a complete simulation and outputs the data in JWDB
format to be directly viewed by EZwave.
Procedure
1. You can use one of the following methods:
• Invoke Eldo Simulator from the command line as in the following example:
eldo test.cir -ezwave &

This command invokes the Eldo simulator and directs it to run a complete simulation
and output the data to a file.
The simulator regularly saves incremental data to the disk (by default, each 100Mbs
of data). This enables you to run very large simulations without consuming too much
memory.
• Use the -noisaving option to disable incremental saves inside the Eldo simulator.
• Use a pre-defined configuration:
eldo test.cir -ezwave -wdb_config config.swd &

2. The simulator requests that EZwave display waveforms as defined in the config.swd file
(this is an EZwave Save Window file) instead of the .PLOT statements defined in the
netlist test.cir. If some post-processed waveforms were stored through config.swd, they
are automatically re-computed with new simulation data.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 639

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Eldo Simulation
Complete Eldo Simulation and View Simulation Data Later

3. When the simulation is completed, the simulator exits and EZwave remains until you
exit the program.

Complete Eldo Simulation and View

Simulation Data Later
In this scenario, the Eldo Simulator runs a complete simulation and outputs the data in JWDB
format to be read by EZwave. In EZwave, the data can be organized and the window contents
can then be saved for later viewing.
Procedure
1. Invoke Eldo Simulator as in the following example:
eldo test.cir

This command invokes the Eldo simulator and directs it to run a complete simulation
and output the data to a file.
Alternatively, if you want to reuse the JWDB server launched by Eldo for other Eldo
simulations, use the -jwdb_servermode option as in the following example:
eldo test.cir -jwdb_servermode

This option specifies that the JWDB server launched by Eldo can be re-used by other
simulations. Useful data is stored in a file pointed to by the environment variable
AMS_WDBSERVER_INFO, which by default is located in $HOME/.ezwave/
jwdbserver.info. To modify the default:
• Set the environment variable AMS_USE_ENV:
setenv AMS_USE_ENV 1

• AMS_WDBSERVER_INFO must point to a writable file:

setenv AMS_WDBSERVER_INFO /my/writable/folder/jwdbserver.info

Note
JWDB Server mode can also be specified in the eldo.ini file.

In this mode, the JWDB server will exit after the time specified by the environment
variable AMS_WDBSERVER_TIMEOUT (if Eldo is not using it). Its default value is
60 minutes. To modify this value:
• Set the environment variable, AMS_USE_ENV:
setenv AMS_USE_ENV 1

• Set AMS_WDBSERVER_TIMEOUT to the required value in minutes:

setenv AMS_WDBSERVER_TIMEOUT 30

640 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Eldo Simulation
Manual Status Update

2. To display simulation results, invoke EZwave.

3. In EZwave, use the File > Open menu to open the JWDB file generated by the
simulator. The waveform data displays.
You can organize data in different graph rows and create some post processing
waveforms. You can save the window contents using the File > Saveoption and then
reuse the “saved window” .swd file later on.

Note
For this release, the following limitations apply for this scenario:

• The post-processed waveform is not automatically updated during the simulation.

• If EZwave still displays data at the end of the simulation, the data is “reloaded” from
the disk. This can be time-consuming.
• Having EZwave display multiple-run simulation results may lead to internal errors.

Manual Status Update

Waveform data can be manually collected from a running simulation at an interval of your own
choosing. This enables you to get a status update on a running simulation.
Procedure
1. Invoke Eldo Simulator using one of the following methods:
Command line invocation: Invoke with EZwave using the following command:
eldo test.cir -ezwave &

Output in JWDB format: Invoke the Eldo Simulator and run a complete simulation as
in the following example:
eldo test.cir &

Then invoke EZwave and use the File > Open option to open the .wdb file generated by
the simulation.
2. To update the data in the EZwave viewer, click the Update Waveform Data button in the
EZwave toolbar. This updates displayed waveforms with new simulation data.

Note
For this release, the following limitation applies for this scenario:
If jwdb_servermode is set (from the command line or in the eldo.ini file) when an Eldo
simulation is invoked, the simulation output data cannot be accessed until after the
simulation completes.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 641

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Eldo Simulation
Marching Update

Marching Update
Waveform data can be collected from a running simulation at a pre-defined set interval. This
interval is set in EZwave and is run simultaneously with the Eldo Simulator. This automates the
process of updating waveform data viewed in EZwave.
Procedure
1. Invoke Eldo Simulator using one of the following methods:
Command line invocation: Invoke with EZwave with the following command:
eldo test.cir -ezwave &

Output in JWDB format: Invoke the Eldo Simulator and run a complete simulation as
in the following example:
eldo test.cir &

Then invoke EZwave and use the File > Open option to open the .wdb file generated by
the simulation.
2. In EZwave, select Edit > Options to invoke the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog
Box and click General to view the General Options page.
3. In the Marching Waveforms section, set the update interval by either of the following
options:
• Automatically Update Displayed Waveforms Every X time interval: The time
interval can be by second, minute, or hour.
• Automatically Update Displayed Waveforms Every X% of Simulation: This
updates based on the percentage completion of the simulation.
Be careful not to set too small of an interval. Setting a short interval increase the number
of updates and then the amount of resources globally used to update the waveform data
viewed in EZwave.

Note
For this release, the following limitation applies for this scenario:
If jwdb_servermode is set (from command line or in the eldo.ini file) when an Eldo
simulation is invoked, the simulation output data cannot be accessed until after the
simulation completes.

Joint Waveform Database Read API

You can use the Read API to access the Joint Waveform DataBase (.wdb file) generated by Eldo
and used by EZwave to obtain waveform data.

642 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Eldo Simulation
AMS Results Browser

This Read API is documented in the Joint Waveform Database Read API Reference Manual.

AMS Results Browser

In addition to using EZwave, you can also view and analyze Eldo simulation results and
associated files in tabular form using the AMS Results Browser.
Refer to the AMS Results Browser User’s Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 643

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Eldo Simulation
AMS Results Browser

644 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix B
Waveform Calculator Functions

Detailed descriptions of all the built-in functions available in the Waveform Calculator are
listed alphabetically in this section.
Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
abs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
absolutejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
absolutejitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
acos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
acosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
acot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
acoth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
add. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
allandeviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
asin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
asinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
atan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
atan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
atanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
atod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
autocor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
avg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
calcvartype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
cdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
ceil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
chirp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
complex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
conjugate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
constellationdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
cot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
coth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 645

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions

cphase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
cphytrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
crosscorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
cycle2cyclejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
cycletocyclejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
cycletocyclejitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
datatodig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
datatowf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
dchysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
db . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
db10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
deg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
derive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
drv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
dtoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
dtoaonbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
dutycycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
enob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
evmber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
exp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
eyeamplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
eyecphy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
eyecrossingamplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
eyedelay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
eyediagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
eyefalltime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
eyeheight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
eyeheightatx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
eyejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
eyemeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
eyerisetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
eyesetmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
eyesnr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
eyewidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
eyewidthaty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
eyewithtrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
falltime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
fft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
firstdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
fmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

646 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions

frequencyjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
frexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
gaussiandistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
gendecade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
genlinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
genoctave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
getelementat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
gmargin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
gptocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
halfperiodjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
harmonicdistortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
harmonicsmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
hdist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
hypot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
idb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
idb10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
ifft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
iipx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
imag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
integ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
ldexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
lesser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
localmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
localmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
longtermjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
maxdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
maxspectrumdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
modf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
mptocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
nand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
noisetosignaldbc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
noisetrantophasenoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
nor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 647

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions

oipx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
periodjitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
periodjitterbyintegration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
phasenoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
phnoisebydlm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
phnoisebymixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
phmargin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
plotjitterconfidenceinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
pow10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
psd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
pssresidue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
pulsewidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
rad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
reglin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
removepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
risetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
ritocomplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
rms_ac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
rms_accurate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
rms_noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
rms_tran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
ror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
samplelog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
samplepsd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
setAngleUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
setNotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
setTemperatureUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
settlingtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
sfdr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
shiftedmaxdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
sinad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
sla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

648 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions

slewrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
slopeintersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
sndr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
snr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
sorty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
spectrummeasurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
sphibyjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
sphifilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
sqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
sra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
stddev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
thd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
tiejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
timeabsolutejitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
timelongtermjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
timeperiodjitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
timestep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
todchysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
topline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
topnoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
trunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
var . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
wf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
wftoascii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
wftodata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
windavg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
xcompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
xdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
xnor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
xofmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
xofmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
xup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
xval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
xwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
xytowf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
yval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 649

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
Syntax Conventions

Syntax Conventions
The following conventions are used in the Usage sections of the detailed function descriptions
for Required, Required Replace and Optional Replace.
• Required — Function names are bolded and must be typed exactly as shown.
• Required Replace — Required argument place holders are in bold italics. You must
replace these arguments with a value or string. For example,
abs(wf)
indicates that you must replace the required argument wf with a value.
• [Optional Replace] — Optional argument place holders are surrounded by square
brackets [ ] and in italics. When using these optional arguments, you must replace them
with a value or a string. For example,
acos(wf[, x_start, x_end])
indicates that if you want, you can supply start and end values for x by replacing x_start
and x_end with values.

Note
The square brackets [ ] around optional arguments may be omitted in some Usage
lines of the function descriptions to improve clarity. In these cases, multiple Usage
lines are listed to show the different combinations of optional arguments.

650 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
Function Descriptions

Function Descriptions
All of the functions are available in the Functions list on the Waveform Calculator, and some of
them also appear as buttons in the calculator when the appropriate category is selected from the
dropdown list in the calculator.
Refer to Waveform Calculator for details.

Tip
Some example Tcl scripts are provided as User-Defined Functions for the Waveform
Calculator. Refer to “Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts” on page 1154.

The following tables list the functions by category.

Table B-1. Complex Functions
complex db10 imag real
conjugate gptocomplex mag ritocomplex
cphase idb mptocomplex
db idb10 phase

Table B-2. Jitter Functions

cycle2cyclejitter halfperiodjitter tiejitter timelongtermjitter
frequencyjitter plotjitterconfidencei timeabsolutejitter timeperiodjitter
nterval

Table B-3. Logic Functions

nand rol sla xnor
nor ror sra

Table B-4. Mathematical Functions

abs fmod ln sqrt
ceil frexp log xofmax
derive hypot modf xofmin
drv integ pow10 xwave
exp integral relation
floor ldexp sqr

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 651

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
Function Descriptions

Table B-5. Measurement Functions

bandwidth falltime pulsewidth stddev
baseline frequency risetime topline
crossing localmax slewrate
delay localmin slope
dutycycle period slopeintersect

Table B-6. Miscellaneous Functions

add firstdiff maxspectrumdiff var
atod gendecade phmargin wftoascii
calcvartype genlinear pivot wftodata
concat genoctave reglin window
continuous getelementat removepts xdown
datatodig gmargin settlingtime xup
datatowf intersect shift xval
dchysteresis join shiftedmaxdiff xytowf
dtoa length timestep yval
dtoaonbit maxdiff todchysteresis

Table B-7. Phase Noise Functions

absolutejitter cycletocyclejitter periodjitter phnoisebymixer
absolutejitterbyintegr cycletocyclejitterbyi periodjitterbyintegrat sphibyjitter
ation ntegration ion
allandeviation longtermjitter phnoisebydlm sphifilter

Table B-8. RF Functions

compress harmonicsmeter noisetrantophasenoise pssresidue
constellationdiagram iipx oipx topnoise
evmber noisetosignaldbc phasenoise xcompress

Table B-9. Signal Processing Functions

autocor fft rad sndr
chirp harmonicdistortion sample snr

652 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
Function Descriptions

Table B-9. Signal Processing Functions (cont.)

convolution harmonics samplelog spectrummeasurement
crosscorrelation hdist samplepsd thd
deg ifft sfdr windowing
enob psd sinad

Table B-10. Statistical Functions

avg eyefalltime eyewidth rms_ac
cphytrigger eyeheight eyewidthaty rms
eye eyeheightatx eyewithtrigger rms_accurate
eyeamplitude eyejitter histogram rms_noise
eyecphy eyemeasures larger rms_tran
eyecrossingamplitude eyerisetime lesser size
eyedelay eyesetmask max sum
eyediagram eyesnr min windavg

Table B-11. Trigonometric Functions

acos asinh cosh tan
acosh atan cot tanh
acot atan2 coth
acoth atanh sin
asin cos sinh

Table B-12. Special Functions

setAngleUnits setNotation setTemperatureUnits wf

Note
Special functions do not appear in the Waveform Calculator Functions list but may be used
for scripting.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 653

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
abs

abs
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Returns the absolute value of the waveform.
Usage
abs(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The absolute value of the input waveform.

654 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
absolutejitter

absolutejitter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Returns the absolute jitter value. Applied to SST Noise Analysis results.
Usage
absolutejitter(wf, f0[, f_start, f_stop, sampling_nb_points])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the name on the input waveform on which the absolute jitter is
calculated.
• f0
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency of SST noise analysis. Default value is
“Automatic”.
Note
If f0 is stored in the database by the Eldo RF simulator, this argument becomes
optional.

• f_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of the interval for the absolute jitter
calculation. Default value is “Begin”.
• f_stop
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of the interval for the absolute jitter calculation.
Default value is “End”.
• sampling_nb_points
(Optional) Defines whether sampling is applied to the source waveform and specifies the
number of sampling points. Default value is “Automatic”, for which 100 sampling points
are considered.
Return Values
Double. The absolute jitter value of the input waveform.

Description
In forced circuits, jitter is considered as a random stationary process and its variance can be
obtained from the phase noise spectrum. Absolute or synchronous jitter corresponds to the jitter
(average rms value) with respect to an ideal (jitter-free) reference source.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 655

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
absolutejitter

corresponds to the absolute jitter value.

Note
The calculation is designed for input waveforms SPHI, DB(SPHI), SPHI_SSB,
DB(SPHI_SSB), Lf and DB(PHNOISE), but not restricted to this list.

Examples
absolutejitter(wf1)
# This will calculate the absolute jitter for waveform wf1 with an
# automatically detected fundamental frequency that has been stored in
# the database by the Eldo RF simulator. The calculation will use
# the entire waveform. There will be 100 sampling points - the default.

absolutejitter(wf1, 4e6, 3e6, 5e6, 50)

# This will calculate the absolute jitter for waveform wf1
# with fundamental frequency 4.000.000 Hz. The calculation will use
# the waveform from 3.000.000 Hz to 5.000.000 Hz. There will be 50
# sampling points.

absolutejitter(wf1, f0=6e6, sampling_nb_points=200)

# This will calculate the absolute jitter for waveform wf1 with
# fundamental frequency 6.000.000 Hz and 200 sampling points. The entire
# waveform will be used for the calculation.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

656 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
absolutejitterbyintegration

absolutejitterbyintegration
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Calculates the rms absolute jitter by Sphi integration.
Usage
absolutejitterbyintegration(wf, fund[, fstart, fstop ])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the two-sided Sphi density waveform (in dB rad2/Hz vs frequency in
Hz) as computed using, for example, sphibyjitter. Only the positive side of Sphi is used.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency.
• fstart
(Optional) Specifies the lower frequency limit in integration. Default is “Begin”.
• fstop
(Optional) Specifies the upper frequency limit in integration. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The absolute jitter by Sphi integration of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 657

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
acos

acos
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the principal value of the arccosine.
Usage
acos(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The arccosine of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the principal value of the arccosine of wf. The input value should be in the range of
[-1, 1].

658 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
acosh

acosh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic arccosine of the waveform.
Usage
acosh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic arccosine of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 659

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
acot

acot
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes and returns the arccotangent of the waveform.
Usage
acot(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The arccotangent of the input waveform.

660 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
acoth

acoth
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes and returns the hyperbolic arccotangent of the waveform.
Usage
acoth(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic arccotangent of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 661

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
add

add
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Adds two overlapping waveforms, retaining non-overlapping parts.
Usage
add(wf1, wf2)
add(wf1[, x_start1, x_end1], wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. The summation of two waveforms.

Description
Data points in non-overlapping regions are unchanged in value. Input waveforms must overlap.

Examples
Figure B-1 shows example results when using the add and join commands.

662 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
add

Figure B-1. Example of add() and join() Waveform Calculator Functions

Related Topics
join

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 663

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
allandeviation

allandeviation
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Returns an Allan Deviation vs. Time waveform from SST Noise Analysis results.
Usage
allandeviation(wf, f0[, f_start, f_stop, sampling_nb_points, compute_variance])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the name on the input waveform on which the Allan Deviation is
calculated.
• f0
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency of SST noise analysis. Default value is
“Automatic”.
Note
If f0 is stored in the database by the Eldo RF simulator, this argument becomes
optional.

• f_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of the interval for the Allan Deviation
calculation. Default value is “Begin”.
• f_stop
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of the interval for the Allan Deviation
calculation. Default value is “End”.
• sampling_nb_points
(Optional) Defines whether sampling is applied to the source waveform and specifies the
number of sampling points. Default value is “Automatic”, for which 100 sampling points
are considered.
• compute_variance
(Optional) When set to “true”, calculates Allan Variance rather than Allan Deviation.
Default value is “false”, which calculates Allan Deviation.
Return Values
Waveform. The Allan Deviation vs. Time for the input waveform.

Description
Can be applied to SST noise analysis results.

664 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
asin

asin
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the principal value of the arcsine of the waveform.
Usage
asin(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The arcsine of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the principal value of the arcsine of wf. The input value should be in the range of
[-1, 1].

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 665

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
asinh

asinh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic arcsine of the waveform.
Usage
asinh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic arcsine of the input waveform.

666 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
atan

atan
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the principal value of the arctangent of the waveform.
Usage
atan(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The arctangent of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 667

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
atan2

atan2
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes and returns the principal value of the arctangent of y/x.
Usage
atan2(y, x)
Arguments
• y
(Required) Specifies the numerator of the input.
• x
(Required) Specifies the denominator of the input.
Return Values
Double. The arctangent of the input numbers.

Description
Computes the principal value of the arctangent of y/x, using the signs of both arguments to
determine the quadrant of the return value.

Upon successful completion, returns the arctangent of y/x in the range [-180, 180] degrees. If
both arguments are 0.0, 0.0 is returned.

Note
This function only accepts scalar numbers as input parameters.

668 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
atanh

atanh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic arctangent of the waveform.
Usage
atanh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic arctangent of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 669

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
atod

atod
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Transforms an analog waveform (or analog bus) to a digital waveform.
Usage
atod(wf[, threshold1, threshold2])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• threshold1
(Optional) Specifies the threshold or low threshold.
• threshold2
(Optional) Specifies the high threshold.
Return Values
Waveform. The converted waveform.

670 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
autocor

autocor
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the auto-correlation of the input waveform.
Usage
autocor(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs, points, sampling, padding, normalized, windowType, alpha,
nsect, nauto, ncorr, computationMethod, f_ref, f_min, f_max, samplingEpsilon,
windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points-1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default), “Interpolation” or “Spline”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros, before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left” or
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.
• normalized
(Optional) Specifies whether you want to take an average on the raw data to reduce noise
and smooth the frequency domain waveform. Specify 1 to turn this on, or 0 to not modify
the raw data from calculation. Default is 0.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 671

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
autocor

• windowType
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular” (the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.
Note
For Hanning, symmetric window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning
window in FIR filter design.
Periodic window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in spectral
analysis. This is because the Discrete Fourier Transform assumes periodic extension of
the input vector. A periodic Hanning window is obtained by constructing a symmetric
window and removing the last sample.

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha or beta value that is required by Hanning, Kaiser, and Dolph
Chebyshev windows. Default is “Default”.
• nsect
(Optional) Specifies the number of points by section. Default is “Automatic”.
• nauto
(Optional) Specifies the number of points for auto-correlation results. Default is
“Automatic”.
• ncorr
(Optional) Specifies the number of auto-correlation points used for power spectral density
computation. Default is “Automatic”.
• computationMethod
(Optional) Specifies the computation method. Legal values are: “PERIODO” (the default)
and “CORRELO”.
• f_ref
(Optional) Adjusts the results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified frequency
is 0.0. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the starting frequency used inside the power spectral density result
window. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the last frequency used inside the power spectral density result
window. Default is “Automatic”.

672 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
autocor

• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs. Default is “Default”.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
Defaults to the global setting in the Waveform Calculation Options. Default is “Default”.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic
option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case,
Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Return Values
Waveform. The auto-correlation of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the auto-correlation of the input waveform.

Performing an FFT analysis on a random signal in order to extract significant information is

relatively unproductive. A far better method is the calculation of the auto-correlation function
(AF). The AF of a signal waveform is an average measure of its time domain properties and
therefore especially relevant when the signal is random.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 673

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
avg

avg
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the average value of a waveform.
Usage
avg(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The average of the input waveform.

Returns an error if:

• both x_start and x_end are greater than the maximum value of the domain of wf, or
• both x_start and x_end are less than the minimum value of the domain of wf.
Description
The average value of a waveform is computed as follows:

integ(wf, x_start, x_end) / (x_end - x_start)

If x_end is greater than the maximum value of the domain of wf, and x_start is less than the
maximum value, x_end is automatically adjusted to the maximum value of the domain of wf.

If x_start is less than the minimum value of the domain of wf, and x_end is greater than the
minimum value, x_start is automatically adjusted to the minimum value of the domain of wf.

674 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
bandwidth

bandwidth
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Returns the bandwidth of the input waveform based on the calculation of its topline.
Usage
topline(wf[, db, mode, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• db
(Optional) Specifies the threshold value below the baseline (in dB) for the bandwidth
calculation. Default is 3.0.
• mode
(Optional) Specifies the bandwidth mode. Allowed values are: “low” (low pass filter),
“band” (bandpass filter), or “high” (high-pass filter). Default is “band”.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The bandwidth of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 675

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
baseline

baseline
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Returns the baseline of the input waveform based on the calculation of histograms.
Usage
baseline(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. The baseline of the input waveform.

676 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
calcvartype

calcvartype
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns the type of a Waveform Calculator variable.
Usage
calcvartype(name)
Arguments
• name
(Required) Specifies a variable name, entered between double quotes (“ ”).
Return Values
Integer. Returns the variable type:

• 2 - variable is a waveform
• 1 - variable is a scalar
• 0 - variable does not exist.
Description
Checks whether a specified variable exists in the Waveform Calculator calc folder or workspace
and, if it exists, determines whether the variable is a waveform or a scalar.

Examples
calcvartype("variable_a")

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 677

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
cdf

cdf
Creates a CDF (cumulative density function) from a source waveform.
Usage
cdf(wf[, shape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• shape
(Optional) Legal values are “continuous” (the default) and “step”. Using “step” specifies the
CDF is plotted as a step waveform.
Description
Creates a CDF from a source waveform.

If wf is histogram data, the computed CDF is based on the input data of the histogram, if
available, not on the histogram values. The number of points used is the number of points in the
histogram input data and not the number of bins in the histogram.

678 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
ceil

ceil
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the smallest integral value not less than each data point of the waveform.
Usage
ceil(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform containing the ceiling values of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the smallest integral value not less than each data point of wf. Upon successful
completion, each returned value is expressed as a type double.

Related Topics
trunc
round
floor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 679

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
chirp

chirp
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the Chirp Transform of the input waveform.
Usage
chirp(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs, points, sampling, padding, windowType, alpha, res_nb_points,
f_ref, f_min, f_max, samplingEpsilon, windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points - 1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default), “Interpolation” or “Spline”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left” or
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.
• windowType
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular” (the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.

680 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
chirp

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha or beta value that is required by Hanning, Kaiser, and Dolph
Chebyshev windows.
• res_nb_points
(Optional) Specifies the number of points of the result waveform. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_ref
(Optional) Adjusts the results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified frequency
is 0.0. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the starting frequency used inside the chirp result window. Default is
“Automatic”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the last frequency used inside the chirp result window. Default is
“Automatic”.
• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value. Defaults to the global setting in the
“Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
Defaults to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic
option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case,
Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Return Values
Waveform. The Chirp Transform of the input waveform.

Description
The DFT of a signal can be computed in a very efficient manner using the FFT. Equivalently,
this corresponds to computation of samples of the Z-Transform of a finite-length sequence
taken at equally spaced points around the unit circle. The most efficient algorithm used for
computing the DFT in the Z domain is the Chirp Z-Transform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 681

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
chirp

All input and output parameters can be selected in the same way as for the FFT option.

Note
A normalization is achieved by dividing all the data by: (points)/2.

682 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
complex

complex
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Constructs a complex waveform from two input waveforms.
Usage
complex(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. The complex waveform from two input waveforms.

Description
Constructs a complex waveform from two input waveforms. The input waveforms can be one of
the following:

• Gain in decibels (wf1) and phase in radians (wf2)

• Real part (wf1) and imaginary part (wf2)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 683

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
compress

compress
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Extracts the y-axis value of the waveform at the point where the difference between the actual
value of the waveform and the linear extrapolation of the waveform based on the computed
slope value becomes greater than val.
Usage
compress(wf, val[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• val
(Required) Specifies the compress value.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/array. The y-axis value corresponding to the compressed input waveform.

Description
Extracts the y-axis value of the waveform at the point where the difference between the actual
value of the waveform and the linear extrapolation of the waveform based on the computed
slope value becomes greater than val.

684 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
concat

concat
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Computes the concatenation of two waveforms, extending the first waveform by appending the
second.
Usage
concat(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. The concatenated waveforms.

Description
This command computes the concatenation of two waveforms, extending the first waveform by
appending the second. The first data point of the second waveform overlays the last data point
of the first waveform. The x-axis units of both waveforms must be identical.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 685

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
conjugate

conjugate
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Constructs the conjugate of the source complex waveform.
Usage
conjugate(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The conjugate of the input complex waveform

686 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
constellationdiagram

constellationdiagram
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Computes the constellation diagram of the complex input waveform.
Usage
constellationdiagram(wf, period, delay)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• period
(Required) The Symbol Period can be deduced from the circuit. It is used as a sampling
period for the calculation.
• delay
(Required) Specifies the calculation start time. By default, this is set to 0.
Return Values
Waveform. The constellation diagram of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the constellation diagram of the complex input waveform. The constellation diagram
is a sampled view of a trajectory diagram.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 687

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
continuous

continuous
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Converts any analog waveform to a continuous analog waveform.
Usage
continuous(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform.
Return Values
Waveform. The input waveform as a continuous waveform.

688 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
convolution

convolution
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the convolution of the two input waveforms.
Usage
convolution(wf1, wf2[, points1, points2, fs, samplingEpsilon])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• points1
(Optional) Specifies the number of points of the first input waveform. Default is
“Automatic”.
• points2
(Optional) Specifies the number of points of the second input waveform. Default is
“Automatic”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value. Default is 10-6.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs.
Return Values
The convolution of the two input waveforms.

Description
Computes the convolution of the two input waveforms. For two finite data sequences
x(n),n=0,...,N-1 and h(n),n=0,...,M-1 the discrete convolution is defined as follows:

y(n) = Sum(x(m).h(n-m)) with m varying from -infinity to +infinity

For signals x(n), h(n) that are periodic with period N, the discrete FFT of their periodic
convolution is equal to the multiplication of the separate FFT results. This relation is called the
Discrete Convolution Theorem. Using zero padding of x(n) and h(n) to make circular

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 689

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
convolution

convolution yield the same result as linear convolution, the following method can then be
applied for computing the linear convolutions of two finite data sequences x(n),n=0,...,N-1 and
h(n),n=0,...,M-1:

1. Zero Padding
x'(n) = x(n) n=0,...,N-1
x'(n) = 0 n=N,...,N+M-1
h'(n) = h(n) n=0,...,M-1
h'(n) = 0 n=M,...,N+M-1
2. Multiply FFT's of x'(n) and h'(n)
x'(n)->X'(k) FFT
h'(n)->H'(k) FFT
Multiplication:
X'(k).H'(k)=Y'(k)
3. Inverse FFT
Y'(k)->y(n)=x(n)*h(n) IFFT

690 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cos

cos
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the cosine of the waveform.
Usage
cos(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The cosine of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the cosine of wf, by default measured in degrees.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 691

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
cosh

cosh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic cosine of the waveform.
Usage
cosh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic cosine of the input waveform.

692 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cot

cot
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes and returns the cotangent.
Usage
cot(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The cotangent of the input waveform.

Description
Computes and returns the cotangent of wf. Cotangent is defined as the reciprocal of the tangent;
that is, cot(wf)=1/tan(wf).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 693

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
coth

coth
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes and returns the hyperbolic cotangent.
Usage
coth(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic cotangent of the input waveform.

Description
Computes and returns the hyperbolic cotangent of wf. Hyperbolic cotangent is defined as the
reciprocal of the hyperbolic tangent; that is, coth(wf)=1/tanh(wf).

694 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cphase

cphase
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Returns the phase of the input complex waveform in radians or degrees.
Usage
cphase(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The cphase of the input complex waveform.

Description
Returns the phase of the input complex waveform with unlimited bounds. In radians or degrees,
according to the option set in Edit > Options > Axis Data Units > Phase.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 695

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
cphytrigger

cphytrigger
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Creates first zero-crossing trigger waveform for C-Phi. Also used to compute UI jitter and
transition jitter.
Tip
Used in conjunction with eyecphy function.

Usage
cphytrigger(wf1, wf2, wf3, ui, tolerance, computation, input, x_start, x_end)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(A)-V(B) (or V(A), see input
parameter).
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(B)-V(C) (or V(B), see input
parameter).
• wf3
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(C)-V(A) (or V(C), see input
parameter).
• ui
(Optional) Specifies the minimum Unit Interval for the trigger. Default is “Automatic”.
• tolerance
(Optional) Specifies the tolerance on ui to detect transition. Valid values are “Automatic”, a
double value between 0.0 and 1.0, or a number followed by “%” (e.g. “20%”).
The transition threshold = (1 - tolerance/100) × ui.
Default is “Automatic” (20%).
• computation
(Optional) Specifies the type of calculation:
o “trigger” creates a trigger waveform.
o “uijitter” creates a UI jitter waveform.
o “transitionjitter” creates a transition jitter waveform.
Default is “trigger”.

696 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cphytrigger

• input
(Optional) Specifies the type of input:
o “differentials” specifies waveforms are differential lines, wf1 is V(A)-V(B), wf2 is
V(B)-V(C), and wf3 is V(C)-V(A).
o “lines” specifies waveforms are lines, wf1 is V(A), wf2 is V(B), and wf3 is V(C).
Default is “differentials”.
• x_start
(Optional) Start time of the input waveforms. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Stop time of the input waveforms. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. Returns a trigger waveform, or a UI jitter waveform, or a transition jitter waveform,
according to the setting of the computation parameter.

The trigger waveform is the waveform used to trigger the C-Phy eye, which is right aligned to
the trigger. Only rising edges are considered as triggering events, falling edges are at time of
previous edge + UI. The UI jitter waveform is the variation of the UI, that is, current_period –
average_period.The transition jitter waveform is the time for the input differential signals to
cross the 0 level line. This equals 0 when there is a single cross.

Related Topics
C-Phy Eye Calculation
eye
eyecphy
eyesetmask
eyewithtrigger

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 697

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
crosscorrelation

crosscorrelation
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the cross-correlation of the two input waveforms.
Usage
crosscorrelation(wf1, wf2[, points1, points2, fs])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• points1
(Optional) Specifies the number of points of the first input waveform. Default is
“Automatic”.
• points2
(Optional) Specifies the number of points of the second input waveform. Default is
“Automatic”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The cross-correlation of the two input waveforms.

Description
For two finite data sequences x(n),n=0,...,N-1 and y(n),n=0,...,M-1 the discrete cross-correlation
is defined as follows:

Rxy(n) = Sum(x(m) * y(m-n)) with m varying from -infinity to +infinity

Because of the following relation:

Rxy(n) = x(n) * y(-n)

the cross-correlation can be computed by performing a Convolution on x(n) and y(-n), the time-
reversed version of y(n).

698 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
crossing

crossing
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the crossing of a waveform relative to default (automatically calculated) or user-
specified Y level.
Usage
crossing(wf)
crossing(wf, ylevel, slopetrigger)
crossing(wf, ylevel, slopetrigger, x_start, x_end)
crossing(wf, ylevel, slopetrigger, x_start, x_end, option)
crossing(wf, ylevel, slopetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• ylevel
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the threshold of the signal. Specify “Automatic” to
have this value computed.
• slopetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameter to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “CROSSINGX”.
Return Values
Waveform. The crossing of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 699

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
cycle2cyclejitter

cycle2cyclejitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Computes the variation in time of the difference between the duration of two adjacent N-cycle
samples over part of, or the whole waveform.
Usage
cycle2cyclejitter(wf[, t_start, t_ stop, edgetrigger, nbcycles, single_threshold, topline. baseline,
threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that are taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”.
• nbcycles
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles in the time interval which
will participate in the jitter calculation. Possible values are an integer value or “Default” (1).
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline values are ignored).
If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Used for source waveform period calculation.
Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source signal, used for
period calculation. Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source signal, used for
period calculation. Default is “Automatic”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source signal, used for
period calculation. Default is “Automatic”.

700 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cycle2cyclejitter

Return Values
Waveform. The N-cycle jitter waveform of the input waveform.

Description
N-cycle jitter can be described as the variation in time of the difference between the duration of
two adjacent N-cycle samples (each sample consists of a selected number of adjacent cycles)
over the whole, or part of, the waveform.

For N=1, N-cycle jitter equals the cycle-to-cycle jitter. This type of jitter is calculated only on
the source waveform. C2C helps to evaluate the instantaneous and very short-term signal
stability.

The jitter RMS value horizontal marker is displayed over the result waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 701

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
cycletocyclejitter

cycletocyclejitter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Returns the cycle-to-cycle jitter, applied to SST Noise Analysis results.
Usage
cycletocyclejitter(wf, f0[, x_start, x_end, sampling_nb_points, nbcycles] )
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the name of the input waveform on which the cycle-to-cycle jitter is
calculated.
• f0
(Required) Specifies the Fundamental Frequency of SST Noise Analysis. Default is
“Automatic”.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (frequency) value at the start of the jitter analysis interval.
Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the X (frequency) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Default
is “End”.
• sampling_nb_points
(Optional) Defines whether sampling is applied to the source waveform and specifies the
number of sampling points. Default value is “Automatic”, for which 100 sampling points
are considered.
• nbcycles
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles which will participate in the
jitter calculation. Possible value is an integer value. Default is “Default”, corresponding to 1
cycle.
Return Values
Double. The cycle-to-cycle jitter value of the input waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

702 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
cycletocyclejitterbyintegration

cycletocyclejitterbyintegration
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Calculates rms cycle-to-cycle or adjacent k-period jitter by Sphi integration.
Usage
cycletocyclejitterbyintegration(wf, fund[, fstart, fstop, k ])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the two-sided Sphi density waveform (in dB rad2/Hz vs frequency in
Hz) as computed using, for example, sphibyjitter. Only the positive side of Sphi is used.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency.
• fstart
(Optional) Specifies the lower frequency limit in integration. Default is “Begin”.
• fstop
(Optional) Specifies the upper frequency limit in integration. Default is “End”.
• k
(Optional) Specifies the number of accumulated cycles. Default is 1.
Return Values
Double. The rms cycle-to-cycle or adjacent k-period jitter by Sphi integration of the input
waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 703

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
datatodig

datatodig
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Creates a digital waveform based on one or two arrays of data events.
Usage
datatodig(array_of_datapoints)
datatodig(array_of_x, array_of_y)
Arguments
• array_of_datapoints
(Required) Specifies the input array of points. For example, [[x0, y0], …, [xn, yn]].
• array_of_x
(Required) Specifies the input array of x values. For example, [x0, x1, …, xn].
• array_of_y
(Required) Specifies the input array of y transition states. For example, [y0, y1, …, yn].
Return Values
Waveform. A new digital waveform from one or two arrays of data events.

Description
If one array is specified, it must contain data points wrapped between square brackets ( [ ] ). The
first element defines the x value, and the second one defines the y value. Elements are separated
by a comma. For example, [[x0, y0], [x1, y1], …, [xn, yn]].

If two arrays are specified, the first array contains the x values, and the second array contains the
y values. For example, [x0, x1, …, xn], [y0, y1, …, yn].

The y values represent digital states. There are two representations supported for the states; the
IEEE 1164 Standard Logic states:

{ ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘U’, ’X’ ,’Z’, ‘W’, ‘L’, ‘H’, ‘-’ }

and a subset of the Verilog state set:

{“Hi0”, “Hi1”, “HiX”, “HiZ”, “St0”, “St1”, “StL”, “StH”, "StZ", "StX", "Sm0", "Sm1", "SmL",
"SmH", "SmZ","SmX", "Su0", "Su1", "SuL", "SuH", "SuZ", "SuX", "Me0", "Me1", "MeL",
"MeH", "MeZ", "MeX", "We0", "We1", "WeL", "WeH", "WeZ", "WeX", "Pu0", "Pu1", "PuL",
"PuH","PuZ", "PuX", "La0", "La1", "LaL", "LaH", "LaZ", "LaX"}.

704 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
datatodig

Note
State entries are case-sensitive and must be in quotes. Mixing state types is not permitted
and any invalid or unrecognized state is silently dropped.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 705

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
datatowf

datatowf
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Creates an analog waveform based on one or two arrays of data points.
Usage
datatowf(array_of_datapoints)
datatowf(array_of_x, array_of_y)
Arguments
• array_of_datapoints
(Required) Specifies the input array of points. For example, [[x0, y0], …, [xn, yn]].
• array_of_x
(Required) Specifies the input array of x values. For example, [x0, x1, …, xn].
• array_of_y
(Required) Specifies the input array of y values. For example, [y0, y1, …, yn].
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform with the specified input array(s).

Description
If one array is specified, it must contain data points wrapped between square brackets ( [ ] ). The
first element defines the x value, and the second one defines the y value. Elements are separated
by a comma. For example, [[x0, y0], [x1, y1], …, [xn, yn]].

If two arrays are specified, the first array contains the x values, and the second array contains the
y values. For example, [x0, x1, …, xn], [y0, y1, …, yn].

706 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
dchysteresis

dchysteresis
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Measures the thresholds and width of a DC Hysteresis waveform relative to a default, or
specified, Y-level.
Usage
dchysteresis(wf)
dchysteresis(wf, ylevel)
dchysteresis(wf, ylevel, measure)
dchysteresis(wf, ylevel, measure, x_start, x_end, option)
dchysteresis(wf, ylevel, measure, x_start, x_end, option, param)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• ylevel
(Optional) Specifies the y level at which the signal is measured. Specify “Automatic” to
have this value computed (as the middle of the top and base lines).
• measure
(Optional) Specify “Width” (default) to compute the hysteresis width. Specify “Left” or
“Right” to compute the thresholds.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value (run number) at the beginning of an interval. Default is
“Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value (run number) at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform, and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be annotated
with results.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”.
Return Values
Waveform. The thresholds and the width of the DC Hysteresis input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 707

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
db

db
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Converts the magnitude data of the input waveform to decibels.
Usage
db(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The magnitude data of the input waveform in dB.

708 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
db10

db10
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Converts the magnitude data of the input waveform to decibels (log base 10).
Usage
db10(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The scaled input waveform.

Description
Converts the magnitude data of the input waveform to decibels using the following equation:

db10 = 10 * log10 (x)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 709

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
deg

deg
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Converts the trigonometric angle of a waveform to degrees.
Usage
deg(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform corresponding to the converted input waveform.

710 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
delay

delay
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the delay between edges of a source waveform and a reference waveform.
Usage
delay(wf1, wf2, topline1, baseline1, dlev1, topline2, baseline2, dlev2, count1, count2,
edgetrigger, inverting, closestedge, x_start, x_end, option, param)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the source waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the reference waveform name.
• topline1
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold for the source waveform.
Specify “Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline1
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold for the source waveform. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• dlev1
(Optional) Specifies the percentage relative to the topline and baseline values for the source
waveform. Default is “50%”.
• topline2
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold for the reference waveform.
Specify “Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline2
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold for the reference waveform.
Specify “Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• dlev2
(Optional) Specifies the percentage relative to the topline and baseline values for the
reference waveform. Default is “50%”.
• count1
(Optional) Specifies the starting edge to consider on the source waveform. Default is “All”.
• count2
(Optional) Specifies the starting edge to consider on the reference waveform. Default is
“All”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 711

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
delay

• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• inverting
(Optional) If set to 0, starts on the reference waveform at the previous edge with the same
polarity (non-inverting) as the source waveform. If set to 1, starts on the reference waveform
at the previous edge with the opposite polarity (inverting) as the source waveform. Default
is 0.
• closestedge
(Optional) If set to 1, finds the closest reference edge to display the reference edge nearest to
the measured edge. Default is 0.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time for the calculation. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the stop time for the calculation. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results. Default is “WF”.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “index”.
Return Values
Returns the delay between edges of the source waveform and a reference waveform. Returns a
waveform if option is set to “WF”.

712 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
derive

derive
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the derivative of the input waveform at the single point x_val.
Usage
derive(wf, x_val)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_val
(Required) Specifies the X value of the derivative point.
Return Values
Waveform. The derivative at the specified X value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 713

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
drv

drv
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the derivative of the input waveform.
Usage
drv(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The derivative of the input waveform.

714 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
dtoa

dtoa
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Constructs an analog waveform from a digital bus.
Usage
dtoa(wf, coeff_add, coeff_mul, Tcom)
dtoa(wf, coeff_add, coeff_mul, useInterpolate, useTcom, Tcom, radix)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• coeff_add
(Required) Specifies the additive coefficient in the calculation of the analog values.
• coeff_mul
(Required) Specifies the multiplicative coefficient in the calculation of the analog values.
• useInterpolate
(Optional) Specifies whether to use the interpolation algorithm.
• useTcom
(Optional) Specifies whether to use the commutation time in non-interpolate mode.
• Tcom
(Optional) The commutation time.
• radix
(Optional) Specifies the radix in which to interpret the bus values.
Return Values
Waveform. The converted waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 715

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
dtoaonbit

dtoaonbit
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Constructs an analog waveform on bits.
Usage
dtoaonbit(wf)
dtoaonbit(wf, s_0, s_1,w_0,
w_1, s_u, w_u, h_z, u, m, rise, fall)
Arguments
The arguments below define the analog value used when matching a digital state:
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input bit name.
• s_0
(Optional) '0' Forcing 0 (default 0.0, “Automatic”).
• s_1
(Optional) '1' Forcing 1 (default 5.0, “Automatic”).
• w_0
(Optional) 'L' Weak 0 (default same value as '0', “Automatic”).
• w_1
(Optional) 'H' Weak 1 (default same value as '1', “Automatic”).
• s_u
(Optional) 'X' Forcing Unknown (default ('0'+'1')/2, “Automatic”).
• w_u
(Optional) 'W' Weak Unknown (default ('L'+'H')/2, “Automatic”).
• h_z
(Optional) 'Z' High Impedance (default 'U' or previous value, “Automatic”).
• u
(Optional) 'U' Uninitialized (default 0.0, “Automatic”).
• m
(Optional) '-' Do not care (default 'U' or previous value, “Automatic”).
• rise
(Optional) Commutation Rise Time (default 2e-9, “Automatic”).

716 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
dtoaonbit

• fall
(Optional) Commutation Fall Time (default 2e-9, “Automatic”).
Return Values
Waveform. The analog waveform corresponding to the digital bit.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 717

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
dutycycle

dutycycle
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the duty cycle of a periodic waveform relative to default (automatically calculated) or
user-specified topline and baseline levels.
Usage
dutycycle(wf)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param)
dutycycle(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param, threshold)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.

718 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
dutycycle

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the threshold of the signal. Specify “Automatic” to
have this value computed: mean(wf). Default is “None”.
Note
"topline/baseline" and "threshold" parameters cannot be used simultaneously: use
either "topline/baseline" or "threshold".

Return Values
Waveform. The duty cycle of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 719

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
enob

enob
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the effective number of bits for the source waveform.
Usage
enob(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal. Frequencies from
f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
“Default” is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are
considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is “None”, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The effective number of bits of the input waveform.

720 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
enob

Description
Computes the effective number of bits, a conversion of the SINAD result. This calculation is
given by the following:

where:

= the signal to noise and distortion ratio in dB.

= the quantization error in an ideal ADC.

= the converts decibels (a log10 representation) to bits (a log2 representation).

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

Examples
enob(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6)
= 9.792966993387555

Related Topics
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 721

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
evmber

evmber
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Computes the Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate of the two input constellation
diagrams.
Usage
evmber(wf1, wf2)
evmber(wf1, wf2, mpsk)
evmber(wf1, wf2, mqam)
evmber(wf1, wf2, mpsk, mqam)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first constellation diagram name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second constellation diagram name.
• mpsk
(Optional) Defines the number of ideal states of the reference constellation diagram. The
default is 0.
• mqam
(Optional) Defines the number of ideal states of the reference constellation diagram. The
default is 0.
Return Values
Array. The Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate.

Description
Computes the Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate of the two input constellation
diagrams. The Error Vector Magnitude and Bit Error Rate can be computed from a constellation
diagram of a modulated signal and a constellation diagram of a reference signal.

For MPSK and MQUAM, the M parameter specified is the number of ideal states of the
reference constellation diagram as specified in the definition of the modulated source in the
netlist.

Note
Phase Error, Magnitude Error, and Error Vector Magnitude values are displayed as
percentages.

722 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
exp

exp
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the value of ewf.
Usage
exp(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The scaled input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 723

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eye

eye
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Constructs an eye diagram from the input waveform.
Note
Replaces the deprecated eyediagram command.

Usage
eye(wf, period, offset, x_start, x_end, mask_name, mask_x_offset, mask_y_offset,
mask_x_margin, mask_y_margin, fit_option)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• period
(Optional) Specifies the period for the eye diagram. Default is “Automatic”.
• offset
(Optional) Specifies the offset for the eye diagram. Default is “Automatic”.
• x_start
(Optional) Start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• mask_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the mask. Default is “None”.
• mask_x_offset
(Optional) Specifies the x-offset of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_y_offset
(Optional) Specifies the y-offset of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_x_margin
(Optional) Specifies the x-margin of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_y_margin
(Optional) Specifies the y-margin of the mask. Default is “0”.

724 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eye

• fit_option
(Optional) Specifies the mask margin and offset fitting. fitOption is a binary OR one of the
following:
o 0: no automatic fit
o 1: automatic fit for x-margin
o 2: automatic fit for y-margin
o 3: automatic fit for margin only
o 4: automatic fit for x-offset
Default is “0”.
Return Values
The eye diagram corresponding to the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 725

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyeamplitude

eyeamplitude
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the amplitude of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyeamplitude(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The amplitude of the input eye diagram.

Description
Computes the difference between the High Level value and the Low Level value.

726 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyecphy

eyecphy
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Constructs a self-triggered C-Phy eye diagram from three input waveforms.
Tip
Used in conjunction with cphytrigger function.

Usage
eyecphy(wf1, wf2, wf3, ui, tolerance, input, x_start, x_end)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(A)-V(B) (or V(A), see input
parameter).
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(B)-V(C) (or V(B), see input
parameter).
• wf3
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name for V(C)-V(A) (or V(C), see input
parameter).
• ui
(Optional) Specifies the minimum Unit Interval for the trigger. Default is “Automatic”.
• tolerance
(Optional) Specifies the tolerance on ui to detect transition.
Transition threshold = (1 - tolerance/100) * ui.
Default is “Automatic” (20%).
• input
(Optional) Specifies the type of input:
o “differentials” specifies waveforms are differential lines, wf1 is V(A)-V(B), wf2 is
V(B)-V(C), and wf3 is V(C)-V(A).
o “lines” specifies waveforms are lines, wf1 is V(A), wf2 is V(B), and wf3 is V(C).
Default is “differentials”.
• x_start
(Optional) Start time of the input waveform windows. Default is “Begin”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 727

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyecphy

• x_end
(Optional) Finish time of the input waveform windows. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. Returns the C-Phy eye diagram corresponding to the three input waveforms. The
eye is right-aligned.

Related Topics
C-Phy Eye Calculation
cphytrigger
eye
eyesetmask
eyewithtrigger

728 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyecrossingamplitude

eyecrossingamplitude
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the amplitude level at which the eye crossings occur on an eye diagram.
Usage
eyecrossingamplitude(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The amplitude level at which the eye crossings occur on an eye diagram.

Description
Computes the mean value of the vertical histogram at the eye crossing.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 729

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyedelay

eyedelay
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the delay of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyedelay(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The delay of an eye diagram

Description
Computes the distance from the midpoint of the eye to the time origin, measured in seconds.

730 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyediagram

eyediagram
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Constructs an eye diagram of the input waveform.
Note
This command is deprecated. It is replaced with the eye command.

Usage
eyediagram(wf)
eyediagram(wf, period)
eyediagram(wf, period, offset, x_start, x_end)
eyediagram(wf, period, offset, x_start, x_end, maskName, maskXOffset, maskYOffset,
maskXMargin, maskYMargin, fitOption)
eyediagram(wf, period, offset, x_start, x_end, xform, maskName, maskXOffset, maskYOffset,
maskXMargin, maskYMargin, fitOption)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• period
(Optional) Specifies the period of the eye diagram.
• offset
(Optional) Specifies the offset of the eye diagram.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform.
• x_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform.
• xform
Always "", should be ignored.
• maskName
The name of the mask.
• maskXOffset
The mask X offset.
• maskYOffset
The mask Y offset.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 731

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyediagram

• maskXMargin
The mask X margin.
• maskYMargin
The mask Y margin.
• fitOption
Mask margin and offset fitting. fitOption is a binary OR of the following:
o 0x1: automatic fit for X margin
o 0x2: automatic fit for Y margin
o 0x4: automatic fit for X offset
=> 3 stands for automatic fit for margin only ; 0 stands for no automatic fit at all.
Return Values
Waveform. The eye diagram corresponding to the input waveform.

732 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyefalltime

eyefalltime
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the falltime of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyefalltime(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The falltime of an eye diagram.

Description
Computes the mean time between the high and low threshold values, calculated from 10% to
90% of the eye amplitude.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 733

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyeheight

eyeheight
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the height of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyeheight(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The height of an eye diagram.

Description
Computes the difference between the High Level -3stdev and the Low Level +3stdev on an eye
diagram waveform.

734 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyeheightatx

eyeheightatx
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the eye height at X.
Usage
eyeheightatx(wf, x, mode)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
• x
(Required) Specifies the X coordinate of the eye diagram at which the eye height is to be
computed.
• mode
(Required) Specifies the mode as either “Inner”, Outer” or “PAM4”.
Return Values
Double. The eye height at the specified X value.

Description
Computes the inner or outer height of an eye diagram at a specified X coordinate. For a PAM4
signal, it returns a list of three inner heights, from top eye to bottom eye.

Examples
To get the inner height at half the Unit Interval for a C-Phy eye waveform (cphyeye), use:

eyeheightatx(cphyeye, -UI/2, "inner")

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 735

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyejitter

eyejitter
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the jitter of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyejitter(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The jitter of an eye diagram.

Description
Computes the width of the eye crossing points.

736 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyemeasures

eyemeasures
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns a set of named measures with their values for an eye diagram.
Usage
eyemeasures(wf, x, y, type, amplitude_ratio)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
• x
(Optional) Specifies the X coordinate of the eye diagram where to compute the inner/outer
or PAM4 height. Default is “None” for type = “NRZ”. Default is C-Phy eye average Unit
Interval (UI) divided by -4 for type = “CPHY”. Required for type = “PAM4”.
• y
(Optional) Specifies the Y coordinate of the eye diagram where to compute the inner/outer
width. Default is “None” for type = “NRZ”. Default is 0 for type = “CPGY”. Must be
“None” for type = “PAM4”.
• type
(Optional) Specifies the eye computation mode. Either “NRZ” (2 levels), “CPHY”
(superimposed eyes) or “PAM4” (4 levels). Default is “NRZ”.
When type is “NRZ”:
o The X parameter is used to compute at the same time the inner and outer height at
the given x.
o The Y parameter is used to compute at the same time the inner and outer width at the
given y.
When type is “CPHY”:
o The default value for the X parameter is the C-Phy eye average Unit Interval divided
by -4. This is a quarter of the eye UI, and negative because the C-Phy eye is right
aligned. All eye points have negative X values.
o The default value for the Y parameter is 0. This is where the zero crossing is
computed.
When type is “PAM 4”:
o The X parameter is mandatory, and used to compute all the PAM4 measures.
o The Y parameter should not be set.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 737

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyemeasures

• amplitude_ratio
(Optional) Used when type is “PAM4”. When set to “Automatic”, toplines and baselines
begin at 10% and increase in steps of 5% until all points are either below the baseline and
above the topline (the Measured Edge Percentage reaches 100%). Valid values are
“Automatic”, a double value between 0.0 and 1.0, or a number followed by “%” (e.g.
“20%”). Default value is “Automatic” (at least 10%, increasing by 5%).
Return Values
Array. Returns a list of pairs of named measures with their values on the input eye diagram.

Examples
To get the inner width and height of a C-Phy eye waveform (cphy_eye), use:

eyemeasures(cphy_eye, type="cphy")

738 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyerisetime

eyerisetime
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the risetime of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyerisetime(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The risetime of the input eye diagram.

Description
Computes the mean time between the low and high threshold values, calculated from 10% to
90% of the eye amplitude.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 739

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyesetmask

eyesetmask
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Adds a mask to an eye diagram waveform.
Usage
eyesetmask(wf, mask_name, mask_x_offset, mask_y_offset, mask_x_margin, mask_y_margin,
fit_option, period)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
• mask_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the mask. When set to “none”, removes the mask from the
eye diagram. Default is “none”.
• mask_x_offset
(Optional) Specifies the x-offset of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_y_offset
(Optional) Specifies the y-offset of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_x_margin
(Optional) Specifies the x-margin of the mask. Default is “0”.
• mask_y_margin
(Optional) Specifies the y-margin of the mask. Default is “0”.
• fit_option
(Optional) Specifies the mask margin and offset fitting. fitOption is a binary OR one of the
following:
o 0: no automatic fit
o 1: automatic fit for x-margin
o 2: automatic fit for y-margin
o 3: automatic fit for margin only
o 4: automatic fit for x-offset
Default is “0”.
• period
(Optional) Specifies the period of the eye diagram. Default is “Automatic”.

740 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyesetmask

Return Values
Returns nothing. Modifies the mask in the input eye waveform.

Related Topics
C-Phy Eye Calculation
cphytrigger
eye
eyecphy
eyewithtrigger

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 741

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyesnr

eyesnr
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the SNR of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyesnr(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The SNR of the input eye diagram.

Description
Computes (High Level - Low Level) / (High Level stdev + Low Level stdev).

742 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyewidth

eyewidth
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the width of an eye diagram.
Usage
eyewidth(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
Return Values
Double. The width of the input eye diagram.

Description
Computes the difference between the Cross Eye -3stdev and the Cross Eye +3stdev on an eye
diagram waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 743

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyewidthaty

eyewidthaty
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the eye width at Y.
Usage
eyewidthaty(wf, y, mode)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input eye diagram waveform name.
• y
(Required) Specifies the Y coordinate of the eye diagram at which the eye width is to be
computed.
• mode
(Required) Specifies the mode as either “Inner” or Outer”.
Return Values
Double. The eye width of the input eye diagram at the specified Y value.

Description
Computes the inner or outer width of an eye diagram at a specified Y coordinate.

Examples
To get the inner width at level 0 of a C-Phy eye waveform (cphyeye), use:

eyewidthaty(cphyeye, 0, "inner")

744 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
eyewithtrigger

eyewithtrigger
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Constructs a triggered eye diagram from a waveform.
Usage
eyewithtrigger(wf, trigger, edgetrigger, ratio, x_start, x_end)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input source waveform name.
• trigger
(Required) Specifies the input trigger waveform name.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the edge used to trigger. Value can be “risingEdge”, “fallingEdge”,
“Either” (same as the first edge kind: rising or falling) or “Both” (means rising and falling
edges). Default is “either”.
• ratio
(Optional) Specifies the alignment ratio, between 0.0and 1.0:
o 0.0: left-aligned
o 0.5: centered
o 1.0: right-aligned
Default is “0.5”.
• x_start
(Optional) Start time of the input waveform window. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Stop time of the input waveform window. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. Creates a triggered eye diagram from the input waveforms.

Related Topics
C-Phy Eye Calculation
cphytrigger
eye
eyecphy

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 745

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
eyewithtrigger

eyesetmask

746 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
falltime

falltime
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the difference in time from when the waveform falls from the upper level to the lower
level.
Usage
falltime(wf)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option, param)
falltime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option, param, fall)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
• low
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the low threshold. This can range from 0% to mid. By
default, this is set to 10%. This parameter is a string (for example, “10%”).
• mid
(Optional) Specifies the percentage that sets the limit range for the low and up values. By
default, this is set to 50%. This parameter is a string (for example, “50%”).
• up
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the high threshold. This can range from mid to 100%.
By default, this is set to 90%. This parameter is a string (for example, “90%”).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 747

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
falltime

• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. Legal values are: “WF” for waveform (default),
“VALUE” for numerical value or array of numerical values and “ANNOTATION” for
plotting your input waveform with the result annotated on it.
Note
If fall is anything other than “all”, option = “VALUE” is forced.

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• fall
(Optional) Specifies the occurrence of the result that the measurement will return. For
compound waveforms it applies to each element individually. Legal values are:
o “first” — Specifies the first occurrence of the result.
o “all” — Specifies all occurrences of the result. Default.
o “last” — Specifies the last occurrence of the result.
o n or “n” — Specifies the nth occurrence of the result.
Return Values
Waveform. The difference in time from when the input waveform falls from the upper level to
the lower level.

748 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
fft

fft
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Uses the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) method for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform
(DFT) used to determine the frequency content of analog or complex waveforms encountered in
circuit simulation.
Usage
fft(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs, points, sampling, padding, normalized, windowType, alpha, f_ref,
f_min, f_max, samplingEpsilon, windowShape, config_file])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points-1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default), “Interpolation” or “Spline”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros, before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left” or
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 749

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
fft

• normalized
(Optional) When enabled, an average is taken on the raw data to reduce noise and smooth
the frequency domain waveform. Specify 1 to turn this on, or 0 to use the raw data from the
calculation unmodified. Default is 1.
• windowType
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular” (the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.
Note
For Hanning, symmetric window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning
window in FIR filter design.
Periodic window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in spectral
analysis. This is because the Discrete Fourier Transform assumes periodic extension of
the input vector. A periodic Hanning window is obtained by constructing a symmetric
window and removing the last sample.

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha (or beta) value that is required by Hanning, Dolph Chebyshev
and Kaiser windows.
o Hanning : [0;1], default 0.5
o Dolph Chebyshev : [0:20], default 3.0
o Kaiser : [0:20], default 10.056.
• f_ref
(Optional) Adjusts the results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified frequency
is 0.0. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the starting frequency used inside the fast fourier transform result
window. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the last frequency used inside the fast fourier transform result window.
Default is “Automatic”.
• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, this option specifies that the input
waveform data point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when
the X data of the input waveform is close to the computed X value.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs. Default is 1´10-6.

750 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
fft

• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
Defaults to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic
option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case,
Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

• config_file
(Optional) Specifies a configuration file that contains input parameters. A configuration file
may be generated by entering parameters on the Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog Box
and then selecting File > Save Configuration. When specified, only the source waveform is
mandatory, and any other parameters specified in the function are overridden by those in the
configuration file.
Return Values
Waveform. The Fourier Transform of the input waveform.

Description
The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) is used to determine the frequency content of analog or
complex signals encountered in circuit simulation, which deals with sequences of time values.
The fft() function uses the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) method for calculating the DFT.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 751

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
firstdiff

firstdiff
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Finds the first time when any signal in one run begins to differ from the corresponding signal in
another run, and plots ntop signals in sorted order.
Usage
firstdiff(wf1, wf2, [x_start, x_end, reltol, abstol, ntop, depth, plot]
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in one run.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in another run.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-2 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-5 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• ntop
(Optional) Specifies the number of top results to return and plot. Default is 8.
• depth
(Optional) Specifies the hierarchy depth used to search the waveforms. Recursive search by
default.
• plot
(Optional) 1 (default) plots the first spectrum difference results. 0 does not plot results.
Return Values
Array. The first difference value for the given input waveforms, in the format:

[[wf1_handle, wf2_handle, first_diff_value], [...]]

752 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
firstdiff

Related Topics
maxdiff
maxspectrumdiff
shiftedmaxdiff

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 753

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
floor

floor
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the largest integral value not greater than each data point of the waveform.
Usage
floor(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform containing the floor values of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the largest integral value not greater than each data point of wf. Upon successful
completion, each returned value is expressed as a type double.

Related Topics
trunc
round
ceil

754 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
fmod

fmod
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the floating-point remainder of dividing x by y.
Usage
fmod(x, y)
Arguments
• x
(Required) Specifies the numerator of the input.
• y
(Required) Specifies the denominator of the input.
Return Values
Double. The floating point remainder.

Description
Computes the remainder of dividing x by y. It returns x - (n * y), where n is the quotient of x / y,
rounded to the greatest integer less than or equal to x / y.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 755

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
frequency

frequency
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the frequency of a periodic waveform relative to default (automatically calculated) or
user-specified topline and baseline levels.
Usage
frequency(wf)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param)
frequency(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param, threshold)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.

756 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
frequency

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the threshold of the signal. Specify “Automatic” to
have this value computed: mean(wf). Default is “None”.
Note
"topline/baseline" and "threshold" parameters cannot be used simultaneously: use
either "topline/baseline" or "threshold".

Return Values
Waveform. The frequency of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 757

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
frequencyjitter

frequencyjitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Computes the variation in time of the frequency of the source waveform relative to its average
frequency or to the reference waveform (or ideal clock) frequency over part of, or the whole
waveform.
Usage
frequencyjitter(wf[, ref, t_start, t_ stop, edgetrigger, nbcycles, single_threshold, topline,
baseline, threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Optional) Specifies a reference period. Default is “Automatic”.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Rising”.
• nbcycles
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles in the N-cycle sample,
which will participate in the jitter calculation. Possible values are an integer value or
“Automatic”. Default is “Default” (1).
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline values are ignored).
If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.

758 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
frequencyjitter

• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The frequency jitter waveform for the input waveform(s).

Description
Frequency jitter is the variation in time of the frequency of the source waveform relative to its
average frequency or to the reference waveform (or ideal clock) frequency over part of, or the
whole waveform. This type of jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.

Frequency jitter is calculated as the difference between the actual cycle frequency values of the
source and reference waveforms. If the reference waveform is not set, the difference is
calculated between the actual and average n-cycle frequency of the source waveform.

The jitter RMS value horizontal marker is displayed over the result waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 759

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
frexp

frexp
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Extracts the mantissa and exponent from a double-precision number.
Usage
frexp(x)
Arguments
• x
(Required) Specifies the floating-point number to be decomposed.
Return Values
Array. The mantissa and exponent values of the input number.

Description
Extracts the mantissa and exponent from a double-precision number by breaking the
floating-point x into a normalized fraction and an integral power of 2.

Note
This function only accepts a scalar number as the input parameter.

760 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
gaussiandistribution

gaussiandistribution
This function creates a Gaussian distribution.
Usage
gaussiandistribution(wf)
gaussiandistribution(mean, stddev)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies an input waveform from which the Gaussian distribution is created,
based on its mean() and stddev(). Min and max X values are mean+- N*stddev, with N the
smallest positive integer so that min and max are inside this range, with the additional
constraint that N is greater than or equal to 4, and smaller than or equal to 20.
If this parameter is not specified, you must specify values for both mean and stddv.
• mean
(Required) Specifies the mean. Specifying the mean along with the stddev creates a
Gaussian distribution in the range of 4-sigma (mean +- 4*stddev).
• stddev
(Required) Specifies the standard deviation.
Description
Creates a Gaussian distribution.

If wf is histogram data, the mean and stddev are calculated from the input data of the histogram,
if available, not on the histogram values.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 761

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
gendecade

gendecade
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from start_value to stop_value with number of
points per decade value equal to points_decade.
Usage
gendecade(start_value, stop_value, points_decade)
Arguments
• start_value
(Required) Specifies the start value.
• stop_value
(Required) Specifies the stop value.
• points_decade
(Required) Specifies the number of points per decade.
Return Values
Array. The list of generated numbers.

762 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
genlinear

genlinear
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from start_value to stop_value with a step equal
to step_value.
Usage
genlinear(start_value, stop_value, step_value)
Arguments
• start_value
(Required) Specifies the start value.
• stop_value
(Required) Specifies the stop value.
• step_value
(Required) Specifies the step value.
Return Values
Array. The list of generated numbers.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 763

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
genoctave

genoctave
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns a list that contains numbers sweeping from start_value to stop_value with number of
points per decade value equal to points_octave.
Usage
genoctave(start_value, stop_value, points_octave)
Arguments
• start_value
(Required) Specifies the start value.
• stop_value
(Required) Specifies the stop value.
• points_octave
(Required) Specifies the number of points per octave.
Return Values
Array. The list of generated numbers.

764 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
getelementat

getelementat
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns the element at a given index in a bus or compound waveform.
Usage
getelementat(wf, index)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies a bus or compound waveform.
• index
(Required) Specifies the index of the element.
Return Values
Waveform. The waveform at the given index.

Related Topics
length

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 765

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
gmargin

gmargin
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Computes the difference between the gain of the input waveform and 0 dB (unity gain) at the
frequency where the phase shift is -180 degrees (the Phase Crossover Frequency).
Usage
gmargin(wf)
gmargin(wf_db, wf_ph)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. If the input waveform is specified using
wf_db and wf_ph, this argument is not required.
• wf_db
(Required) Specifies the gain (dB) of the input waveform when used with wf_ph. If the
input waveform is specified with wf, this argument is not required.
• wf_ph
(Required) Specifies the phase of the input waveform when used with wf_db. If the input
waveform is specified with wf, this argument is not required.
Return Values
Double. The difference between the gain of the input waveform and 0dB.

Description
Computes the difference between the gain of the input waveform and 0 dB (unity gain) at the
frequency where the phase shift is -180 degrees (the Phase Crossover Frequency). The input wf
can be also be described by a gain (dB) waveform wf_db and a phase waveform wf_ph. This
result is in dB.

766 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
gptocomplex

gptocomplex
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of gain in decibels and a waveform of phase
in radians.
Usage
gptocomplex(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first (gain) input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second (phase) input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. A complex waveform combining the two input waveforms as gain and phase.

Description
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of gain in decibels (wf1) and a waveform of
phase in radians (wf2).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 767

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
halfperiodjitter

halfperiodjitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Computes the variation in time of the half-period of a source waveform relative to its average
half-period, or to a reference half-period, over part of, or the whole waveform.
Usage
halfperiodjitter(wf[, ref, dutycycle, t_start, t_ stop, edgetrigger, single_threshold, topline,
baseline, threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Optional) Specifies the reference period. Default is “Automatic”.
• dutycycle
(Optional) Specifies the duty cycle used for the half-period calculation. When “Automatic”
is specified, the duty cycle is calculated for each cycle period of the waveform using the
automatic topline and baseline parameters. Default value is 0.5.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Rising”.
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline values are ignored).
If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.

768 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
halfperiodjitter

• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The half-period jitter waveform for the input waveform(s).

Description
Calculates the variation in time of the half-period of a source waveform relative to its average
half-period, or to a reference waveform (or ideal clock) half-period, over part of, or the whole
waveform. This type of jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.

Half-period jitter is the period multiplied by the duty cycle. It is calculated as the difference
between the actual cycle-half-period values of the source and reference waveforms. If the
reference period is not set, the difference is calculated between the actual and average cycle
half-period of the source waveform.

The jitter RMS value horizontal marker is displayed over the result waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 769

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
harmonicdistortion

harmonicdistortion
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the harmonic distortion of the input waveform.
Usage
harmonicdistortion(wf[, f_fund, f_min, f_max, displayTHDoption])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• f_fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• displayTHDoption
(Optional) Specifies the option for displaying the total harmonic distortion between
“PERCENTAGE” (the default) and “DB”.
Return Values
Waveform. The harmonic distortion of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the harmonic distortion of the input waveform. This function is computed by using
the gain of the FFT result. That means that the input waveform can be either a complex
waveform or a waveform representing a gain.

f_min and f_max specifies the frequency band that should be taken for the computation.

The output total harmonic distortion is displayed either as a percentage or as a gain.

770 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
harmonics

harmonics
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the harmonic distortion of the input waveform.
Usage
harmonics(wf[, f_fund, f_min, f_max])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• f_fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. The harmonic distortion of the input waveform.

Description
This function is computed by using the gain of the FFT result. That means that the input
waveform can be either a complex waveform or a waveform representing a gain.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 771

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
harmonicsmeter

harmonicsmeter
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Returns the maximum Fourier frequency value for the specified waveform.
Tip
The harmonicsmeter() function returns a scalar value but does not plot any results. To
calculate and plot signals in sorted order of maximum Fourier frequency, use the Harmonics
Meter Dialog Box accessed from the Waveform Calculator harmonicsmeter button.

Usage
harmonicsmeter(wf, fund, nharm, reltol, abstol)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Signal must be a periodic waveform.
• fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency. Default is “Automatic”, where the entire
interval is the fundamental period.
• nharm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics in the Fourier analysis. Default is 500.
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance in finding the upper Fourier frequency limit.
Default is 1e-3.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance in finding the upper Fourier frequency limit.
Default is 1e-3.
Return Values
Double. The maximum Fourier frequency of the input waveform.

772 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
hdist

hdist
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the Total Harmonic Distortion of the input waveform.
Usage
hdist(wf[, f_fund, f_min, f_max, displayTHDoption])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• f_fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• displayTHDoption
(Optional) Specifies the option for displaying the total harmonic distortion between
“PERCENTAGE” (the default) and “DB”.
Return Values
Double. The Total Harmonic Distortion value of the input waveform

Description
This function is computed by using the gain of the FFT result. That means that the input
waveform can be either a complex waveform or a waveform representing a gain.

f_min and f_max specifies the frequency band that should be taken for the computation.

The output total harmonic distortion is displayed either as a percentage or as a gain.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 773

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
histogram

histogram
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Creates a histogram of the input waveform showing the magnitude probability density
distribution of the waveform.
Usage
histogram(wf, nb_bins, x_start, x_end, sampling, normalized)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
The histogram function can also accept a list of values as the source. For example, you can
create a histogram from the result of the thd() function, using:
histogram(thd(wf, fund))

• nb_bins
(Optional) Specifies the number of bins. Specify a plain integer or double value to set the
number of bins explicitly. Specify “scott” to use Scott’s formula to define the bins. Specify
“sturge” to use Sturge’s rule to define the bins. Specify “sqrt” to use square root of the
number of data points to define the bins. Default is 10.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Specify an integer or double
value to set the value explicitly. Specify “Begin” to use the start of the data. The default is
“Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. x_end. Specify an integer or
double value to set the value explicitly. Specify “End” to use the start of the data. The
default is “End”.
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies whether or not to use sampling. Specify 0 or “No Sampling” to create
the histogram based on the data points of the input waveform. Specify 1 to first sample the
waveform equidistantly and then create the histogram based on the sampled data. The
default is “No Sampling”.
• normalized
(Optional) Specify 0 to use the raw data from the calculation unmodified. Specify 1 to
divide each bin value by the total number of points. Default is 1.
Return Values
Waveform. The histogram of the input waveform.

774 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
hypot

hypot
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the length of the hypotenuse of a right angle triangle using the formula sqrt (x2+y2).
Usage
hypot(x, y)
Arguments
• x
(Required) Specifies the x value.
• y
(Required) Specifies the y value.
Return Values
Double. The resulting value of sqrt (x2+y2).

Description
Euclidean distance function.

Note
This function only accepts a scalar number as the input parameter.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 775

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
idb

idb
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Performs the inverse decibel function. It converts the input waveform from dB using the
following conversion: 10(v/20).
Usage
idb(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The converted input waveform.

776 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
idb10

idb10
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Performs the inverse decibel function. It converts the input waveform from dB using the
following conversion: 10(v/10).
Usage
idb10(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The converted input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 777

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
ifft

ifft
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the inverse Fast Fourier Transform of the input waveform.
Usage
ifft(wf[, f_start, f_stop, ts, points, sampling, padding, normalized, samplingEpsilon,
windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• f_start
(Optional) Specifies the start frequency of the signal. Default is “Begin”.
• f_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop frequency of the signal. Default is “End”.
• ts
(Optional) Specifies the sampling time of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/ts) = f_stop - f_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points - 1)/ts) = f_stop - f_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default), “Interpolation” or “Spline”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros, before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left”, and
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.
• normalized
(Optional) When enabled, an average is taken on the raw data to reduce noise and smooth
the frequency domain waveform. Specify 1 to turn this on, or 0 to use the raw data from the
calculation unmodified. Default is 1.

778 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
ifft

• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value. Default is 1e-6.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
Defaults to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic option,
unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case, Eldo has
already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Return Values
Waveform. The inverse Fast Fourier Transform of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 779

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
iipx

iipx
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Returns the input-referred intercept point of order x from the value of the circuit input and
output levels.
Usage
iipx(wave_in, wave_out, freq_1, freq_2[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wave_in
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wave_out
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• freq_1
(Required) Specifies the first input frequency.
• freq_2
(Required) Specifies the second input frequency.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double. The input-referred intercept point.

Description
Returns the input referred intercept point of order x from the value of the circuit input and
output: wave_in and wave_out, respectively. wave_in and wave_out must be in dB or dBm. The
intercept order is directly calculated from the intermodulation of freq_1 and freq_2. If the input
waveform type is complex, the waveforms are automatically converted in dB.

780 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
imag

imag
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Returns the imaginary part of the input complex waveform.
Usage
imag(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The imaginary part of the input complex waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 781

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
integ

integ
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Returns the definite integral value with upper and lower limits of a waveform.
Usage
integ(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/array. The integral value of the waveform.

782 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
integral

integral
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the indefinite integral (also known as the anti-derivative) of the input waveform.
Usage
integral(wf)
integral(wf, y0)
integral(wf, y0, x_start, x_end)
integral(wf, yReal0, yImag0)
integral(wf, yReal0, yImag0, x_start, x_end)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• y0
(Optional) Specifies the integration constant. If this is not specified, the default is 0.
• yReal0
(Optional) Specifies the real part of the integration constant, if wf is a complex waveform.
• yImag0
(Optional) Specifies the imaginary part of the integration constant, if wf is a complex
waveform.
Return Values
Waveform. The indefinite integral of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the indefinite integral (also known as the anti-derivative) of the input waveform.
Upon successful completion, returns a waveform of the indefinite integral of the input. If no
integration constant is specified, it is automatically set to 0.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 783

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
intersect

intersect
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns an array with all of the intersection points of two input waveforms.
Usage
intersect(wf1, wf2)
intersect(wf1, wf2, with_x)
intersect(wf1, wf2, x_start, x_end)
intersect(wf1, wf2, x_start, x_end, with_x)
intersect(wf1, wf2, slope_wf1, slope_wf2)
intersect(wf1, wf2, slope_wf1, slope_wf2, x_start, x_end)
intersect(wf1, wf2, slope_wf1, slope_wf2, x_start, x_end, with_x)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• with_x
(Optional) Specifies whether the corresponding x value is returned. Use 1 or 0 as follows:
o 1 — Both the y value and the corresponding x value are returned.
o 0 — Only the y value is returned.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• slope_wf1
(Optional) Specifies the slope of wf1 as follows:
o “neg” — Include only intersects where wf1 is negative.
o “pos” — Include only intersects where wf1 is positive.
o “either” — Include all wf1 intersects, regardless of slope.

784 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
intersect

• slope_wf2
(Optional) Specifies the slope of wf2 as follows:
o “neg” — Include only intersects where wf2 is negative.
o “pos” — Include only intersects where wf2 is positive.
o “either” — Include all wf2 intersects, regardless of slope.
Return Values
Double/array. The intersection point of the two input waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 785

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
join

join
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Joins two non-overlapping waveforms together into a single waveform.
Usage
join(wf1, wf2)
join(wf1[, x_start1, x_end1], wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform representing the two joined waveforms.

Description
Connects the last point of wf1 to the first point of wf2. No shifting in x takes place. Input
waveforms must not overlap.

Examples
Figure B-2 shows example results when using the add and join commands.

786 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
join

Figure B-2. Example of add() and join() Waveform Calculator Functions

Related Topics
add

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 787

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
larger

larger
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Creates a new waveform based on the larger of two data points at any given time of the two
input waveforms.
Usage
larger(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. The larger of the two input waveforms.

788 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
ldexp

ldexp
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the load exponent of a floating-point number.
Usage
ldexp(x, y)
Arguments
• x
(Required) Specifies the x value.
• y
(Required) Specifies the y value.
Return Values
Double. The resulting value of x * 2y.

Description
Computes the load exponent of a floating-point number using the formula x * 2y. Upon
successful completion, returns a double representing the value x multiplied by 2 raised to the
power y.

Note
This function only accepts scalar numbers as input parameters.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 789

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
length

length
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns the number of elements of a given bus or compound waveform.
Usage
length(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies a bus or compound waveform.
Return Values
Integer. The number of elements of a given bus or compound waveform.

Related Topics
getelementat

790 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
lesser

lesser
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Creates a new waveform based on the lesser of two data points at any given time of the two
input waveforms.
Usage
lesser(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. The lesser of the two input waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 791

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
ln

ln
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the natural logarithm of the input argument waveform.
Usage
ln(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The scaled input waveform.

Description
Computes the natural logarithm of the input argument wf. The value of wf must be positive.

792 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
localmax

localmax
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Finds the local maxima of a waveform.
Usage
localmax(wf)
localmax(wf, x_start, x_end)
localmax(wf, x_start, x_end, option)
localmax(wf, x_start, x_end, option, param)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”, either “resultX” or “Xunit”. Default is “resultX”.
Return Values
Waveform. The local maxima of a waveform. The default output type is a waveform, but this
can be changed using the option argument.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 793

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
localmax

Examples
localmax(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load"), x_start=0,
x_end="END", option="ANNOTATION")

Related Topics
localmin

794 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
localmin

localmin
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Finds the local minima of a waveform.
Usage
localmin(wf)
localmin(wf, x_start, x_end)
localmin(wf, x_start, x_end, option)
localmin(wf, x_start, x_end, option, param)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”, either “resultX” or “Xunit”. Default is “resultX”.
Return Values
Waveform. The local minima of a waveform. The default output type is a waveform, but this
can be changed using the option argument.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 795

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
localmin

Examples
localmin(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load"), x_start=0,
x_end="END", option="ANNOTATION")

Related Topics
localmax

796 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
log

log
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the base 10 logarithm of the input waveform.
Usage
log(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The scaled input waveform.

Description
Computes the base 10 logarithm of the input wf. The value of wf must be positive.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 797

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
longtermjitter

longtermjitter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Returns the long term jitter waveform.
Usage
longtermjitter(wf, f0[, x_start, x_end, sampling_nb_points])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the name on the input waveform on which the long term jitter is
calculated.
• f0
(Required) Specifies the Fundamental Frequency of SST Noise Analysis. Default value is
“Automatic”.
Note
If f0 is stored in the database by the Eldo RF simulator, this argument becomes
optional.

• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of the interval for the long term jitter
calculation. Default value is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of the interval for the long term jitter calculation.
Default value is “End”.
• sampling_nb_points
(Optional) Defines whether sampling is applied to the source ce waveform and specifies the
number of sampling points. Default value is “Automatic”, for which 100 sampling points
are considered.
Return Values
Waveform. The long term jitter waveform.

Description
Calculates and returns the long term jitter waveform as follows:

corresponds to the waveform representing the long term jitter for forced circuits.

798 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
longtermjitter

Note
The calculation is designed for input waveforms SPHI, DB(SPHI), SPHI_SSB,
DB(SPHI_SSB), Lf and DB(PHNOISE), but not restricted to this list.

It is recommended that the waveform is sampled around 100 points (ten points per decade) prior
to running the long term jitter calculation to ensure that the calculation does not take too long to
run.

Examples
longtermjitter(wf1)
# This will calculate the long term jitter for waveform wf1 with an
# automatically detected fundamental frequency that has been stored in
# the database by the Eldo RF simulator. The calculation will use
# the entire waveform. There will be 100 sampling points - the default.

longtermjitter(wf1, 4e6, 3e6, 5e6, 50)

# This will calculate the long term jitter for waveform wf1
# with fundamental frequency 4.000.000 Hz. The calculation will use
# the waveform from 3.000.000 Hz to 5.000.000 Hz. There will be 50
# sampling points.

longtermjitter(wf1, f0=6e6, sampling_nb_points=200)

# This will calculate the long term jitter for waveform wf1 with
# fundamental frequency 6.000.000 Hz and 200 sampling points. The entire
# waveform will be used for the calculation.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 799

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
mag

mag
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Returns the absolute magnitude of the input complex waveform.
Usage
mag(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. Returns the absolute magnitude of the input complex waveform.

800 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
max

max
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
This function returns the maximum value of a waveform.
Usage
max(wf)
max(wf, x_start, x_end, x_value)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• x_value
(Optional) Specifies whether to return the x value along with the y value. Specify 0 to return
only the maximum y value; specify 1 to return both the maximum y and the corresponding x
value at the maximum. Default is “no” (0).
Return Values
Double. The maximum value of the input waveform.

Description
If the input waveform is complex, it returns the largest magnitude of its elements.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 801

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
maxdiff

maxdiff
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Finds the time or the frequency when any signal in one run differs the most from the
corresponding signal in another run, and plots ntop signals in sorted order.
Usage
maxdiff(wf1, wf2, [func, x_start, x_end, reltol, abstol, ntop, depth, plot]
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in one run.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in another run.
• func
(Optional) Specifies the waveform function. Specify one of:
o default (check value)
o slope (check slope)
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-3 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-6 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• ntop
(Optional) Specifies the number of top results to return and plot. Default is 8.
• depth
(Optional) Specifies the hierarchy depth used to search the waveforms. Recursive search by
default.
• plot
(Optional) 1 (default) plots the maximum difference results. 0 does not plot results.

802 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
maxdiff

Return Values
Array. The maximum difference value for the given input waveforms, in the format:

[[wf1_handle, wf2_handle, max_diff_value], [...]]

Related Topics
firstdiff
maxspectrumdiff
shiftedmaxdiff

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 803

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
maxspectrumdiff

maxspectrumdiff
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Finds the frequency when any signal in one run differs the most from the corresponding signal
in another run, after phase shift, and plots ntop signals in sorted order.
Usage
maxspectrumdiff(wf1, wf2, [phase, f_start, f_end, reltol, abstol, ntop, depth, plot]
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies any pss spectrum signal with large fundamental amplitude, in one run.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the same pss spectrum signal, in another run.
• phase
(Optional) Default is “Automatic”, which phase shifts the fundamental of the second
specified signal to match that of the first. Specify 0 for no phase shift.
• f_start
(Optional) Specifies the f value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• f_end
(Optional) Specifies the f value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-3 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-6 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• ntop
(Optional) Specifies the number of top results to return and plot. Default is 8.
• depth
(Optional) Specifies the hierarchy depth used to search the waveforms. Recursive search by
default.
• plot
(Optional) 1 (default). Plots the maximum spectrum difference results. 0 does not plot
results.

804 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
maxspectrumdiff

Return Values
Array. The maximum spectrum difference value for the given input waveforms, in the format:

[[spectrum_wf1_handle, spectrum_wf2_handle, max_spectrum_diff_value], [...]]

Related Topics
firstdiff
maxdiff
shiftedmaxdiff

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 805

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
min

min
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
This function returns the minimum value of a waveform.
Usage
min(wf)
min(wf, x_start, x_end, x_value)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• x_value
(Optional) Specifies whether to return the x value along with the y value. Specify 0 to return
only the minimum y value; specify 1 to return both the minimum y and the corresponding x
value at the minimum. Default is “no” (0).
Return Values
Double. The minimum value of the input waveform.

Description
If the input waveform is complex, it returns the smallest magnitude of its elements.

806 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
modf

modf
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Breaks a floating-point number into integral and fractional parts.
Usage
modf(x)
Arguments
• x
(Required) Specifies the floating-point number to be decomposed.
Return Values
Array. The decomposed input number.

Description
Breaks the argument x into integral and fractional parts, each having the same sign as the
argument. The integral part is returned as a type double.

Note
This function only accepts a scalar number as input parameter.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 807

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
mptocomplex

mptocomplex
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of magnitude and a waveform of phase.
Usage
mptocomplex(wf1, [x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first (magnitude) input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second (phase) input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. A complex waveform combining the two input waveforms as magnitude and phase.

Description
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of magnitude (wf1) and a waveform of phase
in radians (wf2).

808 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
nand

nand
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Applies the NAND function to two input waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
Usage
nand(wf1, wf2)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input digital waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input digital waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The resulting NAND waveform between the two input waveforms.

Description
Applies the NAND function to two input waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
The results of the function are described in the following table:
Table B-13. NAND Truth Table
wf1 wf2 NAND (wf1, wf2)
F F T
F T T
T F T
T T F

In the table, T represents TRUE for boolean waveforms, and 1 for bit waveforms. F represents
FALSE for boolean waveforms, and 0 for bit waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 809

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
noisetosignaldbc

noisetosignaldbc
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Calculates the ratio of noise to signal amplitude, in dBc/Hz.
Usage
noisetosignaldbc(noise, amplitude)
Arguments
• noise
Noise voltage or current per sqrt(Hz) waveform.
• amplitude
Amplitude of sinusoidal signal.
Return Values
Waveform. The ratio of noise to signal for the input waveform.

Examples
In the waveform calculator, evaluate:

noise=psd(wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load"))

and then:

noisetosignaldbc(noise,5.0)

810 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
noisetrantophasenoise

noisetrantophasenoise
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Computes the Phase Noise Spectrum (Power Spectral Density) of a periodic (noisy) transient
waveform.
Usage
noisetrantophasenoise(wf[, t_start, t_stop, f_ref])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. The waveform must be the result of a
transient noise analysis. All waveforms in the NOISETRAN directory that are not RMS
waveforms may be used.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• f_ref
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency. If not specified, this is computed
automatically from the average period. Default is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The Phase Noise Spectrum of the input waveform.

Description
To provide smoother results, the function iterates several times using small intervals of the input
waveform. The interval size is 10% of the t_start to t_stop range, or larger when several periods
are available.

First, this function computes the average period (or average carrier frequency), then it computes
the timing and phase jitter with respect to this average period. When the fundamental frequency
is provided, the average period is calculated as 1/f_ref. Finally, the Phase Noise Spectrum is
calculated from the Power Spectral Density of the extracted jitter.

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 811

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
nor

nor
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Applies the NOR function to two input waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
Usage
nor(wf1, wf2)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input digital waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input digital waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The resulting NOR waveform between the two input waveforms.

Description
Applies the NOR function to two input waveforms whose data types are either bit or boolean.
The results of the function are described in the following table:
Table B-14. NOR Truth Table
wf1 wf2 nor (wf1, wf2)
F F T
F T F
T F F
T T F

In the table, T represents TRUE for boolean waveforms, and 1 for bit waveforms. F represents
FALSE for boolean waveforms, and 0 for bit waveforms.

812 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
oipx

oipx
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Returns the output-referred intercept point of order x from the value of the circuit output
waveform.
Usage
oipx(wf, freq_1, freq_2[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• freq_1
(Required) Specifies the first input frequency.
• freq_2
(Required) Specifies the second input frequency.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double. The output-referred intercept point.

Description
Returns the output-referred intercept point of order x from the value of the circuit output
waveform, which must be in dB or dBm. The intercept order is directly calculated from the
intermodulation of freq_1 and freq_2. If the input waveform type is complex, the waveform is
automatically converted in dB.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 813

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
period

period
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the period of a periodic waveform relative to default (automatically calculated) or
user-specified topline and baseline levels.
Usage
period(wf)
period(wf, topline, baseline)
period(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger)
period(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end)
period(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option)
period(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param)
period(wf, topline, baseline, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param, threshold)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.

814 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
period

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the threshold of the signal. Specify Automatic to
have this value computed: mean(wf). Default is “None”.
Note
"topline/baseline" and "threshold" parameters cannot be used simultaneously: use
either "topline/baseline" or "threshold".

Return Values
Waveform. The period of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 815

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
periodjitter

periodjitter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Returns the period jitter value.
Usage
periodjitter(wf, f0[, x_start, x_end, sampling_nb_points, nbcycles])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the name on the input waveform on which the period jitter is
calculated.
• f0
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency of SST noise analysis. Default value is
“Automatic”.
Note
If f0 is stored in the database by the Eldo RF simulator, this argument becomes
optional.

• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of the interval for the period jitter
calculation. Default value is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of the interval for the period jitter calculation.
Default value is “End”.
• sampling_nb_points
(Optional) Defines whether sampling is applied to the source ce waveform and specifies the
number of sampling points. Default value is “Automatic”, for which 100 sampling points
are considered.
• nbcycles
(Optional) (Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles which will
participate in the jitter calculation. Possible value is an integer value. Default is “Default”,
corresponding to 1 cycle.
Return Values
Double. The period jitter value of the input waveform.

816 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
periodjitter

Description
Period jitter is calculated as follows:

corresponds to the period jitter value for forced circuits.

Note
The calculation is designed for input waveforms SPHI, DB(SPHI), SPHI_SSB,
DB(SPHI_SSB), Lf and DB(PHNOISE), but not restricted to this list.

Examples
periodjitter(wf1)
# This will calculate the period jitter for waveform wf1 with an
# automatically detected fundamental frequency that has been stored in
# the database by the Eldo RF simulator. The calculation will use
# the entire waveform. There will be 100 sampling points - the default.

periodjitter(wf1, 4e6, 3e6, 5e6, 50)

# This will calculate the period jitter for waveform wf1
# with fundamental frequency 4.000.000 Hz. The calculation will use
# the waveform from 3.000.000 Hz to 5.000.000 Hz. There will be 50
# sampling points.

periodjitter(wf1, f0=6e6, sampling_nb_points=200)

# This will calculate the period jitter for waveform wf1 with
# fundamental frequency 6.000.000 Hz and 200 sampling points. The entire
# waveform will be used for the calculation.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 817

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
periodjitterbyintegration

periodjitterbyintegration
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Calculates the RMS k-period jitter by Sphi integration.
Usage
periodjitterbyintegration(wf, fund[, fstart, fstop, k ])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the two-sided Sphi density waveform (in dB rad2/Hz vs frequency in
Hz) as computed using, for example, sphibyjitter. Only the positive side of Sphi is used.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental frequency.
• fstart
(Optional) Specifies the lower frequency limit in integration. Default is “Begin”.
• fstop
(Optional) Specifies the upper frequency limit in integration. Default is “End”.
• k
(Optional) Specifies the number of accumulated cycles. Default is 1.
Return Values
Double. The RMS k-period jitter by Sphi integration of the input waveform.

818 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
phase

phase
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
This function returns the phase of the input complex waveform.
Usage
phase(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The phase of the input complex waveform.

Description
Returns the phase of the input complex waveform limited to [-pi, pi] in radians, or limited to
[-180, 180] in degrees, according to the option set on the Data Format Options page of the
EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 819

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
phasenoise

phasenoise
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Computes the phase noise of a transient analysis.
Usage
phasenoise(wf1, wf2[, t_0, f_min, f_max])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the name of a waveform that is the result of a transient analysis of an
oscillator.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the name of a waveform that contains RMS values of the noise
corresponding to wf1.
• t_0
(Optional) Specifies the start time. Default is “Begin” (the first x value of the transient
signal).
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the frequency minimum. Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the frequency maximum. If not specified, the default value is the
derivative signal divided by two. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. The phase noise of the input transient analysis.

Description
The first waveform (wf1) must be the result of a transient analysis of an oscillator, and the
second waveform (wf2) must be RMS values of the noise corresponding to the first waveform.

The output units are as follows:

• Oscillation fundamental frequency is displayed in Hz.

• Jitter noise variance slope is displayed in sec2 * Hz.

• Phase noise variance slope is displayed in rad2 * Hz.

820 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
phnoisebydlm

phnoisebydlm
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Computes the phase noise in dBc/Hz by delay line measurement, where the oscillation
waveform is delayed and mixed with itself. This measurement is useful with circuits like free-
running oscillators, which have a fundamental frequency that is stable and varies randomly at
the specified value. Harmonic distortion of the waveform reduces the accuracy of this
measurement.
Usage
phnoisebydlm(wf, fund[, t_start, t_stop, f_sample, rbw, n_delay])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. The waveform must be the result of a
transient noise analysis.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental or center frequency.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• f_sample
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency. Default value “Automatic”is the inverse of the
maximum dx of the waveform.
• rbw
(Optional) Specifies the frequency resolution bandwidth. Finer RBW increases the
variability in the measured phase noise, and reduces the lower offset frequency limit.
Default value is 10/(t_stop-t_start).
• n_delay
(Optional) Specifies the number of delay periods. Recommended values are odd quarters: 1/
4 3/4 5/4 7/4 9/4. Default value “Automatic” is 1/4.
Return Values
Waveform. The phase noise by delay line measurement computation.

Examples
phnoisebydlm(v0, 3.4G)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 821

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
phnoisebydlm

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

822 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
phnoisebymixer

phnoisebymixer
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Computes the phase noise in dBc/Hz by mixer measurement, where the oscillation waveform is
mixed with a pure tone. This measurement is useful for circuits like PLLs, for which the
fundamental frequency is locked.
Usage
phnoisebymixer(wf, fund[, t_start, t_stop, f_sample, rbw])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. The waveform must be the result of a
transient noise analysis.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental or center frequency.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• f_sample
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency. Default value “Automatic” is the inverse of
the maximum dx of the waveform.
• rbw
(Optional) Specifies the frequency resolution bandwidth. Finer RBW increases the
variability in the measured phase noise, and reduces the lower offset frequency limit.
Default value “Automatic” is 10/(t_stop-t_start).
Return Values
Waveform. The phase noise by mixer computation.

Examples
phnoisebymixer(v0, 3.4G)

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 823

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
phmargin

phmargin
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Computes the difference in phase between the input waveform wf and -180 degrees at the
frequency where the gain is 0 dB (the Gain Crossover Frequency).
Usage
phmargin(wf)
phmargin(wf_db, wf_ph)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. If the input waveform is specified using
wf_db and wf_ph, this argument is not required.
• wf_db
(Required) Specifies the gain (dB) of the input waveform when used with wf_ph. If the
input waveform is specified with wf, this argument is not required.
• wf_ph
(Required) Specifies the phase of the input waveform when used with wf_db. If the input
waveform is specified with wf, this argument is not required.
Return Values
Double. The difference in phase.

Description
The input waveform can be also be described by a gain (dB) waveform wf_db and a phase
waveform wf_ph. This result is either in radians or in degrees according to data format settings.

824 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
pivot

pivot
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Generates a pivot waveform using the input compound waveform as the y-axis and a second
waveform, or sweep parameter, as the x-axis.
Usage
pivot(wf,x_wf_or_param[,filter])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input compound waveform name (y-axis).
• wf_or_param
(Required) Specifies the waveform (or compound waveform) to be used for the x-axis, or
the sweep parameter name.
• filter
(Optional) Specifies the input array of filtering parameters. Specify sweep parameters and
their values to be excluded. Default is “None”.
Return Values
Waveform. The pivoted compound waveform.

Description
If a filter array is specified, it must contain filter values wrapped between square brackets ( [ ] ).
The first element defines the parameter name and the subsequent elements define the excluded
values. Elements are separated by a comma. For example, [[SWEEP0, val0, val1,...,valn], …,
[SWEEPn , val0, val1,...,valn]].

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 825

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
plotjitterconfidenceinterval

plotjitterconfidenceinterval
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Plots approximate confidence interval for rms jitter vs. number of Gaussian samples (N).
Usage
plotjitterconfidenceinterval(rms_jitter, nb_samples[, confidence_level])
Arguments
• rms_jitter
(Required) Sample rms jitter as calculated using the standard deviation. Default is
“Automatic”.
• nb_samples
(Required) Number of independent Gaussian data samples. This may be a single value or
sequence of values (list of values). The function genlinear(start, end, step) may be used.
For example:
[1.0, 10.0, 50.0) or
genlinear(30.0, 1000.0, 1.0)
Default is “Automatic”.
• confidence_level
(Optional) Specifies the confidence level. Default is “Automatic” (99%).
Return Values
Waveform. The approximate confidence interval.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

826 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
pow10

pow10
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the value of 10wf.
Usage
pow10(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The scaled input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 827

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
psd

psd
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the Power Spectral Density of the input waveform.
Usage
psd(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs, points, sampling, padding, normalized, windowType, alpha, nsect,
nauto, ncorr, npsd, computationMethod, f_ref, f_min, f_max, samplingEpsilon,
windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points - 1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default) or “Interpolation”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros, before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left” or
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.
• normalized
(Optional) Specifies whether you want to take an average on the raw data to reduce noise
and smooth the frequency domain waveform. Specify 1 to turn this on, or 0 to not modify
the raw data from calculation. Default is 0.

828 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
psd

• windowType
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular” (the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.
Note
For Hanning, symmetric window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning
window in FIR filter design.
Periodic window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in spectral
analysis. This is because the Discrete Fourier Transform assumes periodic extension of
the input vector. A periodic Hanning window is obtained by constructing a symmetric
window and removing the last sample.

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha or beta value that is required by Hanning, Kaiser, and Dolph
Chebyshev windows.
• nsect
(Optional) Specifies the number of points by section. Default is “Automatic”.
• nauto
(Optional) Specifies the number of points for auto-correlation results. Default is
“Automatic”.
• ncorr
(Optional) Specifies the number of auto-correlation points used for power spectral density
computation. Default is “Automatic”.
• npsd
(Optional) Specifies the number of points for power spectral density results. Default is
“Automatic”.
• computationMethod
(Optional) Specifies the computation method. Legal values are: “PERIODO” (the default)
and “CORRELO”.
• f_ref
(Optional) Adjusts the results around the y-axis so that the point for the specified frequency
is 0.0.
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the starting frequency used inside the power spectral density result
window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 829

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
psd

• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the last frequency used inside the power spectral density result
window.
• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to “Interpolation”, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value.
The computed X value corresponds to t_start +(points * dX) where dX is the sampling
interval retrieved from the fs.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are “Symmetric” for standard
FFT setup or “Periodic” for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals.
Defaults to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic
option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case,
Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Return Values
Waveform. The Power Spectral Density of the input waveform

830 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
pssresidue

pssresidue
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Calculates the difference of every signal at tstop and tstop - tperiod and returns signals in sorted
order of the maximum difference.
Usage
pssresidue(wf, tperiod)
pssresidue(wf, tperiod, tstop, reltol, abstol)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• tperiod
(Required) Specifies the fundamental period in PSS analysis. To find slow drifting signals,
try specifying integer multiples of the fundamental period.
• tstop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time. Default is “End” (maximum X value).
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance for the PSS residue value. Default is 1e-3.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance for the PSS residue value. Default is 1e-3.
Return Values
Double. The maximum PSS residue.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 831

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
pulsewidth

pulsewidth
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the pulse width of a waveform that switches at least twice between high and low
levels, relative to default (automatically calculated) or user-specified topline and baseline
levels.
Usage
pulsewidth(wf)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline, pulsetype)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline, pulsetype, x_start, x_end)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline, pulsetype, x_start, x_end, option)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline, pulsetype, x_start, x_end, option, param)
pulsewidth(wf, topline, baseline, pulsetype, x_start, x_end, option, param, threshold)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed. Default is “Automatic”.
• pulsetype
(Optional) Specifies the signal pulse type from which the measurement begins. Specify
“Rising” (or “+1”), “Falling” (or “-1”), or “Either” (or “0”). Default is “Either”.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.

832 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
pulsewidth

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameter to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”, either “middleX” of “Xunit”. Default is “middleX”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the threshold of the signal. Specify “Automatic” to
have this value computed: (topline + baseline)/2. Default is “None”.
Note
"topline/baseline" and "threshold" parameters cannot be used simultaneously: use
either "topline/baseline" or "threshold".

Return Values
Waveform. The pulse width of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 833

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
rad

rad
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Converts the trigonometric angle of a waveform to radians.
Usage
rad(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform corresponding to the converted input waveform.

834 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
real

real
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Returns the real part of the input complex waveform.
Usage
real(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The real part of the input complex waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 835

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
reglin

reglin
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Performs a linear regression between the values provided, and returns a value for the slope.
Usage
reglin(array_of_x, array_of_y)
reglin(wf[, x_start, x_end])
reglin(array_of_datapoints)
Arguments
• array_of_x
(Required) Specifies the input array of x values. For example, [x0, x1, …, xn].
• array_of_y
(Required) Specifies the input array of y values. For example, [y0, y1, …, yn].
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• array_of_datapoints
Specifies the input array of points. For example, [[x0, y0], …, [xn, yn]].
Return Values
Double. The linear regression of the input waveform.

Description
Performs a linear regression between the values provided, and returns a value for the slope.

If an array is specified, it must contain data points wrapped between square brackets ( [ ] ). The
first element defines the x value, and the second one defines the y value. Elements are separated
by a comma. For example, [[x0, y0], [x1, y1], …, [xn, yn]].

836 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
relation

relation
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Generates a waveform from a point-by-point relational expression.
Usage
relation(wf1, wf2, operator, pt_at_crossing)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• operator
(Required) Specifies the relational operator through one of the following legal values:
o 1 — Represents “greater than”.
o 0 — Represents “equals”.
o -1 — Represents “less than”
• pt_at_crossing = “Yes” | “No”
(Optional) Specifies whether points are created at intersections:
o “Yes” — Points are added to the waveform when wf1 and wf2 cross (default).
o “No” — Points at crossings are not added to the result.
Return Values
Waveform. The relation between the two input waveforms.

Description
Generates a waveform from a point-by-point relational expression. It returns 1 corresponding to
the scalar value operator if any of the following conditions are true:

• operator = 1 and wf1 > wf2

• operator = 0 and wf1 = wf2
• operator = -1 and wf1 < wf2
otherwise, 0 is returned.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 837

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
removepts

removepts
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Removes points from a waveform where the states of a second (digital) waveform are “0”.
Usage
removepts(wf1, wf2)
Note
The waveform domains must overlap and wf2 must be digital.

Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second (digital) input waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform representing wf1 with points removed from the domain where digital
wf2 state is “0”.

838 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
risetime

risetime
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the difference in time from when the waveform rises from the lower level to the upper
level.
Usage
risetime(wf)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option, param)
risetime(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, x_start, x_end, option, param, rise)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
• low
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the low threshold. This can range from 0% to mid. By
default, this is set to 10%. This parameter is a string (for example, “10%”).
• mid
(Optional) Specifies the percentage that sets the limit range for the low and up values. By
default, this is set to 50%. This parameter is a string (for example, “50%”).
• up
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the high threshold. This can range from mid to 100%.
By default, this is set to 90%. This parameter is a string (for example, “90%”).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 839

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
risetime

• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. (Optional) Specifies the output type. Legal values are:
“WF” for waveform (default), “VALUE” for numerical value or array of numerical values
and “ANNOTATION” for plotting your input waveform with the result annotated on it.
Note
If rise is anything other than “all”, option = “VALUE “is forced.

• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• rise
(Optional) Specifies the occurrence of the result that the measurement will return. For
compound waveforms it applies to each element individually. Legal values are:
o “first” — Specifies the first occurrence of the result.
o “all” — Specifies all occurrences of the result. Default.
o “last” — Specifies the last occurrence of the result.
o n or “n” — Specifies the nth occurrence of the result.
Return Values
Waveform. The difference in time from when the input waveform rises from the lower level to
the upper level.

840 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
ritocomplex

ritocomplex
Waveform Calculator Complex function.
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of the real part and a waveform of the
imaginary part.
Usage
ritocomplex(wf1,[x_start1, x_end1,] wf2[, x_start2, x_end2])
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first (real) input waveform name.
• x_start1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval on wf1.
• x_end1
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf1.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second (imaginary) input waveform name.
• x_start2
(Optional) Specifies x value at the beginning of an interval on wf2.
• x_end2
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval on wf2.
Return Values
Waveform. A complex waveform combining two input waveforms as real and imaginary parts.

Description
Constructs a complex waveform from a waveform of the real part (wf1) and a waveform of the
imaginary part (wf2).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 841

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
rms

rms
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for transient or AC analysis.
Usage
rms(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The root mean square value of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the root mean square value of a waveform for transient or AC analysis, as follows:

sqrt (integ(wf2, x_start, x_end) if the x domain is frequency.

sqrt (integ(wf2, x_start, x_end) / (x_end - x_start) if the x domain is not frequency.

842 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
rms_ac

rms_ac
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for AC analysis.
Usage
rms_ac(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The root mean square value of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the root mean square value of a waveform for AC analysis, as follows:

sqrt (integ(wf2, x_start, x_end)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 843

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
rms_accurate

rms_accurate
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the integrated root mean square value of a continuous waveform that is accurate even if
the waveform is noisy.
Usage
rms_accurate(wf[, x_start, x_end ])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double. Returns the root mean square value of the input waveform.

844 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
rms_noise

rms_noise
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the root mean square value of a discrete frequency waveform for noise analysis.
Usage
rms_noise(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The root mean square of the input waveform for noise analysis.

Description
Computes the root mean square value (also know as the root sum square value) of discrete
frequency waveforms such as FOUR or FSST. It may be used, for example, in the calculation of
SNR. It is computed as follows:

sqrt (sum(wf2, x_start, x_end))

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 845

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
rms_tran

rms_tran
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the root mean square value of a waveform for transient analysis.
Usage
rms_tran(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The root mean square value of the input waveform for transient analysis.

Description
Computes the root mean square value of a waveform for transient analysis, as follows:

sqrt (integ(wf2, x_start, x_end)

846 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
rol

rol
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Returns a value that is the waveform rotated left by shift index positions.
Usage
rol(wf[, x_start, x_end], shift)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• shift
(Required) Specifies the shifted value.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform corresponding to the rotated input waveform.

Description
Returns a value that is the waveform wf rotated left by shift index positions.

The rol function replaces wf with a value that is the result of a concatenation whose left
argument is the rightmost (Length - 1) elements of wf and whose left argument is the leftmost
remainder of wf.

The following describe the three possible shifts:

• If the shift is 0 or if wf is a null array, the return value is wf.

• If the shift is positive, sra() is repeated shift times to form the result.
• If the shift is negative, the return value is the value of the function ror (wf, -shift)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 847

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
ror

ror
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Returns a value that is the waveform rotated right by shift index positions.
Usage
ror(wf[, x_start, x_end], shift)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• shift
(Required) Specifies the shifted value.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform corresponding to the rotated input waveform.

Description
Returns a value that is the waveform wf rotated right by shift index positions.

The ror function replaces wf with a value that is the result of a concatenation whose right
argument is the leftmost (Length - 1) elements of wf and whose left argument is the rightmost
remainder of wf.

The following describe the three possible shifts:

• If the shift is 0 or if wf is a null array, the return value is wf.

• If the shift is positive, sra() is repeated shift times to form the result.
• If the shift is negative, the return value is the value of the function rol (wf, -shift)

848 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
round

round
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the closest integer value to each data point of the waveform.
Usage
round(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform containing the rounded values of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the closest integer value to each data point of wf. Upon successful completion, each
returned value is expressed as a type double.

Related Topics
trunc
ceil
floor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 849

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sample

sample
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Creates a sampled waveform with equidistant data points.
Usage
sample(wf, sampling_interval[, x_start, x_end, strict_sampling])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• sampling_interval
(Required) Specifies the x interval for sampling.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• strict_sampling
(Optional) When set to “True”, forces equidistant digital events even when the logical state
is unchanged. When set to “False”, a new digital even is only triggered when the logical
state is changed. Default is “False”.
Return Values
Waveform. A new sampled waveform.

850 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
samplelog

samplelog
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Creates a sampled waveform with data points logarithmically spaced.
Usage
samplelog(wf, number_of_points[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• number of points
(Required) Specifies the number of points in the sampled result waveform.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A new logarithmically sampled waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 851

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
samplepsd

samplepsd
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Samples a continuous waveform variable wf, and returns its power spectral density, with unit
(w)2/Hz. Returned spectrum is from 0 to f_sample/2, and has frequency bin width of f_sample/
nfft.
Usage
samplepsd(wf[, t_start, t_stop, f_sample, nfft, window, detrend])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Name of the input time-based waveform.
• t_start
(Optional) Sampling start time on wf. Default is “Begin”, the first point of wf.
• t_stop
(Optional) Sampling stop time on wf. Default is “End”, the last point of wf.
• f_sample
(Optional) Sampling frequency. Default value “Automatic” is the inverse of the maximum
time-step.
Note
f_sample must be specified if t_start (or t_stop) is specified.

• nfft
(Optional) Number of data samples per windowed FFT segment. If the spectrum has a
strong signal at a frequency, let nfft = integer multiple of f_sample / (signal frequency) to
minimize signal leakage. Larger nfft improves frequency resolution but increases variability
with fewer segments. Default nfft is computed as roundnfft(f_sample/(10/(t_stop - t_start))),
where roundnfft() rounds the input to ensure efficient FFT processing. Default is “Default”.
• window
(Optional) The fft window type. Available types:
“Rectangular”, “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”, “Blackman-
Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”. Default is “Hanning”.
• detrend
(Optional) Subtracts the mean value or a linear best-fit line from the output to highlight
fluctuations around those values. Specify: “None”, “Mean” or “Linear”. Default is “None”.
Return Values
Waveform. The power spectral density of the input waveform.

852 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
samplepsd

Description
The calculation involves these steps:

1. Sample the waveform at the sampling rate of f_sample.

2. Divide the data into segments of nfft data points.
3. Compute the Hann-windowed FFT of each segment.
4. Compute the average power.
Figure B-3 describes the calculation.

Figure B-3. Calculation of SamplePSD

Examples
The samplepsd() function can be used on any time-domain waveform. In this example,
samplepsd() is used to calculate the power spectral density from transient noise analysis of a RC
circuit, and compare it to the result of noise analysis. In this case, the input for the samplepsd()
function should not contain any energy from the signal, only noise.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 853

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
samplepsd

The netlist used is as follows:

*
.option tuning=vhigh
.param vdc=0 vamp=0 per=1u
vin in 0 dc 0 ac 1 0 pulse('vdc-vamp/2' 'vdc+vamp/2' '0.25*per' '0.05*per'
'0.05*per' '0.45*per')
r1 in out 100
c2 out 0 100p
.ac dec 10 1 1G
.noise v(out) vin 10
.plot ac db(onoise)
.tran 1us 1ms
.probe tran v(in) v(out)
.plot ntr v(out)
.param vamp=1
.noisetran fmin=0 fmax=1G nbrun=1
.step param vamp list 0 1

The computation,

wf0=20*log(sqrt(samplepsd(wf("OUT", " -run 5 -show NOISETRAN.V -notop

")-wf("OUT", " -run 4 -show NOISETRAN.V -notop "), t_start=0.0,
t_stop=0.0010, f_sample=1.0E9, nfft=10000, window="Hanning",
detrend="none")))

produces the following plot (Figure B-4):

Figure B-4. Example Output Noise Spectrum Comparison

854 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
samplepsd

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 855

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
setAngleUnits

setAngleUnits
Waveform Calculator Special function.
Specifies the trigonometrical angle unit used in the Waveform Calculator.
Usage
setAngleUnits("degrees"|"radians"|"gradians")
Arguments
• "degrees"|"radians"|"gradians"
Specifies the trigonometrical angle unit.
Description
Note
This Waveform Calculator Special function does not appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list but may be used for scripting.

856 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
setNotation

setNotation
Waveform Calculator Special function.
Specifies the expression evaluation logic used in the Waveform Calculator.
Usage
setNotation("IEEE"|"SPICE")
Arguments
• "IEEE"|"SPICE"
Specifies the notation.
Description
Note
This Waveform Calculator Special function does not appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list but may be used for scripting.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 857

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
setTemperatureUnits

setTemperatureUnits
Waveform Calculator Special function.
Specifies the temperature unit used in the Waveform Calculator.
Usage
setTemperatureUnits("celcius"|"kelvin")
Arguments
• "celcius"|"kelvin"
Specifies the temperature unit.
Description
Note
This Waveform Calculator Special function does not appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list but may be used for scripting.

858 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
settlingtime

settlingtime
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Computes the time required for the input wave to settle within a certain limit around the final
value.
Usage
settlingtime(wf, steadystate, tolerance[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• steadystate
(Required) Specifies the final value to reach. Default is “Automatic”.
• tolerance
(Required) Specifies the tolerance value, either a percentage of waveform amplitude by
appending to the value the percentage character (%) or a positive or negative raw value.
Default is “5%”.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Double. The time required for the input waveform to settle around the final value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 859

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sfdr

sfdr
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the spurious free dynamic range of the input waveform in dBc.
Usage
sfdr(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal. Frequencies from
f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
“Default” is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are
considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is “None”, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The spurious free dynamic range of the input waveform in dBc.

860 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sfdr

Description
The spurious free dynamic range of the input waveform is given by the following relationship:

where:

= the signal.

= the highest spectrum which is not the signal (it can be an harmonic or not).

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

The unit of this ratio is always given in dBc.

Examples
sfdr(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6)
= 73.13448176568927

Related Topics
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 861

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
shift

shift
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Creates a waveform shifted in the x direction by an interval delta.
Usage
shift(wf[, x_start, x_end], delta, precision)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• delta
(Required) Specifies the interval for shifting.
• precision
(Optional) Specifies the floating-point precision used. By default, this is set to 12 (1e-12)
but you can specify your own precision if required.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform corresponding to the shifted input waveform.

862 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
shiftedmaxdiff

shiftedmaxdiff
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Finds the time when any signal in one run, shifted by tdelay, differs the most from the
corresponding signal in another run, and plots ntop signals in sorted order.
Usage
shiftedmaxdiff(wf1, wf2, [tdelay, x_start, x_end, reltol, abstol, ntop, depth, plot]
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in one run.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies any continuous waveform signal in another run.
• tdelay
(Optional) Specifies the time delay to be added to the first waveform signal. Default is
“Automatic”, the last point in the second waveform minus the interval of the first waveform.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• reltol
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-3 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• abstol
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance. By default, this is set to 1e-6 but you can specify
your own value if required.
• ntop
(Optional) Specifies the number of top results to return and plot. Default is 8.
• depth
(Optional) Specifies the hierarchy depth used to search the waveforms. Recursive search by
default.
• plot
(Optional) 1 (default) plots the shifted maximum difference results. 0 does not plot results.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 863

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
shiftedmaxdiff

Return Values
Array. The shifted maximum difference value for the given input waveforms, in the format:

[[wf1_handle, wf2_handle, shifted_max_diff_value], [...]]

Related Topics
firstdiff
maxdiff
maxspectrumdiff

864 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sin

sin
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the sine of a waveform.
Usage
sin(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The sine of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the sine of wf, by default measured in degrees.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 865

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sinad

sinad
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform. This is the
same as sndr.
Usage
sinad(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal. Frequencies from
f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
“Default” is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are
considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is “None”, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform.

866 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sinad

Description
The signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform is given by the
following relationship:

where:

= the signal.

= the noise.

= the distortion.

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

The unit of this ratio is always given in dB.

Examples
sinad(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6)
= 60.71366130019308

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 867

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sinh

sinh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic sine of a waveform.
Usage
sinh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic sine of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the hyperbolic sine of wf.

868 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
size

size
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns the number of data points in an analog waveform or the number of transitions in a
digital waveform.
Usage
size(wf,[ x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Integer. The number of data points of the input waveform

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 869

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sla

sla
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Returns a value that is the input waveform arithmetically shifted left by a number of index
positions.
Usage
sla(wf[, x_start, x_end], shift)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• shift
(Required) Specifies the amount by which to shift wf.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform corresponding to the shifted input waveform.

Description
Returns a value that is the input waveform arithmetically shifted left by a number of index
positions. That is, if the shift value is 0, the return value is the input waveform. Otherwise, a
basic shift operation replaces the waveform with one that is the result of a concatenation whose
left argument is the rightmost (length - 1) data points of the waveform and whose right
argument is a duplicate of the rightmost data point. If the shift value is positive, this basic shift
operation is repeated that number of times to form the result.

870 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
slewrate

slewrate
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Measures the slew rate of a periodic waveform relative to default (automatically calculated) or
user-specified topline and baseline levels.
Usage
slewrate(wf)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, edgetrigger)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param)
slewrate(wf, topline, baseline, low, mid, up, edgetrigger, x_start, x_end, option, param,
slewrate)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the signal. Specify
“Automatic” to have this value computed.
• low
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the low threshold. This can range from 0% to mid. By
default, this is set to 10%. This parameter is a string (for example, “10%”).
• mid
(Optional) Specifies the percentage that sets the limit range for the low and up values. By
default, this is set to 50%. This parameter is a string (for example, “50%”).
• up
(Optional) Specifies the percentage of the high threshold. This can range from mid to 100%.
By default, this is set to 90%. This parameter is a string (for example, “90%”).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 871

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
slewrate

• edgetrigger
(Optional) Specifies the signal edge from which the measurement begins. Specify “Rising”,
“Falling” or “Either” (default).
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates numerical values, “WF” indicates
a waveform (default), and “ANNOTATION” indicates the input waveform plot will be
annotated with results.
• param
(Optional) Specifies the simulation parameters to be used to generate the result waveform
when option = “WF”. Default is “middleX”.
• slewrate
(Optional) Specifies the measurement output type (“All” (default), “First”, “Last”).
Return Values
Waveform. The slew rate of the input waveform.

872 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
slope

slope
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Returns the slope value of a waveform at a specified x value.
Usage
slope(wf, x)
slope(wf, x, slopetype)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x
(Required) Specifies the x value.
• slopetype
(Optional) Specifies the slope type. Value may be one of the following:
o None. The slope value is computed normally. Default.
o Decade. The slope value is computed per decade for waveforms in the frequency
domain.
o Octave. The slope value is computed per octave for waveforms in the frequency
domain.
Return Values
Waveform. The slope of the input waveform at the given x value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 873

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
slopeintersect

slopeintersect
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Finds the slope intersection of two waveforms at specified x values.
Usage
slopeintersect(wf1, wf2, x1, x2)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform name.
• x1
(Required) Specifies the x value corresponding to the first waveform.
• x2
(Required) Specifies the x value corresponding to the second waveform.
Return Values
Array. The slope intersections.

Related Topics
Slope Intersect

874 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sndr

sndr
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform. This is the
same as sinad.
Usage
sndr(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal. Frequencies from
f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
“Default” is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are
considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is None, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 875

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sndr

Description
The signal to noise and distortion ratio (SINAD) of the input waveform is given by the
following relationship:

where:

= the signal.

= the noise.

= the distortion.

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

The unit of this ratio is always given in dB.

Examples
sndr(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6)
= 60.71366130019308

Related Topics
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

876 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
snr

snr
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the signal to noise ratio of the input waveform.
Usage
snr(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal. Frequencies from
f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
“Default” is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are
considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is None, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding and aliasing.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The signal to noise ratio of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 877

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
snr

Description
The signal to noise ratio of the input waveform is given by the following relationship:

where:

= the signal.

= the noise.

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

The unit of this ratio is always given in dB.

Examples
snr(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6) =
61.54552999317448

Related Topics
Signal to Noise Function
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog Box

878 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sorty

sorty
Creates the same output as the cdf function, but without normalization.
Usage
sorty(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
Description
Creates the same output as the cdf function, but without normalization. The first point of the
result is {x=ymin(wf), y=1} and the last point is {x=ymax(wf), y=size(wf)}.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 879

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
spectrummeasurement

spectrummeasurement
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes spectrum measurements on the input analog or complex waveform, including; “snr”,
“sndr”, “sfdr”, “enob”, and “thd”.
Usage
spectrummeasurement(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs | points, f_min, f_max, window_type, alpha, harm,
bin, meas_type, config_file, windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”. Specify
either fs or points, not both.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”. Specify either
fs or points, not both.
Note
The parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points-1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start

• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the starting frequency used in the spectrum measurement noise
integration calculation. Default is “Automatic”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the last frequency used in the spectrum measurement noise integration
calculation. Default is “Automatic”.
• window_type
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular” (the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.

880 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
spectrummeasurement

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha (or beta) value that is required by Hanning, Dolph Chebyshev
and Kaiser windows.
o Hanning : [0;1], default 0.5
o Dolph Chebyshev : [0:20], default 3.0
o Kaiser : [0:20], default 10.056.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics to be considered. Set to -1 to consider all
harmonics. Default is 6, equivalent to signal plus 5 harmonics.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin size for the spectrum measurement, that is, the number of points
to take into account around the fundamental signal. For example:
o with bin = 0, only the fundamental is taken into account
o with bin = 1, the frequencies taken into account correspond to the first point to the
left and right of the found fundamental and each of its associated harmonics.
The default value depends on the Windowing transform selected.
o Rectangular: bin = 0
o Bartlett, Hamming, Hanning, Welch: bin = 1
o Blackman, Dolph Chebyshev, Kaiser, Klein: bin = 2
o Blackman-Harris, Parzen: bin = 3.
• meas_type
(Optional) Specifies the type of measurement to be performed. Default value is “All” (all
measurement types are calculated). Allowed values are:
o “snr” (Signal to Noise Ratio)
o “sndr” (Signal to Noise and Distortion Ratio)
o “sfdr” (Spurious Free Dynamic Range)
o “enob” (Effective Number Of Bits)
o “thd” (Total Harmonic Distortion in dB)
o “thd_pc” (Total Harmonic Distortion in %)
o “fund” (fundamental frequency)
o “dc” (value of the dc amplitude)
o “signal” (value of the fundamental amplitude)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 881

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
spectrummeasurement

o “nb_fund” (number of bins used in the fund value calculation)

o “nb_harm” (number of bins used in the harmonic calculation)
o “all” (All of the above results).
• config_file
(Optional) Specifies a configuration file that contains input parameters. A configuration file
may be generated by entering parameters on the Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box
and then selecting File > Save Configuration. When specified, only the source waveform is
mandatory, and any other parameters specified in the function are overridden by those in the
configuration file.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Allowed values are “Symmetric” (for
standard FFT setup) or “Periodic” (for enhanced FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic
signals).
Return Values
List. The spectrum measurement(s) of the input waveform.

Related Topics
Spectrum Measurement Function
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog Box

882 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sphibyjitter

sphibyjitter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Computes two-sided Sphi density in dB rad2/Hz by jitter measurement. The positive side of
Sphi is returned.
Usage
sphibyjitter(wf, fund[, t_start, t_stop, rbw, edge, topline, baseline])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. The waveform must be the result of a
transient noise analysis.
• fund
(Required) Specifies the fundamental or center frequency.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• rbw
(Optional) Specifies the frequency resolution bandwidth. Finer RBW increases the
variability in the measured phase noise, and reduces the lower offset frequency limit.
Default value “Automatic” is 10/(t_stop-t_start).
• edge
(Optional) Specifies the edge to consider when calculating periods. Valid values are
“Rising”, “Falling” or “Either”. Default value is “Rising”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of a signal. Specify “Automatic”
to have this value computed.
Return Values
Waveform. The two-sided Sphi density in dB rad2/Hz by jitter measurement.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 883

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sphibyjitter

Description
The resultant Sphi waveform has a datum “noise” in dBc/Hz whereas the expression
noisetrantophasenoise has a datum magnitude in dB/Hz.

Examples
sphibyjitter(v0, 3.4G)

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

884 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sphifilter

sphifilter
Waveform Calculator Phase Noise function.
Applies a high pass filter to frequency-domain Sphi density.
Usage
sphifilter(wf, polefreq)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. The waveform must be a two-sided Sphi
density in dB rad2/Hz vs. frequency in Hz, as computed using sphibyjitter, for example.
• polefreq
(Required) List of pole frequencies in Hz. Complex poles should be specified as complex
conjugate pairs.
Return Values
Waveform. The high pass filter of the input frequency-domain Sphi density.

Examples
sphibyfilter(v0, 1e6)

Tip
See also .NOISETRAN in the Eldo Reference Manual.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 885

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sqr

sqr
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes wf2.
Usage
sqr(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The square of the input waveform.

886 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
sqrt

sqrt
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the square root of wf.
Usage
sqrt(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The square root of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 887

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sra

sra
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Returns a value that is the input waveform arithmetically shifted right by a number of index
positions.
Usage
sra(wf[, x_start, x_end], shift)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
• shift
(Required) Specifies the amount by which to shift wf.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform corresponding to the shifted input waveform.

Description
Returns a value that is the input waveform arithmetically shifted right by a number of index
positions. That is, if the shift value is 0, the return value is the input waveform. Otherwise, a
basic shift operation replaces the waveform with one that is the result of a concatenation whose
right argument is the leftmost (length - 1) data points of the waveform and whose left argument
is a duplicate of the leftmost data point. If the shift value is positive, this basic shift operation is
repeated that number of times to form the result.

888 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
stddev

stddev
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Calculates the standard deviation of the specified waveform.
Usage
stddev(wf[, x_start, x_end, ])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. The standard deviation of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 889

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
sum

sum
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Finds the sum of all the y values of the input waveform.
Usage
sum(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/complex. The sum of the y values of the input waveform.

Description
If the input waveform is complex then the sum is only calculated on its real part.

890 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
tan

tan
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the tangent of wf.
Usage
tan(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The tangent of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the tangent of wf, by default measured in degrees.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 891

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
tanh

tanh
Waveform Calculator Trigonometric function.
Computes the hyperbolic tangent of the waveform.
Usage
tanh(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. The hyperbolic tangent of the input waveform.

892 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
thd

thd
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
The total harmonic distortion function computes the distortion to signal ratio of the input
waveform.
Usage
thd(wf, f_list[, f_min, f_max, harm, s_freq, bin])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Typically this will be an FFT result
calculated in EZwave.
• f_list
(Required) Specifies the list of frequencies to be considered as signal, in the form
[freq0, ... , freqN]. Frequencies from f_list can be selected outside of [f_min, f_max].
• f_min
(Optional) Specifies the minimum frequency to be considered in the input waveform.
Default is “Begin”.
• f_max
(Optional) Specifies the maximum frequency to be considered the input waveform. Default
is “End”.
• harm
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics of the signal to be considered. Default value
is 6 (signal + 5 harmonics). If harm=-1, all harmonics within [f_min, f_max] are considered.
• s_freq
(Optional) The sampling frequency of the source waveform. Default value is “None”, no
sampling frequency. When specified, the sampling frequency is used to manage harmonic
folding and aliasing.
• bin
(Optional) Specifies the bin width to use as signal on the input wave (single sided). Default
is “Default”.
Return Values
Double. The distortion to signal ratio of the input waveform in dB.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 893

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
thd

Description
The total harmonic distortion of the input waveform is given by the following relationship:

10 log 10 (D/S)

where:

= the sum over all squares of distortion amplitudes of the signal.

= the sum over all squares of amplitudes of the sinusoidal frequencies.

The input waveform is always assumed to be a linear gain (magnitude).

The unit of this ratio is always given in dB.

Examples
thd(wf("<calc>FFT_V_OUT_DAC_GOOD_"),[4637700.0],0.0,8.0E7, s_freq=80e6) =
-68.3002538138697

894 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
tiejitter

tiejitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Computes the Time Interval Error (TIE) Jitter. TIE Jitter is the variation in time of the source
waveform edges relative to the reference waveform edges over part of, or the whole waveform.
Usage
tiejitter(wf, ref[t_start, t_ stop, edgetrigger, single_threshold, single_threshold_ref, topline,
baseline, threshold, topline_ref, baseline_ref, threshold_ref])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Required) Specifies a reference waveform.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Either”.
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used for the source waveform period
calculation (topline/baseline values are ignored). If “False”, topline/baseline will be used.
Default is “False”.
• single_threshold_ref
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold_ref will be used for the reference waveform
period calculation (topline_ref/baseline_ref values are ignored). If “False” topline_ref/
baseline_ref will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 895

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
tiejitter

• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• topline_ref
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the reference waveform.
Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline_ref
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the reference waveform.
Default is “Automatic”.
• threshold_ref
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the reference waveform.
Default is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The Time Interval Error jitter waveform for the input waveforms.

Description
TIE helps to evaluate the signal accuracy and the short- and long-term signal stability.

TIE jitter is calculated as the difference between edges (rising, falling, or both) of the source and
reference waveforms. The jitter RMS value horizontal marker is displayed over the result
waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

896 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
timeabsolutejitter

timeabsolutejitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Returns the absolute jitter waveform for the selected source waveform(s).
Usage
timeabsolutejitter(wf[, ref, t_start, t_stop, edgetrigger, single_threshold, topline, baseline,
threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform(s) for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Optional) Specifies the reference period. Default is “Automatic”.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Rising”.
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline values are ignored).
If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The absolute jitter waveform for the input waveform(s).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 897

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
timeabsolutejitter

Description
Absolute jitter is the accumulated difference between the actual cycle period and the reference
or average source waveform period values. This type of jitter helps to evaluate the short- and
long-term signal stability.

Absolute jitter is calculated as the accumulated difference between the actual cycle period
values of the source waveform and reference period. If the reference period is not set, the
accumulated difference is calculated between the actual and average cycle period of the source
waveform.

The jitter RMS value horizontal marker is displayed over the result waveform.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

898 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
timelongtermjitter

timelongtermjitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Returns the long-term jitter waveform for the selected source waveform(s).
Usage
timelongtermjitter(wf[, ref, nbcycles, t_start, t_stop, edgetrigger, single_threshold, topline,
baseline, threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Optional) Specifies a reference period. Default is “Automatic”.
• nbcycles
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles in the N-cycle sample that
will participate in the jitter calculation. The calculation starts from 1 cycle in time interval
and stops on nbcycles cycles. Possible values are an integer value or “Automatic”. When
“Automatic” is set, nbcycles = total number of cycles in the waveform / 50. This is done for
a more accurate calculation of each long-term jitter point (needs at least 50 values in the
sample). Default is “Automatic”.
Tip
By default, the maximum time of the jitter result waveform = maximum time of the
source waveform / 50. So a 1 second simulation waveform gives a 20ms jitter result
waveform. Increasing the value of nbcycles increases the result waveform maximum
time, but at the same time it decreases the calculation precision for the jitter waveform,
especially for points situated close to the ends of the waveform, due to the lack of
statistical data. Possible solutions are:
• increase the simulation time (by 50x), if possible
• try using the Phase Noise longtermjitter function in EZwave. This uses an algorithm
based on the integration and does not need the division by 50
• use the long-term jitter calculation integrated in Eldo and create a waveform from it.

• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 899

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
timelongtermjitter

• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Rising”.
• single_threshold
(Optional) Specifies whether topline/baseline or a single threshold is used for the source
waveform period calculation. If True, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline
values are ignored). If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the Y value that sets the high threshold of the source waveform.
Default is “Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the Y value that sets the low threshold of the source waveform. Default
is “Automatic”.
• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the Y value that sets a single threshold for the source waveform.
Default is “Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The long-term jitter waveform for the input waveform(s).

Description
Long-term jitter can be described as the variation in time of the cumulative period of adjacent
N-cycle samples. In other words, long-term jitter is the set of N-period jitter RMS values, for N
starting from 1 to the specified maximum number of cycles in the N-cycle sample.

Note
The timelongtermjitter function calculates 1-sigma jitter.

Each point in the result waveform corresponds to the N-period jitter RMS value for the given
number of cycles (from 1 to nbcycles). This means that the first value on the long-term jitter
waveform corresponds to the period jitter RMS value (N = 1).

This type of jitter is sometimes called “accumulated” jitter. It can help to evaluate the signal’s
long term accuracy and stability.

The jitter RMS value is not calculated for long-term jitter.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

900 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
timeperiodjitter

timeperiodjitter
Waveform Calculator Time-Domain Jitter function.
Returns the N-period jitter waveform for the specified source waveform(s).
Usage
timeperiodjitter(wf[, ref, t_start, t_ stop, edgetrigger, nbcycles, single_threshold, topline,
baseline, threshold])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform for which to calculate the jitter.
• ref
(Optional) Specifies the reference period. Default is “Automatic”.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the beginning of the jitter analysis interval.
Possible values are “Begin” or a double value. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X (time) value at the end of the jitter analysis interval. Possible
values are “End” or a double value. Default is “End”.
• edgetrigger
(Optional) Defines the waveform edge(s) that will be taken into account during the jitter
calculation. Possible values are “Rising”, “Falling”, or “Either”. Default is “Rising”.
• nbcycles
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of waveform cycles in the time interval (N-cycle
sample), which will participate in the jitter calculation. Default is 1.
• single_threshold
(Optional) If “True”, the single threshold will be used (topline/baseline values are ignored).
If “False”, topline/baseline will be used. Default is “False”.
• topline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.
• baseline
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 901

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
timeperiodjitter

• threshold
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source signal. Default is
“Automatic”.
Return Values
Waveform. The N-period jitter waveform for the input waveform(s).

Description
N-Period jitter is the variation in time of the duration of an N-cycle sample (each sample
consists of N adjacent cycles) of the source waveform relative to the average N-cycle sample
duration, or relative to the reference (or ideal clock) N-cycle sample duration, over part of, or
the whole waveform.

For N = 1, N-cycle jitter equals the Period jitter.

This type of jitter helps to evaluate the short- and long-term signal stability.

Related Topics
Jitter Measurement Types

902 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
timestep

timestep
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns a waveform of timesteps vs. times of a waveform variable.
Usage
timestep(wf)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The input waveform’s timesteps vs. times of the input waveform variable.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 903

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
todchysteresis

todchysteresis
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Creates a DC Hysteresis waveform from a two step DC simulation.
Usage
todchysteresis(wf)
todchysteresis(wf1, wf2)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name (compound DC).
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name (DC simulation step forward).
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name (DC simulation step backward).
Return Values
Waveform. The DC Hysteresis waveform corresponding to the input waveform(s).

Description
When a DC Hysteresis simulation is performed using a two-step DC simulation, separate
waveforms for the upward and downward simulations are generated. In this case, a
transformation is required to process these waveforms before you can use the hysteresis
measurement features and dedicated cursors in EZwave.

todchysteresis(wf) creates a compound of DC Hysteresis waveforms from 2*N simple

waveforms grouped in a compound of N elements. The compound waveform has a simple
waveform indexed from 1 to N, the result <i> is the transformation of the compound element
(2*i)-1 with the element 2*i.

todchysteresis(wf1, wf2) creates a single DC Hysteresis waveform from the two simple (not
compound) waveforms. For compound waveforms, it creates half the number of hysteresis
waveforms compared to the number of input waveforms:

result_1 is created from input_1 + input_2,

result_2 is created from input_3 + input_4,
…

904 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
topline

topline
Waveform Calculator Measurement function.
Returns the topline of the input waveform based on the calculation of histograms.
Usage
topline(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. The topline of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 905

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
topnoise

topnoise
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Returns noise spectrum in sorted order of spot noise at fstart or integrated noise from fstart to
fstop.
Usage
topnoise(wf)
topnoise(wf, fstart, fstop)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Any noise spectrum signal, such as “out”.
• fstart
(Required) Specifies the lower frequency limit for integrated noise or the single frequency
value at which to report spot noise.
• fstop
(Optional) Specifies the upper frequency limit. Default “End” is fstart.
Return Values
Double. The top noise.

Related Topics
dataset topnoise

906 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
trunc

trunc
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Computes the floor for positive data points and ceiling for negative data points of the waveform.
Usage
trunc(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform containing the truncated values of the input waveform.

Description
Computes the floor for positive data points and ceiling for negative data points of wf. Upon
successful completion, each returned value is expressed as a type double.

Related Topics
round
ceil
floor

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 907

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
var

var
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Enables database variable values (scalars) to be accessed and used in Waveform Calculator
expressions.
Usage
var(name)
var(name, database, folder)
var(name, database, folder, run)
var(name, database, folder, run, option)
Arguments
• name
(Required) Specifies the scalar to access.
• database
(Optional) Specifies the source database name.
• folder
(Optional) Specifies the source folder in the database.
• run
(Optional) Specifies the run-id for a multiple run database. Default is “ALL”.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. “VALUE” indicates scalar values, “WF” indicates a
waveform (setting values against run variables). Default is “VALUE”.
Return Values
Object. The accessed value.

Description
var(name) looks in the last open or active database for a scalar named name. It reports an error
if multiple entries are found.

var(name, database, folder) looks in the folder in the database for a scalar named name.

var(name, database, folder, run) looks in the folder in the database for a scalar named name in
run.

var(name, database, folder, run, option) looks in the folder in the database for a scalar named
name in run. Returns value or waveform object(s) according to option.

908 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
wf

wf
Waveform Calculator Special function.
Enables you to reference a waveform, in the context of the waveform calculator.
Usage
wf(<waveform_full_qualified_name>)
wf(<object_name>, <extended_option_set>)
Arguments
• <waveform_full_qualified_name>
A waveform fully qualified name. It can take the form:
"<database_name>waveform_name" or "<database/folder>waveform_name"

For example:
<meas/TRAN>V(IN)

• <object_name>
An object name, with or without the database identifier. For example:
"meas/Q0"

• <extended_option_set>
A set of options to define precisely which object is designated.
Note
The combination of <object_name> and <extended_option_set> should reference
a single waveform only. EZwave returns an error if this is not the case.

See also “Supported Net Representation Components” on page 1167 and “Extended
Options for Selecting Waveforms” on page 1168.
Description
The function wf() enables you to reference a waveform, in the context of the waveform
calculator. It can be obtained by selecting a waveform in EZwave, and select Insert selected
waveforms in the waveform calculator.

Note
This Waveform Calculator Special function does not appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list but may be used for scripting.

Examples
wf(“<meas/TRAN>V(IN)”)*wf(“<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)”)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 909

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
wf

wf(“<meas/TRAN>V(IN)”)*3

wf(“meas/IN”, “-show TRAN.V”)*wf(“meas/Q0”, “-show TRAN.V”)

wf(“meas/IN”, “-show TRAN.V”)*3

Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example:

This example illustrates how to use both wfc and wf commands. The goal is to call a waveform
calculator function on a specific waveform.

Here we are going to iterate through all the transient waveforms of a database to count them and
retrieve their number of points.

## Retrieve the list of all transient waveforms

set wflist [find -show tran.all -r *]
set wfcount 0

## Iterate through the waveforms to count their points

foreach thiswf $wflist {
foreach wave $thiswf {
## Use wf command to designate the waveform object on which
size should be called
set nb_points [wfc "size(wf(\"$wave\"))"]
puts "Number of points for waveform $wave is: $nb_points"
incr wfcount
}
}
puts "Worked on $wfcount waveforms"
puts "DONE"

910 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
wftoascii

wftoascii
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Dumps the input waveform in a text file at the specified path location.
Usage
wftoascii(path, wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• path
(Required) Specifies the output file path.
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Text file.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 911

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
wftodata

wftodata
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns an array with the data points of the input waveform.
Usage
wftodata(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Array. An array with the data points of the input waveform.

912 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
windavg

windavg
Waveform Calculator Statistical function.
Returns an average value for each x value of the input waveform.
Usage
windavg(wf, window_size[, window_direction])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• window_size
(Required) Specifies the window size value.
• window_direction
(Optional) Specifies the window direction. Legal values are “backward”, “center”, or
“forward”. If this is not specified, the default is “backward”.
Return Values
Waveform. The average value for each x value of the input waveform.

Description
The window average function returns an average value for each x value of the input waveform.
The following describe the different window_direction options:

• “backward” — (Default) If the current x value is less than window_size value, then
average will be performed from 0 to current x value, else average will be performed
from current x value minus window_size value to current x value.
• “center” — If current x value is less than window_size value divided by 2, then average
will be performed from 0 to current x value plus window_size value divided by 2. Else if
current x value is greater than last x value minus window_size value divided by 2, then
average will be performed from current x value minus window_size value divided by 2
to last x value. Else average will be performed from current x value minus window_size
value divided by 2 to current x value plus window_size value divided by 2.
• “forward” — If current x value is greater than last x value minus window_size value,
then average will be performed from current x value to last x value. Else average will be
performed from current x value to current x value plus window_size value.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 913

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
window

window
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Trims the original waveform and returns a new waveform with the specified lower and upper
bounds.
Usage
window(wf, x_start, x_end)
window(wf, x_start)
window(wf, x_end)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval. Default is “Begin”.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval. Default is “End”.
Return Values
Waveform. A new waveform with the specified lower and upper bounds.

Examples
To determine the time average of a waveform Vout from two to three nanoseconds, use the
following:

Vavg = avg(window(Vout, 2e-9, 3e-9))

914 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
windowing

windowing
Waveform Calculator Signal Processing function.
Computes the windowing of the input waveform.
Usage
windowing(wf[, t_start, t_stop, fs, points, sampling, padding, windowType, alpha,
samplingEpsilon, windowShape])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• t_start
(Optional) Specifies the start time of the input waveform. Default is “Begin”.
• t_stop
(Optional) Specifies the stop time of the input waveform. Default is “End”.
• fs
(Optional) Specifies the sampling frequency of the signal. Default is “Automatic”.
• points
(Optional) Specifies the number of sampling points. Default is “Automatic”.
For symmetric windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
For periodic windows, the parameters above satisfy the following equation:
((points-1)/fs) = t_stop - t_start
• sampling
(Optional) Specifies the method of computing the sampled data. Legal values are “No
Sampling” (the default), “Interpolation” or “Spline”.
• padding
(Optional) Activates data padding to pad the input data with zeros, before or after the input
data set. Legal values are: “No Padding” (the default), “Padding Right”, “Padding Left” and
“Padding Left and Right”. The input parameter is verified by the algorithm and changed if
necessary.
• windowType
(Optional) Applies a windowing function from a selection of windows. Legal values are:
“Rectangular “(the default), “Hamming”, “Hanning”, “Parzen”, “Welch”, “Blackman”,
“Blackman-Harris”, “Bartlett”, “Kaiser”, “Klein” or “Dolph Chebyshev”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 915

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
windowing

Note
For Hanning, symmetric window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning
window in FIR filter design.
Periodic window shapes are preferred when using a Hanning window in spectral
analysis. This is because the Discrete Fourier Transform assumes periodic extension of
the input vector. A periodic Hanning window is obtained by constructing a symmetric
window and removing the last sample.

• alpha
(Optional) Specifies the alpha or beta value that is required by Hanning, Kaiser, and Dolph
Chebyshev windows. Default is “Default”.
• samplingEpsilon
(Optional) When sampling is set to Interpolation, specifies that the input waveform data
point (Y value) is to be used rather than the exact interpolated value when the X data of the
input waveform is close to the computed X value.
The computed X value corresponds to time_start +(number_of_points * dX) where dX is the
sampling interval retrieved from the sampling_frequency.
Defaults to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
• windowShape
(Optional) Specifies the shape of the window. Legal values are Symmetric for standard FFT
setup or Periodic for enhancing FFT setup for spectral analysis of periodic signals. Defaults
to the global setting in the “Waveform Calculation Options” on page 528.
Tip
For comparing Eldo’s FFT results with EZwave’s FFT results, select the Periodic
option, unless EZwave’s FFT is executed on an FFT_INPUT waveform. In this case,
Eldo has already considered the periodicity of the input signal.

Return Values
Waveform. The windowed waveform.

916 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
xcompress

xcompress
Waveform Calculator RF function.
Extracts the x-axis value of the waveform at the point where the difference between the actual
value of the wave and the linear extrapolation of the waveform based on the computed slope
value becomes greater than val.
Usage
xcompress(wf, val[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• val
(Required) Specifies the Xcompress value.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/array. The x-axis value corresponding to the compressed input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 917

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
xdown

xdown
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns all the x values where the input waveform falls below the given y level with a negative
slope.
Usage
xdown(wf, at_y[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• at_y
(Required) Specifies the y value. Only the x values of the waveform falling below the y
value with a negative slope are returned.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/list. All the x values where the input waveform falls below the given y.

918 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
xnor

xnor
Waveform Calculator Logic function.
Applies the exclusive NOR function to two input waveforms whose data types are either bit or
boolean.
Usage
xnor(wf1, wf2)
Arguments
• wf1
(Required) Specifies the first input digital waveform name.
• wf2
(Required) Specifies the second input digital waveform name.
Return Values
Waveform. The resulting NOR waveform between the two input waveforms.

Description
The results of the NOR function are described in the following table:
Table B-15. XNOR Truth Table
wf1 wf2 xnor (wf1, wf2)
F F T
F T F
T F F
T T T

In the table, T represents TRUE for boolean waveforms, and 1 for bit waveforms. F represents
FALSE for boolean waveforms, and 0 for bit waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 919

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
xofmax

xofmax
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Returns all the x values at the maximum (or maxima) of a waveform.
Usage
xofmax(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/list. The X value(s) at the maximum (or maxima) of the input waveform.

920 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
xofmin

xofmin
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Returns all the x values at the minimum (or minima) of a waveform.
Usage
xofmin(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/list. The X value(s) at the minimum (or minima) of the input waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 921

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
xup

xup
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns all x values where the input waveform rises above the specified y level with a positive
slope.
Usage
xup(wf, at_y[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• at_y
(Required) Specifies the y value. Only the x values of the waveform rising above the y value
with a positive slope are returned.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/list. All the x values where the input waveform rises above the given y.

922 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
xval

xval
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns all the x values at the specified y level of a waveform.
Usage
xval(wf, at_y)
xval(wf, at_y, slope)
xval(wf, at_y, x_start, x_end)
xval(wf, at_y, slope, x_start, x_end)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• at_y
(Required) Specifies the y value at which to find the x value.
• slope
(Optional) Specifies the type of slope of the input waveform. Results are only collected if
the slope at the specified y level matches the specified slope. Values may be any of the
following:
o “neg” — Negative slope. Only x values at the specified y level with a negative slope
are returned.
o “pos” — Positive slope. Only x values at the specified y level with a positive slope
are returned.
o “either” — Any slope value. Returns the x value at the specified y level regardless of
slope.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Double/list. All the x values corresponding to the given Y for the input waveform.

Description
If the slope is specified, returns only x values that matches the specified slope direction at the
specified y level. Interpolation is applied.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 923

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
xwave

xwave
Waveform Calculator Mathematical function.
Creates a new waveform with y values identical to the x values.
Usage
xwave(wf[, x_start, x_end])
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x_start
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the beginning of an interval.
• x_end
(Optional) Specifies the x value at the end of an interval.
Return Values
Waveform. A waveform with x values identical to y values of the input waveform.

924 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
xytowf

xytowf
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Creates a new waveform using the Y values from wfX as the x-axis and the Y values from wfY
as y-axis.
Usage
xytowf(wfX, wfY)
Arguments
• wfX
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Uses the Y values as the x-axis for the new
waveform.
• wfY
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name. Uses the Y values as the y-axis for the new
waveform.
Return Values
Waveform. The waveform built from the input waveforms.

Description
Creates a new waveform, taking X values from the first argument waveform, and Y values from
the second argument waveform. Both waveforms must have the same number of points.

Examples
You can stretch the x-axis of a waveform. Use the Tcl procedure below in a Tcl file. It performs
the stretching of the x-axis data on a waveform xw obtained with xwave(). It reconstructs the
final result waveform with the xytowf() function.

proc xstretch { wf k } {
set xw [ wfc " xwave($wf)*$k " ]
return [ wfc " xytowf($xw, $wf) " ]
}

You can then load the file xstretch.tcl into the Waveform Calculator (File > Open Custom
File) and it will be listed in the Functions list under User Defined Functions. The first argument
is the waveform to be stretched, the second argument is the stretch factor on x-axis. You can
then call the procedure in the following way in the Waveform Calculator:

mystretchedwaveform=xstretch(wf("v_load"), 0.95)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 925

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
yval

yval
Waveform Calculator Miscellaneous function.
Returns the y value at a given x coordinate of a waveform.
Usage
yval(wf, x)
yval(wf, x, option)
yval(wf, x, option, param)
Arguments
• wf
(Required) Specifies the input waveform name.
• x
(Required) Specifies the x value at which to find the y value.
• option
(Optional) Specifies the output type. Legal values for option are:
o “VALUE” — Output is a numerical value. (Default).
o “WF” — Output is a waveform.
o “ANNOTATION” — Adds annotation to your input waveform.
• param
(Optional) Used with option = “WF”. Specifies the simulation parameter to be used to
generate the result waveform. Default is “index”.
Return Values
Double/complex. The y value of the input waveform at the specified x value.

Description
Returns the y value at a given x coordinate of a waveform. Interpolation is applied.

Note
If multiple data points match the X value, yval() returns the y value corresponding to the last
X data point.

Examples
In the following array of data points, 2 data points have the same X value and different Y ones:

[3[[0.0, 'False'], [1.0, 'True'], [11.0, 'False'], [21.0, 'True'],

[31.000000000000057, 'True'], [31.000000000000057, 'False']]

926 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Waveform Calculator Functions
yval

yval(wf, 31) will return False, the latest value for x=31. (Prior to AMS12.1, the value returned
would have been True).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 927

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Waveform Calculator Functions
yval

928 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix C
Tcl Scripting Support

EZwave supports Tcl scripting, enabling you to create batch files to execute Tcl commands
from within the EZwave viewer. This section contains the following information related to Tcl
scripting with the EZwave waveform viewer:
Tcl Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Tcl Scripting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Tcl Command Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
If Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Set Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Command Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Variable Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Passing Tcl Parameters from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Tcl List Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Supported Tcl Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Conventions Used in the Tcl Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Tcl Command Short Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
add wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
add workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
batch_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
bloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
compare add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
compare clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
compare configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
compare end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
compare info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
compare list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
compare options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
compare run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
compare savelog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
compare saverules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
compare start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
dataset alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
dataset analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
dataset clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
dataset close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 929

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support

dataset extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

dataset info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
dataset list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
dataset merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
dataset mergewaveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
dataset open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
dataset ovd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
dataset power analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
dataset rename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
dataset save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
dataset savescalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
dataset savewaveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
dataset scalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
dataset supported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
dataset topnoise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
delete wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
dofile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
evalExpression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
examine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
find analogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
find currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
find digitals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
find nets | signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
getactivecursortime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
printenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
radix define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
radix delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
radix list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
radix names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
radix signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
setenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
unsetenv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
wave activecursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
wave activewindow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
wave activeworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
wave addannotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
wave addaxisdeltamarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
wave addcursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
wave adddeltamarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062

930 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support

wave addline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

wave addmarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
wave addproperty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
wave addwindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
wave addworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
wave cdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
wave clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
wave closewindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
wave colortheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
wave createbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
wave cursortime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
wave deletecursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
wave difference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
wave displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
wave exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
wave ezwave_title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
wave gettype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
wave histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
wave jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
wave launchfolder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
wave listworkspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
wave loadbindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
wave lockcursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
wave names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
wave plotcompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
wave plotpacipn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
wave refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
wave rowfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
wave runindexlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
wave runparameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
wave runparametervalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
wave show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
wave showgridlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
wave showzerolevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
wave tandem mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
wave tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
wave windowlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
wave xaxis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
wave yaxis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
wave zoomfull. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
wave zoomin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
wave zoomlast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
wave zoomout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
wave zoomrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
wfc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 931

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support

write jpeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

write png . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
write wave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
External Tcl Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Tcl Scripting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Using find Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
adc_sndr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
adc_sndr_parallel4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
clock_jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
pll_jitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
pll_jitter_parallel4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
pll_phasenoise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
pll_phasenoise_parallel4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
PlotCompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
PlotPacIPn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

932 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Syntax

Tcl Syntax
This section contains information about Tcl syntax.
In this section:
Table C-1. Tcl Syntax Topics
Tcl Scripting Example A short example of how to use Tcl commands with
EZwave.
Tcl Command Syntax Rules Lists eleven rules that define the syntax and semantics
of the Tcl language.
If Command Syntax Describes in detail the syntax for the Tcl command, if.
Set Command Syntax Describes in detail the syntax for the Tcl command,
set.
Command Substitution Describes command substitution in Tcl.
Variable Substitution Describes variable substitution in Tcl.

Tcl Scripting Example

A short example of how to use Tcl commands with EZwave.
Procedure
1. Create a text file test.tcl and copy in the following lines:
## open the tutorial
dataset open $env(MGC_AMS_HOME)/examples/ezwave/tutorial.wdb
## perform a calculation
set wf [wfc {wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load")-
wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle")}]
## plot the result add wave
add wave $wf
## print window contents to a PostScript file
write wave -file $env(HOME)/test.ps
## then exit
exit

2. Run the following command in your terminal:

ezwave -do test.tcl

3. This command invokes EZwave and loads the Tcl commands contained in the test.tcl
file.

Tcl Command Syntax Rules

Eleven rules define the syntax and semantics of the Tcl language.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 933

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Syntax Rules

These are:

1. A Tcl script is a string containing one or more commands. Semi-colons and newlines are
command separators unless quoted as described below. Close brackets ( ] ) are
command terminators during command substitution (see below) unless quoted.
2. A command is evaluated in two steps. First, the Tcl interpreter breaks the command into
words and performs substitutions as described below. These substitutions are performed
in the same way for all commands. The first word is used to locate a command
procedure to carry out the command, then all of the words of the command are passed to
the command procedure. Different commands interpret their words differently.
3. Words of a command are separated by white space (except for newlines, which are
command separators).
4. If the first character of a word is a double-quote ( " ) then the word is terminated by the
next double-quote character. If semi-colons ( ; ), close brackets ( ] ), or white space
characters (including newlines) appear between the quotes then they are treated as
ordinary characters and included in the word. Command substitution, variable
substitution, and backslash substitution are performed on the characters between the
quotes as described below. The double-quotes are not retained as part of the word.
5. If the first character of a word is an open brace ( { ) then the word is terminated by the
matching close brace ( } ). Braces nest within the word: for each additional open brace
there must be an additional close brace (however, if an open brace or close brace within
the word is quoted with a backslash then it is not counted in locating the matching close
brace). No substitutions are performed on the characters between the braces except for
backslash-newline substitutions described below, nor do semi-colons, newlines, close
brackets, or white space receive any special interpretation. The word will consist of
exactly the characters between the outer braces, not including the braces themselves.
6. If a word contains an open bracket ( [ ) then Tcl performs command substitution. To do
this it invokes the Tcl interpreter recursively to process the characters following the
open bracket as a Tcl script. The script may contain any number of commands and must
be terminated by a close bracket ( ] ). The result of the script (the result of its last
command) is substituted into the word in place of the brackets and all of the characters
between them. There may be any number of command substitutions in a single word.
Command substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces.
7. If a word contains a dollar-sign ( $ ) then Tcl performs variable substitution: the dollar-
sign and the following characters are replaced in the word by the value of a variable.
Variable substitution may take any of the following forms:
o $name: Name is the name of a scalar variable; the name is terminated by any
character that isn't a letter, digit, or underscore ( _ ).
o $name(index): Name gives the name of an array variable and index gives the name
of an element within that array. Name must contain only letters, digits, and

934 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Syntax Rules

underscores. Command substitutions, variable substitutions, and backslash

substitutions are performed on the characters of index.
o ${name}: Name is the name of a scalar variable. It may contain any characters
whatsoever except for close braces. There may be any number of variable
substitutions in a single word. Variable substitution is not performed on words
enclosed in braces.
8. If a backslash ( \ ) exists within a word then backslash substitution occurs. In all cases
but those described below the backslash is dropped and the following character is treated
as an ordinary character and included in the word. This enables characters such as
double quotes, close brackets, and dollar signs to be included in words without
triggering special processing. Table C-2 lists the backslash sequences that are handled
specially, along with the value that replaces each sequence. Backslash substitution is not
performed on words enclosed in braces, except for backslash-newline as described
above.

Table C-2. Tcl Backslash Sequences

Sequence Value
\a Audible alert (bell) (0x7)
\b Backspace (0x8)
\f Form feed (0xc)
\n Newline (0xa)
\r Carriage-return (0xd)
\t Tab (0x9)
\v Vertical tab (0xb)
\<newline>white_space A single space character replaces the backslash, newline,
and all spaces and tabs after the newline. This backslash
sequence is unique in that it is replaced in a separate
prepass before the command is actually parsed. This
means that it will be replaced even when it occurs between
braces, and the resulting space is treated as a word
separator if it isn’t in braces or quotes.
\\ Backslash ( \ )
\ooo The digits ooo (one, two, or three of them) give the octal
value of the character.
\xhh The hexadecimal digits hh give the hexadecimal value of
the character. Any number of digits may be present.

1. If a pound sign ( # ) exists at a point where Tcl is expecting the first character of the first
word of a command, then the pound sign and the characters that follow it, up through the

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 935

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Syntax Rules

next newline, are treated as a comment and ignored. The # character denotes a comment
only when it exists at the beginning of a command.
2. Each character is processed exactly once by the Tcl interpreter as part of creating the
words of a command. For example, if variable substitution occurs then no further
substitutions are performed on the value of the variable; the value is inserted into the
word verbatim. If command substitution occurs then the nested command is processed
entirely by the recursive call to the Tcl interpreter; no substitutions are performed before
making the recursive call and no additional substitutions are performed on the result of
the nested script.
3. Substitutions do not affect the word boundaries of a command. For example, during
variable substitution the entire value of the variable becomes part of a single word, even
if the variable's value contains spaces.

936 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
If Command Syntax

If Command Syntax
The Tcl if command executes scripts conditionally. In the syntax below, the question mark ( ? )
indicates an optional argument.
Syntax
if expr1 ?then? body1 elseif expr2 ?then? body2 elseif … ?else? ?bodyN?
Parameters
• The if command evaluates expr1 as an expression.
The value of the expression must be a boolean (a numeric value, where 0 is false and
anything else is true, or a string value such as true or yes for true and false or no for false);
if it is true then body1 is executed by passing it to the Tcl interpreter. Otherwise expr2 is
evaluated as an expression and if it is true then body2 is executed, and so on. If none of the
expressions evaluates to true then bodyN is executed. The then and else arguments are
optional “noise words” to make the command easier to read. There may be any number of
elseif clauses, including zero. bodyN may also be omitted as long as else is omitted too. The
return value from the command is the result of the body script that was executed, or an
empty string if none of the expressions was non-zero and there was no bodyN.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 937

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Set Command Syntax

Set Command Syntax

The Tcl set command returns or sets the values of variables.
Syntax
set varName [value]
Parameters
• varName
(Required) The name of a Tcl variable. If you do not specify a value, this command will
return the value of the varName you specify.
• value
(Optional) The value to be assigned to the variable. When you specify value you will change
the current state of the varName you specify.
Description
Returns the value of variable varName. If you specify value, the command sets the value of
varName to value, creating a new variable if one doesn't already exist, and returns its value. If
varName contains an open parenthesis and ends with a close parenthesis, then it refers to an
array element: the characters before the first open parenthesis are the name of the array, and the
characters between the parentheses are the index within the array. Otherwise varName refers to
a scalar variable. Normally, varName is unqualified (does not include the names of any
containing namespaces), and the variable of that name in the current namespace is read or
written. If varName includes namespace qualifiers (in the array name if it refers to an array
element), the variable in the specified namespace is read or written.

If no procedure is active, then varName refers to a namespace variable (global variable if the
current namespace is the global namespace). If a procedure is active, then varName refers to a
parameter or local variable of the procedure unless the global command was invoked to declare
varName to be global, or unless a Tcl variable command was invoked to declare varName to be
a namespace variable.

Command Substitution
Placing a command in square brackets ( [ ] ) will cause that command to be evaluated first and
its results returned in place of the command.
For example:

set a 25
set b 11
set c 3
echo "the result is [expr ($a + $b)/$c]"

938 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Variable Substitution

This code will output the following:

the result is 12

Variable Substitution
When a $var_name is encountered, the Tcl parser will replace it with the value defined by the
variable.
Note
Tcl is case sensitive for variable names.

To access environment variables, use the following construct:

$env(var_name)
echo My user name is $env(USER)

Environment variables can also be set using the env array:

set env(SHELL) /bin/csh

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 939

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Passing Tcl Parameters from the Command Line

Passing Tcl Parameters from the Command

Line
Describes how to pass simple parameters from the command line to a Tcl script running in
EZwave batch mode or GUI mode.
Syntax
ezwave [-c] [-i <inputFile>] [-o <outputFile>] [-s name [,name]]
[-assign <param>=<value>] [-do <tclScript.tcl>] [-args <arguments>]
Arguments
• -c
(Optional) Runs EZwave in batch mode. There is no graphical user interface or display.
Refer to Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode.
• -i
(Optional) Specifies the input simulation results file or directory name. For PSF format data,
this may be the psf directory.
• -o
(Optional) Specifies the output file name for the measurement results generated by the Tcl
script. The default is standard output. This parameter affects the save() and wfc -save
functions:
When not set:
Writes to the current OVD iteration if available, otherwise it saves scalars to standard
output and waveforms are silently ignored.
When set:
Does not write to the current OVD iteration (even if it is available), but writes scalars to
<outputFile> and waveforms to <outputFile>.wdb (removing suffix “.txt”, “.log”, “.out”
if <filename> ends with such a suffix). When the file already exists, it is replaced
without notification.
• -s
A comma separated list of Waveform Calculator real or complex scalar variables, short
vector variables, or waveform names for which to print out measurements. Mentor does not
recommend using this for long variables, because the output gets written to a single line and
may be difficult to read.
• -assign
(Optional) Assigns a Tcl variable to a parameter.
• -do
(Optional) Specifies the name of a predefined or user-defined Tcl script.

940 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl List Processing

• -args
(Optional) Specifies a list of arguments for the Tcl script.
Description
You can pass simple parameters from the command line to a Tcl script and run it.

Examples
The command line:

ezwave -i databasename -assign param1=value1 -assign param2=value2

-do tclScript.tcl -args arg1 arg2 arg3

executes the following actions:

• Parses the command line parameters until -args <arguments> is reached (it ignores any
additional EZwave command line arguments that follow)
• Opens the specified database
• Sets a parameter value for each -assign assignment declaration
• Runs the Tcl script (tclScript.tcl) with the specified arguments (arg1 arg2 arg3).
Related Topics
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode
batch_mode
save
wfc

Tcl List Processing

In Tcl a “list” is a set of strings in curly braces separated by spaces. Several Tcl commands are
available for creating lists, indexing into lists, appending to lists, getting the length of lists and
shifting lists.
These are shown below:
Table C-3. Tcl List Processing Commands
Command Syntax Description
lappend lappend var_name val1 val2 … Appends val1, val2, etc. to the list
var_name
lindex lindex list_name index Returns the index-th element of list_name;
the first element is 0

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 941

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl List Processing

Table C-3. Tcl List Processing Commands (cont.)

Command Syntax Description
linsert linsert list_name index val1 Inserts val1, val2, etc., just before the
val2 … index-th element of list_name
list list val1, val2 … Returns a Tcl list consisting of val1, val2,
etc.
llength llength list_name Returns the number of elements in
list_name
lrange lrange list_name first last Returns a sublist of list_name, from index
first to index last; first or last may be End,
which refers to the last element in the list
lreplace lreplace list_name first last Replaces elements first through last with
val1, val2, … val1, val2, etc.
lsearch lsearch list_name pattern Returns the index of the first element in
list_name that matches pattern
lsort lsort list_name Returns list_name sorted in increasing
ASCII sorting order
Example 1

This example uses the Tcl while loop to copy a list from variable a to variable b, reversing the
order of the elements along the way:

set b [list]
set i [expr {[llength $a] - 1}]
while {$i >= 0} {
lappend b [lindex $a $i]
incr i -1
}

Example 2

This example uses the Tcl for command to copy a list from variable a to variable b, reversing
the order of the elements along the way:

set b [list]
for {set i [expr {[llength $a] - 1}]} {$i >= 0} {incr i -1} {
lappend b [lindex $a $i]
}

Example 3

942 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl List Processing

This example uses the Tcl foreach command to copy a list from variable a to variable b,
reversing the order of the elements along the way (the foreach command iterates over all of the
elements of a list):

set b [list]
foreach i $a { set b [linsert $b 0 $i] }

Example 4

This example shows a list reversal as above, this time aborting on a particular element using the
Tcl break command:

set b [list]
foreach i $a {
if {$i = "ZZZ"} break
set b [linsert $b 0 $i]
}

Example 5

This example is a list reversal that skips a particular element by using the Tcl continue
command:

set b [list]
foreach i $a {
if {$i = "ZZZ"} continue
set b [linsert $b 0 $i]
}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 943

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Supported Tcl Commands

Supported Tcl Commands

This section describes the supported Tcl commands.
The EZwave waveform viewer supports the Tcl commands listed in Table C-5 on page 945.

In this section:
Table C-4. Tcl Command Topics
Conventions Used in the Tcl Command Describes the conventions used in the short and
Descriptions detailed descriptions of the commands.
Tcl Command Short Descriptions A quick look at the supported Tcl commands
and their short descriptions. Organized in table
format and by category.
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl Details the different ways you can specify one
or many waveforms in Tcl.
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl Details arguments that are used by more than
one command.

Conventions Used in the Tcl Command

Descriptions
This section describes the conventions used in the Tcl command descriptions found in this
appendix.
Tcl command descriptions use the following conventions:

• Required
Required command names or arguments are in bold.
• Required Replaced
Required argument place holders are in bold italics. You must replace these arguments
with a value or string. For example,
dofile filename
indicates that you must replace the required filename argument with the name of a file.
• [ Optional ]
Optional arguments are surrounded by square brackets [ ].
• [ Optional Replace ]

944 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Optional argument place holders are surrounded by square brackets [ ] and in italics.
When using these optional arguments, you must replace it with a value or string. For
example,
compare run [startTime]
indicates that startTime is an optional argument, but you must replace it with a start time
value.
• {a|b}
Curly braces { } indicate a choice between the items separated by a pipe |. There can be
more than two choices for a set of curly braces.

Tcl Command Short Descriptions

This section describes the Tcl commands and their short descriptions.
These are listed in table Table C-5. In addition, EZwave recognizes Questa SIM and Questa
ADMS commands. Depending on the commands, these may either be ignored without error by
the EZwave Tcl interpreter or executed by internally applying corresponding actions. The
specific responses are given in the following topics:

• Questa SIM Command Support

• Questa ADMS Command Support

Tip
For commands that require a waveform_name argument, you can use special options to
select the waveform(s). These are indicated in the table by a footnote, found at the end of the
table.

Note
In addition to the commands described here, some example Tcl scripts that provide
equivalent functions to legacy AFS WaveCrave CalcPAD scripts are available in the
EZwave examples directory. Refer to “Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts” on
page 1154.

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands

Command Description
Miscellaneous Commands
batch_mode Check if the Tcl program is in batch mode.
bloc Enables multi-line Waveform Calculator
scripts.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 945

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

dofile file_name Sources the specified Tcl file.
environment [path_name][-dataset | -nodataset] Displays or changes the current region/
signal environment.
exit [--force] [-discard] Exits the EZwave viewer.
quit [-force] [-discard]
evalExpression expression Invoke the EZwave Waveform Calculator
wfc expression and perform operations. evalExpression and
wfc may return different values, depending
on the type of output. Refer to the entries on
the following pages for more details.
precision [-double | -cursor][precision_value#] Set cursor or double display precision.
write jpeg file_name [-window Exports the contents of a window as a PNG
window_name][-header "dbTitle simuTitle or JPEG image file.
wndTitle fromSimulator time date user
machine"] [-blackbackground |
-whitebackground | -monochrome |
-colorasdisplayed] [-visiblewindows]
[-resolution {screen |printerlow |printerhigh}]
write png file_name [-window window_name]
[-header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle
fromSimulator time date user machine"]
[-blackbackground | -whitebackground |
-monochrome | -colorasdisplayed]
[-visiblewindows] [-resolution
{screen|printerlow|printerhigh}]
wave loadbindings file.ezkey Loads an EZwave keyboard shortcuts
schema *.ezkey file.
Environment Variable Commands
printenv [variable_name] Displays name and value of environment
variable(s).
setenv variable_name [value] Sets or displays the value of an environment
variable.
unsetenv variable_name Unsets an environment variable.
Waveform Commands
add wave (see add wave section for usage) Add a new waveform.
delete wave [-window window_name] Removes a waveform.
waveform_name1.

946 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

wave addannotation [waveform_name1] -x Add a text annotation at the specified
x_value [-y y_value] -text text [-snap] location in the active window.

wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf waveform_name1 Adds a delta marker, between two values, on
{-xdelta | -ydelta} -X1 xdata1 -X2 xdata2 the selected waveform. The marker can be
[-texttext] horizontal or vertical.
wave adddeltamarker {-xdelta | -ydelta} -wf1 Adds a delta marker to waveform(s) in the
waveform_name11 -x1 x_value1 -y1 y_value1 active window.
[-wf2 waveform_name2] -x2 x_value2 -y2
y_value2 [-texttext]
wave addline {-x | -y} value [waveform_name] Adds a horizontal or vertical line to a
[-text annotation_text] [-drag] [-hash {up | down waveform in the active window.
| left | right}]
wave addmarker [-window window_name] Add a vertical marker at the specified
[-name name] [-time {time | x_value}] location.
wave addproperty waveform_name1 -name Adds a property to a waveform.
property_name -value property_value
wave addwindow [-title window_title] [-divider Creates a new window.
ratio] [-width width -height height] [-x xPosition
-y yPosition]
wave closewindow [window_name] | [-all | Closes one or more graph windows.
-workspace]
wave difference waveform_name11 Generates and displays a waveform
waveform_name2 [-name out_waveform_name] corresponding to the difference between the
[-spice] first and second waveforms specified.
wave displayed [-window window_name | Displays a Tcl list containing waveform
-allwindows | -activewindow] [-color] names and optionally, waveform colors.
wave exists waveform_name1 Returns True or False to indicate whether at
least one waveform matching the search
string exists.
wave gettype waveform_name1 Returns the type of the waveform, for
example, real, current, compound.
wave launchfolder Returns the path to the directory where
EZwave was launched from
wave runindexlist waveform_name1 Returns a list of run indices for the elements
of the compound waveform specified.
Useful for iterating through each element
individually.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 947

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

wave runparameters waveform_name1 Returns a list of run parameters for the
compound waveform specified.
wave runparametervalue -param param_name Returns the value of the specified run
-run run_index waveform_name parameter associated with the run index and
compound waveform specified.
wave show representation [|representation2 | … | Defines the default net representation that is
representationN] used with the add wave command.
wave windowlist Returns a list of open windows.
wave xaxis [-title title] [-scale {linear | log2 | Sets the x-axis title or scale.
log10}] [-window window_name]
wave yaxis -row rowId [-axis axis_name] [-title Sets the title or scale of the row. The y-axis
title] [-scale {linear | log2 | log10}] [-window name must be specified if there are multiple
window_name] y-axes.
write wave [file.ps | -file file.ps | -printer Print a waveform.
printer_name] [-window window_name]
[-landscape | -portrait] [-papersize {a3 | a4 | a5 |
b4 | b5 | letter | tabloid | ledger | legal |
executive}] [-copies number ] [-allwaveforms |
-visiblewaveforms] [-activewindow |
-allwindows | -visiblewindows] [-eps] [-header
"dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time
date user machine"]
Find Commands
find analogs object_name1 … Returns names of all analog objects
(quantities and terminals) matching the
specified pattern.
find currents object_name1 … Returns the names of all the current objects
matching the specified pattern.
find digitals item_name1 … Returns a list of digital signals matching the
specified pattern.
find nets | signals item_name1 … Returns the full pathnames of all analog and
digital objects that match the name
specifications.
Zoom Commands
wave zoomfull [-window window_name] Zoom out to show entire x-axis.
wave zoomin [-window window_name] [factor] Zoom in on x-axis by specified factor
(default: 2x).
wave zoomlast [-window window_name] Undo most recent zoom operation.

948 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

wave zoomout [-window window_name] [factor] Zoom out on x-axis by specified factor
(default: 2x)
wave zoomrange [-window window_name] Zoom in on x-axis to range specified by start
[start] [end] and/or end points.
Cursor Commands
getactivecursortime [-window window_name] Return cursor location.
wave activecursor [-window window_name] Specify cursor to be active cursor.
[cursor_name]
wave addcursor [-window window_name] [-time Create a new cursor.
time | X_value] [-name cursor_name]
wave cursortime [-window window_name] [-time Move cursor to specified position, or return
time | X_value] [cursor_name] cursor location if position is not specified.
wave deletecursor [-window window_name] Delete a cursor.
[cursor_name]
wave lockcursor [on | off] Determines whether the spacing between
cursors is fixed.
Display Commands
wave activewindow [-title window_name] Returns the name of the currently active
window, or sets a specified window to be
active.
wave colortheme [black | white | mono] [-print] Sets the print or graphical display color
scheme.
wave ezwave_title new_title Adds a custom title to the top of the EZwave
main display.
wave names [-showdataset {on | off}] Determines whether plotted waveforms
[-showhierarchy {on | off}] show dataset names and (or) complete
hierarchical path
wave refresh [-window window_name] Redraw window contents.
wave rowfit [-window window_name] Optimizes row size in a window.
wave showgridlines [on | off] Determines whether gridlines are displayed
in newly created windows
wave showzerolevels {on | off | horizontal | Determines how zero levels are activated or
vertical} disabled on all new windows.
wave tandem mode [on | off] Activates or deactivates Tandem Mode.
wave tile [-cascade | -horizontal | -vertical | -grid] Arranges windows in one of the four tiling
options.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 949

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

Radix Commands
radix [-radix_type | radix_name] Sets the bus radix to one of the following:
• binary
• octal
• decimal
• hexadecimal
• unsigned
• ascii
• Fixed Point
• Gray Code to Decimal
• To Gray Code
or a user defined radix.
radix define radix_name {radix_value, Defines a new radix.
radix_label [radix_value2, radix_label2 …
radix_valueN, radix_labelN] [-default
radix_type]}
radix delete radix_name Removes the radix definition from the
named radix.
radix names Returns a list of all currently defined radix
names.
radix list [radix_name] Returns the definition of a radix if a name is
supplied, the definition of all currently
defined radices otherwise.
radix signal [waveform_name [radix_value]] Sets or inspects radix values for the specified
[-fpoint decimal] signals.
RF Commands
wave plotcompress Plots output power vs input power in dBm
and returns n-dB compression point.
wave plotpacipn Takes a PAC spectrum signal pair at the
desired and unwanted harmonics, within an
input power sweep, plots the pair of IPn
curves and returns the intercept point.
Dataset Commands
dataset alias dataset_name [alias_name [-folder Assigns aliases to datasets.
folder_path]]
dataset analysis [dataset_name] [-folder Returns analysis list for the dataset
folder_path]

950 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

dataset clear Clear all waveform data from last opened
database.
dataset close [database_name | -all] Close specific database, or all databases.
dataset info option [database_name] Fetch information about a database. option is
one of:
• name — Database name
• file — Path- and filename where
database is saved
• exists — Whether database is currently
open
dataset list [-long] List open databases.
dataset merge dataset_name file_name1 … Merges databases.
file_namen [-matchindex | -startindex
start_index] [-ignorewaveforms]
dataset mergewaveforms dataset_name Merges waveforms.
file_name1 … file_namen [-matchindex |
-startindex start_index] -wf waveform1_name1
… waveform_n_name
dataset open file_name [dataset_name] Open a database file.
[-incl_if_tandem {on | off}]
dataset rename database_name new_name Rename database.
dataset save database_name file_name [-start Save database to disk.
x_start] [-end x_stop] [-sampling sample]
[-atcursors] [-delta delta] [-derivabs derivabs]
[-derivrelderivrel]
dataset savescalar <wdb> <database> [<folder> Save scalars, such as noise contributors, to a
... <folderN>] -output <report_file> [-sort TXT file or CSV file.
<name|value> <asc|desc>]
dataset savewaveforms file_name [-start x_start] Save waveform(s) into the specified
[-end x_stop] [-sampling sample] [-atcursors] database file.
[-delta delta] [-derivabs derivabs]
[-derivrelderivrel] waveform_name1
dataset scalar ref_dataset test_dataset -output Compares scalar values of variables stored
<report_file> [-type <name>] [-cs 0|1] in two databases (PSF, nutmeg, FSDB,
[-nameonly|-tol <value>] WDB, OVD).
dataset supported dataset_path Returns “true” if the dataset can be opened
by EZwave, and “false” otherwise.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 951

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Short Descriptions

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

dataset topnoise <wdb_obj> -fstart <value> Performs a topnoise calculation on the
[-fstop <value>] [-ntop <value>] [-pattern specified waveform database folder or
<value>] [-norecursive] [-depth <value>] [-runs hierarchy.
<runID>,<runID1>,...] [-instance] [-file <path>]
[-noplot] [-nogrid]
Workspace Commands
wave activeworkspace [workspace_name] Cause a workspace to become active.
wave addworkspace [workspace_name] [-active] Creates a new workspace.
wave listworkspace Returns a list of workspaces.
Waveform Comparison Commands
compare add (see compare add section for usage) Creates the scope for waveform comparison.
compare clock [-delete] [-offset delay] [-rising | Defines a clock for clocked-mode
-falling | -both] clock_name waveform_path comparisons.
compare configure [-clock name] [-recursive] Modifies options for compare signals and
[-tol delay] [-tolLead delay] [-tolTrail delay] regions.
[-mixtolLead delay] [-mixtolTrail delay]
[-freqTol freqtol] [-amplTol ampltol]
[-noiseFloor noisefloor] [-matchindex]
[-vhdlmatches
{ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-vlogmatches
{ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}] [-xTol
xtolerance] [-yTol ytolerance] [-threshold {1|2}]
[-upperthreshold value] [-lowerthreshold value]
[-fixedthreshold value] [-refDelay delay]
[-testDelay delay] [-start start_value] [-end
end_value] [-edgecompare] comparePath
compare end Closes active comparison without saving
any information.
compare info [-start start_value] [-end Displays results of the comparison in the
end_value] [-write filename] main window.
compare list [-expand] Outputs the Tcl scripts of all the compare
add commands in effect.

952 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl

Table C-5. Supported Tcl Commands (cont.)

compare options [-maxsignal n] [-maxtotal n] Sets defaults for various waveform
[-mode_name] [-tol delay] [-tolLead delay] comparison commands.
[-tolTrail delay] [-vhdlmatches
{ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}]
[-vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:
… }] [-xTol xtolerance] [-yTol ytolerance]
[-threshold {1|2}] [-upperthreshold value]
[-lowerthreshold value] [-fixedthreshold value]
[-wavewin name] [-noaddwave] [-addwave]
[-adderrorwave]
compare run [startTime] [endTime] Runs the difference computation.
compare savelog filename Saves a log of errors and warnings during
comparison.
compare saverules [-session] [-expand] Saves the rules of all compare add
rules_filename commands in effect and compare options to
a file. Can also be used to save the entire
comparison session.
compare start [-batch] [-maxsignaln] Begins a new dataset comparison.
[-maxtotaln] [-refDelay delay] [-testDelay delay]
reference_dataset [test_dataset]
1. You can use extended options for this waveform_name. A footnoted waveform_name means that you can
use the following options to select the waveform(s). See the section for details:
[-show wave_show_expression][-recursive][-depth <level>][-signals][-quantities][-terminals]
[-nets][-ports][-in][-out][-inout][-internal][-through][-across][-free][-flow][-i]
[-boundary][-a2d][-d2a][-bidir][-run {run_number | run_name}][-session {previous | current}]
[-adms | -modelsim]

When saving window contents to a Tcl file, an asterisk (*) in an extended waveform name is
interpreted as a wildcard character.

Specifying Waveforms in Tcl

You can specify one or more waveforms in Tcl.
This is done in the following ways:

• Waveform handles ( handle: <#:#> ) returned by the wfc command.

• Fully qualified names in one of the following forms:
<database_name>waveform_name
<database/folder>waveform_name

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 953

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl

For example:
<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle
• Object names. This method enables you to manipulate objects from the design and add a
representation (if necessary). This syntax is consistent with the Questa ADMS add
wave syntax.
The object name syntax consists of the following parts:
o Dataset name — The dataset name is the logical name for the JWDB file in which
the object exists. Specifying the dataset name is optional when only one dataset is
active, or if the command should only apply to the last loaded dataset.
The following keywords are reserved dataset names:
• sim — This reserved dataset name specifies the currently active simulation.
• prev — This reserved dataset name refers to the PreviousSession folder, if it
exists, in the current dataset. The PreviousSession folder must be activated in the
modelsim.ini file while running Questa ADMS simulations.
o Dataset separator — The data separator is used to terminate the dataset name
string. In the EZwave viewer, this is a forward slash ( / ).
o Path separator — In the EZwave viewer, this is a colon ( : ).
o Hierarchical path — A set of hierarchy instance names, separated by a path
separator ( : ).
o Object name — The name of the object in the design.
Object name syntax examples:
add wave :top:clk
add wave -show ac.vdb :top:out
add wave adc12/top:x1:out

954 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl

Selecting Waveforms in Tcl

Describes the extended options that are available for selecting waveform(s) within the Tcl
commands.
Usage
The extended options are:
[-show wave_show_expression][-recursive][-depth <level>]
[-signals][-quantities][-separator <separator>][-terminals]
[-nets][-notop][-ports][-in][-out][-inout][-internal]
[-through][-across][-free][-flow][-i][-boundary][-a2d][-d2a][-bidir]
[-run {run_number | run_name | <operator>}][-session {previous | current}]
[-adms | -modelsim]

Parameters
• -a2d
(Optional) Only a2d nets are added.
• -across
(Optional) Only across quantities are returned.
• -adms | -modelsim
(Optional) Filters the list of matching waveforms to match those simulated by the Questa
ADMS kernel or those simulated by the Questa SIM (formerly ModelSim) kernel.
• -bidir
(Optional) Only bidir nets are added.
• -boundary
(Optional) Only analog, digital, or both sides of boundary nets are returned, depending on
your selection during simulation.
• -d2a
(Optional) Only d2a nets are added.
• -depth level
(Optional) Used with the -recursive option, restricts the recursive search to the specified
level of hierarchy.
• -flow
(Optional) Specifies that current waveforms should be displayed (instead of voltage,
displayed by default). This is the same as “-show tran.i”
• -free
(Optional) Only Free quantities are returned.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 955

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl

• -i
(Optional) Specifies that current waveforms should be displayed (instead of voltage,
displayed by default). This is the same as “-show tran.i”
• -in
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode IN.
• -inout
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode INOUT.
• -internal
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search is to include internal (non-port) objects.
• -nets
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search includes terminal, signal, and quantity
items.
• -notop
(Optional) Specifies that only waveforms located directly under an analysis folder (for
example TRAN or AC) may be selected.
• -out
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search include ports of mode OUT.
• -ports
(Optional) Specifies that the scope of the search includes ports of modes IN, OUT, or
INOUT.
• -quantities
(Optional) Only quantity nets are added.
• -recursive
(Optional) You may also use -r as a shortcut. Used with wildcard searches. Specifies that
the scope of the search descend recursively into subregions. See also -depth level option.
• -run [ run_id | "run_id_1 run_id_2 ... run_id_n" | <operator>]
(Optional) This argument is used to find a specific (or several) run(s) of a compound
waveform. run_id can be a numerical value or string, depending on the run identifier. The
operators available are “=”, “!=”, “>”, “<“, “>=”, and “<=”. The operators “&” or “|” may
also be used, but not together in the same -run value.
Example of usage with add wave command:
add wave -run "TEMP > 0 & TEMP < 120" -show TRAN.v -separator .
-terminals XI11.NET4

956 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl

• -separator <separator>
(Optional) Specifies the separator used when parsing the object (waveform) name, for
example “.” or “:”.
• -session [previous | current]
(Optional) Specifies whether to look in a previous session folder or the current database.
• -show representation [ |representation2|...|representationN]
(Optional) Specifies how the signal is to be represented as a waveform. If -show is not
specified, the defaults defined by the wave show command are used. If -show is specified,
its settings are applied beginning where it exists in the script until another -show is issued,
or until the end of the script.
A representation is a complete representation of a net and is composed of an analysis, a
discipline, and a physic. A dot ( . ) separates the analysis portion from the discipline and
physic portion. There is no separator between the discipline and the physic, as follows:
analysis.disciplinephysic
If more than one representation is specified, use a pipe ( | ) to separate them:
analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic
The reserved keywords, all and none, can be used as follows:
o -show all
(Optional) Requests all objects found in all analyses
o -show analysis.all
(Optional) Requests all objects found in the specified analysis.
o -show none
(Optional) Requests objects directly located in the database in the case where there is
no analysis folder.
Refer to Appendix D for details.
Examples of -show usage:
• add wave -show ac.vdb :test:u1:tvout
In this example, the analysis is AC, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB.
This will only search for the waveform named database_name/
AC>VDB(:test:u1:tvout)
• add wave -show fsst.vdb.h(1) :top:net1

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 957

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl

In this example, the analysis is FSST, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB
for the primary_ physic, and H(1) for the secondary_physic. This will search for
the specified waveform in the last-opened database:
database_name/FSST>VDB(:top:net1).H(1)
• -signals
(Optional) Only signal nets are added.
• -terminals
(Optional) Only reference quantities of terminal nets are added.
• -through
Specifies that only Through quantities matching the net names are saved
Description
The commands for selecting waveform(s) within the Tcl commands with extended options are
listed in Table C-6.
Table C-6. Commands that Access Waveforms
add wave dataset wave addannotation wave exists
savewaveforms
compare add delete wave wave adddeltamarker wave histogram
compare clock find analogs wave addproperty wave runindexlist
compare configure find digitals wave cdf
dataset find nets | signals wave createbus
mergewaveforms

958 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

This section details the supported Tcl commands, listed alphabetically.

Table C-7. Tcl Commands

Command Description
add wave Adds one or more waveforms to a graphical window.
add workspace Creates a new workspace in the EZwave session window.
batch_mode Indicates whether the EZwave viewer or the JWDB server
is used, to check whether the Tcl script is currently in batch
mode.
bloc Enables multi-line Waveform Calculator scripts.
compare add Creates the scope of the comparison (all waveforms, top
level ports, …) and supports a set of options, like
tolerances, to be applied to the comparison. This command
has additional arguments, compared to Questa SIM
commands, to enable defining tolerances and settings for
analog-analog and analog-digital comparison. The same
command is then used in to set up complete mixed-signal
comparison. Path of regions is not supported; a global
expression (regular expression) should be used instead. For
example, :top:level1:* rather than :top:level1.
compare clock Defines a clock that can be used for clocked-mode
comparisons. In clocked-mode comparisons, signals are
sampled and compared only at or just after an edge on
some signals.
compare configure Modifies options for compare signals and regions.
compare end Closes the active comparison without saving any
information.
compare info Lists the results of a waveform comparison in the main
window transcript. To save the information to a file, use
the -write argument.
compare list Outputs the Tcl scripts of all the compare add commands in
effect.
compare options Sets defaults for various waveform comparison commands.
Those defaults are used when other compare commands
are invoked during the current session.
compare run Runs the difference computation on the signals selected via
a compare add command.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 959

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
compare savelog Creates a log file containing error and warning messages
generated during waveform comparison.
compare saverules Saves the rules (all compare add commands in effect and
compare options) to a file. Can also be used to save the
entire comparison session.
compare start Begins a new dataset comparison.
dataset alias Adds additional names (aliases) to a dataset.
dataset analysis Returns a list of folders (or subfolders) of analysis of the
dataset (or folder).
dataset clear Clears all waveform data from the last opened database.
dataset close Closes the specified database or all databases.
dataset extract Runs Eldo -extract on the source database using the source
netlist to define the .extract and .meas commands.
dataset info Returns the specified information about a database.
dataset list Returns a list of currently opened databases.
dataset merge Merges databases containing single run simulation results,
and generates compound waveforms from found
waveforms. When supplied the name of an index file, the
command merges the referenced databases and adds
parameters as defined in the file.
dataset mergewaveforms Merges waveforms, grouping waveforms of the same name
as if there were multiple simulation runs.
dataset open Opens a database file.
dataset ovd Opens an OVD file.
dataset power analysis Performs a power analysis of the specified waveform
database power analysis folder.
dataset rename Renames the specified database.
dataset save Saves the specified database to disk as the specified file
name.
dataset savescalar Save scalars, such as noise contributors, to a TXT file or
CSV file.
dataset savewaveforms Saves the specified waveform(s) to disk as the specified
file name.
dataset scalar Compares scalar values of variables stored in two
databases (PSF, nutmeg, FSDB, WDB, OVD).

960 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
dataset supported Returns “true” if the dataset can be opened by EZwave,
and “false” otherwise.
dataset topnoise Performs a topnoise calculation on the specified waveform
database folder or hierarchy.
delete wave Removes the specified waveform from the indicated
window.
dofile Tells the EZwave Tcl interpreter to source the specified Tcl
file.
environment Displays or changes the region/signal environment.
evalExpression Invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the
expression entered.
examine Examines an object and displays its current value in the
Transcript Window.
exit Exits the EZwave viewer.
find analogs Returns the names of all the analog objects (quantities and
terminals) matching the specified pattern.
find currents Returns the names of all the current objects matching the
specified pattern.
find digitals Returns a list of digital signals matching the specified
pattern.
find nets | signals These commands return the full pathnames of all analog
and digital objects that match the name specification.
getactivecursortime Returns the location of the active cursor.
precision Sets the double or cursor display precision.
printenv Displays the name and value of environment variables.
quit Exits the EZwave viewer.
radix Defines the default bus radix or returns the current default
if no radix is specified.
radix define Defines a new radix.
radix delete Removes the radix definition from the named radix.
radix list Returns the complete definition of the named radix.
radix names Returns a list of all the defined radices.
radix signal Sets the radix value for the specified waveforms, or if the
radix value is not specified it inspects the radix values.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 961

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
save Saves the specified Waveform Calculator measure.
setenv Sets or displays the value of the specified environment
variable.
unsetenv Unsets an environment variable.
wave activecursor Sets the specified cursor as the active cursor.
wave activewindow Returns the name of the currently active window, or sets a
specified window to be active.
wave activeworkspace Causes the specified workspace to become active.
wave addannotation Adds a text annotation to a waveform at the specified
location in the active window.
wave addaxisdeltamarker Adds a delta marker, between two values, on the selected
waveform. The marker can be horizontal or vertical.
Optionally text can be added to this marker.
wave addcursor Creates a new cursor in the specified window.
wave adddeltamarker Adds a delta marker waveform(s) at the specified
location(s) in the active window.
wave addline Adds a horizontal or vertical line to a waveform in the
active window.
wave addmarker Adds a vertical marker to the specified location.
wave addproperty Adds a property to a waveform.
wave addwindow Creates a new graphical window in the EZwave session
window and makes it active.
wave addworkspace Creates a new workspace in the EZwave session window.
wave cdf Generates and displays a CDF based on the input
waveform, or on the saved histogram data in a .wdb file
generated from an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
wave clean Takes a name and returns a new name with any special
characters replaced by “_”. This is useful, for example,
when scripting inside EZwave and creating waves through
the waveform calculator, where the labels chosen to create
the waves might cause the script to work incorrectly.
wave closewindow Closes a specified window, all windows, or all windows in
the workspace.
wave colortheme Sets the graphical display or print color scheme.

962 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
wave createbus Creates a bus containing the specified waveforms, inside
the calc database.
wave cursortime Moves a cursor to the specified position.
wave deletecursor Deletes the specified cursor.
wave difference Generates and displays a waveform corresponding to the
difference between the first and second waveforms
specified.
wave displayed Retrieves a list of the displayed waveforms.
wave exists Indicates whether the specified waveform exists.
wave ezwave_title Adds a custom title to the top of the EZwave main display.
wave gettype Returns the type of the waveform.
wave histogram Generates and displays a histogram based on the input
waveform, or on the saved histogram data generated from
an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
wave jitter Performs the calculation and plot of the specified jitter and
its measurements.
wave launchfolder Identifies the path to the directory that EZwave was
launched from.
wave listworkspace Returns a list of workspaces.
wave loadbindings Loads an EZwave keyboard shortcuts schema *.ezkey file.
wave lockcursor Specifies whether the distance between cursors are fixed or
whether they can move independently of each other.
wave names Determines whether waveform names within the graphical
interface show the dataset names and (or) the complete
hierarchical paths.
wave plotcompress Plots output power against input power in dBm and returns
n-dB compression point. Only supports compound
waveforms.
wave plotpacipn Takes a PAC spectrum signal pair at the desired and
unwanted harmonics, within an input power sweep, plots
the pair of IPn curves and returns the intercept point. Only
supports compound waveforms.
wave refresh Redraws the contents of the specified window.
wave rowfit Optimizes the row size in the specified window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 963

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
wave runindexlist Displays a list of run indices for the elements of the
compound waveform specified. It is useful for iterating
through each element individually.
wave runparameters Displays a list of run parameters for the compound
waveform specified. It is useful for iterating through each
element individually.
wave runparametervalue Displays the value of a specified run parameter associated
with the run_index and compound waveform specified.
wave show Defines the default net representation that is used when the
add wave command is issued without the -show option. If
the -show option is specified with the add wave command
(add wave -show representation), it temporarily overrides
the wave show defaults during the execution of the add
wave command and then returns to the wave show
defaults.
wave showgridlines Allows gridlines to be set on or off in all new windows.
wave showzerolevels Activates the zero-levels in the rows where the waveform
is displayed.
wave tandem mode Activates or deactivates Tandem Mode.
wave tile Arranges multiple windows in the specified tiling style.
wave windowlist Returns a list of all open graph windows.
wave xaxis Sets the x-axis unit title, and the x-axis scale to one of:
linear, base 2 log, or base 10 log.
wave yaxis Used to alter y-axis settings such as the y-axis name,
alignment, unit title, scale, and alignment for the specified
row.
wave zoomfull Zooms out to show the entire x-axis of the specified graph
window.
wave zoomin Zooms in on the x-axis specified graph window, by the
specified factor.
wave zoomlast Undoes the most recent zoom operation in the specified
window.
wave zoomout Zooms out on the x-axis of the specified graph window, by
the specified factor.
wave zoomrange Zooms in on the x-axis to a range bounded by the specified
start and/or end points.

964 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Command Detailed Descriptions

Table C-7. Tcl Commands (cont.)

Command Description
wfc Invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the
expression entered.
write jpeg Exports the contents of a window to a specified JPEG
image file.
write png Exports the contents of a window to a specified PNG
image file.
write wave Outputs window contents in PostScript format. It can be
sent to a printer or a specified location.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 965

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

add wave
Adds one or more waveforms to a graphical window.
Usage
add wave

[-overlay]
[-append]
[-row row_number]
[-position {top | bottom | end | before | after | below | row_number}]
[-rowtitle title]
[-rowtitle_font {name | family} {plain | bold | italic} size]
[-rowtitle_color color]
[-rowtitle_outline {true | false | default}]
[-zerolevel {on | off | horizontal | vertical}]
[-grid {on | off | horizontal | vertical}]
[-point_style id]
[-line_width {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5}]
[-zoomY min_y max_y]
[-height pixels]
[-hide | -visible]
[-group group_name]
[-color standard_color_name]
[-colorgroup param_1,...,param_n]
[-hide_filter runID_1,...,runID_n]
[-highlight_filter runID_1,...,runID_n]

[-label name]
[-literal | -event | -analog-step | -analog-interpolated | -spectral]
[-window window_name]
[-symbolic | -binary | -octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal | -unsigned | -
ascii | -time | -default]
[-enumnumeric | -enumsymbolic]
[-radix {radix_type | radix_name}]
[-collapse]
[-expand]
[-adms | -modelsim]
[-complexplane | -smithchart {-impedance | -admittance} | -polarchart
{-degree | -radian} | -versus x_wf_name]
[-nomode]

966 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

[-newyaxis]
[-hideyaxis]
[-xscale {linear | log10 | log2}]
[-yscale {linear | log10 | log2}]
[-hidexunit]
[-hideyunit]
[-hidextitle]
[-hideytitle]
[-scaleunitx scale_value unit_name]
[-scaleunity scale_value unit_name]
[-tograydec]
[-graytodec]
[-fpoint n]
[wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n] | [-separator separator_char wf_name_1 ...
wf_name_n [-noseparator wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n]]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -append
(Optional) Adds the waveform overlaid on the last available row in the window. If no row
exists, it will be created and waveform added. The use of both -append and -row <row_ID>
switches together is not recommended because this may lead to unexpected results.
• -color standard_color_name
(Optional) Specifies a color for displaying the waveform. You can use standard color names
(for example, ‘red’ or ‘blue’) or the RGB color code preceded by a ‘#’.
Legal color names: black, blue, cyan, gray, darkgray, lightgray, green, magenta, orange,
pink, red, white. yellow.
RGB color code: The RGB color code is a hexadecimal value preceded by a ‘#’ representing
#RRGGBB, where RR represents the red value, GG represents the green value, and BB
represents the blue value. For example, #0000ff is blue, #000000 is black, and #ffffff is
white.
For compound waveforms, forces the same color to be used for all elements.
• -colorgroup param_1 . . .param_n
(Optional) Specifies a list of compound waveform parameter names in the color group.
Waveform runs with identical parameter values will be plotted using the same color.
See also “Parameter Table Dialog Box” on page 550.
• -collapse
(Optional) If this option is specified, digital buses and compound waveforms are displayed
with all elements collapsed. When not specified, the default setting for compound
waveforms (set in Edit > Options > Multiple Run) is used.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 967

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

• -complexplane | -smithchart [-impedance | -admittance] | -polarchart {-degree | -radian} |

-versus x_wf_name
(Optional) Defines a row type to be used for displaying the waveform.
• -enumnumeric | -enumsymbolic
Accepted for Questa SIM compatibility, but ignored by EZwave.
• -expand
(Optional) Displays a digital bus with all its bits expanded. Displays a compound waveform
expanded to show all single element names. When not specified, the default setting for
compound waveforms (set in Edit > Options > Multiple Run) is used.
• -fpoint n
(Optional) Specifies n fixed-point radix.
• -graytodec
(Optional) Coverts gray radix to decimal representation radix.
• -grid [on | off | horizontal | vertical]
(Optional) Activates the grids in the rows where the waveform is displayed. on and off
enable or disable both horizontal and vertical grids. horizontal and vertical enable only the
appropriate horizontal or vertical grids.
• -group group_name
Creates a waveform group with the name group_name, containing the waveforms specified
with <object_name>. If the specified group already exists, all waveforms specified with
<object_name> are appended to that group.
See “Grouping Waveforms” on page 129.
• -height pixels
(Optional) Specifies the height of the row where the waveform is displayed. The value is in
pixels.
• -hide | -visible
(Optional) Specifies whether the waveform should be visible when plotted. When plotting
multiple waveforms, -visible cancels out an earlier -hide and visa versa.
• -hideyaxis
(Optional) Specifies that the current y-axis is hidden if more than one axis exists in the row.
All waveforms plotted in a hidden y-axis are automatically hidden.
• -hidextitle
(Optional) Specifies that the x-axis title should not be displayed.
• -hideytitle
(Optional) Specifies that the y-axis title should not be displayed.

968 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

• -hidexunit
(Optional) Specifies that the x-axis units should not be displayed.
• -hideyunit
(Optional) Specifies that the y-axis units should not be displayed.
• -hide_filter runID_1 . . .runID_n
(Optional) Specifies a list of compound waveform runs to hide.
See also “Parameter Table Dialog Box” on page 550.
• -highlight_filter runID_1 . . .runID_n
(Optional) Specifies a list of compound waveform runs to highlight.
See also “Parameter Table Dialog Box” on page 550.
• -label name
(Optional) Specifies a name for the waveform.
• -line_width {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5}
(Optional) Specifies the line with of the waveform. The numbers map directly to the widths
in the Line Width dropdown box in the Waveform Display Options
• -literal | -event | -analog-step | -analog-interpolated | -spectral
(Optional) Specifies a drawing mode for the waveform that is displayed.
o -literal - This corresponds to the “railroad” drawing mode
o -event - This corresponds to the “scattered” drawing mode
o -analog-step - This corresponds to the “sampled” drawing mode
o -analog-interpolated - This corresponds to the “continuous” drawing mode
o -spectral - This corresponds to the “spectral” drawing mode
• -newyaxis
(Optional) Specifies that the waveform is displayed using a new y-axis.
• -nomode
(Optional) Searches port terminals that do not have IN, OUT, or INOUT modes, and
therefore are not included in searches that specify the -in, -out, -inout arguments.
• -noseparator wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n
(Optional) Specifies that the waveform names have no hierarchy.
• -overlay
(Optional) Causes several waveforms added at once to be added in the same row.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 969

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

• -point_style id
(Optional) Specifies the point style of the waveform. idtakes a value between 0 and 16.
When 0 is specified, no point style is applied. Setting this value is equivalent to making a
selection in the Data Point Symbol field on the Waveform Properties Dialog (For Analog
Waveforms), accessed by right-clicking on a waveform and selecting Properties.
• -position {top | bottom | end | before | after | below | row_number }
(Optional) Specifies the position for the waveform inside the graph window.
o top - Adds the signal(s) to the beginning of the list of signals
o bottom | end - Adds the signal(s) to the end of the list of signals
o before | above - Adds the signal(s) before the selected signal in the graph window
o after | below - Adds the signal(s) after the selected signal in the graph window
o row_number - Adds the signal(s) to the specified row number. Row numbers start
from the top of the window with a value of 1 and increase as you go down the
window. Row numbers are dynamic, changing as row are added or removed.
• -radix {radix_type | radix_name }
(Optional) Specifies a radix or a user-defined radix. Can be used as an alternative to the
options:
[ -symbolic | -onescomplement | -magnitude | -binary | -octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal |
-unsigned | -ascii ]
Legal radix_type values are: symbolic, onescomplement, magnitude, binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal, unsigned, ascii, time and default.
Hexadecimal can also be written as hex.
Options -time and -default are accepted for Questa SIM compatibility, but are ignored by
EZwave.
• -row row_number
(Optional) Selects the row in which to display the waveform. The row numbers start at 1
(top-most row). Row numbers dynamically change as rows are added or removed.
• -rowtitle title
(Optional) Specifies the title of the row to be added.
• -rowtitle_font {name | family} {plain | bold | italic} size
(Optional) Specifies the font characteristics of the row title.
o name | family - Specify ether the name of the font to use or the system font family
(serif, sans, and so on).
o plain | bold | italic - Specify the font style.
o size - Specify the font size, in points.

970 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

• -rowtitle_color color
Specifies the title text color, using an RGB (hex) value. The RGB color code is a
hexadecimal value preceded by a “#” representing #RRGGBB, where RR represents the red
value, GG represents the green value, and BB represents the blue value. For example,
#0000ff is blue, #000000 is black, and #ffffff is white.
• -rowtitle_outline {true | false | default}
Controls the visibility of the text box around the row title.
• -scaleunitx scale_value unit_name
(Optional) Specifies the scaling factor and unit type for the x-axis.
• -scaleunity scale_value unit_name
(Optional) Specifies the scaling factor and unit type of the y-axis.
• -symbolic | -binary | -octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal | -unsigned | -ascii | -time | -default
(Optional) Specifies a radix for displaying digital bus(es) specified in this command.
If no radix is specified for an enumerated type, the default radix is used. You can change the
default radix for the current simulation using the radix command.
Note
-time and -default are accepted for Questa SIM compatibility, but ignored by
EZwave.

• -separator separator_char wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n

(Optional) Specifies the hierarchical separator character in waveform names. For example:
add wave -overlay -show TRAN.v -separator . XV1.G1

In this example, the dot ( . ) is the hierarchical separator in the wave XV1.G1.
• -tograydec
(Optional) Converts decimal representation radix to gray radix.
• wf_name_1 . . .wf_name_n
(Optional) Specifies the waveform(s) using one of several accepted syntaxes. See
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl.
You must use the object name method for specifying waveforms when using the -show
representation option.
You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the
waveform(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window where the waveform should be displayed. If this is not
specified, the waveform is displayed in the currently active window.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 971

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
add wave

• -xscale {linear | log10 | log2 }

(Optional) Specifies the type of scale used for the x-axis.
• -yscale {linear | log10 | log2 }
(Optional) Specifies the type of scale used for the y-axis.
• -zerolevel [on | off | horizontal | vertical]
(Optional) Activates the zero-levels in the rows where the waveform is displayed. On/Off
enables or disables both horizontal and vertical levels. Horizontal/Vertical enables only the
appropriate horizontal or vertical levels.
• -zoomY min_ymax_y
(Optional) Defines the Y limits while displaying the waveform.
Examples
• This example will plot <tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load and the result
waveform. The resulting waveform is displayed in blue:
set result [wfc {wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load")-
wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle")}]

add wave <tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load -color blue $result

• This example creates a group named allAnalog that will contain all analog waveforms
from the database.
add wave -group allAnalog -terminals -r *

972 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
add workspace

add workspace
Creates a new workspace in the EZwave session window.
Usage
add workspace [workspace_name] [-active]

Parameters
• workspace_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the workspace to be created. If workspace_name is not
specified, a default name, Workspace#, is used, where # is a number.
• -active
(Optional) Indicates that the workspace created should become the active workspace.
Description
This command is equivalent to wave addworkspace.

Examples
add workspace ADC12

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 973

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
batch_mode

batch_mode
Indicates whether the EZwave viewer or the JWDB server is used, to check whether the Tcl
script is currently in batch mode.
Usage
batch_mode

Parameters
None.
Return Values
1 if used with ezwave -c or the JWDB Server (this indicates that the program is in non-graphical
batch mode).

0 if used with the EZwave viewer (this indicates that the program is in graphical non-batch
mode).

Examples
if [batch_mode] {
...
} else { # execute graphical commands
add wave $wf
}

Related Topics
Invoking EZwave in Batch Mode

974 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
bloc

bloc
Enables multi-line Waveform Calculator scripts.
Usage
bloc {script}

Parameters
• script
(Required) Specifies a multi-line Waveform Calculator script.
Examples
bloc {

for x in range(5):
print x

In the example below, customceil(3.5) will return 4.0.

bloc {

import math

def customceil(x):
return math.ceil(x)

Note
Only pure Python modules work with the “import” function. C-Python external modules
cannot be loaded into the Waveform Calculator.

Related Topics
Waveform Calculator GUI

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 975

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare add

compare add
Creates the scope of the comparison (all waveforms, top level ports, …) and supports a set of
options, like tolerances, to be applied to the comparison. This command has additional
arguments, compared to Questa SIM commands, to enable defining tolerances and settings for
analog-analog and analog-digital comparison. The same command is then used in to set up
complete mixed-signal comparison. Path of regions is not supported; a global expression
(regular expression) should be used instead. For example, :top:level1:* rather than :top:level1.
Usage
compare add [-clock clock] [-label label] [-nowin]
[-tol delay] [-tolLead delay] [-tolTrail delay]
[-mixtolLead delay] [-mixtolTrail delay]
[-freqtol freqtol] [-amptol amptol] [-noisefloor noisefloor]
[-matchindex]
[-vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-xTol xtolerance] [-yTol ytolerance] [-mindeltax value]
[-threshold {1|2}] [-upperthreshold value]
[-lowerthreshold value] [-fixedthreshold value] [-refDelay delay]
[-testDelay delay] [-start start_value] [-end end_value]
referencePath [testPath] [-wave] [-win wname] [-edgecompare]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -clockclock
(Optional) Specifies the clock definition to use when sampling the specified regions.
Required for a clocked comparison; not used for asynchronous comparisons.
• -label label
(Optional) Specifies a name for the comparison when it is displayed in the window.
• -nowin
(Optional) Specifies that compare signals shouldn’t be added to any window. By default,
compare signals are added to the default Wave window. See -wave below.
• -recursive
(Optional) Specifies that signals should also be selected in all nested subregions, and
subregions of those, etc.
• -tol delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead or trail a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0. If a unit (for example, ps)
is used with the time value, the time must be placed in braces {}.

976 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare add

• -tolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0. If a unit (for example, ps) is used with the
time value, the time must be placed in braces {}.
• -tolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0. If a unit is used (for example, ps) with the
time value, the time must be placed in braces {}.
Figure C-1. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail

• -mixtolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0. If a unit (for example, ps) is used with the
time value, the time must be placed in braces {}.
• -mixtolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0. If a unit is used (for example, ps) with the
time value, the time must be placed in braces {}.
• -freqtol freqtol
(Optional) Specifies the frequency tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -amptol amptol
(Optional) Specifies the amplitude tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -noisefloor noisefloor
(Optional) Specifies the noise floor level for a spectral comparison. Errors that occur below
this amplitude level are ignored in the comparison.
• -matchindex
(Optional) Specifies that only compound waveforms (from multiple runs) with matching
indexes are compared. This mode is off by default.
For example, consider a reference dataset containing only a few runs (e.g. runs 1, 3 and 5)
and a test dataset with many more runs (e.g. runs 1 to 10). Without the -matchindex option,

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 977

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare add

reference:run_1 is compared with test:run_1, but reference:run_3 is compared with

test:run_2, because runs are compared in the order that they are found in the compound
waveform. Using the -matchindex option, reference:run_3 would now be compared with
the corresponding test:run_3.
• -vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values.
For example:
-vhdlmatches {X=XUD:Z=ZD:1=1HD}

Default is:
{U=UWXD:X=UWXD:0=0LD:1=1HD:Z=ZD:W=UWXD:L=0LD:H=1HD:D=UX01ZWLHD}

The 'D' character represents the '-' “don't care” std_logic value.
• -vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values.
For example:
-vlogmatches {0=0:1=1:Z=Z}

Default is:
{0=0:1=1:Z=Z:X=X}

• -xTol xtolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum X tolerance (usually time) that test and reference
waveforms are allowed to differ.
Default is:

• -yTol ytolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum Y tolerance that test and reference waveforms are
allowed to differ. The default is:
• -mindeltax value
(Optional) Specifies the minimum delta X tolerance (usually time). Ignores differences that
are less than the specified value. Default is 0.
• -threshold 1 | 2
(Optional) Specifies if one or two thresholds should be used when converting analog
waveform to digital waveform in digital-analog comparison. Default is 1.

978 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare add

• -upperthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the upper level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -lowerthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the lower level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -fixedthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the level to be used for converting an analog waveform to a
digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds. The default is
automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -refDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all added waveforms from the reference dataset. This
setting overrides the delay setting of the compare start command.
• -testDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all added waveforms from the test dataset. This setting
overrides the delay setting of the compare start command.
• -start time
Specifies the time at which to start the comparison of all added waveforms. This setting
overrides the setting from a compare run or info command).
• -end time
(Optional) Specifies the time at which to end the comparison of all added waveforms. This
setting overrides the setting from a compare run or info command.
• referencePath
(Optional) Specifies either an absolute or relative path to the reference signal or region, or a
glob expression. Relative paths are relative to the current context of the reference dataset. If
you specify a glob expression, it will match signals only in the containing context.
You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to match the
signals. You can use more than one option in the same command.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 979

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare add

Some examples:
compare add :top:x1:out

# With wildcard:
compare add :top:x1:*

# With dataset name:

compare add adc12/:top:x1:out

# When a context is defined (see the environment command), then

# the relative path is accepted:
env :top:x1
compare add out

• testPath
(Optional) Specifies an absolute or relative path to the test signal or region. Cannot be a glob
expression. If omitted, the test path defaults to the same path as referencePath except for the
dataset name.
• -wave
(Optional) Specifies that compare signals be added automatically to the default Wave
window. Default is true.
• -win wname
(Optional) Specifies a particular window to which to add objects. Used to specify a
particular window when multiple instances of that window type exist.
• -edgecompare
(Optional) Forces a “digital” comparison where the source and reference signals (one, or
both) are analog. This applies an automatic analog to digital conversion, allowing an edge
comparison to be made. Digital comparison tolerances will apply for the edge comparison,
refer to “Digital Comparison” on page 250.
Examples
• Add the waveform name tvin to the comparison using the default -showoptions (see also
Appendix D).
compare add tvin

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

980 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare clock

compare clock
Defines a clock that can be used for clocked-mode comparisons. In clocked-mode comparisons,
signals are sampled and compared only at or just after an edge on some signals.
Usage
compare clock [-delete] [-offset <delay>] [-rising | -falling | -both]
<clock_name> [<signal_path> | -frequency <value> [-dutycycle <perc>]]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -delete
(Optional) Deletes an existing compare clock.
• -offset <delay>
(Optional) Specifies a time value for delaying the sample time beyond the specified signal
edge. The default is 0.
• -rising | -falling | -both
(Optional) Specifies that the rising, falling, or both (rising and falling edges) of the specified
signal should be used. The default is rising.
• clock_name
(Required) A name for this clock definition. This name is used with the compare add
command when doing a clocked-mode comparison.
• signal_path
(One of signal_path or -frequency must be specified) A full path to the waveform whose
edges are to be used as the strobe trigger.
You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the
waveform. You can use more than one option in the same command.
Note
This command currently only supports fully qualified names when specifying the
signal path. See Specifying Waveforms in Tcl for details on fully qualified names.

• -frequency <value>
(One of signal_path or -frequency must be specified) Specifies a perfect clock frequency.
• -dutycycle <perc>
(Optional) Only applicable if -frequency <value> is defined, this specifies the amount of
time the signal is active per period, defined as a percentage (0 to 1)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 981

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare clock

Examples
• Create a clock named myClock that will trigger a comparison on both rising and falling
edges of the source waveform <REF/TRAN>:test:eoc.
compare clock -both myClock <REF/TRAN>:test:eoc

• Define a comparison based on an ideal clock named “idealClock” with a frequency of

10000Hz and a duty cycle of 40%. This clock will start at 0.2ns and the comparison will
only consider its rising edges.
-compare clock -offset 0.2n -rising idealClock -frequency 1e4
-dutycycle 0.4

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

982 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare configure

compare configure
Modifies options for compare signals and regions.
Usage
compare configure [-clock name] [-recursive] [-tol delay] [-tolLead delay]
[-tolTrail delay] [-mixtolLead delay] [-mixtolTrail delay]
[-freqtol freqtol] [-amptol amptol] [-noisefloor noisefloor]
[-matchindex]
[-vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-xTol xtolerance] [-yTol ytolerance] [-mindeltax value]
[-threshold {1|2}] [-upperthreshold value]
[-lowerthreshold value] [-fixedthreshold value] [-refDelay delay]
[-testDelay delay] [-start start_value] [-end end_value] [-edgecompare]
comparePath

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -clockname
(Optional) Changes the strobe signal for the comparison. If the comparison is currently
asynchronous, it is changed to clocked. This switch may not be used with the -tol, -tolLead,
and -tolTrail options.
• -recursive
(Optional) Specifies that signals should also be selected in all nested subregions, and
subregions of those, etc.
• -tol delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead or trail a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.
• -tolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.
• -tolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 983

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare configure

Figure C-2. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail

• -mixtolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0.
• -mixtolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0.
• -freqtol freqtol
(Optional) Specifies the frequency tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -amptol amptol
(Optional) Specifies the amplitude tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -noisefloor noisefloor
(Optional) Specifies the noise floor level for a spectral comparison. Errors that occur below
this amplitude level are ignored in the comparison.
• -matchindex
(Optional) Specifies that only compound waveforms (from multiple runs) with matching
indexes are compared. This mode is off by default.
For example, consider a reference dataset containing only a few runs (e.g. runs 1, 3 and 5)
and a test dataset with many more runs (e.g. runs 1 to 10). Without the -matchindex option,
reference:run_1 is compared with test:run_1, but reference:run_3 is compared with
test:run_2, because runs are compared in the order that they are found in the compound
waveform. Using the -matchindex option, reference:run_3 would now be compared with
the corresponding test:run_3.
• -vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values. For
example:
-vhdlmatches {X=XUD:Z=ZD:1=1HD}

984 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare configure

Default is:
{U=UWXD:X=UWXD:0=0LD:1=1HD:Z=ZD:W=UWXD:L=0LD:H=1HD:D=UX01ZWLHD}

The 'D' character represents the '-' “don't care” std_logic value.
• -vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values. For
example:
-vlogmatches {0=0:1=1:Z=Z}

Default is:
{0=0:1=1:Z=Z:X=X}

• -xTol xtolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum X tolerance (usually time) that test and reference
waveforms are allowed to differ.
The default is:

• -yTol ytolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum Y tolerance that test and reference waveforms are
allowed to differ. The default is:

• -mindeltax value
(Optional) Specifies the minimum delta X tolerance (usually time). Ignores differences that
are less than the specified value. Default is 0.
• -threshold 1 | 2
(Optional) Specifies if one or two thresholds should be used when converting analog
waveform to digital waveform in digital-analog comparison. Default is 1.
• -upperthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the upper level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -lowerthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the lower level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 985

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare configure

• -fixedthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the level to be used for converting an analog waveform to a
digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds. The default is
automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -refDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all configured waveforms from the reference dataset.
This setting overrides the delay setting of the compare start command.
• -testDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all configured waveforms from the test dataset. This
setting overrides the delay setting of the compare start command.
• -start time
Specifies the time at which to start the comparison of all configured waveforms. This setting
overrides the setting from a compare run or info command).
• -end time
(Optional) Specifies the time at which to end the comparison of all configured waveforms.
This setting overrides the setting from a compare run or info command.
• -edgecompare
(Optional) Forces a “digital” comparison where the source and reference signals (one, or
both) are analog. This applies an automatic analog to digital conversion, allowing an edge
comparison to be made. Digital comparison tolerances will apply for the edge comparison,
refer to “Digital Comparison” on page 250.
• comparePath
(Required) Identifies the path of a compare signal, region, or glob expression.
You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the
compare signal, region or glob expression. You can use more than one option in the same
command.
Description
The modified options are applied to all objects in the specified compare path. These settings are
local to the specified compare path; to set default options for all compare paths, use compare
options.

Examples
• Modify the previously added tvin waveforms and use a previously created myClock
clock to compare them.
compare configure -clock myClock tvin

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

986 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare end

compare end
Closes the active comparison without saving any information.
Usage
compare end

Parameters
• None.

Examples
• The comparison is ended, all settings and added waveforms are reset. All clocks that
were created and computed comparison waveforms remain present in the <calc>
database.
compare end

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 987

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare info

compare info
Lists the results of a waveform comparison in the main window transcript. To save the
information to a file, use the -write argument.
Usage
compare info [-start start_value] [-end end_value]
[-write [-append] filename]
[-rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter]

Parameters
• -start time
(Optional) Specifies the time at which to start the comparison of all configured waveforms.
• -end time
(Optional) Specifies the time at which to end the comparison of all configured waveforms.
• -write
(Optional) Saves the summary information to a file, specified with filename, rather than
displaying it in the main window transcript.
• -append
(Optional) Used with the -write argument when saving the summary information to a file.
The report is appended to the file specified with filename, rather than overwriting it.
• -rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter
(Optional) Specifies pssresidue, topnoise or harmonicsmeter waveform compare options.
Examples
• Export the results of the comparison (waveform by waveform differences) to the text file
report.txt.
compare info -write /path/to/the/report.txt

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

988 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare list

compare list
Outputs the Tcl scripts of all the compare add commands in effect.
Usage
compare list [-expand]

Parameters
• -expand
(Optional) Expands groups of waveforms that were added by related individual waveforms.
Examples
• Replace “compare add -r *” by a list of compare add commands, followed by object
names.
compare list

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 989

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

compare options
Sets defaults for various waveform comparison commands. Those defaults are used when other
compare commands are invoked during the current session.
Usage
compare options [-maxsignal n] [-maxtotal n] [-mode_name]
[-tol delay] [-tolLead delay] [-tolTrail delay]
[-mixtolLead delay] [-mixtolTrail delay]
[-freqtol freqtol] [-amptol amptol] [-noisefloor noisefloor]
[-matchindex]
[-vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value:...}]
[-xTol xtolerance] [-yTol ytolerance] [-mindeltax value] [-threshold 1|2]
[-upperthreshold value] [-lowerthreshold value] [-fixedthreshold value]
[-wavewin name] [-noaddwave] [-addwave] [-adderrorwave]
[-rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter]
[-tperiod value] [-abstolrf value] [-reltolrf value]
[-f0 value] [-nbharmonics value]
[-sortby firstdiff | maxdiff]
[-ntop value] [-annotate][-edgecompare]

Parameters
• -maxsignal n
(Optional) Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered on any one signal.
When that limit is reached, the EZwave viewer stops computing differences on that signal.
The default limit is 100.
• -maxtotal n
(Optional) Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered. When that limit is
reached, the EZwave viewer stops computing differences. The default limit is 1000.
• -mode
(Optional) Specifies the mode of waveform types that are compared with the compare add
command. The actual values the option may take are -in, -out, -inout, -internal, -ports, and -
all. You can use more than one mode option in the same command. The following modes
available in Questa ADMS are also supported: -across, -free, -through, -a2d, -d2a, -bidir.
• -tol delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead or trail a
reference edge in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.
• -tolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.
• -tolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in an asynchronous comparison. The default is 0.

990 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

Figure C-3. Graphical Representation of tolLead and tolTrail

• -mixtolLead delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0.
• -mixtolTrail delay
(Optional) Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge
in a mixed signal comparison. The default is 0.
• -freqtol freqtol
(Optional) Specifies the frequency tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -amptol amptol
(Optional) Specifies the amplitude tolerance for a spectral comparison.
• -noisefloor noisefloor
(Optional) Specifies the noise floor level for a spectral comparison. Errors that occur below
this amplitude level are ignored in the comparison.
• -matchindex
(Optional) Specifies that only compound waveforms (from multiple runs) with matching
indexes are compared. This mode is off by default.
For example, consider a reference dataset containing only a few runs (for example runs 1, 3
and 5) and a test dataset with many more runs (for example runs 1 to 10). Without the -
matchindex option, reference:run_1 is compared with test:run_1, but reference:run_3 is
compared with test:run_2, because runs are compared in the order that they are found in the
compound waveform. Using the -matchindex option, reference:run_3 would now be
compared with the corresponding test:run_3.
• -vhdlmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values. For
example:
-vhdlmatches {X=XUD:Z=ZD:1=1HD}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 991

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

Default is:
{U=UWXD:X=UWXD:0=0LD:1=1HD:Z=ZD:W=UWXD:L=0LD:H=1HD:D=UX01ZWLHD}

The 'D' character represents the '-' “don't care” std_logic value.
• -vlogmatches {ref-logic-value=test-logic-value: …}
(Optional) Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values
in the test dataset. Values are specified in a colon-separated list of match values. For
example:
-vlogmatches {0=0:1=1:Z=Z}

Default is:
{0=0:1=1:Z=Z:X=X}

• -xTol xtolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum X tolerance (usually time) that test and reference
waveforms are allowed to differ.
The default is:

• -yTol ytolerance
(Optional) Specifies the maximum Y tolerance that test and reference waveforms are
allowed to differ. The default is:

• -mindeltax value
(Optional) Specifies the minimum delta X tolerance (usually time). Ignores differences that
are less than the specified value. Default is 0.
• -threshold 1 | 2
(Optional) Specifies if one or two thresholds should be used when converting analog
waveform to digital waveform in digital-analog comparison. Default is 1.
• -upperthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the upper level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -lowerthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the lower level to be used for converting an analog
waveform to a digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds.
The default is automatically computed based on input waveforms.

992 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

• -fixedthreshold value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the level to be used for converting an analog waveform to a
digital waveform, in case of analog-digital comparison using two thresholds. The default is
automatically computed based on input waveforms.
• -wavewin name
(Optional) Specifies the default name of the wave window in which compare differences are
viewed.
• -noaddwave
(Optional) Specifies that the waveform result of the comparison is not displayed.
• -addwave
(Optional) Plots all compared waveforms.
• -adderrorwave
(Optional) Plots only erroneous compared waveforms.
• -rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter
(Optional) Specifies pssresidue, topnoise or harmonicsmeter waveform compare options.
Note
Parameters “-sortby” and “-rf” cannot be used simultaneously.

• -tperiod value
(Optional) Specifies the reference time period for the pssresidue waveform compare option.
Note
The value is required if “-rf pssresidue” is specified in “compare start” or “compare
options” commands and ignored for other cases.

• -abstolrf value
(Optional) Specifies the absolute tolerance for the harmonicsmeter and pssresidue
waveform compare options.
• -reltolrf value
(Optional) Specifies the relative tolerance for the harmonicsmeter and pssresidue waveform
compare options.
• -f0 value
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental frequency for the harmonicsmeter waveform compare
option.
Note
The value is required if “-rf harmonicsmeter” is specified in “compare start” or
“compare options” commands and ignored for other cases.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 993

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

• -nbharmonics value
(Optional) Specifies the number of harmonics for the harmonicsmeter waveform compare
option.
Note
The value is required if “-rf harmonicsmeter” is specified in “compare start” or
“compare options” commands and ignored for other cases.

• -sortby firstdiff | maxdiff

(Optional) Specifies sorting parameter selection, either sort by first difference or by
maximum difference.
Note
Parameters “-sortby” and “-rf” cannot be used simultaneously.

• -ntop value
(Optional) Specifies the number of results to plot.
Note
The “-ntop” value is only taken into account if the “-rf” or “-sortby” parameter is
specified. If “-ntop” is not specified all comparison results are plotted.

• -annotate
(Optional) Specifies the resulting waveform plots will be annotated with the sorting
parameter value.
Note
The “-annotate” parameter is only taken into account if the “-rf” or “-sortby”
parameter is specified. It is ignored for other cases.

• -edgecompare
(Optional) Forces a “digital” comparison where the source and reference signals (one, or
both) are analog. This applies an automatic analog to digital conversion, allowing an edge
comparison to be made. Digital comparison tolerances will apply for the edge comparison,
refer to “Digital Comparison” on page 250.
Description
These settings specify the default options for all compare paths. To modify settings local to a
specified compare path, use compare configure.

Examples
• Return the current value of all options.
compare options

994 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare options

• Set the maxtotal option to 2000 differences.

compare options -maxtotal 2000

• Return the current value of the maxtotal option.

compare options -maxtotal

• Verilog X will now match X, Z, or 0.

compare options -vlogmatches {0=0:1=1:Z=Z:X=XZ0}

• VHDL std_logic X will now match 'U', 'X', 'W', or 'D'.

compare options -vhdlmatches {X=UXWD}

• Set the leading tolerance for asynchronous comparisons to 300 picoseconds.

compare options -tolLead 300p

• Set the trailing tolerance for asynchronous comparisons to 250 picoseconds.

compare options -tolTrail 250p

• Set the analog tolerances to 0.5% for both x and y-axes, do not plot the comparison
waveforms and change the number of differences to look for in each waveform to 50.
compare options -xTol 0.5% -yTol 0.5% -noaddwave -maxsignal 50

• Start the comparison session using comparison switches.

set referenceWdb REF.wdb
set RES.wdb

dataset open $referenceWdb

dataset open $testWdb

compare start REF RES

compare options -sortby maxspectrumdiff -phase 1e-6 -annotate
compare add -recursive -show ALL REF/* -show ALL RES/*
compare run

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 995

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare run

compare run
Runs the difference computation on the signals selected via a compare add command.
Usage
compare run [startTime] [endTime]

Parameters
• startTime
(Optional) Specifies when to start computing differences. Optional. Default is zero.
• endTime
(Optional) Specifies when to end computing differences. Optional. Default is the end of the
dataset simulation run that ends earliest.
Description
The compare run command runs the difference computation on the signals selected via a
compare add command. Reports in the transcript pane the total number of errors found.

Examples
• Run the comparison, all waveforms that were added to the comparison will now be
compared. For each reference/test pair, a comparison waveform named
“compare_ref_test” is created.
compare run

• Run the comparison from 5.3n to 57m

compare run 5.3n 57m

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

996 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare savelog

compare savelog
Creates a log file containing error and warning messages generated during waveform
comparison.
Usage
compare savelog filename

Parameters
• filename
(Required) Specifies the name and path of the file in which to save the log file.
Description
Creates a log file containing error and warning messages generated during waveform
comparison.

Note
A comparison must have been run or a report had been exported within the same
comparison session before this command is called. Otherwise, nothing is generated.

Examples
• Save a log file to a text file named comparelog.txt.
compare savelog /user/comparelog.txt

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 997

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare saverules

compare saverules
Saves the rules (all compare add commands in effect and compare options) to a file. Can also be
used to save the entire comparison session.
Usage
compare saverules [-session] [-expand] rules_filename

Parameters
• -session
(Optional) Saves the entire comparison session, not just the rules.
• -expand
(Optional) Expands groups of related waveforms into their individual waveforms.
• rules filename
(Required) Specifies the name and path of the file in which to save the rules file.
Description
Saves the rules (all compare add commands in effect and compare options) to a file. Can also be
used to save the entire comparison session.

Examples
• Save rules into a file called rules.rul.
compare saverules rules.rul

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

998 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
compare start

compare start
Begins a new dataset comparison.
Usage
compare start [-batch] [-maxsignal n] [-maxtotal n] [-refDelay delay]
[-testDelay delay] reference_dataset [test_dataset]
[-rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter]

Parameters
• -batch
(Optional) Specifies that comparisons will not be automatically inserted into the wave
window.
• -maxsignal n
(Optional) Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered on any one signal.
When that limit is reached, the EZwave viewer stops computing differences on that signal.
The default limit is 100.
• -maxtotal n
(Optional) Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered. When that limit is
reached, the EZwave viewer stops computing differences. The default limit is 1000.
• -refDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all compared waveforms from the reference dataset.
• -testDelay delay
(Optional) Specifies a delay to shift all compared waveforms from the test dataset.
• reference_dataset
(Required) The reference dataset to be used as the comparison reference.
• test_dataset
(Optional) The dataset to be tested against the reference. If not specified, The EZwave
viewer uses the current simulation. The reference and test datasets may be the same.
• -rf pssresidue | topnoise | harmonicsmeter
(Optional) Specifies pssresidue, topnoise or harmonicsmeter waveform compare options.
Description
The compare start command begins a new dataset comparison. The datasets that you will be
comparing must already be open.

Examples
• Begin a waveform comparison between a dataset named “gold” and the current
simulation. Assumes the gold dataset was already opened.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 999

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
compare start

compare start gold

• This command sequence opens two datasets and starts a comparison between the two
using greater than default limits for total differences encountered.
dataset open gold_typ.wdb gold
dataset open bad_typ.wdb test
compare start -maxtotal 5000 -maxsignal 1000 gold test

• Start the comparison session and “align” waveforms delaying reference.

compare start -refdelay 5n REF TEST

• Start the comparison session and perform pssresidue comparison.

set referenceWdb test.wdb
dataset open $referenceWdb

compare start test -rf pssresidue

compare options -tperiod 1e-9 -annotate
compare add -recursive -show TRAN test/*
compare run

• For more detailed examples, see Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples.

1000 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset alias

dataset alias
Adds additional names (aliases) to a dataset.
Usage
dataset alias dataset_name [alias_name [-folder folder_path]]

Parameters
• dataset_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the dataset to which the alias is assigned. Use the root
name of the file only. This must be specified as the first argument to the database alias
command.
• alias_name
(Optional) Specifies the alias name to assign to the dataset. It also returns a list of all aliases
currently assigned to the specified dataset.
• -folder folder_path
(Optional) Specifies the folder name(s) in the dataset where the alias name will be assigned.
If several folder levels are encountered, names are separated by a forward slash ( / ).
Return Values
A list of aliases currently assigned to the dataset.

Examples
• Assign the alias name “REF” to the dataset named “gold”.
dataset alias gold REF

• Assigns the alias name “myfolder” to the folder named “saved”, which exists in the
dataset “adc12”. This is equivalent to <adc12/saved> in the EZwave fully qualified
name notation.
dataset alias adc12 myfolder -folder saved

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1001

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset analysis

dataset analysis
Returns a list of folders (or subfolders) of analysis of the dataset (or folder).
Usage
dataset analysis [dataset_name] [-folder folder_path]

Parameters
• dataset_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the dataset on which to list the analysis.
Note
If no argument is supplied, the command is applied to the dataset that was last
opened.

• -folder folder_path
(Optional) Specifies the folder name existing in the dataset on which to list the analysis. If
several folder levels are encountered, names are separated by a forward slash ( / ).
Return Values
A list of dataset folders found.

Description
Returns a list of folders (or subfolders) of analysis of the dataset (or folder).

Dataset folders are all considered as analysis by this command, even if they do not always
correspond to analysis.

Examples
dataset analysis adc12

1002 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset clear

dataset clear
Clears all waveform data from the last opened database.
Usage
dataset clear

Parameters
• None.

Examples
dataset clear

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1003

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset close

dataset close
Closes the specified database or all databases.
Usage
dataset close [database_name | -all]

Parameters
• database_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the database to be closed.
• -all
(Optional) Specifies that all open databases should be closed.
Description
Closes the specified database or all databases.

Note
If no argument is supplied, the database that was opened last is closed.

Examples
dataset close -all

1004 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset extract

dataset extract
Runs Eldo -extract on the source database using the source netlist to define the .extract and
.meas commands.
Usage
dataset extract -source <wdb> -netlist <path_to_netlist> -out
<dest_aex_file> [-wave <dest_wdb_file>] [-overwrite] [-arguments
<arguments_string>] [-save <text_or_csv_file>]

Parameters
• -source
(Required) Specifies the path to the database file (.wdb) containing the simulation results to
be processed.
• -netlist
(Required) Specifies the path to the netlist containing the .extract and .meas commands to
run.
• -out
(Required) Specifies the path to the aex file into which extracted scalar values are written.
• -wave
(Optional) Specifies the path to the database file (.wdb) into which the waveform data is
written.
• -overwrite
(Optional) Instructs Eldo to overwrite any existing files. When this is not specified, EZwave
reports an error if an output file already exists.
• -arguments
(Optional) Allows you to define parameters to pass to Eldo.
• -save
(Optional) Saves the content of the scalar extract in a text or CSV file using EZwave
standards (headers, separators, and so on).
Examples
dataset extract -source test_data.wdb -netlist test_data.cir -out
test_data.aex -wave test_data_extract.wdb -overwrite -save file.txt

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1005

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset info

dataset info
Returns the specified information about a database.
Usage
dataset info option [database_name]

Parameters
• option
(Required) Specifies the type of information to be returned. option can be one of the
following:
o name — Returns the name of the database.
o file — Returns the path and filename where the database is saved.
o exists — Returns 1 if the database is currently open; otherwise, returns 0.
• database_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the database to get information about. If database_name is
not specified, the active database is used.
Examples
if [dataset info exists adc12 ] {
# do something
} else {
# do something else
}

1006 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset list

dataset list
Returns a list of currently opened databases.
Usage
dataset list [-long]

Parameters
• -long
(Optional) If this option is specified, this command also returns the full path of the
databases.
Examples
dataset list

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1007

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset merge

dataset merge
Merges databases containing single run simulation results, and generates compound waveforms
from found waveforms. When supplied the name of an index file, the command merges the
referenced databases and adds parameters as defined in the file.
Usage
dataset merge dataset_name file_name1 [... file_namen] | -wdbparam
<index_file> [-matchindex |-startindex start_index] [-ignorewaveforms]

Parameters
• dataset_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the dataset containing the compound waveforms resulting
from the merge.
Caution
You must choose a dataset_name that is different from the names of any of the
source databases to prevent overwriting the source with the resulting merged dataset.

• file_name1 [... file_namen]

(Required; either a file_name or a -wdparam file must be specified) Specifies the list of
databases to be merged. You must specify at least one file. The wildcard character ( * ) is
allowed in file names. It is not necessary to open the databases prior to this command call.
• -wdbparam <index_file>
(Required; either a file_name or a -wdparam file must be specified) Specifies the name of
the index file to be used in defining the merge. The index file should contain a list of the
waveform output files to merge, along with any parameters to associate with the resulting
compound waveform. If used, the file_name1 [... file_namen] are ignored.
When -wdbparam is used and dataset_name is specified, the merged dataset is named
according to that value. If dataset_name is not specified, the default of “merge_” + number
is used for the merged dataset name.
If -wdbparam is used, -startindex start_index is ignored.
If -wdbparam is used with -matchindex, EZwave tries to determine the index of the
compound element by the database name used in the index file.
• -matchindex
(Optional) If this option is specified, the index of the compound element must be
determined by its source database name. For example, test1.wdb -> index 1, test.wdb ->
index 0 or even test.tr2 -> index 2.

1008 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset merge

• -startindex start_index
(Optional) Specifies the index that the compound elements should start from. For example,
merging test.wdb and test2.wdb using option -startindex 7 will create compounds with
element index 7 and 8.
Note
This option is ignored when merging databases that already contain compound
waveforms. In this case, the original compound element indexes are maintained.

• -ignorewaveforms
(Optional) This option is only used if a user encounters compatibility issues with the
updated dataset merge functionality and needs to revert to the previous behavior of dataset
merge. See note below.
Note
In AMS13.2 and earlier versions, EZwave gave priority to compound waveforms in
the source databases when merging. For example, for a database containing a TRAN
folder with compound waveforms and an EXT folder with regular waveforms, only the
TRAN folder was merged. For later versions of AMS, in the same situation, EZwave
will merge both the TRAN and EXT folders. In certain situations, this might affect a
user script that had worked previously, because some folders that used to be ignored are
now merged. If this situation should occur, the option -ignorewaveforms may be used to
revert to the previous behavior.

Description
This command merges databases containing single run simulation results, and generates
compound waveforms from found waveforms. When supplied the name of an index file, the
command merges the referenced databases and adds parameters as defined in the file.

Examples
dataset merge result /user/simu*.wdb
# Merge waveforms contained in all databases matching
# "/user/simu*.wdb", creating a compound waveform in the dataset
# "result".

Note
Merging of FSDB files is not supported by the dataset merge command. You must convert
the files to WDB format (.wdb) before merging using dataset merge:

ffcv <file.fsdb> -jwdb <file.wdb>

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1009

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset mergewaveforms

dataset mergewaveforms
Merges waveforms, grouping waveforms of the same name as if there were multiple simulation
runs.
Usage
dataset mergewaveforms dataset_name file_name1 ... file_namen
[-matchindex | -startindex start_index]
-wf waveform1_name ... waveform_n_name

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• dataset_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the dataset containing the compound waveforms resulting
from the merge.
Caution
You must choose a dataset_name that is different from the names of any of the
source databases to prevent overwriting the source with the resulting merged dataset.

• file_name1 … file_namen
(Required) Specifies the list of databases to be merged. The wildcard character ( * ) is
allowed in file names. It is not necessary to open the databases prior to this command call.
• -matchindex
(Optional) If this option is specified, the index of the compound element must be
determined by its source database name. For example, test1.wdb -> index 1, test.wdb ->
index 0 or even test.tr2 -> index 2.
• -startindex start_index
(Optional) Specifies the index that the compound elements should start from. For example,
merging test.wdb and test2.wdb using option -startindex 7 will create compounds with
element index 7 and 8.
Note
This option is ignored when merging databases that already contain compound
waveforms. In this case, the original compound element indexes are maintained.

• -wf waveform1_name … waveform_n_name

(Required) Specifies the list of waveforms to be merged. You can use the extended options
detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveforms. You can use more than one
option in the same command.

1010 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset mergewaveforms

Description
This command merges waveforms, grouping waveforms of the same name as if there were
multiple simulation runs. The x-axis units of both waveforms must be identical.

Examples
dataset mergewaveforms mywdb /user/library/*.wdb -wf IN OUT

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1011

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset open

dataset open
Opens a database file.
Usage
dataset open file_name [dataset_name] [-incl_if_tandem {on | off}]

Parameters
• file_name
(Required) The name of a database in a supported format.
• dataset_name
(Optional) Specifies a name for the open dataset. This is a name that will identify the dataset
in the current session. If not specified, the default dataset name corresponds to the filename
prefix (without file extension).
• -incl_if_tandem {on | off}
(Optional) When set to off, excludes a database from tandem mode when loaded.
Return Values
The database name.

Examples
dataset open $env(AMS_VIEWER_HOME)/lib/tutorial.wdb

1012 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset ovd

dataset ovd
Opens an OVD file.
Usage
dataset ovd path_to_ovd_folder [-ovdindex <index_representation>]

Parameters
• path_to_ovd_folder
(Required) Specifies the path to an OVD folder.
• -ovdindex <index_representation>
(Optional) Specifies the iteration that should be opened. Indices are separated by commas,
can be a single integer number, or a range of indices separated by “-”. A valid
index_representation is: 1,3,5-13,17.
Examples
dataset ovd netlist.out -ovdindex 12,17,51

Related Topics
Foreign Databases Options

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1013

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset power analysis

dataset power analysis

Performs a power analysis of the specified waveform database power analysis folder.
Usage
dataset power analysis wdb analysis [path [-separator <character>]] [-run <index>] [-list]
[-range lower_bound upper_bound] [-upperthreshold <value>] [-lowerthreshold <value>]
[-save <file.[txt|csv]> [-overwrite]] [-depth <value>] [-view name1 name2] [-filter name
regex] [-sort name <up|down>] [-ignoredefaultfiltering] [-dialog]
Parameters
• wdb
Name of the waveform database to be analyzed.
• analysis
Name of the analysis folder to be analyzed.
• path
(Optional) The path to the subcircuit to be considered as the top for the analysis. When not
specified, the default top subcircuit is the one found in the analysis folder.
• -separator <character>
(Optional) Path separator character.
• -run <index>
(Optional) Used to specify a run id when performing a power analysis on a multi-run
database.
• -list
(Optional) Lists all names available in the database. Used when setting up the batch
analysis.
• -range <lower_bound> <upper_bound>
(Optional) Defines the lower and upper time bounds of the analysis. It is possible to analyze
a single time event by setting the same time value for lower and upper bounds. When not
specified, the analysis is performed on the whole simulation time.
• -upperthreshold <value>
(Optional) Defines the upper threshold to filter devices and subcircuits on power
consumption value.
• -lowerthreshold <value>
(Optional) Defines the lower threshold to filter devices and subcircuit on power
consumption value.

1014 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset power analysis

• -save <file.[txt|csv]>
(Optional) Saves the result of the analysis to a text or CSV file. When this switch is not
specified in batch mode, the command does nothing.
• -overwrite
(Optional) Overwrite the output file if it exists. When not specified and the file exists, the
command will exit and generate an error.
• -depth <value>
(Optional) Defines a maximum depth of subcircuit analysis from the top. When not
specified, no depth limitation is used and all subcircuits of the top are analyzed.
• -view {"column_name1" "column_name2"…}
(Optional) Defines the names of the columns to display in the Power Analysis Dialog Box.
When not specified, the default display depends on the simulator setup stored on the
analysis folder.
• -filter "name" "regex"
(Optional) Defines a filtering regular expression on a column. This switch can be used
multiple times on the same command to define filters on multiple columns.
• -sort "column_name" <up|down>
(Optional) Defines a sorting order on a column. This switch can be used multiple times on
the same command but only the last one defined will be applied.
• -ignoredefaultfiltering
(Optional) Discard the settings that were set at simulation time and use the default ones. See
.POWER_ANALYSIS in the Eldo Reference Manual.
• -dialog
(Optional) When used with the EZwave GUI, opens the Power Analysis dialog box through
the TCL command.
Examples
Example 1
dataset open tc100_eldo.wdb
dataset power analysis tc100_eldo POWER_TRAN -dialog

• This example runs the analysis of the tc100_eldo database on the POWER_TRAN folder.
• All devices and subcircuits contributions are available in the EZwave Power Analysis
Dialog Box.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1015

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset power analysis

Example 2
dataset open tc100_eldo.wdb
dataset power analysis tc100_eldo POWER_TRAN -dialog tc100_eldo:X1:X2
-separator :

• This example runs the analysis of the tc100_eldo database on the POWER_TRAN folder.
• The top level is not tc100_eldo anymore but tc100_eldo.X1.X2 subcircuit. The separator
is not necessarily the same as the one used by EZwave (waveform name).
Example 3
dataset power analysis tc100_eldo POWER_TRAN -range 80e-9 100e-9
-lowerthreshold 0.005 -depth 3

• This example runs the analysis of the tc100_eldo database on the POWER_TRAN folder.
• The analysis is performed over the time range 80 to 100 ns.
• All subcircuits from the top one are analyzed up to a depth of 3 levels.
• All devices and subcircuits consuming less than 0.005W will not be shown in the
displayed results.

Tip
See also .POWER_ANALYSIS in the Eldo Reference Manual.

1016 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset rename

dataset rename
Renames the specified database.
Usage
dataset rename database_name new_name

Parameters
• database_name
(Required) Specifies the database to be renamed.
• new_name
(Required) Specifies the new name for the database.
Return Values
The database name.

Examples
dataset rename adc12 adc12_test

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1017

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset save

dataset save
Saves the specified database to disk as the specified file name.
Usage
dataset save database_name file_name [-start x_start] [-end x_stop]
[-sampling sample] [-atcursors] [-delta delta] [-deriv derivabs]
[-derivrel derivrel]

Parameters
• database_name
(Required) Specifies the database to be saved.
• file_name
(Required) Specifies the path and file name where the database should be saved. The
extension used for the file name determines the output format (for example, myfile.txt will
save to a text file, myfile.csv will save to a CSV file).
Add the .gz extension to the filename to save the waveforms to a compressed (gzipped)
archive.
• -start x_start
(Optional) Specifies the X value to be considered as the start value of the database to be
saved.
• -end x_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X value to be considered as the end value of the database to be
saved.
• -sampling sample
(Optional) Specifies the step value to be used for sampling while saving the database.
• -atcursors
(Optional) Use this option to save only the waveform data at cursor locations.
• -delta delta
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the threshold the
lower limit threshold and enable filtering of output points by performing an absolute
variation comparison.
• -derivabs derivabs
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the absolute
tolerance and enable filtering of output points by performing a slope based comparison.
• -derivrel derivrel
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the relative
tolerance and enable filtering of output points by performing a slope based comparison.

1018 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset save

Note
Combining switches [-delta delta], [-derivabs derivabs] and [-derivrel derivrel]is not
forbidden, but the outcome of doing so is difficult to predict. It is advised that only
one switch is used at a time.

Examples
dataset save calc /user/ADC12/calc.wdb

dataset save meas /user/db/meas1n.wdb -sampling 1n

# Saves database with a sampling of 1n (second) to the file meas1n.wdb

dataset save dcsweep /user/dc/dcsweep.wdb.gz

# Saves database to the gzipped file dcsweep.wdb.gz

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1019

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset savescalar

dataset savescalar
Save scalars, such as noise contributors, to a TXT file or CSV file.
Usage
dataset savescalar <wdb>
[<folder> ... <folderN>] -output <report_file>
[-sort <name|value> <asc|desc>]

Parameters
• <wdb>
(Required) Dataset name, opened in EZwave.
• <folder> ... <folderN>
(Optional) Name(s) of the folder(s) (type(s)) containing the variables to be saved. If not
specified, all variable types will be saved.
• -output <report_file>
(Required) The path to the output file.
• -sort <name|value> <asc|desc>
(Optional) Sorting parameter (name or value) and direction (ascending or descending).
Description
The output file format (value separator) is detected automatically depending on the output file
extension. If the extension is *.csv, the format will be CSV (separator is a comma). In other
cases the format will be TXT (separator is a whitespace).

Examples
Example of the TXT report:

Name Value Y Unit

pss_PhaseNoise_SummaryStatistics
periodJitter 5.542636185984542E-13
periodJitter_flicker 5.2546672272391475E-14
periodJitter_white 5.51767166597425E-13
frequency 8.0E8
period 1.25E-9ss

Example of the CSV report:

Name,Value,Y Unit
pss_PhaseNoise_SummaryStatistics,,
periodJitter,5.542636185984542E-13,
periodJitter_flicker,5.2546672272391475E-14,
periodJitter_white,5.51767166597425E-13,
frequency,8.0E8,
period,1.25E-9,

1020 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset savewaveforms

dataset savewaveforms
Saves the specified waveform(s) to disk as the specified file name.
Usage
dataset savewaveforms file_name [-start x_start] [-end x_stop]
[-sampling sample] [-atcursors] [-delta delta] [-derivabs derivabs]
[-derivrel derivrel] waveform_name

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• file_name
(Required) Specifies the path and file name where the database file should be saved. The
extension used for the file name determines the output format (for example, myfile.txt will
save to a text file, myfile.csv will save to a CSV file).
Add the .gz extension to the filename to save the waveforms to a compressed (gzipped)
archive.
• -start x_start
(Optional) Specifies the X value to be considered as the start value of the database to be
saved.
• -end x_stop
(Optional) Specifies the X value to be considered as the end value of the database to be
saved.
• -sampling sample
(Optional) Specifies the step value to be used for sampling while saving the database.
• -atcursors
(Optional) Use this option to save only the waveform data at cursor locations. This
parameter is not supported in batch mode.
• -delta delta
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the threshold the
lower limit threshold and enable filtering of output points by performing an absolute
variation comparison.
• -derivabs derivabs
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the absolute
tolerance and enable filtering of output points by performing a slope based comparison.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1021

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset savewaveforms

• -derivrel derivrel
(Optional) For file type Spice PWL (.sti) only, use this option to specify the relative
tolerance and enable filtering of output points by performing a slope based comparison.
• waveform_name [ waveform_name2… ]
(Required) Specifies the waveform(s) to be saved to the database file. You can use the
extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform(s). You can
use more than one option in the same command.
Note
Combining switches [-delta delta], [-derivabs derivabs] and [-derivrel derivrel] is
not forbidden, but the outcome of doing so is difficult to predict. It is advised that
only one switch is used at a time.

Examples
dataset savewaveforms /user/ADC12/calc.wdb v_load

dataset savewaveforms /user/db/wave1n.wdb -sampling 1n Q0 IN

# Saves the waveforms Q0 and IN with a sampling rate of 1n (second) to
# the file wave1n.wdb

dataset savewaveforms /user/db/VQ0.wdb.gz Q0

# Saves the waveform Q0 to the gzipped file VQ0.wdb.gz

1022 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset scalar

dataset scalar
Compares scalar values of variables stored in two databases (PSF, nutmeg, FSDB, WDB,
OVD).
Usage
dataset scalar ref_dataset test_dataset -output <report_file>
[-type <name>] [-cs 0|1] [-nameonly|-tol <value>]

Parameters
• ref_dataset
(Required) Specify the reference dataset name.
• test_dataset
(Required) Specify the test dataset name.
• -output <report_file>
(Required) Specify the path for the output report file
• -type <name>
(Optional) Name of the scalar’s type (folder to compare). If absent, all scalar types will be
compared.
• -cs 0|1
(Optional) Case sensitivity for scalar names. Default is 1 (case sensitivity is on).
• -nameonly
(Optional) If specified, only the presence of scalars in the reference and test datasets will be
compared, not the values.
Note
-nameonly switch cannot be used simultaneously with the -tol switch.

• -tol <value>
(Optional) Tolerance value (for absolute difference calculation) for scalar comparisons. A
percentage value is also supported. If absolute difference (abs(test_value – ref_value)) is
greater than the specified tolerance, the difference will be included into the report.
Note
-tol switch cannot be used simultaneously with the -nameonly switch.

Return Values
The dataset scalar command generates a text report in the following form:

Missing scalars in <test> = <number_of_missing>Folder: <folder_name>

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1023

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset scalar

<scalar1_path> = <scalar1_value>…<scalarN_path> = <scalarN_value>

Additional scalars in <test> = <number_of_additional>Folder: <folder_name>

<scalar1_path> = <scalar1_value>…<scalarN_path> = <scalarN_value>

Total differences = <number_of_differences>Folder: <folder_name>

Diff number 1Reference variable : <ref_scalar1_path> =

<ref_scalar1_value>Test variable : <test_scalar1_path> =
<ref_scalar1_value>Absolute difference = <value1>Relative difference =
<value1>…Diff number NReference variable : <ref_scalarN_path> =
<ref_scalarN_value>Test variable : <test_scalarN_path> =
<ref_scalarN_value>Absolute difference = <valueN>Relative difference =
<valueN>

If there are no differences found, the report will contain:

Missing scalars in <test> = 0Additional scalars in <ref> = 0Total

differences = 0

Description
The function takes the two databases names to compare, a tolerance value and generates a report
of differences when variables do not match between the two databases being compared.

Absolute difference is calculated using the formula:

abs_diff = abs(test_value – ref_value)

Relative difference is calculated using the formula:

rel_diff = abs(test_value – ref_value)/min(test_value, ref_value)

If the absolute difference is greater than the tolerance, the difference will be included into the
report.

1024 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset supported

dataset supported
Returns “true” if the dataset can be opened by EZwave, and “false” otherwise.
Usage
dataset supported dataset_path

Parameters
• dataset_path
(Required) Specifies the path for the dataset to be checked.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1025

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
dataset topnoise

dataset topnoise
Performs a topnoise calculation on the specified waveform database folder or hierarchy.
Usage
dataset topnoise <wdb_obj> -fstart <value> [-fstop <value>] [-ntop <value>]
[-pattern <value>] [-norecursive] [-depth <value>] [-runs <runID>,<runID1>,...]
[-instance] [-file <path>] [-noplot] [-nogrid]
Parameters
• <wdb_obj>
(Required) Name of the waveform database folder or hierarchy. The format is as follows:
<database_name>/<folder_or_hierarchy_name1>/<folder_or_hierarchy_name2>/
...

• -fstart <value>
(Required) The start frequency.
• -fstop <value>
(Optional) The stop frequency.
• -ntop <value>
(Optional) The number of results to plot. If not specified, the default is 8. Ignored if -noplot
switch is used.
• -pattern <value>
(Optional) The waveform search pattern. Default is “*”.
• -norecursive
(Optional) Disables the recursive waveform search. Cannot be used simultaneously with
-depth switch.
• -depth <value>
(Optional) Waveforms search depth (for a recursive search). If not specified (default) it
performs the full depth search. Cannot be used simultaneously with -norecursive switch.
• -runs <runID>,<runID1>,...
(Optional) A comma separated list of run ids to process for a multiple run database. If not
specified (default) all runs will be processed.
• -instance
(Optional) Specifies that report data is generated not only at MOS instance level, but
recursively at subckt instance level.

1026 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dataset topnoise

• -file <path>
(Optional) Specifies the path and filename where a sorted report of all noise contributions is
saved.
• -noplot
(Optional) Specifies that no topnoise results are plotted.
• -nogrid
(Optional) Disables the display of grid lines. Ignored if -noplot switch is used.
Related Topics
topnoise
Top Noise Dialog Box

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1027

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
delete wave

delete wave
Removes the specified waveform from the indicated window.
Usage
delete wave [-window window_name] waveform_name

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window from which to remove the waveform. If window_name is
not specified, the waveform is removed from the active window.
• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies name of the waveform to be removed. You can specify multiple
waveforms and use wildcards. You can also use the extended options detailed in Selecting
Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform(s). You can use more than one option in the same
command.
Examples
delete wave -run 1 -session current <tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load

1028 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
dofile

dofile
Tells the EZwave Tcl interpreter to source the specified Tcl file.
Usage
dofile file_name

Parameters
• file_name
(Required) Specifies the path and file name of the Tcl file to be sourced by the EZwave Tcl
interpreter.
Return Values
The string returned by the Tcl file, if any.

Description
This command tells the EZwave Tcl interpreter to source the specified Tcl file. This command
differs from the Tcl “source” command in that it enables the Tcl “proc” to register into the
EZwave Waveform Calculator as a user-defined function.

Examples
dofile /user/adc12.tcl

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1029

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
environment

environment
Displays or changes the region/signal environment.
Usage
environment [path_name] [-dataset | -nodataset]
env [path_name] [-dataset | -nodataset]

Parameters
• path_name
(Optional) Specifies the absolute path name to which the current region/signal environment
is to be changed. Relative path names are not allowed.
• -dataset
(Optional) If this option is specified, the database path is displayed, followed by the design
hierarchy, as it would appear in the EZwave waveform list.
• -nodataset
(Optional) If this option is specified, the path is displayed without any database indications.
Return Values
Returns the path with regards to the hierarchy.

Description
This command displays or changes the region/signal environment. If a path name is specified,
the current region/signal environment is change to that path name. Otherwise, the current
region/signal environment is displayed.

Note
When the -dataset option is used, this command also displays the database name and
hierarchy as it is shown in the database.

Examples
env :test:u1
# This changes the current region/signal environment path to :test:u1
# Returns :test:u1
env -dataset
# Returns <adc12_test/TRAN>:test:u1

1030 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
evalExpression

evalExpression
Invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the expression entered.
Usage
evalExpression expression

Parameters
• expression
(Required) An expression supported by the EZwave calculator.
Return Values
The result value of the expression. It can be one of the following:

• a list of Y-values corresponding to a waveform, represented as a Tcl list of strings

• a single number
• a list of data represented as a Tcl list of strings for a one-dimensional array
• a list of data pairs represented as a Tcl list of string pairs grouped by parentheses for a
two-dimensional array
Description
This command invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the expression entered.

If expression is enclosed in double quotes (" "), value substitution is enabled and all strings
beginning with a dollar sign ($) are replaced by the variable they name. If an expression is
enclosed in braces ({ }), value substitution is disabled and the expression is evaluated as
presented.

This command differs from wfc in the type of output it returns.

Examples
evalExpression {wf_diff = wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load") -
wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle")}
set diff0 [evalExpression {wftodata(wf_diff)[0][0]}]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1031

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
examine

examine
Examines an object and displays its current value in the Transcript Window.
Usage
examine
[-env path]
[-name]
[-symbolic | -onescomplement | -magnitude | -binary |
-octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal | -unsigned | -ascii ]
[-radix radix_type]
[-showbase]
[-tograydec]
[-graytodec]
[-fpoint n]
[-time time]
[wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n] | [-separator separator_char wf_name_1 ...
wf_name_n [-noseparator wf_name_1 ... wf_name_n]]

Parameters
• -env path
(Optional) path is the hierarchical path to the objects. You can use this to avoid repeating it
in all object names.
• -name
(Optional) Causes the name of the object to be returned in a TCL list, as well as its value.
• -symbolic | -onescomplement | -magnitude | -binary | -octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal | -
unsigned | -ascii
(Optional) Specifies a radix for displaying digital bus(es) specified in this command.
If no radix is specified for an enumerated type, the default radix is used. You can change the
default radix for the current simulation using the radix command.
• -radix radix_type
(Optional) Specifies a radix or a user-defined radix. Can be used as an alternative to the
options:
[-symbolic | -onescomplement | -magnitude | -binary | -octal |
-decimal | -hexadecimal | -unsigned | -ascii ]

Legal radix_type values are: symbolic, onescomplement, magnitude, binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal, unsigned, ascii.
• -showbase
(Optional) Display the length of the bus and its base. It uses the syntax defined in radix.
• -time time
Specifies the time value between 0 and $now at which to examine the objects.

1032 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
examine

time is a non negative integer. By default it is in seconds. For other units the value and unit
must be placed inside curly braces if there is a space between the time and the unit. For
example, the following are equivalent for ps resolution:
examine -time {3.6 ns} signal_a
examine -time 3600 signal_a

If -time time is not specified, the last value of each object is returned.
If an expression is specified, it will be evaluated at that time.
Note
When an object does not have data at the specified time, no error is returned. Instead
the command returns “No_Data”.

• -tograydec
(Optional) Converts decimal representation radix to gray radix.
• -graytodec
(Optional) Coverts gray radix to decimal representation radix.
• -fpoint n
(Optional) Specifies n fixed-point radix.
• wf_name_1 . . .wf_name_n
(Optional) Specifies the waveform(s) using one of several accepted syntaxes. See
Specifying Waveforms in Tcl. You must use the object name method for specifying
waveforms when using the –show representation option.
You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the
waveform(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
The examine command will return “No_Data” for any waveform not of time domain, in
other words not having seconds as X.
Examples
examine -time 500ps *

examine -time 500ps -name *

examine -time 500ns -showbase -name :top:*

examine -time 500ns -showbase -name *

examine -time 5000000ns -name *

Tip
See also examine in the Questa ADMS Command Reference.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1033

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
exit

exit
Exits the EZwave viewer.
Usage
exit [-force] [-discard]

Parameters
• -force
(Optional) If specified, the EZwave viewer quits and bypasses the confirmation dialog box.
If this option is not specified, the confirmation dialog box displays and requires a manual
confirmation.
• -discard
(Optional) If specified, the EZwave viewer quits and bypasses the unsaved data dialog box
(any unsaved data is lost). If this option is not specified, the unsaved data dialog box
displays and requires a manual confirmation.
Caution
If the -discard option is specified, all unsaved data is lost.

Return Values
None.

Examples
exit

exit -force

exit -force -discard

1034 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
find analogs

find analogs
Returns the names of all the analog objects (quantities and terminals) matching the specified
pattern.
Usage
find analogs object_name ...

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• object_name
(Required) Specifies the name of an object you want to search. Multiple names and
wildcards are supported. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms
in Tcl to select the objects(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
Examples
See the examples in the Using find Commands section.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1035

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
find currents

find currents
Returns the names of all the current objects matching the specified pattern.
Usage
find currents object_name ...

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• object_name
(Required) Specifies the name of a current object you want to search. Multiple names and
wildcards are supported. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms
in Tcl to select the objects(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
Description
The find currents and find signals -i commands are synonymous; both commands return the full
pathnames of all analog and digital objects that match the name specification.

Examples
See the examples in the Using find Commands section.

1036 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
find digitals

find digitals
Returns a list of digital signals matching the specified pattern.
Usage
find digitals item_name ...

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• item_name
(Required) Specifies the name of an item you want to search. Multiple names and wildcards
are supported. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to
select the waveform(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
Examples
See the examples in the Using find Commands section.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1037

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
find nets | signals

find nets | signals

These commands return the full pathnames of all analog and digital objects that match the name
specification.
Usage
find nets | signals item_name ...

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• item_name
(Required) Specifies the name of an object you want to search. Multiple names and
wildcards are supported. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms
in Tcl to select the signal(s). You can use more than one option in the same command.
Description
The find nets and find signals commands are synonymous; both commands return the full
pathnames of all analog and digital objects that match the name specification. Objects listed
include signals, quantities, and terminals unless these have been specifically excluded by using
the respective argument.

Examples
See the examples in the Using find Commands section.

1038 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
getactivecursortime

getactivecursortime
Returns the location of the active cursor.
Usage
getactivecursortime [-window window_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window from which to return the location of the active cursor. If
this is not specified, the location of the active cursor in the active window is returned.
Examples
getactivecursortime -window "Wave:2"

Note
The getactivecursortime command is equivalent to the wave cursortime command with no
time or cursor name specified.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1039

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
precision

precision
Sets the double or cursor display precision.
Usage
precision [-double | -cursor] [precision_value#]

Parameters
• -double | - cursor
(Optional)
o -double - Enables the setting of the number of digits displayed when double-
precision numbers are displayed in waveforms.
o -cursor - Enables the setting of the number of digits displayed when in cursor flags.
• precision_value#
Specifies the number of digits to be set.
Note
The # character is accepted for Questa SIM compatibility, but ignored by EZwave.

Examples
precision -cursor 8#

1040 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
printenv

printenv
Displays the name and value of environment variables.
Usage
printenv [variable_name]

Parameters
• variable_name
(Optional) Specifies which environment variable name and value to display. If this is not
specified, the command will return information on all environment variables.
Return Values
Returns a name and value pair of the specified environment variable (or all the variables if not
specified) in the form of:

variable_name = value

Description
This command displays the name and value of environment variables. If no variable name is
specified, it returns all environment variable information.

Examples
printenv PRINTER

# This returns PRINTER=myprinter

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1041

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
quit

quit
Exits the EZwave viewer.
Usage
quit [-force ] [-discard]

Parameters
• -force
(Optional) If specified, the EZwave viewer quits and bypasses the confirmation dialog box.
If this option is not specified, the confirmation dialog box displays and requires a manual
confirmation.
• -discard
(Optional) If specified, the EZwave viewer quits and bypasses the unsaved data dialog box
(any unsaved data is lost). If this option is not specified, the unsaved data dialog box
displays and requires a manual confirmation.
Caution
If the -discard option is specified, all unsaved data is lost.

Return Values
None.

Examples
quit

quit -force

quit -force -discard

1042 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
radix

radix
Defines the default bus radix or returns the current default if no radix is specified.
Usage
radix [-symbolic | -onescomplement | -magnitude | -binary |
-octal | -decimal | -hexadecimal | -unsigned | -ascii | -time]
[-enumnumeric | -enumsymbolic | radix_name ] [-tograydec] [-graytodec]
[-fpoint n]

Parameters
• -symbolic
Ignored; for compatibility purposes only.
• -onescomplement
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be one’s complement.
• -magnitude
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be signed magnitude.
• -binary
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be binary.
• -octal
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be octal.
• -decimal
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be decimal (two’s complement).
• -hexadecimal
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be hexadecimal.
• -unsigned
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be unsigned decimal.
• -ascii
(Optional) Specifies the default radix to be ascii.
• -time
Ignored; for compatibility purposes only.
• -enumnumeric
Ignored; for compatibility purposes only.
• -enumsymbolic
Ignored; for compatibility purposes only.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1043

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
radix

• radix_name
Specifies the name of a user-defined radix.
• -tograydec
(Optional) Converts decimal representation radix to gray radix.
• -graytodec
(Optional) Coverts gray radix to decimal representation radix.
• -fpoint n
(Optional) Specifies n fixed-point radix.
Examples
radix -binary

1044 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
radix define

radix define
Defines a new radix.
Usage
radix define radix_name {radix_value, radix_label [radix_value2,
radix_label2 … radix_valueN, radix_labelN] [-default radix_type] [-color
color]}

Parameters
• radix_name
(Required) Specifies a name for the radix.
• radix_value, radix_label [radix_value2, radix_label2 … radix_valueN, radix_labelN]
(Required) Specifies a comma separated list of number pattern and label pairs for the radix.
Use the wildcard character ? to specify a range of pattern values. The first matching pattern
from the top of the list is used if there is more than one match.
• -default radix_type
(Optional) Specifies the radix to use if a match is not found for a given value.
• -color color
(Optional) Specifies the display color for each state. Supported color keywords are:
o black
o white
o gray
o lightgray
o darkgray
o red
o green
o blue
o yellow
o orange
o cyan
o magenta
o pink

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1045

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
radix define

Return Values
None.

Examples
# Defines a new radix named States
radix define States {
6'b01??00, WRITE
6'b10??00, READ
-default hex }

# Defines a color for each state

radix define Bin2Gray_dec {
X"0" FOO -color red
X"1" BAR -color blue
X"2" OOF -color yellow
X"3" RAB -color green
X"4" ABC -color cyan
X"5" EFG -color blue
X"6" IJK -color magenta
X"7" LMN -color pink
...

1046 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
radix delete

radix delete
Removes the radix definition from the named radix.
Usage
radix delete radix_name

Parameters
• radix_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the radix.
Return Values
None.

Examples
# Removes the radix definition from the radix named States
radix delete States

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1047

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
radix list

radix list
Returns the complete definition of the named radix.
Usage
radix list [radix_name]

Parameters
• radix_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the radix.
Return Values
Returns the complete definition of the named radix or the definition of all currently defined
radices if a name is not specified.

Description
This command returns the complete definition of the named radix. If no radix name is specified,
it returns a list of all the defined radices.

Examples
# Define a new radix named States
radix define States {
6'b01??00, WRITE
6'b10??00, READ
-default hex }

radix list States

# This returns:
6'b01??00, WRITE
6'b10??00, READ
-default hex

1048 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
radix names

radix names
Returns a list of all the defined radices.
Usage
radix names

Parameters
• None.

Return Values
Returns a list of all the radices if not specified in the form.

Examples
radix names

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1049

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
radix signal

radix signal
Sets the radix value for the specified waveforms, or if the radix value is not specified it inspects
the radix values.
Usage
radix signal [waveform_name [radix_value]][-fpoint decimal]

Parameters
• waveform_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the waveform(s) for which the radix is set or inspected.
• radix_value
(Optional) Specifies the value of the radix to be set for the specified waveform.
Use empty quotation marks ( " " ) to unset the radix for a specified signal.
• -fpointdecimal
(Optional) Ignored.
Return Values
None.

Examples
# Sets the radix value for waveform :top:sigout
radix signal :top:sigout States

1050 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
save

save
Saves the specified Waveform Calculator measure.
Usage
save("name")
Arguments
• "name"
(Required) Specifies the name of the Waveform Calculator variable to save. The double
quotes (" "), are required for the internal function parameter.
Description
The save is effective at the end of the Tcl evaluation, not when the line is executed.

Examples
save("mySndr")

Related Topics
wfc

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1051

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
setenv

setenv
Sets or displays the value of the specified environment variable.
Usage
setenv variable_name [value]

Parameters
• variable_name
(Required) Specifies the environment variable name to be set or displayed.
• value
(Optional) The value to which the environment variable is set. If this is not specified, the
command will display the current value.
Return Values
The value of the environment variable.

Description
Sets or displays the value of the specified environment variable. If no value is specified, this
command displays specified environment variable’s value.

Examples
setenv MGC_AMS_HOME /home/smith/2007.2
# Sets the value of the environment variable MGC_AMS_HOME to
# /home/smith/2007.2

setenv MGC_AMS_HOME
# Returns /home/smith/2007.2

1052 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
unsetenv

unsetenv
Unsets an environment variable.
Usage
unsetenv variable_name

Parameters
• variable_name
(Required) Specifies the environment variable name to be unset.
Return Values
None.

Note
The settings are not persistent and are available only within an EZwave session.

Examples
unsetenv MY_TCL_VAR

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1053

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave activecursor

wave activecursor
Sets the specified cursor as the active cursor.
Usage
wave activecursor [-window window_name] [cursor_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to set the active cursor. If this is not specified, the
active cursor is set in the active window.
• cursor_name
(Optional) Specifies the cursor to set as the active cursor. If this is not specified, the name of
the active cursor is returned.
Examples
To make cursor C2 the active cursor in the active window:

wave activecursor C2

1054 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave activewindow

wave activewindow
Returns the name of the currently active window, or sets a specified window to be active.
Usage
wave activewindow [-title window_name]

Parameters
• -title window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window to be made active. If -title is not specified, returns the name
of the currently active window.
Examples
To return the name of the currently active window:

wave activewindow

To set a window named Wave1 as the active window:

wave activewindow -title Wave1

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1055

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave activeworkspace

wave activeworkspace
Causes the specified workspace to become active.
Usage
wave activeworkspace [workspace_name]

Parameters
• workspace_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the workspace to become active. If workspace_name is
omitted, this command returns the current active workspace name.
Return Values
None if an argument is specified. If no argument is specified, returns the active workspace
name.

Examples
wave activeworkspace ADC12

1056 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addannotation

wave addannotation
Adds a text annotation to a waveform at the specified location in the active window.
Usage
wave addannotation -x x_value [-y y_value] -text text [-snap]
[-window | waveform_name ] [-anchor_style <NONE|POINT|DOT>]
[-line_style <NONE|SOLID>] [-outline] [-vertical_line]
[-show_outline <true|false>] [-show_vline <true|false>]
[-text_font <name|family> <PLAIN|BOLD|ITALIC> <size>]
[-text_color #<rgb_value>]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -x x_value
(Required) Specifies the X value at which the annotation is added. If a Y value is specified,
the annotation is added at the location, ( x_value, y_value ). Otherwise, the command
analyzes the waveform data and places the annotation on the waveform at the specified X
value.
• -y y_value
(Optional) Specifies the Y value at which the annotation is added, at the location, ( x_value,
y_value ). If this option is not specified, the command analyzes the waveform data and
places the annotation on the waveform at the specified X value.
• -text text
(Required) Specifies the annotation text. Quotation marks ( " " ) are required for text that
include spaces. Annotation text may also include multiple lines by using \n.
• -snap
(Optional) Specifies that the text annotation snaps to the nearest waveform datapoint.
• -window | waveform_name
(Optional) If waveform_name is specified, the annotation is added to that waveform. You
can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform.
You can use more than one option in the same command.
If the waveform is displayed several times in the active window, the last occurrence of the
waveform is annotated. If no waveform name is specified, the last displayed waveform in
the active window is annotated.
If -window is specified, the annotation is added to the active window, and not the waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1057

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave addannotation

• -anchor_style <NONE|POINT|DOT>
(Optional). Selects the symbol to use at the anchor point between the waveform and the text
annotation. Available only for annotations that are attached to waveforms.
• -line_style <NONE|SOLID>
(Optional). Controls the visibility of the line between the anchor point and the text
annotation box. Default is SOLID. Available only for annotations that are attached to
waveforms.
• -outline
(Optional) Supported for backward compatibility with legacy Tcl scripts.
• -vertical_line
(Optional) Supported for backward compatibility with legacy Tcl scripts.
• -show_outline <true|false>
(Optional). Controls the visibility of the text box on the new text annotation. Default is true.
• -show_vline <true|false>
(Optional). Controls the visibility of a vertical line at the anchor point between the
waveform and the text annotation. Available only for annotations that are attached to
waveforms. Default is false.
• -text_font <name|family> <PLAIN|BOLD|ITALIC> <size>
(Optional). Specifies the font, style and point size to use for the new text annotation.
• -text_color #<rgb_value>
(Optional). Specifies the color to use for the new text annotation.
The RGB color code is a hexadecimal value preceded by a ‘#’ representing #RRGGBB,
where RR represents the red value, GG represents the green value, and BB represents the
blue value. For example, #0000ff is blue, #000000 is black, and #ffffff is white.
Return Values
The annotation identifier marker mk:# where # is a number.

Examples
• This example adds a simple text annotation:
wave addannotation -x 149.980n -text simple

• This example adds a text annotation and snaps it to the nearest waveform datapoint:
wave addannotation -x 150n -y 3.3 -text "Annotation with snap" -snap

• This example adds a 2 line text annotation with custom font and color properties.
wave addannotation -x 300n -text “Annotation with custom\n font and
color properties” -text_font Jomolhari ITALIC 14 -text_color #ff4040

1058 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addaxisdeltamarker

wave addaxisdeltamarker
Adds a delta marker, between two values, on the selected waveform. The marker can be
horizontal or vertical. Optionally text can be added to this marker.
Usage
wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf waveform_name {-XDelta | -YDelta} -X1 xdata1
-X2 xdata2 [-text text]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -wf waveform_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the waveform.
• {-XDelta| -YDelta}
(Required)
o -XDelta - specifies that the marker is to show information about an x delta.
o -YDelta - specifies that the marker is to show information about a y delta.
• -X1 xdata1
(Required) Specifies the co-ordinate of the first point of the delta marker. The x-coordinate
is used if -XDelta is set,. If -YDelta is set, -X1 specifies the y-coordinate of the first point to
be used.
• -X2 xdata2
(Required) Specifies the co-ordinate of the second point of the delta marker. The x-
coordinate is used if -XDelta is set. If -YDelta is set, -X2 specifies the y-coordinate of the
second point to be used.
• -text text }
(Optional) Specifies the text for the delta marker. Quotation marks ( " " ) are required for
text that include spaces. Text may also include multiple lines by using \n
Return Values
None.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1059

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave addaxisdeltamarker

Examples
wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf -show calc.V -notop -separator / calc/
SMeas_clk2 -XDelta -x1 0.0 -x2 146143.06591866582 -text "Measurement
Window"

wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf -show calc.V -notop -separator / calc/

SMeas_clk2 -XDelta -x1 0.0 -x2 10000

wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf -show calc.V -notop -separator / calc/

SMeas_clk2 -YDelta -x1 -130 -x2 -10 -text "Example Text"

wave addaxisdeltamarker -wf -show calc.V -notop -separator / calc/

SMeas_clk2 -YDelta -x1 -100 -x2 -50 -textms

1060 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addcursor

wave addcursor
Creates a new cursor in the specified window.
Usage
wave addcursor [-window window_name] [-time time | X_value]
[-horizontal [-row row_index] [-axis axis_name]] [-name cursor_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to create the cursor. If this is not specified, the
cursor is created in the active window.
• -time time
(Optional) Specifies the time value where the new cursor should be created.
• X_value
(Optional) Specifies the value along the x-axis where the new cursor should be created.
Note
If neither a time nor an X_value is specified, the cursor is created at the beginning of
the visible domain area.

• -horizontal
(Optional) Creates a horizontal cursor at the specified point on the y-axis.
• -row row_index
(Optional. For horizontal cursors only) Specifies which row in the graph window to add a
horizontal cursor. row_index takes a value of 1 to n, where the top row has the index value
of 1, the second row, 2, and so on. The default value for row_index is n (the last row in the
graph window).
• -axis axis_name
(Optional. For horizontal cursors only) Specifies the name of the axis to add a horizontal
cursor to, when there are multiple axes in a row.
• -name cursor_name
(Optional) Specifies a name for the cursor.
Examples
To add a cursor in the active window at an X value of 100 ns:

wave addcursor 100n

To add a horizontal cursor to the second row in the graph window:

wave addcursor -horizontal -row 2

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1061

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave adddeltamarker

wave adddeltamarker
Adds a delta marker waveform(s) at the specified location(s) in the active window.
Usage
wave adddeltamarker {-xdelta | -ydelta} -wf1 waveform_name1 -x1 x_value1
-y1 y_value1 [-wf2 waveform_name2] -x2 x_value2 -y2 y_value2 [-text text]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• {-xdelta| -ydelta}
(Required)
o -xdelta - specifies that the marker is to show information about an x delta.
o -ydelta - specifies that the marker is to show information about a y delta.
• -wf1 waveform_name1
(Required) Specifies the name of the waveform to which the first point of the delta marker is
to be attached.
• -x1 x_value1
(Required) Specifies the x co-ordinate of the first point of the delta marker.
• -y1 y_value1
(Required) Specifies the y co-ordinate of the first point of the delta marker.
• -wf2 waveform_name2
(Optional) Specifies the name of the waveform to which the second point of the delta
marker is to be attached. If not specified it will default to the same waveform as -wf1
• -x2 x_value2
(Required) Specifies the x co-ordinate of the second point of the delta marker.
• -y2 y_value2
(Required) Specifies the y co-ordinate of the second point of the delta marker.
• -text text }
(Optional) Specifies the text for the delta marker. Quotation marks ( " " ) are required for
text that include spaces. Text may also include multiple lines by using \n
Return Values
None.

1062 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave adddeltamarker

Examples
wave adddeltamarker -xdelta -wf1 v_load -x1 0.03851623740539206 -y1
8.505201152235028E-4 -x2 0.051913040161787515 -y2 4.999999302642095 -text
"dx = 13.40M s\ndy = 5.00 V"
# Adds a delta marker with text to two points on the same waveform

wave adddeltamarker -xdelta -wf1 v_load -x1 0.06243479893740646 -y1 -

7.579889746381528E-6 -wf2 v_middle -x2 0.07321739137215058 -y2
4.999993280548767 -text "dx = 10.78M s\ndy = 5.00 V"
# Adds a delta marker with text to two points across waveforms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1063

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave addline

wave addline
Adds a horizontal or vertical line to a waveform in the active window.
Usage
wave addline {-x | -y} value [waveform_name] [-text annotation_text]
[-drag] [-hash {up | down | left | right}]

Parameters
• { -x| -y} value
(Required) Specifies the location and direction of the line to be added. -x value specifies a
vertical line at the specified value on the x-axis. -y value specifies a horizontal line at the
specified value on the y-axis. The units correspond to the units used in the waveforms.
• waveform_name
(Optional) If this option is specified, the command adds a line marker to that waveform’s
row. If that waveform is displayed several times it is added to the last occurrence. If not
specified it will default to the last displayed waveform.
Note
This command applies only to waveforms that are currently displayed. Use the add
wave command to display the relevant waveforms before calling this command.

• -text annotation_text
(Optional) Specifies the text to add as an annotation to the line. Quotations ( " " ) are only
required if there are spaces in the text.
• -drag
(Optional) If this option is specified, the line marker can be dragged. By default, the added
line cannot be dragged.
• -hash { up | down | left | right }
(Optional) If this option is specified, a hash pattern is placed in the specified location
relative to the line: up or down for horizontal lines, and left or right for vertical lines. This
may be useful in marking limits in the graph.
Return Values
The line identifier in the form of mk:# where # is a number.

1064 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addline

Examples
wave addline -x 150n -text limit -hash left
# Adds a vertical marker at time 150n with hash on left of line, with text
# 'limit'

wave addline -y 3.3 -text "high level" -hash up

# Adds a horizontal marker at 3.3 volts with hash on top up line, with text
# 'high level'

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1065

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave addmarker

wave addmarker
Adds a vertical marker to the specified location.
Usage
wave addmarker [-window window_name] [-name name] [-time {time | x_value}]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the window to which the marker is added. If this option is
not specified, the marker is added to the active window.
• -name name
(Optional) Specifies the name to be given to the marker.
• -time { time | x_value }
(Optional) Specifies the location of the marker, designated by a time value or an X value. If
this option is not specified, the marker is placed at the left-most point in the window.
Return Values
The marker identifier in the form of m# where # is a number, starting from 1.

Description
This command adds a vertical marker to the specified location. This corresponds to the Add
Marker button in the Event Search Tool Dialog Box.

Examples
wave addmarker -time 100n

1066 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addproperty

wave addproperty
Adds a property to a waveform.
Note
This command modifies the dataset. You may use the “dataset save” command to save the
dataset before exiting. You can then see the property name and value when you mouse over
the waveform name or waveform data.

Usage
wave addproperty waveform_name -name property_name -value property_value

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies the waveform to which the property will be added. You can use the
extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform. You can
use more than one option in the same command.
• -nameproperty_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the property to be added to the waveform.
• -valueproperty_value
(Required) Specifies the value of the property to be added to the waveform. This can be
either a number or a string.
Examples
wave addproperty OUT -name PRUN -value 1

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1067

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave addwindow

wave addwindow
Creates a new graphical window in the EZwave session window and makes it active.
Usage
wave addwindow [-title window_title] [-divider ratio]
[-width width -height height] [-x xPosition -y yPosition]

Parameters
• -title window_title
(Optional) Specifies the name of the window to be created. “-title” may be omitted.
• -divider ratio
(Optional) Specifies the position of the divider inside the graph window. The divider is the
vertical line that separates the waveform names and the waveforms area. ratio must be
between 0 and 1. The default value is 0.91.
• -width width -height height
(Optional) Specifies the width and height of the new window.
• -x xPosition -y yPosition
(Optional) Specifies the x and y position of the new window.
Return Values
The name of the created window (by default, Wave:#, where # is a number).

1068 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave addworkspace

wave addworkspace
Creates a new workspace in the EZwave session window.
Usage
wave addworkspace [workspace_name] [-active]

Parameters
• workspace_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the workspace to be created. If workspace_name is not
specified, a default name, Workspace#, is used, where # is a number.
• -active
(Optional) Indicates that the workspace created should become the active workspace.
Examples
wave addworkspace ADC12

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1069

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave cdf

wave cdf
Generates and displays a CDF based on the input waveform, or on the saved histogram data in a
.wdb file generated from an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
Usage
wave cdf <-show …>
[-start <x_start> -end <x_end>]
[-normalize x|xx|y|yx|yxx]
[-sample] [-gauss] [-pdf] [-confidence]
[-bounds | [-lbound <value> | -ubound <value>]]
[-average] [-mean] [-nominal] [probability #(,#)*] [-sigma #(,#)*]
[-stat_legend] [-stat_legend_text <text_pattern>] [-none]
[-tail [left|right]]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -start <x_start>
Sets the start of the range for the input waveform (same as window() function). See Note
below.
• -end <x_end>
Sets the end of the range for the input waveform (same as window() function). See Note
below.
Note
If the CDF waveform has an associated source waveform (a “HISTO_SRC”
property), then -start and -end apply to the associated source waveform. Otherwise -
start and -end apply to the CDF waveform directly.

• -normalize <p>
Normalizes the CDF. <p> is “y” and/or “x” or “xx”.
“y”—normalize Y. Currently has no effect.
“x”—shift input values so that mean equals 0.
“xx”—shift input values so that mean equals 0 and stddev equals 1.
Valid values are: “x”, “xx”, “y”, “yx”, “yxx”.
• -sample
Samples the input waveform (keep the same number of points, but equally distributed along
the x-range of the input waveform).

1070 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave cdf

• -gauss
Plots the integral of the associated theoretical CDF, calculated as an integral of the Gaussian
distribution for the average and standard deviation.
• -pdf
Plots the integral of the PDF waveform (when available in the waveform database file
generated by an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
• -confidence
Plots the upper and lower confidence bounds, when provided by the Eldo simulation, using
“.MC dataflow=1” in the netlist. An example is shown in Figure C-4.
Figure C-4. Example CDF with Upper and Lower Confidence Bounds

• -bounds
Alias for “-lbound sim -ubound sim”.
• -average
Draws the average (single measure).
• -mean
Draws the mean (single measure).
• -nominal
Draws the nominal value (when available in the input file) (single measure).
• -probability <p>
Draws the probability intervals (twin measures). The plotted probabilities are based on
empirical values. <p> is a comma-separated list of probabilities, from 0 to 1, or from 0% to
100%.
Example of valid value: “0.6827,0.9545,0.98,99%”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1071

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave cdf

• -sigma <p>
Deprecated. Draws the N-sigma intervals (twin measures). <p> is a comma-separated list of
integers, from 1 to 7.
• -stat_legend
Draws the stat legend. If -stat_legend_text is not provided, EZwave uses the default
preferences set in the CDF Legend Options.
• -stat_legend_text
The text for the stat legend. This is a template (composed of text and @(…) tags). This has
no effect until -stat_legend is specified.
• -none
Does not add the default presentation. When no parameters (except those specifying the
waveform) are set for the wave cdf command, then the default settings are used (set from the
CDF options on the EZwave Display Preferences Dialog Box).
• -tail
Plots the left or right tail of a transformed CDF with the Y Axis in a log scale. Valid values
are “left” and “right”. Gaussian distribution, PDF, all measures, and statistical legends are
disabled when the tail is specified. This is not available through the graphical interface. An
example is shown in Figure C-5.
Note
The plots of the CDF or its tails are mutually exclusive: you have to use the
command three times with different arguments to plot the CDF, the right tail, and the
left tail.

Figure C-5. Example Plot for Left Tail

Return Values
None.

1072 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave cdf

Description
Generates and displays a CDF based on the input waveform, or on the saved CDF in a .wdb file
generated from an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.

Figure C-6. Example CDF Plot

Tip
See also Cumulative Distribution Functions in the Eldo User’s Manual and .CDF in the
Eldo Reference Manual.

Related Topics
Plotting CDFs

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1073

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave clean

wave clean
Takes a name and returns a new name with any special characters replaced by “_”. This is
useful, for example, when scripting inside EZwave and creating waves through the waveform
calculator, where the labels chosen to create the waves might cause the script to work
incorrectly.
Usage
wave clean name
Parameters
• name
(Required) Specifies the name to be processed.
Return Values
Returns a new name with any special characters replaced by “_”.

Examples
The input name test#inst.hier is returned as test_inst_hier.

1074 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave closewindow

wave closewindow
Closes a specified window, all windows, or all windows in the workspace.
Usage
wave closewindow [window_name] | [-all | -workspace]

Parameters
• window_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the graph window to close.
• -all | -workspace
(Optional) Specifies whether to close all currently open windows or to close all windows
currently open in the workspace.
Description
Closes a specified window, all windows, or all windows in the workspace. If no argument is
specified, this command closes the last window opened.

Examples
wave closewindow -workspace

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1075

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave colortheme

wave colortheme
Sets the graphical display or print color scheme.
Usage
wave colortheme [black | white | mono | doc] [-print]

Parameters
• black | white | mono | doc
(Optional) Defines the color theme to be set. If no argument is set it defaults to the current
color theme.
• -print
(Optional) If this option is specified the color theme is set for printing only, and does not
alter the graphical display.
Examples
wave colortheme doc -print
write wave filename.ps

1076 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave createbus

wave createbus
Creates a bus containing the specified waveforms, inside the calc database.
Usage
wave createbus <bus_name> <wf_name_1> ... <wf_name_n>

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• <bus_name>
(Required) Specifies a name for the bus.
• <wf_name_1> ... <wf_name_n>
(Required) Specifies the waveforms to add to the bus.
You can use the set of options described in “Selecting Waveforms in Tcl” on page 955 to
select waveforms to add to the bus.
Examples
This example adds the waveforms vip_1 to vip_8 to a bus called mybus:

wave createbus mybus vip_1 vip_2 vip_3 vip_4 vip_5 vip_6 vip_7 vip_8

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1077

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave cursortime

wave cursortime
Moves a cursor to the specified position.
Usage
wave cursortime [-window window_name] [-time time | X_value ]
[cursor_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to move a cursor. If this is not specified, a cursor
in the active window is moved.
• -time time
(Optional) Specifies the time value to which the cursor should be moved.
• X_value
Specifies the value along the x-axis to which the cursor should be moved.
Note
If neither a time nor an X_value is specified, the cursor’s location is returned.

• cursor_name
(Optional) Specifies the cursor to be moved. If cursor_name is not specified, the command
applies to the active cursor in the specified window.
Examples
To move cursor C2 in the active window to an X value of 100 ns:

wave cursortime 100n C2

1078 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave deletecursor

wave deletecursor
Deletes the specified cursor.
Usage
wave deletecursor [-window window_name] [cursor_name | cursor_id]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window from which to delete the cursor. If this is not specified, a
cursor in the active window is deleted.
• cursor_name | cursor_id
(Optional) Specifies the cursor to be deleted. cursor_name is the full name of the cursor, for
example, C2. cursor_id is the cursor’s number, for example, 2. If no cursor_name or
cursor_id is specified, the active cursor is deleted.
Examples
To delete cursor C2 in the active window:

wave deletecursor C2

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1079

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave difference

wave difference
Generates and displays a waveform corresponding to the difference between the first and
second waveforms specified.
Usage
wave difference waveform_name1 waveform_name2 [-name out_waveform_name]
[-spice]

Parameters
• waveform_name1
(Required) Specifies the first input waveform. You can use the extended options detailed in
Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform. You can use more than one option in
the same command.
• waveform_name2
(Required) Specifies the second input waveform. You can use the extended options detailed
in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform. You can use more than one option in
the same command.
• -name out_waveform_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the output waveform.
• -spice
(Optional) Specifies that compatibility with Spice is to be ensured for the naming of the
output waveform, generating W(<difference>).
Return Values
None.

Error Messages:
Table C-8. wave difference Error Messages
Error Message Description
No object matching At least one of the input waveforms is not
found.
Difference requires 2 objects Only one input waveform has been
specified. Two are required.
Too many objects for At least one of the regular expressions used
difference to describe the input waveform names has
identified more than one waveform.

Examples
wave difference Q1 Q2

1080 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave displayed

wave displayed
Retrieves a list of the displayed waveforms.
Usage
wave displayed [-window window_name | -allwindows | -activewindow]
[-color]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies a window to apply the command to. Only waveforms in the specified
window are listed.
• -allwindows
(Optional) Specifies that displayed waveforms in all windows should be listed.
• -activewindow
(Optional) Specifies that only the displayed waveform in the currently active window
should be listed.
• -color
(Optional) If this option is specified, RGB color information is included with each displayed
waveform listed.
Return Values
A Tcl list containing the displayed waveform names and color (if specified).

Examples
wave displayed
# returns:
# <test/tran>v(in)<test/tran>v(out) <test/tran>v(vdd)

wave displayed -color

# returns:
# {<test/tran>v(in) 0,255,0} {<test/tran>v(out) 255,255,0}
# {<test/tran>v(vdd) 0,128,255}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1081

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave exists

wave exists
Indicates whether the specified waveform exists.
Usage
wave exists waveform_name

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies name of the waveform of interest. You can specify multiple
waveforms and use wildcards. You can also use the extended options detailed in Selecting
Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform(s). You can use more than one option in the same
command.
Note
This command will apply to the last loaded dataset if the optional dataset name is not
specified within the waveform_name. See “Specifying Waveforms in Tcl” on
page 953.

Return Values
True or False indicating whether or not at least one waveform corresponding to the search string
is found.

Description
Indicates whether the specified waveform exists. It is used primarily for preventing errors by
enabling scripts to suggest an alternative action if a waveform does not exist in the dataset.

1082 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave exists

Examples
## Check if a waveform exists in the database
set wave1 ":adc12test_mixed_eldo_ms:yadc12:x1:clk"
set wave2 ":a:waveform:that:does:not:exist"

if {[wave exists $wave1]} {

puts "waveform '$wave1' exists"
} else {
puts "waveform '$wave1' does not exist"
}

if {[wave exists $wave2]} {

puts "waveform '$wave2' exists"
} else {
puts "waveform '$wave2' does not exist"
}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1083

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave ezwave_title

wave ezwave_title
Adds a custom title to the top of the EZwave main display.
Usage
wave ezwave_title new-title
Parameters
• new-title
(Required) Specifies the new title to be displayed.
Return Values
If the parameter new-title is set to “My Custom Title”, the displayed name will be “My Custom
Title (EZwave #Version# )”.

Examples
wave ezwave_title "My Custom Title"

1084 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave gettype

wave gettype
Returns the type of the waveform.
Usage
wave gettype waveform_name

Parameters
• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies name of the waveform of interest. You can use the extended options
detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select the waveform. You can use more than one
option in the same command.
Return Values
Returns one of the following:

• analog
• voltage
• current
• digital
• real
• complex
• analog_bus
• digital_bus
• compound
• unknown

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1085

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave histogram

wave histogram
Generates and displays a histogram based on the input waveform, or on the saved histogram
data generated from an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.
Usage
wave histogram <-show …> [-bins scott|sqrt|sturge|#] [-binscentered]
[-histosim] [-normalize <norm>] [-sample] [-pdf] [-cdf] [-gauss]
[-average] [-mean] [-nominal] [probability #(,#)*] [sigma #(,#)*]]
[-bounds | [-lbound|-ubound rule_value]] [-stat_legend]
[-stat_legend_text <text>] [-start x start] [-end x end]] [-median]
[-sigbin <gather_sigma>] [-empirical]

Parameters
Note
This command also has extended options, which are described in “Selecting Waveforms in
Tcl” on page 955.

• -average
Draws the average (single measure).
• -bins
Defines the number of bins. Allowed values are:
scott—apply Scott’s rule (see the Eldo User’s Manual for details).
sturge—apply Sturge’s rule (see the Eldo User’s Manual for details).
sqrt—the number of bins in the square root of the size of the input waveform.
Integer value.
• -binscentered
Extreme bins are centered on the ymin/ymax values of the input waveform.
• -bounds
Alias for “-lbound sim -ubound sim”.
• -cdf
Plots the CDF (cumulative density function) of the input waveform.
• -gauss
Plots the Gaussian distribution.
• -histosim
Uses the histogram stored in the waveform database file (when available in the file), instead
of computing a new one.

1086 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave histogram

• -lbound <p>
Specifies the lower bound position. <p> is composed of a rule and an optional figure,
separated by an underscore. Valid rules are: “sim”, “simOrUser”, “user”, “no”
Examples of valid parameters: “sim”, “simoruser_-3”, “user_3.14”, “no”.
See the description of Lower Bound/Upper Bound in the Histogram Measures Options topic
for more information.
• -mean
Draws the mean (single measure).
• -median
Draws the median value.
• -nominal
Draws the nominal value (when available in the input file) (single measure).
• -normalize <p>
Normalizes the histogram. <p> is “y” and/or “x” or “xx”.
“y”—normalize Y.
“x”—shift input values so that mean equals 0.
“xx”—shift input values so that mean equals 0 and stdev equals 1.
Valid values are: “x”, “xx”, “y”, “yx”, “yxx”.
• -pdf
Plots the PDF waveform (when available in the waveform database file generated by an
Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.stdev
• -sample
Samples the input waveform (keep the same number of points, but equally distributed along
the x-range of the input waveform).
• -sigbin <gather_sigma>
Truncates the histogram to a certain number of sigmas. Specify 0 for no gathering. Specify a
value above 0 to gather all the samples above mean + gather_sigma × sigma in the Above
bin, and all the samples below “mean - gather_sigma × sigma in the Below bin. The default
is 0.
• -probability <p>
Draws the probability intervals (twin measures). The plotted probabilities are based on
empirical values. <p> is a comma-separated list of probabilities, from 0 to 1, or from 0% to
100%.
Example of valid value: “0.6827,0.9545,0.98,99%”.
Figure C-7 shows an example histogram plot with probability annotations.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1087

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave histogram

Figure C-7. Example Plot showing wave histogram Probabilities

• -sigma <p>
Deprecated. Draws the N-sigma intervals (twin measures). The plotted nSigmas are based
on the mean and standard deviation of the theoretical Gaussian distribution. <p> is a
comma-separated list of integers, from 1 to 7.
• -empirical
Specifies that the N-Sigma plot is based on the CDF. When not specified, the N-Sigma plot
is based on the mean and standard deviation of the theoretical Gaussian distribution.
• -start <x_start>
Sets the start of the range for the input waveform (same as window() function).
• -end <x_end>
Sets the end of the range for the input waveform (same as window() function).
• -stat_legend
Draws the stat legend. If -stat_legend_text is not provided, EZwave uses the default
preferences set in the Histogram Legend Options.
• -stat_legend_text
The text for the stat legend. This is a template (composed of text and @(…) tags). This has
no effect until -stat_legend is specified.
• -ubound <p>
Upper bound position. See -lbound for <p> valid values.

1088 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave histogram

See the description of Lower Bound/Upper Bound in the Histogram Measures Options topic
for more information.
• -window
Specifies the destination window.
• -windowTitle
Specifies the destination window.
Return Values
None.

Description
Generates and displays a histogram based on the input waveform, or on the saved histogram
data in a .wdb file generated from an Eldo Monte Carlo simulation.

Note
See also Histograms in the Eldo User’s Manual and .MC in the Eldo Reference Manual.

Related Topics
Plotting Histograms

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1089

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave jitter

wave jitter
Performs the calculation and plot of the specified jitter and its measurements.
Usage
wave jitter
{-Name {ABSOLUTE | ABSOLUTE_INTEG | PERIOD | PERIOD_INTEG | H_PERIOD |
FREQUENCY | C2C | C2C_INTEG | LT | LT_INTEG | TIE |
CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL}
{-SRC {src_wf_access_options}}
[-REF {ref_wf_access_options | ref_value}]
[-OUT_Name {output_wf_name}]
[-BEGin {t_start_value}]
[-END {t_stop_value}]
[-F0 {f0}]
[-Sampling_Points_NB {sampling_points_number}]
[-RMS_Jitter {rms_jitter_value}]
[-Gaussian_Samples_NB {<seq_start> <seq_end> <seq_step>}]
[-Confidence_Level {confidence_level_value}]
[-Edge {RISING | FALLING | EITHER}]
[-NB_Cycles {nb_cycles_value}]
[-DUTY_Cycle {duty_cycle_value}]
[-Single_Threshold {TRUE | FALSE}]
[-Single_Threshold_Ref {TRUE | FALSE}]
[-Topline {topline_value}]
[-Baseline {baseline_value}]
[-Threshold {threshold_value}]
[-Topline_Ref {topline_ref_value}]
[-Baseline_Ref {baseline_ref_value}]
[-Threshold_ref {threshold_ref_value}]
[-NEW_Window]
[-WINDOW {window_name}]
[-SCale {LINEAR | LOG10 | LOG2}]
[-MIN] [-MAX] [-MEAN] [-STDdev] [-PEAKtopeak] [-HISTOgram]

1090 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave jitter

Parameters
• -Name {ABSOLUTE | ABSOLUTE_INTEG | PERIOD | PERIOD_INTEG | H_PERIOD |
FREQUENCY | C2C | C2C_INTEG | LT | LT_INTEG | TIE |
CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL}
(Required) Specifies the short name of the required jitter type for calculation:
ABSOLUTE—Absolute Jitter (Time-Domain)
ABSOLUTE_INTEG—Absolute Jitter (Phase-Noise)
PERIOD—Period Jitter (Time-Domain)
PERIOD_INTEG—Period Jitter (Phase-Noise)
H_PERIOD—Half-Period Jitter (Time Domain)
FREQUENCY—Frequency Jitter (Time Domain)
C2C—Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Time-Domain)
C2C_INTEG—Cycle-to-Cycle Jitter (Phase-Noise)
LT—Long-Term Jitter (Time-Domain)
LT_INTEG—Long-Term Jitter (Phase-Noise)
TIE—Time Interval Error (TIE)
CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL—Jitter Confidence Interval
• -SRC {src_wf_access_options}
(Required) Specifies the source waveform(s) for which jitter is calculated.
src_wf_access_options
Source waveform access options (see add wave command).
• -REF {ref_wf_access_options | ref_value}
(Required for TIE jitter) Specifies a waveform to use as a reference waveform, with respect
to which jitter is calculated.
ref_wf_access_options
Reference waveform access options (see add wave command).
ref_value
Reference period or frequency value.
• -OUT_Name {output_wf_name}
(Optional) Jitter output waveform name. Default value: <jitter_type>_jitter.
• -BEGin {t_start_value}
(Optional) Specifies a start time for jitter calculation. If not used, the jitter calculation starts
at the beginning of the source waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1091

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave jitter

• -END {t_stop_value}
(Optional) Specifies a stop time for jitter calculation. If not used, the jitter calculation stops
at the end of the source waveform.
• -F0 {f0}
(Required for ABSOLUTE, PERIOD, H_PERIOD, FREQUENCY, and LT jitters, not used
for others) Specifies the fundamental or reference frequency.
• -Sampling_Points_NB {sampling_points_number}
(Optional) Defines if sampling will be applied to the source waveform during jitter
calculation and specifies the number of sampling points. Default is Automatic, where
sampling is applied with 100 points.
• -RMS_Jitter {rms_jitter_value}
(Required for CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL, not used for others) Specifies the RMS jitter
value, as calculated using the standard deviation.
• -Gaussian_Samples_NB {<seq_start> <seq_end> <seq_step>}
(Required for CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL, not used for others) Specifies the independent
Gaussian samples number sequence Start, End, and Step values.
• -Confidence_Level {confidence_level_value}
(Required for CONFIDENCE_INTERVAL, not used for others) Specifies the jitter
confidence level. Default is 99%.
• -Edge {RISING | FALLING | EITHER}
(Optional) Edge trigger applied to the waveforms, which participate in the jitter calculation.
The default is EITHER, where either the Rising or Falling Edge is used, depending on
which comes first in the specified time window.
• -NB_Cycles {nb_cycles_value}
(Optional) Number of waveform oscillation cycles which participate in the jitter calculation.
Used only for PERIOD, FREQUENCY, C2C, and LT jitters. Ignored for all others. If not
specified, the default number of cycles is used for PERIOD, FREQUENCY, and C2C jitters
and the automatically calculated value is used for LT jitter.
• -DUTY_Cycle {duty_cycle_value}
(Optional) Specifies the duty cycle applied to waveforms in H_PERIOD jitter calculations,
to calculate the amount of time the signal is active per period. Ignored for other jitters. If not
specified, the duty cycle value is calculated automatically for each waveform.
duty_cycle_value can be given as a percentage, using the percent character (for example,
50%).
• -Single_Threshold {TRUE | FALSE}
(Optional) If TRUE, the single threshold will be used for the source waveform period
calculation (topline/baseline values are ignored). If FALSE, topline/baseline will be used.
Default is FALSE.

1092 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave jitter

• -Single_Threshold_Ref {TRUE | FALSE}

(Optional) Only used for TIE jitter. If TRUE, the single threshold_ref will be used for the
reference waveform period calculation (topline_ref/baseline_ref values are ignored). If
False, topline_ref/baseline_ref will be used. Default is FALSE.
• -Topline {topline_value}
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the source signal. Default is
Automatic.
• -Baseline {baseline_value}
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the source signal. Default is
Automatic.
• -Threshold {threshold_value}
(Optional) Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the source signal. Default is
Automatic.
• -Topline_Ref {topline_ref_value}
(Optional) Only used for TIE jitter. Specifies the y value that sets the high threshold of the
reference signal. Default is Automatic.
• -Baseline_Ref {baseline_ref_value}
(Optional) Only used for TIE jitter. Specifies the y value that sets the low threshold of the
reference signal. Default is Automatic.
• -Threshold_ref {threshold_ref_value}
(Optional) Only used for TIE Jitter. Specifies the y value that sets a single threshold for the
reference signal. Default is Automatic.
• -NEW_Window
(Optional) Specifies that the jitter result waveform is plotted in a new window. Absent by
default.
• -WINDOW {window_name}
(Optional) Specifies a name of the graph window in which to plot the resulting jitter
waveform. window_name is required. Absent by default.
• -SCale {LINEAR | LOG10 | LOG2}
(Optional) Specifies the X and Y axes scales (one scale for both axes) for the graph window
where the jitter will be plotted. Default value is LOG10 for LT jitter (if the LT jitter
resulting waveform is compatible with log scale), LINEAR for other jitter types.
• -MIN
(Optional) Applies min measurement to the jitter result waveform. The appropriate marker
will be plotted over the waveform. Absent by default.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1093

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave jitter

• -MAX
(Optional) Applies max measurement to the jitter result waveform. The appropriate marker
will be plotted over the waveform. Absent by default.
• -MEAN
(Optional) Applies mean measurement to the jitter result waveform. The appropriate marker
will be plotted over the waveform. Absent by default.
• -STDdev
(Optional) Applies stddev measurement to the jitter result waveform. The appropriate
marker will be plotted over the waveform. Absent by default.
• -PEAKtopeak
(Optional) Applies peak-to-peak measurement to the jitter result waveform. The appropriate
marker will be plotted over the waveform. Absent by default.
• -HISTOgram
(Optional) Apply histogram measurement to the jitter result waveform. The new “Monte
Carlo” histogram will be applied. Absent by default.
Examples
This example calculates and plots the period jitter for the specified source and reference
waveforms and time interval between 6e-6 sec and 7e-6 sec. The jitter result waveform name is
“period_jitter_res”. MIN, MAX and MEAN measurements are applied to the resulting jitter
waveform.

wave jitter -name period -src <pll_by5_noi/NOISETRAN>V(VCOCLK) -ref 1e-12

-out_name period_jitter_res -begin 6e-6 -end 7e-6 -edge either -min -max
-mean

1094 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave launchfolder

wave launchfolder
Identifies the path to the directory that EZwave was launched from.
Usage
wave launchfolder

Parameters
• None.

Return Values
The path to the directory that EZwave was launched from.

Examples
wave launchfolder

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1095

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave listworkspace

wave listworkspace
Returns a list of workspaces.
Usage
wave listworkspace

Parameters
• None

Examples
wave listworkspace

1096 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave loadbindings

wave loadbindings
Loads an EZwave keyboard shortcuts schema *.ezkey file.
Usage
wave loadbindings file.ezkey
Parameters
• file.ezkey
(Required) Specifies the EZwave keyboard shortcuts schema *.ezkey file to be loaded.
Examples
wave loadbindings file.ezkey

Related Topics
Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1097

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave lockcursor

wave lockcursor
Specifies whether the distance between cursors are fixed or whether they can move
independently of each other.
Usage
wave lockcursor [ON | OFF]

Parameters
• ON
(Optional) Specifies that the distance between cursors are fixed. Dragging one cursor will
move the other cursors, keeping the distance between them the same.
• OFF
(Optional) Specifies that cursors are able to move independently of each other. Dragging
one cursor does not affect the other cursors.
Description
This command specifies whether the distance between cursors are fixed or whether they can
move independently of each other. Omit the argument to display the current cursor lock setting.

Examples
wave lockcursor ON

wave lockcursor OFF

1098 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave names

wave names
Determines whether waveform names within the graphical interface show the dataset names and
(or) the complete hierarchical paths.
Usage
wave names [-showdataset {on | off}] [-showhierarchy {on | off}]

Parameters
• -showdataset {on | off}
(Optional) Determines whether the dataset names are shown.
• -showhierarchy {on | off}
(Optional) Determines whether the complete hierarchical paths.
Examples
• Show the dataset names within the waveform names.
wave names -showdataset on

• Show the complete hierarchical paths within the waveform names and not the dataset
names.
wave names -showdataset off -showhierarchy on

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1099

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave plotcompress

wave plotcompress
Plots output power against input power in dBm and returns n-dB compression point. Only
supports compound waveforms.
Usage
wave plotcompress
-srcp {srcp_wf_access_options}
[-srcn {srcn_wf_access_options | 0.0}]
[-sweep_param<sweep_param_name>]
[-fund <fund_value>]
[-ndb <ndb_value>]
[-epin <epin_value>]
[-rload <rload_value>]
[-out_name <output_wf_name>]

Arguments
• srcp
(Required) Specifies a compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input power
sweep.
• srcn
(Optional) Specifies a second compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input
power sweep.
• sweep_param
(Optional) Specifies the sweep parameter. If not specified, the first sweep parameter found
is used.
• fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental or harmonic frequency (default nth(indep(src_p), 2)).
• ndb
(Optional) Specifies the number of dB by which the actual curve falls below an ideal linear
curve. Use ndb = 1 to extract the 1-db compression point (1 by default).
• epin
(Optional) Specifies the extrapolation point. Default is the first point in the input power
sweep.
• rload
(Optional) Specifies the load resistance (50 by default).
• out_name
(Optional) Specifies the output waveform name.
Return Values
Returns the ndb compression point.

1100 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave plotcompress

Returns a waveform of output power against input power (in dBm).

Related Topics
PlotCompress
wave plotpacipn

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1101

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave plotpacipn

wave plotpacipn
Takes a PAC spectrum signal pair at the desired and unwanted harmonics, within an input
power sweep, plots the pair of IPn curves and returns the intercept point. Only supports
compound waveforms.
Usage
wave plotpacipn
-srcp {srcp_wf_access_options}
-desired_harm_p<desired_harm_p_value>
-unwanted_harm_p <unwanted_harm_p_value>
[-srcn {srcn_wf_access_options}]
[-desired_harm_n <desired_harm_n_value>]
[-unwanted_harm_n <unwanted_harm_n_value>]
[-sweep_param <sweep_param_name>]
[-norder <norder_value>]
[-rload <rload_value>]
[-out_name <output_wf_name>]

Arguments
• srcp
(Required) Specifies a compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input power
sweep.
• desired_harm_p
(Required) Specifies the desired harmonic.
• unwanted_harm_p
(Required) Specifies the unwanted harmonic.
• srcn
(Optional) Specifies a second compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input
power sweep.
• desired_harm_n
(Optional) Specifies the desired harmonic, or 0.0 (default).
• unwanted_harm_n
(Optional) Specifies the unwanted harmonic, or 0.0 (default).
• sweep_param
(Optional) Specifies the sweep parameter. If not specified, the first sweep parameter found
is used.
• norder
(Optional) Specifies the order of the intercept point (3 by default).
• rload
(Optional) Specifies the load resistance (50 by default).

1102 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave plotpacipn

• out_name
(Optional) Specifies the output waveform name.
Return Values
Returns the norder intercept point.

Returns a waveform showing the pair of IPn curves.

Related Topics
PlotPacIPn
wave plotcompress

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1103

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave refresh

wave refresh
Redraws the contents of the specified window.
Usage
wave refresh [-window window_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to redraw waveforms. If this is not specified,
waveforms in the active window are redrawn.
Examples
wave refresh

1104 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave rowfit

wave rowfit
Optimizes the row size in the specified window.
Usage
wave rowfit [-window window_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to redraw waveforms. If this is not specified, rows
are resized in the active window.
Examples
wave rowfit

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1105

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave runindexlist

wave runindexlist
Displays a list of run indices for the elements of the compound waveform specified. It is useful
for iterating through each element individually.
Usage
wave runindexlist waveform_name

Parameters
• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the compound waveform for which the run index list is to
be retrieved. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to
select the waveform. You can use more than one option in the same command.
Return Values
Returns a list of run indices for the elements of the compound waveform specified.

Error Messages:
Table C-9. wave runindexlist Error Messages
Error Message Description
No compound waveform The input waveform is not compound or the
found regular expression used has not found any
compound waveforms.
Too many waveforms found The regular expression used to describe the
input waveform name has identified more
than one compound waveform.

Examples
wave runindexlist :top:sigout

1106 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave runparameters

wave runparameters
Displays a list of run parameters for the compound waveform specified. It is useful for iterating
through each element individually.
Usage
wave runparameters waveform_name

Parameters
• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the waveform for which the run parameter list is to be
retrieved. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select
the waveform. You can use more than one option in the same command.
Return Values
Returns a list of run parameters for the compound waveform specified.

Error Messages:
Table C-10. wave runparameters Error Messages
Error Message Description
No compound waveform The input waveform is not compound or the
found regular expression used has not found any
compound waveforms.
Too many waveforms found The regular expression used to describe the
input waveform name has identified more
than one compound waveform.

Examples
wave runparameters :top:sigout

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1107

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave runparametervalue

wave runparametervalue
Displays the value of a specified run parameter associated with the run_index and compound
waveform specified.
Usage
wave runparametervalue -param param_name -run run_index waveform_name

Parameters
• -param param_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the run parameter for which the value is to be retrieved.
• -run run_index
(Required) Specifies the value of the run index for which the run parameter value is to be
retrieved.
• waveform_name
(Required) Specifies the name of the waveform for which the run parameter value is to be
retrieved. You can use the extended options detailed in Selecting Waveforms in Tcl to select
the waveform. You can use more than one option in the same command.
Return Values
Returns the value of the specified run parameter associated with the run index and compound
waveform specified.

Error Messages:
Table C-11. wave runparametervalue Error Messages
Error Message Description
No compound waveform The input waveform is not compound or the
found regular expression used has not found any
compound waveforms.
Too many waveforms found The regular expression used to describe the
input waveform name has identified more
than one compound waveform.
The object ‘<name>’ is not a The run index does not identify an element
compound waveform element of the compound waveform.
Parameter ‘<param_name>’ The parameter specified has not been found
is not found in compound in the specified element of the compound
waveform element ‘<name>’ waveform.

Examples
wave runparametervalue -param CORNER -run 2 :top:sigout

1108 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave show

wave show
Defines the default net representation that is used when the add wave command is issued
without the -show option. If the -show option is specified with the add wave command (add
wave -show representation), it temporarily overrides the wave show defaults during the
execution of the add wave command and then returns to the wave show defaults.
Usage
wave show representation [|representation2| … |representationN]

Parameters
• representation [ |representation2 | ...| representationN]
(Optional) Specifies how signals are to be represented as a waveform. A representation is a
complete representation of a net and is composed of an analysis, a discipline, and a physic.
A dot ( . ) separates the analysis portion from the discipline and physic portion. There is no
separator between the discipline and the physic, as follows:
analysis.disciplinephysic
If more than one representation is specified, use a pipe ( | ) to separate them:
analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic
Refer to Appendix D for the supported representations.
Description
The defined representation defaults remains in effect until another wave show command is
issued or until the end of the script.

If you do not define the waveform representation with this command, the default is defined as
follows:

tran.v|ac.vdb|ac.vp

Examples
wave show ac.vdb
# The analysis is AC, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB.

wave show ffst.vdb.h(1)

# The analysis is FFST, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB for
# the primary_ physic, and H(1) for the secondary_physic.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1109

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave showgridlines

wave showgridlines
Allows gridlines to be set on or off in all new windows.
Usage
wave showgridlines {on | off}

Parameters
• {on | off}
(Required) Specifies whether gridlines should be displayed in all new windows.
Description
Allows gridlines to be set on or off in all new windows. Windows already created will not be
modified by this command.

Examples
wave showgridlines on

1110 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave showzerolevels

wave showzerolevels
Activates the zero-levels in the rows where the waveform is displayed.
Usage
wave showzerolevels {on | off | horizontal | vertical}

Parameters
• {on | off | horizontal | vertical}
(Required)
o on - Activates the display of level lines at X=0 and Y=0.
o off - Deactivates the display of all zero level lines.
o horizontal - Activates the display of a level line at Y=0.
o vertical - Activates the display of a level line at X=0.
Description
Activates the zero-levels in the rows where the waveform is displayed. On/Off enables or
disables both horizontal and vertical levels. Horizontal/Vertical enables only the appropriate
horizontal or vertical levels. Windows already created will not be modified by this command.

Examples
wave showzerolevels horizontal

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1111

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave tandem mode

wave tandem mode

Activates or deactivates Tandem Mode.
Usage
wave tandem mode {on | off}

Parameters
• {on | off}
(Required) Specifies whether Tandem Mode is turned on or off.
Description
Tandem model enables you to plot waveforms with the same name from different databases.
Refer to “Plotting Waveforms with the Same Name using Tandem Mode” on page 124.

Examples
wave tandem mode on

1112 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave tile

wave tile
Arranges multiple windows in the specified tiling style.
Usage
wave tile [-cascade | -horizontal | -vertical | -grid]

Parameters
• -cascade
(Optional) Arranges the windows in a “cascading” fashion. Windows are overlapped while
keeping an area of each window exposed so you can click on an individual window to bring
it to the front.
• -horizontal
(Optional) Arranges the windows in rows. Windows are displayed “above” and “below”
each other.
• -vertical
(Optional) Arranges the windows in columns. Windows are displayed side by side.
• -grid
(Optional) Arranges the windows in a grid fashion. Windows are displayed side by side in
columns as well as “above” and “below” each other in rows.
Examples
wave tile -cascade

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1113

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave windowlist

wave windowlist
Returns a list of all open graph windows.
Usage
wave windowlist

Parameters
• None

Examples
# Retrieves the x-axis scale type for each open window

foreach {i} [wave windowlist] {

puts [wave xaxis]
}

1114 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave xaxis

wave xaxis
Sets the x-axis unit title, and the x-axis scale to one of: linear, base 2 log, or base 10 log.
Usage
wave xaxis [-title title] [-scale {linear | log2 | log10}]
[-window window_name]

Parameters
• - title title
(Optional) Specifies the text to be displayed in place of the x-axis unit title.
• -scale { linear | log2 | log10 }
(Optional) Specifies the type of scale to use for the x-axis. Choose from linear, log2, or
log10. If this option is not specified, this command returns the current x-axis scale. This
option corresponds to the X Axis Properties Dialog Box.
• -window window_name
(Optional) If specified, this option applies the command to the specified window.
Otherwise, the command applies to the active window.
Return Values
None, if “-title” or “-scale” argument is specified.

If neither the “-title” or “-scale” argument is specified, this command returns the current x-axis
scale.

Examples
wave xaxis -title "User Time"

wave axis -scale log10 -window Wave:2

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1115

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave yaxis

wave yaxis
Used to alter y-axis settings such as the y-axis name, alignment, unit title, scale, and alignment
for the specified row.
Usage
wave yaxis -row rowId [-axis axis_name] [-title title]
[-scale {linear | log2 | log10}] [-window window_name]
[-align {y1-refLevel,..}] [-spacing {y1-spacing,..}]

Parameters
• -row rowId
(Required) Specifies the row that the command is to be applied to. The rowId of the top row
is 1, increasing by 1 each row moving downwards.
Note
rowId identifiers are dynamic, with the top row always taking the value of 1.

• -axis axis_name
(Optional) Specifies the name of the y-axis to which the command is to be applied. By
default the axis is named “Y1”.
• - title title
(Optional) Specifies the text to be displayed in place of the y-axis unit title.
• -scale { linear | log2 | log10 }
(Optional) Specifies the type of scale for the y-axis. Choose from linear, log base 2, or log
base 10. If no value is specified, the current y-axis scale is returned. Specifying this option is
equivalent to setting the Axis Scale field on the Axis Properties Dialog Box.
• -window window_name
(Optional) If specified, the changes are applied to the specified window. Otherwise, the
command applies to the active window.
• -align {y1-refLevel,.. }
(Optional) Specifies how the axes are aligned. The -axis argument is the reference axis.
Values are specified in a comma-separated list of doubles starting with the first, Y1, y-axis.
For example:
-align {0.0,10}
• -spacing {y1-spacing,.. }
(Optional) Specifies the spacing for the axes. The -axis argument is the reference axis.
Values are specified in a comma-separated list of positive doubles starting with the first, Y1,
y-axis. For example:
-spacing {10.0,20.0}

1116 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave yaxis

Description
Used to alter y-axis settings such as the y-axis name, unit title and the scale, for the specified
row. If -title, -scale, -align, or -spacing are not specified, this command returns the current y-
axis scale.

Examples
This example applies some changes to the top row (rowId=1). Sets the title of the y-axis unit
title to “User Time” and specifies that the y-axis uses a logarithmic scale with base 2:

wave yaxis -row 1 -title "User Time" -scale log2

This example sets the scale of the axis in the first row of window Wave:2 to log2:

wave yaxis -scale log10 -window "Wave:2"

When a row contains multiple y-axes you can use the -axis argument to specify which axis to
apply the scale to. Without the -axis argument, the command will always apply the scale to the
first axis, Y1. The following command sets the scale of the axis Y1, located in the second row,
to log10:

wave yaxis -row 2 -axis Y1 -scale log10

In this example alignment and spacing are set for the axes:

wave yaxis -row 1 -axis y2 -align {0.0, 5.0} -spacing {10.0, 20.0}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1117

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave zoomfull

wave zoomfull
Zooms out to show the entire x-axis of the specified graph window.
Usage
wave zoomfull [-window window_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window to apply the zoom to. If this is not specified, the zoom
applies to the active window.
Examples
wave zoomfull -window "Wave:2"

1118 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave zoomin

wave zoomin
Zooms in on the x-axis specified graph window, by the specified factor.
Usage
wave zoomin [-window window_name] [factor]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window to apply the zoom to. If this is not specified, the zoom
applies to the active window.
• factor
(Optional) Specifies the zoom factor to apply. If this is not specified, the default value of 2.0
is used.
Examples
• Zoom x-axis of the active window in by a factor of 2.0:
wave zoomin

• Zoom x-axis of the window “Wave:2” in by a factor of 2.0:

wave zoomin -window "Wave:2"

• Zoom x-axis of the active window in by a factor of 4.0:

wave zoomin 4.0

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1119

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave zoomlast

wave zoomlast
Undoes the most recent zoom operation in the specified window.
Usage
wave zoomlast [-window window_name]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to undo the zoom. If this is not specified, the undo
applies to the active window.
Examples
# Undo the previous zoom operation in the window "Wave:2":
wave zoomlast -window "Wave:2"

1120 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wave zoomout

wave zoomout
Zooms out on the x-axis of the specified graph window, by the specified factor.
Usage
wave zoomout [-window window_name] [factor]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window to apply the zoom to. If this is not specified, the zoom
applies to the active window.
• factor
(Optional) Specifies the zoom factor to apply. If this is not specified, the default value of 2.0
is used.
Note
Zooming over the y-axis is done through an option in the add wave command.

Examples
• Zoom x-axis of the active window out by a factor of 2.0:
wave zoomout

• Zoom x-axis of the window “Wave:2” out by a factor of 2.0:

wave zoomout -window "Wave:2"

• Zoom x-axis of the active window out by a factor of 4.0:

wave zoomout 4.0

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1121

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wave zoomrange

wave zoomrange
Zooms in on the x-axis to a range bounded by the specified start and/or end points.
Usage
wave zoomrange [-window window_name] [start] [end]

Parameters
• -window window_name
(Optional) Specifies the window in which to apply the zoom. If this is not specified, the
zoom applies to the active window.
• start
(Optional) Specifies the start point for the range to zoom to.
• end
(Optional) Specifies the end point for the range to zoom to.
Note
If only one of start and end is specified, start is assumed to be 0 and the specified
number is assumed to be the endpoint. If neither start nor end is specified, the start-
and endpoints for the current zoom level are returned.

Examples
Zoom along the x-axis in the current window to a start time of 20 ns and an end time of 100 ns:

wave zoomrange 20n 100n

1122 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
wfc

wfc
Invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the expression entered.
Usage
wfc expression

wfc -save {name=<expression>}

Parameters
• expression
(Required) An expression supported by the EZwave waveform calculator, where expression
can be name=<subExpression>.
• -save {name=<expression>}
(Optional) Saves the variable if it is named.
When expression starts with a name, then a variable with this name is instantiated in the
Waveform Calculator, and the name is returned. For waveforms, a default name is proposed
(e.g. wf0).
Return Values
The result value of the expression. It can be one of the following:

• a waveform object handle

• a single number
• a list of data represented as a Tcl list of strings for a one-dimensional array
• a list of data pairs represented as a Tcl list of string pairs grouped by parentheses for a
two-dimensional array
Description
Invokes the EZwave Waveform Calculator to calculate the expression entered.

If expression is enclosed in double quotes (" "), value substitution is enabled and all strings
beginning with a dollar sign ($) are replaced by the variable they name. If an expression is
enclosed in braces ({ }), value substitution is disabled and the expression is evaluated as
presented.

This command differs from evalExpression in the type of output it returns.

Examples
set wf_diff [wfc {wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_load") -
wf("<tutorial/Time-Domain_Results>v_middle")}]
add wave $wf_diff

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1123

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
wfc

Related Topics
save

1124 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
write jpeg

write jpeg
Exports the contents of a window to a specified JPEG image file.
Usage
write jpeg file_name [-window window_name]
[-header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user
machine"]
[-blackbackground | -whitebackground | -monochrome | -documentation
|-colorasdisplayed]
[-visiblewindows]
[-resolution {screen | printerlow | printerhigh}]

Parameters
• file_name
(Required) Specifies the file (with optional full path) to which the window contents are to be
saved. If no path is specified, it defaults to the location from which EZwave was launched.
• -window window_name
(Optional) If this option is specified, the contents of the specified window is exported.
Otherwise, the contents of the active window is exported.
• -header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user machine"
(Optional) If this option is specified, include one or more of the keywords to add header text
to the output. The first three keywords add the database title, netlist title, and window title to
the output. You can also add the time, date, user name, and machine name, optionally
specifying fromSimulator if you want these values to be the same as the simulator, rather
than current values.
• -blackbackground | -whitebackground | -monochrome | -documentation | -colorasdisplayed
(Optional) These options specify the color scheme for the exported image.
• -visiblewindows
(Optional) Specifies that the image to be created contains all windows as displayed in the
EZwave viewer. This argument is particularly useful when exporting tiled windows.
• -resolution { screen | printerlow | printerhigh }
(Optional) This option specifies the resolution of the exported image file. Selecting screen
sets the output resolution to the screen resolution. printerlow and printerhigh sets the
output resolution to approximately 4x and 16x the screen resolution, respectively.
Examples
write jpeg /user/adc12.jpg

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1125

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
write png

write png
Exports the contents of a window to a specified PNG image file.
Usage
write png file_name [-window window_name]
[-header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user
machine"]
[-blackbackground | -whitebackground | -monochrome | -documentation
|-colorasdisplayed]
[-visiblewindows]
[-resolution {screen | printerlow | printerhigh}]

Parameters
• file_name
(Required) Specifies the file (with optional full path) to which the window contents are to be
saved. If no path is specified, it defaults to the location from which EZwave was launched.
• -window window_name
(Optional) If this option is specified, the contents of the specified window is exported.
Otherwise, the contents of the active window is exported.
• -header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user machine"
(Optional) If this option is specified, include one or more of the keywords to add header text
to the output. The first three keywords add the database title, netlist title, and window title to
the output. You can also add the time, date, user name, and machine name, optionally
specifying fromSimulator if you want these values to be the same as the simulator, rather
than current values.
• -blackbackground | -whitebackground | -monochrome | -documentation | -colorasdisplayed
(Optional) These options specify the color scheme for the exported image.
• -visiblewindows
(Optional) Specifies that the image to be created contains all windows as displayed in the
EZwave viewer. This argument is particularly useful when exporting tiled windows.
• -resolution { screen | printerlow | printerhigh }
(Optional) This option specifies the resolution of the exported image file. Selecting screen
sets the output resolution to the screen resolution. printerlow and printerhigh sets the
output resolution to approximately 4x and 16x the screen resolution, respectively.
Examples
write png /user/adc12.png

1126 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
write wave

write wave
Outputs window contents in PostScript format. It can be sent to a printer or a specified location.
Usage
write wave [file.ps | -file file.ps | -printer printer_name]
[-window window_name] [-landscape | -portrait]
[-papersize {a3 | a4 | a5 | b4 | b5 | letter | tabloid | ledger | legal |
executive}] [-copies number] [-allwaveforms | -visiblewaveforms]
[-activewindow | -allwindows | -visiblewindows] [-eps]
[-header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user
machine"]

Parameters
• -file file.ps
(Optional) Sets the output file name in PostScript format.
• -printer printer_name
(Optional) Sets the printer in the network.
• -window window_name
(Optional) Sets the window to be printed. In case no -window is specified, the active
window is printed.
• -landscape
(Optional) Sets the printing orientation to be landscape (default).
• -portrait
(Optional) Sets the printing orientation as portrait.
• -papersize { a3 | a4 | a5 | b4 | b5 | letter | tabloid | ledger | legal | executive }
(Optional) Specifies the paper size for printing. These paper sizes correspond to the sizes
found in the File > Print dialog box.
• -copies number
(Optional) Specifies the number of copies to print.
• -allwaveforms | visiblewaveforms
(Optional) Specifies whether to print all waveforms or just the visible waveforms. If this
option is not specified, only visible waveforms are printed.
• -activewindow | -allwindows | -visiblewindows
(Optional) Specifies which windows to print. By default, when multiple windows are open,
only the active window is printed. If “-allwindows” is specified, all windows are printed,
one per page. If “-visiblewindows” is specified, only the visible windows are printed, also
one per page.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1127

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

• -eps
(Optional) If this option is set, the command generates an Encapsulated PostScript file.
• -header "dbTitle simuTitle wndTitle fromSimulator time date user machine"
(Optional) If this option is specified, include one or more of the keywords to add header text
to the output. The first three keywords add the database title, netlist title, and window title to
the output. You can also add the time, date, user name, and machine name, optionally
specifying fromSimulator if you want these values to be the same as the simulator, rather
than current values.
Examples
write wave dc.ps

External Tcl Command Support

The EZwave Tcl interpreter recognizes commands from Questa SIM (formerly ModelSim) and
Questa ADMS. Depending on the command, the interpreter will ignore the command, or the
EZwave viewer execute it by internally applying corresponding actions.
Table C-12 and Table C-13 list the level of support that the EZwave Tcl interpreter maintains
for Questa SIM and Questa ADMS commands, respectively. In these tables:

• Ignore — indicates that the EZwave Tcl interpreter ignores the command
• Supported — indicates that the EZwave viewer processes the command internally

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
.main clear Ignore power on Ignore
abort Ignore power report Ignore
add atv Ignore power reset Ignore
add button Ignore precision Ignore
add dataflow Ignore printenv Supported
add list Ignore process report Ignore
add log Ignore profile clear Ignore
add memory Ignore profile interval Ignore
add testbrowser Ignore profile off Ignore
add watch Ignore profile on Ignore
add wave Supported profile option Ignore
add_cmdhelp Ignore profile reload Ignore

1128 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
add_menu Ignore profile report Ignore
add_menucb Ignore project Ignore
add_menuitem Ignore pwd Supported
add_separator Ignore questasim Ignore
add_submenu Ignore quietly Ignore
addtime Ignore quit Supported
alias Ignore qverilog Ignore
assertion active Ignore radix Supported
assertion count Ignore radix define Supported
assertion fail Ignore radix names Supported
assertion pass Ignore radix list Supported
assertion profile Ignore radix delete Supported
atv log Ignore readers Ignore
batch_mode Supported realtotime Ignore
bd Ignore record Ignore
bookmark add wave Ignore report Ignore
bookmark delete Ignore restart Ignore
wave
bookmark goto wave Ignore restore Ignore
bookmark list wave Ignore resume Ignore
bp Ignore right Ignore
cd Supported run Ignore
cdbg Ignore runstatus Ignore
change Ignore sccom Ignore
change_menu_cmd Ignore scaletime Ignore
bookmark goto wave Ignore sscom Ignore
bookmark list wave Ignore scgenmod Ignore
check contention config Ignore sdfcom Ignore
check contention off Ignore search Ignore
check float add Ignore searchlog Ignore

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1129

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
check float config Ignore see Ignore
check float off Ignore seetime Ignore
check stable off Ignore setenv Supported
check stable on Ignore shift Ignore
checkpoint Ignore show Ignore
classinfo Ignore simstats Ignore
compare add Supported stack Ignore
compare annotate Ignore status Ignore
compare clock Supported step Ignore
compare configure Supported stop Ignore
compare delete Ignore subtime Ignore
compare end Supported suppress Ignore
compare info Supported tb Ignore
compare list Supported tcheck_set Ignore
compare options Supported tcheck_status Ignore
compare reload Ignore toggle add Ignore
compare reset Ignore toggle disable Ignore
compare run Supported toggle enable Ignore
compare savediffs Ignore toggle report Ignore
compare saverules Supported toggle reset Ignore
compare see Ignore tr color Ignore
compare start Supported tr id Ignore
compare stop Ignore tr order Ignore
compare update Ignore transcribe Ignore
configure Ignored transcript Ignore
context Ignore transcript file Ignore
coverage analyze Ignore triage Ignore
coverage attribute Ignore tssi2mti Ignore
coverage goal Ignore typespec Ignore
coverage ranktest Ignore ui_vvmode Ignore

1130 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
coverage tag Ignore unsetenv Support
coverage testnames Ignore up Ignore
coverage unlinked Ignore validtime Ignore
coverage weight Ignore vcd add Ignore
coverage clear Ignore vcd checkpoint Ignore
coverage exclude Ignore vcd comment Ignore
coverage reload Ignore vcd dumpports Ignore
coverage report Ignore vcd dumpportsall Ignore
coverage save Ignore vcd dumpportsflush Ignore
dataset alias Supported vcd dumpportslimit Ignore
dataset clear Supported vcd dumpportsoff Ignore
dataset close Supported vcd dumpportson Ignore
dataset config Ignore vcd file Ignore
dataset info Supported vcd files Ignore
dataset list Supported vcd flush Ignore
dataset open Supported vcd limit Ignore
dataset rename Supported vcd off Ignore
dataset restart Ignore vcd on Ignore
dataset save Supported vcd2wlf Ignore
dataset snapshot Ignore vcom Ignore
delete Supported vcover attributes Ignore
describe Ignore vcover ranktest Ignore
disablebp Ignore vcover testnames Ignore
disable_menu Ignore vcover convert Ignore
disable_menuitem Ignore vcover merge Ignore
divtime Ignore vcover rank Ignore
do Ignore vcover report Ignore
down Ignore vcover stats Ignore
drivers Ignore vdbg Ignore
dumplog64 Ignore vdel Ignore

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1131

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
echo Ignore vdir Ignore
edit Ignore vencrypt Ignore
enablebp Ignore verror Ignore
enable_menu Ignore vgencomp Ignore
enable_menuitem Ignore vhencrypt Ignore
encoding Ignore view Ignore
environment Supported virtual count Ignore
eqtime Ignore virtual define Ignore
examine Supported virtual delete Ignore
exit Supported virtual describe Ignore
fcover configure Ignore virtual expand Ignore
find Ignore virtual function Ignore
find analogs Supported power add Ignore
find digitals Supported power off Ignore
find nets Supported virtual hide Ignore
find signals Supported virtual log Ignore
find infiles Ignore virtual nohide Ignore
find insource Ignore virtual nolog Ignore
formatTime Ignore virtual region Ignore
force Ignore virtual save Ignore
fsm Ignore virtual show Ignore
gdb dir Ignore virtual signal Ignore
getactivecursortime Supported virtual type Ignore
getactivemarkertime Ignore vlib Ignore
gtetime Ignore vlog Ignore
gttime Ignore vmake Ignore
help Ignore vmap Ignore
history Supported vopt Ignore
inttotime Ignore vsim Ignore
jobspy Ignore vsim<info> Ignore

1132 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
layout Ignore vsim_break Ignore
lecho Ignore vsource Ignore
left Ignore wave Supported
log Ignore wave create Ignore
lshift ignore wave edit Ignore
lsublist Ignore wave export Supported
ltetime Ignore wave exists Supported
lttime Ignore wave modify Ignore
macro_option Ignore when Ignore
mem compare Ignore where Ignore
mem display Ignore wlf2log Ignore
mem list Ignore wlf2vcd Ignore
mem load Ignore wlfman Ignore
mem save Ignore wlfrecover Ignore
mem search Ignore write cell_report Ignore
messages Ignore write format Ignore
modelsim Ignore write list Ignore
next Ignore write preferences Ignore
neqtime Ignore write report Ignore
noforce Ignore write timing Ignore
nolog Ignore write transcript Ignore
notepad Ignore write tssi Ignore
noview Ignore write wave Supported
nowhen Ignore xml2ucdb Ignore
onbreak Ignore
onElabError Ignore
onerror Ignore
onfinish Ignore
pa Ignore
pause Ignore

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1133

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-12. Questa SIM Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
play Ignore
pop Ignore
property list Ignore
property wave Ignore
push Ignore

Table C-13. Questa ADMS Command Support

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
add list Ignore vcd add Ignore
add log Ignore vcd checkpoint Ignore
add wave Supported vcd comment Ignore
batch_mode Supported vcd dumpports Ignore
cd Supported vcd dumpportsall Ignore
change Ignore vcd dumpportsflush Ignore
checkpoint Ignore vcd dumpportslimit Ignore
debuginfo Ignore vcd dumpportsoff Ignore
drivers Ignore vcd dumpportson Ignore
env Supported vcd file Ignore
examine Supported vcd files Ignore
exit Supported vcd flush Ignore
find Supported vcd limit Ignore
force Ignore vcd off Ignore
if Supported vcd on Ignore
import_adms Ignore vacom Ignore
imports_ms Ignore vadel Ignore
isavewdb Ignore vadir Ignore
ms Ignore valib Ignore
noforce Ignore valog Ignore
onRunDone Ignore vamake Ignore
probe Supported vamap Ignore

1134 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
External Tcl Command Support

Table C-13. Questa ADMS Command Support (cont.)

Command EZwave Action Command EZwave Action
pwd Supported vamatch Ignore
quit Supported vasetlib Ignore
restart Ignore vasim Ignore
restore Ignore vaspi Ignore
run Ignore vaunlock Ignore
savetranscript Ignore vcd2wlf Ignore
savewaveconfig Supported vcd add Ignore
savewavewindow Supported view Ignore
savewdb Supported vsimauth Ignore
simparam Ignore vsimdate Ignore
splitio Ignore vsimid Ignore
statistics Ignore vsimversionstring Ignore
stop Ignore watch Ignore
usewaveconfig Supported write list Ignore

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1135

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Scripting Examples

Tcl Scripting Examples

This section includes some Tcl examples.
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Additional User-Defined Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Opening a Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Setting Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Taking Waveform Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
ASCII File Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Compare All Waveforms With Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Compare All Terminal Waveforms From Transient Analysis With Default Options . . . . 1144
Compare All Waveforms Using a Clocked Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Specific Waveforms With Modified Tolerances, Write a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Waveforms Using All Available Comparison Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Reference Waveforms During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Some Result Waveforms (Not All) During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Compare Waveforms Using the -label Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Compare Waveforms Using the -start and -end Arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Export a Report of Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Using find Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

1136 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example

Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands

Example
You can use Tcl scripting to issue batch commands to the EZwave waveform calculator. The
wfc function enables full access to all the calculation operations of the waveform calculator.
In the following Tcl script example, tut1_meas.tcl, the wfc command is used to calculate several
different waveform measurements. The script opens a waveform database file, meas.wdb,
performs several measurement operations, and sends output to an ASCII file, meas.out.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1137

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example

#!/usr/local/bin/tclsh
# ###################################################
# additional user defined procedures
proc greater {a b} {
return [ expr { ($a > $b) ? $a : $b } ]
}
# ###################################################
# open database file
dataset open $env(MGC_AMS_HOME)/examples/ezwave/meas.wdb
puts "\nExtracting from EZwave Post Processing"
# ###################################################
# global parameter settings
# .param vdd=3.3
wfc { vdd = 3.3 }
# ###################################################
# .meas tran TD1 when v(in)='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=1
# .meas tran TD2 when v(in)='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=2
wfc { rt_in_ = risetime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(IN)"), x_start = 5e-9, baseline =
vdd/4, topline = vdd´3/4, option = "wf") }
set TD1 [ wfc { td1_ = wftodata(rt_in_)[0][0] } ]
set TD2 [ wfc { td2_ = wftodata(rt_in_)[1][0] } ]
# ###################################################
# .meas tran T1 trig at=TD1
# targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=1
wfc { rt_q0_ = risetime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td1_,
5e-9), baseline = vdd/4, topline = vdd´3/4, option = "wf") }
set T1 [ wfc { wftodata(rt_q0_)[0][0] - td1_ } ]
# ###################################################
# .meas tran T2 trig at=TD2
# targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=TD2 fall=1
wfc { ft_q0_ = falltime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,
td2_), baseline = vdd/4, topline = vdd´3/4, option = "wf") }
set T2 [ wfc { wftodata(ft_q0_)[0][0] - td2_ } ]
# ###################################################
# .meas tran T2_C2 trig at=TD2
# targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns cross=2
wfc { cr_q0_ = crossing(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,
5e-9), ylevel = vdd/2, slopetrigger = "either", option = "value") }
set T2_C2 [ wfc { cr_q0_[1] - td2_ } ]
# ###################################################
# .meas tran T2_R trig at=TD2
# targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=last
wfc { cr1_q0_ = crossing(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,
5e-9), ylevel = vdd/2, slopetrigger = "rising", option = "wf") }
wfc { last_ = size(cr1_q0_) - 1 }
set T2_R [ wfc { wftodata(cr1_q0_)[last_][0] - td2_ } ]
# ###################################################
# open an ASCII file for saving measurement results
# results are in nanoseconds
set unit {N}
set factor 1e9
set fileout [ open meas.out w+ ]
puts $fileout "\nExtracted from EZwave Post Processing"
puts $fileout [format " TD1\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $TD1 * $factor ] $unit ]
puts $fileout [format " T1\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T1 * $factor ] $unit ]
puts $fileout [format " TD2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $TD2 * $factor ] $unit ]
puts $fileout [format " T2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2 * $factor ] $unit ]
puts $fileout [format " T2_C2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2_C2 * $factor ] $unit]

1138 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example

puts $fileout [format " T2_R\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2_R *$factor ] $unit]
close $fileout

This Tcl script can be broken down into several distinct functional areas:

Additional User-Defined Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

Opening a Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Setting Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Taking Waveform Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
ASCII File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141

Additional User-Defined Procedures

You can use any Tcl native functions and define any procedures using Tcl syntax.
This is shown in the following statements:

proc greater {a b} {
return [ expr { ($a > $b) ? $a : $b } ]
}

Opening a Database File

Describes how to open a database file using a Tcl statement.
The database file meas.wdb is opened using the following Tcl statement:

dataset open meas.wdb

Setting Global Parameters

Gives an example of how to set global parameters using a Tcl function.
For the following .param statement in a SPICE netlist file, the value 3.3 is assigned to the
parameter variable vdd:

.param vdd=3.3

The equivalent Tcl function is as follows:

wfc { vdd = 3.3 }

Taking Waveform Measurements

Electrical specifications (using the .meas command) are computed based on simulation results
and typically printed to an ASCII file. You can use Tcl scripting to take the same measurements.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1139

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Tcl Waveform Calculator Batch Commands Example

In this example, after a specified time delay (td) of 5 nanoseconds, a measurement is taken to
find the exact time when the signal v(in) crosses the voltage level vdd/2 in the first rising event.
The result is saved in the variable TD1.

The following example shows how this is implemented as a .meas statement in a SPICE netlist
file:

.meas tran TD1 when v(in)='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=1

In a second .meas statement, after a 5 nanosecond time delay, a measurement is taken to

determine the time when the signal v(in) crosses the voltage level vdd/2 in the second rising
event. The result is saved in the variable TD2.

.meas tran TD2 when v(in)='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=2

These two measurements (TD1 and TD2) can be implemented using Tcl scripting as in the
following example:

wfc { rt_in_ = risetime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(IN)"), x_start = 5e-9, baseline =

vdd/2, topline = vdd/2, option = "wf") }
set TD1 [ wfc { td1_ = wftodata(rt_in_)[0][0] } ]
set TD2 [ wfc { td2_ = wftodata(rt_in_)[1][0] } ]

For a third .meas statement, after a 5 nanoseconds time delay, a measurement is taken to find
the difference between the result in TD1 and when the signal v(q0) crosses the voltage level
vdd/2 in the first rising event. The result is saved in the variable T1.

.meas tran T1 trig at=TD1

targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=1

The Tcl scripting equivalent to the .meas statement is as follows:

wfc { rt_q0_ = risetime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td1_,

5e-9), baseline = vdd/2, topline = vdd/2, option = "wf") }
set T1 [ wfc { wftodata(rt_q0_)[0][0] - td1_ } ]

For the fourth .meas statement, after a TD2 time delay, the a measurement is taken to determine
the difference between TD2 and when the signal v(q0) crosses the voltage level vdd/2 in the
first falling event. The result is saved in the variable T2.

.meas tran T2 trig at=TD2

targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=TD2 fall=1

The Tcl scripting equivalent is as follows:

wfc { ft_q0_ = falltime(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,

td2_), baseline = vdd/2, topline = vdd/2, option = "wf") }
set T2 [ wfc { wftodata(ft_q0_)[0][0] - td2_ } ]

1140 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example

For the fifth .meas statement, after a 5 nanosecond time delay, a measurement is taken to find
the difference between TD2 and when the signal v(q0) crosses the voltage level vdd/2 in the
second crossing event, either rising or falling. The result is saved in the variable T2_C2.

.meas tran T2_C2 trig at=TD2

targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns cross=2

The Tcl scripting equivalent is as follows:

wfc { cr_q0_ = crossing(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,

5e-9), ylevel = vdd/2, slopetrigger = "either", option = "value") }
set T2_C2 [ wfc { cr_q0_[1] - td2_ } ]

In the final .meas statement, after a 5 nanosecond time delay, a measurement is taken to find the
difference between the time specified by TD2 and when the signal v(q0) crosses the voltage
level vdd/2 in the last rising event. The result is saved in the variable T2_R.

.meas tran T2_R trig at=TD2

targ v(q0) val='vdd/2' td=5ns rise=last

The Tcl scripting equivalent is as follows:

wfc { cr1_q0_ = crossing(wf("<meas/TRAN>V(Q0)"), x_start = greater(td2_,

5e-9), ylevel = vdd/2, slopetrigger = "rising", option = "wf") }
wfc { last_ = size(cr1_q0_) - 1 }
set T2_R [ wfc { wftodata(cr1_q0_)[last_][0] - td2_ } ]

ASCII File Output

Describes how to output measurements to an ASCII file using a Tcl command.
In the final section of the example Tcl code, the results of all measurements (TD1, TD2, T2R,
and T2_C2) are output to an ASCII file, meas.out.

# results are in nanoseconds

set unit {N}
set factor 1e9
set fileout [ open meas.out w+ ]
puts $fileout "\nExtracted from EZwave Post Processing"
puts $fileout [format " TD1\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $TD1 * $factor ] $unit]
puts $fileout [format " T1\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T1 * $factor ] $unit]
puts $fileout [format " TD2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $TD2 * $factor ] $unit]
puts $fileout [format " T2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2 * $factor ] $unit]
puts $fileout [format " T2_C2\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2_C2 * $factor ] $unit]
puts $fileout [format " T2_R\t= %8.4f%s" [ expr $T2_R *$factor ] $unit]
close $fileout

Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example

It can be useful to use Tcl to define a function that you use regularly. An example is described.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1141

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example

For example, you need to compute the group delay V(S) of a complex waveform in the
Waveform Calculator with the following formula:

GD=drv(cphase(wf("<database>/AC/V(S)")))/360

Tip
See also “Creating a Tcl Script from the Waveform Calculator History” on page 312.

Procedure
1. In this case, you would create a user-defined function with Tcl as follows:
proc gd { wave } {
wfc " drv(cphase($wave))/360 "
}

2. Save this definition in a file called gd.tcl and do either of the following to access the
function:
• Loading the User-Defined Function
a. In the Waveform Calculator, select File > Open Custom Function File to open a
file browser.
b. Navigate to and select the user-defined Tcl file (in this example, the gd.tcl file).
c. Click Open to load the file into the Waveform Calculator.
The function is now available in User-Defined Functions in the Functions list.
• Automatically Loading User-Defined Functions at Start-Up
You can set the EZwave viewer to automatically load all user-defined functions into
the Waveform Calculator at start-up.
a. Place all your user-defined function Tcl files in one directory.
b. In the Waveform Calculator, select Edit > Options to open the EZwave Display
Preferences Dialog Box, showing the Waveform Calculator General options.
c. Select Load User Extension Files at Startup.
d. Type the path to your user-defined functions directory in the Directory Path field.
You can also click Browse to use the file browser to select the directory.

Note
The user extension files in the specified directory must have a .tcl extension in
order to load.

1142 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Creating a User-Defined Function With Tcl Example

Tip
You can also use the environment variable AMS_UDF_LOAD to specify a path
to load extension files at startup - refer to “Environment Variables” on page 54.

e. Click OK.
f. Restart the EZwave waveform viewer.
When you now open the Waveform Calculator, your user-defined functions are
automatically loaded into the User-Defined Functions tree in the Functions list.

Tip
If you do not want the function to appear in the Waveform Calculator tree, prefix the
procedure name with two underscores “__”.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1143

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

Lists the Tcl examples for waveform comparison.
This section contains the following Tcl examples for waveform comparison:

Compare All Waveforms With Default Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

Compare All Terminal Waveforms From Transient Analysis With Default Options . 1144
Compare All Waveforms Using a Clocked Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Specific Waveforms With Modified Tolerances, Write a Report. . . . . . . . . . 1145
Compare Waveforms Using All Available Comparison Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Reference Waveforms During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Delaying Some Result Waveforms (Not All) During Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Compare Waveforms Using the -label Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Compare Waveforms Using the -start and -end Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Export a Report of Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149

Compare All Waveforms With Default Options

This Tcl script begins by opening two databases and beginning a comparison. To start a
comparison, the reference and test databases must be opened first. The next step adds all
waveforms recursively.
At this stage the comparison can be run. If errors or warning occur during the comparison, a log
file named “comparison.log” is created in the $MGC_TMPDIR directory (see the compare
savelog command). Ending the comparison will reset the list of waveforms to be compared.

dataset open /my/path/to/ReferenceDatabase.wdb REF

dataset open /my/other/path/to/TestDatabase.wdb TEST

compare start REF TEST

compare add -r *
compare run
compare end

Compare All Terminal Waveforms From Transient

Analysis With Default Options
This script begins by opening two databases and beginning a comparison. To start a
comparison, the reference and test databases must be opened first. The next steps add all
terminal waveforms from the TRAN analysis to the comparison recursively.
At this stage the comparison can be run.

1144 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

dataset open /my/path/to/ReferenceDatabase.wdb REF

dataset open /my/other/path/to/TestDatabase.wdb TEST

dataset open REF TEST

compare add -show TRAN.v -terminals -r *
compare run
compare end

Compare All Waveforms Using a Clocked Comparison

The basic steps in this script are similar to the preceding script with the addition of a clock
creation. This script creates a clock named “myClock” that will trigger a comparison on both
rising and falling edges of the its source waveform <REF/TRAN>:test:eoc.
When adding the waveforms to the comparison, the script specifies the clock to use during the
computation of the comparison waveforms.

dataset open /my/path/to/ReferenceDatabase.wdb REF

dataset open /my/other/path/to/TestDatabase.wdb TEST

compare start REF TEST

compare clock -both myClock <REF/TRAN>:test:eoc
compare add -clock myClock -r *
compare run
compare end

Compare Specific Waveforms With Modified Tolerances,

Write a Report
This script modifies the default tolerances for custom precision comparison of waveforms.
First, for analog waveforms, the script specifies a tolerance of 0.5% for both X- and y-axes.
Then, for digital waveforms, the leading tolerance is set to 0.1 and trailing tolerance is set to
0.2µ. The script only adds waveforms named “tvin” (recursively, as indicated by -r) and then
runs the comparison. Finally the script exports the comparison report (waveform by waveform
differences) to the text file “report.txt”. Running the comparison and exporting the report are
two independent steps: you can write a report without running the comparison beforehand; the
exporting process will run the comparison for you.

dataset open /my/path/to/ReferenceDatabase.wdb REF

dataset open /my/other/path/to/TestDatabase.wdb TEST

compare start REF TEST

compare options -xTol 0.5% -yTol 0.5% -tolLead 0.1e-6 -tolTrail 0.2e-6
compare add -r tvin
compare run
compare info -write /path/to/the/report.txt
compare end

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1145

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

Compare Waveforms Using All Available Comparison

Commands
This example provides a single Tcl script that uses most available commands within it.
The main difference here is that after adding the waveforms named “tvin” to the comparison,
we reconfigure them to use a clocked comparison.

compare start REF TEST

compare options -xTol 0.5% -yTol 0.5% -noaddwave -maxsignal 50
compare clock -both myClock <REF/TRAN>:test:eoc
compare add tvin
compare configure -clock myClock tvin
compare run
compare info -write /path/to/the/report.txt
compare end

Delaying Reference Waveforms During Comparison

This example Tcl script begins the comparison with a delayed reference waveform.
In this case, the delay alignment is 5n for all the waveforms in the reference dataset.

# Open reference and test databases

dataset open ref.wdb REF
dataset open test.wdb TEST

# Start the comparison session and "align" waveforms with a delayed

# reference waveform.
compare start -refdelay 5n REF TEST

# Add all waveforms to be compared.

compare add -show all -r *

# Run the comparison.

compare run

# Save an error log containing any warnings and errors encountered during
# the comparison.
compare savelog log.txt

# Export a report of this comparison to the report.txt file.

compare info -write report.txt

# End the comparison session.

compare end

Delaying Some Result Waveforms (Not All) During

Comparison
This Tcl script example aligns the comparison using a 3ns delay for all voltage waveforms in
the test dataset.

1146 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

The VAR waveform comparisons are not aligned with any delay.

# Open reference and test databases

dataset open ref.wdb REF
dataset open test.wdb TEST

# Start the comparison session

compare start REF TEST

# Add all voltage waveforms to be compared, use test delay to "align"

# those waveforms for the comparison
compare add -show TRAN.V -r -testdelay 3n *

# Add all VAR waveforms to the comparison, these waveforms won't be

# "aligned".
compare add -show TRAN.VAR -r *

# Run the comparison

compare run

# Save an error log containing any warnings and errors encountered during
# the comparison.
compare savelog log.txt

# Export a report of this comparison to the report.txt file

compare info -write report.txt

# End the comparison session

compare end

Compare Waveforms Using the -label Argument

This Tcl script example uses labels to distinguish three comparisons at different intervals along
the same waveform.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1147

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

# Open reference and test databases

dataset open Bumpy.wdb REF
dataset open Bumpy_test.wdb TEST

# Start the comparison session

compare start REF TEST

# Here we use a label to compare the same waveforms on different

# intervals. The label will appear in the comparison waveform name to ease
# user recognition of each waveform. Labels avoids name collision and
# waveform overwriting.
# Below are three examples using labels.

# Add all waveforms to the comparison using the label "firstInterval".

# Comparison will be performed between 0 and 1.2n and the reference
# waveform will be shifted 0.3n.
compare add -r -label firstInterval -start 0n -end 1.2n -refdelay .3n *

# Add all waveforms to the comparison using the label "secondInterval".

# Comparison will be performed between 1n and 1.5n and the test waveforms
# will be shifted 0.5n.
compare add -r -label secondInterval -start 1n -end 1.5n -testdelay .5n *

# Add all waveforms to the comparison using the label "thirdInterval".

# Comparison will be performed between 0.75n and 2.4n and the reference
# and test waveforms will be shifted respectively by 0.3n and 0.5n.
compare add -r -label thirdInterval -start .75n -end 2.4n -refdelay .3n
-testdelay .5n *

Compare Waveforms Using the -start and -end

Arguments
This Tcl script example compares voltage waveforms between 50ns and 100ns. VAR
waveforms are compared along their whole domain of definition.

1148 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Comparison With Tcl Examples

# Open reference and test databases.

dataset open ref.wdb REF
dataset open test.wdb TEST

# Start the comparison session.

compare start REF TEST

# Add all voltage waveforms to be compared between 50n and 100n.

compare add -show TRAN.V -r -start 50n -end 100n *

# Add all VAR waveforms to be compared on all their domain of definition.

compare add -show TRAN.VAR -r *

# Run the comparison.

compare run

# Save an error log containing any warnings and errors encountered during
# the comparison.
compare savelog log.txt

# Export a report of this comparison to the report.txt file.

compare info -write report.txt

# End the comparison session.

compare end

Export a Report of Comparison

This Tcl script example exports a report of the comparison to a text file and demonstrates the
precedence of the compare add command.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1149

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Using find Commands

# Open reference and test databases.

dataset open ref.wdb REF
dataset open test.wdb TEST

# Start the comparison session.

compare start REF TEST

# Add all voltage waveforms to be compared between 50n and 100n. The
# start and end time specified here overrules the ones from the compare
# run command.
compare add -show TRAN.V -r -start 50n -end 100n *

# Add all VAR waveforms to be compared on all their domain of definition.

compare add -show TRAN.VAR -r *

# Run the comparison.

compare run

# Save an error log containing any warnings and errors encountered during
# the comparison.
compare savelog log.txt

# Export a report of this comparison to the report.txt file. The

# starting and ending times will only apply to VAR waveforms as those
# times are overruled for voltage waveforms by the one specified with
# the compare add commands.
compare info -start 0 -end 75n -write report.txt

# End the comparison session

compare end

Using find Commands

This example script illustrates the use of the different find commands available in the EZwave
viewer.
The final two examples compare the use of the legacy switch “-i” and the use of “-show
TRAN.i” syntax for finding currents.

The script will search for waveforms with different criteria (name, kind, mode, and so on) and
plot each matching waveform in separate windows. The windows are then sorted for better
viewing or printing.

1150 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Using find Commands

# Close all existing windows.

wave closewindow -all

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Analogs"
# Look for all analog waveforms recursively in the most recently opened
# (or active) database.
set search [find analogs -r *]
# Plot all matching waveforms stacked in the most recently opened window.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Analogs 2"
# Look for all terminal waveforms.
set search [find signals -r -terminals *]
# Plot all matching waveforms.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

## Create an new window

wave addwindow -title "Analogs 3"
## Look for all variables
set search [find signals -show TRAN.var -r *]
## Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

## Create an new window

wave addwindow -title "AC Analysis"
## Look for all phases
set search [find signals -show AC.vp -r *]
## Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Digitals"
# Look for all analog waveforms recursively in the most recently opened
# (or active) database
set search [find digitals -r *]
# Plot all matching waveforms stacked in the most recently opened window.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1151

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Using find Commands

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Digitals 2"
# Look for all signal waveforms.
set search [find nets -r -signals *]
# Plot all matching waveforms.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Digitals 3"
# Look for all signal waveforms recursively but stop the recursion after
# two levels.
set search [find nets -r -signals -depth 2 *]
# Plot all matching waveforms.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Digitals 4"
# Look for all signal waveforms recursively whose third element in its
# design path is 'x1'.
set search [find nets -r -signals *:*:x1:*]
# Plot all matching waveforms.
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

# Create a new window.

wave addwindow -title "Out Signals"
# Look for all output signal waveforms recursively.
set search [find signals -r -out *]
# Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

##
## There are various ways to retrieve currents from a database in TCL.
## Using the legacy switch "-i", using the command find currents, and
## using "-show TRAN.i" syntax.
##
## If more than TRAN analysis is needed,
## you can use -show AC.i or even -show ALL.i.
##

## Create an new window

1152 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
Using find Commands

wave addwindow -title "Current 1"

## Look for all currents using -i switch
set search [find signals -r -i *]
## Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

## Create a new window

wave addwindow -title "Current 2"
## Look for all currents using the find currents command
set search [find currents -r *]
## Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

## Create a new window

wave addwindow -title "Current 3"
## Look for all currents with an appropriate -show option
set search [find signals -show TRAN.i -r *]
## Plot all matching waveforms
foreach list $search {
foreach wave $list {
add wave $wave
}
}

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1153

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts

Waveform Calculator Example Tcl Scripts

Lists example waveform calculator Tcl scripts. Some of these provide equivalent functionality
to legacy AFS WaveCrave CalcPAD scripts. The scripts appear in the Waveform Calculator
Functions list, under User-Defined Functions.
The examples of waveform calculator Tcl scripts are provided in the EZwave examples folder.

• In the AMS tree, navigate to:

$MGC_AMS_HOME/examples/ezwave

• In the AFS tree, navigate to:

$AFS_ROOT/examples/ezwave

Tip
You can control whether these scripts are loaded automatically into the Waveform
Calculator when EZwave starts up. Refer to “Waveform Calculator General Options” on
page 529.

To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use the Waveform Calculator Tcl scripts to calculate
phase noise for a PLL, see the video:

The following scripts, when enabled, appear in the Waveform Calculator Functions list, under
User-Defined Functions:

adc_sndr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
adc_sndr_parallel4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
clock_jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
pll_jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
pll_jitter_parallel4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
pll_phasenoise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
pll_phasenoise_parallel4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
PlotCompress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
PlotPacIPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

1154 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
adc_sndr

adc_sndr
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculate the Signal to Noise plus Distortion Ratio (SNDR) and the Signal to Noise Ratio
(SNR) for a transient noise simulation result for ADCs. The script makes the calculations for a
single run.
Tip
See also script adc_sndr_parallel4, which makes the calculations for four parallel runs.

Usage
adc_sndr(ADCout, Fclock, Fsignal)
Parameters
• ADCout
(Required) A sigma-delta ADC time-domain output waveform.
• Fclock
(Required) The clock frequency.
• Fsignal
(Required) The signal frequency.
Return Values
The outputs are as follows:

• Values for SNDR and SNR.

• A power spectral density plot.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1155

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
adc_sndr_parallel4

adc_sndr_parallel4
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculate the Signal to Noise plus Distortion Ratio (SNDR) and the Signal to Noise Ratio
(SNR) for a transient noise simulation result for ADCs. The script makes the calculations for
four parallel runs.
Tip
See also script adc_sndr, which makes the calculations for a single run.

Usage
adc_sndr_parallel4(ADCout, ADCout2, ADCout3, ADCout4, Fclock, Fsignal)
Parameters
• ADCout
(Required) First sigma-delta ADC time-domain output waveform.
• ADCout2
(Required) Second sigma-delta ADC time-domain output waveform.
• ADCout3
(Required) Third sigma-delta ADC time-domain output waveform.
• ADCout4
(Required) Fourth sigma-delta ADC time-domain output waveform.
• Fclock
(Required) The clock frequency.
• Fsignal
(Required) The signal frequency.
Return Values
The outputs are as follows:

• Values for SNDR and SNR

• A power spectral density plot.

1156 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
clock_jitter

clock_jitter
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculates jitter statistics for clock waveforms.
Usage
clock_jitter(CLKout[, Tstart, Threshold, Period_Accurate, NumberOfAccumulatedCycles])
Parameters
• CLKout
(Required) A time-domain clock waveform.
• Tstart
(Optional) The starting time for the jitter calculation. Default is the first point of CLKout.
• Threshold
(Optional) The value used to calculate periods. Default is the mean of CLKout on the
observed time domain.
• Period_Accurate
(Optional) A specific period for improved accuracy in absolute jitter. Default is the mean of
the periods.
• NumberOfAccumulatedCycles
(Optional) Used for the absolute jitter calculation. Default is 10.
Return Values
The outputs are:

• Mean, minimum, and maximum period.

• Peak-to-peak and RMS period jitter.
• RMS cycle-to-cycle, absolute, and long-term period jitter.
• A frequency versus time plot.
• A jitter histogram.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1157

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
pll_jitter

pll_jitter
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculates jitter measurements for PLLs for a single run and decomposes jitter into
deterministic and random components and reports these results.
Tip
See also script pll_jitter_parallel4, which makes the calculations for four parallel runs.

Usage
pll_jitter(PLLout[, Tstart, Threshold, Period_Accurate])
Parameters
• PLLout
(Required) A PLL time-domain output waveform.
• Tstart
(Optional) The starting time for the jitter calculation. Default is the first point of PLLout.
• Threshold
(Optional) The value used to calculate periods. Default is the mean of PLLout on the
observed time domain.
• Period_Accurate
(Optional) A specific period for improved accuracy in absolute jitter. Default is the mean of
the periods.
• divN
(Optional) The number of samples used to decompose jitter into deterministic and random
components. By default, jitter is not decomposed.
Return Values
The outputs are:

• Absolute jitter.
• RMS period jitter and cycle-to-cycle jitter versus the number of accumulated cycles.
• A jitter histogram.
• Random component of absolute jitter: periodicRjStdDev.
• Deterministic component of absolute jitter: periodicDj.

1158 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
pll_jitter

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1159

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
pll_jitter_parallel4

pll_jitter_parallel4
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculates jitter measurements. The script makes the calculations for four parallel runs.
Tip
See also script pll_jitter, which makes the calculations for a single run.

Usage
pll_jitter_parallel4(PLLout, PLLout2, PLLout3, PLLout4[, Tstart, Threshold,
Period_Accurate])
Parameters
• PLLout
(Required) First PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout2
(Required) Second PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout3
(Required) Third PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout4
(Required) Fourth PLL time-domain output waveform.
• Tstart
(Optional) The starting time for the jitter calculation. Default is the first point of PLLout.
• Threshold
(Optional) The value used to calculate periods. Default is the mean of PLLout on the
observed time domain.
• Period_Accurate
(Optional) A specific period for improved accuracy in absolute jitter. Default is the mean of
the periods.
Return Values
The outputs are:

• Absolute jitter.
• RMS period jitter and cycle-to-cycle jitter versus the number of accumulated cycles.
• A jitter histogram.

1160 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
pll_phasenoise

pll_phasenoise
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculates phase noise measurements from transient noise simulation results for PLLs for a
single run.
Video
To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use this Tcl script to calculate phase noise for a
PLL, see the video:

Tip
See also script pll_phasenoise_parallel4, which makes the calculations for four parallel runs.

Usage
pll_phasenoise(PLLout, Fund_Accurate[, Tstart, SpurFreq])
Parameters
• PLLout
(Required) A PLL time-domain output waveform.
• Fund_Accurate
(Required) The accurate fundamental frequency.
• Tstart
(Optional) The starting time for the phase noise calculation. Default is the first point of
PLLout.
• SpurFreq
(Optional) Specify a spur frequency to measure a spur. By default, spurs are not measured.
Return Values
The outputs are as follows:

• A frequency versus time plot.

• A phase noise plot.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1161

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
pll_phasenoise_parallel4

pll_phasenoise_parallel4
Waveform Calculator function.
Calculates phase noise measurements from transient noise simulation results for PLLs. The
script makes the calculations for four parallel runs.
Video
To watch a tutorial that shows you how to use this Tcl script to calculate phase noise for a
PLL, see the video:

Tip
See also script pll_phasenoise, which makes the calculations for a single run.

Usage
pll_phasenoise_parallel4(PLLout, PLLout2, PLLout3, PLLout4, Fund_Accurate[, Tstart,
SpurFreq])
Parameters
• PLLout
(Required) First PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout2
(Required) Second PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout3
(Required) Third PLL time-domain output waveform.
• PLLout4
(Required) Fourth PLL time-domain output waveform.
• Fund_Accurate
(Required) The accurate fundamental frequency.
• Tstart
(Optional) The starting time for the phase noise calculation. Default is the first point of
PLLout.

1162 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
pll_phasenoise_parallel4

• SpurFreq
(Optional) Specify a spur frequency to measure a spur. By default, spurs are not measured.
Return Values
The outputs are as follows:

• A frequency versus time plot.

• A phase noise plot.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1163

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
PlotCompress

PlotCompress
Waveform Calculator function.
Plots output power against input power in dBm and returns n-dB compression point. Only
supports compound waveforms.
Usage
plotcompress(src_p)
plotcompress(src_p, src_n)
plotcompress(src_p, src_n, sweep_param)
plotcompress(src_p, src_n, sweep_param, fund, ndb, epin, rload)
Arguments
• src_p
(Required) Specifies a compound waveform of voltage spectrum signals within an input
power sweep.
• src_n
(Optional) Specifies a compound waveform of voltage spectrum signals within an input
power sweep, or 0.0 (default).
• sweep_param
(Optional) Specifies the sweep parameter. If not specified, the first sweep parameter found
is used. Default is -1.
• fund
(Optional) Specifies the fundamental or harmonic frequency (default nth(indep(src_p), 2)).
• ndb
(Optional) Specifies the number of dB by which the actual curve falls below an ideal linear
curve. Use ndb = 1 to extract the 1-db compression point (1 by default).
• epin
(Optional) Specifies the extrapolation point. Default is the first point in the input power
sweep. Default is -1.
• rload
(Optional) Specifies the load resistance (50 by default).
Related Topics
wave plotcompress
PlotPacIPn

1164 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Tcl Scripting Support
PlotPacIPn

PlotPacIPn
Waveform Calculator function.
Takes a PAC spectrum signal pair at the desired and unwanted harmonics, within an input
power sweep, plots the pair of IPn curves and returns the intercept point. Only supports
compound waveforms.
Usage
plotpacipn(src_p, desired_harm_p, unwanted_harm_p)
plotpacipn(src_p, desired_harm_p, unwanted_harm_p, src_n, desired_harm_n,
unwanted_harm_n, sweep_param)
plotpacipn(src_p, desired_harm_p, unwanted_harm_p, src_n, desired_harm_n,
unwanted_harm_n, sweep_param, norder, rload)
Arguments
• src_p
(Required) Specifies a compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input power
sweep.
• desired_harm_p
(Required) Specifies the desired harmonic. Default is -1.
• unwanted_harm_p
(Required) Specifies the unwanted harmonic. Default is -1.
• src_n
(Optional) Specifies a compound waveform with PAC scalar signals within an input power
sweep. Default is -1.
• desired_harm_n
(Optional) Specifies the desired harmonic, or 0.0 (default).
• unwanted_harm_n
(Optional) Specifies the unwanted harmonic, or 0.0 (default).
• sweep_param
(Optional) Specifies the sweep parameter. If not specified, the first sweep parameter found
is used. Default is -1.
• norder
(Optional) Specifies the order of the intercept point (3 by default).
• rload
(Optional) Specifies the load resistance (50 by default).

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1165

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Tcl Scripting Support
PlotPacIPn

Related Topics
wave plotpacipn
PlotCompress

1166 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix D
Supported Net Representation Components

This section describes the supported net representation syntax and values for the wave show Tcl
command and the -show option of the add wave Tcl command.
Representing the Signal as a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
Extended Options for Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Examples of wave show and -show usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1167

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supported Net Representation Components
Representing the Signal as a Waveform

Representing the Signal as a Waveform

The wave show Tcl command and the -show option of the add wave Tcl command specify how
the signal is to be represented as a waveform.
The wave show representation is used as the default representation when the add wave
command is issued without the -show option. If -show is specified, it is applied beginning
where it appears in the script until another -show is issued, or until the end of the script.

If no wave show or add wave -show commands are issued, the default representation is as
follows:

tran.v|ac.vdb|ac.vp

The syntax for the wave show command and -show option is as follows:

wave show representation [ |representation2|...|representationN]

add wave -show representation [|representation2|...|representationN]

The reserved keywords, all and none, can be used as follows:

• -show all
Requests all objects found in all analyses
• -show analysis.all
Requests all objects found in the specified analysis.
• -show none
Requests no objects in the case where there is no analysis folder.
Extended Options for Selecting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
physic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Examples of wave show and -show usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

Extended Options for Selecting Waveforms

The -show option is available with a number of commands that access waveforms.
These are listed in Table D-1.

1168 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supported Net Representation Components
Extended Options for Selecting Waveforms

Table D-1. Commands that Access Waveforms

compare add dataset find nets | signals wave addproperty
savewaveforms
compare clock delete wave wave addannotation wave exists
compare configure find analogs wave adddeltamarker wf
dataset find digitals wave addline
mergewaveforms

For these commands, along with the add wave command, there are a number of extended
options available for use with the -show option. These options are used for selecting the
waveform(s) required. The following extended options are available. See “Selecting
Waveforms in Tcl” on page 955 for details:

[-recursive][-depth <level>][-signals][-quantities]
[-separator <separator>][-terminals]
[-nets][-ports][-in][-out][-inout][-internal]
[-through][-across][-free][-flow][-i]
[-boundary][-a2d][-d2a][-bidir][-run {run_number | run_name}]
[-session {previous | current}][-adms | -modelsim]

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1169

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supported Net Representation Components
representation

representation
A representation is a complete representation of a net and is composed of an analysis, a
discipline, and a physic.
A dot ( . ) separates the analysis portion from the discipline and physic portion. There is no
separator between the discipline and the physic, as follows:

analysis.disciplinephysic

If more than one representation is specified, use a pipe ( | ) to separate them:

analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic|analysis.disciplinephysic

analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
physic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

analysis
The analysis portion of the representation specifies the kind of analysis to use to “wave” a net.
For example, in the same simulation, we can request an AC and a TRAN analysis. And in this
case, we may want to see the waveform of one net for the AC analysis and of another net for the
TRAN analysis. Supported analyses are shown in the following table. For details on the values
in the table, refer to the Eldo manual.
Table D-2. Supported analysis Values
AC DC DSP EXTRACT
LSTB MEAS MODSST NOISE
NOISETRAN OP OPFOUR SST
SSTAC SSTNOISE SSTXF TRAN

discipline
The discipline portion of the representation specifies a discipline of an analog net.
For example, current or voltage. Supported disciplines are shown in the following table. For
details on the values in the table, refer to the Eldo manual.
Table D-3. Supported discipline Values
A E IFNCELL POW TABLE
ACC_STRESS FLKNOISE IG POWDYN TEMP

1170 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supported Net Representation Components
representation

Table D-3. Supported discipline Values (cont.)

AVG FLUX IN POWSTAT TGP
B FLOUR INX Q TGP_
B_OPT FT IOUT QB THNOISE
BETAAC FUND_OSC IPIN QBD V
BETADC G IPROBE QBS VALDIP
BFACTOR G_OPT IS QC VB
BOPT GA ISTAT QCELL VBC
C GA_ ISUB QD VBD
CBB GAC IW QE VBE
CBD GAC_ IX QG VBS
CBDJ GAM KFACTOR QS VC
CBG GAM_ LSC RBB VCE
CBS GAMMA_OPT LSC_ RBNOISE VCS
CBSX GAMMA_OPT_ LSTB RCNOISE VD
CBX GASM LSTB_ RDNOISE VDIP
CCS GASM_ LT_JITTER RENOISE VDS
CD GAUM LV REP VDSE
CDD GAUM_ LX RGNOISE VDSS
CDG GDS MUFACTOR RMU VE
CDF GMB MUFACTOR_L RNEQ VES
CDS GMIBD MUFACTOR_S RO VG
CGB GMIBS MV RPI VGB
CGBO GOPT MVBD RSNOISE VGS
CGDO GP_ MVBS RX VGSE
CGG GPC MVDS S VNEG
CGS GPC_ MVGB SG VPOS
CGSO H MVGS SSC VS
CMU I N SSC_ VT
CPI IB NC SST VTCELL
CSB IBDNOISE NC_ SSTINOISE VTH
CSD IBNOISE NET_POLE SSTINOISE.H VTH_D

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1171

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supported Net Representation Components
representation

Table D-3. Supported discipline Values (cont.)

CSG IBS NET_POLE_ SSTNOISE VX
CSS IBSNOISE NFMIN SSTNOISE.H VXN
CXS IC NFMIN_ SSTONOISE W
DATA ICNOISE NOISE SSTONOISE.H WOPT
DATA_CTE ID OPMODE SSTSNF XF
DATA_LIN IDNOISE P STD Y
DBG IDS PDB STRESS YOPT
DSP IE PHI_OPT T Z

physic
The physic portion of the representation specifies the physical representation of the waveform.
For example, for a frequency signal that is complex, you can choose to see its magnitude in DB,
its phase, or just the real portion. It may also include, for example, the harmonic number of a
large signal frequency analysis.

The physic portion is composed of a primary_physic and an optional secondary_physic,

separated by a dot ( . ).

The primary_physic
The supported primary_physic values are shown in the following table. For details of the values
in the table, refer to the Eldo manual.
Table D-4. Supported primary_physic Values
D GD P SOL
DB I PRED T
DIG M R
DSOL MAG RAD

The secondary_physic
The secondary_physic is in the form of:

h(index)

where index is an integer literal. If more than one index value is appropriate, separate the index
values by commas ( , ).

1172 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Supported Net Representation Components
Examples of wave show and -show usage

Examples of wave show and -show usage

Provides examples of wave show and -show usage.
• wave show ac.vdb
In this example, the analysis is AC, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB.
• add wave -show ffst.vdb.h(1) :top:net1
In this example, the analysis is FFST, the discipline is V, and the physic is DB for the
primary_ physic, and H(1) for the secondary_physic. This will search for the specified
waveform in the last-opened database: database_name/FSST>VDB(:top:net1).H(1)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1173

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supported Net Representation Components
Examples of wave show and -show usage

1174 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Appendix E
Troubleshooting

This section contains troubleshooting information relating to EZwave.

Known Problems and Workarounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Linux Printing Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Resolving Linux Printing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using LPRNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using CUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Troubleshooting Memory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Configuring Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Resolving Incorrect Estimate the Disk Space Needed to Save A Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Resolving Why the Simulator Fails to Start EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Increasing the Memory Stack Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Troubleshooting EZwave Launch Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Failure to Load EZwave Dynamic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Failure to Launch EZwave in Questa ADMS GUI Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Displaying Results Between Different AMS Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Troubleshooting Display Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Troubleshooting Logfiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Logfile Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
System Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Contacting the Customer Support Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
Training Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196

Known Problems and Workarounds

This section describes known problems and their workarounds for EZwave.
• Docking EZwave in Questa ADMS
By default, in graphical mode, EZwave is not docked in the Questa ADMS GUI. A new
Questa ADMS modelsim.ini file variable is available to control this behavior:
; DockEZwaveInQuestaAdms = 1.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1175

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Known Problems and Workarounds

If you dock EZwave back to Questa ADMS, you may encounter drag and drop issues
within EZwave.
• Sorting in the Open Dialog
It is not possible to sort by name, size or modified date within the detailed view of the
Open dialog box when EZwave is docked inside the Questa ADMS GUI.
• WLF Reader performance on Windows
Reading wlf on ixw is slow on Windows.
• Running EZwave fails with the following message:
Unable to start get_ezwave_license process: check your path

This problem is caused by a Java bug that prevents the execution of a script from Java if
the script belongs to a different “user” and “group”, even if “read” and “execute”
permissions are correctly set. This problem occurs only if the user’s “group” is not the
“primary group”. In this case, execution fails if “read” and “execute” permissions are
not granted to “other” (or “public”).
For more information on this Java bug, visit:
http://bugs.sun.com/bugdatabase/view_bug.do?bug_id=4052517

Workaround 1: Ensure that the file $MGC_AMS_HOME/bin/ams_command.sh

permissions are set to 755. The user in charge of the AMS installation can execute the
following command:
chmod 755 $MGC_AMS_HOME/bins/ams_command.sh

Workaround 2: The issue might be due to an unstable machine. Try starting EZwave
with the command ezwave -nobigmem. This limits the memory size to 4GB. If this
resolves the issue, reboot the machine and try launching EZwave normally.
• The EZwave viewer generates the following error message during invocation:
Font specified in font.properties not found
--symbol-medium- r-normal--*-%d-*-*-p-*-adobe-fontspecific]

Workaround 1: Install the Symbol font. The font that the Java virtual machine searches
for is symbol.ttf. This font is available on most machines.
You may get a copy of the font and copy it to the JRE fonts directory, for example,
$MGC_AMS_HOME/jre/.../lib/fonts. In the fonts directory, there is a file named
fonts.dir that lists the available, scalable fonts for JRE. Modify this file (you may need
to be root) to include the symbol.ttf font file as in the following example:
symbol.ttf -urw-symbol-medium-r-normal--0-0-0-0-p-0-adobe-
fontspecific

1176 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Known Problems and Workarounds

After you have added the preceding line, increment the number on the first line of the
file by one. The number indicates the total number of fonts listed in the file.
Workaround 2: Alternatively, make the font definitions specified in the
font.properties file match what are available on your system. You need to change the
symbol lines in the file from the following:
--symbol-medium-r-normal--*-%d-*-*p-*-adobe-fontspecific

to the following:
-urw-symbol-medium-r-normal--*-%d-*-*p-*-urw-fontspecific

• When loading CSV files through a Tcl script, Supported Net Representation
Components are not fully functional.
Workaround: When opening CSV databases using a Tcl script, use the EZwave fully
qualified naming convention.
For example, you want to display V(OUT) from a time domain analysis in the currently
open database named “adc12”. Because of this limitation, you must use
add wave <adc12/TRAN>V(OUT)
# Fully qualified naming syntax, works for CSV and other file
formats.

instead of
add wave OUT
# Supported net representation syntax, currently does not work with
# CSV files

• In this release, database compaction is disabled during simulation. For large designs the
database size may increase in comparison with earlier releases.
Workaround: Load the results database into EZwave once the simulation is completed,
then use Save As to save the database. This save will compact the database and the size
is reduced. See “Save As Dialog Box” on page 562 for further information.
• Waveform Group Colors
Custom colors applied to individual elements of a waveform group are not preserved
when a database is saved and reloaded as TCL.
• Progress Bar Display of TCL Script Execution on Windows Platforms
When running EZwave in Windows, TCL source file execution progress is not
monitored in the progress bar. Instead, an activity bar is shown during Tcl script
execution.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1177

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Linux Printing Issues

Linux Printing Issues

Describes the steps that will help you to troubleshoot your printing process.
Resolving Linux Printing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using LPRNG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Printing Issues when using CUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179

Resolving Linux Printing Issues

If you are having difficulties using /usr/sbin/lpc to print from a system running Linux, use the
steps described here to troubleshoot your printing process.
Solution
1. Ensure that /usr/sbin/lpc is available on the machine. The Java Configuration
Requirement for Linux states, “To print on Linux, the /usr/sbin/lpc utility must be
installed. This is a standard Linux utility. On RedHat 7.1, for example, this utility is in
the ‘LPRng-3.7.4-22 RPM’ package.”
On RedHat 3.0, the CUPS package is sometimes used by default, instead of LPRNG.
Use the following commands to check whether LPRNG or CUPS is installed on your
system:
o If the command
rpm -qa | grep LPR

returns a package name, the LPRNG package is installed. If so, refer to “Printing
Issues when using LPRNG” on page 1178.
o If the command
rpm -qa | grep cups

returns a package name, the CUPS package is installed. If this is the case, refer to
“Printing Issues when using CUPS” on page 1179.

Printing Issues when using LPRNG

Describes the steps that will help you to troubleshoot your LPRNG printing process.
Solution
1. Look for the following configuration files:
o /etc/printcap

1178 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Printing Issues when using CUPS

Verify that one or more printers are defined in this file. If this file does not exist, the
EZwave viewer is normally unable to print. This file is automatically generated
during printing configuration executed by the root admin.
o /etc/lpd.perms
This file is optional. If it exists, verify that the following lines are present:
# allow anybody to get server, status, and printcap
ACCEPT SERVICE=C LPC=lpd,status,printcap

o /etc/lpd.conf
This file is mandatory. It may be empty. If it is not empty, it may contain settings
that prevent proper printing.
2. If the preceding files are all correct, try the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpc status

This should return a list of printers with configuration and status details. For example:
myprinter:
printer is on device ‘lpd’ speed -1
queuing is enabled
printing is enabled
no entries
daemon present

3. Verify that the LPD daemon is running with the following command:
/bin/ps -auxww | grep lpd

An lpd process must be running; otherwise, printing will fail.

Printing Issues when using CUPS

Describes the steps that will help you to troubleshoot your CUPS printing process.
Solution
1. Execute the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpc status

This should return a list of printers with configuration and status details. For example:
myprinter:
printer is on device 'lpd' speed -1
queuing is enabled
printing is enabled
no entries
daemon present

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1179

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Printing Issues when using CUPS

2. Verify that the cups printer daemon is running with the following command:
/bin/ps -auxww | grep cupsd

A cupsd process must be running, otherwise printing will fail.

3. Verify that the following configuration files exist in the /etc/cups directory:
o classes.conf
o client.conf
o cupsd.conf
o mime.convs
o mime.types
o printers.conf
This is the basic CUPS recommended configuration.
4. Log in to the machine as root and execute the following command:
lpstat -v

This should return address information on printers. Look for the corresponding line for
the printer named “myprinter”. For example:
device for myprinter: lpd://173.21.21.1/myprinter

Register the printer using the command:

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -r myprinter -E -v lpd://173.21.21.1/myprinter
-m myprinter.ppd

Then, restart the cups daemon:

path/cups restart

path may be one of the following:

o /etc/software/init.d
o /etc/rc.d/init.d
o /etc/init.d
o /sbin/init.d

1180 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Memory Issues

Troubleshooting Memory Issues

Memory problems may stop EZwave from starting from within simulators such as Questa
ADMS or Eldo, and out-of-memory errors may occur when you are working with very large
files within the EZwave viewer. This section provides troubleshooting information to help you
resolve memory issues.
Configuring Memory Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Resolving Incorrect Estimate the Disk Space Needed to Save A Database . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Resolving Why the Simulator Fails to Start EZwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Increasing the Memory Stack Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Configuring Memory Capacity

Describes how to set the EZwave memory capacity using the AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY
environment variable.
You can use the AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY environment variable to override the default
settings and specify the memory capacity for EZwave. Allowed values are low | medium | high |
versatile.

Note
By default, EZwave is set up as if AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY is used, and set to
medium.

• low - suitable for virtual machines

setenv AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY low

Limits memory usage to 4GB.

Configures the Java Virtual Machine minimum heap size -Xms to 100MB and the
maximum heap size -Xmx to 4000MB.
• medium - suitable for mainstream machines (<48 GB)
setenv AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY medium

This is the default option. Limits memory usage to 75% of available memory, capped at
a maximum of 32GB. For example, if a machine has 128Gb of RAM, EZwave uses
32GB.
The Java Virtual Machine minimum heap size -Xms and maximum heap size -Xmx are
set to the same value.
• high - suitable for high-end machines (>48GB)

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1181

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems

setenv AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY high

Limits memory usage to 75% of available memory. This option is only taken into
account if the machine has more than 48GB of RAM (otherwise high is equivalent to
medium).
The Java Virtual Machine minimum heap size -Xms and maximum heap size -Xmx are
set to the same value.
• versatile - suitable for high-end machines (>48GB) where a large part of the memory
might be used by another process causing out-of-memory problems
setenv AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY versatile

Versatile is similar to high but configures the Java Virtual Machine minimum heap size
-Xms to 1GB and the maximum heap size -Xmx to 75% of the available memory.

Tip
Using the AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY environment variable is the preferred method of
setting EZwave memory capacity.

However, if you still encounter out-of-memory problems, you may need to further modify the
Java Virtual Machine’s (JVM) memory heap size. Refer to “Resolving Out-Of-Memory
Problems” on page 1182.

Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems

Describes the types of memory shortages detected by EZwave and provides solutions to address
them.
Note
Using the AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY environment variable is the preferred method of
setting EZwave memory capacity. Refer to “Configuring Memory Capacity” on page 1181.

However, if you still encounter out-of-memory problems, you may need to modify the Java
Virtual Machine’s (JVM) memory heap size, as described in this topic.

Symptoms
The EZwave viewer detects and reports memory shortages in the following cases:

• Machine memory is nearly exhausted.

• Disk is full.
• Maximum allowed EZwave memory is almost reached.

1182 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Resolving Out-Of-Memory Problems

In these cases, information is reported to you, and the simulator performs an automatic save of
simulation information (time domain simulation).

Causes
If you encounter out-of-memory problems, you may need to increase the Java Virtual
Machine’s (JVM) memory heap size. By default, EZwave will automatically determine how
much memory to use depending on OS and system physical memory.

Solution
The heap size can grow up to 75% of physical memory with a maximum of 31 GB (the default).

• To disable large memory usage for the JWDB server or EZwave, and limit the memory
to 4 GB, modify the value of the environment variable
AMS_JAVA_NO_BIG_MEMORY as follows:
setenv AMS_JAVA_NO_BIG_MEMORY 1

• To enable large memory usage above 31 GB, use AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP to

force a specific heap size:
setenv AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP "-Xms100G -Xmx100G"

where -Xms sets the minimum heap size and -Xmx sets the maximum heap size.

Caution
You should never take all of the machine memory for the Java heap (-Xmx), because Java
uses some memory in addition to the heap (e.g. the stack), and other processes might require
some memory. Using 75% of the machine memory as a maximum for the heap is considered a
good practice.

Note
The AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP overwrites any other memory setting, including those
set by environment variable AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY, by defining exact memory
limits. AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP must be unset when using
AMS_JAVA_NO_BIG_MEMORY:

unsetenv AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP

Setting Values for Minimum and Maximum Heap Size

When using the environment variable AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP, the -Xms value sets the
minimum heap size and the -Xmx value tells the JVM the maximum size it can increase the
memory heap to.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1183

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Resolving Incorrect Estimate the Disk Space Needed to Save A Database

Tip
It is considered a good practice to set -Xms and -Xmx to the same value, as it frees the JVM
from having to resize the heap size dynamically.

To determine the maximum heap size that your system can handle, gradually increase the -Xmx
value, and start the EZwave viewer (without specifying a .wdb file). When you reach a value
that is too high, the EZwave viewer will return an error telling you that it cannot handle the
specified memory allocation.

When using AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP, you should also add all the options -XX that
EZwave sets by default. For example, to setup AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP to be
equivalent of the setup obtained with setenv AMS_EZWAVE_CAPACITY low:

setenv AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_HEAP "-Xms100M -Xmx4000M

-XX:+UseConcMarkSweepGC
-XX:+UseParNewGC
-XX:CMSInitiatingOccupancyFraction=30
-XX:+UseCMSInitiatingOccupancyOnly
-XX:-UseGCOverheadLimit
-XX:+OptimizeStringConcat

Resolving Incorrect Estimate the Disk Space

Needed to Save A Database
EZwave can sometimes incorrectly estimate the disk space necessary to save a database during
a simulation. It can force the simulation to stop, suggesting there is not enough disk space even
when there is.
Solution
If you encounter such an issue and you are sure there is enough disk space available, you can set
the environment variable AMS_NO_CHECK_DISK_SPACE to 1 to deactivate the EZwave
checking mechanism for available disk space.

Resolving Why the Simulator Fails to Start EZwave

If a simulator such as Questa ADMS or Eldo fails to start EZwave, an error message is
displayed.
Symptoms
An error message similar to the following is displayed:

The JWDB (EZwave) server cannot start the Java Virtual Machine. Refer to
EZwave User's Manual for possible causes.

1184 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Increasing the Memory Stack Limit

Causes
The most common cause of this is an incorrect setup of memory parameters for EZwave.

Solution
The table below lists EZwave error messages relating to the Java Virtual Machine’s (JVM)
memory heap size and specification of it. It describes a probable cause and suggests a possible
solution.
Table E-1. JVM Memory Heap Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Solution
Could not reserve enough Xmx value too large in Reduce Xmx value (use a
space for object heap. comparison to available maximum of 75% of total
physical memory. memory).
Too small initial heap for Xms value too small to Increase Xms value (use a
new size specified. allow EZwave to start. minimum of 100M).
Incompatible minimum and Xms value is larger than Reduce Xms or increase Xmx
maximum heap sizes Xmx value. value. Using the same value for
specified. Xms and Xmx is considered good
practice.
Invalid maximum Syntax error in Xmx (Xms) Fix the syntax error. Use
(minimum) heap size. value. -Xmx<value>[m|M|g|G]
The specified size exceeds Xmx value is larger than the Reduce Xmx value (use maximum
the maximum representable addressable space. of 75% of total memory).
size.

Note
If EZwave starts standalone, but fails to run from a simulator such as Questa ADMS or
Eldo, try reducing your Xmx value. It may be the JVM cannot reserve enough memory for
the thread stacks. The size of the stack influences the maximum amount of memory that
EZwave can reserve.

Increasing the Memory Stack Limit

When EZwave or the JWDB server is run from a simulator such as Questa ADMS or Eldo, the
thread stack limit is set to 10240 kB. This can be increased.
In earlier releases of EZwave, when EZwave or the JWDB server was run from a simulator such
as Questa ADMS or Eldo, the thread stack limit was set to unlimited.

If you require a higher stack limit, for example when troubleshooting, you can set the stack limit
back to unlimited by setting the following environment variable:

setenv AMS_JAVA_MEMORY_STACK 1

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1185

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files

Loading .fsdb and .tr0 Files

When EZwave loads .fsdb files or .tr0 HSPICE graph data files, initially only the design
hierarchy is loaded, not the waveforms. This improves the speed of loading these types of files,
and additionally reduces capacity and memory requirements in comparison to earlier releases of
EZwave. Small HSPICE graph data files are loaded in full.
Waveforms are loaded when they are displayed for the first time or when they are located at
hierarchy level. The waveform list panel will only display waveforms that have already been
loaded.

EZwave will display warnings in the following scenarios:

• Save As — Only loaded waveforms will be saved to the new database.

• Create Bus — Only loaded waveforms are displayed for selection as bits to be grouped.
• Compare Waveforms — Only loaded waveforms are displayed for selection.

1186 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting EZwave Launch Issues

Troubleshooting EZwave Launch Issues

Provides troubleshooting information to help you resolve issues related to launching the
EZwave viewer.
Failure to Load EZwave Dynamic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Failure to Launch EZwave in Questa ADMS GUI Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Displaying Results Between Different AMS Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188

Failure to Load EZwave Dynamic Libraries

Describes an error message regarding failure to load EZwave dynamic libraries.
Symptoms
When launching EZwave, if you encounter the following error message:

Cannot load “TclIntegration” or “NativeUtil” library, check user EZwave

user’s manual for possible causes.

An ezwave_error.log or jwdb_error.log file is generated containing more details about this

issue.

Causes
Possible causes are:

• An incorrect or missing libstdc++ library. The error log will report this. Either:
o The AMS installation tree is incorrect
o The library is missing from your system
o The environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH is not set correctly to access it.
• On Linux, some RPM packages are required to properly run EZwave. They could be
missing from your system.
Solution
Use the script ams_dependency_lookup.sh from the AMS installation tree and check if it reports
any error or missing packages.

Failure to Launch EZwave in Questa ADMS GUI

Context
Describes an error message regarding failure to launch EZwave in Questa ADMS GUI Context.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1187

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Displaying Results Between Different AMS Versions

Symptoms
When launching Questa ADMS in interactive (GUI) mode, you may encounter the following
error messages:

- Error: The JWDB (EZwave) server cannot start the Java Virtual
Machine. Refer to EZwave User's Manual for possible causes

- Error: Could not load 'NativeUtil' (or TclIntegration) library,

check EZwave User's manual for possible causes.

Causes
There may be a problem with your AMS installation tree or packages are missing from your
computer. Refer to the section “Failure to Load EZwave Dynamic Libraries” on page 1187 for
further details.

Solution
Possible workaround is:

In certain configurations, it is possible that undocking EZwave from Questa ADMS may work
around the issue of missing packages.

Displaying Results Between Different AMS

Versions
EZwave cannot display results from different AMS versions of a running simulation.
This can happen when you launch an EZwave GUI from one particular environment, for
example an AMS12.1 installation tree, then launch an Eldo simulation in an AMS12.2
environment. In this situation, opening a .wdb file during the simulation is not supported.

To resolve this issue, you must either:

• Wait until the end of the simulation to open the disk database with a later version of
EZwave.
• Ensure that both EZwave's GUI and Server are of the same AMS version.

1188 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Display Issues

Troubleshooting Display Issues

Describes issues with the EZwave display.
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Fonts
The fonts available will vary from system to system, depending on what is installed. To use a
new font in the EZwave viewer, a system administrator must add the font to the system as well
as the font.properties file of the java package.
Saving EZwave files only preserves font changes within the same operating system. This is
because fonts (type, size, and style) vary among different operating systems. Even with the
same operating system, font changes may not be preserved if the fonts are not installed on the
system. If a saved font is not available on a system, the EZwave viewer uses the default font.
Color changes are not affected by different systems and are preserved when saving.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1189

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Logfiles

Troubleshooting Logfiles
EZwave creates a logfile on your system when it is active. The logfile keeps track of the
commands issued during each viewing session. Should you experience difficulty in using
EZwave, you may be asked to locate or provide the logfile from your session when contacting
customer support.
You can view the logfile using any standard text editor.

Logfile Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190

Logfile Locations
Logfile locations vary based on the installation directory structure used by the host application.
Because products using EZwave can send the logfile to a location of their choosing, your
installation directory specification should not carry unique characters that may prohibit the
logfile from being created correctly.

Special characters to be avoided are in the table below:

Table E-2. Characters to Avoid in Logfiles
Symbol Character
* asterisk
^ caret
( open parentheses
) close parentheses
: colon
; semicolon
` accent grave
' single straight quotation marks
" straight quotation marks
= equal sign
, comma
/ forward slash
? question mark
> right angle brackets

1190 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison

Troubleshooting Waveform Comparison

Describes the error messages that may be encountered during a Waveform Comparison.
Solution

Warning: could not compare Issued when a waveform with the same
‘<waveform_name>’, an equivalent name as the test dataset waveform cannot
waveform was not found in the Test
Database
be found in the reference dataset.
Warning: could not compare Issued when trying to compare a
‘<waveform_name1>’ with compound waveform with one that is not
‘<waveform_name2>’, both waveforms are
not compound
compound
Warning: could not compare Issued when trying to compare a bus
‘<waveform_name>’, both waveforms are waveform with one that is not a bus
not bus
Warning: could not compare Issued when applying a delay parameter (-
‘<waveform_name>’, applying delay failed refdelay or -testdelay) within compare
start fails
Warning: ‘<waveform_name>’ has been Issued when an unsupported waveform
ignored during comparison because its type is encountered during the
type is not yet supported. Currently
supported types are: analog continuous
comparison. For more details on currently
waveform (except complex), digital supported waveform types and how they
waveform and bus, records or compound are compared see “Support for Different
waveform of such waveforms. Types of Waveform” on page 228.

Note
Assertions and complex waveforms are not supported in the Waveform Comparison.

System Error Codes

Lists the system error codes that are displayed when system-call errors are encountered.
The table lists the error codes for the Linux operating system. For further details on these error
codes, check your operating system’s user’s manual.
Table E-3. System Error Codes
Error Code Description
1 Operation not permitted
2 No such file or directory
3 No such process
4 Interrupted system call

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1191

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
System Error Codes

Table E-3. System Error Codes (cont.)

Error Code Description
5 I/O error
6 No such device or address
7 Argument list too long
8 Exec format error
9 Bad file number
10 No child processes
11 Try again
12 Out of memory
13 Permission denied
14 Bad address
15 Block device required
16 Device or resource busy
17 File exists
18 Cross-device link
19 No such device
20 Not a directory
21 Is a directory
22 Invalid argument
23 File table overflow
24 Too many open files
25 Not a typewriter
26 Text file busy
27 File too large
28 No space left on device
29 Illegal seek
30 Read-only file system
31 Too many links
32 Broken pipe
33 Math argument out of domain of function
34 Math result not representable

1192 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
System Error Codes

Table E-3. System Error Codes (cont.)

Error Code Description
35 Resource deadlock would occur
36 File name too long
37 No record locks available
38 Function not implemented
39 Directory not empty
40 Too many symbolic links encountered
41 Operation would block
42 No message of desired type
43 Identifier removed
44 Channel number out of range
45 Level 2 not synchronized
46 Level 3 halted
47 Level 3 reset
48 Link number out of range
49 Protocol driver not attached
50 No CSI structure available
51 Level 2 halted
52 Invalid exchange
53 Invalid request descriptor
54 Exchange full
55 No anode
56 Invalid request code
57 Invalid slot
59 Bad font file format
60 Device not a stream
61 No data available
62 Timer expired
63 Out of streams resources
64 Machine is not on the network
65 Package not installed

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1193

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
System Error Codes

Table E-3. System Error Codes (cont.)

Error Code Description
66 Object is remote
67 Link has been severed
68 Advertise error
69 srmount error
70 Communication error on send
71 Protocol error
72 Multihop attempted
73 RFS specific error
74 Not a data message
75 Value too large for defined data type
76 Name not unique on network
77 File descriptor in bad state
78 Remote address changed
79 Can not access a needed shared library
80 Accessing a corrupted shared library
81 .lib section in a.out corrupted
82 Attempting to link in too many shared libraries
83 Cannot exec a shared library directly
84 Illegal byte sequence
85 Interrupted system call should be restarted
86 Streams pipe error
87 Too many users
88 Socket operation on non-socket
89 Destination address required
90 Message too long
91 Protocol wrong type for socket
92 Protocol not available
93 Protocol not supported
94 Socket type not supported
95 Operation not supported on transport endpoint

1194 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Troubleshooting
System Error Codes

Table E-3. System Error Codes (cont.)

Error Code Description
96 Protocol family not supported
97 Address family not supported by protocol
98 Address already in use
99 Cannot assign requested address
100 Network is down
101 Network is unreachable
102 Network dropped connection because of reset
103 Software caused connection abort
104 Connection reset by peer
105 No buffer space available
106 Transport endpoint is already connected
107 Transport endpoint is not connected
108 Cannot send after transport endpoint shutdown
109 Too many references: cannot splice
110 Connection timed out
111 Connection refused
112 Host is down
113 No route to host
114 Operation already in progress
115 Operation now in progress
116 Stale NFS file handle
117 Structure needs cleaning
118 Not a XENIX named type file
119 No XENIX semaphores available
120 Is a named type file
121 Remote I/O error
122 Quota exceeded
123 No medium found
124 Wrong medium type

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1195

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Troubleshooting
Contacting the Customer Support Center

Contacting the Customer Support Center

Mentor software support includes software enhancements, technical support and access to
comprehensive on-line services with Support Center.
Note
If you are using this product as a component within another Mentor Graphics product (for
example, Questa ADMS), refer to the guidelines for support with that product before
contacting Mentor Support.

The Support Center is available here:

https://support.mentor.com

Before contacting support, gather the following information:

• Product and version (Obtained from the Help > About menu item on the main
application window)
• Any test files
• Exact steps or procedures causing the problem
• The two files that the EZwave viewer and JWDB server generate:
o ezwave_error.log
o jwdb_error.log
These files are normally generated at the location where the tool is run (EZwave or the
simulator) and contain information that may be useful in identifying the root of the
problem, particularly if it’s difficult to reproduce.

Training Classes
Classes are held regularly at Mentor Graphics and are available on-site at your premises.
Contact your local sales office or consult www.mentor.com for rates and a current class
schedule.

1196 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Glossary

active
The condition when an area of the application window is able to accept data. For example,
selecting a graph window makes it active to accept waveforms. A plot operation will then display
the waveform in the active graph window. When the File > New menu item is selected, the new
window created is automatically the active graph window.

active cursor
The cursor shown using a thick line. Clicking on any cursor will automatically make it the active
cursor.

active window
The window where waveforms are plotted when not using drag and drop. This is also the
window used for main menu and toolbar commands.

admittance parameters (Y-Parameters)

Admittance (y-parameter) is the ease with which an alternating current flows through an
electronic circuit or system. For any given circuit element, the admittance is the reciprocal of the
impedance (1/Z).

analog waveform
An analog waveform may contain such domains as frequency, voltage and current. Each point on
the domain axis corresponds to a value on the waveform.

area zoom
The action when zooming in both the X and Y directions. Drag the mouse over the waveform
itself to define the rectangular region to zoom to.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1197

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
background
Within the viewer, refers to the base color to be used when printing.

base Y-level line

If more than one Y-level line is associated with a cursor, a “base” Y-level line is assigned. All
other Y-level lines have a delta-Y value calculated from this base line. By default, the waveform
whose name appears at the top of the list in the graph window is the base line. To change the base
line to another Y-level line, right-click the marker of the desired base line and select "Base" Y-
Level Line.

baseline
Baseline is the magnitude reference line at the base magnitude, which is the magnitude of the
portion of a pulse waveform that represents the first nominal state of a pulse (usually referred as
LOW level).

clipboard
The application's internal storage area. This differs from your computer clipboard area.

clipboard (EZwave)
The internal utility that enables you to move objects (such as waveforms, text and other objects)
from one location to another within the viewer using familiar cut, copy and paste operations. The
utility stores the information temporarily for exchange between graph windows, workspaces and
other areas of the viewer.

Clipboard (Windows)
The Windows Clipboard utility enables you to exchange contents within an application or
between shared applications using familiar cut, copy and paste operations. The utility stores the
information temporarily for exchange between shared and local applications.

complex waveform
A complex waveform can be defined as any sound wave which is not sinusoidal. By the theorem
of Fourier, any complex periodic waveform can be decomposed into a series of simple sinusoids
that differ in the three defining attributes of amplitude, frequency, and phase.

compound waveform
A compound waveform can be defined as a waveform that contains the results of several
simulations for the same node. This product can perform operations on either the compound
waveform or the individual elements that make up the compound waveform.

cursor
A special on-screen indicator, such as a vertical line, drawn in the waveform display area to
identify locations or create a point for measurement. The first cursor created is known as the base
(reference) cursor.

dB
A transformation setting for complex waveforms that shows the magnitude of each point of the
complex waveform calculated in decibels (20 * log (|waveform|))

1198 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
enumerated type
In VHDL, an enumeration type declaration defines a type that has a set of user-defined values
consisting of identifiers and character literals. If a waveform is displayed in an enumerated
format, text values are displayed in a box rather than graphical high/low waveform.

export
Within the viewer, the ability to save the active graph window as a .jpg file.

femtosecond (fs)
1/1000 picosecond.

fit row heights

Within the viewer, the ability to change the row heights in the active graph window in order to
see as many rows as possible.

general options
General options control basic functions of the viewer such as background coloring, printing
options and display lists of databases.

graph window
graph windows display waveform data. Waveform data can be spectral data, comma separated
value data, or analog and digital data.

hide
The action that temporarily removes a waveform from visual display yet keeps the data within
the row. The Hide Waveform menu item toggles the display of waveforms in rows carrying
overlaid plots.

imaginary
A transformation setting used with complex waveforms. Imaginary transformations display the
imaginary component of each point in the complex waveform expressed in Rectangular (Real/
Imaginary) form.

impedance parameters (Z-Parameters)

Impedance (z-parameter) is the opposition that an alternate or direct current encounters when it
reaches an electronic component, circuit, or system. Transmission lines have a property known
as “characteristic impedance” (ZO), which is the square root of the inductance/meter divided by
the square root of the capacitance per meter of the line.
The Smith Chart is presented in terms of “normalized impedance”, where the actual impedance
is divided by the ZO of the particular line being used. In this way, you can use a single Smith
Chart calibration for all possible line characteristic impedances.

input unit
The unit of measure for a waveform. The unit of the result waveform is same as the unit of the
input waveform. By default, the unit of measure is set globally, however, setting the unit locally
will override the default setting.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1199

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
jpg
JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, which is the name of the committee that
created a way to compress the file size of photographic, true-color images without diminishing
the quality of the image. JPEG is generally used for photographic images. These image files use
the .JPEG and .JPG extensions.

JPEG (jpg)
JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group which is the name of the committee that
created a way to compress the file size of photographic, true-color images without diminishing
the quality of the image. JPEG is generally used for photographic images and these image files
use the .JPEG and .JPG extensions.

JWDB
JWDB stands for Joint Waveform DataBase. This is the default database format for Mentor
Graphics simulation applications.

keyboard accelerators
Keyboard accelerators allow you to select menu items in the Graphical user interface (GUI)
without using a mouse. If a keyboard accelerator is available for a menu item, it is shown next to
the item on the menu. For example, Ctrl+C is the keyboard accelerator for the Copy menu item
and is the keyboard accelerator for the Paste menu item. Keyboard accelerators are different
from keyboard shortcuts. Sometimes, keyboard accelerators are referred to as Hot keys.

keyboard access keys

Keyboard shortcuts allow you to select menu items in the Graphical user interface (GUI) without
using a mouse. The letter for the keyboard shortcut is underlined within each menu and item. For
example, capital F is the keyboard shortcut for the file menu. Typing ALT + F on your keyboard
will display the file menu for item selection.

layout
The way the application displays x-axis settings and waveform name displays. Within the
EZwave Display Preferences dialog, click Layout to access these settings.

magnitude
The transformation applied to a complex waveform that shows the square root of (re2 + im2) for
each point in the complex waveform.

mouse strokes
Mouse Strokes provide you with a convenient way to perform common tasks by allowing you to
draw shapes using the mouse. For example, drawing the letter “D” deletes the current set of
selected objects. Mouse strokes are usually performed with a three button mouse using the
middle mouse button to make the stroke.

new rows
Within the active graph window, new rows are created when a waveform is dragged to any
location above, below or between existing rows.

1200 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
over-axis zooming
The action that uses the mouse pointer to drag over the X or y-axis to identify the region for
zoom.

overlaid plots
The ability to plot multiple waveforms on top of each other in the same row within the graph
window. You may plot analog and digital waveforms overlaid. Existing digital waveforms rows
cannot accept overlaid plots.

png
PNG stands for Portable Network Graphics. It is an open, extensible image format with lossless
compression. These image files use the .PNG extension

phase
The phase of each point in the complex waveform in Polar form. All phase angles are restricted
between -180 and +180 degrees (-pi radians and +pi radians).

property
A property is a name/value pair, where the value can be a number or a string. Waveform
Databases and individual waveforms may have property lists containing the individual
properties. An example of a waveform database property is timestep:1.

question mark
The question mark is a mouse stroke action that opens the About Mouse Strokes Information
Box listing the supported mouse strokes for this application.

radix
A quantity whose successive integral powers are the implicit multipliers of the sequence of digits
that represent a number of some positional-notation systems. Radix levels used with buses
include Octal, Hexadecimal, Binary, Decimal, and Ascii.

right-click
The right mouse key serves an important purpose with this application. A number of context
sensitive popup menus appear by pressing the right mouse key. In this help system, references to
“right-click” indicate this activity.

real
A transformation setting for complex waveforms. The real component of each point in the
complex waveform expressed in Rectangular (Real/Imaginary) form.
refresh
The refresh process forces a complete repaint of all windows within an application.

scale table
A scale table contains a matrix of the unit of measurement used by the waveform. For example,
this may be in time units, frequency units, voltage, or other measurement. This table contains the
unit name and the suffix of the scale unit to be used as the base. It also contains a list of the units
and their scaling relationship to each other.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1201

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
step waveform
A waveform that, from a viewing perspective, approximates a Heaviside (unit step) function.

taskbar
The area directly above the status bar in the application window that contains Graph Window
buttons for selecting the active graph window.

tooltip
A tooltip is a small window that contains descriptive text for the item under the mouse pointer.

topline
Topline is the magnitude reference line at the top magnitude, which is the magnitude of the
portion of a pulse waveform that represents the second nominal state of a pulse (usually referred
as HIGH level).

true
Having a Boolean value of one (1).

undo zoom
Reverses the previous zoom action. Undo zoom will return the display to the previously selected
magnification.

Verilog
Notational conventions used by the Waveform Calculator based on the Verilog hardware
description language.

VHDL
Notational conventions used by the Waveform Calculator based on VHDL (VHSIC Hardware
Description Language).

view all
The action where the magnification is reset to view all of the data in a window or a row within
the active graph window.

waveform
A waveform is a collection of values along a time continuum, frequency, or other domain axis.
The axis is referred to as the domain, and the values positioned along the axis are the range. This
is really a logical view, as some waveform events, that is those that are part of a functional
waveform, may be generated by a function (e.g. sin(t)).

waveform database
A waveform database contains, data of one or more individual waveforms.

workspace
The tabbed area within the application window that holds graph windows.

X Axis
Commonly the horizontal axis used to display time or distance. In this product, the X Axis is
used for over-axis zooming.

1202 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Y Axis
Used with analog waveforms and complex waveforms. With complex waveforms the Y Axis
displays transformations of dB, Magnitude, Real, Imaginary, Phase and Continuous Phase. With
multiple analog waveform plots (overlaid plots), you may select to have each waveform
displayed on its own y-axis within the row.

Y-level line
A Y-level line is a horizontal line that marks the intersection of a cursor and a waveform. Right-
click on a cursor and select Y-Level Line from the popup menu to show the Y-level line. See
also base Y-level line.

zooming
The action that enlarges the visual display in the active graph window. For example, zooming
between cursors adjusts the display to view between the two cursors that are farthest apart in the
active graph window. See also area zoom and over-axis zooming.

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1203

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
1204 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 Index

compare savelog Tcl command, 997

Index

—A— compare saverules Tcl command, 998

Access keys, 70 compare start Tcl command, 999
Add Clock dialog, 408 Comparison Options Dialog, 416
add wave command, 966 Comparison rules, 242
add wave Tcl command, 966 Constellation Diagram Dialog, 590
add workspace Tcl command, 973 Convolution Dialog, 592
Aligning Y-Axes, 134 Correlogram Method, 380
Application COU files, 46
application window, 68 Create bus, 269
graphic window, 87, 92 Create Bus Dialog, 426
menu bar, 70 Cross Correlation Dialog, 594
overview CS V files, 46
application window, 68 Cursors
status bar, 90 menu
toolbar, 81 popup, 101
waveform list panel, 82 popup menu, 101
waveform list popup menu, 103 selecting a base cursor, 164
workspace and workspace tabs, 89, 90, 110 Cursors Dialog, 463
ASCII files, 47
Auto Correlation Dialog, 583 —D—
Automatic Reload Dialog, 461 Data Format Dialog, 465
Axis Properties Dialog, 414 dataset alias Tcl command, 1001
dataset analysis Tcl command, 1002
—B— dataset clear Tcl command, 1003
batch_mode Tcl command, 974 dataset close Tcl command, 975, 1004
—C— dataset info Tcl command, 1006
CDF Legend Options Dialog Box, 499 dataset list Tcl command, 1007
CDF Measures Options Dialog Box, 497 dataset merge Tcl command, 1008, 1010
CDF Plot Options, 495 dataset mergewaveforms Tcl command, 1010
Chip Transform Dialog box, 586 dataset open Tcl command, 1012
compare add Tcl command, 976 dataset ovd Tcl command, 1013
compare clock Tcl command, 981 dataset rename Tcl command, 1017
compare configure Tcl command, 983 dataset save Tcl command, 1018, 1021
compare end Tcl command, 987 dataset savewaveforms Tcl command, 1021
compare info Tcl command, 988 dataset supported Tcl command, 1025
compare list Tcl command, 989 delete wave Tcl command, 1028
compare options Tcl command, 990 Dialog
compare run Tcl command, 996 Add Clock, 408
compare savelog command, 997 Auto Correlation, 583

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1205

 Automatic Reload, 461 Spectrum Measurement Tool, 626
Axis Properties, 414 Tcl File Viewer, 632
Chip Transform, 586 Text Annotation, 487, 514
Comparison Options, 416 Top Noise, 634
Constellation Diagram, 590 Transformations, 488
Convolution, 592 Waveform, 491
Create Bus, 426 Waveform Calculator, 528
Cross Correlation, 594 Waveform Compare, 492
Cursors, 463 Waveform List, 493
Data Format, 465 Waveform Names Display, 574
Edit Digital Transformation, 437 Waveform Properties, 576
Event Search Tool, 439 Windowing Transform, 636
EVM and BER, 596 Workspace, 494
Eye Diagram, 598 DO files, 47
Eye Diagram Tool, 441 dofile Tcl command, 1029
Eye Mask, 453
Fast Fourier Transform Tool, 600 —E—
Filter, 532 Edit Digital Transformation Dialog, 437
Filters Setup, 549 environment Tcl command, 1030
Find Tool, 535 evalExpression Tcl command, 1031
Foreign Databases, 467 Event search, 192
General, 417, 468 Event Search Tool Dialog, 439
Harmonic Distortion, 605 EVM and BER Dialog, 596
Harmonics Meter, 607 examine Tcl command, 1032
Histogram, 611 exit Tcl command, 1034
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform, 613 Eye Diagram Dialog, 598
Layout, 473 Eye Diagram Tool Dialog, 441
Look and Feel, 474 Eye Mask Dialog, 453
Measurement Tool, 542 EZwave
Mouse Pointer, 475 installation, 54
Multiple Run, 476 invocation, 41
Parameter Analyzer Tool, 546 —F—
Parameter Table, 550 Fast Fourier Transform Tool Dialog, 600
Phase Noise, 615 FFT, 352
Power Spectral Density, 617 File types, 45
PSS Residue, 621 Filter Dialog Box, 532
RF, 481 Filters Setup Dialog, 549
Row, 482 find analogs Tcl command, 1035, 1036
Save, 484, 486 find digitals Tcl command, 1037
Save As, 562 find nets Tcl command, 1038
Save Windows, 565 find signals Tcl command, 1038
Saving Multiple Databases, 398 Find Tool Dialog, 535
Select Hierarchy, 566 Foreign Databases Dialog, 467
Select Waveforms, 568 FSDB files, 47
Signal to Noise Ratio, 623 Fully qualified names, 953

1206 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

—G— edit menu, 71
General Dialog, 417, 468 file menu, 70
getactivecursortime Tcl command, 1039 format menu, 75
Getting started help menu, 80
application window, 68 menu bar, 70
Graph window tools menu, 76
application window, 68 view menu, 74
graph window menus, 92 window menu, 79
graph window popup menu, 93 MGC database files, 45
graphic window, 87, 92 Mixed signal
row popup menu, 93 plotting, 132
status bar, 89 Mouse Pointer Dialog, 475
waveform shortcut menus, 110 Multiple Run Dialog, 476
Xand Y-Axis shortcut menus, 96
Graphical user interface (GUI) —N—
Nutmeg files, 46
application window, 68
—H— —O—
OVD files, 46
Harmonic Distortion Dialog, 605
Harmonics Meter Dialog, 607 —P—
Help menu, 80 Parameter Analyzer Tool Dialog, 546
Histogram Dialog, 611 Parameter Table Dialog Box, 550
HSPICE files, 46 Periodogram Method, 381
HSPICE/HyperLynx output file, 47 Phase Noise Dialog, 615
Plotting mixed signals, 132
—I—
Plotting rules, 132
ICX Charter waveform files, 46
Popup menus
Installation
database, 103
EZwave, 54
delete command, 111
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Dialog, 613
graph window menus, 92
Invocation, 41
graph window popup menu, 93
—K— row shortcut menu, 93
Keyboard shortcuts waveform list popup menus, 103
menus, 70 waveform list waveform, 103
waveform popup menus, 110
—L— workspace, 89, 90, 110
Layout Dialog, 473 X and Y-Axis menu, 96
Look and Feel Dialog, 474 Power Spectral Density Dialog, 617
—M— precision Tcl command, 1040
Manually comparing waveforms, 233 printenv Tcl command, 1041
Marching waveforms, 468, 642 Procedures
Measurement Tool Dialog, 542 adding waveforms to the Graph window,
Menus 120
application window, 68 create a bus, 269
cursor menu, 77 perform a FFT, 352

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1207

 plot a waveform using drag-and-drop, 122 batch_mode, 974
plot analog and digital waveforms, 132 bloc, 975
save and restoring graph windows, 390 compare add, 976
saving multiple databases, 398 compare clock, 981
transform analog waveform to digital, 270 compare configure, 983
use the measurement tool with compound compare end, 987
waveforms, 274 compare info, 988
PSF files, 46 compare list, 989
PSS Residue Dialog, 621 compare options, 990
compare run, 996
—Q— compare savelog, 997
quit Tcl command, 1042 compare saverules, 998
QWAVEDB files, 47 compare start, 999
—R— dataset alias, 1001
radix define Tcl command, 1045 dataset analysis, 1002
radix delete Tcl command, 1047 dataset clear, 1003
radix list Tcl command, 1048 dataset close, 1004
radix names Tcl command, 1049 dataset info, 1006
radix signal Tcl command, 1050 dataset list, 1007
radix Tcl command, 1043, 1045, 1047, 1048, dataset merge, 1008, 1010
1049, 1050 dataset mergewaveforms, 1010
RF Dialog, 481 dataset open, 1012
Row Dialog, 482 dataset ovd, 1013
dataset rename, 1017
—S— dataset save, 1018, 1021
Save As Dialog, 562 dataset savewaveforms, 1021
Save Dialog, 484 dataset supported, 1025
Save Window Dialog, 486 delete wave, 1028
Save Windows Dialog, 565 dofile, 1029
Saving and restoring sessions, 390 environment, 1030
Saving graph windows, 390 evalExpression, 1031
Saving post processed waveform, 396 examine, 1032
Saving waveform databases, 398 exit, 1034
Select Hierarchy Dialog, 566 find analogs, 1035, 1036
Select Waveforms Dialog, 568 find digitals, 1037
setenv Tcl command, 1052 find nets, 1038
Signal to Noise Ratio Dialog, 623 find signals, 1038
Spectrum Measurement Tool Dialog, 626 getactivecursortime, 1039
SPICE files, 47 precision, 1040
Status bar, 90 printenv, 1041
quit, 1042
—T— radix, 1043, 1045, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050
Taskbar, 89, 90, 110 radix define, 1045
Tcl commands, 944 radix delete, 1047
add wave, 966 radix list, 1048
add workspace, 973

1208 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

 radix names, 1049 wave zoomlast, 1120
radix signal, 1050 wave zoomout, 1121
setenv, 1052 wave zoomrange, 1122
unsetenv, 1053 wfc, 1123
wave activecursor, 1054 write jpeg, 1125
wave activewindow, 1055 write png, 1126
wave activeworkspace, 1056 write wave, 1127
wave addannotation, 1057 Tcl File Viewer Dialog, 632
wave addaxisdeltamarker, 1059 Tcl files, 47
wave addcursor, 1061 Text Annotation Dialog, 487, 514
wave adddeltamarker, 1062 Toolbar, 81
wave addline, 1064 application window, 68
wave addmarker, 1066 Tools
wave addproperty, 1067 creating a bus, 269
wave addwindow, 1068 event search tool, 192
wave addworkspace, 1069 Top Noise Dialog, 634
wave cdf, 1070 Transform ations Dialog, 488
wave closewindow, 1075 Transformation
wave colortheme, 1076, 1077 analog to digital, 270
wave cursortime, 1078 Transformations Dialog, 488
wave deletecursor, 1079
wave difference, 1080 —U—
wave displayed, 1081 unsetenv Tcl command, 1053
wave exists, 1082 —V—
wave ezwave_title, 1084 VCD files, 46
wave launchfolder, 1095
wave listworkspace, 1096 —W—
wave loadbindings, 1097 wave activecursor Tcl command, 1054
wave lockcursor, 1098 wave activewindow Tcl command, 1055
wave names, 1099 wave activeworkspace Tcl command, 1056
wave refresh, 1104 wave addannotation Tcl command, 1057
wave rowfit, 1105 wave addaxisdeltamarker Tcl command, 1059
wave runindexlist, 1106 wave addcursor Tcl command, 1061
wave runparameters, 1107 wave adddeltamarker Tcl command, 1062
wave runparametervalue, 1108 wave addline Tcl command, 1064
wave show, 1109, 1110, 1111 wave addmarker Tcl command, 1066
wave showgridlines, 1110 wave addproperty Tcl command, 1067
wave showzerolevels, 1111 wave addwindow command, 1068
wave tandem mode, 1112 wave addwindow Tcl command, 1068
wave tile, 1113 wave addworkspace Tcl command, 1069
wave windowlist, 1114 wave cdf Tcl command, 1070
wave xaxis, 1115 wave closewindow Tcl command, 1075
wave yaxis, 1116 wave colortheme Tcl command, 1076, 1077
wave zoomfull, 1118 wave cursortime Tcl command, 1078
wave zoomin, 1119 wave deletecursor Tcl command, 1079

EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2 1209

wave difference Tcl command, 1080 application window, 68
wave displayed Tcl command, 1081 waveform list popup menus, 103
wave exists Tcl command, 1082 Waveform Names Display Dialog, 574
wave ezwave_title Tcl command, 1084 Waveform plotting rules, 132
wave launchfolder Tcl command, 1095 Waveform Properties Dialog, 576
wave listworkspace Tcl command, 1096 Waveforms
wave loadbindings Tcl command, 1097 adding waveforms to the graph window,
wave lockcursor Tcl command, 1098 120
wave names Tcl command, 1099 analog waveform comparison algorithm,
wave refresh Tcl command, 1104 253
wave rowfit Tcl command, 1105 comparing
wave runindexlist Tcl command, 1106 manually, 233
wave runparameters Tcl command, 1107 using the wizard, 228
wave runparametervalue Tcl command, 1108 comparison
wave show Tcl command, 1109, 1110, 1111 comparison rules, 242
wave showgridlines Tcl command, 1110 options, 244
wave showzerolevels Tcl command, 1111 reports, 240
wave tandem mode Tcl command, 1112 Tolerance options, 249
wave tile Tcl command, 1113 viewing results, 237
wave windowlist Tcl command, 1114 Waveform Compare Wizard, 228
wave xaxis Tcl command, 1115 waveform list panel, 82
wave yaxis Tcl command, 1116 wfc Tcl command, 1123
wave zoomfull Tcl command, 1118 Window
wave zoomin Tcl command, 1119 application window, 68
wave zoomlast Tcl command, 1120 graphic window, 87, 92
wave zoomout Tcl command, 1121 Window menu, 79
wave zoomrange Tcl command, 1122 Windowing Transform Dialog, 636
Waveform calculator WLF files, 46
ASCII Workspace
saving a post processed waveform, 396 application window, 68
saving a WDB as an ASCII file, 402 taskbar, 89, 90, 110
built-in functions, 396 workspace and workspace tabs, 89, 90, 110
histogram, 611 Workspace Dialog, 494
performing a FFT, 352 write jpeg Tcl command, 1125
saving post processed waveform, 396 write png Tcl command, 1126
using the waveform calculator, 113, 304, write wave Tcl command, 1127
545, 582
Waveform Calculator Dialog, 528 —Y—
Waveform Compare Dialog, 492 Y-Axis
Waveform Compare Wizard, 228 setting as reference, 134
Waveform comparison
viewing results, 237
Waveform Dialog, 491
Waveform List Dialog, 493
Waveform list panel, 82

1210 EZwave™ User's and Reference Manual, 2019.2

 Third-Party Information
Provides information on open source and third-party software that may be included in the EZwave product.

• Refer to Third-Party Software for AMS Products.

Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
 End-User License Agreement
The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at:
www.mentor.com/eula

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMER’S COMPLETE
AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”)

This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively “Products”)
between the company acquiring the Products (“Customer”), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding
quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (“Mentor Graphics”). Except for license
agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized
representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties’ entire understanding
relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these
terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all
accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.

1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT.

1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customer’s appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor
Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (each an “Order”), each Order will constitute a contract between
Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement,
any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not those documents are referenced on the Order. Any
additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented in any electronic portal or automated order
management system, whether or not required to be electronically accepted, will not be effective unless agreed in writing and
physically signed by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics.

1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice.
Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month
or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes
or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice. Unless timely provided with a
valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all
applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax, consumption tax and service tax. Customer will make all
payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by
Customer hereunder will be Customer’s sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or
make payments on Customer’s behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event
of default.

1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2010), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered
electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a
security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and
Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or
perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics’ delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customer’s provision
of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address.

2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any
updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation, setup files and design data (“Software”) are copyrighted, trade secret and
confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not
expressly granted by this Agreement. Except for Software that is embeddable (“Embedded Software”), which is licensed pursuant to
separate embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of
applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form
(except as provided in Subsection 4.2); (b) for Customer’s internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the
computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer
may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as
the employee’s residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employee’s primary place of employment is the site where the
Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics’ standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid
or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to
execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be
technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including
eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer provides any
feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products, whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services,
evaluating Products, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made
by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics’ sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics.
3. BETA CODE.

3.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (which may be either alpha or beta,
collectively “Beta Code”), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics’ explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics’
authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to
test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics may
choose, at its sole discretion, not to release Beta Code commercially in any form.

3.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal
conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customer’s use of the
Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customer’s evaluation and testing,
Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and
recommended improvements.

3.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and
concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta
testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments
that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on
Customer’s feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and
interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 3.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement.

4. RESTRICTIONS ON USE.

4.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices
and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall
remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Except for Embedded Software that has been embedded in executable
code form in Customer’s product(s), Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of
Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon
request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customer’s employees and on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of
confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person
permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics
written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized
disclosure or use. Customer acknowledges that Software provided hereunder may contain source code which is proprietary and
its confidentiality is of the highest importance and value to Mentor Graphics. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics
may be seriously harmed if such source code is disclosed in violation of this Agreement. Except as otherwise permitted for
purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble,
disassemble, reverse-compile, or reverse-engineer any Product, or in any way derive any source code from Software that is not
provided to Customer in source code form. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software
(collectively “Files”), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (“SVRF”) and Tcl
Verification Format (“TVF”) which are Mentor Graphics’ trade secret and proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules,
constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding
Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as
Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer
may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use
Products or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way
competitive with Products, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark.

4.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software
errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use, or as permitted for Embedded Software under separate
embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source
code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customer’s employees or on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in
any manner except to support this authorized use.

4.3. Customer agrees that it will not subject any Product to any open source software (“OSS”) license that conflicts with this
Agreement or that does not otherwise apply to such Product.

4.4. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense, or otherwise transfer the
Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (“Attempted Transfer”), without Mentor Graphics’ prior written consent and
payment of Mentor Graphics’ then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor
Graphics’ prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics’ option, result in the
immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms of this Agreement,
including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customer’s permitted successors in
interest and assigns.

4.5. The provisions of this Section 4 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

5. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and
technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics’ then
current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/supportterms.

6. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Products may contain OSS or code distributed under a proprietary third party license agreement, to
which additional rights or obligations (“Third Party Terms”) may apply. Please see the applicable Product documentation (including
license files, header files, read-me files or source code) for details. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement
 (including any addenda) and the Third Party Terms, the Third Party Terms will control solely with respect to the OSS or third party
code. The provisions of this Section 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

7. LIMITED WARRANTY.

7.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed,
will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not
warrant that Products will meet Customer’s requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The
warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must
notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty
applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a)
Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty
shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification, improper installation or Customer is not in
compliance with this Agreement. MENTOR GRAPHICS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMER’S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON
RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF
WHICH ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.”

7.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS
LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO
PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY.

8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OR ITS LICENSORS’ LIABILITY UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8
SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

9. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.

9.1. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics has no control over the testing of Customer’s products, or the specific
applications and use of Products. Mentor Graphics and its licensors shall not be liable for any claim or demand made against
Customer by any third party, except to the extent such claim is covered under Section 10.

9.2. In the event that a third party makes a claim against Mentor Graphics arising out of the use of Customer’s products, Mentor
Graphics will give Customer prompt notice of such claim. At Customer’s option and expense, Customer may take sole control
of the defense and any settlement of such claim. Customer WILL reimburse and hold harmless Mentor Graphics for any
LIABILITY, damages, settlement amounts, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by or awarded
against Mentor Graphics or its licensors in connection with such claims.

9.3. The provisions of this Section 9 shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.

10. INFRINGEMENT.

10.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States,
Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired
by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics
will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action. Customer understands and
agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics’ obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics
promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the
action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action.

10.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 10.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify the Product so
that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the
Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.

10.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any
product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of
other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that
Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor
Graphics’ licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics’ customers; (h) OSS, except to the extent that
the infringement is directly caused by Mentor Graphics’ modifications to such OSS; or (i) infringement by Customer that is
deemed willful. In the case of (i), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs
related to the action.

10.4. THIS SECTION 10 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR
GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS, AND CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, FOR DEFENSE,
 SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT
OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.

11. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION.

11.1. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized
term. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon
written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality
provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or
winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any
provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement
upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement
or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customer’s obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to
the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination.

11.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement, Customer shall ensure that
all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in
Customer’s possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business
days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form.

12. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and European Union (“E.U.”) and United States
(“U.S.”) government agencies, which prohibit export, re-export or diversion of certain products, information about the products, and
direct or indirect products thereof, to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export or re-export Products
in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local, E.U. and U.S. government agencies. If Customer
wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any E.U., U.S. or other applicable export restrictions, including
without limitation the U.S. International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or special controls under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel, in advance of each instance of disclosure, that such information
is subject to such export restrictions.

13. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. The parties agree that all Software is
commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to U.S. FAR 48
CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. government or a U.S.
government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, which shall supersede any
conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory
federal laws.

14. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and
other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein.

15. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during
Customer’s normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customer’s
software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customer’s
compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FlexNet (or successor
product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics’ request. Customer shall make records available in
electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of
any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information
gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights
under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 15 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

16. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual
property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U.S. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be
resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of
Oregon, U.S., if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or
South America or Japan, and the laws of Japan if Customer is located in Japan. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin,
Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply, or the Tokyo District Court when the laws of Japan apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all
disputes in Asia (excluding Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a
single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (“SIAC”) to be conducted in the
English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be
incorporated by reference in this section. Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics’ right to bring an action (including for
example a motion for injunctive relief) against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customer’s place of business is located. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement.

17. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect.

18. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties’ entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior
or contemporaneous agreements. Any translation of this Agreement is provided to comply with local legal requirements only. In the
event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this Agreement shall govern to the extent
not prohibited by local law in the applicable jurisdiction. This Agreement may only be modified in writing, signed by an authorized
representative of each party. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver
or excuse.

Rev. 170330, Part No. 270941